RPGLE

򔻐򗗠򙳰
ERserver
iSeries
WebSphere® Development Studio
ILE RPG Reference
Version 5
SC09-2508-04
򔻐򗗠򙳰
ERserver
iSeries
WebSphere® Development Studio
ILE RPG Reference
Version 5
SC09-2508-04
Note!
Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read the general information
under “Notices” on page 767.
Fifth Edition (August 2002)

| This edition applies to Version 5, Release 2, Modification Level 0, of IBM® WebSphere® Development Studio for
| iSeries (5722-WDS), ILE RPG compiler, and to all subsequent releases and modifications until otherwise indicated in
| new editions. This edition applies only to reduced instruction set computer (RISC) systems.
This edition replaces SC09-2508-03.
Order publications through your IBM representative or the IBM branch office serving your locality. Publications are
not stocked at the address given below.
| IBM welcomes your comments. You can send your comments to:
| IBM Canada Ltd. Laboratory
| Information Development
| 8200 Warden Avenue
| Markham, Ontario, Canada L6G 1C7
| You can also send your comments by facsimile (attention: RCF Coordinator), or you can send your comments
electronically to IBM. See “How to Send Your Comments” for a description of the methods.
When you send information to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute the information in any
way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1994, 2002. All rights reserved.
US Government Users Restricted Rights – Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract
with IBM Corp.
Contents
About This Reference . . . . . . . . xi Initialization Subroutine . . . . . . . . . 28
Who Should Use This Reference . . . . . . . xi Ending a Program without a Primary File . . . 30
Prerequisite and Related Information . . . . . . xii Program Control of File Processing . . . . . 31
How to Send Your Comments . . . . . . . . xii
| What's New This Release? . . . . . . . . . xii Chapter 4. RPG IV Indicators . . . . . 35
| Changes to this Reference Since V5R1 . . . . . xv Indicators Defined on RPG IV Specifications . . . 35
Overflow Indicators . . . . . . . . . . 35
Part 1. RPG IV Concepts . . . . . . 1 Record Identifying Indicators . . . . . . . 36
Control Level Indicators (L1-L9) . . . . . . 37
Field Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Chapter 1. Symbolic Names and Resulting Indicators . . . . . . . . . . 46
Reserved Words . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Indicators Not Defined on the RPG IV Specifications 47
Symbolic Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 External Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Array Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Internal Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Conditional Compile Names . . . . . . . . 4 Return Indicator (RT) . . . . . . . . . . 49
Data Structure Names . . . . . . . . . . 4 Using Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
EXCEPT Names . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 File Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Field Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Field Record Relation Indicators . . . . . . 50
KLIST Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Function Key Indicators . . . . . . . . . 53
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Halt Indicators (H1-H9) . . . . . . . . . 53
Named Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Indicators Conditioning Calculations . . . . . 54
PLIST Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Indicators Used in Expressions . . . . . . . 57
Prototype Names . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Indicators Conditioning Output . . . . . . 57
Record Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Indicators Referred to As Data . . . . . . . . 60
Subroutine Names . . . . . . . . . . . 5 *IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Table Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 *INxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
RPG IV Words with Special Functions/Reserved Additional Rules . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Summary of Indicators . . . . . . . . . . 62
User Date Special Words . . . . . . . . . . 7
Rules for User Date . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Chapter 5. File and Program
PAGE, PAGE1-PAGE7 . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Exception/Errors . . . . . . . . . . 65
Rules for PAGE, PAGE1-PAGE7 . . . . . . . 8
File Exception/Errors . . . . . . . . . . . 65
File Information Data Structure . . . . . . . 65
Chapter 2. Compiler Directives . . . . 11 File Exception/Error Subroutine (INFSR) . . . 79
/FREE... /END-FREE (Positions 7-11). . . . . . 11 Program Exception/Errors . . . . . . . . . 82
/TITLE (Positions 7-12) . . . . . . . . . . 11 Program Status Data Structure . . . . . . . 83
/EJECT (Positions 7-12) . . . . . . . . . . 11 Program Exception/Error Subroutine . . . . . 91
/SPACE (Positions 7-12) . . . . . . . . . . 12
/COPY or /INCLUDE. . . . . . . . . . . 12
Chapter 6. Procedures and
Results of the /COPY or /INCLUDE during
Compile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 subprocedures . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Nested /COPY or /INCLUDE . . . . . . . 14 Subprocedure Definition . . . . . . . . . . 94
Using /COPY, /INCLUDE in Source Files with Procedure Interface Definition . . . . . . . 95
Embedded SQL . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Return Values . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Conditional Compilation Directives . . . . . . 15 Scope of Definitions . . . . . . . . . . 96
Defining Conditions . . . . . . . . . . 15 Subprocedure Calculations . . . . . . . . 97
Predefined Conditions . . . . . . . . . . 16 NOMAIN Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Condition Expressions . . . . . . . . . . 17 Mixing Main Procedures and Exported
Testing Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Subprocedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
The /EOF Directive . . . . . . . . . . 19 Implicit Opening of Files and Locking of Data
Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Implicit Closing of Files and Unlocking of Data
Chapter 3. Program Cycle . . . . . . 21
Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
General RPG IV Program Cycle. . . . . . . . 21
Initialization of Global Data . . . . . . . 101
Detailed RPG IV Program Cycle . . . . . . . 22
Possible Problems . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Detailed RPG IV Object Program Cycle . . . . 24
Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 101
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994, 2002 iii

Subprocedures and Subroutines . . . . . . . 101 Sorting Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Sorting using part of the array as a key . . . 161
Chapter 7. General File Array Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . 103 Editing Entire Arrays . . . . . . . . . . 162
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Primary/Secondary Multi-file Processing . . . . 103
LOOKUP with One Table . . . . . . . . 163
Multi-file Processing with No Match Fields . . 103
LOOKUP with Two Tables . . . . . . . . 163
Multi-file Processing with Match Fields. . . . 103
Specifying the Table Element Found in a
File Translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
LOOKUP Operation . . . . . . . . . . 164
Specifying File Translation . . . . . . . . 112
Translating One File or All Files . . . . . . 112
Translating More Than One File . . . . . . 113 Chapter 10. Data Types and Data
Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Internal and External Formats . . . . . . . . 167
Part 2. Definitions . . . . . . . . 115
Internal Format. . . . . . . . . . . . 168
External Format . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Chapter 8. Defining Data and Character Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Prototypes . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Character Format . . . . . . . . . . . 170
General Considerations . . . . . . . . . . 117 Indicator Format . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Scope of Definitions . . . . . . . . . . 118 Graphic Format . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Storage of Definitions. . . . . . . . . . 119 UCS-2 Format . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Standalone Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Variable-Length Character, Graphic and UCS-2
Variable Initialization . . . . . . . . . . 120 Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Conversion between Character, Graphic and
Literals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 UCS-2 Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Named Constants . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Alternate Collating Sequence . . . . . . . 182
Figurative Constants . . . . . . . . . . 126 Numeric Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Data Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Binary Format . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
| Qualifying Data Structure Names. . . . . . 129 Float Format . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
| Array Data Structures . . . . . . . . . 129 Integer Format . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Defining Data Structure Parameters in a Packed-Decimal Format . . . . . . . . . 187
Prototype or Procedure Interface . . . . . . 130 Unsigned Format . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Defining Data Structure Subfields . . . . . 130 Zoned-Decimal Format . . . . . . . . . 189
Special Data Structures . . . . . . . . . 132 Considerations for Using Numeric Formats . . 190
Data Structure Examples . . . . . . . . 134 Representation of Numeric Formats . . . . . 191
Prototypes and Parameters . . . . . . . . . 144 Date Data Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Prototypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Separators . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Prototyped Parameters . . . . . . . . . 145 Initialization. . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Procedure Interface . . . . . . . . . . 147 Time Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Separators . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Chapter 9. Using Arrays and Tables 149 Initialization. . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Arrays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 *JOBRUN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Array Name and Index . . . . . . . . . 150 Timestamp Data Type . . . . . . . . . . 197
The Essential Array Specifications . . . . . 150 Separators . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Coding a Run-Time Array . . . . . . . . 150 Initialization. . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Loading a Run-Time Array . . . . . . . . 150 Object Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Coding a Compile-Time Array. . . . . . . 152 Where You Can Specify an Object Field . . . 198
Loading a Compile-Time Array . . . . . . 152 Basing Pointer Data Type . . . . . . . . . 199
Coding a Prerun-Time Array . . . . . . . 154 Setting a Basing Pointer . . . . . . . . . 201
Example of Coding Arrays . . . . . . . . 154 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Loading a Prerun-Time Array . . . . . . . 155 Procedure Pointer Data Type . . . . . . . . 205
Sequence Checking for Character Arrays . . . 156 Database Null Value Support . . . . . . . . 206
Initializing Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 User Controlled Support for Null-Capable Fields
Run-Time Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . 156 and Key Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Compile-Time and Prerun-Time Arrays . . . . 156 Input-Only Support for Null-Capable Fields . . 211
Defining Related Arrays . . . . . . . . . . 157 ALWNULL(*NO) . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Searching Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Error Handling for Database Data Mapping Errors 212
Searching an Array Without an Index . . . . 159
Searching an Array with an Index . . . . . 159 Chapter 11. Editing Numeric Fields 213
Using Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Edit Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Specifying an Array in Calculations . . . . . 160 Simple Edit Codes. . . . . . . . . . . 214
iv ILE RPG Reference

Combination Edit Codes. . . . . . . . . 214 NOMAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
User-Defined Edit Codes . . . . . . . . 216 OPENOPT (*NOINZOFL | *INZOFL) . . . . 252
Editing Considerations . . . . . . . . . 216 OPTIMIZE(*NONE | *BASIC | *FULL) . . . 252
Summary of Edit Codes . . . . . . . . . 216 OPTION(*{NO}XREF *{NO}GEN *{NO}SECLVL
Edit Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 *{NO}SHOWCPY *{NO}EXPDDS *{NO}EXT
How to Code an Edit Word . . . . . . . 220 *{NO}SHOWSKP) *{NO}SRCSTMT)
Parts of an Edit Word . . . . . . . . . 220 *{NO}DEBUGIO) . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Summary of Coding Rules for Edit Words . . . 224 PRFDTA(*NOCOL | *COL) . . . . . . . 253
Editing Externally Described Files . . . . . . 225 SRTSEQ(*HEX | *JOB | *JOBRUN |
*LANGIDUNQ | *LANGIDSHR |
’sort-table-name’) . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Part 3. Specifications . . . . . . . 227 TEXT(*SRCMBRTXT | *BLANK | ’description’) 254
THREAD(*SERIALIZE) . . . . . . . . . 254
Chapter 12. About Specifications . . . 229 TIMFMT(fmt{separator}). . . . . . . . . 255
RPG IV Specification Types. . . . . . . . . 229 TRUNCNBR(*YES | *NO) . . . . . . . . 255
Main Source Section Specifications . . . . . 230 USRPRF(*USER | *OWNER) . . . . . . . 256
Subprocedure Specifications . . . . . . . 231
Program Data . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Chapter 14. File Description
Common Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Syntax of Keywords . . . . . . . . . . 232
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Continuation Rules . . . . . . . . . . 233 File Description Specification Statement . . . . 257
File-Description Keyword Continuation Line 257
Position 6 (Form Type) . . . . . . . . . 258
Chapter 13. Control Specifications 239 Positions 7-16 (File Name) . . . . . . . . 258
Using a Data Area as a Control Specification . . . 239 Position 17 (File Type) . . . . . . . . . 259
Control-Specification Statement . . . . . . . 239 Position 18 (File Designation) . . . . . . . 259
Position 6 (Form Type) . . . . . . . . . 240 Position 19 (End of File) . . . . . . . . . 260
Positions 7-80 (Keywords) . . . . . . . . 240 Position 20 (File Addition) . . . . . . . . 261
Control-Specification Keywords . . . . . . . 240 Position 21 (Sequence) . . . . . . . . . 262
ACTGRP(*NEW | *CALLER | Position 22 (File Format) . . . . . . . . 262
’activation-group-name’). . . . . . . . . 241 Positions 23-27 (Record Length) . . . . . . 263
ALTSEQ{(*NONE | *SRC | *EXT)} . . . . . 241 Position 28 (Limits Processing) . . . . . . 263
ALWNULL(*NO | *INPUTONLY | *USRCTL) 241 Positions 29-33 (Length of Key or Record
AUT(*LIBRCRTAUT | *ALL | *CHANGE | Address) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
*USE | *EXCLUDE | ’authorization-list-name’) . 242 Position 34 (Record Address Type) . . . . . 264
BNDDIR(’binding-directory-name’ Position 35 (File Organization). . . . . . . 266
{:’binding-directory-name’...}) . . . . . . . 243 Positions 36-42 (Device) . . . . . . . . . 267
CCSID(*GRAPH : parameter | *UCS2 : number) 243 Position 43 (Reserved) . . . . . . . . . 268
COPYNEST(number) . . . . . . . . . . 244 Positions 44-80 (Keywords) . . . . . . . . 268
COPYRIGHT(’copyright string’) . . . . . . 244 File-Description Keywords . . . . . . . . . 268
CURSYM(’sym’) . . . . . . . . . . . 244 BLOCK(*YES |*NO) . . . . . . . . . . 268
CVTOPT(*{NO}DATETIME *{NO}GRAPHIC COMMIT{(rpg_name)} . . . . . . . . . 269
*{NO}VARCHAR *{NO}VARGRAPHIC) . . . 245 DATFMT(format{separator}) . . . . . . . 269
DATEDIT(fmt{separator}) . . . . . . . . 245 DEVID(fieldname). . . . . . . . . . . 270
DATFMT(fmt{separator}) . . . . . . . . 246 EXTFILE(filename) . . . . . . . . . . 270
DEBUG{(*NO | *YES)} . . . . . . . . . 246 EXTIND(*INUx) . . . . . . . . . . . 271
DECEDIT(*JOBRUN | ’value’) . . . . . . 246 EXTMBR(membername) . . . . . . . . . 271
| DECPREC(30|31) . . . . . . . . . . . 247 FORMLEN(number) . . . . . . . . . . 271
DFTACTGRP(*YES | *NO) . . . . . . . . 247 FORMOFL(number) . . . . . . . . . . 272
DFTNAME(rpg_name) . . . . . . . . . 248 IGNORE(recformat{:recformat...}) . . . . . . 272
ENBPFRCOL(*PEP | *ENTRYEXIT | *FULL) 248 INCLUDE(recformat{:recformat...}) . . . . . 272
EXPROPTS(*MAXDIGITS | *RESDECPOS) . . 248 INDDS(data_structure_name) . . . . . . . 272
EXTBININT{(*NO | *YES)} . . . . . . . . 248 INFDS(DSname) . . . . . . . . . . . 273
FIXNBR(*{NO}ZONED *{NO}INPUTPACKED) 249 INFSR(SUBRname) . . . . . . . . . . 273
FLTDIV{(*NO | *YES)} . . . . . . . . . 249 KEYLOC(number) . . . . . . . . . . . 273
FORMSALIGN{(*NO | *YES)} . . . . . . . 250 MAXDEV(*ONLY | *FILE) . . . . . . . . 273
FTRANS{(*NONE | *SRC)} . . . . . . . . 250 OFLIND(indicator) . . . . . . . . . . 274
GENLVL(number) . . . . . . . . . . . 250 PASS(*NOIND) . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
INDENT(*NONE | ’character-value’) . . . . 250 PGMNAME(program_name) . . . . . . . 274
INTPREC(10 | 20) . . . . . . . . . . . 251 PLIST(Plist_name) . . . . . . . . . . . 275
LANGID(*JOBRUN | *JOB | PREFIX(prefix{:nbr_of_char_replaced}) . . . . 275
’language-identifier’) . . . . . . . . . . 251 PRTCTL(data_struct{:*COMPAT}) . . . . . . 276
Contents v
RAFDATA(filename) . . . . . . . . . . 277 OVERLAY(name{:pos | *NEXT}) . . . . . . 313
RECNO(fieldname) . . . . . . . . . . 277 PACKEVEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
RENAME(Ext_format:Int_format). . . . . . 277 PERRCD(numeric_constant) . . . . . . . 315
SAVEDS(DSname) . . . . . . . . . . . 277 PREFIX(prefix{:nbr_of_char_replaced}) . . . . 316
SAVEIND(number) . . . . . . . . . . 278 PROCPTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
SFILE(recformat:rrnfield) . . . . . . . . 278 QUALIFIED . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
SLN(number) . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 STATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
TIMFMT(format{separator}) . . . . . . . 279 TIMFMT(format{separator}) . . . . . . . 317
USROPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 TOFILE(file_name) . . . . . . . . . . 317
File Types and Processing Methods . . . . . . 279 VALUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
VARYING . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Chapter 15. Definition Specifications 281 Summary According to Definition Specification
Definition Specification Statement . . . . . . 281 Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Definition Specification Keyword Continuation
Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Chapter 16. Input Specifications . . . 321
Definition Specification Continued Name Line 282 Input Specification Statement . . . . . . . . 321
Position 6 (Form Type) . . . . . . . . . 282 Program Described . . . . . . . . . . 321
Positions 7-21 (Name) . . . . . . . . . 282 Externally Described . . . . . . . . . . 321
Position 22 (External Description) . . . . . 283 Program Described Files. . . . . . . . . . 322
Position 23 (Type of Data Structure) . . . . . 283 Position 6 (Form Type) . . . . . . . . . 322
Positions 24-25 (Definition Type) . . . . . . 284 Record Identification Entries . . . . . . . . 322
Positions 26-32 (From Position) . . . . . . 284 Positions 7-16 (File Name) . . . . . . . . 322
Positions 33-39 (To Position / Length) . . . . 285 Positions 16-18 (Logical Relationship) . . . . 322
Position 40 (Internal Data Type) . . . . . . 286 Positions 17-18 (Sequence) . . . . . . . . 323
Positions 41-42 (Decimal Positions) . . . . . 287 Position 19 (Number). . . . . . . . . . 323
Position 43 (Reserved) . . . . . . . . . 287 Position 20 (Option) . . . . . . . . . . 324
Positions 44-80 (Keywords) . . . . . . . . 287 Positions 21-22 (Record Identifying Indicator, or
Definition-Specification Keywords . . . . . . 287 **) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
ALIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Positions 23-46 (Record Identification Codes) 325
ALT(array_name) . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Field Description Entries . . . . . . . . . 327
ALTSEQ(*NONE) . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Position 6 (Form Type) . . . . . . . . . 328
ASCEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Positions 7-30 (Reserved) . . . . . . . . 328
BASED(basing_pointer_name) . . . . . . . 289 Positions 31-34 (Data Attributes) . . . . . . 328
CCSID(number | *DFT) . . . . . . . . . 290 Position 35 (Date/Time Separator) . . . . . 328
CLASS(*JAVA:class-name) . . . . . . . . 290 Position 36 (Data Format) . . . . . . . . 328
CONST{(constant)} . . . . . . . . . . 290 Positions 37-46 (Field Location) . . . . . . 329
CTDATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Positions 47-48 (Decimal Positions) . . . . . 330
DATFMT(format{separator}) . . . . . . . 291 Positions 49-62 (Field Name) . . . . . . . 330
DESCEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Positions 63-64 (Control Level) . . . . . . 330
DIM(numeric_constant) . . . . . . . . . 292 Positions 65-66 (Matching Fields) . . . . . . 331
DTAARA{(*VAR:)data_area_name} . . . . . 292 Positions 67-68 (Field Record Relation) . . . . 331
EXPORT{(external_name)} . . . . . . . . 294 Positions 69-74 (Field Indicators) . . . . . . 332
EXTFLD(field_name) . . . . . . . . . . 294 Externally Described Files . . . . . . . . . 332
EXTFMT(code) . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Position 6 (Form Type) . . . . . . . . . 332
EXTNAME(file-name{:format-name}{:*ALL| Record Identification Entries . . . . . . . . 333
*INPUT|*OUTPUT|*KEY}). . . . . . . . 295 Positions 7-16 (Record Name) . . . . . . . 333
EXTPGM(name) . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Positions 17-20 (Reserved) . . . . . . . . 333
EXTPROC({*CL|*CWIDEN|*CNOWIDEN| Positions 21-22 (Record Identifying Indicator) 333
{*JAVA:class-name:}}name) . . . . . . . . 296 Positions 23-80 (Reserved) . . . . . . . . 333
FROMFILE(file_name) . . . . . . . . . 300 Field Description Entries . . . . . . . . . 333
IMPORT{(external_name)} . . . . . . . . 301 Positions 7-20 (Reserved) . . . . . . . . 334
INZ{(initial value)} . . . . . . . . . . 301 Positions 21-30 (External Field Name) . . . . 334
LIKE(name) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Positions 31-48 (Reserved) . . . . . . . . 334
LIKEDS(data_structure_name) . . . . . . . 304 Positions 49-62 (Field Name) . . . . . . . 334
| LIKEREC(intrecname{:*ALL|*INPUT|*OUTPUT Positions 63-64 (Control Level) . . . . . . 334
| |*KEY}) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Positions 65-66 (Matching Fields) . . . . . . 334
NOOPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Positions 67-68 (Reserved) . . . . . . . . 335
OCCURS(numeric_constant) . . . . . . . 306 Positions 69-74 (Field Indicators) . . . . . . 335
OPDESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Positions 75-80 (Reserved) . . . . . . . . 335
OPTIONS(*NOPASS *OMIT *VARSIZE *STRING
*RIGHTADJ). . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Chapter 17. Calculation Specifications 337
vi ILE RPG Reference
Traditional Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Positions 21-29 (Output Indicators) . . . . . 360
Calculation Specification Extended Factor-2 Positions 30-43 (Field Name) . . . . . . . 360
Continuation Line . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Position 45 (Blank After) . . . . . . . . 361
Position 6 (Form Type) . . . . . . . . . 338
Positions 7-8 (Control Level) . . . . . . . 338 Chapter 19. Procedure Specifications 363
Positions 9-11 (Indicators) . . . . . . . . 340 Procedure Specification Statement . . . . . . 363
Positions 12-25 (Factor 1) . . . . . . . . 340 Procedure Specification Keyword Continuation
Positions 26-35 (Operation and Extender) . . . 340 Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Positions 36-49 (Factor 2) . . . . . . . . 341 Procedure Specification Continued Name Line 364
Positions 50-63 (Result Field) . . . . . . . 342 Position 6 (Form Type) . . . . . . . . . 364
Positions 64-68 (Field Length) . . . . . . . 342 Positions 7-21 (Name) . . . . . . . . . 364
Positions 69-70 (Decimal Positions) . . . . . 342 Position 24 (Begin/End Procedure) . . . . . 364
Positions 71-76 (Resulting Indicators) . . . . 342 Positions 44-80 (Keywords) . . . . . . . . 365
Extended Factor 2 Syntax . . . . . . . . . 343 Procedure-Specification Keywords . . . . . . 365
Positions 7-8 (Control Level) . . . . . . . 343 EXPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Positions 9-11 (Indicators) . . . . . . . . 343
Positions 12-25 (Factor 1) . . . . . . . . 343
Positions 26-35 (Operation and Extender) . . . 344 Part 4. Operations, Expressions,
Positions 36-80 (Extended Factor 2) . . . . . 344 and Functions . . . . . . . . . . 367
Free-Form Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Positions 8-80 (Free-form Operations) . . . . 346 Chapter 20. Operations . . . . . . . 369
Operation Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Chapter 18. Output Specifications . . 347 Built-in Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Output Specification Statement . . . . . . . 347 Arithmetic Operations . . . . . . . . . . 380
Program Described . . . . . . . . . . 347 Ensuring Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . 381
Externally Described . . . . . . . . . . 347 Performance Considerations . . . . . . . 382
Program Described Files. . . . . . . . . . 348 Integer and Unsigned Arithmetic . . . . . . 382
Position 6 (Form Type) . . . . . . . . . 348 Arithmetic Operations Examples . . . . . . 383
Record Identification and Control Entries . . . . 348 Array Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Positions 7-16 (File Name) . . . . . . . . 348 Bit Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Positions 16-18 ( Logical Relationship) . . . . 348 Branching Operations . . . . . . . . . . 385
Position 17 (Type) . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Call Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Positions 18-20 (Record Addition/Deletion) . . 349 Prototyped Calls . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Position 18 (Fetch Overflow/Release) . . . . 350 Operational Descriptors . . . . . . . . . 387
Positions 21-29 (Output Conditioning Indicators) 350 Parsing Program Names on a Call . . . . . 387
Positions 30-39 (EXCEPT Name) . . . . . . 351 Parsing System Built-In Names . . . . . . 389
Positions 40-51 (Space and Skip) . . . . . . 352 Value of *ROUTINE . . . . . . . . . . 389
Positions 40-42 (Space Before) . . . . . . . 353 Compare Operations . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Positions 43-45 (Space After) . . . . . . . 353 Conversion Operations . . . . . . . . . . 392
Positions 46-48 (Skip Before) . . . . . . . 353 Data-Area Operations . . . . . . . . . . 392
Positions 49-51 (Skip After) . . . . . . . . 353 Date Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Field Description and Control Entries . . . . . 353 Unexpected Results . . . . . . . . . . 395
Positions 21-29 (Output Indicators) . . . . . 353 Declarative Operations . . . . . . . . . . 395
Positions 30-43 (Field Name) . . . . . . . 354 Error-Handling Operations . . . . . . . . . 396
Position 44 (Edit Codes) . . . . . . . . . 355 File Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Position 45 (Blank After) . . . . . . . . 355 | Keys for File Operations. . . . . . . . . 399
Positions 47-51 (End Position) . . . . . . . 356 Indicator-Setting Operations . . . . . . . . 399
Position 52 (Data Format) . . . . . . . . 357 Information Operations . . . . . . . . . . 400
Positions 53-80 (Constant, Edit Word, Data Initialization Operations . . . . . . . . . . 400
Attributes, Format Name) . . . . . . . . 358 Memory Management Operations . . . . . . 401
Externally Described Files . . . . . . . . . 359 Message Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Position 6 (Form Type) . . . . . . . . . 359 Move Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Record Identification and Control Entries . . . . 359 Moving Character, Graphic, UCS-2, and
Positions 7-16 (Record Name) . . . . . . . 359 Numeric Data . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Positions 16-18 ( Logical Relationship) . . . . 359 Moving Date-Time Data . . . . . . . . . 405
Position 17 (Type) . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Move Zone Operations . . . . . . . . . . 408
Position 18 (Release) . . . . . . . . . . 360 Result Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Positions 18-20 (Record Addition) . . . . . 360 Size Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Positions 21-29 (Output Indicators) . . . . . 360 String Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Positions 30-39 (EXCEPT Name) . . . . . . 360 Structured Programming Operations. . . . . . 411
Field Description and Control Entries . . . . . 360 Subroutine Operations . . . . . . . . . . 414
Contents vii
Coding Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . 414 %LEN (Get or Set Length) . . . . . . . . . 476
Test Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 %LEN Used for its Value . . . . . . . . 476
%LEN Used to Set the Length of
Chapter 21. Expressions . . . . . . 419 Variable-Length Fields . . . . . . . . . 477
General Expression Rules . . . . . . . . . 420 %LOOKUPxx (Look Up an Array Element) . . . 479
Expression Operands . . . . . . . . . . . 421 %MINUTES (Number of Minutes) . . . . . . 481
Expression Operators . . . . . . . . . . . 421 %MONTHS (Number of Months). . . . . . . 482
Operation Precedence . . . . . . . . . . 422 %MSECONDS (Number of Microseconds) . . . . 483
Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 %NULLIND (Query or Set Null Indicator). . . . 484
Data Types Supported by Expression Operands 423 %OCCUR (Set/Get Occurrence of a Data Structure) 485
Format of Numeric Intermediate Results . . . 427 %OPEN (Return File Open Condition) . . . . . 486
Precision Rules for Numeric Operations . . . . 428 %PADDR (Get Procedure Address) . . . . . . 487
Using the Default Precision Rules . . . . . 428 %PADDR Used with a Prototype . . . . . . 487
Precision of Intermediate Results . . . . . . 429 %PARMS (Return Number of Parameters) . . . . 489
Example of Default Precision Rules . . . . . 430 %REALLOC (Reallocate Storage) . . . . . . . 491
Using the ″Result Decimal Position″ Precision %REM (Return Integer Remainder) . . . . . . 492
Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 %REPLACE (Replace Character String) . . . . . 493
Example of ″Result Decimal Position″ Precision %SCAN (Scan for Characters) . . . . . . . . 495
Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 %SECONDS (Number of Seconds) . . . . . . 496
Short Circuit Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . 433 %SHTDN (Shut Down) . . . . . . . . . . 497
Order of Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . 433 %SIZE (Get Size in Bytes) . . . . . . . . . 498
%SQRT (Square Root of Expression) . . . . . . 500
%STATUS (Return File or Program Status). . . . 501
Chapter 22. Built-in Functions . . . . 435
%STR (Get or Store Null-Terminated String) . . . 504
%ABS (Absolute Value of Expression) . . . . . 435
%STR Used to Get Null-Terminated String . . 504
%ADDR (Get Address of Variable) . . . . . . 436
%STR Used to Store Null-Terminated String . . 505
%ALLOC (Allocate Storage) . . . . . . . . 438
%SUBDT (Extract a Portion of a Date, Time, or
| %BITAND (Bitwise AND Operation) . . . . . 439
Timestamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
| %BITNOT (Invert Bits) . . . . . . . . . . 440
%SUBST (Get Substring). . . . . . . . . . 508
| %BITOR (Bitwise OR Operation) . . . . . . . 441
%SUBST Used for its Value. . . . . . . . 508
| %BITXOR (Bitwise Exclusive-OR Operation) . . . 442
%SUBST Used as the Result of an Assignment 508
| Examples of Bit Operations. . . . . . . . 442
%THIS (Return Class Instance for Native Method) 510
%CHAR (Convert to Character Data) . . . . . 444
%TIME (Convert to Time) . . . . . . . . . 511
%CHECK (Check Characters) . . . . . . . . 446
%TIMESTAMP (Convert to Timestamp) . . . . 512
%CHECKR (Check Reverse) . . . . . . . . 448
%TLOOKUPxx (Look Up a Table Element) . . . 513
%DATE (Convert to Date) . . . . . . . . . 450
%TRIM (Trim Blanks at Edges) . . . . . . . 514
%DAYS (Number of Days) . . . . . . . . . 451
%TRIML (Trim Leading Blanks) . . . . . . . 515
%DEC (Convert to Packed Decimal Format) . . . 452
%TRIMR (Trim Trailing Blanks) . . . . . . . 516
%DECH (Convert to Packed Decimal Format
%UCS2 (Convert to UCS-2 Value) . . . . . . 517
with Half Adjust) . . . . . . . . . . . 452
%UNS (Convert to Unsigned Format) . . . . . 518
%DECPOS (Get Number of Decimal Positions) . . 454
%UNSH (Convert to Unsigned Format with
%DIFF (Difference Between Two Date, Time, or
Half Adjust) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Timestamp Values) . . . . . . . . . . . 455
%XFOOT (Sum Array Expression Elements) . . . 519
%DIV (Return Integer Portion of Quotient) . . . 456
%XLATE (Translate) . . . . . . . . . . . 520
%EDITC (Edit Value Using an Editcode) . . . . 457
%YEARS (Number of Years) . . . . . . . . 521
%EDITFLT (Convert to Float External
Representation). . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
%EDITW (Edit Value Using an Editword) . . . . 461 Chapter 23. Operation Codes . . . . 523
%ELEM (Get Number of Elements) . . . . . . 462 ACQ (Acquire) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
%EOF (Return End or Beginning of File Condition) 463 ADD (Add) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
%EQUAL (Return Exact Match Condition) . . . 465 ADDDUR (Add Duration) . . . . . . . . . 526
%ERROR (Return Error Condition) . . . . . . 467 ALLOC (Allocate Storage) . . . . . . . . . 528
| %FIELDS (Fields to update) . . . . . . . . 468 ANDxx (And) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
%FLOAT (Convert to Floating Format) . . . . . 469 BEGSR (Beginning of Subroutine) . . . . . . 530
%FOUND (Return Found Condition) . . . . . 470 BITOFF (Set Bits Off) . . . . . . . . . . . 531
%GRAPH (Convert to Graphic Value) . . . . . 472 BITON (Set Bits On) . . . . . . . . . . . 533
%HOURS (Number of Hours) . . . . . . . . 473 CABxx (Compare and Branch). . . . . . . . 535
%INT (Convert to Integer Format) . . . . . . 474 CALL (Call a Program) . . . . . . . . . . 537
%INTH (Convert to Integer Format with Half CALLB (Call a Bound Procedure). . . . . . . 538
Adjust) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 CALLP (Call a Prototyped Procedure or Program) 539
| %KDS (Search Arguments in Data Structure) . . . 475 CASxx (Conditionally Invoke Subroutine) . . . . 543
CAT (Concatenate Two Strings) . . . . . . . 545
viii ILE RPG Reference

CHAIN (Random Retrieval from a File) . . . . 548 NEXT (Next) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
CHECK (Check Characters) . . . . . . . . 551 OCCUR (Set/Get Occurrence of a Data Structure) 663
CHECKR (Check Reverse) . . . . . . . . . 554 ON-ERROR (On Error) . . . . . . . . . . 667
CLEAR (Clear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 OPEN (Open File for Processing) . . . . . . . 668
Clearing Variables . . . . . . . . . . . 557 ORxx (Or) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
Clearing Record Formats . . . . . . . . 557 OTHER (Otherwise Select) . . . . . . . . . 671
CLEAR Examples . . . . . . . . . . . 558 OUT (Write a Data Area) . . . . . . . . . 672
CLOSE (Close Files) . . . . . . . . . . . 561 PARM (Identify Parameters) . . . . . . . . 673
COMMIT (Commit) . . . . . . . . . . . 562 PLIST (Identify a Parameter List) . . . . . . . 676
COMP (Compare) . . . . . . . . . . . . 563 POST (Post) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
DEALLOC (Free Storage) . . . . . . . . . 564 READ (Read a Record) . . . . . . . . . . 680
DEFINE (Field Definition) . . . . . . . . . 566 READC (Read Next Changed Record) . . . . . 683
*LIKE DEFINE . . . . . . . . . . . . 566 READE (Read Equal Key) . . . . . . . . . 685
*DTAARA DEFINE . . . . . . . . . . 568 READP (Read Prior Record) . . . . . . . . 688
DELETE (Delete Record) . . . . . . . . . 570 READPE (Read Prior Equal) . . . . . . . . 690
DIV (Divide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571 REALLOC (Reallocate Storage with New Length) 693
DO (Do) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572 REL (Release) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694
DOU (Do Until) . . . . . . . . . . . . 574 RESET (Reset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
DOUxx (Do Until) . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 Resetting Variables . . . . . . . . . . 695
DOW (Do While) . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 Resetting Record Formats . . . . . . . . 696
DOWxx (Do While) . . . . . . . . . . . 578 Additional Considerations . . . . . . . . 696
DSPLY (Display Function) . . . . . . . . . 580 RESET Examples . . . . . . . . . . . 697
DUMP (Program Dump) . . . . . . . . . 583 RETURN (Return to Caller) . . . . . . . . 702
ELSE (Else) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585 ROLBK (Roll Back) . . . . . . . . . . . 705
ELSEIF (Else If). . . . . . . . . . . . . 586 SCAN (Scan String) . . . . . . . . . . . 706
ENDyy (End a Structured Group) . . . . . . 587 SELECT (Begin a Select Group) . . . . . . . 709
ENDSR (End of Subroutine) . . . . . . . . 589 SETGT (Set Greater Than) . . . . . . . . . 711
EVAL (Evaluate expression) . . . . . . . . 590 SETLL (Set Lower Limit) . . . . . . . . . 715
EVALR (Evaluate expression, right adjust) . . . . 592 SETOFF (Set Indicator Off) . . . . . . . . . 719
EXCEPT (Calculation Time Output) . . . . . . 593 SETON (Set Indicator On) . . . . . . . . . 720
EXFMT (Write/Then Read Format) . . . . . . 595 SHTDN (Shut Down). . . . . . . . . . . 721
EXSR (Invoke Subroutine) . . . . . . . . . 597 SORTA (Sort an Array) . . . . . . . . . . 722
EXTRCT (Extract Date/Time/Timestamp) . . . . 598 SQRT (Square Root) . . . . . . . . . . . 724
FEOD (Force End of Data) . . . . . . . . . 600 SUB (Subtract) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
FOR (For) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601 SUBDUR (Subtract Duration) . . . . . . . . 726
FORCE (Force a Certain File to Be Read Next Subtract a duration . . . . . . . . . . 726
Cycle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604 Calculate a duration . . . . . . . . . . 727
GOTO (Go To) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605 Possible error situations . . . . . . . . . 728
IF (If) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607 SUBDUR Examples . . . . . . . . . . 728
IFxx (If) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608 SUBST (Substring) . . . . . . . . . . . . 729
IN (Retrieve a Data Area) . . . . . . . . . 610 TAG (Tag) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
ITER (Iterate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 TEST (Test Date/Time/Timestamp) . . . . . . 733
KFLD (Define Parts of a Key) . . . . . . . . 614 TESTB (Test Bit) . . . . . . . . . . . . 735
KLIST (Define a Composite Key) . . . . . . . 615 TESTN (Test Numeric) . . . . . . . . . . 737
LEAVE (Leave a Do/For Group) . . . . . . . 617 TESTZ (Test Zone). . . . . . . . . . . . 739
LEAVESR (Leave a Subroutine) . . . . . . . 619 TIME (Retrieve Time and Date) . . . . . . . 740
LOOKUP (Look Up a Table or Array Element) . . 620 UNLOCK (Unlock a Data Area or Release a
MHHZO (Move High to High Zone) . . . . . 623 Record) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742
MHLZO (Move High to Low Zone) . . . . . . 624 Unlocking data areas . . . . . . . . . . 742
MLHZO (Move Low to High Zone) . . . . . . 625 Releasing record locks . . . . . . . . . 742
MLLZO (Move Low to Low Zone) . . . . . . 626 UPDATE (Modify Existing Record) . . . . . . 744
MONITOR (Begin a Monitor Group) . . . . . 627 WHEN (When True Then Select) . . . . . . . 746
MOVE (Move) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629 WHENxx (When True Then Select) . . . . . . 747
MOVEA (Move Array) . . . . . . . . . . 643 WRITE (Create New Records) . . . . . . . . 750
Character, graphic, and UCS-2 MOVEA XFOOT (Summing the Elements of an Array). . . 752
Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643 XLATE (Translate) . . . . . . . . . . . . 753
Numeric MOVEA Operations . . . . . . . 643 Z-ADD (Zero and Add) . . . . . . . . . . 755
General MOVEA Operations . . . . . . . 644 Z-SUB (Zero and Subtract) . . . . . . . . . 756
MOVEL (Move Left) . . . . . . . . . . . 650
MULT (Multiply) . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
MVR (Move Remainder) . . . . . . . . . 661
Part 5. Appendixes . . . . . . . . 757
Contents ix
Appendix A. RPG IV Restrictions . . . 759 Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
Programming Interface Information . . . . . . 768
Appendix B. EBCDIC Collating Trademarks and Service Marks . . . . . . . 769
Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . 765
x ILE RPG Reference

About This Reference
This reference provides information about the RPG IV language as it is
implemented using the ILE RPG compiler with the Operating System/400®
(OS/400®) operating system.
This reference covers:

v Basics of RPG IV:
– RPG IV character set
– RPG IV reserved words
– Compiler directives
– RPG IV program cycle
– Indicators
– Error Handling
– Subprocedures
v Definitions:
– Defining Data and Prototypes
– Data types and Data formats
v RPG IV specifications:
– Control
– File description
– Definition
– Input
– Calculation
– Output
– Procedure
v Ways to manipulate data or devices:
– Built-in Functions
– Expressions
– Operation Codes
Who Should Use This Reference

This reference is for programmers who are familiar with the RPG IV programming
language.
This reference provides a detailed description of the RPG IV language. It does not
| provide information on how to use the ILE RPG compiler or how to convert RPG
III programs to ILE RPG. For information on those subjects, see the WebSphere
Development Studio: ILE RPG Programmer’s Guide, SC09-2507-04.
Before using this reference, you should

v Know how to use applicable OS/400 menus and displays or Control Language
(CL) commands.
v Have a firm understanding of Integrated Language Environment® as described
in detail in the ILE Concepts, SC41-5606-06.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994, 2002 xi

Prerequisite and Related Information
Use the iSeries Information Center as your starting point for looking up iSeries and
AS/400e technical information. You can access the Information Center in two ways:
v From the following Web site:
http://www.ibm.com/eserver/iseries/infocenter
v From CD-ROMs that ship with your Operating System/400 order:
iSeries Information Center, SK3T-4091-02. This package also includes the PDF
versions of iSeries manuals, iSeries Information Center: Supplemental Manuals,
SK3T-4092-01, which replaces the Softcopy Library CD-ROM.
The iSeries Information Center contains advisors and important topics such as CL
commands, system application programming interfaces (APIs), logical partitions,
clustering, Java ™ , TCP/IP, Web serving, and secured networks. It also includes
links to related IBM® Redbooks and Internet links to other IBM Web sites such as
the Technical Studio and the IBM home page.
For a list of related publications, see the “Bibliography” on page 765.
How to Send Your Comments

Your feedback is important in helping to provide the most accurate and
high-quality information. IBM welcomes any comments about this book or any
other iSeries documentation.
v If you prefer to send comments by mail, use the the following address:
| Markham, Ontario, Canada L6G 1C7
| If you are mailing a readers’ comment form from a country other than the
United States, you can give the form to the local IBM branch office or IBM
representative for postage-paid mailing.
v If you prefer to send comments electronically, use one of these e-mail addresses:
– Comments on books:
[email protected]
IBMLink: toribm(torrcf)
– Comments on the iSeries Information Center:
[email protected]
Be sure to include the following:
v The name of the book.
v The publication number of the book.
v The page number or topic to which your comment applies.
| What's New This Release?

| The following list describes the enhancements made to ILE RPG in V5R2:
| v Conversion from character to numeric
| Built-in functions %DEC, %DECH, %INT, %INTH, %UNS, %UNSH and
| %FLOAT are enhanced to allow character parameters. For example,
| %DEC(’-12345.67’ : 7 : 2) returns the numeric value -12345.67.
xii ILE RPG Reference

| v Bitwise logical built-in functions
| %BITAND, %BITOR, %BITXOR and %BITNOT allow direct bit manipulation
| within RPG expressions.
| v Complex data structures
| Data structure definition is enhanced to allow arrays of data structures, and
| subfields of data structures defined with LIKEDS that are themselves data
| structures. This allows the coding of complex structures such as arrays of arrays,
| or arrays of structures containing subarrays of structures.
| Example: family(f).child(i).hobbyInfo.pets(p).type = ’dog’;
| family(f).child(i).hobbyInfo.pets(p).name = ’Spot’;
| In addition, data structures can be defined the same as a record format, using
| the new LIKEREC keyword.
| v Enhanced externally-described data structures
| Externally-described data structures can hold the programmer’s choice of input,
| output, key or all fields. Currently, externally-described data structures can only
| hold input fields.
| v Enhancments to keyed I/O
| Programmers can specify search arguments in keyed Input/Output operations in
| /FREE calculations in two new ways:
| 1. By specifying the search arguments (which can be expressions) in a list.
| 2. By specifying a data structure which contains the search arguments.
| Examples: D custkeyDS e ds extname(custfile:*key)
| /free
| CHAIN (keyA : keyB : key3) custrec;
| CHAIN %KDS(custkeyDS) custrec;
| v Data-structure result for externally-described files
| A data structure can be specified in the result field when using I/O operations
| for externally-described files. This was available only for program-described files
| prior to V5R2. Using a data structure can improve performance if there are
| many fields in the file.
| v UPDATE operation to update only selected fields
| A list of fields to be updated can be specified with an UPDATE operation. This
| could only be done by using exception output prior to V5R2.
| Example: update record %fields(salary:status).
| v 31 digit support
| Supports packed and zoned numeric data with up to 31 digits and decimal
| places. This is the maximum length supported by DDS. Only 30 digits and
| decimal places were supported prior to V5R2.
| v Performance option for FEOD
| The FEOD operation is enhanced by supporting an extender N which indicates
| that the operation should simply write out the blocked buffers locally, without
| forcing a costly write to disk.
| v Enhanced data area access
| The DTAARA keyword is enhanced to allow the name and library of the data
| area to be determined at runtime
| v New assignment operators
| The new assignment operators +=, -=, *=, /=, **= allow a variable to be modified
| based on its old value in a more concise manner.
| Example: totals(current_customer) += count;
About This Reference xiii

| This statement adds ″count″ to the value currently in ″totals(current_customer)″
| without having to code ″totals(current_customer)″ twice.
| v IFS source files
| The ILE RPG compiler can compile both main source files and /COPY files from
| the IFS. The /COPY and /INCLUDE directives are enhanced to support IFS file
| names.
| v Program Call Markup Language (PCML) generation
| The ILE RPG compiler will generate an IFS file containing the PCML,
| representing the parameters to the program (CRTBNDRPG) or to the exported
| procedures (CRTRPGMOD).
| Table 1. Changed Language Elements Since V5R1
| Language Unit Element Description
| Built-in functions %DEC(expression) Can now take parameters of type character.
| %DECH(expression)
| %FLOAT(expression)
| %INT(expression)
| %INTH(expression)
| %UNS(expression)
| %UNSH(expression)
| Definition DTAARA({*VAR:}data-area-name) The data area name can be a name, a character literal
| specification specifying ’LIBRARY/NAME’ or a character variable
| keywords which will determine the actual data area at runtime.
| DIM Allowed for data structure specifications.
| LIKEDS Allowed for subfield specifications.
| EXTNAME(filename{:extrecname} The optional ″type″ parameter controls which type of
| {:*ALL|*INPUT|*OUTPUT|*KEY} field is extracted for the externally-described data
| ) structure.
| Definition Length and decimal place entries The length and number of decimal places can be 31 for
| Specifications packed and zoned fields.
| Operation codes CHAIN, DELETE, READE, READPE, In free-form operations, Factor 1 can be a list of key
| SETGT, SETLL values.
| CHAIN, READ, READC, READE, When used with externally-described files or record
| READP, READPE, UPDATE, WRITE formats, a data structure may be specified in the result
| field.
| UPDATE In free-form calculations, the final argument can contain
| a list of the fields to be updated.
| FEOD Operation extender N is allowed. This indicates that the
| unwritten buffers must be made available to the
| database, but not necessarily be written to disk.
| Calculation Length and decimal place entries The length and number of decimal places can be 31 for
| specifications packed and zoned fields.
|
| Table 2. New Language Elements Since V5R1
| Expressions Assignment Operators += -= *= /= When these assignment operators are used, the
| **= target of the operation is also the first operand of
| the operation.
xiv ILE RPG Reference

| Table 2. New Language Elements Since V5R1 (continued)
| Control Specification DECPREC(30|31) Controls the precision of decimal intermediate
| Keywords values for presentation, for example, for %EDITC
| and %EDITW
| Definition specification LIKEREC(intrecname{:*ALL| Defines a data structure whose subfields are the
| keywords *INPUT|*OUTPUT|*KEY}) same as a record format.
| Built-in functions %BITAND(expression : expression) Returns a result whose bits are on if the
| corresponding bits of the operands are both on.
| %BITNOT(expression) Returns a result whose bits are the inverse of the
| bits in the argument.
| %BITOR(expression : expression) Returns a result whose bits are on if either of the
| corresponding bits of the operands is on.
| %BITXOR(expression : expression) Returns a result whose bits are on if exactly one
| of the corresponding bits of the operands is on.
| %FIELDS(name{:name...}) Used in free-form ″UPDATE to specify the fields
| to be updated.
| %KDS(data structure) Used in free-form keyed operation codes CHAIN,
| SETLL, SETGT, READE and READPE, to indicate
| that the keys for the operation are in the data
| structure.
| Changes to this Reference Since V5R1

| This V5R1 reference, WebSphere Development Studio: ILE RPG Reference,
| SC09-2508-04, differs in many places from the V5R1 reference, WebSphere
| Development Studio: ILE RPG Reference, SC09-2508-03. Most of the changes are
| related to the enhancements that have been made since V5R1; others reflect minor
| technical corrections. To assist you in using this manual, technical changes and
| enhancements are noted with a vertical bar (|).
About This Reference xv

Changes to this Reference Since V5R1
xvi ILE RPG Reference

Part 1. RPG IV Concepts
This section describes some of the basics of RPG IV:
v Symbolic names
v Compiler directives
v RPG IV program cycle
v Indicators
v Error Handling
v Subprocedures
v General file considerations
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994, 2002 1

2 ILE RPG Reference
Chapter 1. Symbolic Names and Reserved Words
The valid character set for the RPG IV language consists of:
v The letters A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
v RPG IV accepts lowercase letters in symbolic names but translates them to
uppercase during compilation
v The numbers 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
v The characters + − * , . ’ & / $ # : @ _ > < = ( ) %
v The blank character
Note: The $, #, and @ may appear as different symbols on some codepages. For
more information, see the iSeries Information Center globalization topic.
Symbolic Names
A symbolic name is a name that uniquely identifies a specific entity in a program
or procedure. In the RPG IV language, symbolic names are used for the following:
v Arrays (see “Array Names” on page 4)
v Conditional compile names (see “Conditional Compile Names” on page 4)
v Data structures (see “Data Structure Names” on page 4)
v Exception output records (see “EXCEPT Names” on page 4)
v Fields (see “Field Names” on page 4)
v Key field lists (see “KLIST Names” on page 4)
v Labels (see “Labels” on page 4)
v Named constants (see “Named Constants” on page 125)
v Parameter lists (see “PLIST Names” on page 5)
v Prototype names (see “Prototype Names” on page 5)
v Record names (see “Record Names” on page 5)
v Subroutines (see “Subroutine Names” on page 5)
v Tables (see “Table Names” on page 5).
The following rules apply to all symbolic names except for deviations noted in the
description of each symbolic name:
v The first character of the name must be alphabetic. This includes the characters
$, #, and @.
v The remaining characters must be alphabetic or numeric. This includes the
underscore (_).
v The name must be left-adjusted in the entry on the specification form except in
fields which allow the name to float (definition specification, keyword fields,
and the extended factor 2 field).
v A symbolic name cannot be an RPG IV reserved word.
v A symbolic name can be from 1 to 4096 characters. The practical limits are
determined by the size of the entry used for defining the name. A name that is
up to 15 characters can be specified in the Name entry of the definition or
procedure specification. For names longer than 15 characters, use a continuation
specification. For more information, see Chapter 12, “About Specifications” on
page 229.

Symbolic Names
v A symbolic name must be unique within the procedure in which it is defined.
Array Names
The following additional rule applies to array names:
| v An array name in a standalone field cannot begin with the letters TAB. Array
| names may begin with TAB if they are either prototyped parameters or data
| structures defined with the DIM keyword.
Conditional Compile Names

The symbolic names used for conditional compilation have no relationship to other
symbolic names. For example, if you define a file called MYFILE, you may later
use /DEFINE to define condition name MYFILE, and you may also use
/UNDEFINE to remove condition name MYFILE. This has no effect on the file
name MYFILE.
Conditional compile names can be up to 50 characters long.
Data Structure Names

A data structure is an area in storage and is considered to be a character field.
EXCEPT Names
An EXCEPT name is a symbolic name assigned to an exception output record. The
following additional rule applies to EXCEPT names:
v The same EXCEPT name can be assigned to more than one output record.
Field Names
The following additional rules apply to field names:
v A field name can be defined more than once if each definition using that name
has the same data type, the same length, and the same number of decimal
positions. All definitions using the same name refer to a single field (that is, the
same area in storage). However, it can be defined only once on the definition
specification.
v A field can be defined as a data structure subfield only once unless the data
structure is qualified (defined with QUALIFIED or LIKEDS). In this case, when
the subfield is used, it must be qualified (specified in the form
dsname.subfieldname).
v A subfield name cannot be specified as the result field on an *ENTRY PLIST
parameter.
KLIST Names
A KLIST name is a symbolic name assigned to a list of key fields.
Labels
A label is a symbolic name that identifies a specific location in a program (for
example, the name assigned to a TAG or ENDSR operation).
Named Constants
A named constant is a symbolic name assigned to a constant.
4 ILE RPG Reference

Symbolic Names
PLIST Names
A PLIST name is a symbolic name assigned to a list of parameters.
Prototype Names
A prototype name is a symbolic name assigned to a prototype definition. This
name must be used when calling a prototyped procedure or program.
Record Names
A record name is a symbolic name assigned to a record format in an externally
described file. The following additional rules apply to record names in an RPG IV
program:
v A record name can exist in only one file in the program.
Note: See “RENAME(Ext_format:Int_format)” on page 277 for information on how

to overcome this limitation.
Subroutine Names
The name is defined in factor 1 of the BEGSR (begin subroutine) operation.
Table Names
The following additional rules apply to table names:
v A table name can contain from 3 to 10 characters.
v A table name must begin with the letters TAB.
v A table cannot be defined in a subprocedure.
RPG IV Words with Special Functions/Reserved Words

The RPG IV reserved words listed below have special functions within a program.
v The following reserved words allow you to access the job date, or a portion of it,
to be used in the program:
UDATE
*DATE
UMONTH
*MONTH
UYEAR
*YEAR
UDAY
*DAY
v The following reserved words can be used for numbering the pages of a report,
for record sequence numbering, or to sequentially number output fields:
PAGE
PAGE1-PAGE7
v Figurative constants are implied literals that allow specifications without
referring to length:
*BLANK/*BLANKS
*ZERO/*ZEROS
*HIVAL
*LOVAL
Chapter 1. Symbolic Names and Reserved Words 5

*NULL
*ON
*OFF
*ALLX’x1..’
*ALLG’oK1K2i’
*ALL’X..’
v The following reserved words are used for positioning database files. *START
positions to beginning of file and *END positions to end of file.
*END
*START
v The following reserved words allow RPG IV indicators to be referred to as data:
*IN
*INxx
v The following are special words used with date and time:
*CDMY
*CMDY
*CYMD
*DMY
*EUR
*HMS
*ISO
*JIS
*JOB
*JOBRUN
*JUL
*LONGJUL
*MDY
*SYS
*USA
*YMD
v The following are special words used with translation:
*ALTSEQ
*EQUATE
*FILE
*FTRANS
v *PLACE allows repetitive placement of fields in an output record. (See
“*PLACE” on page 354 for more information.)
v *ALL allows all fields that are defined for an externally described file to be
written on output. (See “Rules for Figurative Constants” on page 127 for more
information on *ALL)
v The following are special words used within expressions:
AND
NOT
OR
6 ILE RPG Reference

Note: NOT can only be used within expressions. It cannot be used as a name
anywhere in the source.
v The following are special words used with parameter passing:
*NOPASS
*OMIT
*RIGHTADJ
*STRING
*VARSIZE
User Date Special Words

The user date special words (UDATE, *DATE, UMONTH, *MONTH, UDAY, *DAY,
UYEAR, *YEAR) allow the programmer to supply a date for the program at run
time. The user date special words access the job date that is specified in the job
description. The user dates can be written out at output time; UDATE and *DATE
can be written out using the Y edit code in the format specified by the control
specification.
(For a description of the job date, see theWork Management manual.)
Rules for User Date

Remember the following rules when using the user date:
v UDATE, when specified in positions 30 through 43 of the output specifications,
prints a 6-character numeric date field. *DATE, when similarly specified, prints
an 8-character (4-digit year portion) numeric date field. These special words can
be used in three different date formats:
Month/day/year
Year/month/day
Day/month/year
Use the DATEDIT keyword on the control specification to specify the date
formats of UDATE and *DATE:
DATEDIT UDATE format *DATE format

*MDY *MDY *USA (mmddyyyy)
*DMY *DMY *EUR (ddmmyyyy)
*YMD *YMD *ISO (yyyymmdd)
Note that the DATEDIT keyword also controls the format of the Y edit code.
If this keyword is not specified, the default is *MDY.

v For an interactive job or batch program, the user date special words are set to
the value of the job date when the program starts running in the system. The
value of the user date special words are not updated during program
processing, even if the program runs past midnight or if the job date is changed.
Use the TIME operation code to obtain the time and date while the program is
running.
v UMONTH, *MONTH, UDAY, *DAY, and UYEAR when specified in positions 30
through 43 of the output specifications, print a 2-position numeric date field.
*YEAR can be used to print a 4-position numeric date field. Use UMONTH or
*MONTH to print the month only, UDAY or *DAY to print the day only, and
UYEAR or *YEAR to print the year only.

User Date Special Words
v UDATE and *DATE can be edited when they are written if the Y edit code is
specified in position 44 of the output specifications. The
“DATEDIT(fmt{separator})” on page 245 keyword on the control specification
determines the format and the separator character to be inserted; for example,
12/31/88, 31.12.88., 12/31/1988.
v UMONTH, *MONTH, UDAY, *DAY, UYEAR and *YEAR cannot be edited by the
Y edit code in position 44 of the output specifications.
v The user date fields cannot be modified. This means they cannot be used:
– In the result field of calculations
– As factor 1 of PARM operations
– As the factor 2 index of LOOKUP operations
– With blank after in output specifications
– As input fields
v The user date special words can be used in factor 1 or factor 2 of the calculation
specifications for operation codes that use numeric fields.
v User date fields are not date data type fields but are numeric fields.
PAGE, PAGE1-PAGE7
PAGE is used to number the pages of a report, to serially number the output
records in a file, or to sequentially number output fields. It does not cause a page
eject.
The eight possible PAGE fields (PAGE, PAGE1, PAGE2, PAGE3, PAGE4, PAGE5,
PAGE6, and PAGE7) may be needed for numbering different types of output pages
or for numbering pages for different printer files.
PAGE fields can be specified in positions 30 through 43 of the output specifications

or in the input or calculation specifications.
Rules for PAGE, PAGE1-PAGE7

Remember the following rules when using the PAGE fields:
v When a PAGE field is specified in the output specifications, without being
defined elsewhere, it is assumed to be a four-digit, numeric field with zero
decimal positions.
v Page numbering, unless otherwise specified, starts with 0001; and 1 is
automatically added for each new page.
v To start at a page number other than 1, set the value of the PAGE field to one
less than the starting page number. For example, if numbering starts with 24,
enter a 23 in the PAGE field. The PAGE field can be of any length but must have
zero decimal positions (see Figure 1 on page 9).
v Page numbering can be restarted at any point in a job. The following methods
can be used to reset the PAGE field:
– Specify blank-after (position 45 of the output specifications).
– Specify the PAGE field as the result field of an operation in the calculation
specifications.
– Specify an output indicator in the output field specifications (see Figure 2 on
page 9). When the output indicator is on, the PAGE field will be reset to 1.
Output indicators cannot be used to control the printing of a PAGE field,
because a PAGE field is always written.
– Specify the PAGE field as an input field as shown in Figure 1 on page 9.
8 ILE RPG Reference

PAGE, PAGE1-PAGE7
v Leading zeros are automatically suppressed (Z edit code is assumed) when a
PAGE field is printed unless an edit code, edit word, or data format (P/B/L/R
in position 52) has been specified. Editing and the data format override the
suppression of leading zeros. When the PAGE field is defined in input and
calculation specifications, it is treated as a field name in the output specifications
and zero suppression is not automatic.
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...
IFilename++SqNORiPos1+NCCPos2+NCCPos3+NCC................................
I........................Fmt+SPFrom+To+++DcField+++++++++L1M1FrPlMnZr....
IINPUT PG 50 1 CP
I 2 5 0PAGE
Figure 1. Page Record Description
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...
OFilename++DF..N01N02N03Excnam++++B++A++Sb+Sa+...........................
O..............N01N02N03Field+++++++++YB.End++PConstant/editword/DTformat
O* When indicator 15 is on, the PAGE field is set to zero and 1 is
O* added before the field is printed. When indicator 15 is off, 1
O* is added to the contents of the PAGE field before it is printed.
OPRINT H L1 01
O 15 PAGE 1 75
Figure 2. Resetting the PAGE Fields to Zero

PAGE, PAGE1-PAGE7
10 ILE RPG Reference

Chapter 2. Compiler Directives
The compiler directive statements /FREE... /END-FREE denote a free-form
calculation specification block. The compiler directive statements /TITLE, /EJECT,
/SPACE, /COPY, and /INCLUDE allow you to specify heading information for
the compiler listing, to control the spacing of the compiler listing, and to insert
records from other file members during a compile. The conditional compilation
directive statements /DEFINE, /UNDEFINE, /IF, /ELSEIF, /ELSE, /ENDIF, and
/EOF allow you to select or omit source records. The compiler directive statements
must precede any compile-time array or table records, translation records, and
alternate collating sequence records (that is, ** records).
/FREE... /END-FREE (Positions 7-11)

Positions Entry
7-11 /FREE or /END-FREE
12-80 Blank
The /FREE compiler directive specifies the beginning of a free-form calculation

specifications block. /END-FREE specifies the end of the block. Positions 12
through 80 must be blank. The remaining positions may be used for comments.
See “Free-Form Syntax” on page 345 for information on using free-form statements.
/TITLE (Positions 7-12)

Use the compiler directive /TITLE to specify heading information (such as security
classification or titles) that is to appear at the top of each page of the compiler
listing. The following entries are used for /TITLE:
Positions Entry
7-12 /TITLE
13 Blank
14-100 Title information
A program can contain more than one /TITLE statement. Each /TITLE statement
provides heading information for the compiler listing until another /TITLE
statement is encountered. A /TITLE statement must be the first RPG specification
encountered to print information on the first page of the compiler listing. The
information specified by the /TITLE statement is printed in addition to compiler
heading information.
The /TITLE statement causes a skip to the next page before the title is printed. The
/TITLE statement is not printed on the compiler listing.
/EJECT (Positions 7-12)

Positions Entry
7-12 /EJECT
13-49 Blank

/EJECT (Positions 7-12)
50-100 Comments
Enter /EJECT in positions 7 through 12 to indicate that subsequent specifications

are to begin on a new page of the compiler listing. Positions 13 through 49 of the
/EJECT statement must be blank. The remaining positions may be used for
comments. If the spool file is already at the top of a new page, /EJECT will not
advance to a new page. /EJECT is not printed on the compiler listing.
/SPACE (Positions 7-12)

Use the compiler directive /SPACE to control line spacing within the source
section of the compiler listing. The following entries are used for /SPACE:
Positions Entry
7-12 /SPACE
13 Blank
14-16 A positive integer value from 1 through 112 that defines the
number of lines to space on the compiler listing. The number must
be left-adjusted.
17-49 Blank
50-100 Comments
If the number specified in positions 14 through 16 is greater 112, 112 will be used
as the /SPACE value. If the number specified in positions 14 through 16 is greater
than the number of lines remaining on the current page, subsequent specifications
begin at the top of the next page.
/SPACE is not printed on the compiler listing, but is replaced by the specified line
spacing. The line spacing caused by /SPACE is in addition to the two lines that are
skipped between specification types.
/COPY or /INCLUDE
The /COPY and /INCLUDE directives have the same purpose and the same
syntax, but are handled differently by the SQL preprocessor. If your program does
not have embedded SQL, you can freely choose which directive to use. If your
program has embedded SQL, see “Using /COPY, /INCLUDE in Source Files with
Embedded SQL” on page 14 for information about which directive to use.
The /COPY and /INCLUDE compiler directives cause records from other files to
be inserted, at the point where the directive occurs, with the file being compiled.
The inserted files may contain any valid specification including /COPY and
/INCLUDE up to the maximum nesting depth specified by the COPYNEST
keyword (32 when not specified).
/COPY and /INCLUDE files can be either physical files or IFS files. To specify a
physical file, code your /COPY and /INCLUDE statement in the following way :
| v /COPY or /INCLUDE followed by exactly one space followed by the file name
| or path
v when specifying a physical file, the library, file, and member name, can be in
one of these formats:
libraryname/filename,membername
filename,membername
membername

/COPY or /INCLUDE
– A member name must be specified.
– If a file name is not specified, QRPGLESRC is assumed.
– If a library is not specified, the library list is searched for the file. All
occurrences of the specified source file in the library list are searched for the
member until it is located or the search is complete.
– If a library is specified, a file name must also be specified.
| v When specifying an IFS (Integrated File System) file, the path can be either
| absolute (beginning with /) or relative.
| – The path can be enclosed in single or double quotes. If the path contains
| blanks, it must be enclosed in quotes.
| – If the path does not end with a suffix (for example ″.txt″), the compiler will
| search for the file as named, and also for files with suffixes of ″.rpgle″ or
| ″.rpgleinc″.
| – See the WebSphere Development Studio: ILE RPG Programmer’s Guidefor
| information on using IFS /COPY files.
v Optionally, at least one space and a comment.
/COPY members are considered fixed-form by default, even if the /COPY

directive is coded within a free-form group. If the /COPY member will contain
free-form specifications, these must be delimited with /FREE and /END-FREE
directives.
TIP
To facilitate application maintenance, you may want to place the prototypes
of exported procedures in a separate source member. If you do, be sure to
place a /COPY or /INCLUDE directive for that member in both the module
containing the exported procedure and any modules that contain calls to the
exported procedure.
Figure 3 shows some examples of the /COPY and /INCLUDE directive statements.
C/COPY MBR1 1
I/INCLUDE SRCFIL,MBR2 2
O/COPY SRCLIB/SRCFIL,MBR3 3
O/INCLUDE "SRCLIB!"/"SRC>3","MBR¬3" 4
| O/COPY /dir1/dir2/file.rpg 5

|
| O/COPY /dir1/dir2/file 6
|
| O/COPY dir1/dir2/file.rpg 7
|
| O/COPY "ifs file containing blanks" 8
|
| O/COPY ’ifs file containing blanks’ 8
Figure 3. Examples of the /COPY and /INCLUDE Compiler Directive Statements
1 Copies from member MBR1 in source file QRPGLESRC. The current library
| list is used to search for file QRPGLESRC. If the file is not found in the
Chapter 2. Compiler Directives 13

/COPY or /INCLUDE
| library list, the search will proceed to the IFS, looking for file MBR1,
| MBR1.rpgle or MBR1.rpgleinc in the include search path. See the
| WebSphere Development Studio: ILE RPG Programmer’s Guide,
| SC09-2507-04 for information on using IFS source files.
2 Copies from member MBR2 in file SRCFIL. The current library list is used
to search for file SRCFIL. Note that the comma is used to separate the file
| name from the member name. If the file is not found in the library list, the
| search will proceed to the IFS, looking for file SRCFIL, MBR1 in the
| include search path, possibly with the .rpgle or .rpgleinc suffixes.
| 3 Copies from member MBR3 in file SRCFIL in library SRCLIB or from the
| IFS file SRCFIL, MBR3 in directory SRCLIB.
4 Copies from member ″MBR¬3″ in file ″SRC>3″ in library ″SRCLIB!″
| 5 Copies from the IFS file file.rpg in directory /dir1/dir2.
| 6 Copies from file, or file.rpgleinc or file.rpgle in directory /dir1/dir2
| 7 Copies from the IFS file file.rpg in directory dir1/dir2, searching for
| directory dir1/dir2 using the IFS search path.
| 8 Copies from a file whose name contains blanks.
Results of the /COPY or /INCLUDE during Compile

During compilation, the specified file members are merged into the program at the
point where the /COPY or /INCLUDE statement occurs. All members will appear
in the COPY member table.
Nested /COPY or /INCLUDE

Nesting of /COPY and /INCLUDE directives is allowed. A /COPY or /INCLUDE
member may contain one or more /COPY or /INCLUDE directives (which in turn
may contain further /COPY or /INCLUDE directives and so on). The maximum
depth to which nesting can occur can be set using the COPYNEST control
specification keyword. The default maximum depth is 32.
TIP
You must ensure that your nested /COPY or /INCLUDE files do not include
each other infinitely. Use conditional compilation directives at the beginning
of your /COPY or /INCLUDE files to prevent the source lines from being
used more than once.
For an example of how to prevent multiple inclusion, see Figure 4 on page 19.
Using /COPY, /INCLUDE in Source Files with Embedded SQL

The /COPY and /INCLUDE directives are identical except that they are handled
differently by the SQL pre-processor:
v The /COPY directive is expanded by the preprocessor. The copied file can
contain embedded SQL or host variables.
v The /INCLUDE directive is not expanded by the preprocessor. The included file
cannot contain embedded SQL or host variables.
If you use only the /COPY directive, you may encounter the following problems:
v The SQL preprocessor does not allow nested /COPY commands.

/COPY or /INCLUDE
v The SQL preprocessor does not always handle conditional compilation directives
correctly.
To get around these problems:

v Specify /COPY in a program with embedded SQL if the copy file contains
embedded SQL or host variable definitions.
v Specify /INCLUDE within the copied file to include any nested files.
v Specify either /COPY or /INCLUDE if you are not using embedded SQL.
Conditional Compilation Directives

The conditional compilation directive statements allow you to conditionally include
or exclude sections of source code from the compile.
v Condition-names can be added or removed from a list of currently defined
conditions using the defining condition directives /DEFINE and /UNDEFINE.
v Condition expressions DEFINED(condition-name) and NOT
DEFINED(condition-name) are used within testing condition /IF groups.
v Testing condition directives, /IF, /ELSEIF, /ELSE and /ENDIF, control which
source lines are to be read by the compiler.
v The /EOF directive tells the compiler to ignore the rest of the source lines in the
current source member.
Defining Conditions
Condition-names can be added to or removed from a list of currently defined
conditions using the defining condition directives /DEFINE and /UNDEFINE.
/DEFINE (Positions 7-13)

The /DEFINE compiler directive defines conditions for conditional compilation.
The entries in the condition-name area are free-format (do not have to be left
justified). The following entries are used for /DEFINE:
Positions Entry
7 - 13 /DEFINE
14 Blank
15 - 80 condition-name
81 - 100 Comments
The /DEFINE directive adds a condition-name to the list of currently defined

conditions. A subsequent /IF DEFINED(condition-name) would be true. A
subsequent /IF NOT DEFINED(condition-name) would be false.
Note: The command parameter DEFINE can be used to predefine up to 32

conditions on the CRTBNDRPG and CRTRPGMOD commands.
/UNDEFINE (Positions 7-15)

Use the /UNDEFINE directive to indicate that a condition is no longer defined.
The entries in the condition-name area are free-format (do not have to be left
justified).
Positions Entry
7 - 15 /UNDEFINE
16 Blank

17 - 80 condition-name
81 - 100 Comments
The /UNDEFINE directive removes a condition-name from the list of currently

defined conditions. A subsequent /IF DEFINED(condtion-name) would be false. A
subsequent /IF NOT DEFINED(condition-name) would be true.
Note: Any conditions specified on the DEFINE parameter will be considered to be

defined when processing /IF and /ELSEIF directives. These conditions can
be removed using the /UNDEFINE directive.
Predefined Conditions
Several conditions are defined for you by the RPG compiler. These conditions
cannot be used with /DEFINE or /UNDEFINE. They can only be used with /IF
and /ELSEIF.
Conditions Relating to the Environment

*ILERPG This condition is defined if your program is being compiled by the
ILE RPG IV compiler (the compiler described in this document).
* This module is to be defined on different platforms. With
* the ILE RPG compiler, the BNDDIR keyword is used to
* indicate where procedures can be found. With a different
* compiler, the BNDDIR keyword might not be valid.
/IF DEFINED(*ILERPG)
H BNDDIR(’QC2LE’)
/ENDIF
To learn what conditions are available with another version of the

RPG IV compiler, consult the reference for the compiler. For
example, for VisualAge RPG see VisualAge RPG Language Reference,
SC09-2451-04.
Conditions Relating to the Command Being Used

*CRTBNDRPG
This condition is defined if your program is being compiled by the
CRTBNDRPG command, which creates a program.
/IF DEFINED(*CRTBNDRPG)
H DFTACTGRP(*NO)
/ENDIF
*CRTRPGMOD
This condition is defined if your program is being compiled by the
CRTRPGMOD command, which creates a module.
* This code might appear in a generic Control specification
* contained in a /COPY file. The module that contains the
* main procedure would define condition THIS_IS_MAIN before
* coding the /COPY directive.
* If the CRTRPGMOD command is not being used, or if

* THIS_IS_MAIN is defined, the NOMAIN keyword will not
* be used in this Control specification.
/IF DEFINED(*CRTRPGMOD)
/IF NOT DEFINED(THIS_IS_MAIN)
H NOMAIN
/ENDIF
/ENDIF

Conditions Relating to the Target Release
*VxRxMx This condition is defined if your program is being compiled for a
version that is greater than or equal to the release in the condition,
starting with *V4R4M0 (Version 4 Release 4 Modification 0).
Use this condition if you will run the same program on different
target releases, and want to take advantage of features that are not
available in every release. Support for this condition is available
starting with *V4R4M0 systems with the appropriate PTF installed.
/IF DEFINED(*V5R1M0)
* Specify code that is valid in V5R1M0 and subsequent releases
I/INCLUDE SRCFIL,MBR2
/ELSE
* Specify code that is available in V4R4M0
I/COPY SRCFIL,MBR2
/ENDIF
Condition Expressions
A condition expression has one of the following forms:
v DEFINED(condition-name)
v NOT DEFINED(condition-name)
The condition expression is free-format but cannot be continued to the next line.
Testing Conditions
Conditions are tested using /IF groups, consisting of an /IF directive, followed by
zero or more /ELSEIF directives, followed optionally by an /ELSE directive,
followed by an /ENDIF directive.
Any source lines except compile-time data, are valid between the directives of an
/IF group. This includes nested /IF groups.
Note: There is no practical limit to the nesting level of /IF groups.
/IF Condition-Expression (Positions 7-9)

The /IF compiler directive is used to test a condition expression for conditional
compilation. The following entries are used for /IF:
Positions Entry
7-9 /IF
10 Blank
11 - 80 Condition expression
81 - 100 Comments
If the condition expression is true, source lines following the /IF directive are
selected to be read by the compiler. Otherwse, lines are excluded until the next
/ELSEIF, /ELSE or /ENDIF in the same /IF group.

/ELSEIF Condition-Expression (Positions 7-13)
The /ELSEIF compiler directive is used to test a condition expression within an
/IF or /ELSEIF group. The following entries are used for /ELSEIF:
Positions Entry
7 - 13 /ELSEIF
14 Blank
15 - 80 Condition expression
81 - 100 Comments
If the previous /IF or /ELSEIF was not satisfied, and the condition expression is
true, then source lines following the /ELSEIF directive are selected to be read.
Otherwise, lines are excluded until the next /ELSEIF, /ELSE or /ENDIF in the
same /IF group is encountered.
/ELSE (Positions 7-11)

The /ELSE compiler directive is used to unconditionally select source lines to be
read following a failed /IF or /ELSEIF test. The following entries are used for
/ELSE:
Positions Entry
7 - 11 /ELSE
12 - 80 Blank
81 - 100 Comments
If the previous /IF or /ELSEIF was not satisfied, source lines are selected until the
next /ENDIF.
If the previous /IF or /ELSEIF was satisfied, source lines are excluded until the
next /ENDIF.
/ENDIF (Positions 7-12)

The /ENDIF compiler directive is used to end the most recent /IF, /ELSEIF or
/ELSE group. The following entries are used for /ENDIF:
Positions Entry
7 - 12 /ENDIF
13 - 80 Blank
81 - 100 Comments
Following the /ENDIF directive, if the matching /IF directive was a selected line,
lines are unconditionally selected. Otherwise, the entire /IF group was not
selected, so lines continue to be not selected.
Rules for Testing Conditions

v /ELSEIF, and /ELSE are not valid outside an /IF group.
v An /IF group can contain at most one /ELSE directive. An /ELSEIF directive
cannot follow an /ELSE directive.
v /ENDIF is not valid outside an /IF, /ELSEIF or /ELSE group.
v Every /IF must be matched by a subsequent /ENDIF.

v All the directives associated with any one /IF group must be in the same source
file. It is not valid to have /IF in one file and the matching /ENDIF in another,
even if the second file is in a nested /COPY. However, a complete /IF group can
be in a nested /COPY.
The /EOF Directive

The /EOF directive tells the compiler to ignore the rest of the source lines in the
current source member.
/EOF (Positions 7-10)

The /EOF compiler directive is used to indicate that the compiler should consider
that end-of-file has been reached for the current source file. The following entries
are used for /EOF:
Positions Entry
7 - 10 /EOF
11 - 80 Blank
81 - 100 Comments
/EOF will end any active /IF group that became active during the reading of the
current source member. If the /EOF was in a /COPY file, then any conditions that
that were active when the /COPY directive was read will still be active.
Note: If excluded lines are being printed on the listing, the source lines will
continue to be read and listed after /EOF, but the content of the lines will be
completely ignored by the compiler. No diagnostic messages will ever be
issued after /EOF.
TIP
Using the /EOF directive will enhance compile-time performance when an
entire /COPY member is to be used only once, but may be copied in multiple
times. (This is not true if excluded lines are being printed).
The following is an example of the /EOF directive.
*-----------------------------------------------------------------
* Main source file
*-----------------------------------------------------------------
....
/IF DEFINED(READ_XYZ) 1
/COPY XYZ
/ENDIF 2
....
*-----------------------------------------------------------------
* /COPY file XYZ
*-----------------------------------------------------------------
/IF DEFINED(XYZ_COPIED) 3
/EOF
/ELSE
/DEFINE XYZ_COPIED
D .....
/ENDIF
Figure 4. /EOF Directive

The first time this /COPY member is read, XYZ_COPIED will not be defined, so
the /EOF will not be considered.
The second time this member is read, XYZ_COPIED is defined, so the /EOF is
processed. The /IF DEFINED(XYZ_COPIED) (3) is considered ended, and the
file is closed. However, the /IF DEFINED(READ_XYZ) (1) from the main source
member is still active until its own /ENDIF (2) is reached.

Chapter 3. Program Cycle
The ILE RPG compiler supplies part of the logic for an RPG program. The logic
the compiler supplies is called the program cycle or logic cycle. The program cycle is
a series of ordered steps that the main procedure goes through for each record
read.
The information that you code on RPG IV specifications in your source program
need not explicitly specify when records should be read or written. The ILE RPG
compiler can supply the logical order for these operations when your source
program is compiled. Depending on the specifications you code, your program
may or may not use each step in the cycle.
Primary (identified by a P in position 18 of the file description specifications) and

secondary (identified by an S in position 18 of the file description specifications)
files indicate input is controlled by the program cycle. A full procedural file
(identified by an F in position 18 of the file description specifications) indicates
that input is controlled by program-specified calculation operations (for example,
READ and CHAIN).
To control the cycle, you can have:

v One primary file and, optionally, one or more secondary files
v Only full procedural files
v A combination of one primary file, optional secondary files, and one or more full
procedural files in which some of the input is controlled by the cycle, and other
input is controlled by the program.
v No files (for example, input can come from a parameter list or a data area data
structure).
Note: No cycle code is generated for a module when NOMAIN is specified on the
control specification.
General RPG IV Program Cycle

Figure 5 on page 22 shows the specific steps in the general flow of the RPG IV
program cycle. A program cycle begins with step 1 and continues through step 7,
then begins again with step 1.
The first and last time a program goes through the RPG IV cycle differ somewhat
from the normal cycle. Before the first record is read the first time through the
cycle, the program resolves any parameters passed to it, writes the records
conditioned by the 1P (first page) indicator, does file and data initialization, and
processes any heading or detail output operations having no conditioning
indicators or all negative conditioning indicators. For example, heading lines
printed before the first record is read might consist of constant or page heading
information or fields for reserved words, such as PAGE and *DATE. In addition,
the program bypasses total calculations and total output steps on the first cycle.
During the last time a program goes through the cycle, when no more records are
available, the LR (last record) indicator and L1 through L9 (control level) indicators
are set on, and file and data area cleanup is done.

General RPG IV Program Cycle
Write Perform
Get input
Start heading and total
record
detail lines calculations
Perform No Write
LR on
detail Move fields total
calculations output
Yes
End of
program
Figure 5. RPG IV Program Logic Cycle
1 All heading and detail lines (H or D in position 17 of the output

specifications) are processed.
2 The next input record is read and the record identifying and control level
indicators are set on.
3 Total calculations are processed. They are conditioned by an L1 through L9
or LR indicator, or an L0 entry.
4 All total output lines are processed. (identified by a T in position 17 of the
output specifications).
5 It is determined if the LR indicator is on. If it is on, the program is ended.
6 The fields of the selected input records are moved from the record to a
processing area. Field indicators are set on.
7 All detail calculations are processed (those not conditioned by control level
indicators in positions 7 and 8 of the calculation specifications) on the data
from the record read at the beginning of the cycle.
Detailed RPG IV Program Cycle

In “General RPG IV Program Cycle” on page 21, the basic RPG IV Logic Cycle was
introduced. The following figures provide a detailed explanation of the RPG IV
Logic Cycle.

Start
Set of record identifying and

L1 through L9 indicators
Set of RT indicator
Parameters resolved
LR Yes Set on
on L1 through L9 29
First No
time program No
called
RT Yes Move factor 2 to

Yes result field for
on
Move result field *ENTRY PLIST
to factor 1 for
*ENTRY PLIST No
Return to caller
*INIT
Perform program initialization:
Run program initialization
Perform data structure and No
subfield initialization Primary file 29
Retrieve external indicators
(U1 through U8) and user
date fields
Open files Yes
Load data area data
structures, arrays, and tables
Move result field to factor 1
for *ENTRY PLIST
Run initialization subroutine,
*INZSR, if specified
Store data structures and
variables for RESET operation
On first cycle, retrieve first
*DETL record from primary file and
and from each secondary
Perform heading and detail file in program
output On other cycles, retrieve
Perform fetch overflow lines input record from last file
Set off first page processed, if required
indicators (1P)
*GETIN
No
Determine record
Any End of file type and sequence
No
H1 through H9
indicators
on Yes
Yes Undefined Yes
record type or sequ-
Set off Issue message ence error
halt to requester
indicator No
RPG exception/error
No handling routine
Response
cancel
Yes Yes
FORCE Initialize to process
issued the forced file 24
Cancel No
with dump
No
Yes Yes Match fields

Match fields 24
specified routine
Issue dump
No
Note: = RPG routine
36 24 (for detailed information
see the descriptions that
follow this picture).
Figure 6. Detailed RPG IV Object Program Cycle (Part 1 of 2)
Chapter 3. Program Cycle 23

Set on LR indicator
Should Yes *OFL
and all control level Overflow Yes
LR indicator Overflow
indicators indicator
be set on routine
(L1 through L9)
No
No
Set on record identifying
indicator for record selected Set MR indicator
on or off
No
Control break Make data available
from last record read
Set field indicators
Yes on or off
Set on appropriate
control level indicators
(L1 through L9)
Save control fields
Look-ahead Yes Look-ahead
fields specified routine
Should No
totals be No
executed
Yes *DETC
Perform detail calculations
*TOTC
Perform total calculations
*TOTL 4
Perform total output RETURN
LR Yes Yes
Halt indicators
on ?
No
No *TERM
Write locked data

area structures
LR Yes Reset external
on ? indicators
*CANCL
Close files
No Unlock other Data
areas locked by
the program
Halt Yes
Indicators
No
Move factor
2 to parms
Set return code.If

abnormal termination,
Note: = RPG routine (for detailed issue escape message
information, see the descriptions
that follow this figure).
Return
to caller
Figure 6. Detailed RPG IV Object Program Cycle (Part 2 of 2)
Detailed RPG IV Object Program Cycle

Figure 6 on page 23 shows the specific steps in the detailed flow of the RPG IV
program cycle. The item numbers in the following description refer to the numbers
in the figure. Routines are flowcharted in Figure 9 on page 33 and in Figure 7 on
page 29.

1 The RT indicator is set off. If *ENTRY PLIST is specified the parameters are
resolved.
2 RPG IV checks for the first invocation of the program. If it is the first
invocation, program initialization continues. If not, it moves the result field
to factor 1 in the PARM statements in *ENTRY PLIST and branches to step
5.
3 The program is initialized at *INIT in the cycle. This process includes:
performing data structure and subfield initialization, setting user date
fields; opening files; loading all data area data structures, arrays and tables;
moving the result field to factor 1 in the PARM statements in *ENTRY
PLIST; running the initialization subroutine *INZSR; and storing the
structures and variables for the RESET operation. Files are opened in
reverse order of their specification on the File Description Specifications.
4 Heading and detail lines (identified by an H or D in position 17 of the
output specifications) are written before the first record is read. Heading
and detail lines are always processed at the same time. If conditioning
indicators are specified, the proper indicator setting must be satisfied. If
fetch overflow logic is specified and the overflow indicator is on, the
appropriate overflow lines are written. File translation, if specified, is done
for heading and detail lines and overflow output. This step is the return
point in the program if factor 2 of an ENDSR operation contains the value
*DETL.
5 The halt indicators (H1 through H9) are tested. If all the halt indicators are
off, the program branches to step 8. Halt indicators can be set on anytime
during the program. This step is the return point in the program if factor 2
of an ENDSR operation contains the value *GETIN.
a. If any halt indicators are on, a message is issued to the user.
b. If the response is to continue, the halt indicator is set off, and the
program returns to step 5. If the response is to cancel, the program
goes to step 6.
6 If the response is to cancel with a dump, the program goes to step 7;
otherwise, the program branches to step 36.
7 The program issues a dump and branches to step 36 (abnormal ending).
8 All record identifying, 1P (first page), and control level (L1 through L9)
indicators are set off. All overflow indicators (OA through OG, OV) are set
off unless they have been set on during preceding detail calculations or
detail output. Any other indicators that are on remain on.
9 If the LR (last record) indicator is on, the program continues with step 10.
If it is not on, the program branches to step 11.
10 The appropriate control level (L1 through L9) indicators are set on and the
program branches to step 29.
11 If the RT indicator is on, the program continues with step 12; otherwise,
the program branches to step 14.
12 Factor 2 is moved to the result field for the parameters of the *ENTRY
PLIST.
13 If the RT indicator is on (return code set to 0), the program returns to the
caller.

14 If a primary file is present in the program, the program continues with
step 15; otherwise, the program branches to step 29.
15 During the first program cycle, the first record from the primary file and
from each secondary file in the program is read. File translation is done on
the input records. In other program cycles, a record is read from the last
file processed. If this file is processed by a record address file, the data in
the record address file defines the record to be retrieved. If lookahead
fields are specified in the last record processed, the record may already be
in storage; therefore, no read may be done at this time.
16 If end of file has occurred on the file just read, the program branches to
step 20. Otherwise, the program continues with step 17.
17 If a record has been read from the file, the record type and record sequence
(positions 17 through 20 of the input specifications) are determined.
18 It is determined whether the record type is defined in the program, and if
the record sequence is correct. If the record type is undefined or the record
sequence is incorrect, the program continues with step 19; otherwise, the
19 The RPG IV exception/error handling routine receives control.
20 It is determined whether a FORCE operation was processed on the
previous cycle. If a FORCE operation was processed, the program selects
that file for processing (step 21) and branches around the processing for
match fields (steps 22 and 23). The branch is processed because all records
processed with a FORCE operation are processed with the matching record
(MR) indicator off.
21 If FORCE was issued on the previous cycle, the program selects the forced
file for processing after saving any match fields from the file just read. If
the file forced is at end of file, normal primary/secondary multifile logic
selects the next record for processing and the program branches to step 24.
22 If match fields are specified, the program continues with step 23;
23 The match fields routine receives control. (For detailed information on the
match fields routine, see “Match Fields Routine” on page 29.)
24 The LR (last record) indicator is set on when all records are processed from
the files that have an E specified in position 19 of the file description
specifications and all matching secondary records have been processed. If
the LR indicator is not set on, processing continues with step 26.
25 The LR (last record) indicator is set on and all control level (L1 through L9)
indicators, and processing continues with step 29.
26 The record identifying indicator is set on for the record selected for
processing.
27 It is determined whether the record selected for processing caused a
control break. A control break occurs when the value in the control fields
of the record being processed differs from the value of the control fields of
the last record processed. If a control break has not occurred, the program
branches to step 29.
28 When a control break occurs, the appropriate control level indicator (L1
through L9) is set on. All lower level control indicators are set on. The
program saves the contents of the control fields for the next comparison.

29 It is determined whether the total-time calculations and total-time output
should be done. Totals are always processed when the LR indicator is on.
If no control level is specified on the input specifications, totals are
bypassed on the first cycle and after the first cycle, totals are processed on
every cycle. If control levels are specified on the input specifications, totals
are bypassed until after the first record containing control fields has been
processed.
30 All total calculations conditioned by a control level entry (positions 7 and 8
of the calculation specifications). are processed. This step is the return
point in the program if factor 2 of an ENDSR operation contains the value
*TOTC.
31 All total output is processed. If fetch overflow logic is specified and the
overflow indicator (OA through OG, OV) associated with the file is on, the
overflow lines are written. File translation, if specified, is done for all total
output and overflow lines. This step is the return point in the program if
factor 2 of an ENDSR operation contains the value *TOTL.
32 If LR is on, the program continues with step 33; otherwise, the program
33 The halt indicators (H1 through H9) are tested. If any halt indicators are
on, the program branches to step 36 (abnormal ending). If the halt
indicators are off, the program continues with step 34. If the RETURN
operation code is used in calculations, the program branches to step 33
after processing of that operation.
34 If LR is on, the program continues with step 35. If it is not on, the program
35 RPG IV program writes all arrays or tables for which the TOFILE keyword
has been specified on the definition specification and writes all locked data
area data structures. Output arrays and tables are translated, if necessary.
36 All open files are closed. The RPG IV program also unlocks all data areas
that have been locked but not unlocked by the program. If factor 2 of an
ENDSR operation contains the value *CANCL, this step is the return point.
37 The halt indicators (H1 through H9) are tested. If any halt indicators are
on, the program branches to step 39 (abnormal ending). If the halt
indicators are off, the program continues with step 38.
38 The factor 2 fields are moved to the result fields on the PARMs of the
*ENTRY PLIST.
39 The return code is set. 1 = LR on, 2 = error, 3 = halt.
40 Control is returned to the caller.
Note: Steps 32 through 40 constitute the normal ending routine. For an abnormal
ending, steps 34 through 35 are bypassed.
41 It is determined whether any overflow indicators (OA through OG OV) are
on. If an overflow indicator is on, the program continues with step 42;
42 The overflow routine receives control. (For detailed information on the
overflow routine, see “Overflow Routine” on page 29.) This step is the
return point in the program if factor 2 of an ENDSR operation contains the
value *OFL.
43 The MR indicator is set on and remains on for the complete cycle that

processes the matching record if this is a multifile program and if the
record to be processed is a matching record. Otherwise, the MR indicator is
set off.
44 Data from the last record read is made available for processing. Field
indicators are set on, if specified.
45 If lookahead fields are specified, the program continues with step 46;
46 The lookahead routine receives control. (For detailed information on the
lookahead routine, see “Lookahead Routine” on page 30.)
47 Detail calculations are processed. This step is the return point in the
program if factor 2 of an ENDSR operation contains the value *DETC. The
Initialization Subroutine
Refer to Figure 6 on page 23 to see a detailed explanation of the RPG IV
initialization subroutine.
The initialization subroutine allows you to process calculation specifications before

1P output. A specific subroutine that is to be run at program initialization time can
be defined by specifying *INZSR in factor 1 of the subroutine’s BEGSR operation.
Only one subroutine can be defined as an initialization subroutine. It is called at
the end of the program initialization step of the program cycle (that is, after data
structures and subfields are initialized, external indicators and user data fields are
retrieved, files are opened, data area data structures, arrays, and tables are loaded,
and PARM result fields moved to factor 1 for *ENTRY PLIST). *INZSR may not be
specified as a file/program error/exception subroutine.
If a program ends with LR off, the initialization subroutine does not automatically
run during the next invocation of that program because the subroutine is part of
the initialization step of the program. However, if the initialization subroutine does
not complete before an exit is made from the program with LR off, the
initialization subroutine will be re-run at the next invocation of that program.
The initialization subroutine is like any other subroutine in the program, other
than being called at program initialization time. It may be called using the EXSR or
CASxx operations, and it may call other subroutines or other programs. Any
operation that is valid in a subroutine is valid in the initialization subroutine, with
the exception of the RESET operation. This is because the value used to reset a
variable is not defined until after the initialization subroutine is run.
Any changes made to a variable during the initialization subroutine affect the
value that the variable is set to on a subsequent RESET operation. Default values
can be defined for fields in record formats by, for example, setting them in the
initialization subroutine and then using RESET against the record format whenever
the default values are to be used. The initialization subroutine can also retrieve
information such as the current time for 1P output.
There is no *INZSR associated with subprocedures. If a subprocedure is the first

procedure called in a module, the *INZSR of the main procedure will not be run,
although other initialization of global data will be done. The *INZSR of the main
procedure will be run when the main procedure is called.

Match fields
routine
Multifile No Overflow Look-ahead

processing routine routine
Yes
Line Retrive next
put out Yes
Determine the record for
file to be processed with previous this file
fetch
No
RPG exeption/ Perform Extract the

Match fields Yes overflow
error handling look-ahead
sequence error output fields
routine
No
Move the match Return Return

fields to the
match field hold area
Return
Figure 7. Detail Flow of RPG IV Match Fields, Overflow, and Lookahead Routines
Match Fields Routine

Figure 7 shows the specific steps in the RPG IV match fields routine. The item
numbers in the following descriptions refer to the numbers in the figure.
1 If multifile processing is being used, processing continues with step 2;
2 The value of the match fields in the hold area is tested to determine which
file is to be processed next.
3 The RPG IV program extracts the match fields from the match files and
processes sequence checking. If the match fields are in sequence, the
4 If the match fields are not in sequence, the RPG IV exception/error
handling routine receives control.
5 The match fields are moved to the hold area for that file. A hold area is
provided for each file that has match fields. The next record is selected for
processing based on the value in the match fields.
Overflow Routine
Figure 7 shows the specific steps in the RPG IV overflow routine. The item
numbers in the following descriptions refer to the numbers in the figure.
1 The RPG IV program determines whether the overflow lines were written
previously using the fetch overflow logic (step 30 in Figure 6 on page 23). If
the overflow lines were written previously, the program branches to the
specified return point; otherwise, processing continues with step 2.
2 All output lines conditioned with an overflow indicator are tested and
written to the conditioned overflow lines.
The fetch overflow routine allows you to alter the basic RPG IV overflow logic to
prevent printing over the perforation and to let you use as much of the page as
possible. During the regular program cycle, the RPG IV program checks only once,

immediately after total output, to see if the overflow indicator is on. When the
fetch overflow function is specified, the RPG IV program checks overflow on each
line for which fetch overflow is specified.
Specify fetch overflow with an F in position 18 of the output specifications on any

detail, total, or exception lines for a PRINTER file. The fetch overflow routine does
not automatically cause forms to advance to the next page.
During output, the conditioning indicators on an output line are tested to

determine whether the line is to be written. If the line is to be written and an F is
specified in position 18, the RPG IV program tests to determine whether the
overflow indicator is on. If the overflow indicator is on, the overflow routine is
fetched and the following operations occur:
v Only the overflow lines for the file with the fetch specified are checked for
output.
v All total lines conditioned by the overflow indicator are written.
v Forms advance to a new page when a skip to a line number less than the line
number the printer is currently on is specified in a line conditioned by an
overflow indicator.
v Heading, detail, and exception lines conditioned by the overflow indicator are
written.
v The line that fetched the overflow routine is written.
v Any detail and total lines left to be written for that program cycle are written.
Position 18 of each OR line must contain an F if the overflow routine is to be used

for each record in the OR relationship. Fetch overflow cannot be used if an
overflow indicator is specified in positions 21 through 29 of the same specification
line. If this occurs, the overflow routine is not fetched.
Use the fetch overflow routine when there is not enough space left on the page to
print the remaining detail, total, exception, and heading lines conditioned by the
overflow indicator. To determine when to fetch the overflow routine, study all
possible overflow situations. By counting lines and spaces, you can calculate what
happens if overflow occurs on each detail, total, and exception line.
Lookahead Routine
Figure 7 on page 29 shows the specific steps in the RPG IV lookahead routine. The
item numbers in the following descriptions refer to the numbers in the figure.
1 The next record for the file being processed is read. However, if the file is a
combined or update file (identified by a C or U, respectively, in position 17
of the file description specifications), the lookahead fields from the current
record being processed is extracted.
2 The lookahead fields are extracted.
Ending a Program without a Primary File

If your program does not contain a primary file, you must specify a way for the
program to end:
v By setting the LR indicator on
v By setting the RT indicator on
v By setting an H1 through H9 indicator on
v By specifying the RETURN operation code

The LR, RT, H1 through H9 indicators, and the RETURN operation code, can be
used in conjunction with each other.
Program Control of File Processing

Specify a full procedural file (F in position 18 of the file description specifications)
to control all or partial input of a program. A full procedural file indicates that
input is controlled by program-specified calculation operations (for example,
READ, CHAIN). When both full procedural files and a primary file (P in position
18 of the file description specifications) are specified in a program, some of the
input is controlled by the program, and other input is controlled by the cycle. The
program cycle exists when a full procedural file is specified; however, file
processing occurs at detail or total calculation time for the full procedural file.
The file operation codes can be used for program control of input. These file
operation codes are discussed in “File Operations” on page 397.

START
Performs heading
operations. Performs
Performs detail detail output operations.
calculations. Sets If overflow line has been
resulting indicators. reached, sets on overflow
indicator.
Moves data from record selected at

beginning of cycle into processing area.
Sets off control level

indicators. Sets off record
identifying indicators.
Overflow indicator on? Yes, performs

Reads a record.
overflow operations.
End-of-file? Yes, sets on

control level and LR indicators
and skips to perform total
LR indicator on? Yes, end of calculations.
program has been reached.
Sets on record identifying indicators
for the record just read.
Performs total output operations.

Change in control fields?
If overflow line has been reached,
Yes, sets on control level
sets on overflow indicator.
indicators.
Performs total calculations.

Sets resulting indicators. Note: The boxed steps
are bypassed when no
primary file exists;
that is, when the
programmer controls
all the input operations.
Figure 8. Programmer Control of Input Operation within the Program-Cycle

No Process next
Exception/Error?
sequential instruction
Yes
Set up file information

or program status data
structure if coded
Error indicator Yes Set on indicator and

coded on operation? process next
sequential instruction
No
Yes Control passes to INFSR

INFSR or *PSSR
subroutine present? or *PSSR subroutine
No Return point specified?
No
Yes
Return to specified point
Status code Yes

1121-1126 Resume current
present ? operation
No
Percolate exception to
No caller of this procedure
Exception is
See text for more
Function Check
information on the next point
in this procedure.
Yes
Issue message
to requester
No
Response cancel ?
Continue procedure
Yes
No
Cancel with Dump
Yes
Issue Dump
Close Files
Unlock Data Areas
Set procedure so
that it can be called again
Set return code and

percolate Function Check
Figure 9. Detail Flow of RPG IV Exception/Error Handling Routine
RPG IV Exception/Error Handling Routine

Figure 9 shows the specific steps in the RPG IV exception/error handling routine.
The item numbers in the following description refer to the numbers in the figure.

1 Set up the file information or procedure status data structure, if specified,
with status information.
2 If the exception/error occurred on an operation code that has an indicator
specified in positions 73 and 74, the indicator is set on, and control returns
to the next sequential instruction in the calculations.
3 If the appropriate exception/error subroutine (INFSR or *PSSR) is present
in the procedure, the procedure branches to step 13; otherwise, the
procedure continues with step 4.
4 If the Status code is 1121-1126 (see “File Status Codes” on page 77), control
returns to the current instruction in the calculations. If not, the procedure
continues with step 5.
5 If the exception is a function check, the procedure continues with step 6. If
not, it branches to step 15.
6 An inquiry message is issued to the requester. For an interactive job, the
message goes to the requester. For a batch job, the message goes to
QSYSOPR. If QSYSOPR is not in break mode, a default response is issued.
7 If the user’s response is to cancel the procedure, the procedure continues
with step 8. If not, the procedure continues.
8 If the user’s response is to cancel with a dump, the procedure continues
with step 9. If not, the procedure branches to step 10.
9 A dump is issued.
10 All files are closed and data areas are unlocked
11 The procedure is set so that it can be called again.
12 The return code is set and the function check is percolated.
13 Control passes to the exception/error subroutine (INFSR or *PSSR).
14 If a return point is specified in factor 2 of the ENDSR operation for the
exception/error subroutine, the procedure goes to the specified return
point. If a return point is not specified, the procedure goes to step 4. If a
field name is specified in factor 2 of the ENDSR operation and the content
is not one of the RPG IV-defined return points (such as *GETIN or *DETC),
the procedure goes to step 6. No error is indicated, and the original error is
handled as though the factor 2 entry were blank.
15 If no invocation handles the exception, then it is promoted to function
check and the procedure branches to step 5. Otherwise, depending on the
action taken by the handler, control resumes in this procedure either at
step 10 or at the next machine instruction after the point at which the
exception occurred.

Chapter 4. RPG IV Indicators
An indicator is a one byte character field which contains either ’1’ (on) or ’0’ (off).
It is generally used to indicate the result of an operation or to condition (control)
the processing of an operation.
The indicator format can be specified on the definition specifications to define

indicator variables. For a description of how to define character data in the
indicator format, see “Character Format” on page 170 and “Position 40 (Internal
Data Type)” on page 286. This chapter describes a special set of predefined RPG IV
indicators (*INxx).
RPG IV indicators are defined either by an entry on a specification or by the RPG

IV program itself. The positions on the specification in which you define the
indicator determine how the indicator is used. An indicator that has been defined
can then be used to condition calculation and output operations.
The RPG IV program sets and resets certain indicators at specific times during the
program cycle. In addition, the state of most indicators can be changed by
calculation operations. All indicators except MR, 1P, KA through KN, and KP
through KY can be set on with the SETON operation code; all indicators except
MR and 1P can be set off with the SETOFF operation code.
This chapter is divided into the following topics:

v Indicators defined on the RPG IV specifications
v Indicators not defined on the RPG IV specifications
v Using indicators
v Indicators referred to as data.
Indicators Defined on RPG IV Specifications

You can specify the following indicators on the RPG IV specifications:
v Overflow indicator (the OFLIND keyword on the file description specifications).
v Record identifying indicator (positions 21 and 22 of the input specifications).
v Control level indicator (positions 63 and 64 of the input specifications).
v Field indicator (positions 69 through 74 of the input specifications).
v Resulting indicator (positions 71 through 76 of the calculation specifications).
v *IN array, *IN(xx) array element or *INxx field (See “Indicators Referred to As
Data” on page 60 for a description of how an indicator is defined when used
with one of these reserved words.).
The defined indicator can then be used to condition operations in the program.
Overflow Indicators
An overflow indicator is defined by the OFLIND keyword on the file description
specifications. It is set on when the last line on a page has been printed or passed.
Valid indicators are *INOA through *INOG, *INOV, and *IN01 through *IN99. A
defined overflow indicator can then be used to condition calculation and output
operations. A description of the overflow indicator and fetch overflow logic is
given in “Overflow Routine” on page 29.

Record Identifying Indicators
A record identifying indicator is defined by an entry in positions 21 and 22 of the
input specifications and is set on when the corresponding record type is selected
for processing. That indicator can then be used to condition certain calculation and
output operations. Record identifying indicators do not have to be assigned in any
particular order.
The valid record identifying indicators are:

v 01-99
v H1-H9
v L1-L9
v LR
v U1-U8
v RT
For an externally described file, a record identifying indicator is optional, but, if

you specify it, it follows the same rules as for a program described file.
Generally, the indicators 01 through 99 are used as record identifying indicators.

However, the control level indicators (L1 through L9) and the last record indicator
(LR) can be used. If L1 through L9 are specified as record identifying indicators,
lower level indicators are not set on.
When you select a record type for processing, the corresponding record identifying
indicator is set on. All other record identifying indicators are off except when a file
operation code is used at detail and total calculation time to retrieve records from a
file (see below). The record identifying indicator is set on after the record is
selected, but before the input fields are moved to the input area. The record
identifying indicator for the new record is on during total time for the old record;
therefore, calculations processed at total time using the fields of the old record
cannot be conditioned by the record identifying indicator of the old record. You
can set the indicators off at any time in the program cycle; they are set off before
the next primary or secondary record is selected.
If you use a file operation code on the calculation specifications to retrieve a

record, the record identifying indicator is set on as soon as the record is retrieved
from the file. The record identifying indicator is not set off until the appropriate
point in the RPG IV cycle. (See Figure 8 on page 32.) Therefore, it is possible to
have several record identifying indicators for the same file, as well as
record-not-found indicators, set on concurrently if several operations are issued to
the same file within the same RPG IV program cycle.
Rules for Assigning Record Identifying Indicators

When you assign record identifying indicators to records in a program described
file, remember the following:
v You can assign the same indicator to two or more different record types if the
same operation is to be processed on all record types. To do this, you specify the
record identifying indicator in positions 21 and 22, and specify the record
identification codes for the various record types in an OR relationship.
v You can associate a record identifying indicator with an AND relationship, but it
must appear on the first line of the group. Record identifying indicators cannot
be specified on AND lines.

v An undefined record (a record in a program described file that was not
described by a record identification code in positions 23 through 46) causes the
program to halt.
v A record identifying indicator can be specified as a record identifying indicator
for another record type, as a field indicator, or as a resulting indicator. No
diagnostic message is issued, but this use of indicators may cause erroneous
results.
When you assign record identifying indicators to records in an externally described

file, remember the following:
v AND/OR relationships cannot be used with record format names; however, the
same record identifying indicator can be assigned to more than one record.
v The record format name, rather than the file name, must be specified in
positions 7 through 16.
For an example of record identifying indicators, see Figure 10.
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...
*
I*Record identifying indicator 01 is set on if the record read
I*contains an S in position 1 or an A in position 1.
IINPUT1 NS 01 1 CS
I OR 1 CA
I 1 25 FLD1
* Record identifying indicator 02 is set on if the record read
* contains XYZA in positions 1 through 4.
I NS 02 1 CX 2 CY 3 CZ
I AND 4 CA
I 1 15 FLDA
I 16 20 FLDB
* Record identifying indicator 95 is set on if any record read
* does not meet the requirements for record identifying indicators
* 01 or 02.
I NS 95
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...
IRcdname+++....Ri........................................................
*
* For an externally described file, record identifying indicator 10
* is set on if the ITMREC record is read and record identifying
* indicator 20 is set on if the SLSREC or COMREC records are read.
IITMREC 10
ISLSREC 20
ICOMREC 20
Figure 10. Examples of Record Identifying Indicators
Control Level Indicators (L1-L9)

A control level indicator is defined by an entry in positions 63 and 64 of the input
specifications, designating an input field as a control field. It can then be used to
condition calculation and output operations. The valid control level indicator
entries are L1 through L9.
A control level indicator designates an input field as a control field. When a control
field is read, the data in the control field is compared with the data in the same
control field from the previous record. If the data differs, a control break occurs,
and the control level indicator assigned to the control field is set on. You can then
use control level indicators to condition operations that are to be processed only
Chapter 4. RPG IV Indicators 37

when all records with the same information in the control field have been read.
Because the indicators stay on for both total time and the first detail time, they can
also be used to condition total printing (last record of a control group) or detail
printing (first record in a control group). Control level indicators are set off before
the next record is read.
A control break can occur after the first record containing a control field is read.
The control fields in this record are compared to an area in storage that contains
hexadecimal zeros. Because fields from two different records are not being
compared, total calculations and total output operations are bypassed for this
cycle.
Control level indicators are ranked in order of importance with L1 being the lowest
and L9 the highest. All lower level indicators are set on when a higher level
indicator is set on as the result of a control break. However, the lower level
indicators can be used in the program only if they have been defined. For example,
if L8 is set on by a control break, L1 through L7 are also set on. The LR (last
record) indicator is set on when the input files are at end of file. LR is considered
the highest level indicator and forces L1 through L9 to be set on.
You can also define control level indicators as record identifying or resulting
indicators. When you use them in this manner, the status of the lower level
indicators is not changed when a higher level indicator is set on. For example, if
L3 is used as a resulting indicator, the status of L2 and L1 would not change if L3
is set on.
The importance of a control field in relation to other fields determines how you
assign control level indicators. For example, data that demands a subtotal should
have a lower control level indicator than data that needs a final total. A control
field containing department numbers should have a higher control level indicator
than a control field containing employee numbers if employees are to be grouped
within departments (see Figure 11 on page 40).
Rules for Control Level Indicators

When you assign control level indicators, remember the following:
v You can specify control fields only for primary or secondary files.
v You cannot specify control fields for full procedural files; numeric input fields of
type binary, integer, unsigned or float; or look-ahead fields.
v You cannot use control level indicators when an array name is specified in
positions 49 through 62 of the input specifications; however, you can use control
level indicators with an array element. Control level indicators are not allowed
for null-capable fields.
v Control level compare operations are processed for records in the order in which
they are found, regardless of the file from which they come.
v If you use the same control level indicator in different record types or in
different files, the control fields associated with that control level indicator must
be the same length (see Figure 11 on page 40) except for date, time, and
timestamp fields which need only match in type (that is, they can be different
formats).
v The control level indicator field length is the length of a control level indicator
in a record. For example, if L1 has a field length of 10 bytes in a record, the
control level indicator field length for L1 is 10 positions.
The control level indicator field length for split control fields is the sum of the
lengths of all fields associated with a control level indicator in a record. If L2 has

a split control field consisting of 3 fields of length: 12 bytes, 2 bytes and 4 bytes;
then the control level indicator field length for L2 is 18 positions.
If multiple records use the same control level indicator, then the control level
indicator field length is the length of only one record, not the sum of all the
lengths of the records.
Within a program, the sum of the control level indicator field lengths of all
control level indicators cannot exceed 256 positions.
v Record positions in control fields assigned different control level indicators can
overlap in the same record type (see Figure 12 on page 40). For record types that
require control or match fields, the total length of the control or match field
must be less than or equal to 256. For example, in Figure 12 on page 40, 15
positions have been assigned to control levels.
v Field names are ignored in control level operations. Therefore, fields from
different record types that have been assigned the same control level indicator
can have the same name.
v Control levels need not be written in any sequence. An L2 entry can appear
before L1. All lower level indicators need not be assigned.
v If different record types in a file do not have the same number of control fields,
unwanted control breaks can occur.
Figure 13 on page 41 shows an example of how to avoid unwanted control breaks.

*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...
A* EMPLOYEE MASTER FILE -- EMPMSTL
A R EMPREC PFILE(EMPMSTL)
A EMPLNO 6
A DEPT 3
A DIVSON 1
A*
A* (ADDITIONAL FIELDS)
A*
A R EMPTIM PFILE(EMPMSTP)
A EMPLNO 6
A DEPT 3
A DIVSON 1
A*
A* (ADDITIONAL FIELDS)
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...
*
* In this example, control level indicators are defined for three
* fields. The names of the control fields (DIVSON, DEPT, EMPLNO)
* give an indication of their relative importance.
* The division (DIVSON) is the most important group.
* It is given the highest control level indicator used (L3).
* The department (DEPT) ranks below the division;
* L2 is assigned to it. The employee field (EMPLNO) has
* the lowest control level indicator (L1) assigned to it.
*
IEMPREC 10
I EMPLNO L1
I DIVSON L3
I DEPT L2
*
* The same control level indicators can be used for different record
* types. However, the control fields having the same indicators must
* be the same length. For records in an externally described file,
* the field attributes are defined in the external description.
*
IEMPTIM 20
I EMPLNO L1
I DEPT L2
I DIVSON L3
Figure 11. Control Level Indicators (Two Record Types)
Control Field 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Control Field 2
A total of 15 positions has been

assigned to these control levels.
Figure 12. Overlapping Control Fields

(L2) (L2) (L1)

Salesman Salesman Salesman
Number Name Number Item Number Amount
1 2 3 15 1 2 3 5 6 8
Salesman Record Item Record
Figure 13. How to Avoid Unwanted Control Breaks (Part 1 of 4)
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...
ISALES 01
I 1 2 L2FLD L2
I 3 15 NAME
IITEM 02
I 1 2 L2FLD L2
I 3 5 L1FLD L1
I 6 8 AMT
CL0N01Factor1+++++++Opcode(E)+Factor2+++++++Result++++++++Len++D+HiLoEq..
* Indicator 11 is set on when the salesman record is read.
*
C 01 SETON 11
*
* Indicator 11 is set off when the item record is read.
* This allows the normal L1 control break to occur.
*
C 02 SETOFF 11
C 02AMT ADD L1TOT L1TOT 5 0
CL1 L1TOT ADD L2TOT L2TOT 5 0
CL2 L2TOT ADD LRTOT LRTOT 5 0
*

*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...
OPRINTER D 01 1 1
O L2FLD 5
O NAME 25
O D 02 1
O L1FLD 15
O AMT Z 15
*
* When the next item record causes an L1 control break, no total
* output is printed if indicator 11 is on. Detail calculations
* are then processed for the item record.
*
O T L1N11 1
O L1TOT ZB 25
O 27 ’*’
O T L2 1
O L2TOT ZB 25
O 28 ’**’
O T LR 1
O LRTOT ZB 25
01 JOHN SMITH Unwanted 01 JOHN SMITH

* control
100 3 break 100 3
100 2 100 2
5 * 5 *
101 4 101 4
4 * 4 *
9 ** 9 **
02 JANE DOE Unwanted 02 JANE DOE

* control
100 6 break 100 6
100 2 100 2
8 * 8 *
101 3 101 3
3 * 3 *
11 ** 11 **
20 20
Output Showing Unwanted Control Level Break Corrected Output
Different record types normally contain the same number of control fields.
However, some applications require a different number of control fields in some
records.

The salesman records contain only the L2 control field. The item records contain
both L1 and L2 control fields. With normal RPG IV coding, an unwanted control
break is created by the first item record following the salesman record. This is
recognized by an L1 control break immediately following the salesman record and
results in an asterisk being printed on the line below the salesman record.
v Numeric control fields are compared in zoned decimal format. Packed numeric
input fields lengths can be determined by the formula:
d = 2n - 1
Where d = number of digits in the field and n = length of the input field. The
number of digits in a packed numeric field is always odd; therefore, when a
packed numeric field is compared with a zoned decimal numeric field, the
zoned field must have an odd length.
v When numeric control fields with decimal positions are compared to determine
whether a control break has occurred, they are always treated as if they had no
decimal positions. For instance, 3.46 is considered equal to 346.
v If you specify a field as numeric, only the positive numeric value determines
whether a control break has occurred; that is, a field is always considered to be
positive. For example, -5 is considered equal to +5.
v Date and time fields are converted to *ISO format before being compared
v Graphic data is compared by hexadecimal value
Split Control Field

A split control field is formed when you assign more than one field in an input
record the same control level indicator. For a program described file, the fields that
have the same control level indicator are combined by the program in the order
specified in the input specifications and treated as a single control field (see
Figure 14). The first field defined is placed in the high-order (leftmost) position of
the control field, and the last field defined is placed in the low-order (rightmost)
position of the control field.
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...
IMASTER 01
I 28 31 CUSNO L4
I 15 20 ACCTNO L4
I 50 52 REGNO L4
Figure 14. Split Control Fields
For an externally described file, fields that have the same control level indicator are
combined in the order in which the fields are described in the data description
specifications (DDS), not in the order in which the fields are specified on the input
specifications. For example, if these fields are specified in DDS in the following
order:
v EMPNO
v DPTNO
v REGNO
and if these fields are specified with the same control level indicator in the
following order on the input specifications:
v REGNO L3
v DPTNO L3

v EMPNO L3
the fields are combined in the following order to form a split control field: EMPNO
DPTNO REGNO.
Some special rules for split control fields are:

v For one control level indicator, you can split a field in some record types and not
in others if the field names are different. However, the length of the field,
whether split or not, must be the same in all record types.
v You can vary the length of the portions of a split control field for different
record types if the field names are different. However, the total length of the
portions must always be the same.
v A split control field can be made up of a combination of packed decimal fields
and zoned decimal fields so long as the field lengths (in digits or characters) are
the same.
v You must assign all portions of a split control field in one record type the same
field record relation indicator and it must be defined on consecutive specification
lines.
v When a split control field contains a date, time, or timestamp field than all fields
in the split control field must be of the same type.
Figure 15 shows examples of the preceding rules.
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...
IDISK BC 91 95 C1
I OR 92 95 C2
I OR 93 95 C3
I
* All portions of the split control field must be assigned the same
* control level indicator and all must have the same field record
* relation entry.
I 1 5 FLD1A L1
I 46 50 FLD1B L1
I 11 13 FLDA L2
I 51 60 FLD2A L3
I 31 40 FLD2B L3
I 71 75 FLD3A L4 92
I 26 27 FLD3B L4 92
I 41 45 FLD3C L4 92
I 61 70 FLDB 92
I 21 25 FLDC 92
I 6 10 FLD3D L4 93
I 14 20 FLD3E L4 93
Figure 15. Split Control Fields–Special Rules
The record identified by a ’1’ in position 95 has two split control fields:
1. FLD1A and FLD1B
2. FLD2A and FLD2B
The record identified with a ’2’ in position 95 has three split control fields:
1. FLD1A and FLD1B
2. FLD2A and FLD2B
3. FLD3A, FLD3B, and FLD3C

The third record type, identified by the 3 in position 95, also has three split control
fields:
1. FLD1A and FLD1B
2. FLD2A and FLD2B
3. FLD3D and FLD3E
Field Indicators
A field indicator is defined by an entry in positions 69 and 70, 71 and 72, or 73 and
74 of the input specifications. The valid field indicators are:
v 01-99
v H1-H9
v U1-U8
v RT
You can use a field indicator to determine if the specified field or array element is
greater than zero, less than zero, zero, or blank. Positions 69 through 72 are valid
for numeric fields only; positions 73 and 74 are valid for numeric or character
fields. An indicator specified in positions 69 and 70 is set on when the numeric
input field is greater than zero; an indicator specified in positions 71 and 72 is set
on when the numeric input field is less than zero; and an indicator specified in
positions 73 and 74 is set on when the numeric input field is zero or when the
character input field is blank. You can then use the field indicator to condition
calculation or output operations.
A field indicator is set on when the data for the field or array element is extracted
from the record and the condition it represents is present in the input record. This
field indicator remains on until another record of the same type is read and the
condition it represents is not present in the input record, or until the indicator is
set off as the result of a calculation.
You can use halt indicators (H1 through H9) as field indicators to check for an
error condition in the field or array element as it is read into the program.
Rules for Assigning Field Indicators

When you assign field indicators, remember the following:
v Indicators for plus, minus, zero, or blank are set off at the beginning of the
program. They are not set on until the condition (plus, minus, zero, or blank) is
satisfied by the field being tested on the record just read.
v Field indicators cannot be used with entire arrays or with look-ahead fields.
However, an entry can be made for an array element. Field indicators are
allowed for null-capable fields only if ALWNULL(*USRCTL) is used.
v A numeric input field can be assigned two or three field indicators. However,
only the indicator that signals the result of the test on that field is set on; the
others are set off.
v If the same field indicator is assigned to fields in different record types, its state
(on or off) is always based on the last record type selected.
v When different field indicators are assigned to fields in different record types, a
field indicator remains on until another record of that type is read. Similarly, a
field indicator assigned to more than one field within a single record type
always reflects the status of the last field defined.
v The same field indicator can be specified as a field indicator on another input
specification, as a resulting indicator, as a record identifying indicator, or as a

field record relation indicator. No diagnostic message is issued, but this use of
indicators could cause erroneous results, especially when match fields or level
control is involved.
v If the same indicator is specified in all three positions, the indicator is always set
on when the record containing this field is selected.
Resulting Indicators
Resulting indicators are used by calculation specifications in the traditional format
(C specifications). They are not used by free-form calculation specifications. For
most operation codes, in either traditional format or free-form, you can use built-in
functions instead of resulting indicators. For more information, see “Built-in
Functions” on page 376.
A resulting indicator is defined by an entry in positions 71 through 76 of the

calculation specifications. The purpose of the resulting indicators depends on the
operation code specified in positions 26 through 35. (See the individual operation
code in Chapter 23, “Operation Codes” on page 523 for a description of the
purpose of the resulting indicators.) For example, resulting indicators can be used
to test the result field after an arithmetic operation, to identify a record-not-found
condition, to indicate an exception/error condition for a file operation, or to
indicate an end-of-file condition.
The valid resulting indicators are:

v 01-99
v H1-H9
v OA-OG, OV
v L1-L9
v LR
v U1-U8
v KA-KN, KP-KY (valid only with SETOFF)
v RT
You can specify resulting indicators in three places (positions 71-72, 73-74, and
75-76) of the calculation specifications. The positions in which the resulting
indicator is defined determine the condition to be tested.
In most cases, when a calculation is processed, the resulting indicators are set off,
and, if the condition specified by a resulting indicator is satisfied, that indicator is
set on. However, there some exceptions to this rule, notably “LOOKUP (Look Up a
Table or Array Element)” on page 620, “SETOFF (Set Indicator Off)” on page 719,
and “SETON (Set Indicator On)” on page 720. A resulting indicator can be used as
a conditioning indicator on the same calculation line or in other calculations or
output operations. When you use it on the same line, the prior setting of the
indicator determines whether or not the calculation is processed. If it is processed,
the result field is tested and the current setting of the indicator is determined (see
Figure 16 on page 47).
Rules for Assigning Resulting Indicators

When assigning resulting indicators, remember the following:
v Resulting indicators cannot be used when the result field refers to an entire
array.
v If the same indicator is used to test the result of more than one operation, the
last operation processed determines the setting of the indicator.

v When L1 through L9 indicators are used as resulting indicators and are set on,
lower level indicators are not set on. For example, if L8 is set on, L1 through L7
are not set on.
v If H1 through H9 indicators are set on when used as resulting indicators, the
program halts unless the halt indicator is set off prior to being checked in the
program cycle. (See Chapter 3, “Program Cycle” on page 21).
v The same indicator can be used to test for more than one condition depending
on the operation specified.
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...
*
* Two resulting indicators are used to test for the different
* conditions in a subtraction operation. These indicators are
* used to condition the calculations that must be processed for
* a payroll job. Indicator 10 is set on if the hours worked (HRSWKD)
* are greater than 40 and is then used to condition all operations
* necessary to find overtime pay. If Indicator 20 is not on
* (the employee worked 40 or more hours), regular pay based on a
* 40-hour week is calculated.
*
C HRSWKD SUB 40 OVERTM 3 01020
*
C N20PAYRAT MULT (H) 40 PAY 6 2
C 10OVERTM MULT (H) OVRRAT OVRPAY 6 2
C 10OVRPAY ADD PAY PAY
*
* If indicator 20 is on (employee worked less than 40 hours), pay
* based on less than a 40-hour week is calculated.
C 20PAYRAT MULT (H) HRSWKD PAY
*
Figure 16. Resulting Indicators Used to Condition Operations
Indicators Not Defined on the RPG IV Specifications

Not all indicators that can be used as conditioning indicators in an RPG IV
program are defined on the specification forms. External indicators (U1 through
U8) are defined by a CL command or by a previous RPG IV program. Internal
indicators (1P, LR, MR, and RT) are defined by the RPG IV program cycle itself.
External Indicators
The external indicators are U1 through U8. These indicators can be set in a CL
program or in an RPG IV program. In a CL program, they can be set by the SWS
(switch-setting) parameter on the CL commands CHGJOB (Change Job) or
CRTJOBD (Create Job Description). In an RPG IV program, they can be set as a
resulting indicator or field indicator.
The status of the external indicators can be changed in the program by specifying
them as resulting indicators on the calculation specifications or as field indicators
on the input specifications. However, changing the status of the OS/400 job
switches with a CL program during processing of an RPG IV program has no
effect on the copy of the external indicators used by the RPG IV program. Setting
the external indicators on or off in the program has no effect on file operations.
File operations function according to the status of the U1 through U8 indicators
when the program is initialized. However, when a program ends normally with LR
on, the external indicators are copied back into storage, and their status reflects

their last status in the RPG IV program. The current status of the external
indicators can then be used by other programs.
Note: When using “RETURN (Return to Caller)” on page 702 with the LR indicator
off, you are specifying a return without an end and, as a result, no external
indicators are updated.
Internal Indicators
Internal indicators include:
v First page indicator
v Last record indicator
v Matching record indicator
v Return Indicator.
First Page Indicator (1P)

The first page (1P) indicator is set on by the RPG IV program when the program
starts running and is set off by the RPG IV program after detail time output. The
first record will be processed after detail time output. The 1P indicator can be used
to condition heading or detail records that are to be written at 1P time. Do not use
the 1P indicator in any of the following ways:
v To condition output fields that require data from input records; this is because
the input data will not be available.
v To condition total or exception output lines
v In an AND relationship with control level indicators
v As a resulting indicator
v When NOMAIN is specified on a control specification
Last Record Indicator (LR)

In a program that contains a primary file, the last record indicator (LR) is set on
after the last record from a primary/secondary file has been processed, or it can be
set on by the programmer.
The LR indicator can be used to condition calculation and output operations that
are to be done at the end of the program. When the LR indicator is set on, all other
control level indicators (L1 through L9) are also set on. If any of the indicators L1
through L9 have not been defined as control level indicators, as record identifying
indicators, as resulting indicators, or by *INxx, the indicators are set on when LR is
set on, but they cannot be used in other specifications.
In a program that does not contain a primary file, you can set the LR indicator on
as one method to end the program. (For more information on how to end a
program without a primary file, see Chapter 3, “Program Cycle” on page 21.) To set
the LR indicator on, you can specify the LR indicator as a record identifying
indicator or a resulting indicator. If LR is set on during detail calculations, all other
control level indicators are set on at the beginning of the next cycle. LR and the
record identifying indicators are both on throughout the remainder of the detail
cycle, but the record identifying indicators are set off before LR total time.
Matching Record Indicator (MR)

The matching record indicator (MR) is associated with the matching field entries
M1 through M9. It can only be used in a program when Match Fields are defined
in the primary and at least one secondary file.

The MR indicator is set on when all the matching fields in a record of a secondary
file match all the matching fields of a record in the primary file. It remains on
during the complete processing of primary and secondary records. It is set off
when all total calculations, total output, and overflow for the records have been
processed.
At detail time, MR always indicates the matching status of the record just selected
for processing; at total time, it reflects the matching status of the previous record. If
all primary file records match all secondary file records, the MR indicator is always
on.
Use the MR indicator as a field record relation indicator, or as a conditioning

indicator in the calculation specifications or output specifications to indicate
operations that are to be processed only when records match. The MR indicator
cannot be specified as a resulting indicator.
For more information on Match Fields and multi-file processing, see Chapter 7,
“General File Considerations” on page 103.
Return Indicator (RT)

You can use the return indicator (RT) to indicate to the internal RPG IV logic that
control should be returned to the calling program. The test to determine if RT is on
is made after the test for the status of LR and before the next record is read. If RT
is on, control returns to the calling program. RT is set off when the program is
called again.
Because the status of the RT indicator is checked after the halt indicators (H1
through H9) and LR indicator are tested, the status of the halt indicators or the LR
indicator takes precedence over the status of the RT indicator. If both a halt
indicator and the RT indicator are on, the halt indicator takes precedence. If both
the LR indicator and RT indicator are on, the program ends normally.
RT can be set on as a record identifying indicator, a resulting indicator, or a field

indicator. It can then be used as a conditioning indicator for calculation or output
operations.
For a description of how RT can be used to return control to the calling program,
see the chapter on calling programs in the WebSphere Development Studio: ILE RPG
Programmer’s Guide.
Using Indicators
Indicators that you have defined as overflow indicators, control level indicators,
record identifying indicators, field indicators, resulting indicators, *IN, *IN(xx),
*INxx, or those that are defined by the RPG IV language can be used to condition
files, calculation operations, or output operations. An indicator must be defined
before it can be used as a conditioning indicator. The status (on or off) of an
indicator is not affected when it is used as a conditioning indicator. The status can
be changed only by defining the indicator to represent a certain condition.
Note: Indicators that control the cycle function solely as conditioning indicators
when used in a NOMAIN module; or in a subprocedure that is active, but
where the main procedure of the module is not. Indicators that control the
cycle include: LR, RT, H1-H9, and control level indicators.

Using Indicators
File Conditioning
The file conditioning indicators are specified by the EXTIND keyword on the file
description specifications. Only the external indicators U1 through U8 are valid for
file conditioning. (The USROPN keyword can be used to specify that no implicit
OPEN should be done.)
If the external indicator specified is off when the program is called, the file is not
opened and no data transfer to or from the file will occur when the program is
running. Primary and secondary input files are processed as if they were at
end-of-file. The end-of-file indicator is set on for all READ operations to that file.
Input, calculation, and output specifications for the file need not be conditioned by
the external indicator.
Rules for File Conditioning

When you condition files, remember the following:
v A file conditioning entry can be made for input, output, update, or combined
files.
v A file conditioning entry cannot be made for table or array input.
v Output files for tables can be conditioned by U1 through U8. If the indicator is
off, the table is not written.
v A record address file can be conditioned by U1 through U8, but the file
processed by the record address file cannot be conditioned by U1 through U8.
v If the indicator conditioning a primary file with matching records is off, the MR
indicator is not set on.
v Input does not occur for an input, an update, or a combined file if the indicator
conditioning the file is off. Any indicators defined on the associated Input
specifications in positions 63-74 will be processed as usual using the existing
values in the input fields.
v Data transfer to the file does not occur for an output, an update, or a combined
file if the indicator conditioning the file is off. Any conditioning indicators,
numeric editing, or blank after that are defined on the output specifications for
these files will be processed as usual.
v If the indicator conditioning an input, an update, or a combined file is off, the
file is considered to be at end of file. All defined resulting indicators are set off
at the beginning of each specified I/O operation. The end-of-file indicator is set
on for READ, READC, READE, READPE, and READP operations. CHAIN,
EXFMT, SETGT, SETLL, and UNLOCK operations are ignored and all defined
resulting indicators remain set off.
Field Record Relation Indicators

Field record relation indicators are specified in positions 67 and 68 of the input
specifications. The valid field record relation indicators are:
v 01-99
v H1-H9
v MR
v RT
v L1-L9
v U1-U8
Field record relation indicators cannot be specified for externally described files.

Using Indicators
You use field record relation indicators to associate fields with a particular record
type when that record type is one of several in an OR relationship. The field
described on the specification line is available for input only if the indicator
specified in the field record relation entry is on or if the entry is blank. If the entry
is blank, the field is common to all record types defined by the OR relationship.
Assigning Field Record Relation Indicators

You can use a record identifying indicator (01 through 99) in positions 67 and 68 to
relate a field to a particular record type. When several record types are specified in
an OR relationship, all fields that do not have a field record relation indicator in
positions 67 and 68 are associated with all record types in the OR relationship. To
relate a field to just one record type, you enter the record identifying indicator
assigned to that record type in positions 67 and 68 (see Figure 17 on page 52).
An indicator (01 through 99) that is not a record identifying indicator can also be
used in positions 67 and 68 to condition movement of the field from the input area
to the input fields.
Control fields, which you define with an L1 through L9 indicator in positions 63

and 64 of the input specifications, and match fields, which are specified by a match
value (M1 through M9) in positions 65 and 66 of the input specifications, can also
be related to a particular record type in an OR relationship if a field record relation
indicator is specified. Control fields or match fields in the OR relationship that do
not have a field record relation indicator are used with all record types in the OR
relationship.
If two control fields have the same control level indicator or two match fields have
the same matching level value, a field record relation indicator can be assigned to
just one of the match fields. In this case, only the field with the field record
relation indicator is used when that indicator is on. If none of the field record
relation indicators are on for that control field or match field, the field without a
field record relation indicator is used. Control fields and match fields can only
have entries of 01 through 99 or H1 through H9 in positions 67 and 68.
You can use positions 67 and 68 to specify that the program accepts and uses data
from a particular field only when a certain condition occurs (for example, when
records match, when a control break occurs, or when an external indicator is on).
You can indicate the conditions under which the program accepts data from a field
by specifying indicators L1 through L9, MR, or U1 through U8 in positions 67 and
68. Data from the field named in positions 49 through 62 is accepted only when
the field record relation indicator is on.
External indicators are primarily used when file conditioning is specified with the
“EXTIND(*INUx)” on page 271 keyword on the file description specifications.
However, they can be used even though file conditioning is not specified.
A halt indicator (H1 through H9) in positions 67 and 68 relates a field to a record
that is in an OR relationship and also has a halt indicator specified in positions 21
and 22.
Remember the following points when you use field record relation indicators:
v Control level (positions 63 and 64) and matching fields (positions 65 and 66)
with the same field record relation indicator must be grouped together.
v Fields used for control level (positions 63 and 64) and matching field entries
(positions 65 and 66) without a field record relation indicator must appear before
those used with a field record relation indicator.

Using Indicators
v Control level (positions 63 and 64) and matching fields (positions 65 and 66)
with a field record relation indicator (positions 67 and 68) take precedence, when
the indicator is on, over control level and matching fields of the same level
without an indicator.
v Field record relations (positions 67 and 68) for matching and control level fields
(positions 63 through 66) must be specified with record identifying indicators (01
through 99 or H1 through H9) from the main specification line or an OR relation
line to which the matching field refers. If multiple record types are specified in
an OR relationship, an indicator that specifies the field relation can be used to
relate matching and control level fields to the pertinent record type.
v Noncontrol level (positions 63 and 64) and matching field (positions 65 and 66)
specifications can be interspersed with groups of field record relation entries
(positions 67 and 68).
v The MR indicator can be used as a field record relation indicator to reduce
processing time when certain fields of an input record are required only when a
matching condition exists.
v The number of control levels (L1 through L9) specified for different record types
in the OR relationship can differ. There can be no control level for certain record
types and a number of control levels for other record types.
v If all matching fields (positions 65 and 66) are specified with field record relation
indicators (positions 67 and 68), each field record relation indicator must have a
complete set of matching fields associated with it.
v If one matching field is specified without a field record relation indicator, a
complete set of matching fields must be specified for the fields without a field
record relation indicator.
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...
IREPORT AA 14 1 C5
I OR 16 1 C6
I 20 30 FLDB
I 2 10 FLDA 07
*
* Indicator 07 was specified elsewhere in the program.
*
I 40 50 FLDC 14
I 60 70 FLDD 16
Figure 17. Field Record Relation
The file contains two different types of records, one identified by a 5 in position 1
and the other by a 6 in position 1. The FLDC field is related by record identifying
indicator 14 to the record type identified by a 5 in position 1. The FLDD field is
related to the record type having a 6 in position 1 by record identifying indicator
16. This means that FLDC is found on only one type of record (that identified by a
5 in position 1) and FLDD is found only on the other type. FLDA is conditioned by
indicator 07, which was previously defined elsewhere in the program. FLDB is
found on both record types because it is not related to any one type by a record
identifying indicator.
Function Key Indicators

You can use function key indicators in a program that contains a WORKSTN
device if the associated function keys are specified in data description
specifications (DDS). Function keys are specified in DDS with the CFxx or CAxx

Using Indicators
keyword. For an example of using function key indicators with a WORKSTN file,
see the WORKSTN chapter in the WebSphere Development Studio: ILE RPG
Programmer’s Guide.
Function Key Corresponding Function Key Corresponding

Indicator Function Key Indicator Function Key
KA 1 KM 13
KB 2 KN 14
KC 3 KP 15
KD 4 KQ 16
KE 5 KR 17
KF 6 KS 18
KG 7 KT 19
KH 8 KU 20
KI 9 KV 21
KJ 10 KW 22
KK 11 KX 23
KL 12 KY 24
The function key indicators correspond to function keys 1 through 24. Function
key indicator KA corresponds to function key 1, KB to function key 2 ... KY to
function key 24.
Function key indicators that are set on can then be used to condition calculation or
output operations. Function key indicators can be set off by the SETOFF operation.
Halt Indicators (H1-H9)

You can use the halt indicators (H1 through H9) to indicate errors that occur
during the running of a program. The halt indicators can be set on as record
identifying indicators, field indicators, or resulting indicators.
The halt indicators are tested at the *GETIN step of the RPG IV cycle (see
Chapter 3, “Program Cycle” on page 21). If a halt indicator is on, a message is
issued to the user. The following responses are valid:
v Set off the halt indicator and continue the program.
v Issue a dump and end the program.
v End the program with no dump.
If a halt indicator is on when a RETURN operation inside a main procedure is

processed, or when the LR indicator is on, the called program ends abnormally.
The calling program is informed that the called program ended with a halt
indicator on.
Note: If the keyword NOMAIN is specified on a control specification, then any

halt indicators are ignored except as conditioning indicators.
For a detailed description of the steps that occur when a halt indicator is on, see
the detailed flowchart of the RPG IV cycle in Chapter 3, “Program Cycle” on
page 21.

Using Indicators
Indicators Conditioning Calculations
Calculation specifications in the traditional format (C specifications) can include
conditioning indicators in positions 7 and 8, and positions 9 through 11.
Conditioning indicators are not used by free-form calculation specifications.
Indicators that specify the conditions under which a calculation is performed are
defined elsewhere in the program.
Positions 7 and 8
You can specify control level indicators (L1 through L9 and LR) in positions 7 and
8 of the calculation specifications.
If positions 7 and 8 are blank, the calculation is processed at detail time, is a

statement within a subroutine, or is a declarative statement. If indicators L1
through L9 are specified, the calculation is processed at total time only when the
specified indicator is on. If the LR indicator is specified, the calculation is
processed during the last total time.
Note: An L0 entry can be used to indicate that the calculation is a total calculation
that is to be processed on every program cycle.
Positions 9-11
You can use positions 9 through 11 of the calculation specifications to specify
indicators that control the conditions under which an operation is processed. You
can specify N is position 9 to indicate that the indicator should be tested for the
value of off (’0’) The valid entries for positions 10 through 11 are:
v 01-99
v H1-H9
v MR
v OA-OG, OV
v L1-L9
v LR
v U1-U8
v KA-KN, KP-KY
v RT
Any indicator that you use in positions 9 through 11 must be previously defined as
one of the following types of indicators:
v Overflow indicators (file description specifications “OFLIND(indicator)” on
page 274
v Record identifying indicators (input specifications, positions 21 and 22)
v Control level indicators (input specifications, positions 63 and 64)
v Field indicators (input specifications, positions 69 through 74)
v Resulting indicators (calculation specifications, positions 71 through 76)
v External indicators
v Indicators are set on, such as LR and MR
v *IN array, *IN(xx) array element, or *INxx field (see “Indicators Referred to As
with one of these reserved words).
If the indicator must be off to condition the operation, place an N in positions 9.

The indicators in grouped AND/OR lines, plus the control level indicators (if

Using Indicators
specified in positions 7 and 8), must all be exactly as specified before the operation
is done as in Figure 18.
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...
*
C 25
CAN L1 SUB TOTAL TOTAL A
CL2 10
CANNL3TOTAL MULT 05 SLSTAX B
*
Figure 18. Conditioning Operations (Control Level Indicators)
Assume that indicator 25 represents a record type and that a control level 2 break
occurred when record type 25 was read. L1 and L2 are both on. All operations
conditioned by the control level indicators in positions 7 and 8 are done before
operations conditioned by control level indicators in positions 9 through 11.
Therefore, the operation in B occurs before the operation in A. The operation in
A is done on the first record of the new control group indicated by 25, whereas
the operation in B is a total operation done for all records of the previous control
group.
The operation in B can be done when the L2 indicator is on provided the other
conditions are met: Indicator 10 must be on; the L3 indicator must not be on.
The operation conditioned by both L2 and NL3 is done only when a control level 2
break occurs. These two indicators are used together because this operation is not
to be done when a control level 3 break occurs, even though L2 is also on.
Some special considerations you should know when using conditioning indicators
in positions 9 through 11 are as follows:
v With externally described work station files, the conditioning indicators on the
calculation specifications must be either defined in the RPG program or be
defined in the DDS source for the workstation file.
v With program described workstation files, the indicators used for the
workstation file are unknown at compile time of the RPG program. Thus
indicators 01-99 are assumed to be declared and they can be used to condition
the calculation specifications without defining them.
v Halt indicators can be used to end the program or to prevent the operation from
being processed when a specified error condition is found in the input data or in
another calculation. Using a halt indicator is necessary because the record that
causes the halt is completely processed before the program stops. Therefore, if
the operation is processed on an error condition, the results are in error. A halt
indicator can also be used to condition an operation that is to be done only
when an error occurs.
v If LR is specified in positions 9 through 11, the calculation is done after the last
record has been processed or after LR is set on.
v If a control level indicator is used in positions 9 through 11 and positions 7 and
8 are not used (detail time), the operation conditioned by the indicator is done
only on the record that causes a control break or any higher level control break.
v If a control level indicator is specified in positions 7 and 8 (total time) and MR is
specified in positions 9 through 11, MR indicates the matching condition of the
previous record and not the one just read that caused the control break. After all

Using Indicators
operations conditioned by control level indicators in positions 7 and 8 are done,
MR then indicates the matching condition of the record just read.
v If positions 7 and 8 and positions 9 through 11 are blank, the calculation
specified on the line is done at detail calculation time.
Figure 19 and Figure 20 show examples of conditioning indicators.
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...
IFilenameSqNORiPos1NCCPos2NCCPos3NCC.PFromTo++DField+L1M1FrPlMnZr...*
*
* Field indicators can be used to condition operations. Assume the
* program is to find weekly earnings including overtime. The over-
* time field is checked to determine if overtime was entered.
* If the employee has worked overtime, the field is positive and -
* indicator 10 is set on. In all cases the weekly regular wage
* is calculated. However, overtime pay is added only if
* indicator 10 is on.
*
ITIME AB 01
I 1 7 EMPLNO
I 8 10 0OVERTM 10
I 15 20 2RATE
I 21 25 2RATEOT
CL0N01Factor1+++++++Opcode(E)+Extended-factor2+++++++++++++++++++++++++++
*
* Field indicator 10 was assigned on the input specifications.
* It is used here to condition calculation operations.
*
C EVAL (H) PAY = RATE * 40
C 10 EVAL (H) PAY = PAY + (OVERTM * RATEOT)
Figure 19. Conditioning Operations (Field Indicators)
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...
*
* A record identifying indicator is used to condition an operation.
* When a record is read with a T in position 1, the 01 indicator is
* set on. If this indicator is on, the field named SAVE is added
* to SUM. When a record without T in position 1 is read, the 02
* indicator is set on. The subtract operation, conditioned by 02,
* then performed instead of the add operation.
*
IFILE AA 01 1 CT
I OR 02 1NCT
I 10 15 2SAVE
*
* Record identifying indicators 01 and 02 are assigned on the input
* specifications. They are used here to condition calculation
* operations.
*
C 01 ADD SAVE SUM 8 2
C 02 SUB SAVE SUM 8 2
Figure 20. Conditioning Operations (Record Identifying Indicators)

Using Indicators
Indicators Used in Expressions
Indicators can be used as booleans in expressions in the extended factor 2 field of
the calculation specification. They must be referred to as data (that is, using *IN or
*INxx). The following examples demonstrate this.
* In these examples, the IF structure is performed only if 01 is on.
* *IN01 is treated as a boolean with a value of on or off.
* In the first example, the value of the indicator (’0’ or ’1’) is

* checked.
C IF *IN01
* In the second example, the logical expression B < A is evaluated.

* If true, 01 is set on. If false 01 is set off. This is analogous
* to using COMP with A and B and placing 01 in the appropriate
* resulting indicator position.
C EVAL *IN01 = B < A
Figure 21. Indicators Used in Expressions
See the expressions chapter and the operation codes chapter in this document for
more examples and further details.
Indicators Conditioning Output

Indicators that you use to specify the conditions under which an output record or
an output field is written must be previously defined in the program. Indicators to
condition output are specified in positions 21 through 29. All indicators are valid
for conditioning output.
The indicators you use to condition output must be previously defined as one of
the following types of indicators:
v Overflow indicators (file description specifications, “OFLIND(indicator)” on
page 274)
v Record identifying indicators (input specifications, positions 21 and 22)
v Control level indicators (input specifications, positions 63 and 64)
v Field indicators (input specifications, positions 69 through 74)
v Resulting indicators (calculation specifications, positions 71 through 76)
v Indicators set by the RPG IV program such as 1P and LR
v External indicators set prior to or during program processing
v *IN array, *IN(xx) array element, or *INxx field (see “Indicators Referred to As
with one of these reserved words).
If an indicator is to condition an entire record, you enter the indicator on the line
that specifies the record type (see Figure 22 on page 59). If an indicator is to
condition when a field is to be written, you enter the indicator on the same line as
the field name (see Figure 22 on page 59).
Conditioning indicators are not required on output lines. If conditioning indicators

are not specified, the line is output every time that type of record is checked for
output. If you specify conditioning indicators, one indicator can be entered in each
of the three separate output indicator fields (positions 22 and 23, 25 and 26, and 28
and 29). If these indicators are on, the output operation is done. An N in the

Using Indicators
position preceding each indicator (positions 21, 24, or 27) means that the output
operation is done only if the indicator is not on (a negative indicator). No output
line should be conditioned by all negative indicators; at least one of the indicators
should be positive. If all negative indicators condition a heading or detail
operation, the operation is done at the beginning of the program cycle when the
first page (1P) lines are written.
You can specify output indicators in an AND/OR relationship by specifying

AND/OR in positions 16 through 18. An unlimited number of AND/OR lines can
be used. AND/OR lines can be used to condition output records, but they cannot
be used to condition fields. However, you can condition a field with more than
three indicators by using the EVAL operation in calculations. The following
example illustrates this.
* Indicator 20 is set on only if indicators 10, 12, 14,16, and 18
* are set on.
C EVAL *IN20 = *IN10 AND *IN12 AND *IN14
C AND *IN16 AND *IN18
OFilename++DAddN01N02N03Excnam++++.......................................
* OUTFIELD is conditioned by indicator 20, which effectively
* means it is conditioned by all the indicators in the EVAL
* operation.
OPRINTER E
O 20 OUTFIELD
Other special considerations you should know about for output indicators are as
follows:
v The first page indicator (1P) allows output on the first cycle before the primary
file read, such as printing on the first page. The line conditioned by the 1P
indicator must contain constant information used as headings or fields for
reserved words such as PAGE and UDATE. The constant information is specified
in the output specifications in positions 53 through 80. If 1P is used in an OR
relationship with an overflow indicator, the information is printed on every page
(see Figure 23 on page 59). Use the 1P indicator only with heading or detail
output lines. It cannot be used to condition total or exception output lines or
should not be used in an AND relationship with control level indicators.
v If certain error conditions occur, you might not want output operation
processed. Use halt indicators to prevent the data that caused the error from
being used (see Figure 24 on page 60).
v To condition certain output records on external conditions, use external
indicators to condition those records.
See the Printer File section in the WebSphere Development Studio: ILE RPG
Programmer’s Guide for a discussion of the considerations that apply to assigning
overflow indicators on the output specifications.

Using Indicators
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...
*
* One indicator is used to condition an entire line of printing.
* When 44 is on, the fields named INVOIC, AMOUNT, CUSTR, and SALSMN
* are all printed.
*
OPRINT D 44 1
O INVOIC 10
O AMOUNT 18
O CUSTR 65
O SALSMN 85
*
* A control level indicator is used to condition when a field should
* be printed. When indicator 44 is on, fields INVOIC, AMOUNT, and
* CUSTR are always printed. However, SALSMN is printed for the
* first record of a new control group only if 44 and L1 are on.
*
OPRINT D 44 1
O INVOIC 10
O AMOUNT 18
O CUSTR 65
O L1 SALSMN 85
Figure 22. Output Indicators
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...
*
* The 1P indicator is used when headings are to be printed
* on the first page only.
*
OPRINT H 1P 3
O 8 ’ACCOUNT’
*
* The 1P indicator and an overflow indicator can be used to print
* headings on every page.
*
OPRINT H 1P 3 1
O OR OF
O 8 ’ACCOUNT’
Figure 23. 1P Indicator

Indicators Referred to As Data
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...
*
* When an error condition (zero in FIELDB) is found, the halt
* indicator is set on.
*
IDISK AA 01
I 1 3 FIELDA L1
I 4 8 0FIELDB H1
*
* When H1 is on, all calculations are bypassed.
*
C H1 GOTO END
C :
C : Calculations
C :
C END TAG
*
* FIELDA and FIELDB are printed only if H1 is not on.
* Use this general format when you do not want information that
* is in error to be printed.
*
OPRINT H L1 0 2 01
O 50 ’HEADING’
O D 01NH1 1 0
O FIELDA 5
O FIELDB Z 15
Figure 24. Preventing Fields from Printing

An alternative method of referring to and manipulating RPG IV indicators is
provided by the RPG IV reserved words *IN and *INxx.
*IN
The array *IN is a predefined array of 99 one-position, character elements
representing the indicators 01 through 99. The elements of the array should contain
only the character values '0' (zero) or '1' (one).
The specification of the *IN array or the *IN(xx) variable-index array element as a
field in an input record, as a result field, or as factor 1 in a PARM operation
defines indicators 01 through 99 for use in the program.
The operations or references valid for an array of single character elements are
valid with the array *IN except that the array *IN cannot be specified as a subfield
in a data structure, or as a result field of a PARM operation.
*INxx
The field *INxx is a predefined one-position character field where xx represents
any one of the RPG IV indicators except 1P or MR.
The specification of the *INxx field or the *IN(n) fixed-index array element (where
n = 1 - 99) as a field in an input record, as a result field, or as factor 1 in a PARM
operation defines the corresponding indicator for use in the program.

You can specify the field *INxx wherever a one-position character field is valid
except that *INxx cannot be specified as a subfield in a data structure, as the result
field of a PARM operation, or in a SORTA operation.
Additional Rules
Remember the following rules when you are working with the array *IN, the array
element *IN(xx) or the field *INxx:
v Moving a character '0' (zero) or *OFF to any of these fields sets the
corresponding indicator off.
v Moving a character '1' (one) or *ON to any of these fields sets the corresponding
indicator on.
v Do not move any value, other than '0' (zero) or '1' (one), to *INxx. Any
subsequent normal RPG IV indicator tests may yield unpredictable results.
v If you take the address of *IN, *IN01 - *IN99, or *IN(index), indicators *IN01 to
*IN99 will be defined. If you take the address of any other indicator, such as
*INLR or *INL1, only that indicator will be defined.
See Figure 25 for some examples of indicators referred to as data.
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...
*
* When this program is called, a single parameter is passed to
* control some logic in the program. The parameter sets the value
* of indicator 50. The parameter must be passed with a character
* value of 1 or 0.
*
C *ENTRY PLIST
C *IN50 PARM SWITCH 1
*
*
* Subroutine SUB1 uses indicators 61 through 68. Before the
* subroutine is processed, the status of these indicators used in
* the mainline program is saved. (Assume that the indicators are
* set off in the beginning of the subroutine.) After the subroutine
* is processed, the indicators are returned to their original state.
*
*
C MOVEA *IN(61) SAV8 8
C EXSR SUB1
C MOVEA SAV8 *IN(61)
*
* A code field (CODE) contains a numeric value of 1 to 5 and is
* used to set indicators 71 through 75. The five indicators are set
* off. Field X is calculated as 70 plus the CODE field. Field X is
* then used as the index into the array *IN. Different subroutines
* are then used based on the status of indicators 71 through 75.
*
C MOVEA ’00000’ *IN(71)
C 70 ADD CODE X 3 0
C MOVE *ON *IN(X)
C 71 EXSR CODE1
C 72 EXSR CODE2
C 73 EXSR CODE3
C 74 EXSR CODE4
C 75 EXSR CODE5
Figure 25. Examples of Indicators Referred to as Data

Summary of Indicators
Table 3 and Table 4 on page 63 show summaries of where RPG IV indicators are
defined, what the valid entries are, where the indicators are used, and when the
indicators are set on and off. Table 4 indicates the primary condition that causes
each type of indicator to be set on and set off by the RPG IV program. “Function
Key Indicators” on page 52 lists the function key indicators and the corresponding
function keys.
Table 3. Indicator Entries and Uses
OA-OG KA-KN
Where Defined/Used 01-99 1P H1-H9 L1-L9 LR MR OV U1-U8 KP-KY RT
Overflow indicator, file X X
description
specifications, OFLIND
keyword
Record identifying X X X X X X
indicator input
specifications, positions
21-22
User Control level, input X
Defined specifications, positions
63-64
Field level, input X X X X
69-74
Resulting indicator, X X X X X1 X X2 X
calculation
71-76
RPG Internal Indicator X X X X

Defined External Indicator X
File conditioning, file X
description
specifications
File record relation, X X X X X X
input specifications
67-683
Control level, X X
calculation
Used specifications, positions
7-8
Conditioning X X X X X X X X X
indicators, calculation
9-11
Output indicators, X X4 X X X X X X X X
output specifications,
positions 21-29

Table 3. Indicator Entries and Uses (continued)
OA-OG KA-KN
Where Defined/Used 01-99 1P H1-H9 L1-L9 LR MR OV U1-U8 KP-KY RT
Notes:
1. The overflow indicator must be defined on the file description specification first.
2. KA through KN and KP through KY can be used as resulting indicators only with the SETOFF operation.
3. Only a record identifying indicator from a main or OR record can be used to condition a control or match field.
L1 or L9 cannot be used to condition a control or match field.
4. The 1P indicator is allowed only on heading and detail lines.
Table 4. When Indicators Are Set On and Off by the RPG IV Logic Cycle
Type of Indicator Set On Set Off
Overflow When printing on or spacing or skipping OA-OG, OV: After the following heading
past the overflow line. and detail lines are completed,
or after the file is opened unless
the H-specification keyword
OPENOPT(*NOINZOFL) is used.
01-99: By the user.
Record identifying When specified primary / secondary record Before the next primary/secondary record is
has been read and before total calculations read during the next processing cycle.
are processed; immediately after record is
read from a full procedural file.
Control level When the value in a control field changes. At end of following detail cycle.
All lower level indicators are also set on.
Field indicator By blank or zero in specified fields, by plus Before this field status is to be tested the
in specified field, or by minus in specified next time.
field.
Resulting When the calculation is processed and the The next time a calculation is processed for
condition that the indicator represents is met. which the same indicator is specified as a
resulting indicator and the specified
condition is not met.
Function key When the corresponding function key is By SETOFF or move fields logic for a
pressed for WORKSTN files and at WORKSTN file.
subsequent reads to associated subfiles.
External U1-U8 By CL command prior to beginning the By CL command prior to beginning the
program, or when used as a resulting or a program, or when used as a resulting or
field indicator. when used as a resulting or a field indicator.
H1-H9 As specified by programmer. When the continue option is selected as a
response to a message, or by the
programmer.
RT As specified by programmer. When the program is called again.
Internal Indicators 1P At beginning of processing before any input Before the first record is read.
records are read.
LR After processing the last primary/secondary At the beginning of processing, or by the
record of the last file or by the programmer. programmer.
MR If the match field contents of the record of a When all total calculations and output are
secondary file correspond to the match field completed for the last record of the matching
contents of a record in the primary file. group.


Chapter 5. File and Program Exception/Errors
RPG categorizes exception/errors into two classes: program and file. Information
on file and program exception/errors is made available to an RPG IV program
using file information data structures and program status data structures,
respectively. File and Program exception/error subroutines may be specified to
handle these types of exception/errors.
File Exception/Errors
Some examples of file exception/errors are: undefined record type, an error in
trigger program, an I/O operation to a closed file, a device error, and an
array/table load sequence error. They can be handled in one of the following
ways:
v The operation code extender ’E’ can be specified. When specified, before the
operation begins, this extender sets the %ERROR and %STATUS built-in
functions to return zero. If an exception/error occurs during the operation, then
after the operation %ERROR returns ’1’ and %STATUS returns the file status.
The optional file information data structure is updated with the exception/error
information. You can determine the action to be taken by testing %ERROR and
%STATUS.
v An indicator can be specified in positions 73 and 74 of the calculation
specifications for an operation code. This indicator is set on if an exception/error
occurs during the processing of the specified operation. The optional file
information data structure is updated with the exception/error information. You
can determine the action to be taken by testing the indicator.
v ON-ERROR groups can be used to handle errors for statements processed within
a MONITOR block. If an error occurs when a statement is processed, control
passes to the appropriate ON-ERROR group.
v You can create a user-defined ILE exception handler that will take control when
an exception occurs. For more information, see WebSphere Development Studio: ILE
RPG Programmer’s Guide.
v A file exception/error subroutine can be specified. The subroutine is defined by
the INFSR keyword on a file description specification with the name of the
subroutine that is to receive the control. Information regarding the file
exception/error is made available through a file information data structure that
is specified with the INFDS keyword on the file description specification. You
can also use the %STATUS built-in function, which returns the most recent value
set for the program or file status. If a file is specified, %STATUS returns the
value contained in the INFDS *STATUS field for the specified file.
v If the indicator, ’E’ extender, MONITOR block, or file exception/error subroutine
is not present, any file exception/errors are handled by the RPG IV default error
handler.
File Information Data Structure

A file information data structure (INFDS) can be defined for each file to make file
exception/error and file feedback information available to the program. The file
information data structure, which must be unique for each file, must be defined in
the main source section. The same INFDS is used by all procedures using the files.
The INFDS contains the following feedback information:

v File Feedback (length is 80)
v Open Feedback (length is 160)
v Input/Output Feedback (length is 126)
v Device Specific Feedback (length is variable)
v Get Attributes Feedback (length is variable)
Note: The get attributes feedback uses the same positions in the INFDS as the
input/output feedback and device specific feedback. This means that if you
have a get attributes feedback, you cannot have input/output feedback or
device feedback, and vice versa.
The length of the INFDS depends on what fields you have declared in your
INFDS. The minimum length of the INFDS is 80.
File Feedback Information

The file feedback information starts in position 1 and ends in position 80 in the file
information data structure. The file feedback information contains data about the
file which is specific to RPG. This includes information about the error/exception
that identifies:
v The name of the file for which the exception/error occurred
v The record being processed when the exception/error occurred or the record
that caused the exception/error
v The last operation being processed when the exception/error occurred
v The status code
v The RPG IV routine in which the exception/error occurred.
The fields from position 1 to position 66 in the file feedback section of the INFDS
are always provided and updated even if INFDS is not specified in the program.
The fields from position 67 to position 80 of the file feedback section of the INFDS
are only updated after a POST operation to a specific device.
If INFDS is not specified, the information in the file feedback section of the INFDS
can be output using the DUMP operation. For more information see “DUMP
(Program Dump)” on page 583.
Overwriting the file feedback section of the INFDS may cause unexpected results
in subsequent error handling and is not recommended.
The location of some of the more commonly used subfields in the file feedback
section of the INFDS is defined by special keywords. The contents of the file
feedback section of the INFDS along with the special keywords and their
descriptions can be found in the following tables:
Table 5. Contents of the File Feedback Information Available in the File Information Data Structure (INFDS)
From To
(Pos. (Pos.
26-32) 33-39) Format Length Keyword Information
1 8 Character 8 *FILE The first 8 characters of the file name.
9 9 Character 1 Open indication (1 = open).
10 10 Character 1 End of file (1 = end of file)
11 15 Zoned decimal 5,0 *STATUS Status code. For a description of these codes, see
“File Status Codes” on page 77.

Table 5. Contents of the File Feedback Information Available in the File Information Data Structure
(INFDS) (continued)
From To
(Pos. (Pos.
16 21 Character 6 *OPCODE Operation code The first five positions
(left-adjusted) specify the type of operation by using
the character representation of the calculation
operation codes. For example, if a READE was
being processed, READE is placed in the leftmost
five positions. If the operation was an implicit
operation (for example, a primary file read or
update on the output specifications), the equivalent
operation code is generated (such as READ or
UPDAT) and placed in location *OPCODE.
Operation codes which have 6 letter names will be
shortened to 5 letters.
DELETE
DELET
EXCEPT
EXCPT
READPE
REDPE
UNLOCK
UNLCK
UPDATE
UPDAT
The remaining position contains one of the
following:
F The last operation was specified for a file
name.
R The last operation was specified for a
record.
I The last operation was an implicit file
operation.
22 29 Character 8 *ROUTINE First 8 characters of the name of the routine
(including a subprocedure) in which the file
operation was done.
30 37 Character 8 If OPTION(*NOSRCSTMT) is specified, this is the
source listing line number of the file operation. If
OPTION(*SRCSTMT) is specified, this is the source
listing statement number of the file operation. The
full statement number is included when it applies
to the root source member. If the statement number
is greater than 6 digits, that is, it includes a source
ID other than zero, the first 2 positions of the 8-byte
feedback area will have a ″+ ″ indicating that the
rest of the statement number is stored in positions
53-54.
38 42 Zoned decimal 5,0 User-specified reason for error on SPECIAL file.
Chapter 5. File and Program Exception/Errors 67

Table 5. Contents of the File Feedback Information Available in the File Information Data Structure
(INFDS) (continued)
From To
(Pos. (Pos.
38 45 Character 8 *RECORD For a program described file the record identifying
indicator is placed left-adjusted in the field; the
remaining six positions are filled with blanks. For
an externally described file, the first 8 characters of
the name of the record being processed when the
exception/error occurred.
46 52 Character 7 Machine or system message number.
53 66 Character 14 Unused.
77 78 Binary 2 Source Id matching the statement number from
positions 30-37.
Table 6. Contents of the File Feedback Information Available in the File-Information Data Structure (INFDS) Valid
after a POST
From To
(Pos. (Pos.
67 70 Zoned decimal 4,0 *SIZE Screen size (product of the number of rows and the
number of columns on the device screen).
71 72 Zoned decimal 2,0 *INP The display’s keyboard type. Set to 00 if the
keyboard is alphanumeric or katakana. Set to 10 if
the keyboard is ideographic.
73 74 Zoned decimal 2,0 *OUT The display type. Set to 00 if the display is
alphanumeric or katakana. Set to 10 if the display is
ideographic. Set to 20 if the display is DBCS.
75 76 Zoned decimal 2,0 *MODE Always set to 00.
INFDS File Feedback Example: To specify an INFDS which contains fields in the
file feedback section, you can make the following entries:
v Specify the INFDS keyword on the file description specification with the name
of the file information data structure
v Specify the file information data structure and the subfields you wish to use on
a definition specification.
v Specify special keywords left-adjusted, in the FROM field (positions 26-32) on
the definition specification, or specify the positions of the fields in the FROM
field (position 26-32) and the TO field (position 33-39).

FFilename++IPEASFRlen+LKlen+AIDevice+.Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++Comments++++++++++
FMYFILE IF E DISK INFDS(FILEFBK)
DName+++++++++++ETDsFrom+++To/L+++IDc.Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++Comments++++++++++
DFILEFBK DS
D FILE *FILE * File name
D OPEN_IND 9 9N * File open?
D EOF_IND 10 10N * File at eof?
D STATUS *STATUS * Status code
D OPCODE *OPCODE * Last opcode
D ROUTINE *ROUTINE * RPG Routine
D LIST_NUM 30 37 * Listing line
D SPCL_STAT 38 42S 0 * SPECIAL status
D RECORD *RECORD * Record name
D MSGID 46 52 * Error MSGID
D SCREEN *SIZE * Screen size
D NLS_IN *INP * NLS Input?
D NLS_OUT *OUT * NLS Output?
D NLS_MODE *MODE * NLS Mode?
Figure 26. Example of Coding an INFDS with File Feedback Information
Note: The keywords are not labels and cannot be used to access the subfields.
Short entries are padded on the right with blanks.
Open Feedback Information

Positions 81 through 240 in the file information data structure contain open
feedback information. The contents of the file open feedback area are copied by
RPG to the open feedback section of the INFDS whenever the file associated with
the INFDS is opened. This includes members opened as a result of a read
operation on a multi-member processed file.
A description of the contents of the open feedback area, and what file types the
fields are valid for, can be found in the iSeries Information Center.
INFDS Open Feedback Example: To specify an INFDS which contains fields in

the open feedback section, you can make the following entries:
v Use information in the iSeries Information Center database and file systems
category to determine which fields you wish to include in the INFDS. To
calculate the From and To positions (positions 26 through 32 and 33 through 39
of the definition specifications) that specify the subfields of the open feedback
section of the INFDS, use the Offset, Data Type, and Length given in the
Information Center and do the following calculations:
From = 81 + Offset
To = From - 1 + Character_Length
Character_Length = Length (in bytes)
For example, for overflow line number of a printer file, the Information Center
gives:
Offset = 107
Data Type is binary
Length = 2
Therefore,
From = 81 + 107 = 188,
To = 188 - 1 + 2 = 189.
See subfield OVERFLOW in example below

FMYFILE O F 132 PRINTER INFDS(OPNFBK)
DOPNFBK DS
D ODP_TYPE 81 82 * ODP Type
D FILE_NAME 83 92 * File name
D LIBRARY 93 102 * Library name
D SPOOL_FILE 103 112 * Spool file name
D SPOOL_LIB 113 122 * Spool file lib
D SPOOL_NUM 123 124I 0 * Spool file num
D RCD_LEN 125 126I 0 * Max record len
D KEY_LEN 127 128I 0 * Max key len
D MEMBER 129 138 * Member name
D TYPE 147 148I 0 * File type
D ROWS 152 153I 0 * Num PRT/DSP rows
D COLUMNS 154 155I 0 * Num PRT/DSP cols
D NUM_RCDS 156 159I 0 * Num of records
D ACC_TYPE 160 161 * Access type
D DUP_KEY 162 162 * Duplicate key?
D SRC_FILE 163 163 * Source file?
D VOL_OFF 184 185I 0 * Vol label offset
D BLK_RCDS 186 187I 0 * Max rcds in blk
D OVERFLOW 188 189I 0 * Overflow line
D BLK_INCR 190 191I 0 * Blk increment
D FLAGS1 196 196 * Misc flags
D REQUESTER 197 206 * Requester name
D OPEN_COUNT 207 208I 0 * Open count
D BASED_MBRS 211 212I 0 * Num based mbrs
D OPEN_ID 214 215 * Open identifier
D RCDFMT_LEN 216 217I 0 * Max rcd fmt len
D CCSID 218 219I 0 * Database CCSID
D NUM_DEVS 227 228I 0 * Num devs defined
Figure 27. Example of Coding an INFDS with Open Feedback Information
Input/Output Feedback Information

Positions 241 through 366 in the file information data structure are used for
input/output feedback information. The contents of the file common input/output
feedback area are copied by RPG to the input/output feedback section of the
INFDS:
v If a POST for any file with factor 1 blank has been specified anywhere in your
program:
– only after a POST for the file.
v If a POST for any file with factor 1 blank has not been specified anywhere in
your program:
– after each I/O operation, if blocking is not active for the file.
– after the I/O request to data management to get or put a block of data, if
blocking is active for the file.
For more information see “POST (Post)” on page 678.
A description of the contents of the input/output feedback area can be found in

the Information Center.
INFDS Input/Output Feedback Example: To specify an INFDS which contains

fields in the input/output feedback section, you can make the following entries:

v Use information in the Information Center to determine which fields you wish
to include in the INFDS. To calculate the From and To positions (positions 26
through 32 and 33 through 39 of the definition specifications) that specify the
subfields of the input/output feedback section of the INFDS, use the Offset,
Data Type, and Length given in the Information Center and do the following
calculations:
From = 241 + Offset
For example, for device class of a file, the Information Center gives:
Offset = 30
Data Type is character
Length = 2
Therefore,
From = 241 + 30 = 271,
To = 271 - 1 + 2 = 272.
See subfield DEV_CLASS in example below
FMYFILE IF E DISK INFDS(MYIOFBK)
DMYIOFBK DS
D * 241-242 not used
D WRITE_CNT 243 246I 0 * Write count
D READ_CNT 247 250I 0 * Read count
D WRTRD_CNT 251 254I 0 * Write/read count
D OTHER_CNT 255 258I 0 * Other I/O count
D OPERATION 260 260 * Cuurent operation
D IO_RCD_FMT 261 270 * Rcd format name
D DEV_CLASS 271 272 * Device class
D IO_PGM_DEV 273 282 * Pgm device name
D IO_RCD_LEN 283 286I 0 * Rcd len of I/O
Figure 28. Example of Coding an INFDS with Input/Output Feedback Information
Device Specific Feedback Information

The device specific feedback information in the file information data structure
starts at position 367 in the INFDS, and contains input/output feedback
information specific to a device.
The length of the INFDS when device specific feedback information is required,
depends on two factors: the device type of the file, and on whether DISK files are
keyed or not. The minimum length is 528; but some files require a longer INFDS.
v For WORKSTN files, the INFDS is long enough to hold the device-specific
feedback information for any type of display or ICF file starting at position 241.
For example, if the longest device-specific feedback information requires 390
bytes, the INFDS for WORKSTN files is 630 bytes long (240+390=630).
v For externally described DISK files, the INFDS is at least long enough to hold
the longest key in the file beginning at position 401.

More information on the contents and length of the device feedback for database
file, printer files, ICF and display files can be found in the iSeries Information
Center database and file systems category.
The contents of the device specific input/output feedback area of the file are
copied by RPG to the device specific feedback section of the INFDS:
v If a POST for any file with factor 1 blank has been specified anywhere in your
program:
– only after a POST for the file.
v If a POST for any file with factor 1 blank has not been specified anywhere in
your program:
– after each I/O operation, if blocking is not active for the file.
– after the I/O request to data management to get or put a block of data, if
blocking is active for the file.
Notes:
1. After each keyed input operation, only the key fields will be updated.
2. After each non-keyed input operation, only the relative record number will be
updated.
For more information see “POST (Post)” on page 678.
INFDS Device Specific Feedback Examples: To specify an INFDS which contains

fields in the device-specific feedback section, you can make the following entries:
subfields of the input/output feedback section of the INFDS, use the Offset,
Data Type, and Length given in the Information Center and do the following
calculations:
From = 367 + Offset
For example, for relative record number of a data base file, the Information
Center gives:
Offset = 30
Data Type is binary
Length = 4
Therefore,
From = 367 + 30 = 397,
To = 397 - 1 + 4 = 400.
See subfield DB_RRN in DBFBK data structure in example below

FMYFILE O F 132 PRINTER INFDS(PRTFBK)
DPRTFBK DS
D CUR_LINE 367 368I 0 * Current line num
D CUR_PAGE 369 372I 0 * Current page cnt
* If the first bit of PRT_FLAGS is on, the spooled file has been
* deleted. Use TESTB X’80’ or TESTB ’0’ to test this bit.
D PRT_FLAGS 373 373
D PRT_MAJOR 401 402 * Major ret code
D PRT_MINOR 403 404 * Minor ret code
Figure 29. Example of Coding an INFDS with Printer Specific Feedback Information
FMYFILE IF E DISK INFDS(DBFBK)
DDBFBK DS
D FDBK_SIZE 367 370I 0 * Size of DB fdbk
D JOIN_BITS 371 374I 0 * JFILE bits
D LOCK_RCDS 377 378I 0 * Nbr locked rcds
D POS_BITS 385 385 * File pos bits
D DLT_BITS 384 384 * Rcd deleted bits
D NUM_KEYS 387 388I 0 * Num keys (bin)
D KEY_LEN 393 394I 0 * Key length
D MBR_NUM 395 396I 0 * Member number
D DB_RRN 397 400I 0 * Relative-rcd-num
D KEY 401 2400 * Key value (max
D * size 2000)
Figure 30. Example of Coding an INFDS with Database Specific Feedback Information
FMYFILE CF E WORKSTN INFDS(ICFFBK)
DICFFBK DS
D ICF_AID 369 369 * AID byte
D ICF_LEN 372 375I 0 * Actual data len
D ICF_MAJOR 401 402 * Major ret code
D ICF_MINOR 403 404 * Minor ret code
D SNA_SENSE 405 412 * SNA sense rc
D SAFE_IND 413 413 * Safe indicator
D RQSWRT 415 415 * Request write
D RMT_FMT 416 425 * Remote rcd fmt
D ICF_MODE 430 437 * Mode name
Figure 31. Example of Coding an INFDS with ICF Specific Feedback Information

FMYFILE CF E WORKSTN INFDS(DSPFBK)
DDSPFBK DS
D DSP_FLAG1 367 368 * Display flags
D DSP_AID 369 369 * AID byte
D CURSOR 370 371 * Cursor location
D DATA_LEN 372 375I 0 * Actual data len
D SF_RRN 376 377I 0 * Subfile rrn
D MIN_RRN 378 379I 0 * Subfile min rrn
D NUM_RCDS 380 381I 0 * Subfile num rcds
D ACT_CURS 382 383 * Active window
D * cursor location
D DSP_MAJOR 401 402 * Major ret code
D DSP_MINOR 403 404 * Minor ret code
Figure 32. Example of Coding an INFDS with Display Specific Feedback Information
Get Attributes Feedback Information

The get attributes feedback information in the file information data structure starts
at position 241 in the INFDS, and contains information about a display device or
ICF session (a device associated with a WORKSTN file). The end position of the
get attributes feedback information depends on the length of the data returned by
a get attributes data management operation. The get attributes data management
operation is performed when a POST with a program device specified for factor 1
is used.
More information about the contents and the length of the get attributes data can
be found in the Information Center.
INFDS Get Attributes Feedback Example: To specify an INFDS which contains

fields in the get attributes feedback section, you can make the following entries:
subfields of the get attributes feedback section of the INFDS, use the Offset, Data
Type, and Length given in the Information Center and do the following
calculations:
From = 241 + Offset
For example, for device type of a file, the Information Center gives:
Offset = 31
Data Type is character
Length = 6
Therefore,
From = 241 + 31 = 272,
To = 272 - 1 + 6 = 277.
See subfield DEV_TYPE in example below

FMYFILE CF E WORKSTN INFDS(DSPATRFBK)
DDSPATRFBK DS
D PGM_DEV 241 250 * Program device
D DEV_DSC 251 260 * Dev description
D USER_ID 261 270 * User ID
D DEV_TYPE 272 277 * Device type
D REQ_DEV 278 278 * Requester?
D ACQ_STAT 279 279 * Acquire status
D INV_STAT 280 280 * Invite status
D DATA_AVAIL 281 281 * Data available
D NUM_ROWS 282 283I 0 * Number of rows
D NUM_COLS 284 285I 0 * Number of cols
D BLINK 286 286 * Allow blink?
D LINE_STAT 287 287 * Online/offline?
D DSP_LOC 288 288 * Display location
D DSP_TYPE 289 289 * Display type
D KBD_TYPE 290 290 * Keyboard type
D CTL_INFO 342 342 * Controller info
D COLOR_DSP 343 343 * Color capable?
D GRID_DSP 344 344 * Grid line dsp?
* The following fields apply to ISDN.
D ISDN_LEN 385 386I 0 * Rmt number len
D ISDN_TYPE 387 388 * Rmt number type
D ISDN_PLAN 389 390 * Rmt number plan
D ISDN_NUM 391 430 * Rmt number
D ISDN_SLEN 435 436I 0 * Rmt sub-address
D * length
D ISDN_STYPE 437 438 * Rmt sub-address
D * type
D ISDN_SNUM 439 478 * Rmt sub-address
D ISDN_CON 480 480 * Connection
D ISDN_RLEN 481 482I 0 * Rmt address len
D ISDN_RNUM 483 514 * Rmt address
D ISDN_ELEN 519 520 * Extension len
D ISDN_ETYPE 521 521 * Extension type
D ISDN_ENUM 522 561 * Extension num
D ISDN_XTYPE 566 566 * X.25 call type
D
Figure 33. Example of Coding an INFDS with Display file Get Attributes Feedback Information

FMYFILE CF E WORKSTN INFDS(ICFATRFBK)
DICFATRFBK DS
D PGM_DEV 241 250 * Program device
D DEV_DSC 251 260 * Dev description
D USER_ID 261 270 * User ID
D DEV_TYPE 272 272 * Device type
D REQ_DEV 278 278 * Requester?
D ACQ_STAT 279 279 * Acquire status
D INV_STAT 280 280 * Invite status
D DATA_AVAIL 281 281 * Data available
D SES_STAT 291 291 * Session status
D SYNC_LVL 292 292 * Synch level
D CONV_TYPE 293 293 * Conversation typ
D RMT_LOC 294 301 * Remote location
D LCL_LU 302 309 * Local LU name
D LCL_NETID 310 317 * Local net ID
D RMT_LU 318 325 * Remote LU
D RMT_NETID 326 333 * Remote net ID
D APPC_MODE 334 341 * APPC Mode
D LU6_STATE 345 345 * LU6 conv state
D LU6_COR 346 353 * LU6 conv
D * correlator
* The following fields apply to ISDN.
D ISDN_LEN 385 386I 0 * Rmt number len
D ISDN_TYPE 387 388 * Rmt number type
D ISDN_PLAN 389 390 * Rmt number plan
D ISDN_NUM 391 430 * Rmt number
D ISDN_SLEN 435 436I 0 * sub-addr len
D ISDN_STYPE 437 438 * sub-addr type
D ISDN_SNUM 439 478 * Rmt sub-address
D ISDN_CON 480 480 * Connection
D ISDN_RLEN 481 482I 0 * Rmt address len
D ISDN_RNUM 483 514 * Rmt address
D ISDN_ELEN 519 520 * Extension len
D ISDN_ETYPE 521 521 * Extension type
D ISDN_ENUM 522 561 * Extension num
D ISDN_XTYPE 566 566 * X.25 call type
* The following information is available only when program was started

* as result of a received program start request. (P_ stands for protected)
D TRAN_PGM 567 630 * Trans pgm name
D P_LUWIDLN 631 631 * LUWID fld len
D P_LUNAMELN 632 632 * LU-NAME len
D P_LUNAME 633 649 * LU-NAME
D P_LUWIDIN 650 655 * LUWID instance
D P_LUWIDSEQ 656 657I 0 * LUWID seq num
* The following information is available only when a protected conversation

* is started on a remote system. (U_ stands for unprotected)
D U_LUWIDLN 658 658 * LUWID fld len
D U_LUNAMELN 659 659 * LU-NAME len
D U_LUNAME 660 676 * LU-NAME
D U_LUWIDIN 677 682 * LUWID instance
D U_LUWIDSEQ 683 684I 0 * LUWID seq num
Figure 34. Example of Coding an INFDS with ICF file Get Attributes Feedback Information
Blocking Considerations
The fields of the input/output specific feedback in the INFDS and in most cases
the fields of the device specific feedback information section of the INFDS, are not

updated for each operation to the file in which the records are blocked and
unblocked. The feedback information is updated only when a block of records is
transferred between an RPG program and the OS/400 system. However, if you are
doing blocked input on a data base file, the relative record number and the key
value in the data base feedback section of the INFDS are updated:
v On every input/output operation, if a POST for any file with factor 1 blank has
not been specified anywhere in your program.
v Only after a POST for the file, if a POST for any file with factor 1 blank has been
specified anywhere in your program.
You can obtain valid updated feedback information by using the CL command
OVRDBF (Override with Database File) with SEQONLY(*NO) specified. If you use
a file override command, the ILE RPG compiler does not block or unblock the
records in the file.
For more information on blocking and unblocking of records in RPG see WebSphere
Development Studio: ILE RPG Programmer’s Guide.
File Status Codes

Any code placed in the subfield location *STATUS that is greater than 99 is
considered to be an exception/error condition. When the status code is greater
than 99; the error indicator — if specified in positions 73 and 74 — is set on, or the
%ERROR built-in function — if the ’E’ extender is specified — is set to return ’1’;
otherwise, the file exception/error subroutine receives control. Location *STATUS is
updated after every file operation.
You can use the %STATUS built-in function to get information on exception/errors.
It returns the most recent value set for the program or file status. If a file is
specified, %STATUS returns the value contained in the INFDS *STATUS field for
the specified file.
The codes in the following tables are placed in the subfield location *STATUS for
the file information data structure:
Table 7. Normal Codes
Code Device1 RC2 Condition
00000 No exception/error.
00002 W n/a Function key used to end display.
00011 W,D,SQ 11xx End of file on a read (input).
00012 W,D,SQ n/a No-record-found condition on a CHAIN, SETLL, and SETGT
operations.
00013 W n/a Subfile is full on WRITE operation.
1
Note: “Device” refers to the devices for which the condition applies. The following abbreviations are used: P =
PRINTER; D = DISK; W = WORKSTN; SP = SPECIAL; SQ = Sequential. The major/minor return codes under
column RC apply only to WORKSTN files. 2The formula mmnn is used to described major/minor return codes: mm
is the major and nn the minor.
Table 8. Exception/Error Codes

01011 W,D,SQ n/a Undefined record type (input record does not match record
identifying indicator).

Table 8. Exception/Error Codes (continued)
01021 W,D,SQ n/a Tried to write a record that already exists (file being used has
unique keys and key is duplicate, or attempted to write
duplicate relative record number to a subfile).
01022 D n/a Referential constraint error detected on file member.
01023 D,SQ n/a Error in trigger program before file operation performed.
01024 D,SQ n/a Error in trigger program after file operation performed.
01031 W,D,SQ n/a Match field out of sequence.
01041 n/a n/a Array/table load sequence error.
01042 n/a n/a Array/table load sequence error. Alternate collating sequence
used.
01051 n/a n/a Excess entries in array/table file.
01071 W,D,SQ n/a Numeric sequence error.
4
01121 W n/a No indicator on the DDS keyword for Print key.
4
01122 W n/a No indicator on the DDS keyword for Roll Up key.
4
01123 W n/a No indicator on the DDS keyword for Roll Down key.
4
01124 W n/a No indicator on the DDS keyword for Clear key.
4
01125 W n/a No indicator on the DDS keyword for Help key.
4
01126 W n/a No indicator on the DDS keyword for Home key.
01201 W 34xx Record mismatch detected on input.
01211 all n/a I/O operation to a closed file.
01215 all n/a OPEN issued to a file already opened.
3
01216 all yes Error on an implicit OPEN/CLOSE operation.
3
01217 all yes Error on an explicit OPEN/CLOSE operation.
01218 D,SQ n/a Record already locked.
01221 D,SQ n/a Update operation attempted without a prior read.
01222 D,SQ n/a Record cannot be allocated due to referential constraint error
01231 SP n/a Error on SPECIAL file.
01235 P n/a Error in PRTCTL space or skip entries.
01241 D,SQ n/a Record number not found. (Record number specified in record
address file is not present in file being processed.)
01251 W 80xx 81xx Permanent I/O error occurred.
01255 W 82xx 83xx Session or device error occurred. Recovery may be possible.
01261 W n/a Attempt to exceed maximum number of acquired devices.
01271 W n/a Attempt to acquire unavailable device
01281 W n/a Operation to unacquired device.
01282 W 0309 Job ending with controlled option.
01284 W n/a Unable to acquire second device for single device file
01285 W 0800 Attempt to acquire a device already acquired.
01286 W n/a Attempt to open shared file with SAVDS or IND options.
01287 W n/a Response indicators overlap IND indicators.
01299 W,D,SQ yes Other I/O error detected.

Table 8. Exception/Error Codes (continued)
01331 W 0310 Wait time exceeded for READ from WORKSTN file.
Notes:
1. “Device” refers to the devices for which the condition applies. The following abbreviations are used: P =
PRINTER; D = DISK; W = WORKSTN; SP = SPECIAL; SQ = Sequential. The major/minor return codes under
column RC apply only to WORKSTN files.
2. The formula mmnn is used to described major/minor return codes: mm is the major and nn the minor.
3. Any errors that occur during an open or close operation will result in a *STATUS value of 1216 or 1217
regardless of the major/minor return code value.
4. See Figure 9 on page 33 for special handling.
The following table shows the major/minor return code to *STATUS value
mapping for errors that occur to AS/400 programs using WORKSTN files only. See
the Information Center for more information on major/minor return codes.
Major Minor *STATUS

00,02 all 00000
03 all (except 09,10) 00000
03 09 01282
03 10 01331
04 all 01299
08 all 012851
11 all 00011
34 all 01201
80,81 all 01251
82,83 all 01255
Notes:
1. The return code field will not be updated for a *STATUS value of 1285, 1261, or 1281
because these conditions are detected before calling data management. To monitor for
these errors, you must check for the *STATUS value and not for the corresponding
major/minor return code value.
File Exception/Error Subroutine (INFSR)

To identify the user-written RPG IV subroutine that may receive control following
file exception/errors, specify the INFSR keyword on the File Description
specification with the name of the subroutine that receives control when
exception/errors occur on this file. The subroutine name can be *PSSR, which
indicates that the program exception/error subroutine is given control for the
exception/errors on this file.
A file exception/error subroutine (INFSR) receives control when an

exception/error occurs on an implicit (primary or secondary) file operation or on
an explicit file operation that does not have an indicator specified in positions 73
and 74,does not have an (E) extender, and is not in the monitor block of a
MONITOR group that can handle the error.. The file exception/error subroutine
can also be run by the EXSR operation code. Any of the RPG IV operations can be
used in the file exception/error subroutine. Factor 1 of the BEGSR operation and

factor 2 of the EXSR operation must contain the name of the subroutine that
receives control (same name as specified with the INFSR keyword on the file
description specifications).
Note: The INFSR keyword cannot be specified if the keyword NOMAIN is

specified on the control specification, or if the file is to be accessed by a
subprocedure.
The ENDSR operation must be the last specification for the file exception/error
subroutine and should be specified as follows:
Position
Entry
6 C
7-11 Blank
12-25 Can contain a label that is used in a GOTO specification within the
subroutine.
26-35 ENDSR
36-49 Optional entry to designate where control is to be returned following
processing of the subroutine. The entry must be a 6-position character
field, literal, or array element whose value specifies one of the following
return points.
Note: If the return points are specified as literals, they must be enclosed in
apostrophes. If they are specified as named constants, the constants
must be character and must contain only the return point with no
leading blanks. If they are specified in fields or array elements, the
value must be left-adjusted in the field or array element.
*DETL
Continue at the beginning of detail lines.
*GETIN
Continue at the get input record routine.
*TOTC
Continue at the beginning of total calculations.
*TOTL
Continue at the beginning of total lines.
*OFL Continue at the beginning of overflow lines.
*DETC
Continue at the beginning of detail calculations.
*CANCL
Cancel the processing of the program.
Blanks Return control to the RPG IV default error handler. This applies
when factor 2 is a value of blanks and when factor 2 is not
specified. If the subroutine was called by the EXSR operation and
factor 2 is blank, control returns to the next sequential instruction.
Blanks are only valid at runtime.
50-76 Blank.
Remember the following when specifying the file exception/error subroutine:

v The programmer can explicitly call the file exception/error subroutine by
specifying the name of the subroutine in factor 2 of the EXSR operation.
v After the ENDSR operation of the file exception/error subroutine is run, the
RPG IV language resets the field or array element specified in factor 2 to blanks.
Thus, if the programmer does not place a value in this field during the
processing of the subroutine, the RPG IV default error handler receives control
following processing of the subroutine unless the subroutine was called by the
EXSR operation. Because factor 2 is set to blanks, the programmer can specify
the return point within the subroutine that is best suited for the exception/error
that occurred. If the subroutine was called by the EXSR operation and factor 2 of
the ENDSR operation is blank, control returns to the next sequential instruction
following the EXSR operation. A file exception/error subroutine can handle
errors in more than one file.
v If a file exception/error occurs during the start or end of a program, control
passes to the RPG IV default error handler, and not to the user-written file
exception/error or subroutine (INFSR).
v Because the file exception/error subroutine may receive control whenever a file
exception/error occurs, an exception/error could occur while the subroutine is
running if an I/O operation is processed on the file in error. If an
exception/error occurs on the file already in error while the subroutine is
running, the subroutine is called again; this will result in a program loop unless
the programmer codes the subroutine to avoid this problem. One way to avoid
such a program loop is to set a first-time switch in the subroutine. If it is not the
first time through the subroutine, set on a halt indicator and issue the RETURN
operation as follows:

*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...
C* If INFSR is already handling the error, exit.
C ERRRTN BEGSR
C SW IFEQ ’1’
C SETON H1
C RETURN
C* Otherwise, flag the error handler.
C ELSE
C MOVE ’1’ SW
C :
C :
C :
C ENDIF
C* End error processing.
C MOVE ’0’ SW
C ENDSR
Figure 35. Setting a First-time Switch
Note: It may not be possible to continue processing the file after an I/O error has
occurred. To continue, it may be necessary to issue a CLOSE operation and
then an OPEN operation to the file.
Program Exception/Errors
Some examples of program exception/errors are: division by zero, SQRT of a
negative number, invalid array index, error on a CALL, error return from called
program, and start position or length out of range for a string operation. They can
be handled in one of the following ways:
v The operation code extender ’E’ can be specified for some operation codes.
When specified, before the operation begins, this extender sets the %ERROR and
%STATUS built-in functions to return zero. If an exception/error occurs during
the operation, then after the operation %ERROR returns ’1’ and %STATUS
returns the program status. The optional program status data structure is
updated with the exception/error information. You can determine the action to
be taken by testing %ERROR and %STATUS.
v An indicator can be specified in positions 73 and 74 of the calculation
specifications for some operation codes. This indicator is set on if an
exception/error occurs during the processing of the specified operation. The
optional program status data structure is updated with the exception/error
information. You can determine the action to be taken by testing the indicator.

v ON-ERROR groups can be used to handle errors for statements processed within
a MONITOR block. If an error occurs when a statement is processed, control
passes to the appropriate ON-ERROR group.
v You can create a user-defined ILE exception handler that will take control when
an exception occurs. For more information, see WebSphere Development Studio: ILE
v A program exception/error subroutine can be specified. You enter *PSSR in
factor 1 of a BEGSR operation to specify this subroutine. Information regarding
the program exception/error is made available through a program status data
structure that is specified with an S in position 23 of the data structure statement
on the definition specifications. You can also use the %STATUS built-in function,
which returns the most recent value set for the program or file status.
v If the indicator, ’E’ extender, monitor block, or program exception/error
subroutine is not present, program exception/errors are handled by the RPG IV
default error handler.
Program Status Data Structure

A program status data structure (PSDS) can be defined to make program
exception/error information available to an RPG IV program. The PSDS must be
defined in the main source section; therefore, there is only one PSDS per module.
A data structure is defined as a PSDS by an S in position 23 of the data structure

statement. A PSDS contains predefined subfields that provide you with information
about the program exception/error that occurred. The location of the subfields in
the PSDS is defined by special keywords or by predefined From and To positions.
In order to access the subfields, you assign a name to each subfield. The keywords
must be specified, left-adjusted in positions 26 through 39.
Information from the PSDS is also provided in a formatted dump. However, a

formatted dump might not contain information for fields in the PSDS if the PSDS
is not coded, or the length of the PSDS does not include those fields. For example,
if the PSDS is only 275 bytes long, the time and date or program running will
appear as *N/A*. in the dump, since this information starts at byte 276. For more
information see “DUMP (Program Dump)” on page 583.
TIP
Call performance with LR on will be greatly improved by having no PSDS, or
a PSDS no longer than 80 bytes, since some of the information to fill the
PSDS after 80 bytes is costly to obtain.
Table 9 provides the layout of the subfields of the data structure and the
predefined From and To positions of its subfields that can be used to access
information in this data structure.
Table 9. Contents of the Program Status Data Structure
From To
(Pos. (Pos.

1 10 Character 10 *PROC Name of the main procedure, if there is one;
otherwise, the name associated with the main
source section.

Table 9. Contents of the Program Status Data Structure (continued)
From To
(Pos. (Pos.

11 15 Zoned decimal 5,0 *STATUS Status code. For a description of these codes, see
“Program Status Codes” on page 87.
16 20 Zoned decimal 5,0 Previous status code.
21 28 Character 8 RPG IV source listing line number or statement
number. The source listing line number is replaced
by the source listing statement number if
OPTION(*SRCSTMT) is specified instead of
OPTION(*NOSRCSTMT). The full statement
number is included when it applies to the root
source member. If the statement number is greater
than 6 digits (that is, it includes a source ID other
than zero), the first 2 positions of the 8-byte
rest of statement number is stored in positions
354-355.
29 36 Character 8 *ROUTINE Name of the RPG IV routine in which the exception
or error occurred. This subfield is updated at the
beginning of an RPG IV routine or after a program
call only when the *STATUS subfield is updated
with a nonzero value. The following names identify
the routines:
*INIT Program initialization
*DETL Detail lines
*GETIN
Get input record
*TOTC Total calculations
*TOTL Total lines
*DETC Detail calculations
*OFL Overflow lines
*TERM
Program ending
*ROUTINE
Name of program or procedure called (first
8 characters).
Note: *ROUTINE is not valid unless you use the
normal RPG IV cycle. Logic that takes the program
out of the normal RPG IV cycle may cause
*ROUTINE to reflect an incorrect value.
37 39 Zoned decimal 3,0 *PARMS Number of parameters passed to this program from
a calling program. The value is the same as that
returned by %PARMS. If no information is
available, -1 is returned.
40 42 Character 3 Exception type (CPF for a OS/400 system exception
or MCH for a machine exception).

From To
(Pos. (Pos.

43 46 Character 4 Exception number. For a CPF exception, this field
contains a CPF message number. For a machine
exception, it contains a machine exception number.
47 50 Character 4 Reserved
51 80 Character 30 Work area for messages. This area is only meant for
internal use by the ILE RPG compiler. The
organization of information will not always be
consistent. It can be displayed by the user.
81 90 Character 10 Name of library in which the program is located.
91 170 Character 80 Retrieved exception data. CPF messages are placed
in this subfield when location *STATUS contains
09999.
171 174 Character 4 Identification of the exception that caused RNX9001
exception to be signaled.
175 184 Character 10 Name of file on which the last file operation
occurred (updated only when an error occurs). This
information always contains the full file name.
191 198 Character 8 Date (*DATE format) the job entered the system. In
the case of batch jobs submitted for overnight
processing, those that run after midnight will carry
the next day’s date. This value is derived from the
job date, with the year expanded to the full four
years. The date represented by this value is the
same date represented by positions 270 - 275.
199 200 Zoned decimal 2,0 First 2 digits of a 4-digit year. The same as the first
2 digits of *YEAR. This field applies to the century
part of the date in positions 270 to 275. For
example, for the date 1999-06-27, UDATE would be
990627, and this century field would be 19. The
value in this field in conjunction with the value in
positions 270 - 275 has the combined information of
the value in positions 191 -198.
Note: This century field does not apply to the dates
in positions 276 to 281, or positions 288 to 293.
201 208 Character 8 Name of file on which the last file operation
occurred (updated only when an error occurs). This
file name will be truncated if a long file name is
used. See positions 175-184 for long file name
information.

From To
(Pos. (Pos.

209 243 Character 35 Status information on the last file used. This
information includes the status code, the RPG IV
opcode, the RPG IV routine name, the source listing
line number or statement number, and record name.
It is updated only when an error occurs.
Note: The opcode name is in the same form as
*OPCODE in the INFDS The source listing line
number is replaced by the source listing statement
number if OPTION(*SRCSTMT) is specified instead
of OPTION(*NOSRCSTMT). The full statement
number is included when it applies to the root
source member. If the statement number is greater
than 6 digits (that is, it includes a source ID other
than zero), the first 2 positions of the 8-byte
rest of statement number is stored in positions
356-357.
244 253 Character 10 Job name.
254 263 Character 10 User name from the user profile.
264 269 Zoned decimal 6,0 Job number.
270 275 Zoned decimal 6,0 Date (in UDATE format) the program started
running in the system (UDATE is derived from this
date). See “User Date Special Words” on page 7 for
a description of UDATE. This is commonly known
as the ’job date’. The date represented by this value
is the same date represented by positions 191 - 198.
276 281 Zoned decimal 6,0 Date of program running (the system date in
UDATE format). If the year part of this value is
between 40 and 99, the date is between 1940 and
1999. Otherwise the date is between 2000 and 2039.
The ’century’ value in positions 199 - 200 does not
apply to this field.
282 287 Zoned decimal 6,0 Time (in the format hhmmss) of the program
running.
288 293 Character 6 Date (in UDATE format) the program was
compiled. If the year part of this value is between
40 and 99, the date is between 1940 and 1999.
Otherwise the date is between 2000 and 2039. The
’century’ value in positions 199 - 200 does not apply
to this field.
294 299 Character 6 Time (in the format hhmmss) the program was
compiled.
300 303 Character 4 Level of the compiler.
304 313 Character 10 Source file name.
314 323 Character 10 Source library name.
324 333 Character 10 Source file member name.
334 343 Character 10 Program containing procedure.

From To
(Pos. (Pos.

344 353 Character 10 Module containing procedure.
positions 21-28.
positions 228-235.
358 367 Character 10 Current user profile name.
Program Status Codes

Any code placed in the subfield location *STATUS that is greater than 99 is
considered to be an exception/error condition. When the status code is greater
than 99; the error indicator — if specified in positions 73 and 74 — is set on, or the
%ERROR built-in function — if the ’E’ extender is specified — is set to return ’1’,
or control passes to the appropriate ON-ERROR group within a MONITOR block;
otherwise, the program exception/error subroutine receives control. Location
*STATUS is updated when an exception/error occurs.
The %STATUS built-in function returns the most recent value set for the program
or file status.
The following codes are placed in the subfield location *STATUS for the program
status data structure:
Normal Codes
Code Condition
00000 No exception/error occurred
00001 Called program returned with the LR indicator on.
00050 Conversion resulted in substitution.
Exception/Error Codes
Code Condition
00100 Value out of range for string operation
00101 Negative square root
00102 Divide by zero
00103 An intermediate result is not large enough to contain the result.
00104 Float underflow. An intermediate value is too small to be contained in the
intermediate result field.
| 00105 Invalid characters in character to numeric conversion functions.
00112 Invalid Date, Time or Timestamp value.

00113 Date overflow or underflow. (For example, when the result of a Date
calculation results in a number greater than *HIVAL or less than *LOVAL.)
00114 Date mapping errors, where a Date is mapped from a 4-character year to a
2-character year, and the date range is not 1940-2039.
00115 Variable-length field has a current length that is not valid.
00120 Table or array out of sequence.
00121 Array index not valid
00122 OCCUR outside of range
00123 Reset attempted during initialization step of program
00202 Called program or procedure failed; halt indicator (H1 through H9) not on
00211 Error calling program or procedure
00222 Pointer or parameter error
00231 Called program or procedure returned with halt indicator on
00232 Halt indicator on in this program
00233 Halt indicator on when RETURN operation run
00299 RPG IV formatted dump failed
00301 Class or method not found for a method call, or error in method call.
00302 Error while converting a Java array to an RPG parameter on entry to a
Java native method.
00303 Error converting RPG parameter to Java array on exit from an RPG native
method.
00304 Error converting RPG parameter to Java array in preparation for a Java
method call.
00305 Error converting Java array to RPG parameter or return value after a Java
method.
00306 Error converting RPG return value to Java array.
00333 Error on DSPLY operation
00401 Data area specified on IN/OUT not found
00402 *PDA not valid for non-prestart job
00411 Data area type or length does not match
00412 Data area not locked for output
00413 Error on IN/OUT operation
00414 User not authorized to use data area
00415 User not authorized to change data area
00421 Error on UNLOCK operation
00425 Length requested for storage allocation is out of range
00426 Error encountered during storage management operation
00431 Data area previously locked by another program
00432 Data area locked by program in the same process

00450 Character field not entirely enclosed by shift-out and shift-in characters
00451 Conversion between two CCSIDs is not supported.
00501 Failure to retrieve sort sequence.
00502 Failure to convert sort sequence.
00802 Commitment control not active.
00803 Rollback operation failed.
00804 Error occurred on COMMIT operation
00805 Error occurred on ROLBK operation
00907 Decimal data error (digit or sign not valid)
00970 The level number of the compiler used to generate the program does not
agree with the level number of the RPG IV run-time subroutines.
09998 Internal failure in ILE RPG compiler or in run-time subroutines
09999 Program exception in system routine.
PSDS Example
To specify a PSDS in your program, you code the program status data structure
and the subfields you wish to use on a definition specification.

DMYPSDS SDS
D PROC_NAME *PROC * Procedure name
D PGM_STATUS *STATUS * Status code
D PRV_STATUS 16 20S 0 * Previous status
D LINE_NUM 21 28 * Src list line num
D ROUTINE *ROUTINE * Routine name
D PARMS *PARMS * Num passed parms
D EXCP_TYPE 40 42 * Exception type
D EXCP_NUM 43 46 * Exception number
D PGM_LIB 81 90 * Program library
D EXCP_DATA 91 170 * Exception data
D EXCP_ID 171 174 * Exception Id
D DATE 191 198 * Date (*DATE fmt)
D YEAR 199 200S 0 * Year (*YEAR fmt)
D LAST_FILE 201 208 * Last file used
D FILE_INFO 209 243 * File error info
D JOB_NAME 244 253 * Job name
D USER 254 263 * User name
D JOB_NUM 264 269S 0 * Job number
D JOB_DATE 270 275S 0 * Date (UDATE fmt)
D RUN_DATE 276 281S 0 * Run date (UDATE)
D RUN_TIME 282 287S 0 * Run time (UDATE)
D CRT_DATE 288 293 * Create date
D CRT_TIME 294 299 * Create time
D CPL_LEVEL 300 303 * Compiler level
D SRC_FILE 304 313 * Source file
D SRC_LIB 314 323 * Source file lib
D SRC_MBR 324 333 * Source file mbr
D PROC_PGM 334 343 * Pgm Proc is in
D PROC_MOD 344 353 * Mod Proc is in
Figure 36. Example of Coding a PSDS

Note: The keywords are not labels and cannot be used to access the subfields.
Short entries are padded on the right with blanks.
Program Exception/Error Subroutine

To identify the user-written RPG IV subroutine that is to receive control when a
program exception/error occurs, specify *PSSR in factor 1 of the subroutine’s
BEGSR operation. If an indicator is not specified in positions 73 and 74 for the
operation code, or if the operation does not have an (E) extender, or if the
statement is not in a MONITOR block that can handle the error, or if an exception
occurs that is not expected for the operation code (that is, an array indexing error
during a SCAN operation), control is transferred to this subroutine when a
program exception/error occurs. In addition, the subroutine can also be called by
the EXSR operation. *PSSR can be specified on the INFSR keyword on the file
description specifications and receives control if a file exception/error occurs.
Any of the RPG IV operation codes can be used in the program exception/error
subroutine. The ENDSR operation must be the last specification for the subroutine,
and the factor 2 entry on the ENDSR operation specifies the return point following
the running of the subroutine. For a discussion of the valid entries for factor 2, see
“File Exception/Error Subroutine (INFSR)” on page 79.
Remember the following when specifying a program exception/error subroutine:

v You can explicitly call the *PSSR subroutine by specifying *PSSR in factor 2 of
the EXSR operation.
v After the ENDSR operation of the *PSSR subroutine is run, the RPG IV language
resets the field, subfield, or array element specified in factor 2 to blanks. This
allows you to specify the return point within the subroutine that is best suited
for the exception/error that occurred. If factor 2 contains blanks at the end of
the subroutine, the RPG IV default error handler receives control; if the
subroutine was called by an EXSR or CASxx operation, control returns to the
next sequential instruction following the EXSR or ENDCS.
v Because the program exception/error subroutine may receive control whenever a
non-file exception/error occurs, an exception/error could occur while the
subroutine is running. If an exception/error occurs while the subroutine is
running, the subroutine is called again; this will result in a program loop unless
the programmer codes the subroutine to avoid this problem.
v If you have used the OPTIMIZE(*FULL) option on either the CRTBNDRPG or
the CRTRPGMOD command, you have to declare all fields that you refer to
during exception handling with the NOOPT keyword in the definition
specification for the field. This will ensure that when you run your program, the
fields referred to during exception handling will have current values.
v A *PSSR can be defined in a subprocedure, and each subprocedure can have its
own *PSSR. Note that the *PSSR in a subprocedure is local to that subprocedure.
If you want the subprocedures to share the same exception routine then you
should have each *PSSR call a shared procedure.


Chapter 6. Procedures and subprocedures
A procedure is a routine that is called using a bound call. You can create two kinds
of procedures in RPG: a main procedure and a subprocedure.
A main procedure uses the RPG cycle. It is specified in the main source section.
You do not need to code anything special to define the main procedure; it consists
of everything before the first Procedure specification. The parameters for the main
procedure can be coded using a prototype and procedure interface in the global
Definition specifications, or using a *ENTRY PLIST in the main procedure’s
calculations.
Any procedure interface found in the global definitions is assumed to be the

procedure interface for the main procedure. The name is required for the
procedure interface for the main procedure, and the prototype with the matching
name must precede the procedure interface in the source.
The name of the main procedure must be the same as the name of the module
being created. You can either use this name for the prototype and procedure
interface, or specify this name in the EXTPROC keyword of the prototype. In the
following example, module CheckFile is created. The main procedure has three
parameters:
1. A file name (input)
2. A library name (input)
3. An indicator indicating whether the file was found (output)
/COPY file CHECKFILEC with the prototype for the main procedure:
D CheckFile PR
D file 10a const
D library 10a const
D found 1N
Module CheckFile:
/COPY CHECKFILEC
D CheckFile PI
D file 10a const
D library 10a const
D found 1N
C ... code using parameters file, library and found
Using a *ENTRY PLIST, you would define the parameters this way:
D file S 10a const
D library S 10a const
D found S 1N
C *ENTRY PLIST
C PARM file
C PARM library
C PARM found
C ... code using parameters file, library and found
You can also use a prototype and procedure interface to define your main
procedure as a program. In this case, you would specify the EXTPGM keyword for
the prototype.

/COPY file CHECKFILEC with the prototype for the program:
D CheckFile PR extpgm(’CHECKFILE’)
D file 10a const
D library 10a const
D found 1N
In the module source, the procedure interface would be defined the same way.
A subprocedure is a procedure specified after the main source section. It can only
be called using a bound call. Subprocedures differ from main procedures in several
respects, the main difference being that subprocedures do not (and cannot) use the
RPG cycle while running.
All subprocedures must have a corresponding prototype in the definition

specifications of the main source section. The prototype is used by the compiler to
call the program or procedure correctly, and to ensure that the caller passes the
correct parameters.
This chapter discusses the following aspects of subprocedures:

v “Subprocedure Definition”
v “NOMAIN Module” on page 100
v “Mixing Main Procedures and Exported Subprocedures” on page 100
v “Subprocedures and Subroutines” on page 101
Subprocedure Definition
Subprocedures are defined after the main source section. Figure 37 shows a
subprocedure, highlighting the different parts of it.
* Prototype for procedure FUNCTION

D FUNCTION PR 10I 0 1
D TERM1 5I 0 VALUE
D TERM2 5I 0 VALUE
D TERM3 5I 0 VALUE
P Function B 2
*-------------------------------------------------------------
* This procedure performs a function on the 3 numeric values
* passed to it as value parameters.
*
* This illustrates how a procedure interface is specified for a
* procedure and how values are returned from a procedure.
*-------------------------------------------------------------
D Function PI 10I 0 3
D Term1 5I 0 VALUE
D Term2 5I 0 VALUE
D Term3 5I 0 VALUE
D Result S 10I 0 4
/free
Result = Term1 ** 2 * 17
+ Term2 * 7 5
+ Term3;
return Result * 45 + 23;
/end-free
P E 6
Figure 37. Example of a Subprocedure

1 A Prototype which specifies the name, return value if any, and parameters
if any.
2 A Begin-Procedure specification (B in position 24 of a procedure
specification)
3 A Procedure-Interface definition, which specifies the return value and
parameters, if any. The procedure interface must match the corresponding
prototype. The procedure-interface definition is optional if the
subprocedure does not return a value and does not have any parameters
that are passed to it.
4 Other definition specifications of variables, constants and prototypes
needed by the subprocedure. These definitions are local definitions.
5 Any calculation specifications, standard or free-form, needed to perform
the task of the procedure. The calculations may refer to both local and
global definitions. Any subroutines included within the subprocedure are
local. They cannot be used outside of the subprocedure. If the
subprocedure returns a value, then the subprocedure must contain a
RETURN operation.
6 An End-Procedure specification (E in position 24 of a procedure
specification)
Except for the procedure-interface definition, which may be placed anywhere

within the definition specifications, a subprocedure must be coded in the order
shown above.
No cycle code is generated for subprocedures. Consequently, you cannot code:

v Prerun-time and compile-time arrays and tables
v *DTAARA definitions
v Total calculations
The calculation specifications are processed only once and the procedure returns at
the end of the calculation specifications. See “Subprocedure Calculations” on
page 97 for more information.
A subprocedure may be exported, meaning that procedures in other modules in

the program can call it. To indicate that it is to be exported, specify the keyword
EXPORT on the Procedure-Begin specification. If not specified, the subprocedure
can only be called from within the module.
Procedure Interface Definition

If a prototyped procedure has call parameters or a return value, then it must have
a procedure interface definition. A procedure interface definition is a repeat of the
prototype information within the definition of a procedure. It is used to declare the
entry parameters for the procedure and to ensure that the internal definition of the
procedure is consistent with the external definition (the prototype).
You specify a procedure interface by placing PI in the Definition-Type entry

(positions 24-25). Any parameter definitions, indicated by blanks in positions 24-25,
must immediately follow the PI specification. The procedure interface definition
ends with the first definition specification with non-blanks in positions 24-25 or by
a non-definition specification.
Chapter 6. Procedures and subprocedures 95

For more information on procedure interface definitions, see “Procedure Interface”
on page 147.
Return Values
A procedure that returns a value is essentially a user-defined function, similar to a
built-in function. To define a return value for a subprocedure, you must
1. Define the return value on both the prototype and procedure-interface
definitions of the subprocedure.
2. Code a RETURN operation with an expression in the extended-factor 2 field
that contains the value to be returned.
You define the length and the type of the return value on the procedure-interface
specification (the definition specification with PI in positions 24-25). The following
keywords are also allowed:
DATFMT(fmt)
The return value has the date format specified by the keyword.
DIM(N)
The return value is an array with N elements.
LIKE(name)
The return value is defined like the item specified by the keyword.
| LIKEDS(name)
| The return value is a data structure defined like the data structure
| specified by the keyword.
| LIKEREC(name{,type})
| The return value is a data structure defined like the record name specified
| by the keyword.
PROCPTR
The return value is a procedure pointer.
TIMFMT(fmt)
The return value has the time format specified by the keyword.
To return the value to the caller, you must code a RETURN operation with an
expression containing the return value. The expression in the extended-factor 2
field is subject to the same rules as an expression with EVAL. The actual returned
value has the same role as the left-hand side of the EVAL expression, while the
extended factor 2 of the RETURN operation has the same role as the right-hand
side. You must ensure that a RETURN operation is performed if the subprocedure
has a return value defined; otherwise an exception is issued to the caller of the
subprocedure.
Scope of Definitions
Any items defined within a subprocedure are local. If a local item is defined with
the same name as a global data item, then any references to that name inside the
subprocedure use the local definition.
However, keep in mind the following:

v Subroutine names and tag names are known only to the procedure in which
they are defined, even those defined in the main procedure.

v All fields specified on input and output specifications are global. When a
subprocedure uses input or output specifications (for example, while processing
a read operation), the global name is used even if there is a local variable of the
same name.
When using a global KLIST or PLIST in a subprocedure some of the fields may
have the same names as local fields. If this occurs, the global field is used. This
may cause problems when setting up a KLIST or PLIST prior to using it.
For example, consider the following source.
* Main procedure definitions

D Fld1 S 1A
D Fld2 S 1A
* Define a global key field list with 2 fields, Fld1 and Fld2
C global_kl KLIST
C KFLD Fld1
C KFLD Fld2
* Subprocedure Section
P Subproc B
D Fld2 S 1A
* local_kl has one global kfld (fld1) and one local (fld2)
C local_kl KLIST
C KFLD Fld1
C KFLD Fld2
* Even though Fld2 is defined locally in the subprocedure,

* the global Fld2 is used by the global_kl, since global KLISTs
* always use global fields. As a result, the assignment to the
* local Fld2 will NOT affect the CHAIN operation.
C EVAL Fld1 = ’A’

C EVAL Fld2 = ’B’
C global_kl SETLL file
* Local KLISTs use global fields only when there is no local

* field of that name. local_kl uses the local Fld2 and so the
* assignment to the local Fld2 WILL affect the CHAIN operation.
C EVAL Fld1 = ’A’
C EVAL Fld2 = ’B’
C local_kl SETLL file
...
P E
Figure 38. Scope of Key Fields Inside a Module
For more information on scope, see “Scope of Definitions” on page 118.
Subprocedure Calculations
No cycle code is generated for a subprocedure, and so you must code it differently
than a main procedure. The subprocedure ends when one of the following occurs:
v A RETURN operation is processed
v The last calculation in the body of the subprocedure is processed.
Figure 39 on page 98 shows the normal processing steps for a subprocedure.

Figure 40 on page 99 shows the exception/error handling sequence.

Start
First • Initialize global variables

procedure (main • Retrieve external indicators
or sub) called in the Yes (U1 through U8) and user date fields
module since program • Open files
activation? • Load data area data
structures, arrays, and tables
No
• If there is no *INZSR, store

data structures and variables
for RESET operations
Initialize
automatic variables
First time • Initialize static variables

subprocedure Yes
• Store variables for RESET
has been called? operations on local variables
No
Return operation
Perform calculations once Set return value for caller

(if the subprocedure
returns a value)
If subprocedure Yes
returns a value, was a Return to caller
RETURN operation
done?
No
Signal exception to
caller (subprocedure
ends)
Figure 39. Normal Processing Sequence for a Subprocedure
1 Taking the ″No″ branch means that another procedure has already been
called since the program was activated. You should ensure that you do not
make any incorrect assumptions about the state of files, data areas, etc.,
since another procedure may have closed files, or unlocked data areas.
2 If an entry parameter to the main procedure is RESET anywhere in the
module, this will cause an exception. If it is possible that a subprocedure
will be called before the main procedure, it is not advised to RESET any
entry parameters for the main procedure.

Exception during
calculations
Program error Yes

and subprocedure Execute *PSSR
has *PSSR? subroutine
No
Percolate exception Program continues

*PSSR reached No
(subprocedure ends) normally after RETURN
ENDSR?
or GOTO
Yes
Signal exception to
caller (subprocedure
ends)
Figure 40. Exception/Error Handling Sequence for a Subprocedure
Here are some points to consider when coding subprocedures:

v There is no *INZSR associated with subprocedures. Data is initialized (with
either INZ values or default values) when the subprocedure is first called, but
before the calculations begin.
Note also that if the subprocedure is the first procedure to be called in a module,
the *INZSR of the main procedure (if present) will not be run, although other
initialization of global data will be done. The *INZSR of the main procedure will
be run when the main procedure is called.
v When a subprocedure returns normally, the return value, if specified on the
prototype of the called program or procedure, is passed to the caller. Nothing
else occurs automatically. All files and data areas must be closed manually. Files
must be written out manually. You can set on indicators such as LR, but
program termination will not occur until the main procedure terminates.
v Exception handling within a subprocedure differs from a main procedure
primarily because there is no default exception handler for subprocedures and
so situations where the default handler would be called for a main procedure
correspond to abnormal end of the subprocedure. For example, Factor 2 of an
ENDSR operation for a *PSSR subroutine within a subprocedure must be blank.
A blank factor 2 in a main procedure would result in control being passed to the
default handler. In a subprocedure, if the ENDSR is reached, then the
subprocedure will end abnormally and RNX9001 will be signalled to the caller
of the subprocedure.
You can avoid abnormal termination either by coding a RETURN operation in
the *PSSR, or by coding a GOTO and label in the subprocedure to continue
processing.
v The *PSSR error subroutine is local to the subprocedure. Conversely, file errors
are global by definition, and so you cannot code an INFSR in a subprocedure,
nor can you use a file for which an INFSR is coded.
v Indicators that control the cycle function solely as conditioning indicators when
used in a NOMAIN module; or in a subprocedure that is active, but where the
main procedure of the module is not. Indicators that control the cycle include:
LR, RT, H1-H9, and control level indicators.

NOMAIN Module
NOMAIN Module
You can code one or more subprocedures in a module without coding a main
procedure. Such a module is called a NOMAIN module, since it requires the
specification of the NOMAIN keyword on the control specification. When there is
no main procedure, no cycle code is generated for the NOMAIN module.
TIP
You may want to consider making all your modules NOMAIN modules
except the ones that actually contain the program entry procedure for a
program. The lack of the cycle code will reduce the size of the program.
Since there is no main procedure, you are restricted in terms of what can be coded
in the main source section. Specifically, you cannot code specifications for
v Primary and secondary files
v Detail and total output
v Executable calculations (including an initialization subroutine)
v *ENTRY PLIST
Instead you would code in the main source section:

v Full-procedural files
v Input specifications
v Definition specifications
v Declarative calculations such as DEFINE, KFLD, KLIST, PARM, and PLIST (but
not *ENTRY PLIST)
v Exception output
Note: A module with NOMAIN specified will not have a program entry
procedure. Consequently you cannot use the CRTBNDRPG command to
compile the source.
Mixing Main Procedures and Exported Subprocedures

If a module contains both a main procedure and exported subprocedures, take
great care to ensure that the RPG cycle in the main procedure does not adversely
affect the global data, files, and data areas that the sub-procedures are using.
You must be aware of when files are opened and closed implicitly, when data areas
are locked and unlocked implicitly, and when global data is initialized or
re-initialized.
Implicit Opening of Files and Locking of Data Areas

UDS data areas and files that do not have the USROPN keyword are opened or
locked implicitly during module initialization and during main-procedure
initialization.
Module initialization occurs when the first procedure (either the main procedure or
a subprocedure) is called.

Mixing Procedures
Main procedure initialization occurs when the main procedure is called the first
time. It also occurs on subsequent calls if the main procedure ended abnormally or
with LR on.
Implicit Closing of Files and Unlocking of Data Areas

UDS data areas and files that do not have the USROPN keyword are closed or
unlocked implicitly during main procedure termination when the main procedure
ends abnormally or with LR on.
Initialization of Global Data

Data is initialized during module initialization and during main procedure
initialization.
Possible Problems
If module initialization occurs because a subprocedure is the first procedure to be
called, and main procedure initialization occurs later, errors can occur if files are
already open or data areas are already locked.
If a subprocedure calls the main procedure, global data may or may not be
reinitialized during the call, depending on the way the main procedure ended the
last time it was called. If the subprocedure is using any global data, this can cause
unexpected results.
Recommendations
Consider moving the main procedure logic into a subprocedure, and making the
module a NOMAIN module.
If you mix main procedures with exported subprocedures, ensure that your main
procedure is called first, before any subprocedures.
Do not allow main-procedure initialization to happen more than once, since this
would reinitialize your global data. The best way to prevent reinitialization is to
avoid using the LR indicator.
If you want to call your main procedure intermixed with your subprocedures, you
should declare all your files as USROPN and not use UDS data areas. Open files
and lock data areas as you need them, and close files and unlock data areas when
you no longer need them. You might consider having a subprocedure in the
module that will close any open files and unlock any locked data areas.
Subprocedures and Subroutines

A subprocedure is similar to a subroutine, except that a subprocedure offers the
following improvements:
v You can pass parameters to a subprocedure, even passing by value.
This means that the parameters used to communicate with subprocedures do not
have to be modifiable. Parameters that are passed by reference, as they are with
programs, must be modifiable, and so may be less reliable.
v The parameters passed to a subprocedure and those received by it are checked
at compile time for consistency. This helps to reduce run-time errors, which can
be more costly.
v You can use a subprocedure like a built-in function in an expression.

Subprocedures and Subroutines
When used in this way, they return a value to the caller. This basically allows
you to custom-define any operators you might need in an expression.
v Names defined in a subprocedure are not visible outside the subprocedure.
This means that there is less chance of the procedure inadvertently changing a
item that is shared by other procedures. Furthermore, the caller of the procedure
does not need to know as much about the items used inside the subprocedure.
v You can call the subprocedure from outside the module, if it is exported.
v You can call subprocedures recursively.
v Procedures are defined on a different specification type, namely, procedure
specifications. This different type helps you to immediately recognize that you
are dealing with a separate unit.
If you do not require the improvements offered by subprocedures, you may want
to use a subroutine because an EXSR operation is usually faster than a call to a
subprocedure.

Chapter 7. General File Considerations
This chapter contains a more detailed explanation of:
v Multi-file Processing
v Match fields
v Alternate collating sequence
v File translation.
Primary/Secondary Multi-file Processing

In an RPG IV program, the processing of a primary input file and one or more
secondary input files, with or without match fields, is termed multi-file processing.
Selection of records from more than one file based on the contents of match fields
is known as multi-file processing by matching records. Multi-file processing can be
used with externally described or program described input files that are designated
as primary/secondary files.
Multi-file Processing with No Match Fields

When no match fields are used in multi-file processing, records are selected from
one file at a time. When the records from one file are all processed, the records
from the next file are selected. The files are selected in this order:
1. Primary file, if specified
2. Secondary files in the order in which they are described on the file description
specifications.
Multi-file Processing with Match Fields

When match fields are used in multi-file processing, the program selects the
records for processing according to the contents of the match fields. At the
beginning of the first cycle, the program reads one record from every
primary/secondary input file and compares the match fields in the records. If the
records are in ascending order, the program selects the record with the lowest
match field. If the records are in descending order, the program selects the record
with the highest match field.
When a record is selected from a file, the program reads the next record from that
file. At the beginning of the next program cycle, the new record is compared with
the other records in the read area that are waiting for selection, and one record is
selected for processing.
Records without match fields can also be included in the files. Such records are
selected for processing before records with match fields. If two or more of the
records being compared have no match fields, selection of those records is
determined by the priority of the files from which the records came. The priority of
the files is:
1. Primary file, if specified
2. Secondary files in the order in which they are described on the file description
specifications.
When the primary file record matches one or more of the secondary records, the
MR (matching record) indicator is set on. The MR indicator is on for detail time

processing of a matching record through the total time that follows the record. This
indicator can be used to condition calculation or output operations for the record
that is selected. When one of the matching records must be selected, the selection
is determined by the priority of the files from which the records came.
Figure 7 on page 29 shows the logic flow of multi-file processing.
A program can be written where only one input file is defined with match fields
and no other input files have match fields. The files without the match fields are
then processed completely according to the previously mentioned priority of files.
The file with the match fields is processed last, and sequence checking occurs for
that file.
Assigning Match Field Values (M1-M9)

When assigning match field values (M1 through M9) to fields on the input
specifications in positions 65 and 66, consider the following:
v Sequence checking is done for all record types with match field specifications.
All match fields must be in the same order, either all ascending or all
descending. The contents of the fields to which M1 through M9 are assigned are
checked for correct sequence. An error in sequence causes the RPG IV
exception/error handling routine to receive control. When the program
continues processing, the next record from the same file is read.
v Not all files used in the program must have match fields. Not all record types
within one file must have match fields either. However, at least one record type
from two files must have match fields if files are ever to be matched.
v The same match field values must be specified for all record types that are used
in matching. See Figure 41 on page 106.
v Date, time, and timestamp match fields with the same match field values (M1
through M9) must be the same type (for example, all date) but can be different
formats.
v All character, graphic, or numeric match fields with the same match field values
(M1 through M9) should be the same length and type. If the match field
contains packed data, the zoned decimal length (two times packed length - 1) is
used as the length of the match field. It is valid to match a packed field in one
record against a zoned decimal field in another if the digit lengths are identical.
The length must always be odd because the length of a packed field is always
odd.
v Record positions of different match fields can overlap, but the total length of all
fields must not exceed 256 characters.
v If more than one match field is specified for a record type, all the fields are
combined and treated as one continuous field (see Figure 41 on page 106). The
fields are combined according to descending sequence (M9 to M1) of matching
field values.
v Match fields values cannot be repeated in a record.
v All match fields given the same matching field value (M1 through M9) are
considered numeric if any one of the match fields is described as numeric.
v When numeric fields having decimal positions are matched, they are treated as
if they had no decimal position. For instance 3.46 is considered equal to 346.
v Only the digit portions of numeric match fields are compared. Even though a
field is negative, it is considered to be positive because the sign of the numeric
field is ignored. Therefore, a -5 matches a +5.
v Date and time fields are converted to *ISO format for comparisons
v Graphic data is compared hexadecimally

v Whenever more than one matching field value is used, all match fields must
match before the MR indicator is set on. For example, if match field values M1,
M2, and M3 are specified, all three fields from a primary record must match all
three match fields from a secondary record. A match on only the fields specified
by M1 and M2 fields will not set the MR indicator on (see Figure 41 on
page 106).
v UCS-2 fields cannot be used for matching fields.
v Matching fields cannot be used for lookahead fields, and arrays.
v Field names are ignored in matching record operations. Therefore, fields from
different record types that are assigned the same match level can have the same
name.
v If an alternate collating sequence or a file translation is defined for the program,
character fields are matched according to the alternate sequence specified.
v Null-capable fields, character fields defined with ALTSEQ(*NONE), and binary,
float, integer and unsigned fields (B, F, I, or U in position 36 of the input
specifications) cannot be assigned a match field value.
v Match fields that have no field record relation indicator must be described
before those that do. When the field record relation indicator is used with match
fields, the field record relation indicator should be the same as a record
identifying indicator for this file, and the match fields must be grouped
according to the field record relation indicator.
v When any match value (M1 through M9) is specified for a field without a field
record relation indicator, all match values used must be specified once without a
field record relation indicator. If all match fields are not common to all records, a
dummy match field should be used. Field record relation indicators are invalid
for externally described files. (see Figure 42 on page 107).
v Match fields are independent of control level indicators (L1 through L9).
v If multi-file processing is specified and the LR indicator is set on, the program
bypasses the multi-file processing routine.
Figure 41 on page 106 is an example of how match fields are specified.
Chapter 7. General File Considerations 105

*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...
FFilename++IPEASFRlen+LKlen+AIDevice+.Keywords++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
* The files in this example are externally described (E in position
* 22) and are to be processed by keys (K in position 34).
FMASTER IP E K DISK
FWEEKLY IS E K DISK
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...
IRcdname+++....Ri........................................................
I..............Ext-field+..................Field+++++++++L1M1..PlMnZr....
* MASTER FILE
IEMPMAS 01
I EMPLNO M1
I DIVSON M3
I DEPT M2
IDEPTMS 02
I EMPLNO M1
I DEPT M2
I DIVSON M3
* WEEKLY FILE
IWEEKRC 03
I EMPLNO M1
I DIVSON M3
I DEPT M2
Figure 41. Match Fields in Which All Values Match
Three files are used in matching records. All the files have three match fields
specified, and all use the same values (M1, M2, M3) to indicate which fields must
match. The MR indicator is set on only if all three match fields in either of the files
EMPMAS and DEPTMS are the same as all three fields from the WEEKRC file.
The three match fields in each file are combined and treated as one match field
organized in the following descending sequence:
DIVSON M3
DEPT M2
EMPLNO M1
The order in which the match fields are specified in the input specifications does
not affect the organization of the match fields.

*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...
IDISK AB 01 1 C1
I OR 02 1 C2
I OR 03 1 C3
I 1 10 0EMPNO M1
I 11 15 0DUMMY M2
I 11 15 0DEPT M202
I 16 20 0DEPT M203
M 1
E M P N O
Record Identifying Indicator 01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
M 1 M 2
E M P N O D E P T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
M 1 M 2
E M P N O D E P T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Figure 42. Match Fields with a Dummy M2 Field
Three different record types are found in the input file. All three contain a match
field in positions 1 through 10. Two of them have a second match field. Because
M1 is found on all record types, it can be specified without a field record relation
entry in positions 67 and 68. If one match value (M1 through M9) is specified
without field record relation entries, all match values must be specified once
without field record relation entries. Because the value M1 is specified without
field record relationship, an M2 value must also be specified once without field
record relationship. The M2 field is not on all record types; therefore a dummy M2
field must be specified next. The dummy field can be given any unique name, but
its specified length must be equal to the length of the true M2 field. The M2 field
is then related to the record types on which it is found by field record relation
entries.

*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...
FPRIMARY IPEA F 64 DISK
FFIRSTSEC IS A F 64 DISK
FSECSEC IS A F 64 DISK
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...
IPRIMARY AA 01 1 CP 2NC
I 2 3 MATCH M1
*
I BB 02 1 CP 2 C
I 2 3 NOM
*
IFIRSTSEC AB 03 1 CS 2NC
I 2 3 MATCH M1
*
I BC 04 1 CS 2 C
I 2 3 NOM
*
ISECSEC AC 05 1 CT 2NC
I 2 3 MATCH M1
*
I BD 06 1 CT 2 C
I 2 3 NOM
Figure 43. Match Field Specifications for Three Disk Files
Processing Matching Records

Matching records for two or more files are processed in the following manner:
v Whenever a record from the primary file matches a record from the secondary
file, the primary file is processed first. Then the matching secondary file is
processed. The record identifying indicator that identifies the record type just
selected is on at the time the record is processed. This indicator is often used to
control the type of processing that takes place.
v Whenever records from ascending files do not match, the record having the
lowest match field content is processed first. Whenever records from descending
files do not match, the record having the highest match field content is
processed first.
v A record type that has no match field specification is processed immediately
after the record it follows. The MR indicator is off. If this record type is first in
the file, it is processed first even if it is not in the primary file.
v The matching of records makes it possible to enter data from primary records
into their matching secondary records because the primary record is processed
before the matching secondary record. However, the transfer of data from
secondary records to matching primary records can be done only when
look-ahead fields are specified.
Figure 44 on page 109 through Figure 45 on page 110 show how records from three
files are selected for processing.

P P P P P P P P P
Primary File
20 20 40 50 60 80
1 2 5 6 11 12 13 17 22
No Match Field
S S S S S S S S S
First Secondary File
20 30 30 60 70 80 80
3 7 8 9 18 19 21 23 24
Match Field
T T T T T T T T
Second Secondary File
10 30 50 50 60 80 80
4 10 14 15 16 20 25 26
The records from the three disk files above are selected in the order indicated by the dark
numbers.
Figure 44. Normal Record Selection from Three Disk Files
Table 10. Normal Record Selection from Three Disk Files

Cycle File Processed Indicators On Reason for Setting Indicator
1 PRIMARY 02 No match field specified
3 FIRSTSEC 04 No match field specified
4 SECSEC 05 Second secondary low; no primary match
5 PRIMARY 01, MR Primary matches first secondary
6 PRIMARY 01, MR Primary matches first secondary
7 FIRSTSEC 03, MR First secondary matches primary
8 FIRSTSEC 03 First secondary low; no primary match
10 SECSEC 05 Second secondary low; no primary match
11 PRIMARY 01 Primary low; no secondary match
12 PRIMARY 01, MR Primary matches second secondary
14 SECSEC 05, MR Second secondary matches primary
16 SECSEC 06 No match field specified
17 PRIMARY 01, MR Primary matches both secondary files
19 FIRSTSEC 04 No match field specified
22 PRIMARY 01, MR Primary matches both secondary files

Table 10. Normal Record Selection from Three Disk Files (continued)
Cycle File Processed Indicators On Reason for Setting Indicator
STEP 1
The first record from each file is read. The P and S
records have no match field, so they are processed
before the T record that has a match field. Because
P S T 10 the P record comes from the primary file, it is selected
for processing first.
STEP 2
The next P record is read. It contains no match field

and comes from the primary file, so the new P record
P S T 10 is also selected for processing before the S record.
STEP 3
The next P record has a match field. The S record

has no match field, so it is selected for processing.
P 20 S T 10
STEP 4
The next S record is read. All three records have
match fields. Because the value in the match field
P 20 S 20 T 10 of the T record is lower than the value in the other
two, the T record is selected for processing.
STEP 5
The next T record is read. The matching P and S
records both have the low match field value, so
they are processed before the T record. Because
P 20 S 20 T 30 the matching P record comes from the pr imary file,
it is selected for processing first.
Figure 45. Normal Record Selection from Three Disk Files (Part 1 of 2)

File Translation
STEP 6
The next P record is read. Because it contains the

same match field and comes from the pr imary file,
P 20 S 20 T 30 the new P record is selected instead of the S record.
STEP 7
The next P record is read. The value of the match

field in the S record is the lowest of the three, so the
P 40 S 20 T 30 S record is selected for processing.
STEP 8
The next S record is read. Because the S and T
records have the lowest match field, they are
selected before the P record. Because the S record
P 40 S 30 T 30 comes from the first secondar y file, it is selected for
processing before the T record.
STEP 9
The next S record is read. Because it also has

P 40 S 30 T 30 the same match field as the S record just selected,
it too is selected before the T record.
STEP 10
The next S record is read. The T record contains
the lowest match field value, and is selected for
P 40 S 60 T 30 processing.
Figure 45. Normal Record Selection from Three Disk Files (Part 2 of 2)
File Translation
The file translation function translates any of the 8-bit codes used for characters
into another 8-bit code. The use of file translation indicates one or both of the
following:
v A character code used in the input data must be translated into the system code.
v The output data must be translated from the system code into a different code.
The translation on input data occurs before any field selection has taken place.
The translation on output data occurs after any editing taken place.
Remember the following when specifying file translation:

v File translation can be specified for data in array or table files (T in position 18
of the file description specifications).
v File translation can be used with data in combined, input, or update files that
are translated at input and output time according to the file translation table
provided. If file translation is used to translate data in an update file, each
record must be written before the next record is read.

File Translation
v For any I/O operation that specifies a search argument in factor 1 (such as
CHAIN, READE, READPE, SETGT, or SETLL) for files accessed by keys, the
search argument is translated before the file is accessed.
v If file translation is specified for both a record address file and the file being
processed (if the file being processed is processed sequentially within limits), the
records in the record address file are first translated according to the file
translation specified for that file, and then the records in the file being processed
are translated according to the file translation specified for that file.
v File translation applies only on a single byte basis.
v Every byte in the input and output record is translated
Specifying File Translation

To specify file translation, use the FTRANS keyword on the control specification.
The translations must be transcribed into the correct record format for entry into
the system. These records, called the file translation table records, must precede
any alternate collating sequence records, or arrays and tables loaded at compile
time. They must be preceded by a record with ** ( = blank) in positions 1
through 3 or **FTRANS in positions 1 through 8. The remaining positions in this
record can be used for comments.
Translating One File or All Files

File translation table records must be formatted as follows:
Record
Position Entry
1-8 (to Enter *FILES ( represents a blank) to indicate that all files are to be
translate all translated. Complete the file translation table record beginning with
files) positions 11 and 12. If *FILES is specified, no other file translation table
can be specified in the program.
1-8 (to Enter the name of the file to be translated. Complete the file translation
translate a table record beginning with positions 11 and 12. The *FILES entry is not
specific file) made in positions 1 through 8 when a specific file is to be translated.
9-10 Blank
11-12 Enter the hexadecimal value of the character to be translated from on input
or to be translated to on output.
13-14 Enter the hexadecimal equivalent of the internal character the RPG IV
language works with. It will replace the character in positions 11 and 12 on
input and be replaced by the character in positions 11 and 12 on output.
15-18 All groups of four beginning with position 15 are used in the same manner
19-22 as positions 11 through 14. In the first two positions of a group, enter the
23-26 hexadecimal value of the character to be replaced. In the last two positions,
... enter the hexadecimal value of the character that replaces it.
77-80
The first blank entry ends the record. There can be one or more records per file
translation table. When multiple records are required in order to define the table,
the same file name must be entered on all records. A change in file name is used to
separate multiple translation tables. An *FILES record causes all files, including
tables and arrays specified by a T in position 18 of the file description
specifications, to be translated by the same table.

File Translation
HKeywords++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
* In this example all the files are translated
H FTRANS
FFilename++IPEASFRlen+LKlen+AIDevice+.Keywords++++++++++++++++++++++
FFILE1 IP F 10 DISK
FFILE2 IS F 10 DISK
FFILE3 IS F 10 DISK
FFILE4 IS F 10 DISK
**FTRANS
*FILES 81C182C283C384C4
HKeywords++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
* In this example different translate tables are used and
* FILE3 is not translated.
H FTRANS
FFILE1 IP F 10 DISK
FFILE2 IS F 10 DISK
FFILE3 IS F 10 DISK
FFILE4 IS F 10 DISK
**FTRANS
FILE1 8182
FILE2 C1C2
FILE4 81C182C283C384C4
Translating More Than One File

If the same file translation table is needed for more than one file but not for all
files, two types of records must be specified. The first record type specifies the file
using the tables, and the second record type specifies the table. More than one
record for each of these record types can be specified. A change in file names is
used to separate multiple translation tables.
Specifying the Files

Record
Position Entry
1-7 *EQUATE
8-10 Leave these positions blank.
11-80 Enter the name(s) of file(s) to be translated. If more than one file is to be
translated, the file names must be separated by commas.
Additional file names are associated with the table until a file name not followed
by a comma is encountered. A file name cannot be split between two records; a
comma following a file name must be on the same record as the file name. You can
create only one file translation table by using *EQUATE.
Specifying the Table

Record
Position Entry
1-7 *EQUATE

File Translation
Record
Position Entry
11-12 Enter the hexadecimal value of the character to be translated from on
input or to be translated to on output.
13-14 Enter the hexadecimal equivalent of the internal character the RPG IV
language works with. It will replace the character in positions 11 and 12
on input and be replaced by the character in positions 11 and 12 on
output.
15-18 All groups of four beginning with position 15 are used the same way as
19-22 positions 11 through 14. In the first two positions of a group, enter the
23-26 hexadecimal value of the character to be replaced. In the last two
... positions, enter the hexadecimal value of the character that replaces it.
77-80
The first blank record position ends the record. If the number of entries exceeds 80
positions, duplicate positions 1 through 10 on the next record and continue as
before with the translation pairs in positions 11 through 80. All table records for
one file must be kept together.
The records that describe the file translation tables must be preceded by a record
with ** ( = blank) in positions 1 through 3 or with **FTRANS. The remaining
positions in this record can be used for comments.
HKeywords++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
* In this example several files are translated with the
* same translation table. FILE2 is not translated.
H FTRANS
FFILE1 IP F 10 DISK
FFILE2 IS F 10 DISK
FFILE3 IS F 10 DISK
FFILE4 IS F 10 DISK
**FTRANS
*EQUATE FILE1,FILE3,FILE4
*EQUATE 81C182C283C384C485C586C687C788C889C98ACA8BCB8CCC8DCD8ECE8F
*EQUATE 91D192D2

Part 2. Definitions
This section provides information on the different types of definitions that can be
coded in your source. It describes:
v How to define
– Standalone fields, arrays, and tables
– Named constants
– Data structures and their subfields
– Prototypes
– Prototyped parameters
– Procedure interface
v Scope and storage of definitions as well as how to define each definition type.
v Data types and Data formats
v Editing numeric fields
For information on how to define files, see Chapter 14, “File Description
Specifications” on page 257 and also the chapter on defining files in the WebSphere

Chapter 8. Defining Data and Prototypes
ILE RPG allows you to define the following items:
v Data items such as data structures, data-structure subfields, standalone fields,
and named constants. Arrays and tables can be defined as either a data-structure
subfield or a standalone field.
v Prototypes, procedure interfaces, and prototyped parameters
This chapter presents information on the following topics:

v General considerations, including definition types, scope, and storage
v Standalone fields
v Constants
v Data Structures
v Prototypes, parameters, and procedure interfaces
General Considerations
You define items by using definition specifications. Definitions can appear in two
places within a module or program: within the main source section and within a
subprocedure. (The main source section consists of the first set of H, F, D, I, C,
and O specifications in a module; it corresponds to the specifications found in a
standalone program or a main procedure.) Depending on where the definition
occurs, there are differences both in what can be defined and also the scope of the
definition. Specify the type of definition in positions 24 through 25, as follows:
Entry Definition Type
Blank A data structure subfield or parameter definition
C Named constant
DS Data structure
PI Procedure interface
PR Prototype
S Standalone field
Definitions of data structures, prototypes, and procedure interfaces end with the
first definition specification with non-blanks in positions 24-25, or with the first
specification that is not a definition specification.

*-----------------------------------------------------------------*
* Global Definitions
*-----------------------------------------------------------------*
D String S 6A INZ(’ABCDEF’)
D Spcptr S *
D SpcSiz C 8
D DS1 DS OCCURS(3)
D Fld1 5A INZ(’ABCDE’)
D Fld1a 1A DIM(5) OVERLAY(Fld1)
D Fld2 5B 2 INZ(123.45)
D Switch PR
D Parm 1A
...
*-----------------------------------------------------------------*
* Local Definitions
*-----------------------------------------------------------------*
P Switch B
D Switch PI
D Parm 1A
* Define a local variable.
D Local S 5A INZ(’aaaaa’)
...
P E
Figure 46. Sample Definitions
Scope of Definitions
Depending on where a definition occurs, it will have different scope. Scope refers
to the range of source lines where a name is known. There are two types of scope:
global and local, as shown in Figure 47.
*MODULE
Main Procedure
Main
Source
Section
Global
Scope
Subprocedure 1
Local
Scope
Subprocedure 2
Local
Scope
Program Data - part of main source section
Figure 47. Scope of Definitions
In general, all items that are defined in the main source section are global, and
therefore, known throughout the module. Global definitions are definitions that
can be used by both the main procedure and any subprocedures within the
module. They can also be exported.

Items in a subprocedure, on the other hand, are local. Local definitions are
definitions that are known only inside that subprocedure. If an item is defined
with the same name as a global item, then any references to that name inside the
subprocedure will use the local definition.
However, note the following exceptions:

v Subroutine names and tag names are known only to the procedure in which
they are defined. This includes subroutine or tag names that defined in the main
procedure.
v All fields specified on input and output specifications are global. For example, if
a subprocedure does an operation using a record format, say a WRITE
operation, the global fields will be used even if there are local definitions with
the same names as the record format fields.
Sometimes you may have a mix of global and local definitions. For example,
KLISTs and PLISTs can be global or local. The fields associated with global KLISTs
and PLISTs contain only global fields. The fields associated with local KLISTs and
PLISTs can contain both global and local fields. For more information on the
behavior of KLISTs and KFLDs inside subprocedures, see “Scope of Definitions” on
page 96.
Storage of Definitions
Local definitions use automatic storage. Automatic storage is storage that exists
only for the duration of the call to the procedure. Variables in automatic storage do
not save their values across calls.
Global definitions, on the other hand, use static storage. Static storage is storage
that has a constant location in memory for all calls of a program or procedure. It
keeps its value across calls.
Specify the STATIC keyword to indicate that a local field definition use static
storage, in which case it will keep its value on each call to the procedure. If the
keyword STATIC is specified, the item will be initialized at module initialization
time.
Static storage in the main procedure is subject to the RPG cycle, and so the value
changes on the next call if LR was on at the end of the last call. However, local
static variables will not get reinitialized because of LR in the main procedure.
TIP
Using automatic storage reduces the amount of storage that is required at run
time by the program. The storage is reduced largely because automatic
storage is only allocated while the procedure is running. On the other hand,
all static storage associated with the program is allocated when the program
starts, even if no procedure using the static storage is ever called.
Standalone Fields
Standalone fields allow you to define individual work fields. A standalone field
has the following characteristics:
v It has a specifiable internal data type
v It may be defined as an array, table, or field
Chapter 8. Defining Data and Prototypes 119

Standalone Fields
v It is defined in terms of data length, not in terms of absolute byte positions.
For more information on standalone fields, see:

v Chapter 9, “Using Arrays and Tables” on page 149
v Chapter 10, “Data Types and Data Formats” on page 167
v “Definition-Specification Keywords” on page 287
Variable Initialization
You can initialize data with the “INZ{(initial value)}” on page 301 keyword on the
definition specification. Specify an initial value as a parameter on the INZ
keyword, or specify the keyword without a parameter and use the default initial
values. If the initialization is too complicated to express using the INZ keyword,
you can further initialize data in the initialization subroutine.
Default initial values for the various data types are described in Chapter 10, “Data
Types and Data Formats” on page 167. See Chapter 9, “Using Arrays and Tables”
on page 149 for information on initializing arrays.
To reinitialize data while the program is running, use the CLEAR and RESET
operations.
The CLEAR operation code sets a record format or variable (field, subfield,
indicator, data structure, array, or table) to its default value. All fields in a record
format, data structure, or array are cleared in the order in which they are declared.
The RESET operation code restores a variable to its reset value. The reset value for
a global variable is the value it had at the end of the initialization step in the RPG
IV cycle, after the initialization subroutine has been invoked.
You can use the initialization subroutine to assign initial values to a global variable
and then later use RESET to set the variable back to this value. This applies only to
the initialization subroutine when it is run automatically as a part of the
initialization step.
For local variables the reset value is the value of the variable when the
subprocedure was first called, but before the calculations begin.
Constants
Literals and named constants are types of constants. They can be specified in any
of the following places:
v In factor 1
v In factor 2
v In an extended factor 2 on the calculation specifications
v As parameters to keywords on the control specification
v As parameters to built-in functions
v In the Field Name, Constant, or Edit Word fields in the output specifications.
v As array indexes
v As the format name in a WORKSTN output specification
v With keywords on the definition specification.

Constants
Literals
A literal is a self-defining constant that can be referred to in a program. A literal
can belong to any of the RPG IV data types.
Character Literals
The following are the rules for specifying a character literal:

v Any combination of characters can be used in a character literal. This includes
DBCS characters. DBCS characters must be enclosed by shift-out and shift-in
characters and must be an even number of bytes. Embedded blanks are valid.
v A character literal with no characters between the apostrophes is allowed. See
Figure 49 on page 125 for examples.
v Character literals must be enclosed in apostrophes (’).
v An apostrophe required as part of a literal is represented by two apostrophes.
For example, the literal O’CLOCK is coded as ‘O’’CLOCK’.
v Character literals are compatible only with character data.
v Indicator literals are one byte character literals which contain either ’1’ (on) or ’0’
(off).
Hexadecimal Literals
The following are the rules for specifying a hexadecimal literal:

v Hexadecimal literals take the form:
X'x1x2...xn'
where X'x1x2...xn' can only contain the characters A-F, a-f, and 0-9.
v The literal coded between the apostrophes must be of even length.
v Each pair of characters defines a single byte.
v Hexadecimal literals are allowed anywhere that character literals are supported
except as factor 2 of ENDSR and as edit words.
v Except when used in the bit operations BITON, BITOFF, and TESTB, a
hexadecimal literal has the same meaning as the corresponding character literal.
For the bit operations, factor 2 may contain a hexadecimal literal representing 1
byte. The rules and meaning are the same for hexadecimal literals as for
character fields.
v If the hexadecimal literal contains the hexadecimal value for a single quote, it
does not have to be specified twice, unlike character literals. For example, the
literal A’B is specified as ’A’’B’ but the hexadecimal version is X'C17DC2' not
X'C17D7DC2'.
v Normally, hexadecimal literals are compatible only with character data.
However, a hexadecimal literal that contains 16 or fewer hexadecimal digits can
be treated as an unsigned numeric value when it is used in a numeric
expression or when a numeric variable is initialized using the INZ keyword.
Numeric Literals
The following are the rules for specifying a numeric literal:

v A numeric literal consists of any combination of the digits 0 through 9. A
decimal point or a sign can be included.
v The sign (+ or -), if present, must be the leftmost character. An unsigned literal is
treated as a positive number.

Constants
v Blanks cannot appear in a numeric literal.
v Numeric literals are not enclosed in apostrophes (’).
v Numeric literals are used in the same way as a numeric field, except that values
cannot be assigned to numeric literals.
v The decimal separator may be either a comma or a period
Numeric literals of the float format are specified differently. Float literals take the
form:
<mantissa>E<exponent>
Where
<mantissa> is a literal as described above with 1 to 16 digits

<exponent> is a literal with no decimal places, with a value
between -308 and +308
v Float literals do not have to be normalized. That is, the mantissa does not have
to be written with exactly one digit to the left of the decimal point. (The decimal
point does not even have to be specified.)
v Lower case e may be used instead of E.
v Either a period (’.’) or a comma (’,’) may be used as the decimal point.
v Float literals are allowed anywhere that numeric constants are allowed except in
operations that do not allow float data type. For example, float literals are not
allowed in places where a numeric literal with zero decimal positions is
expected, such as an array index.
v Float literals follow the same continuation rules as for regular numeric literals.
The literal may be split at any point within the literal.
The following lists some examples of valid float literals:
1E1 = 10
1.2e-1 = .12
-1234.9E0 = -1234.9
12e12 = 12000000000000
+67,89E+0003 = 67890 (the comma is the decimal point)
The following lists some examples of invalid float literals:
1.234E <--- no exponent

1.2e- <--- no exponent
-1234.9E+309 <--- exponent too big
12E-2345 <--- exponent too small
1.797693134862316e308 <--- value too big
179.7693134862316E306 <--- value too big
0.0000000001E-308 <--- value too small
Date Literals
Date literals take the form D’xx-xx-xx’ where:

v D indicates that the literal is of type date
v xx-xx-xx is a valid date in the format specified on the control specification
(separator included)
v xx-xx-xx is enclosed by apostrophes
Time Literals

Constants
Time literals take the form T’xx:xx:xx’ where:
v T indicates that the literal is of type time
v xx:xx:xx is a valid time in the format specified on the control specification
(separator included)
v xx:xx:xx is enclosed by apostrophes
Timestamp Literals
Timestamp literals take the form Z’yyyy-mm-dd-hh.mm.ss.mmmmmm’ where:

v Z indicates that the literal is of type timestamp
v yyyy-mm-dd is a valid date (year-month-day)
v hh.mm.ss.mmmmmm is a valid time (hours.minutes.seconds.microseconds)
v yyyy-mm-dd-hh.mm.ss.mmmmmm is enclosed by apostrophes
v Microseconds are optional and if not specified will default to zeros
Graphic Literals
Graphic literals take the form G’oK1K2i’ where:

v G indicates that the literal is of type graphic
v o is a shift-out character
v K1K2 is an even number of bytes (possibly zero) and does not contain a shift-out
or shift-in character
v i is a shift-in character
v oK1K2i is enclosed by apostrophes
UCS-2 Literals
UCS-2 literals take the form U’Xxxx...Yyyy’ where:

v U indicates that the literal is of type UCS-2.
v Each UCS-2 literal requires four bytes per UCS-2 character in the literal. Each
four bytes of the literal represents one double-byte UCS-2 character.
v UCS-2 literals are compatible only with UCS-2 data.
UCS-2 literals are assumed to be in the default UCS-2 CCSID of the module.

Constants
Example of Defining Literals
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8

H DATFMT(*ISO)
* Examples of literals used to initialize fields
DName+++++++++++ETDsFrom+++To/L+++IDc.Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
D.....................................Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
D DateField S D INZ(D’1988-09-03’)
D NumField S 5P 1 INZ(5.2)
D CharField S 10A INZ(’abcdefghij’)
D UCS2Field S 2C INZ(U’00610062’)
* Even though the date field is defined with a 2-digit year, the
* initialization value must be defined with a 4-digit year, since
* all literals must be specified in date format specified
* on the control specification.
D YmdDate S D INZ(D’2001-01-13’)
D DATFMT(*YMD)
* Examples of literals used to define named constants
D DateConst C CONST(D’1988-09-03’)
D NumConst C CONST(5.2)
D CharConst C CONST(’abcdefghij’)
* Note that the CONST keyword is not required.

D Upper C ’ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ’
* Note that the literal may be continued on the next line

D Lower C ’abcdefghijklmn-
D opqrstuvwxyz’
* Examples of literals used in operations

C EVAL CharField = ’abc’
C IF NumField > 12
C EVAL DateField = D’1995-12-25’
C ENDIF
Figure 48. Defining named constants

Constants
Example of Using Literals with Zero Length
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8

D.....................................Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
* The following two definitions are equivalent:
D varfld1 S 5 INZ VARYING
D varfld2 S 5 INZ(’’) VARYING
* Various fields used by the examples below:
D blanks S 10 INZ
D vblanks S 10 INZ(’ ’) VARYING
D fixfld1 S 5 INZ(’abcde’)
* VGRAPHIC and VUCS2 are initialized with zero-length literals.
D vgraphic S 10G INZ(G’oi’) VARYING
D vucs2 S 10C INZ(U’’) VARYING
CL0N01Factor1+++++++Opcode(E)+Factor2+++++++Result++++++++Len++D+HiLoEq++++
* The following statements do the same thing:
C eval varfld1 = ’’
C clear varfld1
* Moving ’’ to a variable-length field using MOVE(P) or MOVEL(P)
* sets the field to blanks up to the fields current length.
C move(p) ’’ varfld1
C movel(p) ’’ varfld1
* Moving ’’ to a fixed-length field has no effect in the following

* examples: (The rightmost or leftmost 0 characters are changed.)
C move ’’ fixfld1
C movel ’’ fixfld1
* The following comparisons demonstrate how the shorter operand

* is padded with blanks:
C eval *in01 = (blanks = ’’)
* *in01 is ’1’
C eval *in02 = (vblanks = ’’)

* *in02 is ’1’
C eval *in03 = (varfld2 = blanks)

* *in03 is ’1’
C eval *in04 = (varfld2 = vblanks)

* *in04 is ’1’
C eval *in05 = (%len(vgraphic)=0)

* *in05 is ’1’
C eval *in06 = (%len(vucs2)=0)

* *in06 is ’1’
Figure 49. Character, Graphic, and UCS-2 Literals with Zero Length
Named Constants
You can give a name to a constant. This name represents a specific value which
cannot be changed when the program is running. Numeric named constants have
no predefined precision. Their actual precision is defined by the context that is
specified.
See Figure 48 on page 124 for examples of defining named constants. The value of
the named constant is specified in the keyword section of the definition
specification. The presence of the keyword CONST is optional, however. For
example, to assign a value of ’ab’ to a constant, you could specify either
CONST(’ab’) or ’ab’ in the keyword section.

Constants
Figurative Constants
The figurative constants *BLANK/*BLANKS, *ZERO/*ZEROS, *HIVAL, *LOVAL,
*NULL, *ALL’x..’, *ALLG’oK1K2i’, *ALLU’XxxxYyyy’, *ALLX’x1..’, and *ON/*OFF
are implied literals that can be specified without a length, because the implied
length and decimal positions of a figurative constant are the same as those of the
associated field. (For exceptions, see the following section, “Rules for Figurative
Constants” on page 127.)
Figurative constants can be specified in factor 1 and factor 2 of the calculation

specifications. The following shows the reserved words and implied values for
figurative constants:
Reserved Words
Implied Values
*BLANK/*BLANKS
All blanks. Valid only for character, graphic, or UCS-2 fields. The value for
character is ’ ’ (blank) or X'40', for graphic is X'4040', and for UCS-2 is
X'0020'.
*ZERO/*ZEROS
Character/numeric fields: All zeros. The value is ’0’ or X'F0'. For numeric
float fields: The value is ’0 E0’.
*HIVAL
Character, graphic, or UCS-2 fields: The highest collating character for the
system (hexadecimal FFs). Numeric fields: The maximum value allowed
for the corresponding field (with a positive sign if applicable). For Float
fields: *HIVAL for 4-byte float = 3.402 823 5E38 (x’FF7FFFFF’) *HIVAL for
8-byte float = 1.797 693 134 862 315 E308 (x’FFEFFFFFFFFFFFFF’) Date,
time and timestamp fields: See “Date Data Type” on page 193, “Time Data
Type” on page 196 and “Timestamp Data Type” on page 197 for *HIVAL
values for date, time, and timestamp data.
*LOVAL
Character, graphic, or UCS-2 fields: The lowest collating character for the
system (hexadecimal zeros). Numeric fields: The minimum value allowed
(with a negative sign if applicable). For Float fields: *LOVAL for 4-byte
float = -3.402 823 5E38 (x’7F7FFFFF’) *LOVAL for 8-byte float = -1.797 693
134 862 315 E308 (x’7FEFFFFFFFFFFFFF’) Date, time and timestamp fields:
See “Date Data Type” on page 193, “Time Data Type” on page 196 and
“Timestamp Data Type” on page 197 for *LOVAL values for date, time, and
timestamp data.
*ALL’x..’
Character/numeric fields: Character string x . . is cyclically repeated to a
length equal to the associated field. If the field is a numeric field, all
characters within the string must be numeric (0 through 9). No sign or
decimal point can be specified when *ALL’x..’ is used as a numeric
constant.
Note: You cannot use *ALL’x..’ with numeric fields of float format.
Note: For numeric integer or unsigned fields, the value is never greater
than the maximum value allowed for the corresponding field. For
example, *ALL’95’ represents the value 9595 if the corresponding
field is a 5-digit integer field, since 95959 is greater than the
maximum value allowed for a 5-digit signed integer.

Constants
*ALLG’oK1K2i’
Graphic fields: The graphic string K1K2 is cyclically repeated to a length
equal to the associated field.
*ALLU’XxxxYyyy’
UCS-2 fields: A figurative constant of the form *ALLU’XxxxYyyy’ indicates
a literal of the form ’XxxxYyyyXxxxYyyy...’ with a length determined by
the length of the field associated with the *ALLU’XxxxYyyy’ constant. Each
double-byte character in the constant is represented by four hexadecimal
digits. For example, *ALLU’0041’ represents a string of repeated UCS-2
’A’s.
*ALLX’x1..’
Character fields: The hexadecimal literal X’x1..’ is cyclically repeated to a
length equal to the associated field.
*NULL
A null value valid for basing pointers or procedure pointers
*ON/*OFF
*ON is all ones (’1’ or X'F1'). *OFF is all zeros (’0’ or X'F0'). Both are only
valid for character fields.
Rules for Figurative Constants

Remember the following rules when using figurative constants:
v MOVE and MOVEL operations allow you to move a character figurative
constant to a numeric field. The figurative constant is first expanded as a zoned
numeric with the size of the numeric field, then converted to packed or binary
numeric if needed, and then stored in the target numeric field. The digit portion
of each character in the constant must be valid. If not, a decimal data error will
occur.
v Figurative constants are considered elementary items. Except for MOVEA,
figurative constants act like a field if used in conjunction with an array. For
example: MOVE *ALL’XYZ’ ARR.
If ARR has 4-byte character elements, then each element will contain ’XYZX’.
v MOVEA is considered to be a special case. The constant is generated with a
length equal to the portion of the array specified. For example:
– MOVEA *BLANK ARR(X)
Beginning with element X, the remainder of ARR will contain blanks.
– MOVEA *ALL’XYZ’ ARR(X)
ARR has 4-byte character elements. Element boundaries are ignored, as is
always the case with character MOVEA operations. Beginning with element
X, the remainder of the array will contain ’XYZXYZXYZ...’.
Note that the results of MOVEA are different from those of the MOVE example
above.
v After figurative constants are set/reset to their appropriate length, their normal
collating sequence can be altered if an alternate collating sequence is specified.
v The move operations MOVE and MOVEL produce the same result when moving
the figurative constants *ALL’x..’, *ALLG’oK1K2i’, and *ALLX’x1..’. The string is
cyclically repeated character by character (starting on the left) until the length of
the associated field is the same as the length of the string.
v Figurative constants can be used in compare operations as long as one of the
factors is not a figurative constant.

Constants
v The figurative constants, *BLANK/*BLANKS, are moved as zeros to a numeric
field in a MOVE operation.
Data Structures
The ILE RPG compiler allows you to define an area in storage and the layout of
the fields, called subfields, within the area. This area in storage is called a data
structure. You define a data structure by specifying DS in positions 24 through 25
on a definition specification.
You can use a data structure to:

v Define the same internal area multiple times using different data formats
v Define a data structure and its subfields in the same way a record is defined.
v Define multiple occurrences of a set of data.
v Group non-contiguous data into contiguous internal storage locations.
v Operate on all the subfields as a group using the name of the data structure.
v Operate on an individual subfield using its name.
In addition, there are four special data structures, each with a specific purpose:
v A data area data structure (identified by a U in position 23 of the definition
specification)
v A file information data structure (identified by the keyword INFDS on a file
description specification)
v A program-status data structure (identified by an S in position 23 of the
definition specification)
v An indicator data structure (identified by the keyword INDDS on a file
description specification).
Data structures can be either program-described or externally described, except for

indicator data structures, which are program-described only. One data structure
can be defined like another using the LIKEDS keyword.
A program-described data structure is identified by a blank in position 22 of the

definition specification. The subfield definitions for a program-described data
structure must immediately follow the data structure definition.
An externally described data structure, identified by an E in position 22 of the

definition specification, has subfield descriptions contained in an externally
described file. At compile time, the ILE RPG compiler uses the external name to
locate and extract the external description of the data structure subfields. You
specify the name of the external file either in positions 7 through 21, or as a
parameter for the keyword EXTNAME .
Note: The data formats specified for the subfields in the external description are
used as the internal formats of the subfields by the compiler. This differs
from the way in which externally described files are treated.
An external subfield name can be renamed in the program using the keyword
EXTFLD. The keyword PREFIX can be used to add a prefix to the external subfield
names that have not been renamed with EXTFLD. Note that the data structure
subfields are not affected by the PREFIX keyword specified on a file-description
specification even if the file name is the same as the parameter specified in the
EXTNAME keyword when defining the data structure using an external file name.

Data Structures
Additional subfields can be added to an externally described data structure by
specifying program-described subfields immediately after the list of external
subfields.
| Qualifying Data Structure Names

| The keyword QUALIFIED indicates that subfields of the data structure are
| referenced using qualified notation. This permits access by specifying the data
| structure name followed by a period and the subfield name, for example DS1.FLD1.
| If the QUALIFIED keyword is not used, the subfield name remains unqualified, for
| example FLD1. If QUALIFIED is used the subfield name can be specified by one of
| the following:
| v A ″Simply Qualified Name″ is a name of the form ″A.B″. Simply qualified
| names are allowed as arguments to keywords on File and Definition
| Specifications; in the Field-Name entries on Input and Output Specifications; and
| in the Factor 1, Factor 2, and Result-Field entries on fixed-form calculation
| specifications, i.e.dsname.subf. While spaces are permitted between elements of a
| fully-qualified name, they are not permitted in simply qualified names.
| v A ″Fully Qualified Name″ is a name with qualification and indexing to an
| arbitrary number of levels, for example, ″A(X).B.C(Z+17)″. Fully qualified names
| are allowed in any free-form calculation specifications, or in any
| Extended-Factor-2 entry. This includes operations codes CLEAR and DSPLY
| coded in free-form calculations.
| In addition, arbitrary levels of indexing and qualification are allowed. For example,
| a programmer could code:ds(x).subf1.s2.s3(y+1).s4 as an operand within an
| expression. Please see “QUALIFIED” on page 316 for further information on the
| use of the QUALIFIED keyword.
| Fully qualified names may be specified as the Result-Field operand for opcodes
| CLEAR and DSPLY when coded in free-form calc specs. Expressions are allowed as
| Factor 1 and Factor 2 operands for opcode DSPLY (coded in free-form calculation
| specifications), however, if the operand is more complex than a fully qualified
| name, the expression must be enclosed in parentheses.
| Array Data Structures

| An ″Array Data Structure″ is a data structures defined with keyword DIM. An
| array data structure is like a multiple-occurrence data structure, except that the
| index is explicitly specified, as with arrays.
| Notes:
| 1. Keyword DIM is allowed for data structures defined as QUALIFIED.
| 2. When keyword DIM is coded for a data structure or LIKEDS subfield, array
| keywords CTDATA, FROMFILE, and TOFILE are not allowed. In addition, the
| following data structure keywords are not allowed for an array data structure:
| v DTAARA
| v OCCURS.
| 3. For a data structure X defined with LIKEDS(Y), if data structure Y is defined
| with keyword DIM, data structure X is not defined as an array data structure.
| 4. If X is a subfield in array data structure DS, then an array index must be
| specified when referring to X in a qualified name. In addition, the array index
| may not be *. Within a fully qualified name expression, an array index may
| only be omitted (or * specified) for the right-most name.

Data Structures
Defining Data Structure Parameters in a Prototype or
Procedure Interface
To define a prototyped parameter as a data structure, you must first define the
layout of the parameter by defining an ordinary data structure. Then, you can
define a prototyped parameter as a data structure by using the LIKEDS keyword.
To use the subfields of the parameter, specify the subfields qualified with
parameter name: dsparm.subfield. For example
* PartInfo is a data structure describing a part.

D PartInfo DS QUALIFIED
D Manufactr 4
D Drug 6
D Strength 3
D Count 3 0
* Procedure "Proc" has a parameter "Part" that is a data
* structure whose subfields are the same as the subfields
* in "PartInfo". When calling this procedure, it is best
* to pass a parameter that is also defined LIKEDS(PartInfo)
* (or pass "PartInfo" itself), but the compiler will allow
* you to pass any character field that has the correct
* length.
D Proc PR
D Part LIKEDS(PartInfo)
P Proc B
* The procedure interface also defines the parameter Part
* with keyword LIKEDS(PartInfo).
* This means the parameter is a data structure, and the subfields
* can be used by specifying them qualified with "Part.", for
* example "Part.Strength"
D Proc PI
D Part LIKEDS(PartInfo)
C IF Part.Strength > getMaxStrength (Part.Drug)
C CALLP PartError (Part : DRUG_STRENGTH_ERROR)
C ELSE
C EVAL Part.Count = Part.Count + 1
C ENDIF
P Proc E
Defining Data Structure Subfields

You define a subfield by specifying blanks in the Definition-Type entry (positions
24 through 25) of a definition specification. The subfield definition(s) must
immediately follow the data structure definition. The subfield definitions end when
a definition specification with a non-blank Definition-Type entry is encountered, or
when a different specification type is encountered.
The name of the subfield is entered in positions 7 through 21. To improve

readability of your source, you may want to indent the subfield names to show
visually that they are subfields.
If the data structure is defined with the QUALIFIED keyword, the subfield names
can be the same as other names within your program. The subfield names will be
qualified by the owning data structure when they are used.
You can also define a subfield like an existing item using the LIKE keyword. When
defined in this way, the subfield receives the length and data type of the item on

Data Structures
which it is based. Similarly, you can use the LIKEDS keyword to define an entire
data structure like an existing item. See Figure 115 on page 304 for an example
using the LIKE keyword.
| The keyword LIKEDS is allowed on any subfield definition. When specified, the
| subfield is defined to be a data structure, with its own set of subfields. If data
| structure DS has subfield S1 which is defined like a data structure with a subfield
| S2, a programmer must refer to S2 using the expression DS.S1.S2.
| Notes:
| 1. Keyword LIKEDS is allowed for subfields only within QUALIFIED data
| structures.
| 2. Keywords DIM and LIKEDS are both allowed on the same subfield definition.
You can overlay the storage of a previously defined subfield with that of another
subfield using the OVERLAY keyword. The keyword is specified on the later
subfield definition. See Figure 54 on page 137 for an example using the OVERLAY
keyword.
Specifying Subfield Length

The length of a subfield may be specified using absolute (positional) or length
notation.
Absolute Specify a value in both the From-Position (positions 26 through 32)
and the To-Position/Length (positions 33 through 39) entries on the
definition specification.
Length Specify a value in the To-Position/Length (positions 33 through 39)
entry. The From-Position entry is blank.
When using length notation, the subfield is positioned such that its starting
position is greater than the maximum To-Position of all previously defined
subfields. For examples of each notation, see “Data Structure Examples” on
page 133.
Aligning Data Structure Subfields

Alignment of subfields may be necessary. In some cases it is done automatically; in
others, it must be done manually.
For example, when defining subfields of type basing pointer or procedure pointer
using the length notation, the compiler will automatically perform padding if
necessary to ensure that the subfield is aligned properly.
When defining float, integer or unsigned subfields, alignment may be desired to

improve run-time performance. If the subfields are defined using length notation,
you can automatically align float, integer or unsigned subfields by specifying the
keyword ALIGN on the data structure definition. However, note the following
exceptions:
v The ALIGN keyword is not allowed for a file information data structure or a
program status data structure.
v Subfields defined using the keyword OVERLAY are not aligned automatically,
even if the keyword ALIGN is specified for the data structure. In this case, you
must align the subfields manually.
Automatic alignment will align the fields on the following boundaries.

v 2 bytes for 5-digit integer or unsigned subfields

Data Structures
v 4 bytes for 10-digit integer or unsigned subfields or 4-byte float subfields
v 8 bytes for 20-digit integer or unsigned subfields
v 8 bytes for 8-byte float subfields
v 16 bytes for pointer subfields
If you are aligning fields manually, make sure that they are aligned on the same
boundaries. A start-position is on an n-byte boundary if ((position - 1) mod n) =
0. (The value of ″x mod y″ is the remainder after dividing x by y in integer
arithmetic. It is the same as the MVR value after X DIV Y.)
Figure 50 shows a sequence of bytes and identifies the different boundaries used
for alignment.
Figure 50. Boundaries for Data Alignment
Note the following about the above byte sequence:

v Position 1 is on a 16-byte boundary, since ((1-1) mod 16) = 0.
v Position 13 is on a 4-byte boundary, since ((13-1) mod 4) = 0.
v Position 7 is not on a 4-byte boundary, since ((7-1) mod 4) = 2.
| Initialization of Nested Data Structures

| The keyword INZ(*LIKEDS) is allowed on a LIKEDS subfield. The LIKEDS
| subfield is initialized exactly the same as the corresponding data structure.
| Keyword INZ is allowed on a LIKEDS subfield. All nested subfields of the LIKEDS
| subfield are initialized to their default values. This also applies to more deeply
| nested LIKEDS subfields, with the exception of nested LIKEDS subfields with
| INZ(*LIKEDS) specified.
| If keyword INZ is coded on a main data structure definition, keyword INZ is

| implied on all subfields of the data structure without explicit initialization. This
| includes LIKEDS subfields.
Special Data Structures

Special data structures include:
v Data area data structures
v File information data structures (INFDS)
v Program-status data structures
v Indicator data structures.
Note that the above data structures cannot be defined in subprocedures.
Data Area Data Structure

A data area data structure, identified by a U in position 23 of the definition
specification, indicates to the compiler that it should read in and lock the data area
of the same name at program initialization and should write out and unlock the
same data area at the end of the program. Locking does not apply to the local data

Data Structures
area (see “Local Data Area (*LDA)”). Data area data structures, as in all other data
structures, have the type character. A data area read into a data area data structure
must also be character. The data area and data area data structure must have the
same name unless you rename the data area within the ILE RPG program by using
the *DTAARA DEFINE operation code or the DTAARA keyword.
You can specify the data area operations (IN, OUT, and UNLOCK) for a data area
that is implicitly read in and written out. Before you use a data area data structure
with these operations, you must specify that data area data structure name in the
result field of the *DTAARA DEFINE operation or with the DTAARA keyword.
A data area data structure cannot be specified in the result field of a PARM
operation in the *ENTRY PLIST.
Local Data Area (*LDA): If you specify blanks for the data area data structure
(positions 7 through 21 of the definition specification that contains a U in position
23), the compiler uses the local data area. To provide a name for the local data
area, use the *DTAARA DEFINE operation, with *LDA in factor 2 and the name in
the result field or DTAARA(*LDA) on the definition specification.
File Information Data Structure

You can specify a file information data structure (defined by the keyword INFDS
on a file description specifications) for each file in the program. This provides you
with status information on the file exception/error that occurred. The file
information data structure name must be unique for each file. A file information
data structure contains predefined subfields that provide information on the file
exception/error that occurred. For a discussion of file information data structures
and their subfields, see “File Information Data Structure” on page 65.
Program-Status Data Structure

A program-status data structure, identified by an S in position 23 of the definition
specification, provides program exception/error information to the program. For a
discussion of program-status data structures and their predefined subfields, see
“Program Status Data Structure” on page 83.
Indicator Data Structure

An indicator data structure is identified by the keyword INDDS on the file
description specifications. It is used to store conditioning and response indicators
passed to and from data management for a file. By default, the indicator data
structure is initialized to all zeros (’0’s).
The rules for defining the data structure are:

v It must not be externally described.
v It can only have fields of indicator format.
v It can be defined as a multiple occurrence data structure.
v %SIZE for the data structure will return 99. For a multiple occurrence data
structure, %SIZE(ds:*ALL) will return a multiple of 99. If a length is specified, it
must be 99.
v Subfields may contain arrays of indicators as long as the total length does not
exceed 99.
Data Structure Examples

The following examples show various uses for data structures and how to define
them.

Data Structures
Example Description
Figure 51 Using a data structure to subdivide a field
Figure 52 on page 135 Using a data structure to group fields
Figure 53 on page 136 Using keywords QUALIFIED, LIKEDS, and DIM with data
structures, and how to code fully-qualified subfields
Figure 54 on page 137 Data structure with absolute and length notation
Figure 55 on page 137 Rename and initialize an externally described data structure
Figure 56 on page 138 Using PREFIX to rename all fields in an external data
structure
Figure 57 on page 138 Defining a multiple occurrence data structure
Figure 58 on page 139 Aligning data structure subfields
Figure 59 on page 140 Defining a *LDA data area data structure
Figure 60 on page 141 Using data area data structures (1)
Figure 61 on page 141 Using data area data structures (2)
Figure 62 on page 142 Using an indicator data structure
Figure 63 on page 143 Using a multiple-occurrence indicator data structure
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8

D.....................................Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
*
* Use length notation to define the data structure subfields.
* You can refer to the entire data structure by using Partno, or by
* using the individual subfields Manufactr, Drug, Strength or Count.
*
D Partno DS
D Manufactr 4
D Drug 6
D Strength 3
D Count 3 0
D
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8
IFilename++SqNORiPos1+NCCPos2+NCCPos3+NCC..................................
I........................Fmt+SPFrom+To+++DcField+++++++++L1M1FrPlMnZr......
*
* Records in program described file FILEIN contain a field, Partno,
* which needs to be subdivided for processing in this program.
* To achieve this, the field Partno is described as a data structure
* using the above Definition specification
*
IFILEIN NS 01 1 CA 2 CB
I 3 18 Partno
I 19 29 Name
I 30 40 Patno
Figure 51. Using a Data structure to subdivide a field

Data Structures
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8

D.....................................Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
*
* When you use a data structure to group fields, fields from
* non-adjacent locations on the input record can be made to occupy
* adjacent internal locations. The area can then be referred to by
* the data structure name or individual subfield name.
*
D Partkey DS
D Location 4
D Partno 8
D Type 4
D
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8
IFilename++SqNORiPos1+NCCPos2+NCCPos3+NCC..................................
I........................Fmt+SPFrom+To+++DcField+++++++++L1M1FrPlMnZr......
*
* Fields from program described file TRANSACTN need to be
* compared to the field retrieved from an Item_Master file
*
ITRANSACTN NS 01 1 C1 2 C2
I 3 10 Partno
I 11 16 0Quantity
I 17 20 Type
I 21 21 Code
I 22 25 Location
I
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8
CL0N01Factor1+++++++Opcode(E)+Factor2+++++++Result++++++++Len++D+HiLoEq....
*
* Use the data structure name Partkey, to compare to the field
* Item_Nbr
*
C :
C Partkey IFEQ Item_Nbr 99
C :
C*
Figure 52. Using a data structure to group fields

Data Structures
| D CustomerInfo DS QUALIFIED BASED(@)

| D Name 20A
| D Address 50A
|
| D ProductInfo DS QUALIFIED BASED(@)
| D Number 5A
| D Description 20A
| D Cost 9P 2
|
| D SalesTransaction...
| D DS QUALIFIED
| D Buyer LIKEDS(CustomerInfo)
| D Seller LIKEDS(CustomerInfo)
| D NumProducts 10I 0
| D Product LIKEDS(ProductInfo)
| D DIM(10)
|
| /free
| TotalCost = 0;
| for i = 1 to SalesTransation. Numproducts;
| TotalCost = TotalCost + SalesTransaction.Products (i).Cost;
| dsply SalesTransaction.Products (i).Cost;
| endfor;
| dsply (’Total cost is ’ + %char(TotalCost));
| /end-free
||
| Figure 53. Using Keywords QUALIFIED, LIKEDS and DIM with data structures

Data Structures
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8

D.....................................Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
*
* Define a program described data structure called FRED
* The data structure is composed of 5 fields:
* 1. An array with element length 10 and dimension 70(Field1)
* 2. A field of length 30 (Field2)
* 3/4. Divide Field2 in 2 equal length fields (Field3 and Field4)
* 5. Define a binary field over the 3rd field
* Note the indentation to improve readability
*
*
* Absolute notation:
*
* The compiler will determine the array element length (Field1)
* by dividing the total length (700) by the dimension (70)
*
D FRED DS
D Field1 1 700 DIM(70)
D Field2 701 730
D Field3 701 715
D Field5 701 704B 2
D Field4 716 730
*
* Length notation:
*
* The OVERLAY keyword is used to subdivide Field2
*
D FRED DS
D Field1 10 DIM(70)
D Field2 30
D Field3 15 OVERLAY(Field2)
D Field5 4B 2 OVERLAY(Field3)
D Field4 15 OVERLAY(Field2:16)
Figure 54. Data structure with absolute and length notation
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8

D.....................................Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
*
* Define an externally described data structure with internal name
* FRED and external name EXTDS and rename field CUST to CUSTNAME
* Initialize CUSTNAME to ’GEORGE’ and PRICE to 1234.89.
* Assign to subfield ITMARR the DIM keyword.
* The ITMARR subfield is defined in the external description as a
* 100 byte character field. This divides the 100 byte character
* field into 10 array elements, each 10 bytes long.
* Using the DIM keyword on an externally described numeric subfield
* should be done with caution, because it will divide the field into
* array elements (similar to the way it does when absolute notation
* is used for program described subfields).
*
D Fred E DS EXTNAME(EXTDS)
D CUSTNAME E EXTFLD(CUST) INZ(’GEORGE’)
D PRICE E INZ(1234.89)
D ITMARR E DIM(10)
Figure 55. Rename and initialize an externally described data structure

Data Structures
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8

D.....................................Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
D
D extds1 E DS EXTNAME (CUSTDATA)
D PREFIX (CU_)
D Name E INZ (’Joe’s Garage’)
D Custnum E EXTFLD (NUMBER)
D
*
* The previous data structure will expand as follows:
* -- All externally described fields are included in the data
* structure
* -- Renamed subfields keep their new names
* -- Subfields that are not renamed are prefixed with the
* prefix string
*
* Expanded data structure:
*
D EXTDS1 E DS
D CU_NAME E 20A EXTFLD (NAME)
D INZ (’Joe’s Garage’)
D CU_ADDR E 50A EXTFLD (ADDR)
D CUSTNUM E 9S0 EXTFLD (NUMBER)
D CU_SALESMN E 7P0 EXTFLD (SALESMN)
Figure 56. Using PREFIX to rename all fields in an external data structure
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8

D.....................................Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
*
* Define a Multiple Occurrence data structure of 20 elements with:
* -- 3 fields of character 20
* -- A 4th field of character 10 which overlaps the 2nd
* field starting at the second position.
*
* Named constant ’Max_Occur’ is used to define the number of
* occurrences.
*
* Absolute notation (using begin/end positions)
*
D Max_Occur C CONST(20)
D
DDataStruct DS OCCURS (Max_Occur)
D field1 1 20
D field2 21 40
D field21 22 31
D field3 41 60
*
* Mixture of absolute and length notation
*
D DataStruct DS OCCURS(twenty)
D field1 20
D field2 20
D field21 22 31
D field3 41 60
Figure 57. Defining a multiple occurrence data structure

Data Structures
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8

* Data structure with alignment:
D MyDS DS ALIGN
* Properly aligned subfields
* Integer subfields using absolute notation.
D Subf1 33 34I 0
D Subf2 37 40I 0
* Integer subfields using length notation.
* Note that Subf3 will go directly after Subf2
* since positions 41-42 are on a 2-byte boundary.
* However, Subf4 must be placed in positions 45-48
* which is the next 4-byte boundary after 42.
D Subf3 5I 0
D Subf4 10I 0
* Integer subfields using OVERLAY.
D Group 101 120A
D Subf6 5I 0 OVERLAY (Group: 3)
D Subf7 10I 0 OVERLAY (Group: 5)
D Subf8 5U 0 OVERLAY (Group: 9)
* Subfields that are not properly aligned:
* Integer subfields using absolute notation:
D SubfX1 10 11I 0
D SubfX2 15 18I 0
* Integer subfields using OVERLAY:
D BadGroup 101 120A
D SubfX3 5I 0 OVERLAY (BadGroup: 2)
D SubfX4 10I 0 OVERLAY (BadGroup: 6)
D SubfX5 10U 0 OVERLAY (BadGroup: 11)
* Integer subfields using OVERLAY:
D WorseGroup 200 299A
D SubfX6 5I 0 OVERLAY (WorseGroup)
D SubfX7 10I 0 OVERLAY (WorseGroup: 3)
*
* The subfields receive warning messages for the following reasons:
* SubfX1 - end position (11) is not a multiple of 2 for a 2 byte field.
* SubfX2 - end position (18) is not a multiple of 4 for a 4 byte field.
* SubfX3 - end position (103) is not a multiple of 2.
Figure 58. Aligning Data Structure Subfields

Data Structures
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8

D.....................................Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
*
* Define a data area data structure based on the *LDA.
*
* Example 1:
* A data area data structure with no name is based on the *LDA.
* In this case, the DTAARA keyword does not have to be used.
*
D UDS
D SUBFLD 1 600A
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8
* Example 2:
* This data structure is explicitly based on the *LDA using
* the DTAARA keyword. Since it is not a data area data
* structure, it must be handled using IN and OUT operations.
*
D LDA_DS DS DTAARA(*LDA)
D SUBFLD 1 600A
...
C IN LDA_DS
C OUT LDA_DS
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8
* Example 3:
* This data structure is explicitly based on the *LDA using
* the DTAARA keyword. Since it is a data area data
* structure, it is read in during initialization and written
* out during termination. It can also be handled using IN
* and OUT operations, since the DTAARA keyword was used.
*
D LDA_DS UDS DTAARA(*LDA)
D SUBFLD 1 600A
...
C IN LDA_DS
C OUT LDA_DS
Figure 59. Defining a *LDA data area data structure

Data Structures
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8

HKeywords++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
H DFTNAME(Program1)
H
*
FFilename++IPEASF.....L.....A.Device+.Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++++
FSALESDTA IF E DISK
*
D.....................................Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
*
* This program uses a data area data structure to accumulate
* a series of totals. The data area subfields are then added
* to fields from the file SALESDTA.
D Totals UDS
D Tot_amount 8 2
D Tot_gross 10 2
D Tot_net 10 2
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8
CL0N01Factor1+++++++Opcode(E)+Factor2++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
*
C :
C EVAL Tot_amount = Tot_amount + amount
C EVAL Tot_gross = Tot_gross + gross
C EVAL Tot_net = Tot_net + net
Figure 60. Using data area data structures (program 1)
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8

HKeywords++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
H DFTNAME(Program2)
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8
D.....................................Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
*
* This program processes the totals accumulated in Program1.
* Program2 then uses the total in the subfields to do calculations.
*
D Totals UDS
D Tot_amount 8 2
D Tot_gross 10 2
D Tot_net 10 2
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8
*
C :
C EVAL *IN91 = (Amount2 <> Tot_amount)
C EVAL *IN92 = (Gross2 <> Tot_gross)
C EVAL *IN93 = (Net2 <> Tot_net)
C :
Figure 61. Using data area data structures (program 2)

Data Structures
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8

FFilename++IPEASFRLen+LKlen+AIDevice+.Keywords++++++++++++++++++++++++++
* Indicator data structure "DispInds" is associated to file "Disp".
FDisp CF E WORKSTN INDDS (DispInds)
D.....................................Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
*
* This is the indicator data structure:
*
D DispInds DS
* Conditioning indicators for format "Query"
D ShowName 21 21N
* Response indicators for format "Query"
D Exit 3 3N
D Return 12 12N
D BlankNum 31 31N
* Conditioning indicators for format "DispSflCtl"
D SFLDSPCTL 41 41N
D SFLDSP 42 42N
D SFLEND 43 43N
D SFLCLR 44 44N
*
* Set indicators to display the subfile:
C EVAL SFLDSP = *ON
C EVAL SFLEND = *OFF
C EVAL SFLCLR = *OFF
C EXFMT DispSFLCTL
*
* Using indicator variables, we can write more readable programs:
C EXFMT Query
C IF Exit or Return
C RETURN
C ENDIF
Figure 62. Using an indicator data structure

Data Structures
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8

FFilename++IPEASFRLen+LKlen+AIDevice+.Keywords++++++++++++++++++++++++++
* Indicator data structure "ErrorInds" is associated to file "Disp".
FDisp CF E WORKSTN INDDS (ERRORINDS)
D.....................................Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
D @NameOk C 0
D @NameNotFound C 1
D @NameNotValid C 2
D @NumErrors C 2
*
* Indicator data structure for ERRMSG:
*
D ERRORINDS DS OCCURS(@NumErrors)
* Indicators for ERRMSG:
D NotFound 1 1N
D NotValid 2 2N
*
* Indicators for QUERY:
D Exit 3 3N
D Refresh 5 5N
D Return 12 12N
*
* Prototype for GetName procedure (code not shown)
D GetName PR 10I 0
D Name 50A CONST
*
C DOU Exit or Return
C EXFMT QUERY
* Check the response indicators
C SELECT
C WHEN Exit or Return
C RETURN
C WHEN Refresh
C RESET QUERY
C ITER
C ENDSL
*
* Check the name
C EVAL RC = GetName(Name)
*
* If it is not valid, display an error message
C IF RC <> @NameOk
C RC OCCURS ErrorInds
C EXFMT ERRMSG
C ENDIF
C ENDDO
...
C *INZSR BEGSR
*
* Initialize the occurrences of the ErrorInds data structure
C @NameNotFound OCCUR ErrorInds
C EVAL NotFound = ’1’
C @NameNotValid OCCUR ErrorInds
C EVAL NotValid = ’1’
C ENDSR
Figure 63. Using a multiple-occurrence indicator data structure

Prototypes and Parameters

The recommended way to call programs and procedures is to use prototyped calls,
since prototyped calls allow the compiler to check the call interface at compile
time. If you are coding a subprocedure, you will need to code a
procedure-interface definition to allow the compiler to match the call interface to
the subprocedure.
This section describes how to define each of these concepts:

v “Prototypes”
v “Prototyped Parameters” on page 145
v “Procedure Interface” on page 147.
Prototypes
A prototype is a definition of the call interface. It includes the following
information:
v Whether the call is bound (procedure) or dynamic (program)
v How to find the program or procedure (the external name)
v The number and nature of the parameters
v Which parameters must be passed, and which are optionally passed
v Whether operational descriptors should be passed
v The data type of the return value, if any (for a procedure)
A prototype must be included in the definition specifications of the program or

procedure that makes the call. The prototype is used by the compiler to call the
program or procedure correctly, and to ensure that the caller passes the correct
parameters.
The following rules apply to prototype definitions.

v A prototype name must be specified in positions 7-21. If the keyword EXTPGM
or EXTPROC is specified on the prototype definition, then any calls to the
program or procedure use the external name specified for that keyword. If
neither keyword is specified, then the external name is the prototype name, that
is, the name specified in positions 7-21 (in uppercase).
v Specify PR in the Definition-Type entry (positions 24-25). Any parameter
definitions must immediately follow the PR specification. The prototype
definition ends with the first definition specification with non-blanks in positions
24-25 or by a non-definition specification.
v Specify any of the following keywords as they pertain to the call interface:
EXTPROC(name)
The call will be a bound procedure call that uses the external
name specified by the keyword.
EXTPGM(name)
The call will be an external program call that uses the external
name specified by the keyword.
OPDESC Operational descriptors are to be passed with the parameters
that are described in the prototype.
v A return value (if any) is specified on the PR definition. Specify the length and
data type of the return value. In addition, you may specify the following
keywords for the return value:

DATFMT(fmt)
The return value has the date format specified by the keyword.
| DIM(N) The return value is an array or data structure with N elements.
LIKEDS(data_structure_name)
The returned value is a data structure. (You cannot refer to the
subfields of the return value when you call the procedure.)
| The returned value is a data structure defined like the specified
| record format name.
| Note: You cannot refer to the subfields of the return value when
| you call the procedure.
LIKE(name) The return value is defined like the item specified by the
keyword.
PROCPTR The return value is a procedure pointer.
TIMFMT(fmt) The return value has the time format specified by the keyword.
VARYING A character, graphic, or UCS-2 return value has a variable-length
format.
For information on these keywords, see “Definition-Specification Keywords” on

page 287. Figure 64 shows a prototype for a subprocedure CVTCHR that takes a
numeric input parameter and returns a character string. Note that there is no name
associated with the return value. For this reason, you cannot display its contents
when debugging the program.
* The returned value is the character representation of

* the input parameter NUM, left-justified and padded on
* the right with blanks.
D CVTCHR PR 31A
| D NUM 31P 0 VALUE
* The following expression shows a call to CVTCHR. If
* variable rrn has the value 431, then after this EVAL,
* variable msg would have the value
* ’Record 431 was not found.’
C EVAL msg = ’Record ’
C + %TRIMR(CVTCHR(RRN))
C + ’ was not found ’
Figure 64. Prototype for CVTCHR
If you are writing a prototype for an exported subprocedure or for a main

procedure, put the prototype in a /COPY file and copy the prototype into the
source file for both the callers and the module that defines the procedure. This
coding technique provides maximum parameter-checking benefits for both the
callers and the procedure itself, since they all use the same prototype.
Prototyped Parameters
If the prototyped call interface involves the passing of parameters then you must
define the parameter immediately following the PR specification. The following
keywords, which apply to defining the type, are allowed on the parameter
definition specifications:
ASCEND The array is in ascending sequence.

DATFMT(fmt)
The date parameter has the format fmt.
| DIM(N) The parameter is an array or data structure with N elements.
LIKE(name) The parameter is defined like the item specified by the keyword.
| The parameter is a data structures whose subfields are the same as
| the fields in the specified record format name.
The parameter is a data structure whose subfields are the same as
the subfields identified in the LIKEDS keyword.
PROCPTR The parameter is a procedure pointer.
TIMFMT(fmt) The time parameter has the format fmt.
VARYING A character, graphic, or UCS-2 parameter has a variable-length
format.
For information on these keywords, see “Definition-Specification Keywords” on

page 287.
The following keywords, which specify how the parameter should be passed, are
also allowed on the parameter definition specifications:
CONST
The parameter is passed by read-only reference. A parameter defined with
CONST must not be modified by the called program or procedure. This
parameter-passing method allows you to pass literals and expressions.
NOOPT
The parameter will not be optimized in the called program or procedure.
OPTIONS(opt1 { : opt2 { : opt3 { : opt4 { : opt5 } } } })
Where opt1 ... opt5 can be *NOPASS, *OMIT, *VARSIZE, *STRING, or
*RIGHTADJ. For example, OPTIONS(*VARSIZE : *NOPASS).
Specifies the following parameter passing options:
*NOPASS
The parameter does not have to be passed. If a parameter has
OPTIONS(*NOPASS) specified, then all parameters following it
must also have OPTIONS(*NOPASS) specified.
*OMIT
The special value *OMIT may be passed for this reference
parameter.
*VARSIZE
The parameter may contain less data than is indicated on the
definition. This keyword is valid only for character parameters,
graphic parameters, UCS-2 parameters, or arrays passed by
reference. The called program or procedure must have some way
of determining the length of the passed parameter.
Note: When this keyword is omitted for fixed-length fields, the

parameter may only contain more or the same amount of
data as indicated on the definition; for variable-length fields,

the parameter must have the same declared maximum
length as indicated on the definition.
*STRING
Pass a character value as a null-terminated string. This keyword is
valid only for basing pointer parameters passed by value or by
read-only reference.
*RIGHTADJ
For a CONST or VALUE parameter, *RIGHTADJ indicates that the
graphic, UCS-2, or character parameter value is to be right
adjusted.
TIP
For the parameter passing options *NOPASS, *OMIT, and *VARSIZE,
it is up to the programmer of the procedure to ensure that these
options are handled. For example, if OPTIONS(*NOPASS) is coded
and you choose not to pass the parameter, the procedure must check
that the parameter was passed before it accesses it. The compiler will
not do any checking for this.
VALUE
The parameter is passed by value.
For information on the keywords listed above, see “Definition-Specification

Keywords” on page 287. For more information on using prototyped parameters, see
the chapter on calling programs and procedures in the WebSphere Development
Studio: ILE RPG Programmer’s Guide.
Procedure Interface
If a prototyped program or procedure has call parameters or a return value, then a
procedure interface definition must be defined, either in the main source section
(for a main procedure) or in the subprocedure section. A procedure interface
definition repeats the prototype information within the definition of a procedure.
It is used to declare the entry parameters for the procedure and to ensure that the
internal definition of the procedure is consistent with the external definition (the
prototype).
The following rules apply to procedure interface definitions.

v The name of the procedure interface, specified in positions 7-21, is required for
the main procedure. It is optional for subprocedures. If specified, it must match
the name specified in positions 7-21 on the corresponding prototype definition.
v Specify PI in the Definition-Type entry (positions 24-25). The procedure-interface
definition can be specified anywhere in the definition specifications. In the main
procedure, the procedure interface must be preceded by the prototype that it
refers to. A procedure interface is required in a subprocedure if the procedure
returns a value, or if it has any parameters; otherwise, it is optional.
v Any parameter definitions, indicated by blanks in positions 24-25, must
immediately follow the PI specification.
v Parameter names must be specified, although they do not have to match the
names specified on the prototype.
v All attributes of the parameters, including data type, length, and dimension,
must match exactly those on the corresponding prototype definition.

v To indicate that a parameter is a data structure, use the LIKEDS keyword to
define the parameter with the same subfields as another data structure.
v The keywords specified on the PI specification and the parameter specifications
must match those specified on the prototype.
TIP
If a module contains calls to a prototyped program or procedure, then there
must be a prototype definition for each program and procedure that you
want to call. One way of minimizing the required coding is to store shared
prototypes in /COPY files.
If you provide prototyped programs or procedures to other users, be sure to

provide them with the prototypes (in /COPY files) as well.

Chapter 9. Using Arrays and Tables
Arrays and tables are both collections of data fields (elements) of the same:
v Field length
v Data type
– Character
– Numeric
| – Data Structure
– Date
– Time
– Timestamp
– Graphic
– Basing Pointer
– Procedure Pointer
– UCS-2
v Format
v Number of decimal positions (if numeric)
Arrays and tables differ in that:

v You can refer to a specific array element by its position
v You cannot refer to specific table elements by their position
v An array name by itself refers to all elements in the array
v A table name always refers to the element found in the last “LOOKUP (Look Up
a Table or Array Element)” on page 620 operation
Note: You can define only run-time arrays in a subprocedure. Tables, prerun-time
| arrays, and compile-time arrays are not supported. If you want to use a
| pre-run array or compile-time array in a subprocedure, you must define it in
| the main source section.
The next section describes how to code an array, how to specify the initial values
of the array elements, how to change the values of an array, and the special
considerations for using an array. The section after next describes the same
information for tables.
Arrays
There are three types of arrays:
v The run-time array is loaded by your program while it is running.
v The compile-time array is loaded when your program is created. The initial data
becomes a permanent part of your program.
v The prerun-time array is loaded from an array file when your program begins
running, before any input, calculation, or output operations are processed.
The essentials of defining and loading an array are described for a run-time array.
For defining and loading compile-time and prerun-time arrays you use these
essentials and some additional specifications.

Arrays
Array Name and Index
You refer to an entire array using the array name alone. You refer to the individual
elements of an array using (1) the array name, followed by (2) a left parenthesis,
followed by (3) an index, followed by (4) a right parenthesis -- for example:
AR(IND). The index indicates the position of the element within the array (starting
from 1) and is either a number or a field containing a number.
The following rules apply when you specify an array name and index:
v The array name must be a unique symbolic name.
v The index must be a numeric field or constant greater than zero and with zero
decimal positions
v If the array is specified within an expression in the extended factor 2 field, the
index may be an expression returning a numeric value with zero decimal
positions
v At run time, if your program refers to an array using an index with a value that
is zero, negative, or greater than the number of elements in the array, then the
error/exception routine takes control of your program.
The Essential Array Specifications

You define an array on a definition specification. Here are the essential
specifications for all arrays:
v Specify the array name in positions 7 through 21
v Specify the number of entries in the array using the DIM keyword
v Specify length, data format, and decimal positions as you would any scalar
fields. You may specify explicit From- and To-position entries (if defining a
subfield), or an explicit Length-entry; or you may define the array attributes
using the LIKE keyword; or the attributes may be specified elsewhere in the
program.
v If you need to specify a sort sequence, use the ASCEND or DESCEND
keywords.
Figure 65 shows an example of the essential array specifications.
Coding a Run-Time Array

If you make no further specifications beyond the essential array specifications, you
have defined a run-time array. Note that the keywords ALT, CTDATA, EXTFMT,
FROMFILE, PERRCD, and TOFILE cannot be used for a run-time array.
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...
DName+++++++++++ETDsFrom+++To/L+++IDc.Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++++
DARC S 3A DIM(12)
Figure 65. The Essential Array Specifications to Define a Run-Time Array
Loading a Run-Time Array

You can assign initial values for a run-time array using the INZ keyword on the
definition specification. You can also assign initial values for a run-time array
through input or calculation specifications. This second method may also be used
to put data into other types of arrays.
For example, you may use the calculation specifications for the MOVE operation to
put 0 in each element of an array (or in selected elements).

Arrays
Using the input specifications, you may fill an array with the data from a file. The
following sections provide more details on retrieving this data from the records of
a file.
Note: Date and time runtime data must be in the same format and use the same
separators as the date or time array being loaded.
Loading a Run-Time Array in One Source Record

If the array information is contained in one record, the information can occupy
consecutive positions in the record or it can be scattered throughout the record.
If the array elements are consecutive on the input record, the array can be loaded
with a single input specification. Figure 66 shows the specifications for loading an
array, INPARR, of six elements (12 characters each) from a single record from the
file ARRFILE.
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...
DINPARR S 12A DIM(6)
IARRFILE AA 01
I 1 72 INPARR
Figure 66. Using a Run-Time Array with Consecutive Elements
If the array elements are scattered throughout the record, they can be defined and
loaded one at a time, with one element described on a specification line. Figure 67
shows the specifications for loading an array, ARRX, of six elements with 12
characters each, from a single record from file ARRFILE; a blank separates each of
the elements from the others.
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...
DARRX S 12A DIM(6)
IARRFILE AA 01
I 1 12 ARRX(1)
I 14 25 ARRX(2)
I 27 38 ARRX(3)
I 40 51 ARRX(4)
I 53 64 ARRX(5)
I 66 77 ARRX(6)
Figure 67. Defining a Run-Time Array with Scattered Elements
Loading a Run-Time Array Using Multiple Source Records

If the array information is in more than one record, you may use various methods
to load the array. The method to use depends on the size of the array and whether
or not the array elements are consecutive in the input records. The ILE RPG
program processes one record at a time. Therefore the entire array is not processed
until all the records containing the array information are read and the information
is moved into the array fields. It may be necessary to suppress calculation and
output operations until the entire array is read into the program.
Chapter 9. Using Arrays and Tables 151

Arrays
Sequencing Run-Time Arrays
Run-time arrays are not sequence checked. If you process a SORTA (sort an array)
operation, the array is sorted into the sequence specified on the definition
specification (the ASCEND or DESCEND keywords) defining the array. If the
sequence is not specified, the array is sorted into ascending sequence. When the
high (positions 71 and 72 of the calculation specifications) or low (positions 73 and
74 of the calculation specifications) indicators are used in the LOOKUP operation,
the array sequence must be specified.
Coding a Compile-Time Array

A compile-time array is specified using the essential array specifications plus the
keyword CTDATA. In addition, on a definition specification you can specify:
v The number of array entries in an input record using the PERRCD keyword. If
the keyword is not specified, the number of entries defaults to 1.
v The external data format using the EXTFMT keyword. The only allowed values
are L (left-sign), R (right-sign), or S (zoned-decimal). The EXTFMT keyword is
not allowed for float compile-time arrays.
v A file to which the array is to be written when the program ends with LR on.
You specify this using the TOFILE keyword.
See Figure 68 on page 153 for an example of a compile-time array.
Loading a Compile-Time Array

For a compile-time array, enter array source data into records in the program source
member. If you use the **ALTSEQ, **CTDATA, and **FTRANS keywords, the array
data may be entered in anywhere following the source records. If you do not use
those keywords, the array data must follow the source records, and any alternate
collating sequence or file translation records in the order in which the compile-time
arrays and tables were defined on the definition specifications. This data is loaded
into the array when the program is compiled. Until the program is recompiled
with new data, the array will always initially have the same values each time you
call the program unless the previous call ended with LR off.
Compile-time arrays can be described separately or in alternating format (with the

ALT keyword). Alternating format means that the elements of one array are
intermixed on the input record with elements of another array.
Rules for Array Source Records

The rules for array source records are:
v The first array entry for each record must begin in position 1.
v All elements must be the same length and follow each other with no intervening
spaces
v An entire record need not be filled with entries. If it is not, blanks or comments
can be included after the entries (see Figure 68 on page 153).
v If the number of elements in the array as specified on the definition specification
is greater than the number of entries provided, the remaining elements are filled
with the default values for the data type specified.

Arrays
DName+++++++++++ETDsFrom+++To/L+++IDc.Keywords++++++++++++++++++++
DARC S 3A DIM(12) PERRCD(5) CTDATA
**CTDATA ARC
48K16343J64044HComments can be placed here
12648A47349K346Comments can be placed here
50B125 Comments can be placed here
48K 163 43J 640 44H 126 48A 473 49K 346 50B 125
This is the compile-time array, ARC.
Figure 68. Array Source Record with Comments
v Each record, except the last, must contain the number of entries specified with
the PERRCD keyword on the definition specifications. In the last record, unused
entries must be blank and comments can be included after the unused entries.
v Each entry must be contained entirely on one record. An entry cannot be split
between two records; therefore, the length of a single entry is limited to the
maximum length of 100 characters (size of source record). If arrays are used and
are described in alternating format, corresponding elements must be on the same
record; together they cannot exceed 100 characters.
v For date and time compile-time arrays the data must be in the same format and
use the same separators as the date or time array being loaded.
v Array data may be specified in one of two ways:
1. **CTDATA arrayname: The data for the array may be specified anywhere in
the compile-time data section.
2. **b: (b=blank) The data for the arrays must be specified in the same order in
which they are specified in the Definition specifications.
Only one of these techniques may be used in one program.

v Arrays can be in ascending(ASCEND keyword), descending (DESCEND
keyword), or no sequence (no keyword specified).
v For ascending or descending character arrays when ALTSEQ(*EXT) is specified
on the control specification, the alternate collating sequence is used for the
sequence checking. If the actual collating sequence is not known at compile time
(for example, if SRTSEQ(*JOBRUN) is specified on a control specification or as a
command parameter) the alternate collating sequence table will be retrieved at
runtime and the checking will occur during initialization at *INIT. Otherwise,
the checking will be done at compile time.
v Graphic and UCS-2 arrays will be sorted by hexadecimal values, regardless of
the alternate collating sequence.
v If L or R is specified on the EXTFMT keyword on the definition specification,
each element must include the sign (+ or -). An array with an element size of 2
with L specified would require 3 positions in the source data as shown in the
following example.
*....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....*
DName+++++++++++ETDsFrom+++To/L+++IDc.Keywords++++++++++++++++++++
D UPDATES 2 0 DIM(5) PERRCD(5) EXTFMT(L) CTDATA
**CTDATA UDPATES
+37-38+52-63-49+51
v Float compile-time data are specified in the source records as float or numeric
literals. Arrays defined as 4-byte float require 14 positions for each element;
arrays defined as 8-byte float require 23 positions for each element.

Arrays
v Graphic data must be enclosed in shift-out and shift-in characters. If several
elements of graphic data are included in a single record (without intervening
nongraphic data) only one set of shift-out and shift-in characters is required for
the record. If a graphic array is defined in alternating format with a nongraphic
array, the shift-in and shift-out characters must surround the graphic data. If two
graphic arrays are defined in alternating format, only one set of shift-in and
shift-out characters is required for each record.
Coding a Prerun-Time Array

In addition to the essential array specifications, you can also code the following
specifications or keywords for prerun-time arrays.
On the definition specifications, you can specify

v The name of the file with the array input data, using the FROMFILE keyword.
v The name of a file to which the array is written at the end of the program, using
the TOFILE keyword.
v The number of elements per input record, using the PERRCD keyword.
v The external format of numeric array data using the EXTFMT keyword.
v An alternating format using the ALT keyword.
Note: The integer or unsigned format cannot be specified for arrays defined with
more than ten digits.
On the file-description specifications, you can specify a T in position 18 for the file
with the array input data.
Example of Coding Arrays

Figure 69 on page 155 shows the definition specifications required for two
prerun-time arrays, a compile-time array, and a run-time array.

Arrays
*....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....*
HKeywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
H DATFMT(*USA) TIMFMT(*HMS)
D*ame+++++++++++ETDsFrom+++To/L+++IDc.Keywords++++++++++++++++++++
* Run-time array. ARI has 10 elements of type date. They are
* initialized to September 15, 1994. This is in month, day,
* year format using a slash as a separator as defined on the
* control specification.
DARI S D DIM(10) INZ(D’09/15/1994’)
*
* Compile-time arrays in alternating format. Both arrays have
* eight elements (three elements per record). ARC is a character
* array of length 15, and ARD is a time array with a predefined
* length of 8.
DARC S 15 DIM(8) PERRCD(3)
D CTDATA
DARD S T DIM(8) ALT(ARC)
*
* Prerun-time array. ARE, which is to be read from file DISKIN,
* has 250 character elements (12 elements per record). Each
* element is five positions long. The size of each record
* is 60 (5*12). The elements are arranged in ascending sequence.
DARE S 5A DIM(250) PERRCD(12) ASCEND
D FROMFILE(DISKIN)
*
* Prerun-time array specified as a combined file. ARH is written
* back to the same file from which it is read when the program
* ends normally with LR on. ARH has 250 character elements
* (12 elements per record). Each elements is five positions long.
* The elements are arranged in ascending sequence.
DARH S 5A DIM(250) PERRCD(12) ASCEND
D FROMFILE(DISKOUT)
D TOFILE(DISKOUT)
**CTDATA ARC
Toronto 12:15:00Winnipeg 13:23:00Calgary 15:44:00
Sydney 17:24:30Edmonton 21:33:00Saskatoon 08:40:00
Regina 12:33:00Vancouver 13:20:00
Figure 69. Definition Specifications for Different Types of Arrays
Loading a Prerun-Time Array

For a prerun-time array, enter array input data into a file. The file must be a
sequential program described file. During initialization, but before any input,
calculation, or output operations are processed the array is loaded with initial
values from the file. By modifying this file, you can alter the array’s initial values
on the next call to the program, without recompiling the program. The file is read
in arrival sequence. The rules for prerun-time array data are the same as for
compile-time array data, except there are no restrictions on the length of each
record. See “Rules for Array Source Records” on page 152.
Sequence Checking for Character Arrays

Sequence checking for character arrays that have not been defined with
ALTSEQ(*NONE) has two dependencies:
1. Whether the ALTSEQ control specification keyword has been specified, and if
so, how.
2. Whether the array is compile time or prerun time.

Arrays
The following table indicates when sequence checking occurs.
Control Specification ALTSEQ Used for When Sequence When Sequence

Entry SORTA, LOOKUP Checked for Checked for Prerun
and Sequence Compile Time Array Time Array
Checking
ALTSEQ(*NONE) No Compile time Run time
ALTSEQ(*SRC) No Compile time Run time
ALTSEQ(*EXT) Yes Compile time Run time
(known at compile
time)
ALTSEQ(*EXT) Yes Run time Run time
(known only at run
time)
Note: For compatibility with RPG III, SORTA and LOOKUP do not use the
alternate collating sequence with ALTSEQ(*SRC). If you want these
operations to be performed using the alternate collating sequence, you can
define a table on the system (object type *TBL), containing your alternate
sequence. Then you can change ALTSEQ(*SRC) to ALTSEQ(*EXT) on your
control specification and specify the name of your table on the SRTSEQ
keyword or parameter of the create command.
Initializing Arrays
Run-Time Arrays
To initialize each element in a run-time array to the same value, specify the INZ
keyword on the definition specification. If the array is defined as a data structure
subfield, the normal rules for data structure initialization overlap apply (the
initialization is done in the order that the fields are declared within the data
structure).
Compile-Time and Prerun-Time Arrays

The INZ keyword cannot be specified for a compile-time or prerun-time array,
because their initial values are assigned to them through other means
(compile-time data or data from an input file). If a compile-time or prerun-time
array appears in a globally initialized data structure, it is not included in the global
initialization.
Note: Compile-time arrays are initialized in the order in which the data is declared
after the program, and prerun-time arrays are initialized in the order of
declaration of their initialization files, regardless of the order in which these
arrays are declared in the data structure. Pre-run time arrays are initialized
after compile-time arrays.
If a subfield initialization overlaps a compile-time or prerun-time array, the

initialization of the array takes precedence; that is, the array is initialized after the
subfield, regardless of the order in which fields are declared within the data
structure.

Defining Related Arrays

You can load two compile-time arrays or two prerun-time arrays in alternating
format by using the ALT keyword on the definition of the alternating array. You
specify the name of the primary array as the parameter for the ALT keyword. The
records for storing the data for such arrays have the first element of the first array
followed by the first element of the second array, the second element of the first
array followed by the second element of the second array, the third element of the
first array followed by the third element of the second array, and so on.
Corresponding elements must appear on the same record. The PERRCD keyword
on the main array definition specifies the number of corresponding pairs per
record, each pair of elements counting as a single entry. You can specify EXTFMT
on both the main and alternating array.
Figure 70 shows two arrays, ARRA and ARRB, in alternating format.
A R R A A R R B
(Part Number) (Unit Cost)
345126 373
38A437 498
39K143 1297
40B125 93
Arrays ARRA and ARRB can be described
41C023 3998 as two separate array files or as one
array file in alternating format.
42D893 87
43K823 349
44H111 697
45P673 898
46C732 47587
Figure 70. Arrays in Alternating and Nonalternating Format
The records for ARRA and ARRB look like the records below when described as
two separate array files.
This record contains ARRA entries in positions 1 through 60.
ARRA ARRA ARRA ARRA ARRA ARRA ARRA ARRA ARRA ARRA
entry entry entry entry entry entry entry entry entry entry
1 . . . . . 7 . . . . . 13 . . . . 19 . . . . 25 . . . . 31 . . . . 37 . . . . 43 . . . . 49 . . . . 55 . . . .
Figure 71. Arrays Records for Two Separate Array Files
This record contains ARRB entries in positions 1 through 50.

ARRB ARRB ARRB ARRB ARRB ARRB ARRB ARRB ARRB ARRB
1..... 6 . . . . . 11 . . . . 16 . . . . 21 . . . . 26 . . . . 31 . . . . 36 . . . . 41 . . . . 46 . . . .
Figure 72. Arrays Records for One Array File
The records for ARRA and ARRB look like the records below when described as
one array file in alternating format. The first record contains ARRA and ARRB
entries in alternating format in positions 1 through 55. The second record contains
ARRA and ARRB entries in alternating format in positions 1 through 55.
ARRA ARRB ARRA ARRB ARRA ARRB ARRA ARRB ARRA ARRB
1..... 1 . . . . . 7 . . . . . 6 . . . . . 13 . . . . 11 . . . . 19 . . . . 16 . . . . 25 . . . . 21 . . . .
Figure 73. Arrays Records for One Array File in Alternating Format
DName+++++++++++ETDsFrom+++To/L+++IDc.Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++
DARRA S 6A DIM(6) PERRCD(1) CTDATA
DARRB S 5 0 DIM(6) ALT(ARRA)
DARRGRAPHIC S 3G DIM(2) PERRCD(2) CTDATA
DARRC S 3A DIM(2) ALT(ARRGRAPHIC)
DARRGRAPH1 S 3G DIM(2) PERRCD(2) CTDATA
DARRGRAPH2 S 3G DIM(2) ALT(ARRGRAPH1)
**CTDATA ARRA
345126 373
38A437 498
39K143 1297
40B125 93
41C023 3998
42D893 87
**CTDATA ARRGRAPHIC
ok1k2k3iabcok4k5k6iabc
**CTDATA ARRGRAPH1
ok1k2k3k4k5k6k1k2k3k4k5k6i
Searching Arrays
The following can be used to search arrays:
v The LOOKUP operation code
v The %LOOKUP built-in function
v The %LOOKUPLT built-in function
v The %LOOKUPLE built-in function
v The %LOOKUPGT built-in function
v The %LOOKUPGE built-in function
For more information about the LOOKUP operation code, see:

v “Searching an Array with an Index” on page 159
v “Searching an Array Without an Index” on page 159
v “LOOKUP (Look Up a Table or Array Element)” on page 620
For more information about the %LOOKUPxx built-in functions, see

“%LOOKUPxx (Look Up an Array Element)” on page 479.

Searching Arrays
Searching an Array Without an Index
When searching an array without an index, use the status (on or off) of the
resulting indicators to determine whether a particular element is present in the
array. Searching an array without an index can be used for validity checking of
input data to determine if a field is in a list of array elements. Generally, an equal
LOOKUP is requested.
In factor 1 in the calculation specifications, specify the search argument (data for
which you want to find a match in the array named) and place the array name
factor 2.
In factor 2 specify the name of the array to be searched. At least one resulting
indicator must be specified. Entries must not be made in both high and low for the
same LOOKUP operation. The resulting indicators must not be specified in high or
low if the array is not in sequence (ASCEND or DESCEND keywords). Control
level and conditioning indicators (specified in positions 7 through 11) can also be
used. The result field cannot be used.
The search starts at the beginning of the array and ends at the end of the array or
when the conditions of the lookup are satisfied. Whenever an array element is
found that satisfies the type of search being made (equal, high, low), the resulting
indicator is set on.
Figure 74 shows an example of a LOOKUP on an array without an index.
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...
FARRFILE IT F 5 DISK
F*
DDPTNOS S 5S 0 DIM(50) FROMFILE(ARRFILE)
D*
C* The LOOKUP operation is processed and, if an element of DPTNOS equal
C* to the search argument (DPTNUM) is found, indicator 20 is set on.
C DPTNUM LOOKUP DPTNOS 20
Figure 74. LOOKUP Operation for an Array without an Index
ARRFILE, which contains department numbers, is defined in the file description

specifications as an input file (I in position 17) with an array file designation (T in
position 18). The file is program described (F in position 22), and each record is 5
positions in length (5 in position 27).
In the definition specifications, ARRFILE is defined as containing the array

DPTNOS. The array contains 50 entries (DIM(50)). Each entry is 5 positions in
length (positions 33-39) with zero decimal positions (positions 41-42). One
department number can be contained in each record (PERRCD defaults to 1).
Searching an Array with an Index

To find out which element satisfies a LOOKUP search, start the search at a
particular element in the array. To do this type of search, make the entries in the
calculation specifications as you would for an array without an index. However, in
factor 2, enter the name of the array to be searched, followed by a parenthesized
numeric field (with zero decimal positions) containing the number of the element
at which the search is to start. This numeric constant or field is called the index

Searching Arrays
because it points to a certain element in the array. The index is updated with the
element number which satisfied the search or is set to 0 if the search failed.
You can use a numeric constant as the index to test for the existence of an element
that satisfies the search starting at an element other than 1.
All other rules that apply to an array without an index apply to an array with an
index.
Figure 75 shows a LOOKUP on an array with an index.
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...
FARRFILE IT F 25 DISK
F*
DDPTNOS S 5S 0 DIM(50) FROMFILE(ARRFILE)
DDPTDSC S 20A DIM(50) ALT(DPTNOS)
D*
C* The Z-ADD operation begins the LOOKUP at the first element in DPTNOS.
C Z-ADD 1 X 3 0
C* At the end of a successful LOOKUP, when an element has been found
C* that contains an entry equal to the search argument DPTNUM,
C* indicator 20 is set on and the MOVE operation places the department
C* description, corresponding to the department number, into DPTNAM.
C DPTNUM LOOKUP DPTNOS(X) 20
C* If an element is not found that is equal to the search argument,
C* element X of DPTDSC is moved to DPTNAM.
C IF NOT *IN20
C MOVE DPTDSC(X) DPTNAM 20
C ENDIF
Figure 75. LOOKUP Operation on an Array with an Index
This example shows the same array of department numbers, DPTNOS, as Figure 74
on page 159. However, an alternating array of department descriptions, DPTDSC,
is also defined. Each element in DPTDSC is 20 positions in length. If there is
insufficient data in the file to initialize the entire array, the remaining elements in
DPTNOS are filled with zeros and the remaining elements in DPTDSC are filled
with blanks.
Using Arrays
Arrays can be used in input, output, or calculation specifications.
Specifying an Array in Calculations

An entire array or individual elements in an array can be specified in calculation
specifications. You can process individual elements like fields.
A noncontiguous array defined with the OVERLAY keyword cannot be used with
the MOVEA operation or in the result field of a PARM operation.
To specify an entire array, use only the array name, which can be used as factor 1,
factor 2, or the result field. The following operations can be used with an array
name: ADD, Z-ADD, SUB, Z-SUB, MULT, DIV, SQRT, ADDDUR, SUBDUR, EVAL,

Using Arrays
EXTRCT, MOVE, MOVEL, MOVEA, MLLZO, MLHZO, MHLZO, MHHZO,
DEBUG, XFOOT, LOOKUP, SORTA, PARM, DEFINE, CLEAR, RESET, CHECK,
CHECKR, and SCAN.
Several other operations can be used with an array element only but not with the
array name alone. These operations include but are not limited to: BITON, BITOFF,
COMP, CABxx, TESTZ, TESTN, TESTB, MVR, DO, DOUxx, DOWxx, DOU, DOW,
IFxx, WHENxx, WHEN, IF, SUBST, and CAT.
When specified with an array name without an index or with an asterisk as the
index (for example, ARRAY or ARRAY(*)) certain operations are repeated for each
element in the array. These are ADD, Z-ADD, EVAL, SUB, Z-SUB, ADDDUR,
SUBDUR, EXTRCT, MULT, DIV, SQRT, MOVE, MOVEL, MLLZO, MLHZO,
MHLZO and MHHZO. The following rules apply to these operations when an
array name without an index is specified:
v When factors 1 and 2 and the result field are arrays with the same number of
elements, the operation uses the first element from every array, then the second
element from every array until all elements in the arrays are processed. If the
arrays do not have the same number of entries, the operation ends when the last
element of the array with the fewest elements has been processed. When factor 1
is not specified for the ADD, SUB, MULT, and DIV operations, factor 1 is
assumed to be the same as the result field.
v When one of the factors is a field, a literal, or a figurative constant and the other
factor and the result field are arrays, the operation is done once for every
element in the shorter array. The same field, literal, or figurative constant is used
in all of the operations.
v The result field must always be an array.
v If an operation code uses factor 2 only (for example, Z-ADD, Z-SUB, SQRT,
ADD, SUB, MULT, or DIV may not have factor 1 specified) and the result field is
an array, the operation is done once for every element in the array. The same
field or constant is used in all of the operations if factor 2 is not an array.
v Resulting indicators (positions 71 through 76) cannot be used because of the
number of operations being processed.
v In an EVAL expression, if any arrays on the right-hand side are specified
without an index, the left-hand side must also contain an array without an
index.
Note: When used in an EVAL operation %ADDR(arr) and %ADDR(arr(*)) do not

have the same meaning. See “%ADDR (Get Address of Variable)” on
page 436 for more detail.
Sorting Arrays
You can sort arrays using the “SORTA (Sort an Array)” on page 722 operation code.
The array is sorted into sequence (ascending or descending), depending on the
sequence specified for the array on the definition specification.
Sorting using part of the array as a key

You can use the OVERLAY keyword to overlay one array over another. For
example, you can have a base array which contains names and salaries and two
overlay arrays (one for the names and one for the salaries). You could then sort the
base array by either name or salary by sorting on the appropriate overlay array.

Array Output
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
D DS
D Emp_Info 50 DIM(500) ASCEND
D Emp_Name 45 OVERLAY(Emp_Info:1)
D Emp_Salary 9P 2 OVERLAY(Emp_Info:46)
D
C
C* The following SORTA sorts Emp_Info by employee name.
C* The sequence of Emp_Name is used to determine the order of the
C* elements of Emp_Info.
C SORTA Emp_Name
C* The following SORTA sorts Emp_Info by employee salary
C* The sequence of Emp_Salary is used to determine the order of the
C* elements of Emp_Info.
C SORTA Emp_Salary
Figure 76. SORTA Operation with OVERLAY
Array Output
Entire arrays can be written out under ILE RPG control only at end of program
when the LR indicator is on. To indicate that an entire array is to be written out,
specify the name of the output file with the TOFILE keyword on the definition
specifications. This file must be described as a sequentially organized output or
combined file in the file description specifications. If the file is a combined file and
is externally described as a physical file, the information in the array at the end of
the program replaces the information read into the array at the start of the
program. Logical files may give unpredictable results.
If an entire array is to be written to an output record (using output specifications),

describe the array along with any other fields for the record:
v Positions 30 through 43 of the output specifications must contain the array name
used in the definition specifications.
v Positions 47 through 51 of the output specifications must contain the record
position where the last element of the array is to end. If an edit code is specified,
the end position must include blank positions and any extensions due to the edit
code (see “Editing Entire Arrays” listed next in this chapter).
Output indicators (positions 21 through 29) can be specified. Zero suppress

(position 44), blank-after (position 45), and data format (position 52) entries pertain
to every element in the array.
Editing Entire Arrays

When editing is specified for an entire array, all elements of the array are edited. If
different editing is required for various elements, refer to them individually.
When an edit code is specified for an entire array (position 44), two blanks are
automatically inserted between elements in the array: that is, there are blanks to
the left of every element in the array except the first. When an edit word is
specified, the blanks are not inserted. The edit word must contain all the blanks to
be inserted.
Editing of entire arrays is only valid in output specifications, not with the %EDITC
or %EDITW built-in functions.

Tables
Tables
The explanation of arrays applies to tables except for the following differences:
Activity Differences
Defining A table name must be a unique symbolic name that begins with
the letters TAB.
Loading Tables can be loaded only at compilation time and prerun-time.
Using and Modifying table elements
Only one element of a table is active at one time. The table name is
used to refer to the active element. An index cannot be specified
for a table.
Searching The LOOKUP operation is specified differently for tables. Different
built-in functions are used for searching tables.
Note: You cannot define a table in a subprocedure.
The following can be used to search a table:

v The LOOKUP operation code
v The %TLOOKUP built-in function
v The %TLOOKUPLT built-in function
v The %TLOOKUPLE built-in function
v The %TLOOKUPGT built-in function
v The %TLOOKUPGE built-in function
For more information about the LOOKUP operation code, see:

v “LOOKUP with One Table”
v “LOOKUP with Two Tables”
For more information about the %TLOOKUPxx built-in functions, see

“%TLOOKUPxx (Look Up a Table Element)” on page 513.
LOOKUP with One Table

When a single table is searched, factor 1, factor 2, and at least one resulting
indicator must be specified. Conditioning indicators (specified in positions 7
through 11) can also be used.
Whenever a table element is found that satisfies the type of search being made
(equal, high, low), that table element is made the current element for the table. If
the search is not successful, the previous current element remains the current
element.
Before a first successful LOOKUP, the first element is the current element.
Resulting indicators reflect the result of the search. If the indicator is on, reflecting
a successful search, the element satisfying the search is the current element.
LOOKUP with Two Tables

When two tables are used in a search, only one is actually searched. When the
search condition (high, low, equal) is satisfied, the corresponding elements are
made available for use.

Tables
Factor 1 must contain the search argument, and factor 2 must contain the name of
the table to be searched. The result field must name the table from which data is
also made available for use. A resulting indicator must also be used. Control level
and conditioning indicators can be specified in positions 7 through 11, if needed.
The two tables used should have the same number of entries. If the table that is
searched contains more elements than the second table, it is possible to satisfy the
search condition. However, there might not be an element in the second table that
corresponds to the element found in the search table. Undesirable results can occur.
Note: If you specify a table name in an operation other than LOOKUP before a
successful LOOKUP occurs, the table is set to its first element.
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...
C* The LOOKUP operation searches TABEMP for an entry that is equal to
C* the contents of the field named EMPNUM. If an equal entry is
C* found in TABEMP, indicator 09 is set on, and the TABEMP entry and
C* its related entry in TABPAY are made the current elements.
C EMPNUM LOOKUP TABEMP TABPAY 09
C* If indicator 09 is set on, the contents of the field named
C* HRSWKD are multiplied by the value of the current element of
C* TABPAY.
C IF *IN09
C HRSWKD MULT(H) TABPAY AMT 6 2
C ENDIF
Figure 77. Searching for an Equal Entry
Specifying the Table Element Found in a LOOKUP Operation

Whenever a table name is used in an operation other than LOOKUP, the table
name actually refers to the data retrieved by the last successful search. Therefore,
when the table name is specified in this fashion, elements from a table can be used
in calculation operations.
If the table is used as factor 1 in a LOOKUP operation, the current element is used
as the search argument. In this way an element from a table can itself become a
search argument.
The table can also be used as the result field in operations other than the LOOKUP
operation. In this case the value of the current element is changed by the
calculation specification. In this way the contents of the table can be modified by
calculation operations (see Figure 78 on page 165).

Tables
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...
C ARGMNT LOOKUP TABLEA 20
C* If element is found multiply by 1.5
C* If the contents of the entire table before the MULT operation
C* were 1323.5, -7.8, and 113.4 and the value of ARGMNT is -7.8,
C* then the second element is the current element.
C* After the MULT operation, the entire table now has the
C* following value: 1323.5, -11.7, and 113.4.
C* Note that only the second element has changed since that was
C* the current element, set by the LOOKUP.
C IF *IN20
C TABLEA MULT 1.5 TABLEA
C ENDIF
Figure 78. Specifying the Table Element Found in LOOKUP Operations

Tables

Chapter 10. Data Types and Data Formats
This chapter describes the data types supported by RPG IV and their special
characteristics. The supported data types are:
v Character Format
v Numeric Data Type
v Graphic Format
v UCS-2 Format
v Date Data Type
v Time Data Type
v Timestamp Data Type
v Object Data Type
v Basing Pointer Data Type
v Procedure Pointer Data Type
In addition, some of the data types allow different data formats. This chapter
describes the difference between internal and external data formats, describes each
format, and how to specify them.
Internal and External Formats

Numeric, character, date, time, and timestamp fields have an internal format that is
independent of the external format. The internal format is the way the data is
stored in the program. The external format is the way the data is stored in files.
You need to be aware of the internal format when:

v Passing parameters by reference
v Overlaying subfields in data structures
In addition, you may want to consider the internal format of numeric fields, when
the run-time performance of arithmetic operations is important. For more
information, see “Performance Considerations” on page 382.
There is a default internal and external format for numeric and date-time data
types. You can specify an internal format for a specific field on a definition
specification. Similarly, you can specify an external format for a program-described
field on the corresponding input or output specification.
For fields in an externally described file, the external data format is specified in the
data description specifications in position 35. You cannot change the external
format of externally described fields, with one exception. If you specify
EXTBININT on a control specification, any binary field with zero decimal positions
will be treated as having an integer external format.
For subfields in externally described data structures, the data formats specified in
the external description are used as the internal formats of the subfields by the
compiler.

Internal Format
The default internal format for numeric standalone fields is packed-decimal. The
default internal format for numeric data structure subfields is zoned-decimal. To
specify a different internal format, specify the format desired in position 40 on the
definition specification for the field or subfield.
The default format for date, time, and timestamp fields is *ISO. In general, it is
recommended that you use the default ISO internal format, especially if you have
a mixture of external format types.
For date, time, and timestamp fields, you can use the DATFMT and TIMFMT
keywords on the control specification to change the default internal format, if
desired, for all date-time fields in the program. You can use the DATFMT or
TIMFMT keyword on a definition specification to override the default internal
format of an individual date-time field.
External Format
If you have numeric, character, or date-time fields in program-described files, you
can specify their external format.
The external format does not affect the way in which a field is processed.
However, you may be able to improve performance of arithmetic operations,
depending on the internal format specified. For more information, see
“Performance Considerations” on page 382.
The following table shows how to specify the external format of

program-described fields. For more information on each format type, see the
appropriate section in the remainder of this chapter.
Table 11. Entries and Locations for Specifying External Formats
Type of Field Specification Using
Input Input Position 36
Output Output Position 52
Array or Table Definition EXTFMT keyword
Specifying an External Format for a Numeric Field

For any of the fields in Table 11, specify one of the following valid external
numeric formats:
B Binary
F Float
I Integer
L Left sign
P Packed decimal
R Right sign
S Zoned decimal
U Unsigned
The default external format for float numeric data is called the external display
representation. The format for 4-byte float data is:

+n.nnnnnnnE+ee,
where + represents the sign (+ or -)
n represents digits in the mantissa
e represents digits in the exponent
The format for 8-byte float data is:

+n.nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnE+eee
Note that a 4-byte float value occupies 14 positions and an 8-byte float value
occupies 23 positions.
For numeric data other than float, the default external format is zoned decimal.
The external format for compile-time arrays and tables must be zoned-decimal,
left-sign or right-sign.
For float compile-time arrays and tables, the compile-time data is specified as
either a numeric literal or a float literal. Each element of a 4-byte float array
requires 14 positions in the source record; each element of an 8-byte float array
requires 23 positions.
Non-float numeric fields defined on input specifications, calculation specifications,

or output specifications with no corresponding definition on a definition
specification are stored internally in packed-decimal format.
Specifying an External Format for a Character, Graphic, or UCS-2

Field
For any of the input and output fields in Table 11 on page 168, specify one of the
following valid external data formats:
A Character (valid for character and indicator data)
N Indicator (valid for character and indicator data)
G Graphic (valid for graphic data)
C UCS-2 (valid for UCS-2 data)
The EXTFMT keyword can be used to specify the data for an array or table in
UCS-2 format.
Specify the *VAR data attribute in positions 31-34 on an input specification and in
positions 53-80 on an output specification for variable-length character, graphic, or
UCS-2 data.
Specifying an External Format for a Date-Time Field

If you have date, time, and timestamp fields in program-described files, then you
must specify their external format. You can specify a default external format for all
date, time, and timestamp fields in a program-described file by using the DATFMT
and TIMFMT keywords on a file description specification. You can specify an
external format for a particular field as well. Specify the desired format in
positions 31-34 on an input specification. Specify the appropriate keyword and
format in positions 53-80 on an output specification.
For more information on each format type, see the appropriate section in the
remainder of this chapter.
Chapter 10. Data Types and Data Formats 169

Character, Graphic and UCS-2 Data
Character Data Type

The character data type represents character values and may have any of the
following formats:
A Character
N Indicator
G Graphic
C UCS-2
Character data may contain one or more single-byte or double-byte characters,

depending on the format specified. Character, graphic, and UCS-2 fields can also
have either a fixed or variable-length format. The following table summarizes the
different character data-type formats.
Character Data Number of Bytes CCSID

Type
Character One or more single-byte characters assumed to be the graphic CCSID
that are fixed or variable in length related to the runtime job CCSID
Indicator One single-byte character that is assumed to be the graphic CCSID
fixed in length related to the runtime job CCSID
Graphic One or more double-byte 65535 or a CCSID with the
characters that are fixed or variable EBCDIC double-byte encoding
in length scheme (x’1200’)
UCS-2 One or more double-byte 13488 (UCS-2 version 2.0)
characters that are fixed or variable
in length
For information on the CCSIDs of character data, see “Conversion between

Character, Graphic and UCS-2 Data” on page 181.
Character Format
The fixed-length character format is one or more bytes long with a set length.
For information on the variable-length character format, see “Variable-Length

Character, Graphic and UCS-2 Formats” on page 173.
You define a character field by specifying A in the Data-Type entry of the

appropriate specification. You can also define one using the LIKE keyword on the
definition specification where the parameter is a character field.
The default initialization value is blanks.
Indicator Format
The indicator format is a special type of character data. Indicators are all one byte
long and can only contain the character values ’0’ (off) and ’1’ (on). They are
generally used to indicate the result of an operation or to condition (control) the
processing of an operation. The default value of indicators is ’0’.
You define an indicator field by specifying N in the Data-Type entry of the

appropriate specification. You can also define an indicator field using the LIKE

keyword on the definition specification where the parameter is an indicator field.
Indicator fields are also defined implicitly with the COMMIT keyword on the file
description specification.
A special set of predefined RPG IV indicators (*INxx) is also available. For a

description of these indicators, see Chapter 4, “RPG IV Indicators” on page 35.
The rules for defining indicator variables are:

v Indicators can be defined as standalone fields, subfields, prototyped parameters,
and procedure return values.
v If an indicator variable is defined as a prerun-time or compile-time array or
table, the initialization data must consist of only ’0’s and ’1’s.
Note: If an indicator contains a value other than ’0’ or ’1’ at runtime, the results
are unpredictable.
v If the keyword INZ is specified, the value must be one of ’0’, *OFF, ’1’, or *ON.
v The keyword VARYING cannot be specified for an indicator field.
The rules for using indicator variables are:

v The default initialization value for indicator fields is ’0’.
v Operation code CLEAR sets an indicator variable to ’0’.
v Blank-after function applied to an indicator variable sets it to ’0’.
v If an array of indicators is specified as the result of a MOVEA(P) operation, the
padding character is ’0’.
v Indicators are implicitly defined with ALTSEQ(*NONE). This means that the
alternate collating sequence is not used for comparisons involving indicators.
v Indicators may be used as key-fields where the external key is a character of
length 1.
Graphic Format
The graphic format is a character string where each character is represented by 2
bytes.
Fields defined as graphic data do not contain shift-out (SO) or shift-in (SI)
characters. The difference between single byte character and double byte graphic
data is shown in the following figure:

1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte

Single-byte
data
1 char 1 char 1 char 1 char
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte

Graphic
data
1 graphic char 1 graphic char
Figure 79. Comparing Single-byte and graphic data
The length of a graphic field, in bytes, is two times the number of graphic
characters in the field.
The fixed-length graphic format is a character string with a set length where each
character is represented by 2 bytes.
For information on the variable-length graphic format, see “Variable-Length

You define a graphic field by specifying G in the Data-Type entry of the

appropriate specification. You can also define one using the LIKE keyword on the
definition specification where the parameter is a graphic field.
The default initialization value for graphic data is X'4040'. The value of *HIVAL is
X'FFFF', and the value of *LOVAL is X'0000'.
UCS-2 Format
The Universal Character Set (UCS-2) format is a character string where each
character is represented by 2 bytes. This character set can encode the characters for
many written languages.
Fields defined as UCS-2 data do not contain shift-out (SO) or shift-in (SI)
characters.
The length of a UCS-2 field, in bytes, is two times the number of UCS-2 characters
in the field.
The fixed-length UCS-2 format is a character string with a set length where each
character is represented by 2 bytes.
For information on the variable-length UCS-2 format, see “Variable-Length

You define a UCS-2 field by specifying C in the Data-Type entry of the appropriate
specification. You can also define one using the LIKE keyword on the definition
specification where the parameter is a UCS-2 field.
The default initialization value for UCS-2 data is X'0020'. The value of *HIVAL is
X'FFFF', *LOVAL is X'0000', and the value of *BLANKS is X'0020'.

For more information on the UCS-2 format, see the iSeries Information Center
globalization topic.
Variable-Length Character, Graphic and UCS-2 Formats

Variable-length character fields have a declared maximum length and a current
length that can vary while a program is running. The length is measured in single
bytes for the character format and in double bytes for the graphic and UCS-2
formats. The storage allocated for variable-length character fields is 2 bytes longer
than the declared maximum length. The leftmost 2 bytes are an unsigned integer
field containing the current length in characters, graphic characters or UCS-2
characters. The actual character data starts at the third byte of the variable-length
field. Figure 80 shows how variable-length character fields are stored:
current character-data
length
UNS(5) CHAR(N)
N = declared maximum length
2 + N = total number of bytes
Figure 80. Character Fields with Variable-Length Format
Figure 81 shows how variable-length graphic fields are stored. UCS-2 fields are
stored similarly.
current graphic-data
length
UNS(5) GRAPHIC(N)
N = declared maximum length = number of double bytes
2 + 2(N) = total number of bytes
Figure 81. Graphic Fields with Variable-Length Format
Note: Only the data up to and including the current length is significant.
You define a variable-length character data field by specifying A (character), G

(graphic), or C (UCS-2) and the keyword VARYING on a definition specification. It
can also be defined using the LIKE keyword on a definition specification where the
parameter is a variable-length character field.
You can refer to external variable-length fields, on an input or output specification,

with the *VAR data attribute.
A variable-length field is initialized by default to have a current length of zero.
For examples of using variable-length fields, see:

v “Using Variable-Length Fields” on page 176
v “%LEN (Get or Set Length)” on page 476
v “%CHAR (Convert to Character Data)” on page 444
v “%REPLACE (Replace Character String)” on page 493.

Rules for Variable-Length Character, Graphic, and UCS-2
Formats
The following rules apply when defining variable-length fields:
v The declared length of the field can be from 1 to 65535 single-byte characters
and from 1 to 16383 double-byte graphic or UCS-2 characters.
v The current length may be any value from 0 to the maximum declared length
for the field.
v The field may be initialized using keyword INZ. The initial value is the exact
value specified and the initial length of the field is the length of the initial value.
The field is padded with blanks for initialization, but the blanks are not included
in the length.
v In all cases except subfields defined using positional notation, the length entry
(positions 33-39 on the definition specifications) contains the maximum length of
the field not including the 2-byte length.
v For subfields defined using positional notation, the length includes the 2-byte
length. As a result, a variable-length subfield may be 32769 single bytes long or
16384 double bytes long for an unnamed data structure.
v The keyword VARYING cannot be specified for a data structure.
v For variable-length prerun-time arrays, the initialization data in the file is stored
in variable format, including the 2-byte length prefix.
v Since prerun-time array data is read from a file and files have a maximum
record length of 32766, variable-length prerun-time arrays have a maximum size
of 32764 single-byte characters, or 16382 double-byte graphic or UCS-2
characters.
v A variable-length array or table may be defined with compile-time data. The
trailing blanks in the field of data are not significant. The length of the data is
the position of the last non-blank character in the field. This is different from
prerun-time initialization since the length prefix cannot be stored in
compile-time data.
v *LIKE DEFINE cannot be used to define a field like a variable-length field.
The following is an example of defining variable-length character fields:

*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... *

DName+++++++++++ETDsFrom+++To/L+++IDc.Functions++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
* Standalone fields:
D var5 S 5A VARYING
D var10 S 10A VARYING INZ(’0123456789’)
D max_len_a S 32767A VARYING
* Prerun-time array:
D arr1 S 100A VARYING FROMFILE(dataf)
* Data structure subfields:
D ds1 DS
* Subfield defined with length notation:
D sf1_5 5A VARYING
D sf2_10 10A VARYING INZ(’0123456789’)
* Subfield defined using positional notation: A(5)VAR
D sf4_5 101 107A VARYING
* Subfields showing internal representation of varying:
D sf7_25 100A VARYING
D sf7_len 5I 0 OVERLAY(sf7_25:1)
D sf7_data 100A OVERLAY(sf7_25:3)
* Procedure prototype
D Replace PR 32765A VARYING
D String 32765A CONSTANT VARYING OPTIONS(*VARSIZE)
D FromStr 32765A CONSTANT VARYING OPTIONS(*VARSIZE)
D ToStr 32765A CONSTANT VARYING OPTIONS(*VARSIZE)
D StartPos 5U 0 VALUE
D Replaced 5U 0 OPTIONS(*OMIT)
Figure 82. Defining Variable-Length Character and UCS-2 Fields
The following is an example of defining variable-length graphic and UCS-2 fields:
* .. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+...

DName+++++++++++ETDsFrom+++To/L+++IDc.Functions++++++++++++++++
*-------------------------------------------------------------
* Graphic fields
*-------------------------------------------------------------
* Standalone fields:
D GRA20 S 20G VARYING
D MAX_LEN_G S 16383G VARYING
* Prerun-time array:
D ARR1 S 100G VARYING FROMFILE(DATAF)
* Data structure subfields:
D DS1 DS
* Subfield defined with length notation:
D SF3_20 20G VARYING
* Subfield defined using positional notation: G(10)VAR
D SF6_10 11 32G VARYING
*-------------------------------------------------------------
* UCS-2 fields
*-------------------------------------------------------------
D MAX_LEN_C S 16383C VARYING
D FLD1 S 5C INZ(%UCS2(’ABCDE’)) VARYING
D FLD2 S 2C INZ(U’01230123’) VARYING
D FLD3 S 2C INZ(*HIVAL) VARYING
D DS_C DS
D SF3_20_C 20C VARYING
* Subfield defined using positional notation: C(10)VAR
D SF_110_C 11 32C VARYING
Figure 83. Defining Variable-Length Graphic and UCS-2 Fields

Using Variable-Length Fields
The length part of a variable-length field represents the current length of the field
measured in characters. For character fields, this length also represents the current
length in bytes. For double-byte fields (graphic and UCS-2), this represents the
length of the field in double bytes. For example, a UCS-2 field with a current
length of 3 is 3 double-byte characters long, and 6 bytes long.
The following sections describe how to best use variable-length fields and how the
current length changes when using different operation codes.
How the Length of the Field is Set: When a variable-length field is initialized
using INZ, the initial length is set to be the length of the initialization value. For
example, if a character field of length 10 is initialized to the value ’ABC’, the initial
length is set to 3.
The EVAL operation changes the length of a variable-length target. For example, if
a character field of length 10 is assigned the value ’XY’, the length is set to 2.
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8

D fld 10A VARYING
* It does not matter what length ’fld’ has before the
* EVAL; after the EVAL, the length will be 2.
CL0N01Factor1+++++++Opcode(E)+Factor2+++++++Result++++++++Len++D+HiLoEq...
C EVAL fld = ’XY’
The DSPLY operation changes the length of a variable-length result field to the
length of the value entered by the user. For example, if the result field is a
character field of length 10, and the value entered by the user is ’12345’, the length
of the field will be set to 5 by the DSPLY operation.
The CLEAR operation changes the length of a variable-length field to 0.
The PARM operation sets the length of the result field to the length of the field in
Factor 2, if specified.
Fixed form operations MOVE, MOVEL, CAT, SUBST and XLATE do not change
the length of variable-length result fields. For example, if the value ’XYZ’ is moved
using MOVE to a variable-length character field of length 10 whose current length
is 2, the length of the field will not change and the data will be truncated.
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8

D fld 10A VARYING
* Assume fld has a length of 2 before the MOVEL.
* After the first MOVEL, it will have a value of ’XY’
C MOVEL ’XYZ’ fld
* After the second MOVEL, it will have the value ’1Y’
C MOVEL ’1’ fld
Note: The recommended use for MOVE and MOVEL, as opposed to EVAL, is for
changing the value of fields that you want to be temporarily fixed in length.

An example is building a report with columns whose size may vary from
day to day, but whose size should be fixed for any given run of the
program.
When a field is read from a file (Input specifications), the length of a

variable-length field is set to the length of the input data.
The ″Blank After″ function of Output specifications sets the length of a

variable-length field to 0.
You can set the length of a variable-length field yourself using the %LEN builtin
function on the left-hand-side of an EVAL operation.
How the Length of the Field is Used: When a variable-length field is used for its
value, its current length is used. For the following example, assume ’result’ is a
fixed length field with a length of 7.
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8

D fld 10A VARYING
* For the following EVAL operation
* Value of ’fld’ Length of ’fld’ ’result’
* -------------- --------------- -----------
* ’ABC’ 3 ’ABCxxx ’
* ’A’ 1 ’Axxx ’
* ’’ 0 ’xxx ’
* ’ABCDEFGHIJ’ 10 ’ABCDEFG’
C EVAL result = fld + ’xxx’
* For the following MOVE operation, assume ’result’
* has the value ’.......’ before the MOVE.
* Value of ’fld’ Length of ’fld’ ’result’
* -------------- --------------- -----------
* ’ABC’ 3 ’....ABC’
* ’A’ 1 ’......A’
* ’’ 0 ’.......’
* ’ABCDEFGHIJ’ 10 ’DEFGHIJ’
C MOVE fld result
Why You Should Use Variable-Length Fields: Using variable-length fields for
temporary variables can improve the performance of string operations, as well as
making your code easier to read since you do not have to save the current length
of the field in another variable for %SUBST, or use %TRIM to ignore the extra
blanks.
If a subprocedure is meant to handle string data of different lengths, using

variable-length fields for parameters and return values of prototyped procedures
can enhance both the performance and readability of your calls and your
procedures. You will not need to pass any length parameters or use CEEDOD
within your subrocedure to get the actual length of the parameter.
CVTOPT(*VARCHAR) and CVTOPT(*VARGRAPHIC)

The ILE RPG compiler can internally define variable-length character, graphic, or
UCS-2 fields from an externally described file or data structure as fixed-length
character fields. Although converting variable-length character, graphic, and UCS-2
fields to fixed-length format is not necessary, CVTOPT remains in the language to
support programs written before variable-length fields were supported.

You can convert variable-length fields by specifying *VARCHAR (for
variable-length character fields) or *VARGRAPHIC (for variable-length graphic or
UCS-2 fields) on the CVTOPT control specification keyword or command
parameter. When *VARCHAR or *VARGRAPHIC is not specified, or
*NOVARCHAR or *NOVARGRAPHIC is specified, variable-length fields are not
converted to fixed-length character and can be used in your ILE RPG program as
variable-length.
The following conditions apply when *VARCHAR or *VARGRAPHIC is specified:

v If a variable-length field is extracted from an externally described file or an
externally described data structure, it is declared in an ILE RPG program as a
fixed-length character field.
v For single-byte character fields, the length of the declared ILE RPG field is the
length of the DDS field plus 2 bytes.
v For DBCS-graphic data fields, the length of the declared ILE RPG field is twice
the length of the DDS field plus 2 bytes.
v The two extra bytes in the ILE RPG field contain a unsigned integer number
which represents the current length of the variable-length field. Figure 84 shows
the ILE RPG field length of variable-length fields.
v For variable-length graphic fields defined as fixed-length character fields, the
length is double the number of graphic characters.
Single-byte character fields:
length character-data
UNS(5) CHAR(N)
N = declared length in DDS
2 + N = field length
Graphic data type fields:
length graphic-data
UNS(5) CHAR(2(N))
N = declared length in DDS = number of double bytes
2 + 2(N) = field length
Figure 84. ILE RPG Field Length of Converted Variable-Length Fields
v Your ILE RPG program can perform any valid character calculation operations
on the declared fixed-length field. However, because of the structure of the field,
the first two bytes of the field must contain valid unsigned integer data when
the field is written to a file. An I/O exception error will occur for an output
operation if the first two bytes of the field contain invalid field-length data.
v Control-level indicators, match field entries, and field indicators are not allowed
on an input specification if the input field is a variable-length field from an
externally described input file.

v Sequential-within-limits processing is not allowed when a file contains
variable-length key fields.
v Keyed operations are not allowed when factor 1 of a keyed operation
corresponds to a variable-length key field in an externally described file.
v If you choose to selectively output certain fields in a record and the
variable-length field is either not specified on the output specification or is
ignored in the ILE RPG program, the ILE RPG compiler will place a default
value in the output buffer of the newly added record. The default is 0 in the first
two bytes and blanks in all of the remaining bytes.
v If you want to change converted variable-length fields, ensure that the current
field length is correct. One way to do this is:
1. Define a data structure with the variable-length field name as a subfield
name.
2. Define a 5-digit unsigned integer subfield overlaying the beginning of the
field, and define an N-byte character subfield overlaying the field starting at
position 3.
3. Update the field.
Alternatively, you can move another variable-length field left-aligned into the
field. An example of how to change a converted variable-length field in an ILE
RPG program follows.

*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+..
A*
A* File MASTER contains a variable-length field
A*
AAN01N02N03T.Name++++++Rlen++TDpBLinPosFunctions+++++++++++++++++++++
A*
A R REC
A FLDVAR 100 VARLEN
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+.. *
*
* Specify the CVTOPT(*VARCHAR) keyword on a control
* specification or compile the ILE RPG program with
* CVTOPT(*VARCHAR) on the command.
*
HKeywords++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
*
H CVTOPT(*VARCHAR)
*
* Externally described file name is MASTER.
*
*
FMASTER UF E DISK
*
* FLDVAR is a variable-length field defined in DDS with
* a DDS length of 100. Notice that the RPG field length
* is 102.
*
*
D DS
D FLDVAR 1 102
D FLDLEN 5U 0 OVERLAY(FLDVAR:1)
D FLDCHR 100 OVERLAY(FLDVAR:3)
*
* A character value is moved to the field FLDCHR.
* After the CHECKR operation, FLDLEN has a value of 5.
C READ MASTER LR
C MOVEL ’SALES’ FLDCHR
C ’ ’ CHECKR FLDCHR FLDLEN
C NLR UPDATE REC
Figure 85. Converting a Variable-Length Character Field
If you would like to use a converted variable-length graphic field, you can code a
2-byte unsigned integer field to hold the length, and a graphic subfield of length N
to hold the data portion of the field.

*
* Specify the CVTOPT(*VARGRAPHIC) keyword on a control
* specification or compile the ILE RPG program with
* CVTOPT(*VARGRAPHIC) on the command.
*
* The variable-length graphic field VGRAPH is declared in the
* DDS as length 3. This means the maximum length of the field
* is 3 double bytes, or 6 bytes. The total length of the field,
* counting the length portion, is 8 bytes.
*
*
D DS
DVGRAPH 8
D VLEN 4U 0 OVERLAY(VGRAPH:1)
D VDATA 3G OVERLAY(VGRAPH:3)
*
* Assume GRPH is a fixed-length graphic field of length 2
* double bytes. Copy GRPH into VGRAPH and set the length of
* VGRAPH to 2.
*
C*
C MOVEL GRPH VDATA
C Z-ADD 2 VLEN
Figure 86. Converting a Variable-Length Graphic Field
Conversion between Character, Graphic and UCS-2 Data

Note: If graphic CCSIDs are ignored (CCSID(*GRAPH:*IGNORE) was specified on
the control specification or CCSID(*GRAPH) was not specified at all),
graphic data is not considered to have a CCSID and conversions are not
supported between graphic data and UCS-2 data.
Character, graphic, and UCS-2 data can have different CCSIDs (Coded Character
Set IDs). Conversion between these data types depends on the CCSID of the data.
CCSIDs of Data
The CCSID of character data is only considered when converting between
character and UCS-2 data or between character and graphic data (unless graphic
CCSIDs are being ignored).
When converting between character and graphic data, the CCSID of the character
data is assumed to be the graphic CCSID related to the job CCSID.
When converting between character and UCS-2 data, the CCSID of the character
data is assumed to be the mixed-byte CCSID related to the job CCSID.
The CCSID of UCS-2 data defaults to 13488. This default can be changed using the
CCSID(*UCS2) keyword on the Control specification. The CCSID for
program-described UCS-2 fields can be specified using the CCSID keyword on the
Definition specification. The CCSID for externally-described UCS-2 fields comes
from the external file.
Note: UCS-2 fields are defined in DDS by specifying a data type of G and a
CCSID of 13488.

The CCSID of graphic data defaults to the value specified in the CCSID(*GRAPH)
keyword on the Control specification. The CCSID for program-described graphic
fields can be specified using the CCSID keyword on the Definition specification.
The CCSID for externally-described graphic fields comes from the external file.
Conversions
Conversion between character, graphic, and UCS-2 data is supported using the
MOVE and MOVEL operations and the %CHAR, %GRAPH, and %UCS2 built-in
functions.
Additionally, graphic data and UCS-2 data can be converted from one CCSID to
another using the conversion operations and built-in functions, and also using
EVAL and when passing prototyped parameters.
Otherwise, UCS-2 fields, character fields and graphic fields, and UCS-2 fields or
graphic fields with different CCSIDs cannot be mixed in the same operation or
built-in function.
Conversion between character and double-byte graphic fields consists of adding or

removing shift-out and shift-in bracketing and possibly performing CCSID
conversion on the graphic data.
Alternate Collating Sequence

The alternate collating sequence applies only to single-byte character data.
Each character is represented internally by a hexadecimal value, which governs the

order (ascending or descending sequence) of the characters and is known as the
normal collating sequence. The alternate collating sequence function can be used to
alter the normal collating sequence. This function also can be used to allow two or
more characters to be considered equal.
Changing the Collating Sequence

Using an alternate collating sequence means modifying the collating sequence for
character match fields (file selection) and character comparisons. You specify that
an alternate collating sequence will be used by specifying the ALTSEQ keyword on
the control specification. The calculation operations affected by the alternate
collating sequence are ANDxx, COMP, CABxx, CASxx, DOU, DOUxx, DOW,
DOWxx, IF, IFxx, ORxx, WHEN, and WHENxx. This does not apply to graphic or
UCS-2 compare operations. LOOKUP and SORTA are affected only if you specify
ALTSEQ(*EXT). The characters are not permanently changed by the alternate
collating sequence, but are temporarily altered until the matching field or character
compare operation is completed.
Use the ALTSEQ(*NONE) keyword on the definition specification for a variable to

indicate that when the variable is being compared with other character data, the
normal collating sequence should always be used even if an alternate collating
sequence was defined.
Changing the collating sequence does not affect the LOOKUP and SORTA
operations (unless you specify ALTSEQ(*EXT)) or the hexadecimal values assigned
to the figurative constants *HIVAL and *LOVAL. However, changing the collating
sequence can affect the order of the values of *HIVAL and *LOVAL in the collating
sequence. Therefore, if you specify an alternate collating sequence in your program
and thereby cause a change in the order of the values of *HIVAL and *LOVAL,
undesirable results may occur.

Using an External Collating Sequence
To specify that the values in the SRTSEQ and LANGID command parameters or
control specification keywords should be used to determine the alternate collating
sequence, specify ALTSEQ(*EXT) on the control specification. For example, if
ALTSEQ(*EXT) is used, and SRTSEQ(*LANGIDSHR) and LANGID(*JOBRUN) are
specified, then when the program is run, the shared-weight table for the user
running the program will be used as the alternate collating sequence.
Since the LOOKUP and SORTA operations are affected by the alternate collating
sequence when ALTSEQ(*EXT) is specified, character compile-time arrays and
tables are sequence-checked using the alternate collating sequence. If the actual
collating sequence is not known until runtime, the array and table sequence cannot
be checked until runtime. This means that you could get a runtime error saying
that a compile-time array or table is out of sequence.
Pre-run arrays and tables are also sequence-checked using the alternate collating
sequence when ALTSEQ(*EXT) is specified.
Note: The preceding discussion does not apply for any arrays and tables defined
with ALTSEQ(*NONE) on the definition specification.
Specifying an Alternate Collating Sequence in Your Source

To specify that an alternate collating sequence is to be used, use the ALTSEQ(*SRC)
keyword on the control specification. If you use the **ALTSEQ, **CTDATA, and
**FTRANS keywords in the compile-time data section, the alternate-collating
sequence data may be entered anywhere following the source records. If you do
not use those keywords, the sequence data must follow the source records, and the
file translation records but precede any compile-time array data.
If a character is to be inserted between two consecutive characters, you must

specify every character that is altered by this insertion. For example, if the dollar
sign ($) is to be inserted between A and B, specify the changes for character B
onward.
See Appendix B, “EBCDIC Collating Sequence” on page 761 for the EBCDIC
character set.
Formatting the Alternate Collating Sequence Records

The changes to the collating sequence must be transcribed into the correct record
format so that they can be entered into the system. The alternate collating sequence
must be formatted as follows:
Record
Position Entry
1-6 ALTSEQ (This indicates to the system that the normal sequence is being
altered.)
11-12 Enter the hexadecimal value for the character whose normal sequence is
being changed.
13-14 Enter the hexadecimal value of the character replacing the character whose
normal sequence is being changed.

Record
Position Entry
15-18 All groups of four beginning with position 15 are used in the same manner
19-22 as positions 11 through 14. In the first two positions of a group enter the
23-26 hexadecimal value of the character to be replaced. In the last two positions
... enter the hexadecimal value of the character that replaces it.
77-80
The records that describe the alternate collating sequence must be preceded by a
record with ** ( = blank) in positions 1 through 3. The remaining positions in
this record can be used for comments.
HKeywords++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
H ALTSEQ(*SRC)
DFLD1 s 4A INZ(’abcd’)
DFLD2 s 4A INZ(’ABCD’)
**
ALTSEQ 81C182C283C384C4
Numeric Data Type

The numeric data type represents numeric values. Numeric data has one of the
following formats:
B Binary Format
F Float Format
I Integer Format
P Packed-Decimal Format
U Unsigned Format
Z Zoned-Decimal Format
The default initialization value for numeric fields is zero.
Binary Format
Binary format means that the sign (positive or negative) is in the leftmost bit of the
field and the numeric value is in the remaining bits of the field. Positive numbers
have a zero in the sign bit; negative numbers have a one in the sign bit and are in
twos complement form. A binary field can be from one to nine digits in length and
can be defined with decimal positions. If the length of the field is from one to four
digits, the compiler assumes a binary field length of 2 bytes. If the length of the
field is from five to nine digits, the compiler assumes a binary field length of 4
bytes.
Processing of a Program-Described Binary Input Field

Every input field read in binary format is assigned a field length (number of
digits) by the compiler. A length of 4 is assigned to a 2-byte binary field; a length
of 9 is assigned to a 4-byte binary field, if the field is not defined elsewhere in the
program. Because of these length restrictions, the highest decimal value that can be
assigned to a 2-byte binary field is 9999 and the highest decimal value that can be
assigned to a 4-byte binary field is 999 999 999. In general, a binary field of n digits
can have a maximum value of n 9s. This discussion assumes zero decimal
positions.

Numeric Data Type
Because a 2-byte field in binary format is converted by the compiler to a decimal
field with 1 to 4 digits, the input value may be too large. If it is, the leftmost digit
of the number is dropped. For example, if a four digit binary input field has a
binary value of hexadecimal 6000, the compiler converts this to 24 576 in decimal.
The 2 is dropped and the result is 4576. Similarly, the input value may be too large
for a 4-byte field in binary format. If the binary fields have zero (0) decimal
positions, then you can avoid this conversion problem by defining integer fields
instead of binary fields.
Note: Binary input fields cannot be defined as match or control fields.
Processing of an Externally Described Binary Input Field

The number of digits of a binary field is exactly the same as the length in the DDS
description. For example, if you define a binary field in your DDS specification as
having 7 digits and 0 decimal positions, the RPG IVcompiler handles the data like
this:
1. The field is defined as a 4-byte binary field in the input specification
2. A Packed(7,0) field is generated for the field in the RPG IV program.
If you want to retain the complete binary field information, redefine the field as a
binary subfield in a data structure or as a binary stand-alone field.
Note that an externally described binary field may have a value outside of the
range allowed by RPG IV binary fields. If the externally described binary field has
zero (0) decimal positions then you can avoid this problem. To do so, you define
the externally described binary field on a definition specification and specify the
EXTBININT keyword on the control specification. This will change the external
format of the externally described field to that of a signed integer.
Float Format
The float format consists of two parts:
v the mantissa and
v the exponent.
The value of a floating-point field is the result of multiplying the mantissa by 10

raised to the power of the exponent. For example, if 1.2345 is the mantissa and 5 is
the exponent then the value of the floating-point field is:
1.2345 * (10 ** 5) = 123450
You define a floating-point field by specifying F in the data type entry of the
appropriate specification.
The decimal positions must be left blank. However, floating-point fields are
considered to have decimal positions. As a result, float variables may not be used
in any place where a numeric value without decimal places is required, such as an
array index, do loop index, etc.
The default initialization and CLEAR value for a floating point field is 0E0.
The length of a floating point field is defined in terms of the number of bytes. It
must be specified as either 4 or 8 bytes. The range of values allowed for a
floating-point field are:
4-byte float (8 digits) -3.4028235E+38 to -1.1754944E-38, 0.0E+0,
+1.1754944E-38 to +3.4028235E+38

Numeric Data Type
8-byte float (16 digits) -1.797693134862315E+308 to -2.225073858507201E-
308, 0.0E+0, +2.225073858507201E-308 to
+1.797693134862315E+308
Note: Float variables conform to the IEEE standard as supported by the OS/400
operating system. Since float variables are intended to represent ″scientific″
values, a numeric value stored in a float variable may not represent the
exact same value as it would in a packed variable. Float should not be used
when you need to represent numbers exactly to a specific number of
decimal places, such as monetary amounts.
External Display Representation of a Floating-Point Field

See “Specifying an External Format for a Numeric Field” on page 168 for a general
description of external display representation.
The external display representation of float values applies for the following:
v Output of float data with Data-Format entry blank.
v Input of float data with Data-Format entry blank.
v External format of compile-time and prerun-time arrays and tables (when
keyword EXTFMT is omitted).
v Display and input of float values using operation code DSPLY.
v Output of float values on a dump listing.
v Result of built-in function %EDITFLT.
Output: When outputting float values, the external representation uses a format
similar to float literals, except that:
v Values are always written with the character E and the signs for both mantissa
and exponent.
v Values are either 14 or 23 characters long (for 4F and 8F respectively).
v Values are normalized. That is, the decimal point immediately follows the most
significant digit.
v The decimal separator character is either period or comma depending on the
parameter for Control Specification keyword DECEDIT.
Here are some examples of how float values are presented:
+1.2345678E-23
-8.2745739E+03
-5.722748027467392E-123
+1,2857638E+14 if DECEDIT(’,’) is specified
Input: When inputting float values, the value is specified just like a float literal.
The value does not have to be normalized or adjusted in the field. When float
values are defined as array/table initialization data, they are specified in fields
either 14 or 23 characters long (for 4F and 8F respectively).
Note the following about float fields:

v Alignment of float fields may be desired to improve the performance of
accessing float subfields. You can use the ALIGN keyword to align float
subfields defined on a definition specification. 4-byte float subfields are aligned
on a 4-byte boundary and 8-byte float subfields are aligned along a 8-byte
boundary. For more information on aligning float subfields, see “ALIGN” on
page 288.

Numeric Data Type
v Length adjustment is not allowed when the LIKE keyword is used to define a
field like a float field.
v Float input fields cannot be defined as match or control fields.
Integer Format
The integer format is similar to the binary format with two exceptions:
v The integer format allows the full range of binary values
v The number of decimal positions for an integer field is always zero.
You define an integer field by specifying I in the Data-Type entry of the

appropriate specification. You can also define an integer field using the LIKE
keyword on a definition specification where the parameter is an integer field.
The length of an integer field is defined in terms of number of digits; it can be 3, 5,

10, or 20 digits long. A 3-digit field takes up 1 byte of storage; a 5-digit field takes
up 2 bytes of storage; a 10-digit field takes up 4 bytes; a 20-digit field takes up 8
bytes. The range of values allowed for an integer field depends on its length.
Field length Range of Allowed Values
3-digit integer -128 to 127
5-digit integer -32768 to 32767
10-digit integer -2147483648 to 2147483647
20-digit integer -9223372036854775808 to 9223372036854775807
Note the following about integer fields:

v Alignment of integer fields may be desired to improve the performance of
accessing integer subfields. You can use the ALIGN keyword to align integer
subfields defined on a definition specification.
2-byte integer subfields are aligned on a 2-byte boundary; 4-byte integer
subfields are aligned along a 4-byte boundary; 8-byte integer subfields are
aligned along an 8-byte boundary. For more information on aligning integer
subfields, see “ALIGN” on page 288.
v If the LIKE keyword is used to define a field like an integer field, the Length
entry may contain a length adjustment in terms of number of digits. The
adjustment value must be such that the resulting number of digits for the field is
3, 5, 10, or 20.
v Integer input fields cannot be defined as match or control fields.
Packed-Decimal Format
Packed-decimal format means that each byte of storage (except for the low order
byte) can contain two decimal numbers. The low-order byte contains one digit in
the leftmost portion and the sign (positive or negative) in the rightmost portion.
The standard signs are used: hexadecimal F for positive numbers and hexadecimal
D for negative numbers. The packed-decimal format looks like this:

Numeric Data Type
0 70 7
Digit Digit Digit Sign
Byte
Figure 87. Packed-Decimal Format
The sign portion of the low-order byte indicates whether the numeric value
represented in the digit portions is positive or negative. Figure 89 on page 192
shows what the decimal number 21544 looks like in packed-decimal format.
Determining the Digit Length of a Packed-Decimal Field

Use the following formula to find the length in digits of a packed-decimal field:
Number of digits = 2n − 1,
...where n = number of packed input record positions used.
| This formula gives you the maximum number of digits you can represent in
| packed-decimal format; the upper limit is 31.
| Packed fields can be up to 16 bytes long. Table 12 shows the packed equivalents
| for zoned-decimal fields up to 31 digits long:
| Table 12. Packed Equivalents for Zoned-Decimal Fields up to 31 Digits Long
| Zoned-Decimal Number of Bytes
| Length in Digits Used in Packed-Decimal Field
| 1 1
| 2, 3 2
| 4, 5 3
|| .
.
.
.
| . .
|
| 28, 29 15
| 30 16
| 31 16
|
| For example, an input field read in packed-decimal format has a length of five
| bytes (as specified on the input or definition specifications). The number of digits
| in this field equals 2(5) − 1 or 9. Therefore, when the field is used in the calculation
| specifications, the result field must be nine positions long. The “PACKEVEN” on
| page 315 keyword on the definition specification can be used to indicate which of
| the two possible sizes you want when you specify a packed subfield using from
| and to positions rather than number of digits.
Unsigned Format
The unsigned integer format is like the integer format except that the range of
values does not include negative numbers. You should use the unsigned format
only when non-negative integer data is expected.
You define an unsigned field by specifying U in the Data-Type entry of the

appropriate specification. You can also define an unsigned field using the LIKE
keyword on the definition specification where the parameter is an unsigned field.

Numeric Data Type
The length of an unsigned field is defined in terms of number of digits; it can be 3,
5, 10, or 20 digits long. A 3-digit field takes up 1 byte of storage; a 5-digit field
takes up 2 bytes of storage; a 10-digit field takes up 4 bytes; a 20-digit field takes
up 8 bytes. The range of values allowed for an unsigned field depends on its
length.
Field length Range of Allowed Values
3-digit unsigned 0 to 255
For other considerations regarding the use of unsigned fields, including

information on alignment, see “Integer Format” on page 187.
Zoned-Decimal Format
Zoned-decimal format means that each byte of storage can contain one digit or one
character. In the zoned-decimal format, each byte of storage is divided into two
portions: a 4-bit zone portion and a 4-bit digit portion. The zoned-decimal format
looks like this:
0 70 7 0 70 7 0 7
Zone Digit Zone Digit Zone Digit Zone Digit Zone Digit
Byte
1 1 0 1 = Minus sign (hex D)
1 1 1 1 = Plus sign (hex F)
Figure 88. Zoned-Decimal Format
The zone portion of the low-order byte indicates the sign (positive or negative) of
the decimal number. The standard signs are used: hexadecimal F for positive
numbers and hexadecimal D for negative numbers. In zoned-decimal format, each
digit in a decimal number includes a zone portion; however, only the low-order
zone portion serves as the sign. Figure 89 on page 192 shows what the number
21544 looks like in zoned-decimal format.
You must consider the change in field length when coding the end position in
positions 40 through 43 of the Output specifications and the field is to be output in
packed format. To find the length of the field after it has been packed, use the
following formula:
n
Field length = + 1
2
. . . where n = number of digits in the zoned decimal field.
(Any remainder from the division is ignored.)

Numeric Data Type
You can specify an alternative sign format for zoned-decimal format. In the
alternative sign format, the numeric field is immediately preceded or followed by a
+ or − sign. A plus sign is a hexadecimal 4E, and a minus sign is a hexadecimal 60.
When an alternative sign format is specified, the field length (specified on the
input specification) must include an additional position for the sign. For example,
if a field is 5 digits long and the alternative sign format is specified, a field length
of 6 positions must be specified.
Considerations for Using Numeric Formats

Keep in mind the following when defining numeric fields:
v When coding the end position in positions 47 through 51 of the output
specifications, be sure to use the external format when calculating the number of
bytes to be occupied by the output field. For example, a packed field with 5
digits is stored in 3 bytes, but when output in zoned format, it requires 5 bytes.
When output in integer format, it only requires 2 bytes.
v If you move a character field to a zoned numeric, the sign of the character field
is fixed to zoned positive or zoned negative. The zoned portion of the other
bytes will be forced to ’F’. However, if the digit portion of one of the bytes in
the character field does not contain a valid digit a decimal data error will occur.
v When numeric fields are written out with no editing, the sign is not printed as a
separate character; the last digit of the number will include the sign. This can
produce surprising results; for example, when -625 is written out, the zoned
decimal value is X'F6F2D5' which appears as 62N.
Guidelines for Choosing the Numeric Format for a Field

You should specify the integer or unsigned format for fields when:
v Performance of arithmetic is important
With certain arithmetic operations, it may be important that the value used be
an integer. Some examples where performance may be improved include array
index computations and arguments for the built-in function %SUBST.
v Interacting with routines written in other languages that support an integer data
type, such as ILE C.
v Using fields in file feedback areas that are defined as integer and that may
contain values above 9999 or 999999999.
Packed, zoned, and binary formats should be specified for fields when:
v Using values that have implied decimal positions, such currency values
v Manipulating values having more than 19 digits
v Ensuring a specific number of digits for a field is important
Float format should be specified for fields when:

v The same variable is needed to hold very small and/or very large values that
cannot be represented in packed or zoned values.
Note: Overflow is more likely to occur with arithmetic operations performed using
the integer or unsigned format, especially when integer arithmetic occurs in
free-form expressions. This is because the intermediate results are kept in
integer or unsigned format rather than a temporary decimal field of
sufficient size.

Numeric Data Type
Representation of Numeric Formats
Figure 89 on page 192 shows what the decimal number 21544 looks like in various
formats.

Numeric Data Type
Packed Decimal Format:

Positive Sign
2 1 5 4 4
0010 0001 0101 0010 0010 1111
3 bytes
Zoned Decimal Format:

Zone Zone Zone Zone Positive Sign
2 1 5 4 4
1111 0010 1111 0001 1111 0101 1111 0100 1111 0100
5 bytes
Binary Format: 16384

+ 4096
Positive + 1024
Sign + 32
+ 8
-------------
21544
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0
4 bytes
Integer (Signed) Format:

16384
+ 4096
Positive + 1024
+ 32
Sign + 8
-------------
21544
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0
2 bytes
Unsigned Format:
16384
+ 4096
+ 1024
+ 32
+ 8
-------------
21544
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0
2 bytes
Figure 89. Representation of the Number 21544 in each of the Numeric Formats
Note the following about the representations in the figure.

Numeric Data Type
v To obtain the numeric value of a positive binary or integer number, unsigned
number, add the values of the bits that are on (1), but do not include the sign bit
(if present). For an unsigned number, add the values of the bits that are on,
including the leftmost bit.
v The value 21544 cannot be represented in a 2-byte binary field even though it
only uses bits in the low-order two bytes. A 2-byte binary field can only hold up
to 4 digits, and 21544 has 5 digits.
Figure 90 shows the number -21544 in integer format.
Negative Sign
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0
2 bytes
Figure 90. Integer Representation of the Number -21544
Date Data Type

Date fields have a predetermined size and format. They can be defined on the
definition specification. Leading and trailing zeros are required for all date data.
Date constants or variables used in comparisons or assignments do not have to be

in the same format or use the same separators. Also, dates used for I/O operations
such as input fields, output fields or key fields are also converted (if required) to
the necessary format for the operation.
The default internal format for date variables is *ISO. This default internal format
can be overridden globally by the control specification keyword DATFMT and
individually by the definition specification keyword DATFMT.
The hierarchy used when determining the internal date format and separator for a
date field is
1. From the DATFMT keyword specified on the definition specification
2. From the DATFMT keyword specified on the control specification
3. *ISO
There are three kinds of date data formats, depending on the range of years that
can be represented. This leads to the possibility of a date overflow or underflow
condition occurring when the result of an operation is a date outside the valid
range for the target field. The formats and ranges are as follows:
Number of Digits in Year Range of Years

2 (*YMD, *DMY, *MDY, *JUL) 1940 to 2039
3 (*CYMD, *CDMY, *CMDY) 1900 to 2899
4 (*ISO, *USA, *EUR, *JIS, *LONGJUL) 0001 to 9999
Table 13 on page 194 lists the RPG-defined formats for date data and their
separators.
For examples on how to code date fields, see the examples in:

Date Data Type
v “Date Operations” on page 393
v “Moving Date-Time Data” on page 405
v “ADDDUR (Add Duration)” on page 526
v “MOVE (Move)” on page 629
v “EXTRCT (Extract Date/Time/Timestamp)” on page 598
v “SUBDUR (Subtract Duration)” on page 726
v “TEST (Test Date/Time/Timestamp)” on page 733
Table 13. RPG-defined date formats and separators for Date data type
Format Description Format (Default Valid Separators Length Example
Name Separator)
2-Digit Year Formats
*MDY Month/Day/Year mm/dd/yy / - . , ’&’ 8 01/15/96
*DMY Day/Month/Year dd/mm/yy / - . , ’&’ 8 15/01/96
*YMD Year/Month/Day yy/mm/dd / - . , ’&’ 8 96/01/15
*JUL Julian yy/ddd / - . , ’&’ 6 96/015
*ISO International Standards yyyy-mm-dd - 10 1996-01-15
Organization
*USA IBM USA Standard mm/dd/yyyy / 10 01/15/1996
*EUR IBM European Standard dd.mm.yyyy . 10 15.01.1996
*JIS Japanese Industrial yyyy-mm-dd - 10 1996-01-15
Standard Christian Era
Table 14 lists the *LOVAL, *HIVAL, and default values for all the RPG-defined date
formats.
Table 14. Date Values
Format name Description *LOVAL *HIVAL Default Value
*MDY Month/Day/Year 01/01/40 12/31/39 01/01/40
*DMY Day/Month/Year 01/01/40 31/12/39 01/01/40
*YMD Year/Month/Day 40/01/01 39/12/31 40/01/01
*JUL Julian 40/001 39/365 40/001
*ISO International Standards 0001-01-01 9999-12-31 0001-01-01
Organization
*USA IBM USA Standard 01/01/0001 12/31/9999 01/01/0001
*EUR IBM European Standard 01.01.0001 31.12.9999 01.01.0001
*JIS Japanese Industrial Standard 0001-01-01 9999-12-31 0001-01-01
Christian Era
Several formats are also supported for fields used by the MOVE, MOVEL, and
TEST operations only. This support is provided for compatibility with externally
defined values that are already in a 3-digit year format and the 4-digit year
*LONGJUL format. It also applies to the 2-digit year formats when *JOBRUN is
specified.

Date Data Type
*JOBRUN should be used when the field which it is describing is known to have
the attributes from the job. For instance, a 12-digit numeric result of a TIME
operation will be in the job date format.
Table 15 lists the valid externally defined date formats that can be used in Factor 1
of a MOVE, MOVEL, and TEST operation.
Table 15. Externally defined date formats and separators
Format Name Description Format (Default Valid Length Example
Separator) Separators
*JOBRUN1 Determined at runtime from the DATFMT, or DATSEP job values.
3-Digit Year Formats2
*CYMD Century cyy/mm/dd / - . , ’&’ 9 101/04/25
Year/Month/Day
*CMDY Century cmm/dd/yy / - . , ’&’ 9 104/25/01
Month/Day/Year
*CDMY Century cdd/mm/yy / - . , ’&’ 9 125/04/01
Day/Month/Year
*LONGJUL Long Julian yyyy/ddd / - . , ’&’ 8 2001/115
Notes:
1. *JOBRUN is valid only for character or numeric dates with a 2-digit year since the run-time job attribute for
DATFMT can only be *MDY, *YMD, *DMY or *JUL.
2. Valid values for the century character ’c’ are:
’c’ Years
-----------------------
0 1900-1999
1 2000-2099
. .
. .
. .
9 2800-2899
Separators
When coding a date format on a MOVE, MOVEL or TEST operation, separators are
optional for character fields. To indicate that there are no separators, specify the
format followed by a zero. For more information on how to code date formats
without separators see “MOVE (Move)” on page 629, “MOVEL (Move Left)” on
page 650 and “TEST (Test Date/Time/Timestamp)” on page 733.
Initialization
To initialize the Date field to the system date at runtime, specify INZ(*SYS) on the
definition specification. To initialize the Date field to the job date at runtime,
specify INZ(*JOB) on the definition specification. *SYS or *JOB cannot be used with
a field that is exported. The Date field can also be initialized to a literal, named
constant or figurative constant.
Note: Runtime initialization takes place after static intitialization.

Time Data Type
Time Data Type

Time fields have a predetermined size and format. They can be defined on the
definition specification. Leading and trailing zeros are required for all time data.
Time constants or variables used in comparisons or assignments do not have to be

in the same format or use the same separators. Also, times used for I/O operations
such as input fields, output fields or key fields are also converted (if required) to
the necessary format for the operation.
The default internal format for time variables is *ISO. This default internal format
can be overridden globally by the control specification keyword TIMFMT and
individually by the definition specification keyword TIMFMT.
The hierarchy used when determining the internal time format and separator for a
time field is
1. From the TIMFMT keyword specified on the definition specification
2. From the TIMFMT keyword specified on the control specification
3. *ISO
For examples on how to code time fields, see the examples in:
Table 16 shows the time formats supported and their separators.

Table 16. Time formats and separators for Time data type
RPG Description Format (Default Valid Length Example
Format Separator) Separators
Name
*HMS Hours:Minutes:Seconds hh:mm:ss :.,& 8 14:00:00
*ISO International Standards Organization hh.mm.ss . 8 14.00.00
*USA IBM USA Standard. AM and PM can be hh:mm AM or : 8 02:00 PM
any mix of upper and lower case. hh:mm PM
*EUR IBM European Standard hh.mm.ss . 8 14.00.00
*JIS Japanese Industrial Standard Christian Era hh:mm:ss : 8 14:00:00
Table 17 lists the *LOVAL, *HIVAL, and default values for all the time formats.
Table 17. Time Values
RPG Format Description *LOVAL *HIVAL Default Value
Name
*HMS Hours:Minutes:Seconds 00:00:00 24:00:00 00:00:00
*ISO International Standards Organization 00.00.00 24.00.00 00.00.00
*USA IBM USA Standard. AM and PM can be any 00:00 AM 12:00 AM 00:00 AM
mix of upper and lower case.

Time Data Type
Table 17. Time Values (continued)
RPG Format Description *LOVAL *HIVAL Default Value
Name
*EUR IBM European Standard 00.00.00 24.00.00 00.00.00
*JIS Japanese Industrial Standard Christian Era 00:00:00 24:00:00 00:00:00
Separators
When coding a time format on a MOVE, MOVEL or TEST operation, separators
are optional for character fields. To indicate that there are no separators, specify the
format followed by a zero. For more information on how to code time formats
without separators see “MOVE (Move)” on page 629.
Initialization
To initialize the Time field to the system time at runtime, specify INZ(*SYS) on the
definition specification. *SYS cannot be used with a field that is exported. The Time
field can also be initialized at runtime to a literal, named constant or figurative
constant.
*JOBRUN
A special value of *JOBRUN can be used in Factor 1 of a MOVE, MOVEL or TEST
operation. This indicates that the separator of the field being described is based on
the run-time job attributes, TIMSEP.
Timestamp Data Type

Timestamp fields have a predetermined size and format. They can be defined on
the definition specification. Timestamp data must be in the format
yyyy-mm-dd-hh.mm.ss.mmmmmm (length 26).
Microseconds (.mmmmmm) are optional for timestamp literals and if not provided
will be padded on the right with zeros. Leading zeros are required for all
timestamp data.
The default initialization value for a timestamp is midnight of January 1, 0001

(0001-01-01-00.00.00.000000). The *HIVAL value for a timestamp is
9999-12-31-24.00.00.000000. The *LOVAL value for timestamp is
0001-01-01-00.00.00.000000.
For examples on how to code timestamp fields, see the examples in

Separators
When coding the timestamp format on a MOVE, MOVEL or TEST operation,
separators are optional for character fields. To indicate that there are no separators,

Timestamp Data Type
specify *ISO0. For an example of how *ISO is used without separators see “TEST
(Test Date/Time/Timestamp)” on page 733.
Initialization
To initialize the Timestamp field to the system date at runtime, specify INZ(*SYS)
on the definition specification. *SYS cannot be used with a field that is exported.
The Timestamp field can also be initialized at runtime to a literal, named constant
or figurative constant.
Object Data Type

The object data type allows you to define a Java object. You specify the object data
type as follows:
* Variable MyString is a Java String object.
D MyString S O CLASS(*JAVA
D :’java.lang.String’)
or as follows:
D bdcreate PR O EXTPROC(*JAVA
D :’java.math.BigDecimal’
D :*CONSTRUCTOR)
In position 40, you specify data type O. In the keyword section, you specify the
CLASS keyword to indicate the class of the object. Specify *JAVA for the
environment, and the class name.
If the object is the return type of a Java constructor, the class of the returned object
is the same as the class of the method so you do not specify the CLASS keyword.
Instead, you specify the EXTPROC keyword with environment *JAVA, the class
name, and procedure name *CONSTRUCTOR.
An object cannot be based. It also cannot be a subfield of a data structure.
If an object is an array or table, it must be loaded at runtime. Pre-run and

compile-time arrays and tables of type Object are not allowed.
Every object is initialized to *NULL, which means that the object is not associated
with an instance of its class.
To change the contents of an object, you must use method calls. You cannot
directly access the storage used by the object.
Classes are resolved at runtime. The compiler does not check that a class exists or
that it is compatible with other objects.
Where You Can Specify an Object Field

You can use an object field in the following situations:
Free-Form Evaluation
You can use the EVAL operation to assign one Object item (field or
prototyped procedure) to a field of type Object.

Object Data Type
Free-Form Comparison
You can compare one object to another object. You can specify any
comparison, but only the following comparisons are meaningful:
v Equality or inequality with another object. Two objects are equal only if
they represent exactly the same object. Two different objects with the
same value are not equal.
If you want to test for equality of the value of two objects, use the Java
’equals’ method as follows:
D objectEquals PR N EXTPROC(*JAVA
D : ’java.lang.Object’
D : ’equals’)
C IF objectEquals (obj1 : obj2)
C ...
C ENDIF
v Equality or inequality with *NULL. An object is equal to *NULL if it is
not associated with a particular instance of its class.
Free-Form Call Parameter
You can code an object as a parameter in a call operation if the parameter
in the prototype is an object.
Notes:
1. Objects are not valid as input or output fields.
2. Assignment validity is not checked. For example, RPG would allow you to
assign an object of class Number to an object variable defined with class String.
If this was not correct, a Java error would occur when you tried to use the
String variable.
D Obj S O CLASS(*JAVA
D :’java.lang.Object’)
D Str S O CLASS(*JAVA
D Num S O CLASS(*JAVA
D :’java.math.BigDecimal’)
* Since all Java classes are subclasses of class ’java.lang.Object’,

* any object can be assigned to a variable of this class.
* The following two assignments are valid.
C EVAL Obj = Str
C EVAL Obj = Num
* However, it would probably not be valid to assign Str to Num.
Figure 91. Object Data Type Example
Basing Pointer Data Type

Basing pointers are used to locate the storage for based variables. The storage is
accessed by defining a field, array, or data structure as based on a particular basing
pointer variable and setting the basing pointer variable to point to the required
storage location.
For example, consider the based variable MY_FIELD, a character field of length 5,
which is based on the pointer PTR1. The based variable does not have a fixed
location in storage. You must use a pointer to indicate the current location of the
storage for the variable.

Suppose that the following is the layout of some area of storage:
If we set pointer PTR1 to point to the G,
-------------------------------------------------------------
| A | B | C | D | E | F | G | H | I | J | K | L | M | N | O |
-------------------------------------------------------------
MY_FIELD is now located in storage starting at the ’G’, so its value is ’GHIJK’. If
PTR1-------------------.
|
V
-------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------
the pointer is moved to point to the ’J’, the value of MY_FIELD becomes ’JKLMN’:
If MY_FIELD is now changed by an EVAL statement to ’HELLO’, the storage
PTR1-------------------.
|
V
-------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------
starting at the ’J’ would change:
PTR1-------------------.
|
V
-------------------------------------------------------------
| A | B | C | D | E | F | G | H | I | H | E | L | L | O | O |
-------------------------------------------------------------
Use the BASED keyword on the definition specification (see

“BASED(basing_pointer_name)” on page 289) to define a basing pointer for a field.
Basing pointers have the same scope as the based field.
The length of the basing pointer field must be 16 bytes long and must be aligned
on a 16 byte boundary. This requirement for boundary alignment can cause a
pointer subfield of a data structure not to follow the preceding field directly, and
can cause multiple occurrence data structures to have non-contiguous occurrences.
For more information on the alignment of subfields, see “Aligning Data Structure
Subfields” on page 131.
The default initialization value for basing pointers is *NULL.
Note: When coding basing pointers, you must be sure that you set the pointer to
storage that is large enough and of the correct type for the based field.
Figure 96 on page 205 shows some examples of how not to code basing
pointers.
Note: You can add or subtract an offset from a pointer in an expression, for
example EVAL ptr = ptr + offset. When doing pointer arithmetic be aware
that it is your responsibility to ensure that you are still pointing within the
storage of the item you are pointing to. In most cases no exception will be
issued if you point before or after the item.
When subtracting two pointers to determine the offset between them, the
pointers must be pointing to the same space, or the same type of storage.
For example, you can subtract two pointers in static storage, or two pointers
in automatic storage, or two pointers within the same user space.

Setting a Basing Pointer
You set or change the location of the based variable by setting or changing the
basing pointer in one of the following ways:
v Initializing with INZ(%ADDR(FLD)) where FLD is a non-based variable
v Assigning the pointer to the result of %ADDR(X) where X is any variable
v Assigning the pointer to the value of another pointer
v Using ALLOC or REALLOC (see “ALLOC (Allocate Storage)” on page 528,
“REALLOC (Reallocate Storage with New Length)” on page 693, and the
WebSphere Development Studio: ILE RPG Programmer’s Guide for examples)
v Moving the pointer forward or backward in storage using pointer arithmetic:
EVAL PTR = PTR + offset
(″offset″ is the distance in bytes that the pointer is moved)
Examples
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8

*
* Define a based data structure, array and field.
* If PTR1 is not defined, it will be implicitly defined
* by the compiler.
*
* Note that before these based fields or structures can be used,
* the basing pointer must be set to point to the correct storage
* location.
*
D DSbased DS BASED(PTR1)
D Field1 1 16A
D Field2 2
D
D ARRAY S 20A DIM(12) BASED(PRT2)
D
D Temp_fld S * BASED(PRT3)
D
D PTR2 S * INZ
D PTR3 S * INZ(*NULL)
Figure 92. Defining based structures and fields
The following shows how you can add and subtract offsets from pointers and also
determine the difference in offsets between two pointers.

*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+...8

D.....................................Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
*
D P1 s *
D P2 s *
CL0N01++++++++++++++Opcode(E)+Extended Factor 2++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
*
* Allocate 20 bytes of storage for pointer P1.
C ALLOC 20 P1
* Initialize the storage to ’abcdefghij’
C EVAL %STR(P1:20) = ’abcdefghij’
* Set P2 to point to the 9th byte of this storage.
C EVAL P2 = P1 + 8
* Show that P2 is pointing at ’i’. %STR returns the data that
* the pointer is pointing to up to but not incuding the first
* null-terminator x’00’ that it finds, but it only searches for
* the given length, which is 1 in this case.
C EVAL Result = %STR(P2:1)
C DSPLY Result 1
* Set P2 to point to the previous byte
C EVAL P2 = P2 - 1
* Show that P2 is pointing at ’h’
C EVAL Result = %STR(P2:1)
C DSPLY Result
* Find out how far P1 and P2 are apart. (7 bytes)
C EVAL Diff = P2 - P1
C DSPLY Diff 5 0
* Free P1’s storage
C DEALLOC P1
C RETURN
Figure 93. Pointer Arithmetic
Figure 94 shows how to obtain the number of days in Julian format, if the Julian
date is required.
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
HKeywords++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
H DATFMT(*JUL)
D.....................................Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
*
D JulDate S D INZ(D’95/177’)
D DATFMT(*JUL)
D JulDS DS BASED(JulPTR)
D Jul_yy 2 0
D Jul_sep 1
D Jul_ddd 3 0
D JulDay S 3 0
*
* Set the basing pointer for the structure overlaying the
* Julian date.
C EVAL JulPTR = %ADDR(JulDate)
* Extract the day portion of the Julian date
C EVAL JulDay = Jul_ddd
Figure 94. Obtaining a Julian Date

Figure 95 illustrates the use of pointers, based structures and system APIs. This
program does the following:
1. Receives the Library and File name you wish to process
2. Creates a User space using the QUSCRTUS API
3. Calls an API (QUSLMBR) to list the members in the requested file
4. Gets a pointer to the User space using the QUSPTRUS API
5. Displays a message with the number of members and the name of the first and
last member in the file
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8

D.....................................Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
*
D SPACENAME DS
D 10 INZ(’LISTSPACE’)
D 10 INZ(’QTEMP’)
D ATTRIBUTE S 10 INZ(’LSTMBR’)
D INIT_SIZE S 9B 0 INZ(9999999)
D AUTHORITY S 10 INZ(’*CHANGE’)
D TEXT S 50 INZ(’File member space’)
D SPACE DS BASED(PTR)
D SP1 32767
*
* ARR is used with OFFSET to access the beginning of the
* member information in SP1
*
D ARR 1 OVERLAY(SP1) DIM(32767)
*
* OFFSET is pointing to start of the member information in SP1
*
D OFFSET 9B 0 OVERLAY(SP1:125)
*
* Size has number of member names retrieved
*
D SIZE 9B 0 OVERLAY(SP1:133)
D MBRPTR S *
D MBRARR S 10 BASED(MBRPTR) DIM(32767)
D PTR S *
D FILE_LIB S 20
D FILE S 10
D LIB S 10
D WHICHMBR S 10 INZ(’*ALL ’)
D OVERRIDE S 1 INZ(’1’)
D FIRST_LAST S 50 INZ(’ MEMBERS, +
D FIRST = , +
D LAST = ’)
D IGNERR DS
D 9B 0 INZ(15)
D 9B 0
D 7A
Figure 95. Example of using pointers and based structures with an API (Part 1 of 2)

*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8

*
* Receive file and library you want to process
*
C *ENTRY PLIST
C FILE PARM FILEPARM 10
C LIB PARM LIBPARM 10
*
* Delete the user space if it exists
*
C CALL ’QUSDLTUS’ 10
C PARM SPACENAME
C PARM IGNERR
*
* Create the user space
*
C CALL ’QUSCRTUS’
C PARM SPACENAME
C PARM ATTRIBUTE
C PARM INIT_SIZE
C PARM ’ ’ INIT_VALUE 1
C PARM AUTHORITY
C PARM TEXT
*
* Call the API to list the members in the requested file
*
C CALL ’QUSLMBR’
C PARM SPACENAME
C PARM ’MBRL0100’ MBR_LIST 8
C PARM FILE_LIB
C PARM WHICHMBR
C PARM OVERRIDE
*
* Get a pointer to the user-space
*
C CALL ’QUSPTRUS’
C PARM SPACENAME
C PARM PTR
*
* Set the basing pointer for the member array
* MBRARR now overlays ARR starting at the beginning of
* the member information.
*
C EVAL MBRPTR = %ADDR(ARR(OFFSET))
C MOVE SIZE CHARSIZE 3
C EVAL %SUBST(FIRST_LAST:1:3) = CHARSIZE
C EVAL %SUBST(FIRST_LAST:23:10) = MBRARR(1)
C EVAL %SUBST(FIRST_LAST:41:10) = MBRARR(SIZE)
C FIRST_LAST DSPLY
C EVAL *INLR = ’1’
Figure 95. Example of using pointers and based structures with an API (Part 2 of 2)
When coding basing pointers, make sure that the pointer is set to storage that is
large enough and of the correct type for the based field. Figure 96 on page 205
shows some examples of how not to code basing pointers.

Procedure Pointer Data Type
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+...

8
D.....................................Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
*
D chr10 S 10a based(ptr1)
D char100 S 100a based(ptr1)
D p1 S 5p 0 based(ptr1)
*
*
* Set ptr1 to the address of p1, a numeric field
* Set chr10 (which is based on ptr1) to ’abc’
* The data written to p1 will be unreliable because of the data
* type incompatibility.
*
C EVAL ptr1 = %addr(p1)
C EVAL chr10 = ’abc’
*
* Set ptr1 to the address of chr10, a 10-byte field.
* Set chr100, a 100-byte field, all to ’x’
* 10 bytes are written to chr10, and 90 bytes are written in other
* storage, the location being unknown.
*
C EVAL ptr1 = %addr(chr10)
C EVAL chr100 = *all’x’
Figure 96. How Not to Code Basing Pointers
Procedure Pointer Data Type

Procedure pointers are used to point to procedures or functions. A procedure
pointer points to an entry point that is bound into the program. Procedure pointers
are defined on the definition specification.
The length of the procedure pointer field must be 16 bytes long and must be
aligned on a 16 byte boundary. This requirement for boundary alignment can cause
a pointer subfield of a data structure not to follow the preceding field directly, and
can cause multiple occurrence data structures to have non-contiguous occurrences.
For more information on the alignment of subfields, see “Aligning Data Structure
Subfields” on page 131.
The default initialization value for procedure pointers is *NULL.
Examples

Database Null Value Support
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8

*
* Define a basing pointer field and initialize to the address of the
* data structure My_Struct.
*
D My_Struct DS
D My_array 10 DIM(50)
D
D Ptr1 S 16* INZ(%ADDR(My_Struct))
*
* Or equivalently, defaults to length 16 if length not defined
*
D Ptr1 S * INZ(%ADDR(My_Struct))
*
* Define a procedure pointer field and initialize to NULL
*
D Ptr1 S 16* PROCPTR INZ(*NULL)
*
* Define a procedure pointer field and initialize to the address
* of the procedure My_Proc.
*
D Ptr1 S 16* PROCPTR INZ(%PADDR(My_Proc))
*
* Define pointers in a multiple occurrence data structure and map out
* the storage.
*
DDataS DS OCCURS(2)
D ptr1 *
D ptr2 *
D Switch 1A
*
* Storage map would be:
*
*
* DataS
*
* ptr1 16 bytes
*
* ptr2 16 bytes
*
* Switch 1 byte
*
* Pad 15 bytes
*
* ptr1 16 bytes
*
* ptr2 16 bytes
*
* Switch 1 byte
*
*
Figure 97. Defining pointers

In an ILE RPG program, you can select one of three different ways of handling
null-capable fields from an externally described database file. This depends on
how the ALWNULL keyword on a control specification is used (ALWNULL can
also be specified as a command parameter):

1. ALWNULL(*USRCTL) - read, write, update, and delete records with null values
and retrieve and position-to records with null keys.
2. ALWNULL(*INPUTONLY) - read records with null values to access the data in
the null fields
3. ALWNULL(*NO) - do not process records with null values
Note: For a program-described file, a null value in the record always causes a data
mapping error, regardless of the value specified on the ALWNULL keyword.
User Controlled Support for Null-Capable Fields and Key

Fields
When an externally described file contains null-capable fields and the
ALWNULL(*USRCTL) keyword is specified on a control specification, you can do
the following:
v Read, write, update, and delete records with null values from externally
described database files.
v Retrieve and position-to records with null keys using keyed operations, by
specifying an indicator in factor 2 of the KFLD associated with the field.
v Determine whether a null-capable field is actually null using the %NULLIND
built-in function on the right-hand-side of an expression.
v Set a null-capable field to be null for output or update using the %NULLIND
built-in function on the left-hand-side of an expression.
You are responsible for ensuring that fields containing null values are used
correctly within the program. For example, if you use a null-capable field as factor
2 of a MOVE operation, you should first check if it is null before you do the
MOVE, otherwise you may corrupt your result field value. You should also be
careful when outputting a null-capable field to a file that does not have the field
defined as null-capable, for example a WORKSTN or PRINTER file, or a
program-described file.
Note: The value of the null indicator for a null-capable field is only considered for
these operations: input, output and file-positioning. Here are some examples
of operations where the the null indicator is not taken into consideration:
v DSPLY of a null-capable field shows the contents of the field even if the
null indicator is on.
v If you move a null-capable field to another null-capable field, and the
factor 2 field has the null indicator on, the the result field will get the data
from the factor 2 field. The corresponding null indicator for the result
field will not be set on.
v Comparison operations, including SORTA and LOOKUP, with null
capable fields do not consider the null indicators.
A field is considered null-capable if it is null-capable in any externally described

database record and is not defined as a constant in the program.
Note: If the file used for an externally described data structure has null-capable
fields defined, the null attribute is not used in defining the RPG subfield.
When a field is considered null-capable in an RPG program, a null indicator is

associated with the field. Note the following:

v If the field is a multiple-occurrence data structure or a table, an array of null
indicators will be associated with the field. Each null indicator corresponds to an
occurrence of the data structure or element of the table.
v If the field is an array element, the entire array will be considered null-capable.
An array of null indicators will be associated with the array, each null indicator
corresponds to an array element.
v If the field is an element of an array subfield of a multiple-occurrence data
structure, an array of null indicators will be associated with the array for each
occurrence of the data structure.
Null indicators are initialized to zeros during program initialization and thus
null-capable fields do not contain null values when the program starts execution.
Input of Null-Capable Fields

For a field that is null-capable in the RPG program, the following will apply on
input, for DISK, SEQ, WORKSTN and SPECIAL files:
v When a null-capable field is read from an externally described file, the null
indicator for the field is set on if the field is null in the record. Otherwise, the
null indicator is set off.
v If field indicators are specified and the null-capable field is null, all the field
indicators will be set off.
v If a field is defined as null-capable in one file, and not null-capable in another,
then the field will be considered null-capable in the RPG program. However,
when you read the second file, the null indicator associated with the field will
always be set off.
v An input operation from a program-described file using a data structure in the
result field does not affect the null indicator associated with the data structure or
any of its subfields.
v Reading null-capable fields using input specifications for program-described files
always sets off the associated null indicators.
v If null-capable fields are not selected to be read due to a field-record-relation
indicator, the associated null indicator will not be changed.
Null-capable fields cannot be used as match fields or control-level fields.
Output of Null-Capable Fields

When a null-capable field is written (output or update) to an externally described
file, a null value is written out if the null indicator for the field is on at the time of
the operation.
When a null-capable field is output to or updated in an externally described

database file, then if the field is null, the value placed in the buffer will be ignored
by data management.
Note: Fields that have the null indicator on at the time of output have the data
moved to the buffer. This means that errors such as decimal-data error, or
basing pointer not set, will occur even if the null indicator for the field is on.
During an output operation to an externally described database file, if the file

contains fields that are considered null-capable in the program but not null-capable
in the file, the null indicators associated with those null-capable fields will not be
used.

Figure 98 shows how to read, write and update records with null values when the
ALWNULL(*USRCTL) option is used.
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
*
*
* Specify the ALWNULL(*USRCTL) keyword on a control
* specification or compile the ILE RPG program with ALWNULL(*USRCTL)
* on the command.
*
HKeywords++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
*H ALWNULL(*USRCTL)
*
* DISKFILE contains a record REC which has 2 fields: FLD1 and FLD2
* Both FLD1 and FLD2 are null-capable.
*
FDISKFILE UF A E DISK
*
* Read the first record.
* Update the record with new values for any fields which are not
* null.
C READ REC 10
C IF NOT %NULLIND(Fld1)
C MOVE ’FLD1’ Fld1
C ENDIF
C IF NOT %NULLIND(Fld2)
C MOVE ’FLD2’ Fld2
C ENDIF
C UPDATE REC
*
* Read another record.
* Update the record so that all fields are null.
* There is no need to set the values of the fields because they
* would be ignored.
C READ REC 10
C EVAL %NULLIND(Fld1) = *ON
C UPDATE REC
*
* Write a new record where Fld 1 is null and Fld 2 is not null.
*
C EVAL %NULLIND(Fld2) = *OFF
C EVAL Fld2 = ’New value’
C WRITE REC
Figure 98. Input and output of null-capable fields
Keyed Operations
If you have a null-capable key field, you can search for records containing null
values by specifying an indicator in factor 2 of the KFLD operation and setting that
indicator on before the keyed input operation. If you do not want a null key to be
selected, you set the indicator off.
Figure 99 on page 210 illustrates how keyed operations are used to position and
retrieve records with null keys.

*
* Assume File1 below contains a record Rec1 with a composite key
* made up of three key fields: Key1, Key2, and Key3. Key2 and Key3
* are null-capable. Key1 is not null-capable.
* Each key field is two characters long.
*
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+..
FFilename++IPEASFRlen+LKlen+AIDevice+.Keywords++++++++++++++++++++++++++
FFile1 IF E DISK
CL0N01Factor1+++++++Opcode(E)+Factor2+++++++Result++++++++Len++D+HiLoEq.
C Full_Kl KLIST
C KFLD Key1
C KFLD *IN02 Key2
C KFLD *IN03 Key3
C Partial_Kl KLIST
C KFLD Key1
C KFLD *IN05 Key2
*
* *IN02 is ON and *IN03 is OFF for the SETLL operation below.
* File1 will be positioned at the next record that has a key
* that is equal to or greater than ’AA??CC’ (where ?? is used
* in this example to indicate NULL)
*
* Because *IN02 is ON, the actual content in the search argument
* for Key2 will be ignored.
*
* If a record exists in File1 with ’AA’ in Key1, a null Key2, and
* ’CC’ in Key3, indicator 90 (the Eq indicator) will be set ON.
*
C MOVE ’AA’ Key1
C MOVE ’CC’ Key3
C EVAL *IN02 = ’1’
C EVAL *IN03 = ’0’
C Full_Kl SETLL Rec1 90
Figure 99. Example of keyed operations using null-capable key fields (Part 1 of 2)

*
* The CHAIN operation below will retrieve a record with ’JJ’ in Key1,
* ’KK’ in Key2, and a null Key3. Again, because *IN03 is ON, even
* if the programmer had moved some value (say ’XX’) into the search
* argument for Key3, ’XX’ will not be used. This means if File1
* actually has a record with a key ’JJKKXX’, that record will not
* be retrieved.
*
C MOVE ’JJ’ Key1
C MOVE ’KK’ Key2
C EVAL *IN02 = ’0’
C EVAL *IN03 = ’1’
C Full_Kl CHAIN Rec1 80
*
* The CHAIN operation below uses a partial key as the search argument.
* It will retrieve a record with ’NN’ in Key1, a null key2, and any
* value including a null value in Key3.
*
* In the database, the NULL value occupies the highest position in
* the collating sequence. Assume the keys in File1 are in ascending
* sequence. If File1 has a record with ’NN??xx’ as key (where ??
* means NULL and xx means any value other than NULL), that record
* will be retrieved. If such a record does not exist in File1, but
* File1 has a record with ’NN????’ as key, the ’NN????’ record will
* be retrieved. The null flags for Key2 and Key3 will be set ON
* as a result.
*
C MOVE ’NN’ Key1
C SETON 05
C Partial_Kl CHAIN Rec1 70
Figure 99. Example of keyed operations using null-capable key fields (Part 2 of 2)
Input-Only Support for Null-Capable Fields

When an externally described input-only file contains null-capable fields and the
ALWNULL(*INPUTONLY) keyword is specified on a control specification, the
following conditions apply:
v When a record is retrieved from a database file and there are some fields
containing null values in the record, database default values for the null-capable
fields will be placed into those fields containing null values. The default value
will be the user defined DDS defaults or system defaults.
v You will not be able to determine whether any given field in the record has a
null value.
v Control-level indicators, match-field entries and field indicators are not allowed
on an input specification if the input field is a null-capable field from an
externally described input-only file.
v Keyed operations are not allowed when factor 1 of a keyed input calculation
operation corresponds to a null-capable key field in an externally described
input-only file.
Note: The same conditions apply for *INPUTONLY or *YES when specified on the
ALWNULL command parameter.

ALWNULL(*NO)
When an externally described file contains null-capable fields and the
ALWNULL(*NO) keyword is specified on a control specification, the following
conditions apply:
v A record containing null values retrieved from a file will cause a data mapping
error and an error message will be issued.
v Data in the record is not accessible and none of the fields in the record can be
updated with the values from the input record containing null values.
v With this option, you cannot place null values in null-capable fields for updating
or adding a record. If you want to place null values in null-capable fields, use
the ALWNULL(*USRCTL) option.
Error Handling for Database Data Mapping Errors

For any input or output operation, a data mapping error will cause a severe error
message to be issued. For blocked output, if one or more of the records in the
block contains data mapping errors and the file is closed before reaching the end
of the block, a severe error message is issued and a system dump is created.

Chapter 11. Editing Numeric Fields
Editing provides a means of:
v Punctuating numeric fields, including the printing of currency symbols, commas,
periods, minus sign, and floating minus
v Moving a field sign from the rightmost digit to the end of the field
v Blanking zero fields
v Managing spacing in arrays
v Editing numeric values containing dates
v Floating a currency symbol
v Filling a print field with asterisks
This chapter applies only to non-float numeric fields. To output float fields in the
external display representation, specify blank in position 52 of the output
specification. To obtain the external display representation of a float value in
calculations, use the %EDITFLT built-in function.
A field can be edited by edit codes, or edit words. You can print fields in edited
format using output specifications or you can obtain the edited value of the field
in calulation specifications using the built-in functions %EDITC (edit code) and
%EDITW (edit word).
When you print fields that are not edited, the fields are printed as follows:
v Float fields are printed in the external display representation.
v Other numeric fields are printed in zoned numeric representation.
The following examples show why you may want to edit numeric output fields.
Type of Field Field in the Printing of Unedited Printing of Edited

Computer Field Field
Alphanumeric JOHN T SMITH JOHN T SMITH JOHN T SMITH
Numeric 0047652 0047652 47652

(positive)
Numeric 004765K 004765K 47652-

(negative)
The unedited alphanumeric field and the unedited positive numeric field are easy
to read when printed, but the unedited negative numeric field is confusing because
it contains a K, which is not numeric. The K is a combination of the digit 2 and the
negative sign for the field. They are combined so that one of the positions of the
field does not have to be set aside for the sign. The combination is convenient for
storing the field in the computer, but it makes the output hard to read. Therefore,
to improve the readability of the printed output, numeric fields should be edited
before they are printed.

Edit Codes
Edit Codes
Edit codes provide a means of editing numeric fields according to a predefined
pattern. They are divided into three categories: simple (X, Y, Z), combination (1
through 4, A through D, J through Q), and user-defined (5 through 9). In output
specifications, you enter the edit code in position 44 of the field to be edited. In
calculation specifications, you specify the edit code as the second parameter of the
%EDITC built-in function.
Simple Edit Codes

You can use simple edit codes to edit numeric fields without having to specify any
punctuation. These codes and their functions are:
v The X edit code ensures a hexadecimal F sign for positive fields. However,
because the system does this, you normally do not have to specify this code.
Leading zeros are not suppressed. The X edit code does not modify negative
numbers.
v The Y edit code is normally used to edit a 3- to 9-digit date field. It suppresses
the leftmost zeros of date fields, up to but not including the digit preceding the
first separator. Slashes are inserted to separate the day, month, and year. The
“DATEDIT(fmt{separator})” on page 245 and “DECEDIT(*JOBRUN | ’value’)” on
page 246 keywords on the control specification can be used to alter edit formats.
Note: The Y edit code is not valid for *YEAR, *MONTH, and *DAY.
v The Z edit code removes the sign (plus or minus) from and suppresses the
leading zeros of a numeric field. The decimal point is not placed in the field.
Combination Edit Codes

The combination edit codes (1 through 4, A through D, J through Q) punctuate a
numeric field.
The DECEDIT keyword on the control specification determines what character is

used for the decimal separator and whether leading zeros are suppressed. The
decimal position of the source field determines whether and where a decimal point
is placed. If decimal positions are specified for the source field and the zero
balance is to be suppressed, the decimal separator is included only if the field is
not zero. If a zero balance is to be suppressed, a zero field is output as blanks.
When a zero balance is not to be suppressed and the field is equal to zero, either
of the following is output:
v A decimal separator followed by n zeros, where n is the number of decimal
places in the field
v A zero in the units position of a field if no decimal places are specified.
You can use a floating currency symbol or asterisk protection with any of the 12
combination edit codes. The floating currency symbol appears to the left of the first
significant digit. The floating currency symbol does not print on a zero balance
when an edit code is used that suppresses the zero balance. The currency symbol
does not appear on a zero balance when an edit code is used that suppresses the
zero balance.
The currency symbol for the program is a dollar sign ($) unless a currency symbol
is specified with the CURSYM keyword on the control specification.

Edit Codes
To specify a floating currency symbol in output specifications, code the currency
symbol in positions 53-55 as well as an edit code in position 44 for the field to be
edited.
For built-in function %EDITC, you specify a floating currency symbol in the third
parameter. To use the currency symbol for the program, specify *CURSYM. To use
another currency symbol, specify a character constant of length 1.
Asterisk protection causes an asterisk to replace each zero suppressed. A complete

field of asterisks replaces the fiield on a zero balance source field. To specify
asterisk protection in output specifications, code an asterisk constant in positions
53 through 55 of the output specifications, along with an edit code. To specify
asterisk protection using the built-in function %EDITC, specify *ASTFILL as the
third parameter.
Asterisk fill and the floating currency symbol cannot be used with the simple (X, Y,
Z) or with the user-defined (5 through 9) edit codes.
A currency symbol can appear before the asterisk fill (fixed currency symbol). You
can do this in output specifications with the following coding:
1. Place a currency symbol constant in position 53 of the first output specification.
The end position specified in positions 47-51 should be one space before the
beginning of the edited field.
2. In the second output specification, place the edit field in positions 30-43, an edit
code in position 44, end position of the edit field in positions 47-51, and ’*’ in
positions 53-55.
You can do this using the %EDITC built-in function by concatenating the currency
symbol to the %EDITC result.
C EVAL X = ’$’ + %EDITC(N: ’A’ : *ASTFILL)
In output specifications, when an edit code is used to print an entire array, two
blanks precede each element of the array (except the first element).
Note: You cannot edit an array using the %EDITC built-in function.
Table 18 summarizes the functions of the combination edit codes. The codes edit
the field in the format listed on the left. A negative field can be punctuated with
no sign, CR, a minus sign (-), or a floating minus sign as shown on the top of the
figure.
Table 18. Combination Edit Codes
Negative Balance Indicator
Prints with Prints Zero No Sign CR - Floating
Grouping Balance Minus
Separator
Yes Yes 1 A J N
Yes No 2 B K 0
No Yes 3 C L P
No No 4 D M Q
Chapter 11. Editing Numeric Fields 215

Edit Codes
User-Defined Edit Codes
IBM has predefined edit codes 5 through 9. You can use them as they are, or you
can delete them and create your own. For a description of the IBM-supplied edit
codes, see the iSeries Information Center programming category.
The user-defined edit codes allow you to handle common editing problems that
would otherwise require the use of an edit word. Instead of the repetitive coding
of the same edit word, a user-defined edit code can be used. These codes are
system defined by the CL command CRTEDTD (Create Edit Description).
When you edit a field defined to have decimal places, be sure to use an edit word
that has an editing mask for both the fractional and integer portions of the field.
Remember that when a user-defined edit code is specified in a program, any
system changes made to that user-defined edit code are not reflected until the
program is recompiled. For further information on CRTEDTD, see the iSeries
Information Center programming category.
Editing Considerations
Remember the following when you specify any of the edit codes:
v Edit fields of a non-printer file with caution. If you do edit fields of a
non-printer file, be aware of the contents of the edited fields and the effects of
any operations you do on them. For example, if you use the file as input, the
fields written out with editing must be considered character fields, not numeric
fields.
v Consideration should be given to data added by the edit operation. The amount
of punctuation added increases the overall length of the edited value. If these
added characters are not considered when editing in output specifications, the
output fields may overlap.
v The end position specified for output is the end position of the edited field. For
example, if any of the edit codes J through M are specified, the end position is
the position of the minus sign (or blank if the field is positive).
v The compiler assigns a character position for the sign even for unsigned numeric
fields.
Summary of Edit Codes

Table 19 summarizes the edit codes and the options they provide. A simplified
version of this table is printed above positions 45 through 70 on the output
specifications. Table 20 on page 218 shows how fields look after they are edited.
Table 21 on page 219 shows the effect that the different edit codes have on the
same field with a specified end position for output.
Table 19. Edit Codes
DECEDIT Keyword Parameter
Edit Commas Decimal Sign for ’.’ ’,’ ’0,’ ’0.’ Zero Suppress
Code Point Negative
Balance
1 Yes Yes No Sign .00 or 0 ,00 or 0 0,00 or 0 0.00 or 0 Yes
2 Yes Yes No Sign Blanks Blanks Blanks Blanks Yes
3 Yes No Sign .00 or 0 ,00 or 0 0,00 or 0 0.00 or 0 Yes
4 Yes No Sign Blanks Blanks Blanks Blanks Yes

Edit Codes
Table 19. Edit Codes (continued)
DECEDIT Keyword Parameter
Edit Commas Decimal Sign for ’.’ ’,’ ’0,’ ’0.’ Zero Suppress
Code Point Negative
Balance
5-91
A Yes Yes CR .00 or 0 ,00 or 0 0,00 or 0 0.00 or 0 Yes
B Yes Yes CR Blanks Blanks Blanks Blanks Yes
C Yes CR .00 or 0 ,00 or 0 0,00 or 0 0.00 or 0 Yes
D Yes CR Blanks Blanks Blanks Blanks Yes
J Yes Yes - (minus) .00 or 0 ,00 or 0 0,00 or 0 0.00 or 0 Yes
K Yes Yes - (minus) Blanks Blanks Blanks Blanks Yes
L Yes - (minus) .00 or 0 ,00 or 0 0,00 or 0 0.00 or 0 Yes
M Yes - (minus) Blanks Blanks Blanks Blanks Yes
N Yes Yes - (floating .00 or 0 ,00 or 0 0,00 or 0 0.00 or 0 Yes
minus)
O Yes Yes - (floating Blanks Blanks Blanks Blanks Yes
minus)
P Yes - (floating .00 or 0 ,00 or 0 0,00 or 0 0.00 or 0 Yes
minus)
Q Yes - (floating Blanks Blanks Blanks Blanks Yes
minus)
X2
Y3 Yes
4
Z Yes
Notes:
1. These are the user-defined edit codes.
2. The X edit code ensures a hexadecimal F sign for positive values. Because the system does this for you, normally
you do not have to specify this code.
3. The Y edit code suppresses the leftmost zeros of date fields, up to but not including the digit preceding the first
separator. The Y edit code also inserts slashes (/) between the month, day, and year according to the following
pattern:
nn/n
nn/nn
nn/nn/n
nn/nn/nn
nnn/nn/nn
nn/nn/nnnn
nnn/nn/nnnn
nnnn/nn/nn
nnnnn/nn/nn
4. The Z edit code removes the sign (plus or minus) from a numeric field and suppresses leading zeros.

Edit Codes
Table 20. Examples of Edit Code Usage
Positive Positive Negative Negative Zero Zero
Number- Number- Number- Number- Balance- Balance-
Two No Three No Two No
Edit Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal
Codes Positions Positions Positions Positions Positions Positions
Unedited 1234567 1234567 000125 000125 000000 000000
1 12,345.67 1,234,567 .120 120 .00 0
2 12,345.67 1,234,567 .120 120
3 12345.67 1234567 .120 120 .00 0
4 12345.67 1234567 .120 120
1
5-9
A 12,345.67 1,234,567 .120CR 120CR .00 0
B 12.345.67 1,234,567 .120CR 120CR
C 12345.67 1234567 .120CR 120CR .00 0
D 12345.67 1234567 .120CR 120CR
J 12,345.67 1,234,567 .120- 120- .00 0
K 12,345,67 1,234,567 .120- 120-
L 12345.67 1234567 .120- 120- .00 0
M 12345.67 1234567 .120- 120-
N 12,345.67 1,234,567 -.120 -120 .00 0
O 12,345,67 1,234,567 -.120 -120
P 12345.67 1234567 -.120 -120 .00 0
Q 12345.67 1234567 -.120 -120
2 5
X 1234567 1234567 00012 000125 000000 000000
Y3 0/01/20 0/01/20 0/00/00 0/00/00
Z4 1234567 1234567 120 120
Notes:
1. These edit codes are user-defined.
2. The X edit code ensures a hex F sign for positive values. Because the system does this for you, normally you do
not have to specify this code.
3. The Y edit code suppresses the leftmost zeros of date fields, up to but not including the digit preceding the first
separator. The Y edit code also inserts slashes (/) between the month, day, and year according to the following
pattern:
nn/n
nn/nn
nn/nn/n
nn/nn/nn
nnn/nn/nn
nn/nn/nnnn Format used with M, D or blank in position 19
nnn/nn/nnnn Format used with M, D or blank in position 19
nnnn/nn/nn Format used with Y in position 19
nnnnn/nn/nn Format used with Y in position 19
4. The Z edit code removes the sign (plus or minus) from a numeric field and suppresses leading zeros of a
numeric field.
5. The represents a blank. This may occur if a negative zero does not correspond to a printable character.

Edit Codes
Table 21. Effects of Edit Codes on End Position
Negative Number, 2 Decimal Positions. End Position Specified
as 10.
Output Print Positions
Edit Code 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1
Unedited 0 0 4 1 K
1 4 . 1 2
2 4 . 1 2
3 4 . 1 2
4 4 . 1 2
2
5-9
A 4 . 1 2 C R
B 4 . 1 2 C R
C 4 . 1 2 C R
D 4 . 1 2 C R
J 4 . 1 2 -
K 4 . 1 2 -
L 4 . 1 2 -
M 4 . 1 2 -
N - 4 . 1 2
O - 4 . 1 2
P - 4 . 1 2
Q - 4 . 1 2
X 0 0 4 1 K1
Y 0 / 4 1 / 2
Z 4 1 2
Notes:
1. K represents a negative 2.
2. These are user-defined edit codes.
Edit Words
If you have editing requirements that cannot be met by using the edit codes
described above, you can use an edit word. An edit word is a character literal or a
named constant specified in positions 53 - 80 of the output specification. It
describes the editing pattern for an numeric and allows you to directly specify:
v Blank spaces
v Commas and decimal points, and their position
v Suppression of unwanted zeros
v Leading asterisks
v The currency symbol, and its position
v Addition of constant characters
v Output of the negative sign, or CR, as a negative indicator.

Edit Words
The edit word is used as a template, which the system applies to the source data
to produce the output.
The edit word may be specified directly on an output specification or may be

specified as a named constant with a named constant name appearing in the edit
word field of the output specification. You can obtain the edited value of the field
in calulation specifications using the built-in function %EDITW (edit word).
Named constants, used as edit words, are limited to 115 characters.
How to Code an Edit Word

To output using an edit word, code the output specifications as shown below:
Position
Entry
21-29 Can contain conditioning indicators.
30-43 Contains the name of the numeric field from which the data that is to be
edited is taken.
44 Edit code. Must be blank, if you are using an edit word to edit the source
data.
45 A “B” in this position indicates that the source data is to be set to zero or
blanks after it has been edited and output. Otherwise the source data
remains unchanged.
47-51 Identifies the end (rightmost) position of the field in the output record.
53-80 Edit word. Can be up to 26 characters long and must be enclosed by
apostrophes, unless it is a named constant. Enter the leading apostrophe,
or begin the named constant name in column 53. The edit word, unless a
named constant, must begin in column 54.
To edit using an edit word in calculation specifications, use built-in function

%EDITW, specifying the value to be edited as the first parameter, and the edit
word as the second parameter.
Parts of an Edit Word

An edit word consists of three parts: the body, the status, and the expansion. The
following shows the three parts of an edit word:
E D I T W O R D
b b b , b b 0. . b b & C R & & T O T
Body Status Expansion
Figure 100. Parts of an Edit Word
The body is the space for the digits transferred from the source data field to the
edited result. The body begins at the leftmost position of the edit word. The
number of blanks (plus one zero or an asterisk) in the edit word body must be
equal to or greater than the number of digits of the source data field to be edited.
The body ends with the rightmost character that can be replaced by a digit.

Edit Words
The status defines a space to allow for a negative indicator, either the two letters
CR or a minus sign (-). The negative indicator specified is output only if the source
data is negative. All characters in the edit word between the last replaceable
character (blank, zero suppression character) and the negative indicator are also
output with the negative indicator only if the source data is negative; if the source
data is positive, these status positions are replaced by blanks. Edit words without
the CR or - indicators have no status positions.
The status must be entered after the last blank in the edit word. If more than one
CR follows the last blank, only the first CR is treated as a status; the remaining
CRs are treated as constants. For the minus sign to be considered as a status, it
must be the last character in the edit word.
The expansion is a series of ampersands and constant characters entered after the
status. Ampersands are replaced by blank spaces in the output; constants are
output as is. If status is not specified, the expansion follows the body.
Forming the Body of an Edit Word

The following characters have special meanings when used in the body of an edit
word:
Blank: Blank is replaced with the character from the corresponding position of
the value to be edited. A blank position is referred to as a digit position.
Decimals and Commas: Decimals and commas are in the same relative position
in the edited output field as they are in the edit word unless they appear to the left
of the first significant digit in the edit word. In that case, they are blanked out or
replaced by an asterisk.
In the following examples below, all the leading zeros will be suppressed (default)
and the decimal point will not appear unless there is a significant digit to its left.
Edit Word Source Data Appears in Edited Result as:

'' 0000072 72
'.' 000000012 12
'.' 000000123 1.23
Zeros: The first zero in the body of the edit word is interpreted as an
end-zero-suppression character. This zero is placed where zero suppression is to
end. Subsequent zeros put into the edit word are treated as constants (see
“Constants” below).
Any leading zeros in the source data are suppressed up to and including the
position of the end-zero-suppression character. Significant digits that would appear
in the end-zero-suppression character position, or to the left of it, are output.

'0' 00000004 000004
'0' 012345 012345
'0' 012345678 12345678
If the leading zeros include, or extend to the right of, the end-zero-suppression
character position, that position is replaced with a blank. This means that if you

Edit Words
wish the same number of leading zeros to appear in the output as exist in the
source data, the edit word body must be wider than the source data.

'0' 0156 156
'0' 0156 0156
Constants (including commas and decimal point) that are placed to the right of the
end-zero-suppression character are output, even if there is no source data.
Constants to the left of the end-zero-suppression character are only output if the
source data has significant digits that would be placed to the left of these
constants.

'0.' 000000001 .01
'0.' 000000000 .00
',0.' 00000012 0.12
',0.' 00000123 1.23
'0,.' 00000123 0,001.23
Asterisk: The first asterisk in the body of an edit word also ends zero
suppression. Subsequent asterisks put into the edit word are treated as constants
(see “Constants” below). Any zeros in the edit word following this asterisk are also
treated as constants. There can be only one end-zero-suppression character in an
edit word, and that character is the first asterisk or the first zero in the edit word.
If an asterisk is used as an end-zero-suppression character, all leading zeros that

are suppressed are replaced with asterisks in the output. Otherwise, the asterisk
suppresses leading zeros in the same way as described above for “Zeros”.

'*.' 000000123 *1.23
'*.' 000000000 ******0.00
'*.**' 000056342 ****563.42**
Note that leading zeros appearing after the asterisk position are output as leading
zeros. Only the suppressed leading zeros, including the one in the asterisk
position, are replaced by asterisks.
Currency Symbol: A currency symbol followed directly by a first zero in the edit
word (end-zero-suppression character) is said to float. All leading zeros are
suppressed in the output and the currency symbol appears in the output
immediately to the left of the most significant digit.

',,$0.' 000000012 $.12
',,$0.' 000123456 $1,234.56

Edit Words
If the currency symbol is put into the first position of the edit word, then it will
always appear in that position in the output. This is called a fixed currency
symbol.

'$,,0.' 000123456 $1,234.56
'$,,00.' 000000000 $00.00
'$,,*.' 000123456 $****1,234.56
A currency symbol anywhere else in the edit word and not immediately followed
by a zero end-suppression-character is treated as a constant (see “Constants”
below).
Ampersand: Causes a blank in the edited field. The example below might be used
to edit a telephone number. Note that the zero in the first position is required to
print the constant AREA.

'0AREA&&NO.&-' 4165551212 AREA416NO.555-1212
Constants: All other characters entered into the body of the edit word are treated
as constants. If the source data is such that the output places significant digits or
leading zeros to the left of any constant, then that constant appears in the output.
Otherwise, the constant is suppressed in the output. Commas and the decimal
point follow the same rules as for constants. Notice in the examples below, that the
presence of the end-zero-suppression character as well as the number of significant
digits in the source data, influence the output of constants.
The following edit words could be used to print cheques. Note that the second
asterisk is treated as a constant, and that, in the third example, the constants
preceding the first significant digit are not output.

'$**DOLLARS&&CTS' 000012345 $****123*DOLLARS45CTS
'$**DOLLARS&&CTS' 000000006 $********DOLLARS06CTS
'$&DOLLARS&&CTS' 000000006 $6CTS
A date could be edited by using either edit word:

'//' 010388 1/03/88
'0//' 010389 01/03/89
Note that any zeros or asterisks following the first occurrence of an edit word are
treated as constants. The same is true for - and CR:

'0.000' 01234 12.34000
'*.000' 01234 *12.34000

Edit Words
Forming the Status of an Edit Word
The following characters have special meanings when used in the status of an edit
word:
Ampersand: Causes a blank in the edited output field. An ampersand cannot be

placed in the edited output field.
CR or minus symbol: If the sign in the edited output is plus (+), these positions
are blanked out. If the sign in the edited output field is minus (−), these positions
remain undisturbed.
The following example adds a negative value indication. The minus sign will print
only when the value in the field is negative. A CR symbol fills the same function
as a minus sign.

'.-' 000000123- 1.23-
'.-' 000000123 1.23
Constants between the last replaceable character and the - or CR symbol will print
only if the field is negative; otherwise, blanks will appear in these positions. Note
the use of ampersands to represent blanks:

',,0.&30&DAY&CR' 000000123- 1.2330DAYCR
',,0.&30&DAY&CR' 000000123 1.23
Formatting the Expansion of an Edit Word

The characters in the expansion portion of an edit word are always used. The
expansion cannot contain blanks. If a blank is required in the edited result, specify
an ampersand in the body of the edit word.
Constants may be added to appear with any value of the number:

',0.&CR&NET' 000123- 1.23CRNET
',0.&CR&NET' 000123 1.23NET
Note that the CR in the middle of a word may be detected as a negative field
value indication. If a word such as SECRET is required, use the coding in the
example below.

'0.&SECRET' 12345- 123.45SECRET
'0.&SECRET' 12345 123.45ET
'0.&CR&&SECRET' 12345 123.45SECRET
Summary of Coding Rules for Edit Words

The following rules apply to edit words in output specifications:
v Position 44 (edit codes) must be blank.

Edit Words
v Positions 30 through 43 (field name) must contain the name of a numeric field.
v An edit word must be enclosed in apostrophes, unless it is a named constant.
Enter the leading apostrophe or begin a named constant name in position 53.
The edit word itself must begin in position 54.
The following rules apply to edit words in general:

v The edit word can contain more digit positions (blanks plus the initial zero or
asterisk) than the field to be edited, but must not contain less. If there are more
digit positions in the edit word than there are digits in the field to be edited,
leading zeros are added to the field before editing.
v If leading zeros from the source data are desired, the edit word must contain
one more position than the field to be edited, and a zero must be placed in the
high-order position of the edit word.
v In the body of the edit word only blanks and the zero-suppression stop
characters (zero and asterisk) are counted as digit positions. The floating
currency symbol is not counted as a digit position.
v When the floating currency symbol is used, the sum of the number of blanks
and the zero-suppression stop character (digit positions) contained in the edit
word must be equal to or greater than the number of positions in the field to be
edited.
v Any zeros or asterisks following the leftmost zero or asterisk are treated as
constants; they are not replaceable characters.
v When editing an unsigned integer field, DB and CR are allowed and will always
print as blanks.
Editing Externally Described Files

To edit output for externally described files, place the edit codes in data
description specifications (DDS), instead of in RPG IV specifications. See the iSeries
Information Center database and file systems category for information on how to
specify edit codes in the data description specifications. However, if an externally
described file, which has an edit code specified, is to be written out as a program
described output file, you must specify editing in the output specifications. In this
case, any edit codes in the data description specifications are ignored.

Editing Externally Described Files

Part 3. Specifications
This section describes the RPG IV specifications. First, information common to
several specifications, such as keyword syntax and continuation rules is described.
Next, the specifications are described in the order in which they must be entered in
your program. Each specification description lists all the fields on the specification
and explains all the possible entries.

Chapter 12. About Specifications
RPG IV source is coded on a variety of specifications. Each specification has a
specific set of functions.
This reference contains a detailed description of the individual RPG IV

specifications. Each field and its possible entries are described. Chapter 20,
“Operations” on page 369 describes the operation codes that are coded on the
calculation specification, which is described in Chapter 17, “Calculation
Specifications” on page 337.
RPG IV Specification Types

There are three groups of source records that may be coded in an RPG IV program:
the main source section, the subprocedure section, and the program data section.
The main source section consists of the first set of H, F, D, I, C, and O
specifications in a module. If the keyword NOMAIN is not specified, it
corresponds to a standalone program or a main procedure. If NOMAIN is
specified, it does not contain a main procedure, and so it does not contain any
executable calculations. Every module requires a main source section
independently of whether subprocedures are coded.
The subprocedure section contains specifications that define any subprocedures

coded within a module. The program data section contains source records with
data that is supplied at compile time.
The following illustration shows the types of source records that may be entered
into each group and their order.
Note
The RPG IV source must be entered into the system in the order shown. Any
of the specification types can be absent, but at least one from the main source
section must be present.

Compile-Time Array and Table Data
Alternate Collating Sequence Records
File Translation records
Program Data
P Procedure
Calculation
D Definition
P Procedure
Subprocedure
Output
Calculation
Input
D Definition
File Description
Control
Main Source Section
Figure 101. Source Records and Their Order in an RPG IV Source Program
Main Source Section Specifications

H Control (Header) specifications provide information about program
generation and running of the compiled program. Refer to Chapter 13,
“Control Specifications” on page 239 for a description of the entries on this
specification.
F File description specifications define all files in the program. Refer to
Chapter 14, “File Description Specifications” on page 257 for a description
of the entries on this specification.
D Definition specifications define items used in your program. Arrays, tables,
data structures, subfields, constants, standalone fields, prototypes and their
parameters, and procedure interfaces and their parameters are defined on
this specification. Refer to Chapter 15, “Definition Specifications” on
page 281 for a description of the entries on this specification.
I Input specifications describe records, and fields in the input files and

indicate how the records and fields are used by the program. Refer to
Chapter 16, “Input Specifications” on page 321 for a description of the
entries on this specification.
C Calculation specifications describe calculations to be done by the program
and indicate the order in which they are done. Calculation specifications
can control certain input and output operations. Refer to Chapter 17,
“Calculation Specifications” on page 337 for a description of the entries on
this specification.
O Output specifications describe the records and fields and indicate when
they are to be written by the program. Refer to Chapter 18, “Output
Specifications” on page 347 for a description of the entries on this
specification.
Subprocedure Specifications
P Procedure specifications describe the procedure-interface definition of a
prototyped program or procedure. Refer to Chapter 19, “Procedure
specification.
D Definition specifications define items used in the prototyped procedure.
Procedure-interface definitions, entry parameters, and other local items are
defined on this specification. Refer to Chapter 15, “Definition
specification.
C Calculation specifications perform the logic of the prototyped procedure.
Refer to Chapter 17, “Calculation Specifications” on page 337 for a
description of the entries on this specification.
The RPG IV language consists of a mixture of position-dependent code and free

form code. Those specifications which support keywords (control, file description,
definition, and procedure) allow free format in the keyword fields. The calculation
specification allows free format with those operation codes which support an
extended-factor 2. Otherwise, RPG IV entries are position specific. To represent
this, each illustration of RPG IV code will be in listing format with a scale drawn
across the top.
Program Data
Source records with program data follow all source specifications. The first line of
the data section must start with **.
If desired, you can indicate the type of program data that follows the **, by
specifying any of these keywords as required: “CTDATA” on page 291,
“FTRANS{(*NONE | *SRC)}” on page 250, or “ALTSEQ{(*NONE | *SRC | *EXT)}”
on page 241. By associating the program data with the appropriate keyword, you
can place the groups of program data in any order after the source records.
The first entry for each input record must begin in position 1. The entire record
need not be filled with entries. Array elements associated with unused entries will
be initialized with the default value.
For more information on entering compile-time array records, see “Rules for Array
Source Records” on page 152. For more information on file translation, see “File
Translation” on page 111. For more information on alternate collating sequences,
see “Alternate Collating Sequence” on page 182.
Chapter 12. About Specifications 231

Common Entries
Common Entries
The following entries are common to all RPG specifications preceding program
data:
v Positions 1-5 can be used for comments.
v Specification type (position 6). The following letter codes can be used:
Entry Specification Type
H Control
F File description
D Definition
I Input
C Calculation
O Output
P Procedure
v Comment Statements
– Position 7 contains an asterisk (*). This will denote the line as a comment line
regardless of any other entry on the specification. In a free-form calculation
specification, you can use // for a comment. Any line on any fixed-form
specification that begins with // is considered a comment by the compiler.
The // can start in any position provided that positions 6 to the // characters
contain blanks.
– Positions 6 to 80 are blank.
v Positions 7 to 80 are blank and position 6 contains a valid specification. This is a
valid line, not a comment, and sequence rules are enforced.
Syntax of Keywords
Keywords may have no parameters, optional parameters, or required parameters.
The syntax for keywords is as follows:
Keyword(parameter1 : parameter2)
where:
v Parameter(s) are enclosed in parentheses ( ).
Note: Parentheses should not be specified if there are no parameters.

v Colons (:) are used to separate multiple parameters.
The following notational conventions are used to show which parameters are
optional and which are required:
v Braces { } indicate optional parameters or optional elements of parameters.
v An ellipsis (...) indicates that the parameter can be repeated.
v A colon (:) separates parameters and indicates that more than one may be
specified. All parameters separated by a colon are required unless they are
enclosed in braces.
v A vertical bar (|) indicates that only one parameter may be specified for the
keyword.
v A blank separating keyword parameters indicates that one or more of the
parameters may be specified.

Common Entries
Note: Braces, ellipses, and vertical bars are not a part of the keyword syntax and
should not be entered into your source.
Table 22. Examples of Keyword Notation
Notation Example of Notation Used Description Example of Source
Entered
braces {} PRTCTL (data_struct Parameter data_struct is required and PRTCTL
{:*COMPAT}) parameter *COMPAT is optional. (data_struct1)
braces {} TIME(format {separator}) Parameter format{separator} is required, but TIME(*HMS&)
the {separator} part of the parameter is
optional.
colon (:) RENAME(Ext_format Parameters Ext_format and Int_format are RENAME (nameE:
:Int_format) required. nameI)
ellipsis (...) IGNORE(recformat Parameter recformat is required and can be IGNORE (recformat1:
{:recformat...}) specified more than once. recformat2:
recformat3)
vertical bar (|) FLTDIV{(*NO | *YES)} Specify *NO or *YES or no parameters. FLTDIV
blank OPTIONS(*OMIT *NOPASS One of *OMIT, *NOPASS, *VARSIZE, OPTIONS (*OMIT:
*VARSIZE *STRING *STRING, or *RIGHTADJ is required and *NOPASS: *VARSIZE:
*RIGHTADJ) more than one parameter can be optionally *STRING:
specified. *RIGHTADJ)
Continuation Rules
The fields that may be continued are:
v The keywords field on the control specification
v The keywords field on the file description specification
v The keywords field on the definition specification
v The Extended factor-2 field on the calculation specification
v The constant/editword field on the output specification
v The Name field on the definition or the procedure specification
General rules for continuation are as follows:

v The continuation line must be a valid line for the specification being continued
(H, F, D, C, or O in position 6)
v No special characters should be used when continuing specifications across
multiple lines, except when a literal or name must be split. For example, the
following pairs are equivalent. In the first pair, the plus sign (+) is an operator,
even when it appears at the end of a line. In the second pair, the plus sign is a
continuation character.
C eval x = a + b
C eval x = a +
C b
C eval x = ’abc’
C eval x = ’ab+
C c’
v Only blank lines, empty specification lines or comment lines are allowed
between continued lines
v The continuation can occur after a complete token. Tokens are
– Names (for example, keywords, file names, field names)
– Parentheses

Common Entries
– The separator character (:)
– Expression operators
– Built-in functions
– Special words
– Literals
v A continuation can also occur within a literal
– For character, date, time, and timestamp literals
- A hyphen (-) indicates continuation is in the first available position in the
continued field
- A plus (+) indicates continuation with the first non-blank character in or
past the first position in the continued field
– For graphic literals
- Either the hyphen (-) or plus (+) can be used to indicate a continuation.
- Each segment of the literal must be enclosed by shift-out and shift-in
characters.
- When the a graphic literal is assembled, only the first shift-out and the last
shift-in character will be included.
- Regardless of which continuation character is used for a graphic literal, the
literal continues with the first character after the shift-out character on the
continuation line. Spaces preceding the shift-out character are ignored.
– For numeric literals
- No continuation character is used
- A numeric literal continues with a numeric character or decimal point on
the continuation line in the continued field
– For hexadecimal and UCS-2 literals
- Either a hyphen (-) or a plus (+) can be used to indicate a continuation
- The literal will be continued with the first non-blank character on the next
line
v A continuation can also occur within a name in free-format entries
– In the name entry for Definition and Procedure specifications. For more
information on continuing names in the name entry, see “Definition and
Procedure Specification Name Field” on page 237.
– In the keywords entry for File and Definition specifications.
– In the extended factor 2 entry of Calculation specifications.
You can split a qualified name at a period, as shown below:

C EVAL dataStructureWithALongName.
C subfieldWithAnotherLongName = 5
If a name is not split at a period, code an ellipsis (...) at the end of the partial
name, with no intervening blanks.
Example

Common Entries
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8

DName++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
D Keywords-cont++++++++++++++++++++++++
* Define a 10 character field with a long name.
* The second definition is a pointer initialized to the address
* of the variable with the long name.
D QuiteLongFieldNameThatCannotAlwaysFitInOneLine...
D S 10A
D Ptr S * inz(%addr(QuiteLongFieldName...
D ThatCannotAlways...
D FitInOneLine))
D ShorterName S 5A
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8

CL0N01Factor1+++++++Opcode(E)+Extended-factor2+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
C Extended-factor2-++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
* Use the long name in an expression
* Note that you can split the name wherever it is convenient.
C EVAL QuiteLongFieldName...
C ThatCannotAlwaysFitInOneLine = ’abc’
* You can split any name this way

C EVAL P...
C tr = %addr(Shorter...
C Name)
Control Specification Keyword Field

The rule for continuation on the control specification is:
v The specification continues on or past position 7 of the next control specification
Example
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8

HKeywords++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
H DATFMT(
H *MDY&
H )
File Description Specification Keyword Field

The rules for continuation on the file description specification are:
v The specification continues on or past position 44 of the next file description
specification
v Positions 7-43 of the continuation line must be blank
Example
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8

FFilename++IPEASFRlen+LKlen+AIDevice+.Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
F.....................................Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
F EXTIND
F (
F *INU1
F )

Common Entries
Definition Specification Keyword Field
The rules for continuation of keywords on the definition specification are:
v The specification continues on or past position 44 of the next Definition
specification dependent on the continuation character specified
Example
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8

D Keywords-cont++++++++++++++++++++++++
DMARY C CONST(
D ’Mary had a little lamb, its -
* Only a comment or a completely blank line is allowed in here
D fleece was white as snow.’
D )
* Numeric literal, continues with the first non blank in/past position 44
*
DNUMERIC C 12345
D 67
* Graphic named constant, must have shift-out in/past position 44
DGRAF C G’oAABBCCDDi+
D oEEFFGGi’
Calculation Specification Extended Factor-2

The rules for continuation on the Calculation specification are:
v The specification continues on or past position 36 of the next calculation
specification
Example
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8

C EVAL MARY=’Mary had a little lamb, its +
C fleece was white as snow.’
*
* Arithmetic expressions do not have continuation characters.
* The ’+’ sign below is the addition operator, not a continuation
* character.
C
C EVAL A = (B*D)/ C +
C 24
* The first use of ’+’ in this example is the concatenation
* operator. The second use is the character literal continuation.
C EVAL ERRMSG = NAME +
C ’ was not found +
C in the file.’
Free-Form Calculation Specification

The rules for continuation on a free-form calculation specification are:
v The free-form line can be continued on the next line. The statement continues
until a semicolon is encountered.
Example

Common Entries
/FREE
time = hours * num_employees
+ overtime_saved;
/END-FREE
Output Specification Constant/Editword Field

The rules for continuation on the output specification are:
v The specification continues on or past position 53 of the next output
specification
Example
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8

O.............N01N02N03Field+++++++++YB.End++PConstant/editword/DTformat+++
O Continue Constant/editword+++
O 80 ’Mary had a little lamb, its-
*
O fleece was white as snow.’
Definition and Procedure Specification Name Field

The rules for continuation of the name on the definition and procedure
specifications are:
v Continuation rules apply for names longer than 15 characters. Any name (even
one with 15 characters or fewer) can be continued on multiple lines by coding
an ellipsis (...) at the end of the partial name.
v A name definition consists of the following parts:
1. Zero or more continued name lines. Continued name lines are identified as
having an ellipsis as the last non-blank characters in the entry. The name
must begin within positions 7 - 21 and may end anywhere up to position 77
(with an ellipsis ending in position 80). There cannot be blanks between the
start of the name and the ellipsis (...) characters. If any of these conditions is
not true, the line is considered to be a main definition line.
2. One main definition line containing name, definition attributes, and
keywords. If a continued name line is coded, the name entry of the main
definition line may be left blank.
3. Zero or more keyword continuation lines.
Example

Common Entries
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8

DName++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
D Keywords-cont++++++++++++++++++++++++
* Long name without continued name lines:
D RatherLongName S 10A
* Long name using 1 continued name line:
D NameThatIsEvenLonger...
D C ’This is the constant -
D that the name represents.’
* Long name using 1 continued name line:
D NameThatIsSoLongItMustBe...
D Continued S 10A
* Compile-time arrays may have long names:
D CompileTimeArrayContainingDataRepresentingTheNamesOfTheMonthsOf...
D TheYearInGermanLanguage...
D S 20A DIM(12) CTDATA PERRCD(1)
* Long name using 3 continued name lines:
D ThisNameIsSoMuchLongerThanThe...
D PreviousNamesThatItMustBe...
D ContinuedOnSeveralSpecs...
D PR 10A
D parm_1 10A VALUE
*
* Long names defined on calc spec:
C LongTagName TAG
C *LIKE DEFINE RatherLongNameQuiteLongName +5
*
PName+++++++++++..B...................Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
PContinuedName+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
* Long name specified on Procedure spec:
P ThisNameIsSoMuchLongerThanThe...
P PreviousNamesThatItMustBe...
P ContinuedOnSeveralSpecs...
P B
D ThisNameIsSoMuchLongerThanThe...
D PreviousNamesThatItMustBe...
D ContinuedOnSeveralSpecs...
D PI 10A
D parm_1 10A VALUE

Chapter 13. Control Specifications
The control-specification statements, identified by an H in position 6, provide
information about generating and running programs. However, there are three
different ways in which this information can be provided to the compiler and the
compiler searches for this information in the following order:
1. A control specification included in your source
2. A data area named RPGLEHSPEC in *LIBL
3. A data area named DFTLEHSPEC in QRPGLE
Once one of these sources is found, the values are assigned and keywords that are
not specified are assigned their default values.
See the description of the individual entries for their default values.
Note: Compile-option keywords do not have default values. The keyword value is
initialized with the value you specify for the CRTBNDRPG or CRTRPGMOD
command.
TIP
The control specification keywords apply at the module level. This means
that if there is more than one procedure coded in a module, the values
specified in the control specification apply to all procedures.
Using a Data Area as a Control Specification

Use the CL command CRTDTAARA (Create Data Area) to create a data area
defined as type *CHAR. (See the iSeries Information Center programming category
for a description of the Create Data Area command.) Enter the keywords and their
possible parameters that are to be used in the Initial Value field of the command.
For example, to create an RPGLEHSPEC data area that will specify a default date
format of *YMD, and a default date separator /, you would enter:
CRTDTAARA DTAARA(MYLIB/RPGLEHSPEC)
TYPE(*CHAR)
LEN(80)
VALUE(’datfmt(*ymd) datedit(*ymd/)’)
The data area can be whatever size is required to accommodate the keywords
specified. The entire length of the data area can only contain keywords.
Control-Specification Statement
The control specification consists solely of keywords. The keywords can be placed
anywhere between positions 7 and 80. Positions 81-100 can be used for comments.

Control-Specification Statement
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8 ...+... 9 ...+... 10
HKeywords++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++Comments++++++++++++
Figure 102. Control-Specification Layout
The following is an example of a control specification.
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8

HKeywords++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
H ALTSEQ(*EXT) CURSYM(’$’) DATEDIT(*MDY) DATFMT(*MDY/) DEBUG(*YES)
H DECEDIT(’.’) FORMSALIGN(*YES) FTRANS(*SRC) DFTNAME(name)
H TIMFMT(*ISO)
H COPYRIGHT(’(C) Copyright ABC Programming - 1995’)
Position 6 (Form Type)

An H must appear in position 6 to identify this line as the control specification.
Positions 7-80 (Keywords)

The control-specification keywords are used to determine how the program will
deal with devices and how certain types of information will be represented.
The control-specification keywords also include compile-option keywords that

override the default or specified options on the CRTBNDRPG and CRTRPGMOD
commands. These keywords determine the compile options to be used on every
compile of the program.
Control-Specification Keywords
Control-specification keywords may have no parameters, optional parameters, or
required parameters. The syntax for keywords is as follows:
where:
Note: Do not specify parentheses if there are no parameters.

enclosed in braces.
keyword.

If additional space is required for control-specification keywords, the keyword field
can be continued on subsequent lines. See “Control-Specification Statement” on
page 239 and “Control Specification Keyword Field” on page 235.
ACTGRP(*NEW | *CALLER | ’activation-group-name’)

The ACTGRP keyword allows you to specify the activation group the program is
associated with when it is called. If ACTGRP(*NEW) is specified, then the program
is activated into a new activation group. If ACTGRP(*CALLER) is specified, then
the program is activated into the caller’s activation group. If an
activation-group-name is specified, then that name is used when this program is
called.
If the ACTGRP keyword is not specified, then the value specified on the command
is used.
The ACTGRP keyword is valid only if the CRTBNDRPG command is used.
You cannot use the ACTGRP or BNDDIR keywords when creating a program with
DFTACTGRP(*YES).
ALTSEQ{(*NONE | *SRC | *EXT)}

The ALTSEQ keyword indicates whether an alternate collating sequence is used, if
so, whether it is internal or external to the source. The following list shows what
happens for the different possible keyword and parameter combinations.
Keyword/Parameter
Collating Sequence Used
ALTSEQ not specified
Normal collating sequence
ALTSEQ(*NONE)
Normal collating sequence
ALTSEQ, no parameters
Alternate collating sequence specified in source
ALTSEQ(*SRC)
Alternate collating sequence specified in source
ALTSEQ(*EXT)
Alternate collating sequence specified by the SRTSEQ and LANGID
command parameters or keywords.
If ALTSEQ is not specified or specified with *NONE or *EXT, an alternate collating

sequence table must not be specified in the program.
ALWNULL(*NO | *INPUTONLY | *USRCTL)

The ALWNULL keyword specifies how you will use records containing
null-capable fields from externally described database files.
If ALWNULL(*NO) is specified, then you cannot process records with null-value

fields from externally described files. If you attempt to retrieve a record containing
null values, no data in the record will be accessible and a data-mapping error will
occur.
Chapter 13. Control Specifications 241

If ALWNULL(*INPUTONLY) is specified, then you can successfully read records
with null-capable fields containing null values from externally described input-only
database files. When a record containing null values is retrieved, no data-mapping
errors will occur and the database default values are placed into any fields that
contain null values. However, you cannot do any of the following:
v Use null-capable key fields
v Create or update records containing null-capable fields
v Determine whether a null-capable field is actually null while the program is
running
v Set a null-capable field to be null.
If ALWNULL(*USRCTL) is specified, then you can read, write, and update records
with null values from externally described database files. Records with null keys
can be retrieved using keyed operations. You can determine whether a null-capable
field is actually null, and you can set a null-capable field to be null for output or
update. You are responsible for ensuring that fields containing null values are used
correctly.
If the ALWNULL keyword is not specified, then the value specified on the
command is used.
For more information, see “Database Null Value Support” on page 206
AUT(*LIBRCRTAUT | *ALL | *CHANGE | *USE | *EXCLUDE |

’authorization-list-name’)
The AUT keyword specifies the authority given to users who do not have specific
authority to the object, who are not on the authorization list, and whose user
group has no specific authority to the object. The authority can be altered for all
users or for specified users after the object is created with the CL commands Grant
Object Authority (GRTOBJAUT) or Revoke Object Authority (RVKOBJAUT).
If AUT(*LIBRCRTAUT) is specified, then the public authority for the object is taken
from the CRTAUT keyword of the target library (the library that contains the
object). The value is determined when the object is created. If the CRTAUT value
for the library changes after the create, the new value will not affect any existing
objects.
If AUT(*ALL) is specified, then authority is provided for all operations on the

object, except those limited to the owner or controlled by authorization list
management authority. The user can control the object’s existence, specify this
security for it, change it, and perform basic functions on it, but cannot transfer its
ownership.
If AUT(*CHANGE) is specified, then it provides all data authority and the

authority to perform all operations on the object except those limited to the owner
or controlled by object authority and object management authority. The user can
change the object and perform basic functions on it.
If AUT(*USE) is specified, then it provides object operational authority and read

authority; that is, authority for basic operations on the object. The user is
prevented from changing the object.
If AUT(*EXCLUDE) is specified, then it prevents the user from accessing the object.

The authorization-list-name is the name of an authorization list of users and
authorities to which the object is added. The object will be secured by this
authorization list, and the public authority for the object will be set to *AUTL. The
authorization list must exist on the system at compilation time.
If the AUT keyword is not specified, then the value specified on the command is
used.
BNDDIR(’binding-directory-name’ {:’binding-directory-
name’...})
The BNDDIR keyword specifies the list of binding directories that are used in
symbol resolution.
A binding directory name can be qualified by a library name followed by a slash

delimiter (’library-name/binding-directory-name’). The library name is the name of
the library to be searched. If the library name is not specified, *LIBL is used to find
the binding directory name. When creating a program using CRTBNDRPG, the
library list is searched at the time of the compile. When creating a module using
CRTRPGMOD, the library list is searched when the module is used to create a
program or service program.
If BNDDIR is specified on both the control specification and on the command, all
binding directories are used for symbol resolution. The BNDDIR on the control
specification does not override the BNDDIR on the command.
If the BNDDIR keyword is not specified, then the value specified on the command
is used.
You cannot use the BNDDIR or ACTGRP command parameters or keywords when
creating a program with DFTACTGRP(*YES).
CCSID(*GRAPH : parameter | *UCS2 : number)

This keyword sets the default graphic (*GRAPH) and UCS-2 (*UCS2) CCSIDs for
the module. These defaults are used for literals, compile-time data,
program-described input and output fields, and data definitions that do not have
the CCSID keyword coded.
CCSID(*GRAPH : *IGNORE | *SRC | number)
Sets the default graphic CCSID for the module. The possible values are:
*IGNORE
This is the default. No conversions are allowed between graphic and
UCS-2 fields in the module. The %GRAPH built-in function cannot be
used.
*SRC
The graphic CCSID associated with the CCSID of the source file will be
used.
number
A graphic CCSID. A valid graphic CCSID is 65535 or a CCSID with the
EBCDIC double-byte encoding scheme (X’1200’).
CCSID(*UCS2 : number)
Sets the default UCS-2 CCSID for the module. If this keyword is not
specified, the default UCS-2 CCSID is 13488.

number must be a UCS-2 CCSID. A valid UCS-2 CCSID has the UCS-2
encoding scheme (x’7200’).
If CCSID(*GRAPH : *SRC) or CCSID(*GRAPH : number) is specified:

v Graphic and UCS-2 fields in externally-described data structures will use the
CCSID in the external file.
v Program-described graphic or UCS-2 fields will default to the graphic or UCS-2
CCSID of the module, respectively. This specification can be overridden by using
the CCSID(number) keyword on the definition of the field. (See “CCSID(number
| *DFT)” on page 290.)
v Program-described graphic or UCS-2 input and output fields and keys are
assumed to have the module’s default CCSID.
COPYNEST(number)
The COPYNEST keyword specifies the maximum depth to which nesting can occur
for /COPY directives. The depth must be greater than or equal to 1 and less than
or equal to 2048. The default depth is 32.
COPYRIGHT(’copyright string’)
The COPYRIGHT keyword provides copyright information that can be seen using
the DSPMOD, DSPPGM, or DSPSRVPGM commands. The copyright string is a
character literal with a maximum length of 256. The literal may be continued on a
continuation specification. (See “Continuation Rules” on page 233 for rules on
using continuation lines.) If the COPYRIGHT keyword is not specified, copyright
information is not added to the created module or program.
TIP
To see the copyright information for a module, use the command:
DSPMOD mylib/mymod DETAIL(*COPYRIGHT)
For a program, use the DSPPGM command with DETAIL(*COPYRIGHT).

This information includes the copyright information from all modules bound
into the program.
Similarly, DSPSRVPGM DETAIL(*COPYRIGHT) gives the copyright

information for all modules in a service program.
CURSYM(’sym’)
The CURSYM keyword specifies a character used as a currency symbol in editing.
The symbol must be a single character enclosed in quotes. Any character in the
RPG character set (see Chapter 1, “Symbolic Names and Reserved Words” on
page 3) may be used except:
v 0 (zero)
v * (asterisk)
v , (comma)
v & (ampersand)
v . (period)
v − (minus sign)
v C (letter C)
v R (letter R)

v Blank
If the keyword is not specified, $ (dollar sign) will be used as the currency symbol.
CVTOPT(*{NO}DATETIME *{NO}GRAPHIC *{NO}VARCHAR

*{NO}VARGRAPHIC)
The CVTOPT keyword is used to determine how the ILE RPG compiler handles
date, time, timestamp, graphic data types, and variable-length data types that are
retrieved from externally described database files.
You can specify any or all of the data types in any order. However, if a data type is
specified, the *NOxxxx parameter for the same data type cannot also be used, and
vice versa. For example, if you specify *GRAPHIC you cannot also specify
*NOGRAPHIC, and vice versa. Separate the parameters with a colon. A parameter
cannot be specified more than once.
Note: If the keyword CVTOPT does not contain a member from a pair, then the
value specified on the command for this particular data type will be used.
For example, if the keyword CVTOPT(*DATETIME : *NOVARCHAR :
*NOVARGRAPHIC) is specified on the Control specification, then for the
pair (*GRAPHIC, *NOGRAPHIC), whatever was specified implicitly or
explicitly on the command will be used.
If *DATETIME is specified, then date, time, and timestamp data types are declared
as fixed-length character fields.
If *NODATETIME is specified, then date, time, and timestamp data types are not
converted.
If *GRAPHIC is specified, then double-byte character set (DBCS) graphic data

types are declared as fixed-length character fields.
If *NOGRAPHIC is specified, then double-byte character set (DBCS) graphic types

are not converted.
If *VARCHAR is specified, then variable-length character data types are declared

as fixed-length character fields.
If *NOVARCHAR is specified, then variable-length character data types are not

converted.
If *VARGRAPHIC is specified, then variable-length double-byte character set

(DBCS) graphic data types are declared as fixed-length character fields.
If *NOVARGRAPHIC is specified, then variable-length double-byte character set

(DBCS) graphic data types are not converted.
If the CVTOPT keyword is not specified, then the values specified on the
command are used.
DATEDIT(fmt{separator})
The DATEDIT keyword specifies the format of numeric fields when using the Y
edit code. The separator character is optional. The value (fmt) can be *DMY, *MDY,
or *YMD. The default separator is /. A separator character of & (ampersand) may
be used to specify a blank separator.

DATFMT(fmt{separator})
The DATFMT keyword specifies the internal date format for date literals and the
default internal format for date fields within the program. You can specify a
different internal date format for a particular field by specifying the format with
the DATFMT keyword on the definition specification for that field.
If the DATFMT keyword is not specified, the *ISO format is assumed. For more
information on internal formats, see “Internal and External Formats” on page 167.
Table 13 on page 194 describes the various date formats and their separators.
DEBUG{(*NO | *YES)}
The DEBUG keyword determines whether DUMP operations are performed and
whether unused externally described input fields are moved from the buffer
during input operations.
DUMP operations are performed if either DEBUG or DEBUG(*YES) is specified. If

this keyword is not specified or specified with *NO, DUMP operations are not
performed.
You can override this effect of DEBUG(*NO) by specifying operation extender A on

the DEBUG operation code. This operation extender means that a dump is always
performed, regardless of the value of the DEBUG keyword.
Normally, externally described input fields are only read during input operations if
the field is otherwise used within the program. If DEBUG or DEBUG(*YES) is
specified, all externally described input fields will be entered even if they are not
used in the program.
DECEDIT(*JOBRUN | ’value’)
The DECEDIT keyword specifies the character used as the decimal point for edited
decimal numbers and whether or not leading zeros are printed.
If *JOBRUN is specified, the DECFMT value associated with the job at runtime is
used. The possible job decimal formats are listed in the following table:
Table 23. DECEDIT with *JOBRUN
Job Decimal Format Decimal Point Print Leading Zeros Edited Decimal
Number
blank period (.) No .123
I comma (,) No ,123
J comma (,) Yes 0,123
If a value is specified, then the edited decimal numbers are printed according to
the following possible values:
Table 24. DECEDIT with ’value’
’Value’ Decimal Point Print Leading Zeros Edited Decimal
Number
’.’ period (.) No .123
’,’ comma (,) No ,123
’0.’ period (.) Yes 0.123

Table 24. DECEDIT with ’value’ (continued)
’Value’ Decimal Point Print Leading Zeros Edited Decimal
Number
’0,’ comma (,) Yes 0,123
If DECEDIT is not specified, a period (.) is used for editing numeric values.
Note: Zeros to the right of a decimal point are always printed.
| DECPREC(30|31)
| Keyword DECPREC is used to specify the decimal precision of decimal (packed,
| zoned, or binary) intermediate values in arithmetic operations in expressions.
| Decimal intermediate values are always maintained in the proper precision, but
| this keyword affects how decimal values are presented when used in certain
| operations, such as %EDITC and %EDITW.
| DECPREC(30)
| The default decimal precicion. It indicates that the maximum precision of
| decimal values when used in %EDITC and %EDITW operations is 30
| digits. However, if at least one operand in the expression is a 31 digit
| decimal variable, the precision of the expression is 31 digits regardless of
| the DECPREC value.
| DECPREC(31)
| This alternate decimal precicion indicates that 31 digits are always
| presented in %EDITC and %EDITW operations.
DFTACTGRP(*YES | *NO)
The DFTACTGRP keyword specifies the activation group in which the created
program will run when it is called.
If *YES is specified, then this program will always run in the default activation
group, which is the activation group where all original program model (OPM)
programs are run. This allows ILE RPG programs to behave like OPM RPG
programs in the areas of file sharing, file scoping, RCLRSC, and handling of
unmonitored exceptions. ILE static binding is not available when a program is
created with DFTACTGRP(*YES). This means that you cannot use the BNDDIR or
ACTGRP command parameters or keywords when creating this program. In
addition, any call operation in your source must call a program and not a
procedure. DFTACTGRP(*YES) is useful when attempting to move an application
on a program-by-program basis to ILE RPG.
If *NO is specified, then the program is associated with the activation group
specified by the ACTGRP command parameter or keyword and static binding is
allowed. DFTACTGRP(*NO) is useful when you intend to take advantage of ILE
concepts; for example, running in a named activation group or binding to a service
program.
If the DFTACTGRP keyword is not specified, then the value specified on the
command is used.
The DFTACTGRP keyword is valid only if the CRTBNDRPG command is used.

DFTNAME(rpg_name)
The DFTNAME keyword specifies a default program or module name. When
*CTLSPEC is specified on the create command, the rpg_name is used as the
program or module name. If rpg_name is not specified, then the default name is
RPGPGM or RPGMOD for a program or module respectively. The RPG rules for
names (see “Symbolic Names” on page 3) apply.
ENBPFRCOL(*PEP | *ENTRYEXIT | *FULL)

The ENBPFRCOL keyword specifies whether performance collection is enabled.
If *PEP is specified, then performance statistics are gathered on the entry and exit
of the program-entry procedure only. This applies to the actual program-entry
procedure for an object, not to the main procedure of the object within the object.
If *ENTRYEXIT is specified, then performance statistics are gathered on the entry

and exit of all procedures of the object.
If *FULL is specified, then performance statistics are gathered on entry and exit of
all procedures. Also, statistics are gathered before and after each call to an external
procedure.
If the ENBPFRCOL keyword is not specified, then the value specified on the
command is used.
EXPROPTS(*MAXDIGITS | *RESDECPOS)
The EXPROPTS (expression options) keyword specifies the type of precision rules
to be used for an entire program. If not specified or specified with *MAXDIGITS,
the default precision rules apply. If EXPROPTS is specified, with *RESDECPOS, the
″Result Decimal Position″ precision rules apply and force intermediate results in
expressions to have no fewer decimal positions than the result.
Note: Operation code extenders R and M are the same as

EXPROPTS(*RESDECPOS) and EXPROPTS(*MAXDIGITS) respectively, but
for single free-form expressions.
EXTBININT{(*NO | *YES)}
The EXTBININT keyword is used to process externally described fields with binary
external format and zero decimal positions as if they had an external integer
format. If not specified or specified with *NO, then an externally described binary
field is processed with an external binary format. If EXTBININT is specified,
optionally with *YES, then an externally described field is processed as follows:
DDS Definition RPG external format
B(n,0) where 1 ≤ n ≤ 4 I(5)
B(n,0) where 5 ≤ n ≤ 9 I(10)
By specifying the EXTBININT keyword, your program can make use of the full
range of DDS binary values available. (The range of DDS binary values is the same
as for signed integers: -32768 to 32767 for a 5-digit field or -2147483648 to
2147483647 for a 10-digit field.)

Note: When the keyword EXTBININT is specified, any externally described
subfields that are binary with zero decimal positions will be defined with an
internal integer format.
FIXNBR(*{NO}ZONED *{NO}INPUTPACKED)
The FIXNBR keyword specifies whether decimal data that is not valid is fixed by
the compiler.
You can specify any or all of the data types in any order. However, if a decimal
data type is specified, the *NOxxxx parameter for the same data type cannot also
be used, and vice versa. For example, if you specify *ZONED you cannot also
specify *NOZONED, and vice versa. Separate the parameters with a colon. A
parameter cannot be specified more than once.
Note: If the keyword FIXNBR does not contain a member from a pair, then the
value specified on the command for this particular data type will be used.
For example, if the keyword FIXNBR(*NOINPUTPACKED) is specified on
the Control specification, then for the pair (*ZONED, *NOZONED),
whatever was specified implicitly or explicitly on the command will be
used.
If *ZONED is specified, then zoned decimal data that is not valid will be fixed by
the compiler on the conversion to packed data. Blanks in numeric fields will be
treated as zeros. Each decimal digit will be checked for validity. If a decimal digit
is not valid, it is replaced with zero. If a sign is not valid, the sign will be forced to
a positive sign code of hex ’F’. If the sign is valid, it will be changed to either a
positive sign hex ’F’ or a negative sign hex ’D’, as appropriate. If the resulting
packed data is not valid, it will not be fixed.
If *NOZONED is specified, then zoned decimal data is not fixed by the compiler
on the conversion to packed data and will result in decimal errors during runtime
if used.
If *INPUTPACKED is specified, then the internal variable will be set to zero if

packed decimal data that is not valid is encountered while processing input
specifications.
If *NOINPUTPACKED is specified, then decimal errors will occur if packed

decimal data that is not valid is encountered while processing input specifications.
If the FIXNBR keyword is not specified, then the values specified on the command
are used.
FLTDIV{(*NO | *YES)}
The FLTDIV keyword indicates that all divide operations within expressions are
computed in floating point and return a value of type float. If not specified or
specified with *NO, then divide operations are performed in packed-decimal
format (unless one of the two operands is already in float format).
If FLTDIV is specified, optionally with *YES, then all divide operations are
performed in float format (guaranteeing that the result always has 15 digits of
precision).

FORMSALIGN{(*NO | *YES)}
The FORMSALIGN keyword indicates that the first line of an output file
conditioned with the 1P indicator can be printed repeatedly, allowing you to align
the printer. If not specified or specified with *NO, no alignment will be performed.
If specified, optionally with *YES, first page forms alignment will occur.
Rules for Forms Alignment

v The records specified on Output Specifications for a file with a device entry for a
printer type device conditioned by the first page indicator (1P) may be written
as many times as desired. The line will print once. The operator will then have
the option to print the line again or continue with the rest of the program.
v All spacing and skipping specified will be performed each time the line is
printed.
v When the option to continue with the rest of the program is selected, the line
will not be reprinted.
v The function may be performed for all printer files.
v If a page field is specified, it will be incremented only the first time the line is
printed.
v When the continue option is selected, the line count will be the same as if the
function were performed only once when line counter is specified.
FTRANS{(*NONE | *SRC)}
The FTRANS keyword specifies whether file translation will occur. If specified,
optionally with *SRC, file translation will take place and the translate table must be
specified in the program. If not specified or specified with *NONE, no file
translation will take place and the translate table must not be present.
GENLVL(number)
The GENLVL keyword controls the creation of the object. The object is created if all
errors encountered during compilation have a severity level less than or equal to
the generation severity level specified. The value must be between 0 and 20
inclusive. For errors greater than severity 20, the object will not be created.
If the GENLVL keyword is not specified, then the value specified on the command
is used.
INDENT(*NONE | ’character-value’)
The INDENT keyword specifies whether structured operations should be indented
in the source listing for enhanced readability. It also specifies the characters that
are used to mark the structured operation clauses.
Note: Any indentation that you request here will not be reflected in the listing
debug view that is created when you specify DBGVIEW(*LIST).
If *NONE is specified, structured operations will not be indented in the source

listing.
If character-value is specified, the source listing is indented for structured

operation clauses. Alignment of statements and clauses are marked using the
characters you choose. You can choose any character literal up to 2 characters in
length.

Note: The indentation may not appear as expected if there are errors in the source.
If the INDENT keyword is not specified, then the value specified on the command
is used.
INTPREC(10 | 20)
The INTPREC keyword is used to specify the decimal precision of integer and
unsigned intermediate values in binary arithmetic operations in expressions.
Integer and unsigned intermediate values are always maintained in 8-byte format.
This keyword affects only the way integer and unsigned intermediate values are
converted to decimal format when used in binary arithmetic operations (+, -, *, /).
INTPREC(10), the default, indicates a decimal precision of 10 digits for integer and
unsigned operations. However, if at least one operand in the expression is an
8-byte integer or unsigned field, the result of the expression has a decimal
precision of 20 digits regardless of the INTPREC value.
INTPREC(20) indicates that the decimal precision of integer and unsigned

operations is 20 digits.
LANGID(*JOBRUN | *JOB | ’language-identifier’)

The LANGID keyword indicates which language identifier is to be used when the
sort sequence is *LANGIDUNQ or *LANGIDSHR. The LANGID keyword is used
in conjunction with the SRTSEQ command parameter or keyword to select the sort
sequence table.
If *JOBRUN is specified, then the LANGID value associated with the job when the
RPG object is executed is used.
If *JOB is specified, then the LANGID value associated with the job when the RPG
object is created is used.
A language identifier can be specified, for example, ’FRA’ for French and ’DEU’ for
German.
If the LANGID keyword is not specified, then the value specified on the command
is used.
NOMAIN
The NOMAIN keyword indicates that there is no main procedure in this module.
It also means that the module in which it is coded cannot be an entry module.
Consequently, if NOMAIN is specified, then you cannot use the CRTBNDRPG
command to create a program. Instead you must either use the CRTPGM
command to bind the module with NOMAIN specified to another module that has
a program entry procedure or you must use the CRTSRVPGM command.
When NOMAIN is specified, only the *INIT portion of the cycle is generated for
the module. This means that the following types of specifications are not allowed:
v Primary and secondary files
v Detail and total output
v Executable calculations

OPENOPT (*NOINZOFL | *INZOFL)
For a program that has one or more printer files defined with an overflow
indicator (OA-OG or OV), the OPENOPT keyword specifies whether the overflow
indicator should be reset to *OFF when the file is opened. If the OPENOPT
keyword is specified, with *NOINZOFL, the overflow indicator will remain
unchanged when the associated printer file is opened. If not specified or specified
with *INZOFL, the overflow indicator will be set to *OFF when the associated
printer file is opened.
OPTIMIZE(*NONE | *BASIC | *FULL)

The OPTIMIZE keyword specifies the level of optimization, if any, of the object.
If *NONE is specified, then the generated code is not optimized. This is the fastest
in terms of translation time. It allows you to display and modify variables while in
debug mode.
If *BASIC is specified, it performs some optimization on the generated code. This

allows user variables to be displayed but not modified while the program is in
debug mode.
If *FULL is specified, then the most efficient code is generated. Translation time is
the longest. In debug mode, user variables may not be modified but may be
displayed, although the presented values may not be the current values.
If the OPTIMIZE keyword is not specified, then the value specified on the
command is used.
OPTION(*{NO}XREF *{NO}GEN *{NO}SECLVL *{NO}SHOWCPY

*{NO}EXPDDS *{NO}EXT *{NO}SHOWSKP) *{NO}SRCSTMT)
*{NO}DEBUGIO)
The OPTION keyword specifies the options to use when the source member is
compiled.
You can specify any or all of the options in any order. However, if a compile
option is specified, the *NOxxxx parameter for the same compile option cannot
also be used, and vice versa. For example, if you specify *XREF you cannot also
specify *NOXREF, and vice versa. Separate the options with a colon. You cannot
specify an option more than once.
Note: If the keyword OPTION does not contain a member from a pair, then the
value specified on the command for this particular option will be used. For
example, if the keyword OPTION(*XREF : *NOGEN : *NOSECLVL :
*SHOWCPY) is specified on the Control specification, then for the pairs,
(*EXT, *NOEXT), (*EXPDDS, *NOEXPDDS) and (*SHOWSKP,
*NOSHOWSKP), whatever was specified implicitly or explicitly on the
command will be used.
If *XREF is specified, a cross-reference listing is produced (when appropriate) for

the source member. *NOXREF indicates that a cross-reference listing is not
produced.
If *GEN is specified, a program object is created if the highest severity level

returned by the compiler does not exceed the severity specified in the GENLVL
option. *NOGEN does not create an object.

If *SECLVL is specified, second-level message text is printed on the line following
the first-level message text in the Message Summary section. *NOSECLVL does not
print second-level message text on the line following the first-level message text.
If *SHOWCPY is specified, the compiler listing shows source records of members

included by the /COPY compiler directive. *NOSHOWCPY does not show source
records of members included by the /COPY compiler directive.
If *EXPDDS is specified, the expansion of externally described files in the listing

and key field information is displayed. *NOEXPDDS does not show the expansion
of externally described files in the listing or key field information.
If *EXT is specified, the external procedures and fields referenced during the
compile are included on the listing. *NOEXT does not show the list of external
procedures and fields referenced during compile on the listing.
If *SHOWSKP is specified, then all statements in the source part of the listing are
displayed, regardless of whether or not the compiler has skipped them.
*NOSHOWSKP does not show skipped statements in the source part of the listing.
The compiler skips statements as a result of /IF, /ELSEIF, or /ELSE directives.
If *SRCSTMT is specified, statement numbers for the listing are generated from the
source ID and SEU sequence numbers as follows:
stmt_num = source_ID * 1000000 + source_SEU_sequence_number
For example, the main source member has a source ID of 0. If the first line in the
source file has sequence number 000100, then the statement number for this
specification would be 100. A line from a /COPY file member with source ID 27
and source sequence number 000100 would have statement number 27000100.
*NOSRCSTMT indicates that line numbers are assigned sequentially.
If *DEBUGIO is specified, breakpoints are generated for all input and output
specifications. *NODEBUGIO indicates that no breakpoints are to be generated for
these specifications.
If the OPTION keyword is not specified, then the values specified on the
command are used.
PRFDTA(*NOCOL | *COL)
The PRFDTA keyword specifies whether the collection of profiling data is enabled.
If *NOCOL is specified, the collection of profiling data is not enabled for this
object.
If *COL is specified, the collection of profiling is enabled for this object. *COL can
be specified only when the optimization level of the object is *FULL.
If the PRFDTA keyword is not specified, then the value specified on the command
is used.
SRTSEQ(*HEX | *JOB | *JOBRUN | *LANGIDUNQ |

*LANGIDSHR | ’sort-table-name’)
The SRTSEQ keyword specifies the sort sequence table that is to be used in the ILE
RPG source program.

If *HEX is specified, no sort sequence table is used.
If *JOB is specified, the SRTSEQ value for the job when the *PGM is created is
used.
If *JOBRUN is specified, the SRTSEQ value for the job when the *PGM is run is
used.
If *LANGIDUNQ is specified, a unique-weight table is used. This special value is

used in conjunction with the LANGID command parameter or keyword to
determine the proper sort sequence table.
If *LANGIDSHR is specified, a shared-weight table is used. This special value is

used in conjunction with the LANGID command parameter or keyword to
determine the proper sort sequence table.
A sort table name can be specified to indicate the name of the sort sequence table
to be used with the object. It can also be qualified by a library name followed by a
slash delimiter (’library-name/sort-table-name’). The library-name is the name of
the library to be searched. If a library name is not specified, *LIBL is used to find
the sort table name.
If you want to use the SRTSEQ and LANGID parameters to determine the
alternate collating sequence, you must also specify ALTSEQ(*EXT) on the control
specification.
If the SRTSEQ keyword is not specified, then the value specified on the command
is used.
TEXT(*SRCMBRTXT | *BLANK | ’description’)

The TEXT keyword allows you to enter text that briefly describes the object and its
function. The text is used when creating the object and appears when object
information is displayed.
If *SRCMBRTXT is specified, the text of the source member is used.
If *BLANK is specified, no text will appear.
If a literal is specified, it can be a maximum of 50 characters and must be enclosed

in apostrophes. (The apostrophes are not part of the 50-character string.)
If the TEXT keyword is not specified, then the value specified on the command is
used.
THREAD(*SERIALIZE)
The THREAD(*SERIALIZE) keyword indicates that the ILE RPG module created
may run in a multithreaded environment, safely. Access to the procedures in the
module is serialized. When called in a multithreaded environment, any code
within the module can be used by at most one thread at a time.
Normally, running an application in multiple threads can improve the performance

of the application. In the case of ILE RPG, this is not true in general. In fact, the
performance of a multithreaded application could be worse than that of a
single-thread version when the thread-safety is achieved by serialization of the
procedures at the module level.

Running ILE RPG procedures in a multithreaded environment is only
recommended when required by other aspects of the application (for example,
when writing a Domino exit program or when calling a short-running RPG
procedure from Java). For long-running RPG programs called from Java, we
recommend using a separate process for the RPG program.
For a list of system functions that are not allowed or supported in a multithreaded
environment, refer to the Multithreaded Applications document under the
Programming topic at the following URL:
http://www.as400.ibm.com/infocenter/
You cannot use the following in a thread-safe program:

v *INUx indicators
v External indicators (*INU1 - *INU8)
v The LR indicator for the CALL or CALLB operation
When using the THREAD(*SERIALIZE) keyword, remember the following:

v It is up to the programmer to ensure that storage that is shared across modules
is used in a thread-safe manner. This includes:
– Storage explicitly shared by being exported and imported.
– Storage shared because a procedure saves the address of a parameter or a
pointer parameter, or allocated storage, and uses it on a subsequent call.
v If shared files are used by more than one language (RPG and C, or RPG and
COBOL), ensure that only one language is accessing the file at one time.
TIMFMT(fmt{separator})
The TIMFMT keyword specifies the internal time format for time literals and the
default internal format for time fields within the program. You can specify a
different internal time format for a particular field by specifying the format with
the TIMFMT keyword on the definition specification for that field.
If the TIMFMT keyword is not specified the *ISO format is assumed. For more
information on internal formats, see “Internal and External Formats” on page 167.
Table 16 on page 196 shows the time formats supported and their separators.
TRUNCNBR(*YES | *NO)
The TRUNCNBR keyword specifies if the truncated value is moved to the result
field or if an error is generated when numeric overflow occurs while running the
object.
Note: The TRUNCNBR option does not apply to calculations performed within
expressions. (Expressions are found in the Extended-Factor 2 field.) If
overflow occurs for these calculations, an error will always occur.
If *YES is specified, numeric overflow is ignored and the truncated value is moved
to the result field.
If *NO is specified, a run-time error is generated when numeric overflow is

detected.
If the TRUNCNBR keyword is not specified, then the value specified on the
command is used.

USRPRF(*USER | *OWNER)
The USRPRF keyword specifies the user profile that will run the created program
object. The profile of the program owner or the program user is used to run the
program and to control which objects can be used by the program (including the
authority the program has for each object). This keyword is not updated if the
program already exists.
If *USER is specified, the user profile of the program’s user will run the created
program object.
If *OWNER is specified, the user profiles of both the program’s user and owner
will run the created program object. The collective set of object authority in both
user profiles is used to find and access objects while the program is running. Any
objects created during the program are owned by the program’s user.
If the USRPRF keyword is not specified, then the value specified on the command
is used.
The USRPRF keyword is valid only if the CRTBNDRPG command is used.

Chapter 14. File Description Specifications
File description specifications identify each file used by a program. Each file in a
program must have a corresponding file description specification statement.
A file can be either program-described or externally described. In

program-described files, record and field descriptions are included within the RPG
program (using input and output specifications). Externally described files have
their record and field descriptions defined externally using DDS, DSU, IDDU, or
SQL commands. (DSU is part of the CODE/400 product.)
The following limitations apply per program:

v Only one primary file can be specified. The presence of a primary file is not
required.
v Only one record-address file.
v A maximum of eight PRINTER files.
v There is no limit for the maximum number of files allowed.
File Description Specification Statement

The general layout for the file description specification is as follows:
v the file description specification type (F) is entered in position 6
v the non-commentary part of the specification extends from position 7 to position
80
– the fixed-format entries extend from positions 7 to 42
– the keyword entries extend from positions 44 to 80
v the comments section of the specification extends from position 81 to position
100
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8 ...+... 9 ...+... 10
FFilename++IPEASFRlen+LKlen+AIDevice+.Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++Comments++++++++++++
Figure 103. File Description Specification Layout
File-Description Keyword Continuation Line

If additional space is required for keywords, the keywords field can be continued
on subsequent lines as follows:
v position 6 of the continuation line must contain an F
v positions 7 to 43 of the continuation line must be blank
v the specification continues on or past position 44
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8 ...+... 9 ...+... 10
F.....................................Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++Comments++++++++++++
Figure 104. File-Description Keyword Continuation Line Layout

An F must be entered in this position for file description specifications.
Positions 7-16 (File Name)

Entry Explanation
A valid file name
Every file used in a program must have a unique name. The file
name can be from 1 to 10 characters long, and must begin in
position 7.
At compile time:
v If the file is program-described, the file named in position 7 does not need to
exist.
v If the file is externally-described, the file named in position 7 must exist but you
can use an OS/400 system override command to associate the name to a file
defined to the OS/400 system.
At run time:
v If you use the EXTFILE keyword, the EXTMBR keyword, or both, RPG will open
the file named in these keywords.
v Otherwise, RPG will open the file named in position 7. This file (or an
overridden file) must exist when the file is opened.
v If an OS/400 system override command has been used for the file that RPG
opens, that override will take effect and the actual file opened will depend on
the override. See the “EXTFILE(filename)” on page 270 keyword for more
information about how overrides interact with this keyword.
When files that are not defined by the USROPN keyword are opened at run time,
they are opened in the reverse order to that specified in the file description
specifications. The RPG IV device name defines the operations that can be
processed on the associated file.
Program-Described File
For program-described files, the file name entered in positions 7 through 16 must
also be entered on:
v Input specifications if the file is a primary, secondary, or full procedural file
v Output specifications or an output calculation operation line if the file is an
output, update, or combined file, or if file addition is specified for the file
v Definition specifications if the file is a table or array file.
v Calculation specifications if the file name is required for the operation code
specified
Externally-Described File
For externally described files, the file name entered in positions 7 through 16 is the
name used to locate the record descriptions for the file. The following rules apply
to externally described files:
v Input and output specifications for externally described files are optional. They
are required only if you are adding RPG IV functions, such as control fields or
record identifying indicators, to the external description retrieved.
v When an external description is retrieved, the record definition can be referred
to by its record format name on the input, output, or calculation specifications.
v A record format name must be a unique symbolic name.

v RPG IV does not support an externally described logical file with two record
formats of the same name. However, such a file can be accessed if it is program
described.
Position 17 (File Type)

Entry Explanation
I Input file
O Output file
U Update file
C Combined (input/output) file.
Input Files
An input file is one from which a program reads information. It can contain data
records, arrays, or tables, or it can be a record-address file.
Output Files
An output file is a file to which information is written.
Update Files
An update file is an input file whose records can be read and updated. Updating
alters the data in one or more fields of any record contained in the file and writes
that record back to the same file from which it was read. If records are to be
deleted, the file must be specified as an update file.
Combined Files
A combined file is both an input file and an output file. When a combined file is
processed, the output record contains only the data represented by the fields in the
output record. This differs from an update file, where the output record contains
the input record modified by the fields in the output record.
A combined file is valid for a SPECIAL or WORKSTN file. A combined file is also
valid for a DISK or SEQ file if position 18 contains T (an array or table
replacement file).
Position 18 (File Designation)

Entry Explanation
Blank Output file
P Primary file
S Secondary file
R Record address file
T Array or table file
F Full procedural file
You cannot specify P, S, or R if the keyword NOMAIN is specified on a control

specification.
Primary File
When several files are processed by cycle processing, one must be designated as
the primary file. In multi-file processing, processing of the primary file takes
precedence. Only one primary file is allowed per program.
Chapter 14. File Description Specifications 259

Secondary File
When more than one file is processed by the RPG cycle, the additional files are
specified as secondary files. Secondary files must be input capable (input, update,
or combined file type). The processing of secondary files is determined by the
order in which they are specified in the file description specifications and by the
rules of multi-file logic.
Record Address File (RAF)

A record-address file is a sequentially organized file used to select records from
another file. Only one file in a program can be specified as a record-address file.
This file is described on the file description specification and not on the input
specifications. A record-address file must be program-described; however, a
record-address file can be used to process a program described file or an externally
described file.
The file processed by the record-address file must be a primary, secondary, or

full-procedural file, and must also be specified as the parameter to the RAFDATA
keyword on the file description specification of the record-address file.
You cannot specify a record-address file for the device SPECIAL.
UCS-2 fields are not allowed as the record address type for record address files.
A record-address file that contains relative-record numbers must also have a T

specified in position 35 and an F in position 22.
Array or Table File

Array and table files specified by a T in position 18 are loaded at program
initialization time. The array or table file can be input or combined. Leave this
entry blank for array or table output files. You cannot specify SPECIAL as the
device for array and table input files. You cannot specify an externally described
file as an array or table file.
If T is specified in position 18, you can specify a file type of combined (C in

position 17) for a DISK or SEQ file. A file type of combined allows an array or
table file to be read from or written to the same file (an array or table replacement
file). In addition to a C in position 17, the filename in positions 7-16 must also be
specified as the parameter to the TOFILE keyword on the definition specification.
Full Procedural File

A full procedural file is not processed by the RPG cycle: input is controlled by
calculation operations. File operation codes such as CHAIN or READ are used to
do input functions.
Position 19 (End of File)

Entry Explanation
E All records from the file must be processed before the program can end.
This entry is not valid for files processed by a record-address file.
All records from all files which use this option must be processed before
the LR indicator is set on by the RPG cycle to end the program.
Blank If position 19 is blank for all files, all records from all files must be
processed before end of program (LR) can occur. If position 19 is not blank
for all files, all records from this file may or may not be processed before
end of program occurs in multi-file processing.

Use position 19 to indicate whether the program can end before all records from
the file are processed. An E in position 19 applies only to input, update, or
combined files specified as primary, secondary, or record-address files.
If the records from all primary and secondary files must be processed, position 19
must be blank for all files or must contain E’s for all files. For multiple input files,
the end-of-program (LR) condition occurs when all input files for which an E is
specified in position 19 have been processed. If position 19 is blank for all files, the
end-of-program condition occurs when all input files have been processed.
When match fields are specified for two or more files and an E is specified in
position 19 for one or more files, the LR indicator is set on after:
v The end-of-file condition occurs for the last file with an E specified in position
19.
v The program has processed all the records in other files that match the last
record processed from the primary file.
v The program has processed the records in those files without match fields up to
the next record with non-matching match fields.
When no file or only one file contains match field specifications, no records of
other files are processed after end of file occurs on all files for which an E is
specified in position 19.
Position 20 (File Addition)

Position 20 indicates whether records are to be added to an input or update file.
For output files, this entry is ignored.
Entry Explanation
Blank No records can be added to an input or update file (I or U in position 17).
A Records are added to an input or update file when positions 18 through 20
of the output record specifications for the file contain ″ADD″, or when the
WRITE operation code is used in the calculation specification.
See Table 25 for the relationship between position 17 and position 20 of the file
description specifications and positions 18 through 20 of the output specifications.
Table 25. Processing Functions for Files
Specification
File Description Output
Function Position 17 Position 20 Positions 18-20
1
Create new file O Blank Blank
or O A ADD
Add records to existing file
Process file I Blank Blank
Process file and add records to the existing I A ADD
file
Process file and update the records (update U Blank Blank
or delete)
Process file and add new records to an U A ADD
existing file
Process file and delete an existing record U Blank DEL
from the file

Table 25. Processing Functions for Files (continued)
Specification
File Description Output
Function Position 17 Position 20 Positions 18-20
Note: Within RPG, the term create a new file means to add records to a newly created file. Thus, the first two entries
in this table perform the identical function. Both are listed to show that there are two ways to specify that function.
Position 21 (Sequence)
Entry Explanation
A or blank Match fields are in ascending sequence.
D Match fields are in descending sequence.
Position 21 specifies the sequence of input fields used with the match fields
specification (positions 65 and 66 of the input specifications). Position 21 applies
only to input, update, or combined files used as primary or secondary files. Use
positions 65 and 66 of the input specifications to identify the fields containing the
sequence information.
If more than one input file with match fields is specified in the program, a
sequence entry in position 21 can be used to check the sequence of the match fields
and to process the file using the matching record technique. The sequence need
only be specified for the first file with match fields specified. If sequence is
specified for other files, the sequence specified must be the same; otherwise, the
sequence specified for the first file is assumed.
If only one input file with match fields is specified in the program, a sequence
entry in position 21 can be used to check fields of that file to ensure that the file is
in sequence. By entering one of the codes M1 through M9 in positions 65 and 66 of
the input specifications, and by entering an A, blank, or D in position 21, you
specify sequence checking of these fields.
Sequence checking is required when match fields are used in the records from the
file. When a record from a matching input file is found to be out of sequence, the
RPG IV exception/error handling routine is given control.
Position 22 (File Format)

Entry Explanation
F Program-described file
E Externally described file
An F in position 22 indicates that the records for the file are described within the
program on input/output specifications (except for array/table files and
record-address files).
An E in position 22 indicates that the record descriptions for the file are external to
the RPG IV source program. The compiler obtains these descriptions at compilation
time and includes them in the source program.

Positions 23-27 (Record Length)
Use positions 23 through 27 to indicate the length of the logical records contained
in a program-described file. The maximum record size that can be specified is
32766; however, record-size constraints of any device may override this value. This
entry must be blank for externally described files.
If the file being defined is a record-address file and the record length specified is 3,
it is assumed that each record in the file consists of a 3-byte binary field for the
relative-record numbers starting at offset 0. If the record length is 4 or greater, each
relative-record number in the record-address file is assumed to be a 4-byte field
starting at offset 1. If the record length is left blank, the actual record length is
retrieved at run time to determine how to handle the record-address file.
If the file opened at run time has a primary record length of 3, then 3-byte
relative-record numbers (one per record) are assumed; otherwise, 4-byte
relative-record numbers are assumed. This support can be used to allow ILE RPG
programs to use System/36™ environment SORT files as record-address files.
Table 26. Valid Combinations for a Record Address File containing Relative Record
Numbers (RAFRRN)
Record Length RAF Length Type of Support
Positions 23-27 Positions 29-33
Blank Blank Support determined at run time.
3 3 System/36 support.
>=4 4 Native support.
Position 28 (Limits Processing)

Entry Explanation
L Sequential-within-limits processing by a record-address file
Blank Sequential or random processing
Use position 28 to indicate whether the file is processed by a record-address file

that contains limits records.
A record-address file used for limits processing contains records that consist of
upper and lower limits. Each record contains a set of limits that consists of the
lowest record key and the highest record key from the segment of the file to be
processed. Limits processing can be used for keyed files specified as primary,
secondary, or full procedural files.
The L entry in position 28 is valid only if the file is processed by a record-address

file containing limits records. Random and sequential processing of files is implied
by a combination of positions 18 and 34 of the file description specifications, and
by the calculation operation specified.
The operation codes “SETLL (Set Lower Limit)” on page 715 and “SETGT (Set
Greater Than)” on page 711 can be used to position a file; however, the use of these
operation codes does not require an L in this position.
For more information on limits processing, refer to the WebSphere Development


Positions 29-33 (Length of Key or Record Address)
Entry Explanation
1-2000 The number of positions required for the key field in a program
described file or the length of the entries in the record-address file
(which must be a program-described file).
If the program-described file being defined uses keys for record
identification, enter the number of positions occupied by each
record key. This entry is required for indexed files.
If the keys are packed, the key field length should be the packed
length; this is the number of digits in DDS divided by 2 plus 1 and
ignoring any fractions.
If the file being defined is a record-address file, enter the number
of positions that each entry in the record-address file occupies.
If the keys are graphic, the key field length should be specified in
bytes (for example, 3 graphic characters requires 6 bytes).
Blank These positions must be blank for externally described files. (The
key length is specified in the external description.) For a
program-described file, a blank entry indicates that keys are not
used. Positions 29-33 can also be blank for a record-address file
with a blank in positions 23-27 (record length).
Position 34 (Record Address Type)

Entry Explanation
Blank Relative record numbers are used to process the file.
Records are read consecutively.
Record address file contains relative-record numbers.
For limits processing, the record-address type (position 34) is the same as
the type of the file being processed.
A Character keys (valid only for program-described files specified as indexed
files or as a record-address-limits file).
P Packed keys (valid only for program-described files specified as indexed
G Graphic keys (valid only for program-described files specified as indexed
K Key values are used to process the file. This entry is valid only for
externally described files.
D Date keys are used to process the file. This entry is valid only for
program-described files specified as indexed files or as a
record-address-limits file.
T Time keys are used to process the file. This entry is valid only for
Z Timestamp Keys are used to process the file. This entry is valid only for

F Float Key (valid only for program-described files specified as indexed files
or as a record-address-limits file).
UCS-2 fields are not allowed as the record address type for program described
indexed files or record address files.
Blank=Non-keyed Processing
A blank indicates that the file is processed without the use of keys, that the
record-address file contains relative-record numbers (a T in position 35), or that the
keys in a record-address-limits file are in the same format as the keys in the file
being processed.
A file processed without keys can be processed consecutively or randomly by

relative-record number.
Input processing by relative-record number is determined by a blank in position 34

and by the use of the CHAIN, SETLL, or SETGT operation code. Output
processing by relative-record number is determined by a blank in position 34 and
by the use of the RECNO keyword on the file description specifications.
A=Character Keys
The indexed file (I in position 35) defined on this line is processed by
character-record keys. (A numeric field used as the search argument is converted to
zoned decimal before chaining.) The A entry must agree with the data format of
the field identified as the key field (length in positions 29 to 33 and starting
position specified as the parameter to the KEYLOC keyword).
The record-address-limits file (R in position 18) defined on this line contains

character keys. The file being processed by this record address file can have an A,
P, or K in position 34.
P=Packed Keys
The indexed file (I in position 35) defined on this line is processed by
packed-decimal-numeric keys. The P entry must agree with the data format of the
field identified as the key field (length in positions 29 to 33 and starting position
specified as the parameter to the KEYLOC keyword).
The record-address-limits file defined on this line contains record keys in packed
decimal format. The file being processed by this record address file can have an A,
P, or K in position 34.
G=Graphic Keys
The indexed file (I in position 35) defined on this line is processed by graphic keys.
Since each graphic character requires two bytes, the key length must be an even
number. The record-address file which is used to process this indexed file must
also have a ’G’ specified in position 34 of its file description specification, and its
key length must also be the same as the indexed file’s key length (positions 29-33).
K=Key
A K entry indicates that the externally described file is processed on the
assumption that the access path is built on key values. If the processing is random,
key values are used to identify the records.
If this position is blank for a keyed file, the records are retrieved in arrival
sequence.

D=Date Keys
The indexed file (I in position 35) defined on this line is processed by date keys.
The D entry must agree with the data format of the field identified as the key field
(length in positions 29 to 33 and starting position specified as the parameter to the
KEYLOC keyword).
The hierarchy used when determining the format and separator for the date key is:
1. From the DATFMT keyword specified on the file description specification
2. From the DATFMT keyword specified in the control specification
3. *ISO
T=Time Keys
The indexed file (I in position 35) defined on this line is processed by time keys.
The T entry must agree with the data format of the field identified as the key field
(length in positions 29 to 33 and starting position specified as the parameter to the
KEYLOC keyword).
The hierarchy used when determining the format and separator for the time key is:
1. From the TIMFMT keyword specified on the file description specification
2. From the TIMFMT keyword specified in the control specification
3. *ISO
Z=Timestamp Keys
The indexed file (I in position 35) defined on this line is processed by timestamp
keys. The Z entry must agree with the data format of the field identified as the key
field (length in positions 29 to 33 and starting position specified as the parameter
to the KEYLOC keyword).
F=Float Keys
The indexed file (I in position 35) defined on this line is processed by float keys.
The Length-of-Key entry (positions 29-33) must contain a value of either 4 or 8 for
a float key. When a file contains a float key, any type of numeric variable or literal
may be specified as a key on keyed input/output operations. For a non-float
record address type, you cannot have a float search argument.
For more information on record address type, refer to the WebSphere Development
Position 35 (File Organization)

Entry Explanation
Blank The program-described file is processed without keys, or the file is
externally described.
I Indexed file (valid only for program-described files).
T Record address file that contains relative-record numbers (valid only for
program-described files).
Use position 35 to identify the organization of program described files.
Blank=Non-keyed Program-Described File

A program-described file that is processed without keys can be processed:
v Randomly by relative-record numbers, positions 28 and 34 must be blank.
v Entry Sequence, positions 28 and 34 must be blank.

v As a record-address file, position 28 must be blank.
I=Indexed File
An indexed file can be processed:
v Randomly or sequentially by key
v By a record-address file (sequentially within limits). Position 28 must contain an
L.
T=Record Address File

A record-address file (indicated by an R in position 18) that contains relative-record
numbers must be identified by a T in position 35. (A record-address file must be
program described.) Each record retrieved from the file being processed is based
on the relative record number in the record-address file. (Relative record numbers
cannot be used for a record-address-limits file.)
Each relative-record number in the record-address file is a 4-byte binary field;

therefore, each 4-byte unit of a record-address file contains a relative-record
number. A minus one (-1 or hexadecimal FFFFFFFF ) relative-record number value
causes the record to be skipped. End of file occurs when all record-address file
records have been processed.
For more information on how to handle record-address files, see the WebSphere
Positions 36-42 (Device)

Entry Explanation
PRINTER File is a printer file, a file with control characters that can be sent
to a printer.
DISK File is a disk file. This device supports sequential and random
read/write functions. These files can be accessed on a remote
system by Distributed Data Management (DDM).
WORKSTN File is a workstation file. Input/output is through a display or ICF
file.
SPECIAL This is a special file. Input or output is on a device that is accessed
by a user-supplied program. The name of the program must be
specified as the parameter for the PGMNAME keyword. A
parameter list is created for use with this program, including an
option code parameter and a status code parameter. The file must
be a fixed unblocked format. See “PLIST(Plist_name)” on page 275
and “PGMNAME(program_name)” on page 274 for more
information.
SEQ File is a sequentially organized file. The actual device is specified
in a CL command or in the file description, which is accessed by
the file name.
Use positions 36 through 42 to specify the RPG IV device name to be associated

with the file. The RPG IV device name defines the ILE RPG functions that can be
done on the associated file. Certain functions are valid only for a specific ILE RPG
device name (such as the EXFMT operation for WORKSTN). The file name
specified in positions 7 through 16 can be overridden at run time, allowing you to
change the input/output device used in the program.
Note that the RPG IV device names are not the same as the system device names.

Position 43 (Reserved)
Position 43 must be blank.

Positions 44 to 80 are provided for file-description-specification keywords.
Keywords are used to provide additional information about the file being defined.
File-Description Keywords
File-Description keywords may have no parameters, optional parameters, or
where:

enclosed in braces.
keyword.
If additional space is required for file-description keywords, the keyword field can
be continued on subsequent lines. See “File-Description Keyword Continuation
Line” on page 257 and “File Description Specification Keyword Field” on page 235.
BLOCK(*YES |*NO)
The BLOCK keyword controls the blocking of records associated with the file. The
keyword is valid only for DISK or SEQ files.
If this keyword is not specified, the RPG compiler unblocks input records and
blocks output records to improve run-time performance in SEQ or DISK files when
the following conditions are met:
1. The file is program-described or, if externally described, it has only one record
format.
2. Keyword RECNO is not used in the file description specification.
Note: If RECNO is used, the ILE RPG compiler will not allow record blocking.
However, if the file is an input file and RECNO is used, Data

Management may still block records if fast sequential access is set. This
means that updated records might not be seen right away.
3. One of the following is true:
a. The file is an output file.
b. If the file is a combined file, then it is an array or table file.
c. The file is an input-only file; it is not a record-address file or processed by a
record-address file; and none of the following operations are used on the
file: READE, READPE, SETGT, SETLL, and CHAIN. (If any READE or
READPE operations are used, no record blocking will occur for the input
file. If any SETGT, SETLL, or CHAIN operations are used, no record
blocking will occur unless the BLOCK(*YES) keyword is specified for the
input file.)
If BLOCK(*YES) is specified, record blocking occurs as described above except that

the operations SETLL, SETGT, and CHAIN can be used with an input file and
blocking will still occur (see condition 3c above). To prevent the blocking of
records, BLOCK(*NO) can be specified. Then no record blocking is done by the
compiler.
COMMIT{(rpg_name)}
The COMMIT keyword allows the processing files under commitment control. An
optional parameter, rpg_name, may be specified. The parameter is implicitly
defined as a field of type indicator (that is, a character field of length one), and is
initialized by RPG to ’0’.
By specifying the optional parameter, you can control at run time whether to
enable commitment control. If the parameter contains a ’1’, the file will be opened
with the COMMIT indication on, otherwise the file will be opened without
COMMIT. The parameter must be set prior to opening the file. If the file is opened
at program initialization, the COMMIT parameter can be passed as a call
parameter or defined as an external indicator. If the file is opened explicitly, using
the OPEN operation in the calculation specifications, the parameter can be set prior
to the OPEN operation.
Use the COMMIT and ROLBK operation codes to group changes to this file and
other files currently under commitment control so that changes all happen
together, or do not happen at all.
Note: If the file is already open with a shared open data path, the value for
commitment control must match the value for the previous OPEN operation.
DATFMT(format{separator})
The DATFMT keyword allows the specification of a default external date format
and a default separator (which is optional) for all date fields in the
program-described file. If the file on which this keyword is specified is indexed
and the key field is a date, then this also provides the default external format for
the key field.
For a Record-Address file this specifies the external date format of date limits keys
read from the record-address file.

You can specify a different external format for individual input or output date
fields in the file by specifying a date format/separator for the field on the
corresponding input specification (positions 31-35) or output specification
(positions 53-57).
See Table 13 on page 194 for valid formats and separators. For more information on
external formats, see “Internal and External Formats” on page 167.
DEVID(fieldname)
The DEVID keyword specifies the name of the program device that supplied the
record processed in the file. The field is updated each time a record is read from a
file. Also, you may move a program device name into this field to direct an output
or device-specific input operation (other than a READ-by-file-name or an implicit
cycle read) to a different device.
The fieldname is implicitly defined as a 10-character alphanumeric field. The

device name specified in the field must be left-justified and padded with blanks.
Initially, the field is blank. A blank field indicates the requester device. If the
requester device is not acquired for your file, you must not use a blank field.
The DEVID field is maintained for each call to a program. If you call program B
from within program A, the DEVID field for program A is not affected. Program B
uses a separate DEVID field. When you return to program A, its DEVID field has
the same value as it had before you called program B. If program B needs to know
which devices are acquired to program A, program A must pass this information
(as a parameter list) when it calls program B.
If the DEVID keyword is specified but not the MAXDEV keyword, the program
assumes a multiple device file (MAXDEV with a parameter of *FILE).
To determine the name of the requester device, you may look in the appropriate
area of the file information data structure (see “File Information Data Structure” on
page 65). Or, you may process an input or output operation where the fieldname
contains blanks. After the operation, the fieldname has the name of the requester
device.
EXTFILE(filename)
The EXTFILE keyword specifies which file, in which library, is opened. The value
can be a literal or a variable. You can specify the value in any of the following
forms:
filename
libname/filename
*LIBL/filename
Notes:
1. You cannot specify *CURLIB as the library name.
2. If you specify a file name without a library name, *LIBL is used.
3. The name must be in the correct case. For example, if you specify
EXTFILE(filename) and variable filename has the value ’qtemp/myfile’, the file
will not be found. Instead, it should have the value ’QTEMP/MYFILE’.
4. This keyword is not used to find an externally-described file at compile time.
5. If a variable name is used, it must be set before the file is opened. For files that
are opened automatically during the initialization part of the cycle, the variable
must be set in one of the following ways:

v Using the INZ keyword on the D specification
v Passing the value in as an entry parameter
v Using a program-global variable that is set by another module.
If you have specified an override for the file that RPG will open, that override will
be in effect. In the following code, for the file named INPUT within the RPG
program, the file that is opened at runtime depends on the value of the filename
field.
Finput if f 10 disk extfile(filename)
If the filename field has the value MYLIB/MYFILE at runtime, RPG will open the
file MYLIB/MYFILE. If the command OVRDBF MYFILE OTHERLIB/OTHERFILE
has been used, the actual file opened will be OTHERLIB/OTHERFILE. Note that
any overrides for the name INPUT will be ignored, since INPUT is only the name
used within the RPG source member.
EXTIND(*INUx)
The EXTIND keyword indicates whether the file is used in the program depending
on the value of the external indicator.
EXTIND lets the programmer control the operation of input, output, update, and
combined files at run time. If the specified indicator is on at program initialization,
the file is opened. If the indicator is not on, the file is not opened and is ignored
during processing. The *INU1 through *INU8 indicators can be set as follows:
v By the OS/400 control language.
v When used as a resulting indicator for a calculation operation or as field
indicators on the input specifications. Setting the *INU1 through *INU8
indicators in this manner has no effect on file conditioning.
See also “USROPN” on page 279.
EXTMBR(membername)
The EXTMBR keyword specifies which member of the file is opened. You can
specify a member name, ’*ALL’, or ’*FIRST’. Note that ’*ALL’ and ’*FIRST’ must
be specified in quotes, since they are member ″names″, not RPG special words. The
value can be a literal or a variable. The default is ’*FIRST’.
The name must be in the correct case. For example, if you specify EXTMBR(mbrname)
and variable mbrname has the value ’mbr1’, the member will not be found. Instead,
it should have the value ’MBR1’.
If a variable name is used, it must be set before the file is opened. For files that are
opened automatically during the initialization part of the cycle, the variable must
be set in one of the following ways:
v Using the INZ keyword on the D specification
v Passing the value in as an entry parameter
v Using a program-global variable that is set by another module.
FORMLEN(number)
The FORMLEN keyword specifies the form length of a PRINTER file. The form
length must be greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 255. The
parameter specifies the exact number of lines available on the form or page to be
used.

Changing the form length does not require recompiling the program. You can
override the number parameter of FORMLEN by specifying a new value for the
PAGSIZE parameter of the Override With Printer File (OVRPRTF) command.
When the FORMLEN keyword is specified, the FORMOFL keyword must also be
specified.
FORMOFL(number)
The FORMOFL keyword specifies the overflow line number that will set on the
overflow indicator. The overflow line number must be less than or equal to the
form length. When the line that is specified as the overflow line is printed, the
overflow indicator is set on.
Changing the overflow line does not require recompiling the program. You can
override the number parameter of FORMOFL by specifying a new value for the
OVRFLW parameter of the Override With Printer File (OVRPRTF) command.
When the FORMOFL keyword is specified, the FORMLEN keyword must also be
specified.
IGNORE(recformat{:recformat...})
The IGNORE keyword allows a record format from an externally described file to
be ignored. The external name of the record format to be ignored is specified as
the parameter recformat. One or more record formats can be specified, separated
by colons (:). The program runs as if the specified record format(s) did not exist.
All other record formats contained in the file will be included.
When the IGNORE keyword is specified for a file, the INCLUDE keyword cannot
be specified.
INCLUDE(recformat{:recformat...})
The INCLUDE keyword specifies those record format names that are to be
included; all other record formats contained in the file will be ignored. For
WORKSTN files, the record formats specified using the SFILE keyword are also
included in the program, they need not be specified twice. Multiple record formats
can be specified, separated by colons (:).
When the INCLUDE keyword is specified for a file, the IGNORE keyword cannot
be specified.
INDDS(data_structure_name)
The INDDS keyword lets you associate a data structure name with the INDARA
indicators for a workstation or printer file. This data structure contains the
conditioning and response indicators passed to and from data management for the
file, and is called an indicator data structure.
Rules:
v This keyword is allowed only for externally described PRINTER files and
externally and program-described WORKSTN files.
v For a program-described file, the PASS(*NOIND) keyword must not be specified
with the INDDS keyword.
v The same data structure name may be associated with more than one file.

v The data structure name must be defined as a data structure on the definition
specifications and can be a multiple-occurrence data structure.
v The length of the indicator data structure is always 99.
v The indicator data structure is initialized by default to all zeros (’0’s).
v The SAVEIND keyword cannot be specified with this keyword.
If this keyword is not specified, the *IN array is used to communicate indicator
values for all files defined with the DDS keyword INDARA.
For additional information on indicator data structures, see “Special Data

Structures” on page 132.
INFDS(DSname)
The INFDS keyword lets you define and name a data structure to contain the
feedback information associated with the file. The data structure name is specified
as the parameter for INFDS. If INFDS is specified for more than one file, each
associated data structure must have a unique name. An INFDS can only be defined
in the main source section.
For additional information on file information data structures, see “File

Information Data Structure” on page 65.
INFSR(SUBRname)
The INFSR keyword identifies the file exception/error subroutine that may receive
control following file exception/errors. The subroutine name may be *PSSR, which
indicates the user-defined program exception/error subroutine is to be given
control for errors on this file.
The INFSR keyword cannot be specified if the file is to be accessed by a

subprocedure, or if NOMAIN is specified on the control specification.
KEYLOC(number)
The KEYLOC keyword specifies the record position in which the key field for a
program-described indexed-file begins. The parameter must be between 1 and
32766.
The key field of a record contains the information that identifies the record. The
key field must be in the same location in all records in the file.
MAXDEV(*ONLY | *FILE)
The MAXDEV keyword specifies the maximum number of devices defined for the
WORKSTN file. The default, *ONLY, indicates a single device file. If *FILE is
specified, the maximum number of devices (defined for the WORKSTN file on the
create-file command) is retrieved at file open, and SAVEIND and SAVEDS space
allocation will be done at run time.
With a shared file, the MAXDEV value is not used to restrict the number of
acquired devices.
When you specify DEVID, SAVEIND, or SAVEDS but not MAXDEV, the program
assumes the default of a multiple device file (MAXDEV with a parameter of
*FILE).

OFLIND(indicator)
The OFLIND keyword specifies an overflow indicator to condition which lines in
the PRINTER file will be printed when overflow occurs. This entry is valid only
for a PRINTER device. Default overflow processing (that is, automatic page eject at
overflow) is done if the OFLIND keyword is not specified.
Valid Parameters:
*INOA-*INOG, *INOV:
Specified overflow indicator conditions the lines to be printed when
overflow occurs on a program described printer file.
*IN01-*IN99:
Set on when a line is printed on the overflow line, or the overflow line is
reached or passed during a space or skip operation.
name: The name of a variable that is defined with type indicator and is not an
array. This indicator is set on when the overflow line is reached and the
program must handle the overflow condition.
The behavior is the same as for indicators *IN01 to *IN99.
Note: Indicators *INOA through *INOG, and *INOV are not valid for externally
described files.
Only one overflow indicator can be assigned to a file. If more than one PRINTER
file in a program is assigned an overflow indicator, that indicator must be unique
for each file.
PASS(*NOIND)
The PASS keyword determines whether indicators are passed under programmer
control or based on the DDS keyword INDARA. This keyword can only be
specified for program-described files. To indicate that you are taking responsibility
for passing indicators on input and output, specify PASS(*NOIND) on the file
description specification of the corresponding program-described WORKSTN file.
When PASS(*NOIND) is specified, the ILE RPG compiler does not pass indicators
to data management on output, nor does it receive them on input. Instead you
pass indicators by describing them as fields (in the form *INxx, *IN(xx), or *IN) in
the input or output record. They must be specified in the sequence required by the
data description specifications (DDS). You can use the DDS listing to determine
this sequence.
If this keyword is not specified, the compiler assumes that INDARA was specified
in the DDS.
Note: If the file has the INDARA keyword specified in the DDS, you must not
specify PASS(*NOIND). If it does not, you must specify PASS(*NOIND).
PGMNAME(program_name)
The PGMNAME keyword identifies the program that is to handle the support for
the special I/O device (indicated by a Device-Entry of SPECIAL).
Note: The parameter must be a valid program name and not a bound procedure
name.

See “Positions 36-42 (Device)” on page 267 and “PLIST(Plist_name)” for more
information.
PLIST(Plist_name)
The PLIST keyword identifies the name of the parameter list to be passed to the
program for the SPECIAL file. The parameters identified by this entry are added to
the end of the parameter list passed by the program. (The program is specified
using the PGMNAME keyword, see “PGMNAME(program_name)” on page 274.)
This keyword can only be specified when the Device-Entry (positions 36 to 42) in
the file description line is SPECIAL.
PREFIX(prefix{:nbr_of_char_replaced})
The PREFIX keyword is used to partially rename the fields in an externally
described file. The character string or character literal specified is prefixed to the
names of all fields defined in all records of the file specified in positions 7-16. In
addition, you can optionally specify a numeric value to indicate the number of
characters, if any, in the existing name to be replaced. If the ’nbr_of_char_replaced’
is not specified, then the string is attached to the beginning of the name.
If the ’nbr_of_char_replaced’ is specified, it must be a numeric constant containing

a value between 0 and 9 with no decimal places. For example, the specification
PREFIX(YE:3) would change the field name ’YTDTOTAL’ to ’YETOTAL’.
Specifying a value of zero is the same as not specifying ’nbr_of_char_replaced’ at
all.
Rules:
v You can explicitly rename a field on an input specification, even when the
PREFIX keyword is specified for a file. The compiler will recognize (and require)
the name which is first USED in your program. For example, if you specify the
prefixed name on an input specification to associate the field with an indicator,
and you then try to rename the field referencing the unprefixed name, you will
get an error. Conversely, if you first rename the field to something other than the
prefixed name, and you then use the prefixed name on a specification, you will
get an error at compile-time.
v The total length of the name after applying the prefix must not exceed the
maximum length of an RPG field name.
v The number of characters in the name to be prefixed must not be less than or
equal to the value represented by the ’nbr_of_char_replaced’ parameter. That is,
after applying the prefix, the resulting name must not be the same as the prefix
string.
v If the prefix is a character literal, it can end in a period.
v If the prefix is a character literal, it must be uppercase. In this case, the field
names must all be subfields of the same qualified data structure.
Examples:
The following example uses prefix ’MYDS.’ to associate the fields in MYFILE with
the subfields of qualified data structure MYDS.
Fmyfile if e disk prefix(’MYDS.’)
D myds e ds qualified extname(myfile)
The next example uses prefix ’MYDS.F2’:3 to associate the fields in MYFILE with
the subfields of qualified data structure MYDS. The subfields themselves are
further prefixed by replacing the first three characters with ’F2’. The fields used by

this file will be MYDS2.F2FLD1 and MYDS2.F2FLD2. (Data structure MYDS2 must
be defined with a similar prefix. However, it is not exactly the same, since it does
not include the data structure name.)
A R REC
A ACRFLD1 10A
A ACRFLD2 5S 0
Fmyfile2 if e disk prefix(’MYDS2.F2’:3)
D myds2 e ds qualified extname(myfile)
D prefix(’F2’:3)
PRTCTL(data_struct{:*COMPAT})
The PRTCTL keyword specifies the use of dynamic printer control. The data
structure specified as the parameter data_struct refers to the forms control
information and line count value. The PRTCTL keyword is valid only for a
program described file.
The optional parameter *COMPAT indicates that the data structure layout is
compatible with RPG III. The default, *COMPAT not specified, will require the use
of the extended length data structure.
Extended Length PRTCTL Data Structure

A minimum of 15 bytes is required for this data structure. Layout of the PRTCTL
data structure is as follows:
Data Structure Positions
Subfield Contents
1-3 A three-position character field that contains the space-before value (valid
entries: blank or 0-255)
4-6 A three-position character field that contains the space-after value (valid
7-9 A three-position character field that contains the skip-before value (valid
10-12 A three-position character field that contains the skip-after value (valid
13-15 A three-digit numeric (zoned decimal) field with zero decimal positions
that contains the current line count value.
*COMPAT PRTCTL Data Structure

Data Structure Positions
Subfield Contents
1 A one-position character field that contains the space-before value (valid
2 A one-position character field that contains the space-after value (valid
3-4 A two-position character field that contains the skip-before value (valid
entries: blank, 1-99, A0-A9 for 100-109, B0-B2 for 110-112)
5-6 A two-position character field that contains the skip-after value (valid
entries: blank, 1-99, A0-A9 for 100-109, B0-B2 for 110-112)
7-9 A three-digit numeric (zoned decimal) field with zero decimal positions
that contains the current line count value.

The values contained in the first four subfields of the extended length data
structure are the same as those allowed in positions 40 through 51 (space and skip
entries) of the output specifications. If the space and skip entries (positions 40
through 51) of the output specifications are blank, and if subfields 1 through 4 are
also blank, the default is to space 1 after. If the PRTCTL option is specified, it is
used only for the output records that have blanks in positions 40 through 51. You
can control the space and skip value (subfields 1 through 4) for the PRINTER file
by changing the values in these subfields while the program is running.
Subfield 5 contains the current line count value. The ILE RPG compiler does not
initialize subfield 5 until after the first output line is printed. The compiler then
changes subfield 5 after each output operation to the file.
RAFDATA(filename)
The RAFDATA keyword identifies the name of the input or update file that
contains the data records to be processed for a Record Address File (RAF) (an R in
position 18). See “Record Address File (RAF)” on page 260 for further information.
RECNO(fieldname)
The RECNO keyword specifies that a DISK file is to be processed by
relative-record number. The RECNO keyword must be specified for output files
processed by relative-record number, output files that are referenced by a random
WRITE calculation operation, or output files that are used with ADD on the output
specifications.
The RECNO keyword can be specified for input/update files. The relative-record
number of the record retrieved is placed in the ’fieldname’, for all operations that
reposition the file (such as READ, SETLL, or OPEN). It must be defined as numeric
with zero decimal positions. The field length must be sufficient to contain the
longest record number for the file.
The compiler will not open a SEQ or DISK file for blocking or unblocking records
if the RECNO keyword is specified for the file. Note that the keywords RECNO
and BLOCK(*YES) cannot be specified for the same file.
Note: When the RECNO keyword is specified for input or update files with
file-addition (’A’ in position 20), the value of the fieldname parameter must
refer to a relative-record number of a deleted record, for the output
operation to be successful.
RENAME(Ext_format:Int_format)
The RENAME keyword allows you to rename record formats in an externally
described file. The external name of the record format that is to be renamed is
entered as the Ext_format parameter. The Int_format parameter is the name of the
record as it is used in the program. The external name is replaced by this name in
the program.
To rename all fields by adding a prefix, use the PREFIX keyword.
SAVEDS(DSname)
The SAVEDS keyword allows the specification of the data structure saved and
restored for each device. Before an input operation, the data structure for the
device operation is saved. After the input operation, the data structure for the
device associated with this current input operation is restored. This data structure

cannot be a data area data structure, file information data structure, or program
status data structure, and it cannot contain a compile-time array or prerun-time
array.
If the SAVEDS keyword is not specified, no saving and restoring is done. SAVEDS
must not be specified for shared files.
When you specify SAVEDS but not MAXDEV, the ILE RPG program assumes a
multiple device file (MAXDEV with a parameter of *FILE).
SAVEIND(number)
The SAVEIND keyword specifies the number of indicators that are to be saved and
restored for each device attached to a mixed or multiple device file. Before an
input operation, the indicators for the device associated with the previous input or
output operation are saved. After the input operation, the indicators for the device
associated with this current input operation are restored.
Specify a number from 1 through 99, as the parameter to the SAVEIND keyword.
No indicators are saved and restored if the SAVEIND keyword is not specified, or
if the MAXDEV keyword is not specified or specified with the parameter *ONLY.
If you specified the DDS keyword INDARA, the number you specify for the
SAVEIND keyword must be less than any response indicator you use in your DDS.
For example, if you specify INDARA and CF01(55) in your DDS, the maximum
value for the SAVEIND keyword is 54. The SAVEIND keyword must not be used
with shared files.
The INDDS keyword cannot be specified with this keyword.
When you specify the SAVEIND keyword but not the MAXDEV keyword, the ILE
RPG program assumes a multiple device file.
SFILE(recformat:rrnfield)
The SFILE keyword is used to define internally the subfiles that are specified in an
externally described WORKSTN file. The recformat parameter identifies the RPG
IV name of the record format to be processed as a subfile. The rrnfield parameter
identifies the name of the relative-record number field for this subfile. You must
specify an SFILE keyword for each subfile in the DDS.
The relative-record number of any record retrieved by a READC or CHAIN

operation is placed into the field identified by the rrnfield parameter. This field is
also used to specify the record number that RPG IV uses for a WRITE operation to
the subfile or for output operations that use ADD. The field name specified as the
rrnfield parameter must be defined as numeric with zero decimal positions. The
field must have enough positions to contain the largest record number for the file.
(See the SFLSIZ keyword in the iSeries Information Center database and file
systems category.)
Relative record number processing is implicitly defined as part of the SFILE

definition. If multiple subfiles are defined, each subfile requires the specification of
the SFILE keyword.
Do not use the SFILE keyword with the SLN keyword.

SLN(number)
The SLN (Start Line Number) keyword determines where a record format is
written to a display file. The main file description line must contain WORKSTN in
positions 36 through 42 and a C or O in positions 17. The DDS for the file must
specify the keyword SLNO(*VAR) for one or more record formats. When you
specify the SLN keyword, the parameter will automatically be defined in the
program as a numeric field with length of 2 and with 0 decimal positions.
Do not use the SLN keyword with the SFILE keyword.
TIMFMT(format{separator})
The TIMFMT keyword allows the specification of a default external time format
and a default separator (which is optional) for all time fields in the
program-described file. If the file on which this keyword is specified is indexed
and the key field is a time, then the time format specified also provides the default
external format for the key field.
For a Record-Address file this specifies the external time format of time limits keys
read from the record-address file.
You can specify a different external format for individual input or output time
fields in the file by specifying a time format/separator for the field on the
corresponding input specification (positions 31-35) or output specification
(positions 53-57).
See Table 16 on page 196 for valid format and separators. For more information on
external formats, see “Internal and External Formats” on page 167.
USROPN
The USROPN keyword causes the file not to be opened at program initialization.
This gives the programmer control of the file’s first open. The file must be
explicitly opened using the OPEN operation in the calculation specifications. This
keyword is not valid for input files designated as primary, secondary, table, or
record-address files, or for output files conditioned by the 1P (first page) indicator.
The USROPN keyword is required for programmer control of only the first file
opening. For example, if a file is opened and later closed by the CLOSE operation,
the programmer can reopen the file (using the OPEN operation) without having
specified the USROPN keyword on the file description specification.
See also “EXTIND(*INUx)” on page 271.
File Types and Processing Methods

Table 27 on page 280 shows the valid entries for positions 28, 34, and 35 of the file
description specifications for the various file types and processing methods. The
methods of disk file processing include:
v Relative-record-number processing
v Consecutive processing
v Sequential-by-key processing
v Random-by-key processing
v Sequential-within-limits processing.

File Types and Processing Methods
Table 27. Processing Methods for DISK Files
Access Method Opcode Position 28 Position 34 Position 35 Explanation
Random RRN CHAIN Blank Blank Blank Access by physical
order of records
Sequential Key READ Blank Blank I Access by key
READE sequentially
READP
READPE
cycle
Sequential Within Limits READ L A, P, G, D, T, I Access by key
READE Z, or F sequentially
READP controlled by record-
READPE address-limits file
cycle
Sequential RRN READ cycle Blank Blank T Access sequentially
restricted to RRN
numbers in
record-address file
For further information on the various file processing methods, see the section
entitled ″Methods for Processing Disk Files″, in the chapter ″Accessing Database
Files″ in the WebSphere Development Studio: ILE RPG Programmer’s Guide.

Chapter 15. Definition Specifications
Definition specifications can be used to define:
v Standalone fields
v Named constants
v Data structures and their subfields
v Prototypes
v Procedure interface
v Prototyped parameters
For more information on data structures, constants, prototypes, and procedure

interfaces, see also Chapter 8, “Defining Data and Prototypes” on page 117 For
more information on data types and data formats, see also Chapter 10, “Data Types
and Data Formats” on page 167.
Arrays and tables can be defined as either a data-structure subfield or a standalone

field. For additional information on defining and using arrays and tables, see also
Chapter 9, “Using Arrays and Tables” on page 149.
Definition specifications can appear in two places within a module or program: in

the main source section and in a subprocedure. Within the main source section,
you define all global definitions. Within a subprocedure, you define the procedure
interface and its parameters as required by the prototype. You also define any local
data items that are needed by the prototyped procedure when it is processed. Any
definitions within a prototyped procedure are local. They are not known to any
other procedures (including the main procedure). For more information on scope,
see “Scope of Definitions” on page 96.
A built-in function (BIF) can be used in the keyword field as a parameter to a

keyword. It is allowed on the definition specification only if the values of all
arguments are known at compile time. When specified as parameters for the
definition specification keywords DIM, OCCURS, OVERLAY, and PERRCD, all
arguments for a BIF must be defined earlier in the program. For further
information on using built-in functions, see “Built-in Functions” on page 376.
Definition Specification Statement

The general layout for the definition specification is as follows:
v The definition specification type (D) is entered in position 6
v The non-commentary part of the specification extends from position 7 to
position 80
– The fixed-format entries extend from positions 7 to 42
– The keyword entries extend from positions 44 to 80
v The comments section of the specification extends from position 81 to position
100.

*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8 ...+... 9 ...+... 10
DName+++++++++++ETDsFrom+++To/L+++IDc.Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++Comments++++++++++++
Figure 105. Definition Specification Layout
Definition Specification Keyword Continuation Line

v Position 6 of the continuation line must contain a D
v Positions 7 to 43 of the continuation line must be blank
v The specification continues on or past position 44
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8 ...+... 9 ...+... 10
D.....................................Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++Comments++++++++++++
Figure 106. Definition Specification Keyword Continuation Line Layout
Definition Specification Continued Name Line

A name that is up to 15 characters long can be specified in the Name entry of the
definition specification without requiring continuation. Any name (even one with
15 characters or fewer) can be continued on multiple lines by coding an ellipsis (...)
at the end of the partial name. A name definition consists of the following parts:
having an ellipsis as the last non-blank character in the entry. The name must
begin within positions 7 to 21 and may end anywhere up to position 77 (with
an ellipsis ending in position 80). There cannot be blanks between the start of
the name and the ellipsis character. If any of these conditions is not true, the
line is parsed as a main definition line.
2. One main definition line, containing a name, definition attributes, and
keywords. If a continued name line is coded, the Name entry of the main
definition line may be left blank.
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8 ...+... 9 ...+... 10
DContinuedName+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++Comments++++++++++++
Figure 107. Definition Specification Continued Name Line Layout

Enter a D in this position for definition specifications.
Positions 7-21 (Name)

Entry Explanation
Name The name of the item being defined.
Blank Specifies filler fields in data-structure subfield definitions, or an unnamed
data structure in data-structure definitions.

The normal rules for RPG IV symbolic names apply; reserved words cannot be
used (see “Symbolic Names” on page 3). The name can begin in any position in the
space provided. Thus, indenting can be used to indicate the shape of data in data
structures.
For continued name lines, a name is specified in positions 7 through 80 of the

continued name lines and positions 7 through 21 of the main definition line. As
with the traditional definition of names, case of the characters is not significant.
For an externally described subfield, a name specified here replaces the

external-subfield name specified on the EXTFLD keyword.
For a prototype parameter definition, the name entry is optional. If a name is

specified, the name is ignored. (A prototype parameter is a definition specification
with blanks in positions 24-25 that follows a PR specification or another prototype
parameter definition.)
TIP
If you are defining a prototype and the name specified in positions 7-21
cannot serve as the external name of the procedure, use the EXTPROC
keyword to specify the valid external name. For example, the external name
may be required to be in lower case, because you are defining a prototype for
a procedure written in ILE C.
Position 22 (External Description)

This position is used to identify a data structure or data-structure subfield as
externally described. If a data structure or subfield is not being defined on this
specification, then this field must be left blank.
Entry Explanation for Data Structures
E Identifies a data structure as externally described: subfield definitions are
defined externally. If the EXTNAME keyword is not specified, positions
7-21 must contain the name of the externally described file containing the
data structure definition.
Blank Program described: subfield definitions for this data structure follow this
specification.
Entry Explanation for Subfields

E Identifies a data-structure subfield as externally described. The
specification of an externally described subfield is necessary only when
keywords such as EXTFLD and INZ are used.
Blank Program described: the data-structure subfield is defined on this
specification line.
Position 23 (Type of Data Structure)

This entry is used to identify the type of data structure being defined. If a data
structure is not being defined, this entry must be left blank.
Entry Explanation
Chapter 15. Definition Specifications 283

Blank The data structure being defined is not a program status or data-area data
structure; or a data structure is not being defined on this specification
S Program status data structure. Only one data structure may be designated
as the program status data structure.
U Data-area data structure.
RPG IV retrieves the data area at initialization and rewrites it at end of
program.
| v If the DTAARA keyword is specified, the parameter to the DTAARA
| keyword is used as the name of the external data area. If the name is a
| variable, the value must be set before the program begins. This can be
| done by:
| – Passing the variable as a parameter.
| – Explicitly initializing the variable with the INZ keyword.
| – Sharing the variable with another module using the IMPORT and
| EXPORT |keywords, and ensuring the value is set prior to the call.
v If the DTAARA keyword is not specified, the name in positions 7-21 is
used as the name of the external data area.
v If a name is not specified either by the DTAARA keyword, or by
positions 7-21, *LDA (the local data area) is used as the name of the
external data area.
Positions 24-25 (Definition Type)

Entry Explanation
Blank The specification defines either a data structure subfield or a parameter
within a prototype or procedure interface definition.
C The specification defines a constant. Position 25 must be blank.
DS The specification defines a data structure.
PR The specification defines a prototype and the return value, if any.
PI The specification defines a procedure interface, and the return value if any.
S The specification defines a standalone field, array or table. Position 25
must be blank.
Definitions of data structures, prototypes, and procedure interfaces end with the
first definition specification with non-blanks in positions 24-25, or with the first
specification that is not a definition specification.
For a list of valid keywords, grouped according to type of definition, please refer
to Table 29 on page 319.
Positions 26-32 (From Position)

Positions 26-32 may only contain an entry if the location of a subfield within a
data structure is being defined.
Entry Explanation
Blank A blank FROM position indicates that the value in the
TO/LENGTH field specifies the length of the subfield, or that a
subfield is not being defined on this specification line.
nnnnnnn Absolute starting position of the subfield within a data structure.

The value specified must be from 1 to 65535 for a named data
structure (and from 1 to 9999999 for an unnamed data structure),
and right-justified in these positions.
Reserved Words
Reserved words for the program status data structure or for a file
information data structure are allowed (left-justified) in the
FROM-TO/LENGTH fields (positions 26-39). These special
reserved words define the location of the subfields in the data
structures. Reserved words for the program status data structure
are *STATUS, *PROC, *PARM, and *ROUTINE. Reserved words for
the file information data structure (INFDS) are *FILE, *RECORD,
*OPCODE, *STATUS, and *ROUTINE.
Positions 33-39 (To Position / Length)

Entry Explanation
Blank If positions 33-39 are blank:
v a named constant is being defined on this specification line, or
v the standalone field, parameter, or subfield is being defined LIKE
another field, or
v the standalone field, parameter, or subfield is of a type where a length is
implied, or
v the subfield’s attributes are defined elsewhere, or
v a data structure is being defined. The length of the data structure is the
maximum value of the subfield To-Positions.
nnnnnnn
Positions 33-39 may contain a (right-justified) numeric value, from 1 to
65535 for a named data structure (and from 1 to 9999999 for an unnamed
data structure), as follows:
v If the From field (position 26-32) contains a numeric value, then a
numeric value in this field specifies the absolute end position of the
subfield within a data structure.
v If the From field is blank, a numeric value in this field specifies :
– the length of the entire data structure, or
– the length of the standalone field, or
– the length of the parameter, or
– the length of the subfield. Within the data structure, this subfield is
positioned such that its starting position is greater than the maximum
to-position of all previously defined subfields in the data structure.
Padding is inserted if the subfield is defined with type basing pointer
or procedure pointer to ensure that the subfield is aligned properly.
Notes:
1. For graphic or UCS-2 fields, the number specified here is the number
of graphic or UCS-2 characters, NOT the number of bytes (1 graphic
or UCS-2 character = 2 bytes). For numeric fields, the number
| specified here is the number of digits (for packed and zoned numeric
| fields: 1-31; for binary numeric fields: 1-9; for integer and unsigned
numeric fields: 3, 5, 10, or 20; ).
2. For float numeric fields the number specified is the number of bytes,
NOT the number of digits (4 or 8 bytes).

+|-nnnnn
This entry is valid for standalone fields or subfields defined using the
LIKE keyword. The length of the standalone field or subfield being defined
on this specification line is determined by adding or subtracting the value
entered in these positions to the length of the field specified as the
parameter to the LIKE keyword.
Notes:
1. For graphic or UCS-2 fields, the number specified here is the number of
graphic or UCS-2 characters, NOT the number of bytes (1 graphic or
UCS-2 character = 2 bytes). For numeric fields, the number specified
here is the number of digits.
2. For float fields, the entry must be blank or +0. The size of a float field
cannot be changed as with other numerics.
Reserved Words
If positions 26-32 are used to enter special reserved words, this field
becomes an extension of the previous one, creating one large field
(positions 26-39). This allows for reserved words, with names longer than 7
characters in length, to extend into this field. See “Positions 26-32 (From
Position)” on page 284, ’Reserved Words’.
Position 40 (Internal Data Type)

This entry allows you to specify how a standalone field, parameter, or
data-structure subfield is stored internally. This entry pertains strictly to the
internal representation of the data item being defined, regardless of how the data
item is stored externally (that is, if it is stored externally). To define variable-length
character, graphic, and UCS-2 formats, you must specify the keyword VARYING;
otherwise, the format will be fixed length.
Entry Explanation
Blank When the LIKE keyword is not specified:
v If the decimal positions entry is blank, then the item is defined as
character
v If the decimal positions entry is not blank, then the item is defined as
packed numeric if it is a standalone field or parameter; or as zoned
numeric if it is a subfield.
| Note: The entry must be blank whenever the LIKE, LIKEDS and LIKEREC
| keywords are specified.
A Character (Fixed or Variable-length format)
B Numeric (Binary format)
C UCS-2 (Fixed or Variable-length format)
D Date
F Numeric (Float format)
G Graphic (Fixed or Variable-length format)
I Numeric (Integer format)
N Character (Indicator format)
O Object
P Numeric (Packed decimal format)

S Numeric (Zoned format)
T Time
U Numeric (Unsigned format)
Z Timestamp
* Basing pointer or procedure pointer
Positions 41-42 (Decimal Positions)

Positions 41-42 are used to indicate the number of decimal positions in a numeric
subfield or standalone field. If the field is non-float numeric, there must always be
an entry in these positions. If there are no decimal positions enter a zero (0) in
position 42. For example, an integer or unsigned field (type I or U in position 40)
requires a zero for this entry.
Entry Explanation
Blank The value is not numeric (unless it is a float field) or has been defined
with the LIKE keyword.
| 0-31 Decimal positions: the number of positions to the right of the decimal in a
| numeric field.
This entry can only be supplied in combination with the TO/Length field. If the
TO/Length field is blank, the value of this entry is defined somewhere else in the
program (for example, through an externally described data base file).
Position 43 (Reserved)
Position 43 must be blank.

Positions 44 to 80 are provided for definition specification keywords. Keywords are
used to describe and define data and its attributes. Use this area to specify any
keywords necessary to fully define the field.
Definition-Specification Keywords
Definition-specification keywords may have no parameters, optional parameters, or
where:

enclosed in braces.

keyword.
If additional space is required for definition-specification keywords, the keyword

field can be continued on subsequent lines. See “Definition Specification Keyword
Continuation Line” on page 282 and “Definition Specification Keyword Field” on
page 236.
ALIGN
The ALIGN keyword is used to align float, integer, and unsigned subfields. When
ALIGN is specified, 2-byte subfields are aligned on a 2-byte boundary, 4-byte
subfields are aligned on a 4-byte boundary and 8-byte subfields are aligned on an
8-byte boundary. Alignment may be desired to improve performance when
accessing float, integer, or unsigned subfields.
Specify ALIGN on the data structure definition. However, you cannot specify
ALIGN for either the file information data structure (INFDS) or the program status
data structure (PSDS).
Alignment occurs only to data structure subfields defined with length notation and
without the keyword OVERLAY. A diagnostic message is issued if subfields that
are defined either with absolute notation or using the OVERLAY keyword are not
properly aligned.
Pointer subfields are always aligned on a 16-byte boundary whether or not ALIGN
is specified.
See “Aligning Data Structure Subfields” on page 131 for more information.
ALT(array_name)
The ALT keyword is used to indicate that the compile-time or pre-runtime array or
table is in alternating format.
The array defined with the ALT keyword is the alternating array and the array
name specified as the parameter is the main array. The alternate array definition
may precede or follow the main array definition.
The keywords on the main array define the loading for both arrays. The
initialization data is in alternating order, beginning with the main array, as follows:
main/alt/main/alt/...
In the alternate array definition, the PERRCD, FROMFILE, TOFILE, and CTDATA
keywords are not valid.
ALTSEQ(*NONE)
When the ALTSEQ(*NONE) keyword is specified, the alternate collating sequence
will not be used for comparisons involving this field, even when the ALTSEQ
keyword is specified on the control specification. ALTSEQ(*NONE) on Data

Definition specifications will be meaningful only if one of ALTSEQ, ALTSEQ(*SRC)
or ALTSEQ(*EXT) is coded in the control specifications. It is ignored if this is not
true.
ALTSEQ(*NONE) is a valid keyword for:

v Character standalone fields
v Character arrays
v Character tables
v Character subfields
v Data structures
v Character return values on Procedure Interface or Prototype definitions
v Character Prototyped Parameters
ASCEND
The ASCEND keyword is used to describe the sequence of the data in any of the
following:
v An array
v A table loaded at prerun-time or compile time
v A prototyped parameter
See also “DESCEND” on page 291.
Ascending sequence means that the array or table entries must start with the
lowest data entry (according to the collating sequence) and go to the highest. Items
with equal value are allowed.
A prerun-time array or table is checked for the specified sequence at the time the
array or table is loaded with data. If the array or table is out of sequence, control
passes to the RPG IV exception/error handling routine. A run-time array (loaded
by input and/or calculation specifications) is not sequence checked.
When ALTSEQ(*EXT) is specified, the alternate collating sequence is used when

checking the sequence of compile-time arrays or tables. If the alternate sequence is
not known until run-time, the sequence is checked at run-time; if the array or table
is out of sequence, control passes to the RPG IV exception/error handling routine.
A sequence (ascending or descending) must be specified if the LOOKUP operation,

%LOOKUPxx built-in, or %TLOOKUPxx built-in is used to search an array or table
for an entry to determine whether the entry is high or low compared to the search
argument.
If the SORTA operation code is used with an array, and no sequence is specified,
an ascending sequence is assumed.
BASED(basing_pointer_name)
When the BASED keyword is specified for a data structure or standalone field, a
basing pointer is created using the name specified as the keyword parameter. This
basing pointer holds the address (storage location) of the based data structure or
standalone field being defined. In other words, the name specified in positions 7-21
is used to refer to the data stored at the location contained in the basing pointer.

Note: Before the based data structure or standalone field can be used, the basing
pointer must be assigned a valid address.
If an array is defined as a based standalone field it must be a run-time array.
If a based field is defined within a subprocedure, then both the field and the
basing pointer are local.
CCSID(number | *DFT)
This keyword sets the CCSID for graphic and UCS-2 definitions.
number must be an integer between 0 and 65535. It must be a valid graphic or

UCS-2 CCSID value. A valid graphic CCSID is 65535 or a CCSID with the EBCDIC
double-byte encoding scheme (X’1200’). A valid UCS-2 CCSID has the UCS-2
encoding scheme (x’7200’).
For program-described fields, CCSID(number) overrides the defaults set on the

control specification with the CCSID(*GRAPH: *SRC), CCSID(*GRAPH: number),
or CCSID(*UCS2: number) keyword.
CCSID(*DFT) indicates that the default CCSID for the module is to be used. This is
useful when the LIKE keyword is used since the new field would otherwise inherit
the CCSID of the source field.
If the keyword is not specified, the default graphic or UCS-2 CCSID of the module
is assumed. (This keyword is not allowed for graphic fields when CCSID(*GRAPH
: *IGNORE) is specified or assumed).
If this keyword is not specified and the LIKE keyword is specified, the new field
will have the same CCSID as the LIKE field.
CLASS(*JAVA:class-name)
This keyword indicates the class for an object definition.
class-name must be a constant character value.
CONST{(constant)}
The CONST keyword is used
v To specify the value of a named constant
v To indicate that a parameter passed by reference is read-only.
When specifying the value of a named constant, the CONST keyword itself is
optional. That is, the constant value can be specified with or without the CONST
keyword.
The parameter must be a literal, figurative constant, or built-in-function. The

constant may be continued on subsequent lines by adhering to the appropriate
continuation rules (see “Continuation Rules” on page 233 for further details).
If a named constant is used as a parameter for the keywords DIM, OCCURS,

PERRCD, or OVERLAY, the named constant must be defined prior to its use.

When specifying a read-only reference parameter, you specify the keyword CONST
on the definition specification of the parameter definition on both the prototype
and procedure interface. No parameter to the keyword is allowed.
When the keyword CONST is specified, the compiler may copy the parameter to a
temporary and pass the address of the temporary. Some conditions that would
cause this are: the passed parameter is an expression or the passed parameter has a
different format.
Attention!
| Do not use this keyword on a prototype definition unless you are sure that
| the parameter will not be changed by the called program or procedure.
| If the called program or procedure is compiled using a procedure interface

| with the same prototype, you do not have to worry about this, since the
| compiler will check this for you.
| Although a CONST parameter cannot be changed by statements within the

| procedure, the value may be changed as a result of statements outside of the
| procedure, or by directly referencing a global variable.
Passing a parameter by constant value has the same advantages as passing by

value. In particular, it allows you to pass literals and expressions.
CTDATA
The CTDATA keyword indicates that the array or table is loaded using
compile-time data. The data is specified at the end of the program following the **
or **CTDATA(array/table name) specification.
When an array or table is loaded at compilation time, it is compiled along with the
source program and included in the program. Such an array or table does not need
to be loaded separately every time the program is run.
DATFMT(format{separator})
The DATFMT keyword specifies the internal date format, and optionally the
separator character, for any of these items of type Date: standalone field;
data-structure subfield; prototyped parameter; or return value on a prototype or
procedure-interface definition. This keyword will be automatically generated for an
externally described data structure subfield of type Date and determined at
compile time.
If DATFMT is not specified, the Date field will have the date format and separator
as specified by the DATFMT keyword on the control specification, if present. If
none is specified on the control specification, then it will have *ISO format.
internal formats, see “Internal and External Formats” on page 167.
DESCEND
The DESCEND keyword describes the sequence of the data in any of the
following:
v An array

v A table loaded at prerun-time or compile time
v A prototyped parameter
See also “ASCEND” on page 289.
Descending sequence means that the array or table entries must start with the
highest data entry (according to the collating sequence) and go to the lowest. Items
with equal value are allowed.
A prerun-time array or table is checked for the specified sequence at the time the
array or table is loaded with data. If the array or table is out of sequence, control
passes to the RPG IV exception/error handling routine. A run-time array (loaded
by input and/or calculation specifications) is not sequence checked.
When ALTSEQ(*EXT) is specified, the alternate collating sequence is used when

checking the sequence of compile-time arrays or tables. If the alternate sequence is
not known until run-time, the sequence is checked at run-time; if the array or table
is out of sequence, control passes to the RPG IV exception/error handling routine.
A sequence (ascending or descending) must be specified if the LOOKUP operation,

%LOOKUPxx built-in, or %TLOOKUPxx built-in is used to search an array or table
for an entry to determine whether the entry is high or low compared to the search
argument.
If the SORTA operation code is used with an array, and no sequence is specified,
an ascending sequence is assumed.
DIM(numeric_constant)
The DIM keyword defines the number of elements in an array, table, a prototyped
| parameter, array data structure, or a return value on a prototype or
procedure-interface definition.
The numeric constant must have zero (0) decimal positions. It can be a literal, a
named constant or a built-in function.
The constant value does not need to be known at the time the keyword is
processed, but the value must be known at compile-time.
| When DIM is specified on a data structure definition, the data structure must be a
| qualified data structure, and subfields must be referenced as fully qualified names,
| i.e. "dsname(x).subf″. Other array keywords, such as CTDATA, FROMFILE,
| TOFILE, and PERRCD are not allowed with an array data structure definition.
DTAARA{(*VAR:)data_area_name}
The DTAARA keyword is used to associate a standalone field, data structure,
data-structure subfield or data-area data structure with an external data area. The
DTAARA keyword has the same function as the *DTAARA DEFINE operation code
(see “*DTAARA DEFINE” on page 568).
You can create three kinds of data areas:

v *CHAR Character
v *DEC Numeric
v *LGL Logical

You can also create a DDM data area (type *DDM) that points to a data area on a
remote system of one of the three types above.
Only character and numeric types (excluding float numeric) are allowed to be
associated with data areas. The actual data area on the system must be of the same
type as the field in the program, with the same length and decimal positions.
Indicator fields can be associated with either a logical data area or a character data
| area. If you want to store other types in a data area, you can use a data structure
| for the data area, and code the subfields of any type, except pointers. Pointers
| cannot be stored in data areas.
If data_area_name is not specified, then the name specified in positions 7-21 is also
the name of the external data area. If neither the parameter nor the data-structure
name is specified, then the default is *LDA.
| If *VAR is not specified, the data_area_name parameter can be either a name or a

| literal. If a name is specified, the name of the parameter of DTAARA is used as the
| name of the data area. For example, DTAARA(MYDTA) means that the data area
| *LIBL/MYDTA will be used at runtime. It must be a valid data area name,
| including *LDA (for the local data area) and *PDA (for the program initialization
| parameters data area). If a literal is specified, the value of the literal is used as the
| name of the data area. For example, DTAARA(’LIB/DTA’) will use data area DTA
| in library LIB, at runtime.
| If *VAR is specified, the value of data_area_name is used as the data area name.
| This value can be:
| v A named constant whose value is the name of the data area.
| v A character variable that will hold the name of the data area at runtime.
| You can specify the value in any of the following forms:
| dtaaraname
| libname/dtaaraname
| *LIBL/dtaaraname
| Notes:
| 1. You cannot specify *CURLIB as the library name.
| 2. If you specify a data area name without a library name, *LIBL is used.
| 3. The name must be in the correct case. For example, if you specify
| DTAARA(*VAR:dtaname) and variable dtaname has the value ’qtemp/mydta’,
| the data area will not be found. Instead, it should have the value
| ’QTEMP/MYDTA’.
|
| Attention!
| If DTAARA(*VAR) keyword is used with a UDS data area, and the name is a
| variable, then this variable must have the value set before the program starts.
| This can be done by initializing the variable, passing the variable as an entry
| parameter, or sharing the variable with another program through the
| IMPORT and EXPORT keywords.
|
|
| When the DTAARA keyword is specified, the IN, OUT, and UNLOCK operation
codes can be used on the data area.

EXPORT{(external_name)}
The specification of the EXPORT keyword allows a globally defined data structure
or standalone field defined within a module to be used by another module in the
program. The storage for the data item is allocated in the module containing the
EXPORT definition. The external_name parameter, if specified, must be a character
literal or constant.
The EXPORT keyword on the definition specification is used to export data items
and cannot be used to export procedure names. To export a procedure name, use
the EXPORT keyword on the procedure specification.
Note: The initialization for the storage occurs when the program entry procedure
(of the program containing the module) is first called. RPG IV will not do
any further initialization on this storage, even if the procedure ended with
LR on, or ended abnormally on the previous call.
The following restrictions apply when EXPORT is specified:

v Only one module may define the data item as exported
v You cannot export a field that is specified in the Result-Field entry of a PARM in
the *ENTRY PLIST
v Unnamed data structures cannot be exported
v BASED data items cannot be exported
v The same external field name cannot be specified more than once per module
and also cannot be used as an external procedure name
v IMPORT and EXPORT cannot both be specified for the same data item.
For a multiple-occurrence data structure or table, each module will contain its own
copy of the occurrence number or table index. An OCCUR or LOOKUP operation
in any module will have only a local impact since the occurrence number or index
is local to each module.
See also “IMPORT{(external_name)}” on page 301.
TIP
The keywords IMPORT and EXPORT allow you to define a ″hidden″ interface
between modules. As a result, use of these keywords should be limited only
to those data items which are global throughout the application. It is also
suggested that this global data be limited to things like global attributes
which are set once and never modified elsewhere.
EXTFLD(field_name)
The EXTFLD keyword is used to rename a subfield in an externally described data
structure. Enter the external name of the subfield as the parameter to the EXTFLD
keyword, and specify the name to be used in the program in the Name field
(positions 7-21).
The keyword is optional. If not specified, the name extracted from the external
definition is used as the data-structure subfield name.
If the PREFIX keyword is specified for the data structure, the prefix will not be
applied to fields renamed with EXTFLD.

EXTFMT(code)
The EXTFMT keyword is used to specify the external data type for compile-time
and prerun-time numeric arrays and tables. The external data type is the format of
the data in the records in the file. This entry has no effect on the format used for
internal processing (internal data type) of the array or table in the program.
Note: The values specified for EXTFMT will apply to the files identified in both
the TOFILE and FROMFILE keywords, even if the specified names are
different.
The possible values for the parameter are:
B The data for the array or table is in binary format.
C The data for the array or table is in UCS-2 format.
I The data for the array or table is in integer format.
L The data for a numeric array or table element has a preceding (left) plus or
minus sign.
R The data for a numeric array or table element has a following (right) plus
or minus sign.
P The data for the array or table is in packed decimal format.
S The data for the array or table is in zoned decimal format.
U The data for the array or table is in unsigned format.
F The data for the array or table is in float numeric format.
Notes:
1. If the EXTFMT keyword is not specified, the external format defaults to ’S’ for
non-float arrays and tables, and to the external display float representation for
float pre-runtime arrays and tables.
2. For compile-time arrays and tables, the only values allowed are S, L, and R,
unless the data type is float, in which case the EXTFMT keyword is not
allowed.
3. When EXTFMT(I) or EXTFMT(U) is used, arrays defined as having 1 to 5 digits
will occupy 2 bytes per element. Arrays defined as having 6 to 10 digits will
occupy 4 bytes per element. Arrays defined as having 11 to 20 digits will
occupy 8 bytes per element.
4. The default external format for UCS-2 arrays is character. The number of
characters allowed for UCS-2 compile-time data is the number of double-byte
characters in the UCS-2 array. If graphic data is included in the data, the
presence of double-byte data and the shift-out and shift-in characters in the
data will reduce the actual amount of data that can be placed in the array
element; the rest of the element will be padded with blanks. For example, for a
4-character UCS-2 array, only one double-byte character can be specified in the
compile-time data; if the compile-time data were ’oXXi’, where ’XX’ is
converted to the UCS-2 character U’yyyy’, the UCS-2 element would contain
the value U’yyyy002000200020’.
EXTNAME(file-name{:format-name}{:*ALL|
*INPUT|*OUTPUT|*KEY})
The EXTNAME keyword is used to specify the name of the file which contains the
field descriptions used as the subfield description for the data structure being
defined.

The file_name parameter is required. Optionally a format name may be specified to
direct the compiler to a specific format within a file. If format_name parameter is
not specified the first record format is used.
| The last parameter specifies which fields in the external record to extract:
| v *ALL extracts all fields.
| v *INPUT extracts just input capable fields.
| v *OUTPUT extracts just output capable fields.
| v *KEY extracts just key fields.
| If this parameter has not specified, the compiler extracts the fields of the input
| buffer.
| Notes:
| 1. If the format-name is not specified,, the record defaults to the first record in the
| file.
| 2. For *INPUT and *OUTPUT, subfields included in the data structure occupy the
| same start positions as in the external record description.
If the data structure definition contains an E in position 22, and the EXTNAME
keyword is not specified, the name specified in positions 7-21 is used.
The compiler will generate the following definition specification entries for all
fields of the externally described data structure:
v Subfield name (Name will be the same as the external name, unless renamed by
keyword EXTFLD or the PREFIX keyword on a definition specification is used
to apply a prefix).
v Subfield length
v Subfield internal data type (will be the same as the external type, unless the
CVTOPT control specification keyword or command parameter is specified for
the type. In that case the data type will be character).
All data structure keywords are allowed with the EXTNAME keyword.
EXTPGM(name)
The EXTPGM keyword indicates the external name of the program whose
prototype is being defined. The name can be a character constant or a character
variable. When EXTPGM is specified, then a dynamic call will be done.
If neither EXTPGM or EXTPROC is specified, then the compiler assumes that you
are defining a prototype for a procedure, and assigns it the external name found in
positions 7-21.
Any parameters defined by a prototype with EXTPGM must be passed by

reference. In addition, you cannot define a return value.
EXTPROC({*CL|*CWIDEN|*CNOWIDEN| {*JAVA:class-
name:}}name)
The EXTPROC keyword can have one of the following formats:
EXTPROC(*CL:name)
Specifies an external procedure that is written in ILE CL, or an RPG

procedure to be called by ILE CL. Use *CL if your program uses return
values or parameters passed by value with data types that CL handles
differently from RPG. For example, use *CL when prototyping an RPG
procedure that is to be called by a CL procedure when the return value is
1A.
EXTPROC(*CWIDEN:name|*CNOWIDEN:name)
Specifies an external procedure that is written in ILE C, or an RPG
procedure to be called by ILE C.
Use *CNOWIDEN or *CWIDEN if your program uses return values or
parameters passed by value with data types that C handles differently
from RPG. Use *CWIDEN or *CNOWIDEN when prototyping an RPG
procedure that is to be called by C, or when prototyping a C procedure
when the returned value or a parameter passed by value is 1A, 1G or 1C,
5U, 5I, or 4F.
Use *CNOWIDEN if the ILE C source contains #pragma
argument(procedure-name,nowiden) for the procedure; otherwise, use
*CWIDEN.
EXTPROC(*JAVA:class-name:name)
Specifies a method that is written in Java, or an RPG native method to be
called by Java. The first parameter is *JAVA. The second parameter is a
character constant containing the class of the method. The third parameter
is a character constant containing the method name. The special method
name *CONSTRUCTOR means that the method is a constructor; this
method can be used to instantiate a class (create a new class instance).
For more information about invoking Java procedures, see WebSphere
EXTPROC(name)
Specifies an external procedure that is written in or to be called by RPG or
COBOL. This format should also be used for a procedure that can be called
by any of RPG, COBOL, C, or CL; in this case, you must ensure that the
return value and the parameters do not have any of the problems listed
above for *CL, *CWIDEN, and *CNOWIDEN.
The EXTPROC keyword indicates the external name of the procedure whose
prototype is being defined. The name can be a character constant or a procedure
pointer. When EXTPROC is specified, a bound call will be done.
If neither EXTPGM or EXTPROC is specified, then the compiler assumes that you
are defining a procedure, and assigns it the external name found in positions 7-21.
If the name specified for EXTPROC (or the prototype name, if neither EXTPGM or
EXTPROC are specified) starts with ″CEE″ or an underscore (’_’), the compiler will
treat this as a system built-in. To avoid confusion with system provided APIs, you
should not name your procedures starting with ″CEE″.
For example, to define the prototype for the procedure SQLAllocEnv, that is in the
service program QSQCLI, the following definition specification could be coded:
D SQLEnv PR EXTPROC(’SQLAllocEnv’)
If a procedure pointer is specified, it must be assigned a valid address before it is

used in a call. It should point to a procedure whose return value and parameters
are consistent with the prototype definition.

Figure 108 shows an example of the EXTPROC keyword with a procedure pointer
as its parameter.
* Assume you are calling a procedure that has a procedure

* pointer as the EXTPROC. Here is how the prototype would
* be defined:
D DspMsg PR 10A EXTPROC(DspMsgPPtr)
D Msg 32767A
D Length 4B 0 VALUE
* Here is how you would define the prototype for a procedure
* that DspMsgPPtr could be assigned to.
D MyDspMsg PR LIKE(DspMsg)
D Msg 32767A
D Length 4B 0 VALUE
* Before calling DSPMSG, you would assign DSPMSGPPTR
* to the actual procedure name of MyDspMsg, that is
* MYDSPMSG.
C EVAL DspMsgPPtr = %paddr(’MYDSPMSG’)
C EVAL Reply = DspMsg(Msg, %size(Msg))
...
P MyDspMsg B
Figure 108. Using EXTPROC with a Procedure Pointer
char RPG_PROC (short s, float f);

char C_PROC (short s, float f);
#pragma argument(RPG_PROC, nowiden)
#pragma argument(C_PROC, nowiden)
/* "fn" calls the RPG procedure with unwidened parameters, */

/* and expects the return value to be passed according to C */
/* conventions. */
void fn(void)
{
char c;
c = RPG_PROC(5, 15.3);
}
/* Function C_PROC expects its parameters to be passed unwidened.*/

/* It will return its return value using C conventions. */
{
char c = ’x’;
if (s == 5 || f < 0)
{
return ’S’;
}
else
{
return ’F’;
}
}
Figure 109. Using EXTPROC with *CNOWIDEN - C Code

D RPG_PROC PR 1A EXTPROC(*CNOWIDEN : ’RPG_PROC’)

D short 5I 0 VALUE
D float 4F VALUE
D C_RPOC PR 1A EXTPROC(*CNOWIDEN : ’C_PROC’)

D short 5I 0 VALUE
D float 4F VALUE
P RPG_PROC B EXPORT
D PI 1A
D short 5I 0 VALUE
D float 4F VALUE
D char S 1A
* Call the C procedure

C EVAL c = C_PROC(4 : 14.7)
* Return the value depending on the values of the parameters

C IF short < float
C RETURN ’L’
C ELSE
C RETURN ’G’
C ENDIF
P E
Figure 110. Using EXTPROC with *CNOWIDEN - RPG Code
char RPG_PROC (short s, float f);

/* Function "fn" calls the RPG procedure with widened parameters,*/

/* and expects the return value to be passed according to C */
/* conventions. */
void fn(void)
{
char c;
c = RPG_PROC(5, 15.3);
}
/* Function C_PROC expects its parameters to be passed widened. */

/* It will return its return value using C conventions. */
{
char c = ’x’;
if (s == 5 || f < 0)
{
return ’S’;
}
else
{
return ’F’;
}
}
Figure 111. Using EXTPROC with *CWIDEN - C Code

D RPG_PROC PR 1A EXTPROC(*CWIDEN : ’RPG_PROC’)

D short 5I 0 VALUE
D float 4F VALUE
D C_PROC PR 1A EXTPROC(*CWIDEN : ’C_PROC’)

D short 5I 0 VALUE
D float 4F VALUE
P RPG_PROC B EXPORT
D PI 1A
D short 5I 0 VALUE
D float 4F VALUE
D char S 1A
* Call the C procedure

C EVAL c = C_PROC(4 : 14.7)
* Return the value depending on the values of the parameters

C IF short < float
C RETURN ’L’
C ELSE
C RETURN ’G’
C ENDIF
P E
Figure 112. Using EXTPROC with *CWIDEN - RPG Code
/* CL procedure CL_PROC */
DCL &CHAR1 TYPE(*CHAR) LEN(1)
/* Call the RPG procedure */

CALLPRC RPG_PROC RTNVAR(&CHAR1)
Figure 113. Using EXTPROC with *CL - CL Code
D RPG_PROC PR 1A EXTPROC(*CL : ’RPG_PROC’)
P RPG_PROC B EXPORT
D PI 1A
C RETURN ’X’
P E
Figure 114. Using EXTPROC with *CL - RPG Code
FROMFILE(file_name)
The FROMFILE keyword is used to specify the file with input data for the
prerun-time array or table being defined. The FROMFILE keyword must be
specified for every prerun-time array or table used in the program.
See also “TOFILE(file_name)” on page 317.

IMPORT{(external_name)}
The IMPORT keyword specifies that storage for the data item being defined is
allocated in another module, but may be accessed in this module. The
external_name parameter, if specified, must be a character literal or constant.
If a name is defined as imported but no module in the program contains an

exported definition of the name, an error will occur at link time. See
“EXPORT{(external_name)}” on page 294.
The IMPORT keyword on the definition specification is used to import data items
and cannot be used to import procedure names. Procedure names are imported
implicitly, to all modules in the program, when the EXPORT keyword is specified
on a procedure specification.
The following restrictions apply when IMPORT is specified:

v The data item may not be initialized (the INZ keyword is not allowed). The
exporting module manages all initialization for the data.
v An imported field cannot be defined as a compile-time or prerun-time array or
table, or as a data area. (Keywords CTDATA, FROMFILE, TOFILE, EXTFMT,
PERRCD, and DTAARA are not allowed.)
v An imported field may not be specified as an argument to the RESET operation
code since the initial value is defined in the exporting module.
v You cannot specify an imported field in the Result-Field entry of a PARM in the
*ENTRY PLIST.
v You cannot define an imported field as based (the keyword BASED is not
allowed).
v This keyword is not allowed for unnamed data structures.
v The only other keywords allowed are DIM, EXTNAME, LIKE, OCCURS, and
PREFIX.
v The same external field name cannot be specified more than once per module
and also cannot be used as an external procedure name.
For a multiple-occurrence data structure or table, each module will contain its own
copy of the occurrence number or table index. An OCCUR or LOOKUP operation
in any module will have only a local impact since the occurrence number or index
is local to each module.
INZ{(initial value)}
The INZ keyword initializes the standalone field, data structure, data-structure
subfield, or object to the default value for its data type or, optionally, to the
constant specified in parentheses.
v For a program described data structure, no parameter is allowed for the INZ
keyword.
v For an externally described data structure, only the *EXTDFT parameter is
allowed.
v For a data structure that is defined with the LIKEDS keyword, the value
*LIKEDS specifies that subfields are initialized in the same way as the parent
| data structure. This applies only to initialization specified by the INZ keyword
| on the parent subfield. It does not apply to initialization specified by the
| CTDATA or FROMFILE keywords. If the parent data structure has some
| subfields initialized by CTDATA or FROMFILE, the data structure initialized
| with INZ(*LIKEDS) will not have the CTDATA or FROMFILE data.

v For an object, only the *NULL parameter is allowed. Every object is initialized to
*NULL, whether or not you specify INZ(*NULL).
The initial value specified must be consistent with the type being initialized. The
initial value can be a literal, named constant, figurative constant, built-in function,
or one of the special values *SYS, *JOB, *EXTDFT, *USER, *LIKEDS, or *NULL.
When initializing Date or Time data type fields or named constants with Date or
Time values, the format of the literal must be consistent with the default format as
derived from the Control specification, regardless of the actual format of the date
or time field.
A numeric field may be initialized with any type of numeric literal. However, a
float literal can only be used with a float field. Any numeric field can be initialized
with a hexadecimal literal of 16 digits or fewer. In this case, the hexadecimal literal
is considered an unsigned numeric value.
Specifying INZ(*EXTDFT) initializes externally described data-structure subfields

with the default values from the DFT keyword in the DDS. If no DFT or constant
value is specified, the DDS default value for the field type is used. You can
override the value specified in the DDS by coding INZ with or without a
parameter on the subfield specification.
Specifying INZ(*EXTDFT) on the external data structure definition, initializes all

externally described subfields to their DDS default values. If the externally
described data structure has additional program described subfields, these are
initialized to the RPG default values.
When using INZ(*EXTDFT), take note of the following:

v If the DDS value for a date or time field is not in the RPG internal format, the
value will be converted to the internal format in effect for the program.
v External descriptions must be in physical files.
v If *NULL is specified for a null-capable field in the DDS, the compiler will use
the DDS default value for that field as the initial value.
v If DFT(’’) is specified for a varying length field, the field will be initialized with
a string of length 0.
v INZ(*EXTDFT) is not allowed if the CVTOPT option is in effect.
Specifying INZ(*USER) intializes any character field or subfield to the name of the
current user profile. Character fields must be at least 10 characters long. If the field
is longer than 10 characters, the user name is left-justified in the field with blanks
in the remainder.
Date fields can be initialized to *SYS or *JOB. Time and Timestamp fields can be
initialized to *SYS.
| Please see “Initialization of Nested Data Structures” on page 132 for a complete
| description of the use of the INZ keyword in the inititlization of nested data
| structures.
A data structure, data-structure subfield, or standalone field defined with the INZ
keyword cannot be specified as a parameter on an *ENTRY PLIST.
Note: When the INZ parameter is not specified:

v Static standalone fields and subfields of initialized data structures are
initialized to their RPG default initial values (for example, blanks for
character, 0 for numeric).
v Subfields of uninitialized data structures (INZ not specified on the
definition specification for the data structure) are initialized to blanks
(regardless of their data type).
This keyword is not valid in combination with BASED or IMPORT.
LIKE(name)
The LIKE keyword is used to define an item like an existing one. For information
about using LIKE with an object, see “LIKE(object-name)” on page 304.
When the LIKE keyword is specified, the item being defined takes on the length
and the data format of the item specified as the parameter. Standalone fields,
prototypes, parameters, and data-structure subfields may be defined using this
keyword. The parameter of LIKE can be a standalone field, a data structure, a data
structure subfield, a parameter in a procedure interface definition, or a prototype
name. The data type entry (position 40) must be blank.
This keyword is similar to the *LIKE DEFINE operation code (see “*LIKE DEFINE”
on page 566). However, it differs from *LIKE DEFINE in that the defined data
takes on the data format and CCSID as well as the length.
Note: Attributes such as ALTSEQ(*NONE), NOOPT, ASCEND, CONST and null

capability are not inherited from the parameter of LIKE by the item defined.
Only the data type, length, decimal positions, and CCSID are inherited.
If the parameter of LIKE is a prototype, then the item being defined will have the
same data type as the return value of the prototype. If there is no return value,
then an error message is issued.
Here are some considerations for using the LIKE keyword with different data
types:
v For character fields, the number specified in the To/Length entry is the number
of additional (or fewer) characters.
v For numeric fields, the number specified in the To/Length entry is the number
of additional (or fewer) digits. For integer or unsigned fields, adjustment values
must be such that the resulting number of digits for the field are 3, 5, 10, or 20.
For float fields, length adjustment is not allowed.
v For graphic or UCS-2 fields, the number specified in the To/Length entry is the
number of additional (or fewer) graphic or UCS-2 characters (1 graphic or UCS-2
character = 2 bytes).
v For date, time, timestamp, basing pointer, or procedure pointer fields, the
To/Length entry (positions 33-39) must be blank.
When LIKE is used to define an array, the DIM keyword is still required to define
the array dimensions. However, DIM(%elem(array)) can be used to define an array
exactly like another array.
Use LIKEDS to define a data structure like another data structure, with the same
subfields.

The following are examples of defining data using the LIKE keyword.
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8

D.....................................Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
*
* Define a field like another with a length increase of 5 characters.
*
D Name S 20
D Long_name S +5 LIKE(Name)
*
* Define a data structure subfield array with DIM(20) like another
* field and initialize each array element with the value *ALL’X’.
* Also, declare another subfield of type pointer immediately
* following the first subfield. Pointer is implicitly defined
* with a length of 16 bytes
*
D Struct DS
D Dim20 LIKE(Name) DIM(20) INZ(*ALL’X’)
D Pointer *
*
* Define a field which is based on the *LDA. Take the length and type
* of the field from the field ’Name’.
*
D Lda_fld S LIKE(Name) DTAARA(*LDA)
Figure 115. Defining fields LIKE other fields
LIKE(object-name)
You can use the LIKE keyword to specify that one object has the same class as a
previously defined object. Only the values on the CLASS keyword are inherited.
* Variables MyString and OtherString are both Java String objects.

D MyString S O CLASS(*JAVA
D OtherString S LIKE(MyString)
* Proc is a Java method returning a Java String object
D Proc PR EXTPROC(*JAVA:’MyClass’:’meth’)
D LIKE(MyString)
Figure 116. Defining objects LIKE other objects
Note: You cannot use the *LIKE DEFINE operation to define an object. You must
use the LIKE keyword.
| The LIKEDS keyword is used to define a data structure, data structure subfield,
prototyped return value, or prototyped parameter like another data structure. The
subfields of the new item will be identical to the subfields of the other data
structure.
The names of the subfields will be qualified with the new data structure name. An
unqualified subfield named subfield or a qualified subfield named dsname.subfield
will result in a new subfield named newdsname.subfield. An unnamed subfield will
also have no name in the new data structure.
| When LIKEDS is coded on a data structure subfield definition, the data structure is
| automatically defined as QUALIFIED. Subfields in a LIKEDS subfield data
| structure are referenced in fully qualified form: "ds.subf.subfa"

The values of the ALIGN and ALTSEQ keywords are inherited by the new data
| structure. The values of the OCCURS, DIM, NOOPT, and INZ keywords are not
inherited. To initialize the subfields in the same way as the parent data structure,
specify INZ(*LIKEDS).
D sysName DS qualified
D lib 10A inz(’*LIBL’)
D obj 10A
D userSpace DS LIKEDS(sysName) INZ(*LIKEDS)
// The variable "userSpace" was initialized with *LIKEDS, so the
// first ’lib’ subfield was initialized to ’*LIBL’. The second
// ’obj’ subfield must be set using a calculation.
C eval userSpace.obj = ’TEMPSPACE’
Figure 117. Using INZ(*LIKEDS)
P createSpace B
D createSpace PI
D name LIKEDS(sysName)
/free
if name.lib = *blanks;
name.lib = ’*LIBL’;
endif;
QUSCRTUS (name : *blanks : 4096 : ’ ’ : ’*USE’ : *blanks);
/end-free
P createSpace E
Figure 118. Using a data structure parameter in a subprocedure
| LIKEREC(intrecname{:*ALL|*INPUT|*OUTPUT |*KEY})
| Keyword LIKEREC is used to define a data structure, data structure subfield,
| prototyped return value, or prototyped parameter like a record. The subfields of
| the data structure will be identical to the fields in the record. LIKEREC can take an
| optional second parameter which indicates which fields of the record to include in
| the data structure. These include:
| v *ALL All fields in the external record are extracted.
| v *INPUT All input-capable fields are extracted. (This is the default.)
| v *OUTPUT All output-capable fields are extracted.
| v *KEY The key fields are extracted in the order that the keys are defined on the
| K specification in the DDS.
| The following should be taken into acount when using the LIKEREC keyword:
| v The first parameter for keyword LIKEREC is a record name in the program. If
| the record name has been renamed, it is the internal name for the record.
| v The second parameter for LIKEREC must match the definition of the associated
| record or file. *INPUT is only allowed for input and update capable records;
| *OUTPUT is only allowed for output capable records; *ALL is allowed for any
| type of record; and *KEY is only allowed for keyed files. If not specified, the
| parameter defaults to *INPUT.
| v For *INPUT and *OUTPUT, subfields included in the data structure occupy the
| same start positions as in the external record description.
| v If a prefix was specified for the file, the specified prefix is applied to the names
| of the subfields.
| v Even if a field in the record is explicitly renamed on an input specification the
| external name (possibly prefixed) is used, not the internal name.

| v A data structure defined with LIKEREC is a qualified data structure.
NOOPT
The NOOPT keyword indicates that no optimization is to be performed on the
standalone field, parameter or data structure for which this keyword is specified.
Specifying NOOPT ensures that the content of the data item is the latest assigned
value. This may be necessary for those fields whose values are used in exception
handling.
Note: The optimizer may keep some values in registers and restore them only to
storage at predefined points during normal program execution. Exception
handling may break this normal execution sequence, and consequently
program variables contained in registers may not be returned to their
assigned storage locations. As a result, when those variables are used in
exception handling, they may not contain the latest assigned value. The
NOOPT keyword will ensure their currency.
If a data item which is to be passed by reference is defined with the NOOPT

keyword, then any prototype or procedure interface parameter definition must also
have the NOOPT keyword specified. This requirement does not apply to
parameters passed by value.
TIP
Any data item defined in an OPM RPG/400 program is implicitly defined
with NOOPT. So if you are creating a prototype for an OPM program, you
should specify NOOPT for all parameters defined within the prototype. This
will avoid errors for any users of the prototype.
All keywords allowed for standalone field definitions, parameters, or data

structure definitions are allowed with NOOPT.
OCCURS(numeric_constant)
The OCCURS keyword allows the specification of the number of occurrences of a
multiple-occurrence data structure.
The numeric_constant parameter must be a value greater than 0 with no decimal

positions. It can be a numeric literal, a built-in function returning a numeric value,
or a numeric constant.
The constant value does not need to be known at the time the keyword is
processed, but the value must be known at compile-time.
This keyword is not valid for a program status data structure, a file information
data structure, or a data area data structure.
If a multiple occurrence data structure contains pointer subfields, the distance

between occurrences must be an exact multiple of 16 because of system storage
restrictions for pointers. This means that the distance between occurrences may be
greater than the length of each occurrence.
The following is an example showing the storage allocation of a multiple

occurrence data structure with pointer subfields.

*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... *

D DS1 DS OCCURS(2)
D POINTER 16*
D FLD5 5
D DS2 DS OCCURS(2)
D CHAR16 16
D CHR5 5
Allocation of fields in storage. The occurrences of DS1 are 32 bytes apart, while the
occurrences of DS2 are 21 bytes apart.
DS1 OCCURRENCE 1 DS1 OCCURRENCE 2
POINTER FLD5 (fill) POINTER FLD5 (fill)
DS2 OCCURRENCE 1 DS2 OCCURRENCE 2
CHAR16 CHR5 CHAR16 CHR5
Figure 119. Storage Allocation of Multiple Occurrence Data Structure with Pointer Subfields
OPDESC
The OPDESC keyword specifies that operational descriptors are to be passed with
the parameters that are defined within a prototype.
When OPDESC is specified, operational descriptors are passed with all character or
graphic parameters that are passed by reference. If you attempt to retrieve an
operational descriptor for a parameter passed by value, an error will result.
Note: Operational descriptors are not passed for UCS-2 fields.
Using CALLP with a prototyped procedure whose prototype contains OPDESC is

the same as calling a procedure using CALLB (D). Operational descriptors are also
passed for procedures called within expressions.
The keyword applies both to a prototype definition and to a procedure-interface

definition. It cannot be used with the EXTPGM keyword.
For an example of the OPDESC keyword, see the service program example in the
WebSphere Development Studio: ILE RPG Programmer’s Guide.
OPTIONS(*NOPASS *OMIT *VARSIZE *STRING *RIGHTADJ)

The OPTIONS keyword is used to specify one or more parameter passing options:
v Whether a parameter must be passed
v Whether the special value *OMIT can be passed for the parameter passed by
reference.
v Whether a parameter that is passed by reference can be shorter in length than is
specified in the prototype.

v Whether the called program or procedure is expecting a pointer to a
null-terminated string, allowing you to specify a character expression as the
passed parameter.
When OPTIONS(*NOPASS) is specified on a definition specification, the parameter

does not have to be passed on the call. Any parameters following that specification
must also have *NOPASS specified. When the parameter is not passed to a
program or procedure, the called program or procedure will simply function as if
the parameter list did not include that parameter. If the unpassed parameter is
accessed in the called program or procedure, unpredictable results will occur.
When OPTIONS(*OMIT) is specified, then the value *OMIT is allowed for that
parameter. *OMIT is only allowed for CONST parameters and parameters which
are passed by reference. For more information on omitted parameters, see the
chapter on calling programs and procedures in WebSphere Development Studio: ILE
OPTIONS(*VARSIZE) is valid only for parameters passed by reference that have a

character, graphic, or UCS-2 data type, or that represent an array of any type.
When OPTIONS(*VARSIZE) is specified, the passed parameter may be shorter or

longer in length than is defined in the prototype. It is then up to the called
program or subprocedure to ensure that it accesses only as much data as was
passed. To communicate the amount of data passed, you can either pass an extra
parameter containing the length, or use operational descriptors for the
subprocedure. For variable-length fields, you can use the %LEN built-in function to
determine the current length of the passed parameter.
When OPTIONS(*VARSIZE) is omitted for fixed-length fields, you must pass at

least as much data as is required by the prototype; for variable-length fields, the
parameter must have the same declared maximum length as indicated on the
definition.
Note: For the parameter passing options *NOPASS, *OMIT, and *VARSIZE, it is up
to the programmer of the procedure to ensure that these options are
handled. For example, if OPTIONS(*NOPASS) is coded and you choose to
pass the parameter, the procedure must check that the parameter was
passed before it accesses it. The compiler will not do any checking for this.
When OPTIONS(*STRING) is specified for a basing pointer parameter passed by

value or by constant-reference, you may either pass a pointer or a character
expression. If you pass a character expression, a temporary value will be created
containing the value of the character expression followed by a null-terminator
(x’00’). The address of this temporary value will be passed to the called program
or procedure.
When OPTIONS(*RIGHTADJ) is specified for a CONST or VALUE parameter in a

function prototype, the character, graphic, or UCS-2 parameter value is right
adjusted. This keyword is not allowed for a varying length parameter within a
procedure prototype. Varying length values may be passed as parameters on a
procedure call where the corresponding parameter is defined with
OPTIONS(*RIGHTADJ).
You can specify more than one option. For example, to specify that an optional
parameter can be shorter than the prototype indicates, you would code
OPTIONS(*VARSIZE : *NOPASS).

The following example shows how to code a prototype and procedure that use
OPTIONS(*NOPASS) to indicate that a parameter is optional.
* The following prototype describes a procedure that expects

* either one or two parameters.
D FormatAddress PR 45A
D City 20A CONST
D Province 20A CONST OPTIONS(*NOPASS)
* The first call to FormatAddress only passes one parameter. The
* second call passes both parameters.
C EVAL A = FormatAddress(’North York’)
C EVAL A = FormatAddress(’Victoria’ : ’B.C.’)
C RETURN
*----------------------------------------------------------------
* FormatAddress:
* This procedure must check the number of parameters since the
* second was defined with OPTIONS(*NOPASS).
* It should only use the second parameter if it was passed.
*----------------------------------------------------------------
P FormatAddress B
D FormatAddress PI 45A
D City 20A CONST
D ProvParm 20A CONST OPTIONS(*NOPASS)
D Province S 20A INZ(’Ontario’)
* Set the local variable Province to the value of the second
* parameter if it was passed. Otherwise let it default to
* ’Ontario’ as it was initialized.
C IF %PARMS > 1
C EVAL Province = ProvParm
C ENDIF
* Return the city and province in the form City, Province
* for example ’North York, Ontario’
C RETURN %TRIMR(City) + ’,’ + Province
P FormatAddress E
Figure 120. Using OPTIONS(*NOPASS) to Indicate that a Parameter is Optional
The following example shows how to code a prototype and procedure using
OPTIONS(*OMIT) to indicate that the special value *OMIT may be passed as a
parameter.

FQSYSPRT O F 10 PRINTER USROPN

* The following prototype describes a procedure that allows
* the special value *OMIT to be passed as a parameter.
* If the parameter is passed, it is set to ’1’ if an error
* occurred, and ’0’ otherwise.
D OpenFile PR
D Error 1A OPTIONS(*OMIT)
C SETOFF 10
* The first call to OpenFile assumes that no error will occur,
* so it does not bother with the error code and passes *OMIT.
C CALLP OpenFile(*OMIT)
* The second call to OpenFile passes an indicator so that
* it can check whether an error occurred.
C CALLP OpenFile(*IN10)
C IF *IN10
C ... an error occurred
C ENDIF
C RETURN
*----------------------------------------------------------------
* OpenFile
* This procedure must check the number of parameters since the
* second was defined with OPTIONS(*OMIT).
* It should only use the second parameter if it was passed.
*----------------------------------------------------------------
P OpenFile B
D OpenFile PI
D Error 1A OPTIONS(*OMIT)
D SaveIn01 S 1A
* Save the current value of indicator 01 in case it is being
* used elsewhere.
C EVAL SaveIn01 = *IN01
* Open the file. *IN01 will indicate if an error occurs.
C OPEN QSYSPRT 01
* If the Error parameter was passed, update it with the indicator
C IF %ADDR(Error) <> *NULL
C EVAL Error = *IN01
C ENDIF
* Restore *IN01 to its original value.
C EVAL *IN01 = SaveIn01
P OpenFile E
Figure 121. Using OPTIONS(*OMIT)
The following example shows how to code a prototype and procedure allowing
variable-length parameters, using OPTIONS(*VARSIZE).

* The following prototype describes a procedure that allows

* both a variable-length array and a variable-length character
* field to be passed. Other parameters indicate the lengths.
D Search PR 5U 0
D SearchIn 50A OPTIONS(*VARSIZE)
D DIM(100) CONST
D ArrayLen 5U 0 VALUE
D ArrayDim 5U 0 VALUE
D SearchFor 50A OPTIONS(*VARSIZE) CONST
D FieldLen 5U 0 VALUE
D Arr1 S 1A DIM(7) CTDATA PERRCD(7)
D Arr2 S 10A DIM(3) CTDATA
D Elem S 5U 0
* Call Search to search an array of 7 elements of length 1 with
* a search argument of length 1. Since the ’*’ is in the 5th
* element of the array, Elem will have the value 5.
C EVAL Elem = Search(Arr1 :
C %SIZE(Arr1) : %ELEM(Arr1) :
C ’*’ : 1)
* Call Search to search an array of 3 elements of length 10 with
* a search argument of length 4. Since ’Pink’ is not in the
* array, Elem will have the value 0.
C EVAL Elem = Search(Arr2 :
C %SIZE(Arr2) : %ELEM(Arr2) :
C ’Pink’ : 4)
C RETURN
Figure 122. Using OPTIONS(*VARSIZE) (Part 1 of 2)

*------------------------------------------------------------
* Search:
* Searches for SearchFor in the array SearchIn. Returns
* the element where the value is found, or 0 if not found.
* The character parameters can be of any length or
* dimension since OPTIONS(*VARSIZE) is specified for both.
*------------------------------------------------------------
P Search B
D Search PI 5U 0
D SearchIn 50A OPTIONS(*VARSIZE)
D DIM(100) CONST
D ArrayLen 5U 0 VALUE
D ArrayDim 5U 0 VALUE
D SearchFor 50A OPTIONS(*VARSIZE) CONST
D FieldLen 5U 0 VALUE
D I S 5U 0
* Check each element of the array to see if it the same
* as the SearchFor. Use the dimension that was passed as
* a parameter rather than the declared dimension. Use
* %SUBST with the length parameter since the parameters may
* not have the declared length.
C 1 DO ArrayDim I 5 0
* If this element matches SearchFor, return the index.
C IF %SUBST(SearchIn(I) : 1 : ArrayLen)
C = %SUBST(SearchFor : 1 : FieldLen)
C RETURN I
C ENDIF
C ENDDO
* No matching element was found.
C RETURN 0
P Search E
**CTDATA ARR1
A2$@*jM
**CTDATA ARR2
Red
Blue
Yellow
Figure 122. Using OPTIONS(*VARSIZE) (Part 2 of 2)
The following example shows how to use OPTIONS(*STRING) to code a prototype

and procedure that use a null-terminated string parameter.

* The following prototype describes a procedure that expects

* a null-terminated string parameter. It returns the length
* of the string.
D StringLen PR 5U 0
D Pointer * VALUE OPTIONS(*STRING)
D P S *
D Len S 5U 0
* Call StringLen with a character literal. The result will be
* 4 since the literal is 4 bytes long.
C EVAL Len = StringLen(’abcd’)
* Call StringLen with a pointer to a string. Use ALLOC to get
* storage for the pointer, and use %STR to initialize the storage
* to ’My string¬’ where ’¬’ represents the null-termination
* character x’00’.
* The result will be 9 which is the length of ’My string’.
C ALLOC 25 P
C EVAL %STR(P:25) = ’My string’
C EVAL Len = StringLen(P)
* Free the storage.
C DEALLOC P
C RETURN
*------------------------------------------------------------
* StringLen:
* Returns the length of the string that the parameter is
* pointing to.
*------------------------------------------------------------
P StringLen B
D StringLen PI 5U 0
D Pointer * VALUE OPTIONS(*STRING)
C RETURN %LEN(%STR(Pointer))
P StringLen E
Figure 123. Using OPTIONS(*STRING)
OVERLAY(name{:pos | *NEXT})
The OVERLAY keyword overlays the storage of one subfield with that of another
subfield, or with that of the data structure itself. This keyword is allowed only for
data structure subfields.
The Name-entry subfield overlays the storage specified by the name parameter at
the position specified by the pos parameter. If pos is not specified, it defaults to 1.
Note: The pos parameter is in units of bytes, regardless of the types of the
subfields.
Specifying OVERLAY(name:*NEXT) positions the subfield at the next available

position within the overlaid field. (This will be the first byte past all other
subfields prior to this subfield that overlay the same subfield.)
The following rules apply to keyword OVERLAY:

1. The name parameter must be the name of a subfield defined previously in the
current data structure, or the name of the current data structure.
2. If the data structure is qualified, the first parameter to the OVERLAY keyword
must be specified without the qualifying data structure name. In the following
example, subfield MsgInfo.MsgPrefix overlays subfield MsgInfo.MsgId.
D MsgInfo DS QUALIFIED
D MsgId 7
D MsgPrefix 3 OVERLAY(MsgId)

3. The pos parameter (if specified) must be a value greater than 0 with no decimal
positions. It can be a numeric literal, a built-in function returning a numeric
value, or a numeric constant. If pos is a named constant, it must be defined
prior to this specification.
4. The OVERLAY keyword is not allowed when the From-Position entry is not
blank.
5. If the name parameter is a subfield, the subfield being defined must be
contained completely within the subfield specified by the name parameter.
6. Alignment of subfields defined using the OVERLAY keyword must be done
manually. If they are not correctly aligned, a warning message is issued.
7. If the subfield specified as the first parameter for the OVERLAY keyword is an
array, the OVERLAY keyword applies to each element of the array. That is, the
field being defined is defined as an array with the same number of elements.
The first element of this array overlays the first element of the overlaid array,
the second element of this array overlays the second element of the overlaid
array, and so on. No array keywords may be specified for the subfield with the
OVERLAY keyword in this situation. (Refer to Figure 124) See also “SORTA
(Sort an Array)” on page 722.
If the subfield name, specified as the first parameter for the OVERLAY
keyword, is an array and its element length is longer than the length of the
subfield being defined, the array elements of the subfield being defined are not
stored contiguously. Such an array is not allowed as the Result Field of a
PARM operation or in Factor 2 or the Result Field of a MOVEA operation.
8. If the ALIGN keyword is specified for the data structure, subfields defined with
OVERLAY(name:*NEXT) are aligned to their preferred alignment. Pointer
subfields are always aligned on a 16-byte boundary.
9. If a subfield with overlaying subfields is not otherwise defined, the subfield is
implicitly defined as follows:
v The start position is the first available position in the data structure.
v The length is the minimum length that can contain all overlaying subfields. If
the subfield is defined as an array, the length will be increased to ensure
proper alignment of all overlaying subfields.
Examples
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... *

DName+++++++++++ETDsFrom+++To/L+++IDc.Keywords++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
D DataStruct DS
D A 10 DIM(5)
D B 5 OVERLAY(A)
D C 5 OVERLAY(A:6)
Allocation of fields in storage:
A(1) A(2) A(3) A(4) A(5)

B(1) C(1) B(2) C(2) B(3) C(3) B(4) C(4) B(5) C(5)
Figure 124. Storage Allocation of Subfields with Keywords DIM and OVERLAY

*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... *

D DataStruct DS
D A 5
D B 1 OVERLAY(A) DIM(4)
Allocation of fields in storage:
A
B(1) B(2) B(3) B(4)
Figure 125. Storage Allocation of Subfields with Keywords DIM and OVERLAY
The following example shows two equivalent ways of defining subfield overlay
positions: explicitly with (name:pos) and implicitly with (name:*NEXT).
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... *

* Define subfield overlay positions explicitly
D DataStruct DS
D PartNumber 10A
D Family 3A OVERLAY(PartNumber)
D Sequence 6A OVERLAY(PartNumber:4)
D Language 1A OVERLAY(PartNumber:10)
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... *
* Define subfield overlay positions with *NEXT
D DataStruct DS
D PartNumber
D Family 3A OVERLAY(PartNumber)
D Sequence 6A OVERLAY(PartNumber:*NEXT)
D Language 1A OVERLAY(PartNumber:*NEXT)
Figure 126. Defining Subfield Overlay Positions with *NEXT
PACKEVEN
The PACKEVEN keyword indicates that the packed field or array has an even
number of digits. The keyword is only valid for packed program-described
data-structure subfields defined using FROM/TO positions. For a field or array
element of length N, if the PACKEVEN keyword is not specified, the number of
digits is 2N - 1; if the PACKEVEN keyword is specified, the number of digits is
2(N-1).
PERRCD(numeric_constant)
The PERRCD keyword allows you to specify the number of elements per record
for a compile-time or a prerun-time array or table. If the PERRCD keyword is not
specified, the number of elements per record defaults to one (1).
The numeric_constant parameter must be a value greater than 0 with no decimal

positions. It can be a numeric literal, a built-in function returning a numeric value,
or a numeric constant. If the parameter is a named constant, it does not need to be
defined prior to this specification.
The PERRCD keyword is valid only when the keyword FROMFILE, TOFILE, or
CTDATA is specified.

PREFIX(prefix{:nbr_of_char_replaced})
The PREFIX keyword allows the specification of a character string or character
literal which is to be prefixed to the subfield names of the externally described
data structure being defined. In addition, you can optionally specify a numeric
value to indicate the number of characters, if any, in the existing name to be
replaced. If the parameter ’nbr_of_char_replaced’ is not specified, then the string is
attached to the beginning of the name.
If the ’nbr_of_char_replaced’ is specified, it must represent a numeric value

between 0 and 9 with no decimal places. Specifying a value of zero is the same as
not specifying ’nbr_of_char_replaced’ at all. For example, the specification
PREFIX(YE:3) would change the field name ’YTDTOTAL’ to ’YETOTAL’.
The ’nbr_of_char_replaced’ parameter can be a numeric literal, a built-in function

that returns a numeric value, or a numeric constant. If it is a named constant, then
the constant must be defined prior to the specification containing the PREFIX
keyword. In addition, if it is a built-in function, all parameters to the built-in
function must be defined prior to the specification containing the keyword PREFIX.
The following rules apply:

v Subfields that are explicitly renamed using the EXTFLD keyword are not
affected by this keyword.
v The total length of a name after applying the prefix must not exceed the
maximum length of an RPG field name.
v If the number of characters in the name to be prefixed is less than or equal to
the value represented by the ’nbr_of_char_replaced’ parameter, then the entire
name is replaced by the prefix_string.
v The prefix cannot end in a period.
v If the prefix is a character literal, it must be uppercase.
PROCPTR
The PROCPTR keyword defines an item as a procedure pointer. The internal
Data-Type field (position 40) must contain a *.
QUALIFIED
The QUALIFIED keyword specifies that the subfields of a data structure will be
accessed by specifying the data structure name followed by a period and the
subfield name. The data structure must have a name.
The subfields can have any valid name, even if the name has been used elsewhere
in the program. This is illustrated in the following example:
* In this example, FILE1 and FILE2 are the names of files. FILE1 and FILE2 are
* also subfields of qualified data structure FILESTATUS. This is valid,
* because the subfields FILE1 and FILE2 must be qualified by the data structure
* name: FILESTATUS.FILE1 and FILESTATUS.FILE2.
Ffile1 if e disk
Ffile2 if e disk
D fileStatus ds qualified
D file1 N
D file2 N
C open(e) file1
C eval fileStatus.file1 = %error

STATIC
The STATIC keyword is used:
v To specify that a local variable is stored in static storage
v To specify that a Java method is defined as a static method.
For a local variable of a subprocedure, the STATIC keyword specifies that the data
item is to be stored in static storage, and thereby hold its value across calls to the
procedure in which it is defined. The keyword can only be used within a
subprocedure. All global fields are static.
The data item is initialized when the program or service program it is contained in
is first activated. It is not reinitialized again, even if reinitialization occurs for
global definitions as part of normal cycle processing.
If STATIC is not specified, then any locally defined data item is stored in automatic
storage. Data stored in automatic storage is initialized at the beginning of every
call. When a procedure is called recursively, each invocation gets its own copy of
the storage.
For a Java method, the STATIC keyword specifies that the method is defined as
static. If STATIC is not specified, the method is assumed to be an instance method.
TIMFMT(format{separator})
The TIMFMT keyword allows the specification of an internal time format, and
optionally the time separator, for any of these items of type Time: standalone field;
data-structure subfield; prototyped parameter; or return value on a prototype or
procedure-interface definition. This keyword will be automatically generated for an
externally described data-structure subfield of type Time.
If TIMFMT is not specified, the Time field will have the time format and separator
as specified by the TIMFMT keyword on the control specification, if present. If
none is specified on the control specification, then it will have *ISO format.
internal formats, see “Internal and External Formats” on page 167.
TOFILE(file_name)
The TOFILE keyword allows the specification of a target file to which a
prerun-time or compile-time array or table is to be written.
If an array or table is to be written, specify the file name of the output or

combined file as the keyword parameter. This file must also be defined in the file
description specifications. An array or table can be written to only one output
device.
If an array or table is assigned to an output file, it is automatically written if the

LR indicator is on at program termination. The array or table is written after all
other records are written to the file.
If an array or table is to be written to the same file from which it was read, the
same file name that was specified as the FROMFILE parameter must be specified
as the TOFILE parameter. This file must be defined as a combined file (C in
position 17 on the file description specification).

VALUE
The VALUE keyword indicates that the parameter is passed by value rather than
by reference. Parameters can be passed by value when the procedure they are
associated with are called using a procedure call.
The VALUE keyword cannot be specified for a parameter if its prototype was
defined using the EXTPGM keyword. Calls to programs require that parameters be
passed by reference.
The rules for what can be passed as a value parameter to a called procedure are
the same as the rules for what can be assigned using the EVAL operation. The
parameter received by the procedure corresponds to the left-hand side of the
expression; the passed parameter corresponds to the right-hand side. See “EVAL
(Evaluate expression)” on page 590 for more information.
VARYING
The VARYING keyword indicates that a character, graphic, or UCS-2 field, defined
on the definition specifications, should have a variable-length format. If this
keyword is not specified for character, graphic, or UCS-2 fields, they are defined as
fixed length.
For more information, see “Variable-Length Character, Graphic and UCS-2

Formats” on page 173.
Summary According to Definition Specification Type

Table 28 lists the required and allowed entries for each definition specification type.
Table 29 on page 319 and Table 30 on page 320 list the keywords allowed for each
definition specification type.
In each of these tables, an R indicates that an entry in these positions is required

and an A indicates that an entry in these positions is allowed.
Table 28. Required/Allowed Entries for each Definition Specification Type
Type Pos. 7-21 Pos. 22 Pos. 23 Pos. 24-25 Pos. 26-32 Pos. Pos. 40 Pos. 41-42 Pos.
Name External DS Type Defn. From 33-39 To Data- Decimal 44-80
Type / Length type Pos. Key-
words
Data A A A R A A
Structure
Data A A A A A A
Structure
Subfield
External A R A
Subfield
Standalone R R A A A A
Field
Named R R R
Constant
Prototype R R A A A A
Prototype A A A A A
Parameter

Table 28. Required/Allowed Entries for each Definition Specification Type (continued)
Type Pos. 7-21 Pos. 22 Pos. 23 Pos. 24-25 Pos. 26-32 Pos. Pos. 40 Pos. 41-42 Pos.
Name External DS Type Defn. From 33-39 To Data- Decimal 44-80
Type / Length type Pos. Key-
words
Procedure A R A A A A
Interface
Procedure R A A A A
Interface
Parameter
Table 29. Data Structure, Standalone Fields, and Named Constants Keywords
Keyword Data Data External Standalone Named
Structure Structure Subfield Field Constant
Subfield
ALIGN A
ALT A A A
ALTSEQ A A A A
ASCEND A A A
BASED A A
CCSID A A
CLASS A
1
CONST R
2
CTDATA A A A
DATFMT A A
DESCEND A A A
| DIM A A A A
2
DTAARA A A A
2
EXPORT A A
EXTFLD A
EXTFMT A A A
4
EXTNAME A
2
FROMFILE A A A
2
IMPORT A A
INZ A A A A
LIKE A A
5
| LIKEDS A A
| LIKEREC A A
NOOPT A A
OCCURS A
OVERLAY A
PACKEVEN A
PERRCD A A A
4
PREFIX A

Table 29. Data Structure, Standalone Fields, and Named Constants Keywords (continued)
Keyword Data Data External Standalone Named
Structure Structure Subfield Field Constant
Subfield
PROCPTR A A
QUALIFIED A
3
STATIC A A
TIMFMT A A
2
TOFILE A A A
VARYING A A
Notes:
1. When defining a named constant, the keyword is optional, but the parameter to the
keyword is required. For example, to assign a named constant the value ’10’, you could
specify either CONST(’10’) or ’10’.
2. This keyword applies only to global definitions.
3. This keyword applies only to local definitions.
4. This keyword applies only to externally described data structures.
5. This keyword applies only to program-described data structures.
Table 30. Prototype, Procedure Interface, and Parameter Keywords

Keyword Prototype (PR) Procedure Interface PR or PI Parameter
(PI)
ALTSEQ A A A
ASCEND A
CCSID A A A
CLASS A A A
CONST A
DATFMT A A A
DESCEND A
DIM A A A
EXTPGM A
EXTPROC A
LIKE A A A
LIKEDS A A A
| LIKEREC A A A
NOOPT A
OPDESC A A
OPTIONS A
PROCPTR A A A
STATIC A A
TIMFMT A A A
VALUE A
VARYING A A A

Chapter 16. Input Specifications
For a program-described input file, input specifications describe the types of
records within the file, the sequence of the types of records, the fields within a
record, the data within the field, indicators based on the contents of the fields,
control fields, fields used for matching records, and fields used for sequence
checking. For an externally described file, input specifications are optional and can
be used to add RPG IV functions to the external description.
Detailed information for the input specifications is given in:

v Entries for program described files
v Entries for externally described files
Input Specification Statement

The general layout for the Input specification is as follows:
v the input specification type (I) is entered in position 6
80
100
Program Described
For program described files, entries on input specifications are divided into the
following categories:
v Record identification entries (positions 7 through 46), which describe the input
record and its relationship to other records in the file.
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8 ...+... 9 ...+... 10
IFilename++SqNORiPos1+NCCPos2+NCCPos3+NCC..................................Comments++++++++++++
I.........And..RiPos1+NCCPos2+NCCPos3+NCC..................................Comments++++++++++++
Figure 127. Program Described Record Layout
v Field description entries (positions 31 through 74), which describe the fields in
the records. Each field is described on a separate line, below its corresponding
record identification entry.
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8 ...+... 9 ...+... 10
I........................Fmt+SPFrom+To+++DcField+++++++++L1M1FrPlMnZr......Comments++++++++++++
Figure 128. Program Described Field Layout
Externally Described
For externally described files, entries on input specifications are divided into the

Input Specification Statement
v Record identification entries (positions 7 through 16, and 21 through 22), which
identify the record (the externally described record format) to which RPG IV
functions are to be added.
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8 ...+... 9 ...+... 10
IRcdname+++....Ri..........................................................Comments++++++++++++
Figure 129. Externally Described Record Layout
v Field description entries (positions 21 through 30, 49 through 66, and 69 through
74), which describe the RPG IV functions to be added to the fields in the record.
Field description entries are written on the lines following the corresponding
record identification entries.
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8 ...+... 9 ...+... 10
I..............Ext-field+..................Field+++++++++L1M1..PlMnZr......Comments++++++++++++
Figure 130. Externally Described Field Layout
Program Described Files

An I must appear in position 6 to identify this line as an input specification
statement.
Record Identification Entries

Record identification entries (positions 7 through 46) for a program described file
describe the input record and its relationship to other records in the file.

Entry Explanation
A valid file name
Same file name that appears on the file description specifications for the
input file.
Enter the name of the file to be described in these positions. This name must be
the same name defined for the file on the file description specifications. This file
must be an input file, an update file, or a combined file. The file name must be
entered on the first record identification line for each file and can be entered on
subsequent record identification lines for that file. All entries describing one input
file must appear together; they cannot be mixed with entries for other files.
Positions 16-18 (Logical Relationship)

Entry Explanation
AND More than three identification codes are used.
OR Two or more record types have common fields.
An unlimited number of AND/OR lines can be used. For more information see
“AND Relationship” on page 327 and “OR Relationship” on page 327.

Positions 17-18 (Sequence)
Entry Explanation
Any two alphabetic characters
The program does not check for special sequence.
Any two-digit number
The program checks for special sequence within the group.
The numeric sequence entry combined with the number (position 19) and option
(position 20) entries causes the program to check the sequence of input records
within a file. If the sequence is not correct, control passes to the RPG IV
exception/error handling routine. If AND or OR lines are specified, the sequence
entry is made on the main record line of the group, not on the AND or OR lines.
Alphabetic and numeric entries can be made for different records (different record
identification lines) in the same file, but records with alphabetic entries must be
specified before records with numeric entries.
Alphabetic Entries
Enter any two alphabetic characters in these positions when no sequence checking
is to be done. It is common programming practice to specify these codes in a
sequence that aids in program documentation. However, it is not necessary to use
unique alphabetic entries.
Numeric Entries
Enter a unique numeric code in positions 17 and 18 if one record type must be
read before another record type in a file. Numeric entries must be in ascending
order, starting with 01, but need not be consecutive. When a numeric entry is used,
the appropriate entries must be made in positions 19 and 20.
To specify sequence checking, each record type must have a record identification
code, and the record types must be numbered in the order in which they should
appear. This order is checked as the records are read. If a record type is out of
sequence, control passes to the RPG IV exception/error handling routine.
Sequence numbers ensure only that all records of each record type precede the
records of higher sequence-numbered record types. The sequence numbers do not
ensure that records within a record type are in any certain order. Sequence
numbers are unrelated to control levels and do not provide for checking data in
fields of a record for a special sequence. Use positions 65 and 66 (matching fields)
to indicate that data in fields of a record should be checked for a special sequence.
Position 19 (Number)
Entry Explanation
Blank The program does not check record types for a special sequence (positions
17 and 18 have alphabetic entries).
1 Only one record of this type can be present in the sequenced group.
N One or more records of this type can be present in the sequenced group.
This entry must be used when a numeric entry is made in positions 17 and 18. If
an alphabetic entry is made in positions 17 and 18, this entry must be blank.
Chapter 16. Input Specifications 323

Position 20 (Option)
Entry Explanation
Blank The record type must be present if sequence checking is specified.
O The record type is optional (that is, it may or may not be present) if
sequence checking is specified.
This entry must be blank if positions 17 and 18 contain an alphabetic entry.
Sequence checking of record types has no meaning when all record types within a
file are specified as optional (alphabetic entry in positions 17 and 18 or O entry in
position 20).
Positions 21-22 (Record Identifying Indicator, or **)

Entry Explanation
Blank No indicator is used.
01-99 General indicator.
L1-L9 or LR
Control level indicator used for a record identifying indicator.
H1-H9 Halt indicator.
U1-U8 External indicator.
RT Return indicator.
** Lookahead record (not an indicator). Lookahead can be used only with a
primary or secondary file.
The indicators specified in these positions are used in conjunction with the record
identification codes (positions 23 through 46).
Indicators
Positions 21 and 22 associate an indicator with the record type defined on this line.
The normal entry is one of the indicators 01 to 99; however, the control level
indicators L1 through L9 and LR can be used to cause certain total steps to be
processed. If a control level indicator is specified, lower control level indicators are
not set on. The halt indicators H1 through H9 can be used to stop processing. The
return indicator (RT) is used to return to the calling program.
When a record is selected for processing and satisfies the conditions indicated by
the record identification codes, the appropriate record identifying indicator is set
on. This indicator can be used to condition calculation and output operations.
Record identifying indicators can be set on or set off by the programmer. However,
at the end of the cycle, all record identifying indicators are set off before another
record is selected.
Lookahead Fields
The entry of ** is used for the lookahead function. This function lets you look at
information in the next record in a file. You can look not only at the file currently
selected for processing but also at other files present but not selected during this
cycle.
Field description lines must contain From and To entries in the record, a field
name, and decimal positions if the field is numeric. Note that a lookahead field

may not be specified as a field name on input specifications or as a data structure
name on definition specifications or as a Result Field on Calculation Specifications.
Positions 17 and 18 must contain an alphabetic entry. The lookahead fields are
defined in positions 49 through 62 of the lines following the line containing ** in
positions 21 and 22. Positions 63 through 80 must be blank.
Any or all of the fields in a record can be defined as lookahead fields. This
definition applies to all records in the file, regardless of their type. If a field is used
both as a lookahead field and as a normal input field, it must be defined twice
with different names.
The lookahead function can be specified only for primary and secondary files and
can be specified only once for a file. It cannot be used for full procedural files
(identified by an F in position 18 of the file description specifications), or with
AND or OR lines.
When a record is being processed from a combined file or an update file, the data
in the lookahead field is the same as the data in the record being processed, not
the data in the next record.
The lookahead function causes information in the file information data structure to
be updated with data pertaining to the lookahead record, not to the current
primary record.
If an array element is specified as a lookahead field, the entire array is classified as

a lookahead field.
So that the end of the file can be recognized, lookahead fields are filled with a
special value when all records in the file have been processed. For character fields,
this value is all ’9’s; for all other data types, this value is the same as *HIVAL.
Positions 23-46 (Record Identification Codes)

Entries in positions 23 through 46 identify each record type in the input file. One
to three identification codes can be entered on each specification line. More than
three record identification codes can be specified on additional lines with the
AND/OR relationship. If the file contains only one record type, the identification
codes can be left blank; however, a record identifying indicator entry (positions 21
and 22) and a sequence entry (positions 17 and 18) must be made.
Note: Record identification codes are not applicable for graphic or UCS-2 data
type processing: record identification is done on single byte positions only.
Three sets of entries can be made in positions 23 through 46: 23 through 30, 31
through 38, and 39 through 46. Each set is divided into four groups: position, not,
code part, and character.
The following table shows which categories use which positions in each set.
Category 23-30 31-38 39-46

Position 23-27 31-35 39-43
Not 28 36 44
Code Part 29 37 45
Character 30 38 46

Entries in these sets need not be in sequence. For example, an entry can be made
in positions 31 through 38 without requiring an entry in positions 23 through 30.
Entries for record identification codes are not necessary if input records within a
file are of the same type. An input specification containing no record identification
code defines the last record type for the file, thus allowing the handling of any
record types that are undefined. If no record identification codes are satisfied,
control passes to the RPG IVexception/error handling routine.
Positions 23-27, 31-35, and 39-43 (Position)

Entry Explanation
Blank No record identification code is present.
1-32766
The position that contains the record identification code in the record.
In these positions enter the position that contains the record identification code in
each record. The position containing the code must be within the record length
specified for the file. This entry must be right-adjusted, but leading zeros can be
omitted.
Positions 28, 36, and 44 (Not)

Entry Explanation
Blank Record identification code must be present.
N Record identification code must not be present.
Enter an N in this position if the code described must not be present in the
specified record position.
Positions 29, 37, and 45 (Code Part)

Entry Explanation
C Entire character
Z Zone portion of character
D Digit portion of character.
This entry specifies what part of the character in the record identification code is to
be tested.
Character (C): The C entry indicates that the complete structure (zone and digit)
of the character is to be tested.
Zone (Z): The Z entry indicates that the zone portion of the character is to be
tested. The zone entry causes the four high-order bits of the character entry to be
compared with the zone portion of the character in the record position specified in
the position entry. The following three special cases are exceptions:
v The hexadecimal representation of an & (ampersand) is 50. However, when an
ampersand is coded in the character entry, it is treated as if its hexadecimal
representation were C0, that is, as if it had the same zone as A through I. An
ampersand in the input data satisfies two zone checks: one for a hexadecimal 5
zone, the other for a hexadecimal C zone.

v The hexadecimal representation of a - (minus sign) is 60. However, when a
minus sign is coded in the character entry, it is treated as if its hexadecimal
representation were D0, that is, as if it had the same zone as J through R. A
minus sign in the input data satisfies two zone checks: one for a hexadecimal 6
zone, the other for a hexadecimal D zone.
v The hexadecimal representation of a blank is 40. However, when a blank is
coded in the character entry, it is treated as if its hexadecimal representation
were F0, that is, as if it had the same zone as 0 through 9. A blank in the input
data satisfies two zone checks: one for a hexadecimal 4 zone, the other for a
hexadecimal F zone.
Digit (D): The D entry indicates that the digit portion of the character is to be
tested. The four low-order bits of the character are compared with the character
specified by the position entry.
Positions 30, 38, and 46 (Character)

In this position enter the identifying character that is to be compared with the
character in the position specified in the input record.
The check for record type always starts with the first record type specified. If data
in a record satisfies more than one set of record identification codes, the first
record type satisfied determines the record types.
When more than one record type is specified for a file, the record identification
codes should be coded so that each input record has a unique set of identification
codes.
AND Relationship
The AND relationship is used when more than three record identification codes
identify a record.
To use the AND relationship, enter at least one record identification code on the
first line and enter the remaining record identification codes on the following lines
with AND coded in positions 16 through 18 for each additional line used. Positions
7 through 15, 19 through 20, and 46 through 80 of each line with AND in positions
16 through 18 must be blank. Sequence, and record-identifying-indicator entries are
made in the first line of the group and cannot be specified in the additional lines.
An unlimited number of AND/OR lines can be used on the input specifications.
OR Relationship
The OR relationship is used when two or more record types have common fields.
To use the OR relationship, enter OR in positions 16 and 17. Positions 7 through

15, 18 through 20, and 46 through 80 must be blank. A record identifying indicator
can be entered in positions 21 and 22. If the indicator entry is made and the record
identification codes on the OR line are satisfied, the indicator specified in positions
21 and 22 on that line is set on. If no indicator entry is made, the indicator on the
preceding line is set on.
An unlimited number of AND/OR lines can be used on the input specifications.
Field Description Entries

The field description entries (positions 31 through 74) must follow the record
identification entries (positions 7 through 46) for each file.

An I must appear in position 6 to identify this line as an input specification
statement.
Positions 7-30 (Reserved)

Positions 7-30 must be blank.
Positions 31-34 (Data Attributes)

Positions 31-34 specify the external format for a date, time, or variable-length
character, graphic, or UCS-2 field.
If this entry is blank for a date or time field, then the format/separator specified
for the file (with either DATFMT or TIMFMT or both) is used. If there is no
external date or time format specified for the file, then an error message is issued.
See Table 13 on page 194 and Table 16 on page 196 for valid date and time formats.
For character, graphic, or UCS-2 data, the *VAR data attribute is used to specify
variable-length input fields. If this entry is blank for character, graphic, or UCS-2
data, then the external format must be fixed length. The internal and external
format must match, if the field is defined elsewhere in the program. For more
information on variable-length fields, see “Variable-Length Character, Graphic and
UCS-2 Formats” on page 173.
For more information on external formats, see “Internal and External Formats” on
page 167.
Position 35 (Date/Time Separator)

Position 35 specifies a separator character to be used for date/time fields. The &
(ampersand) can be used to specify a blank separator. See Table 13 on page 194 and
Table 16 on page 196 for date and time formats and their default separators.
For an entry to be made in this field, an entry must also be made in positions
31-34 (date/time external format).
Position 36 (Data Format)

Entry Explanation
Blank The input field is in zoned decimal format or is a character field.
A Character field (fixed- or variable-length format)
C UCS-2 field (fixed- or variable-length format)
G Graphic field (fixed- or variable-length format)
B Numeric field (binary format)
F Numeric field (float format)
I Numeric field (integer format)
L Numeric field with a preceding (left) plus or minus sign (zoned decimal
format)
N Character field (Indicator format)
P Numeric field (packed decimal format)

R Numeric field with a following (right) plus or minus sign (zoned decimal
format)
S Numeric field (zoned decimal format)
U Numeric field (unsigned format)
D Date field — the date field has the external format specified in positions
31-34 or the default file date format.
T Time field — the time field has the external format specified in positions
31-34 or the default file time format.
Z Timestamp field
The entry in position 36 specifies the data type, and if numeric, the external data
format of the data in the program-described file.
Positions 37-46 (Field Location)

Entry Explanation
Two 1- to 5-digit numbers
Beginning of a field (from) and end of a field (to).
This entry describes the location and size of each field in the input record.
Positions 37 through 41 specify the location of the field’s beginning position;
positions 42 through 46 specify the location of the field’s end position. To define a
single-position field, enter the same number in positions 37 through 41 and in
positions 42 through 46. Numeric entries must be right-adjusted; leading zeros can
be omitted.
The maximum number of positions in the input record for each type of field is as
follows:
Positions Type of Field
| 31 Zoned decimal numeric (31 digits)
| 16 Packed numeric (31 digits)
4 Binary (9 digits)
8 Integer (20 digits)
8 Unsigned (20 digits)
8 Float (8 bytes)
| 32 Numeric with leading or trailing sign (31 digits)
10 Date
8 Time
26 Timestamp
32766 Character (32766 characters)
32766 Graphic or UCS-2 (16383 double-byte characters)
32766 Variable-Length Character (32764 characters)
32766 Variable-Length Graphic or UCS-2 (16382 double-byte characters)
32766 Data structure

The maximum size of a character or data structure field specified as a program
described input field is 32766 since that is the maximum record length for a file.
When specifying a variable-length character, graphic, or UCS-2 input field, the

length includes the 2 byte length prefix.
For arrays, enter the beginning position of the array in positions 37 through 41 and
the ending position in positions 42 through 46. The array length must be an
integral multiple of the length of an element. The From-To position does not have
to account for all the elements in the array. The placement of data into the array
starts with the first element.

Entry Explanation
Blank Character, graphic, UCS-2, float, date, time, or timestamp field
| 0-31 Number of decimal positions in numeric field.
This entry, used with the data format entry in position 36, describes the format of
the field. An entry in this field identifies the input field as numeric (except float
numeric); if the field is numeric, an entry must be made. The number of decimal
positions specified for a numeric field cannot exceed the length of the field.
Positions 49-62 (Field Name)

Entry Explanation
Symbolic name
Field name, data structure name, data structure subfield name,
array name, array element, PAGE, PAGE1-PAGE7, *IN, *INxx, or
*IN(xx).
These positions name the fields of an input record that are used in an RPG IV
program. This name must follow the rules for symbolic names.
To refer to an entire array on the input specifications, enter the array name in
positions 49 through 62. If an array name is entered in positions 49 through 62,
control level (positions 63-64), matching fields (positions 65 and 66), and field
indicators (positions 67 through 68) must be blank.
To refer to an element of an array, specify the array name, followed by an index

enclosed within parentheses. The index is either a numeric field with zero decimal
positions or the actual number of the array element to be used. The value of the
index can vary from 1 to n, where n is the number of elements within the array.
Positions 63-64 (Control Level)

Entry Explanation
Blank This field is not a control field. Control level indicators cannot be used
with full procedural files.
L1-L9 This field is a control field.
Positions 63 and 64 indicate the fields that are used as control fields. A change in
the contents of a control field causes all operations conditioned by that control
level indicator and by all lower level indicators to be processed.

A split control field is a control field that is made up of more than one field, each
having the same control level indicator. The first field specified with that control
level indicator is placed in the high-order position of the split control field, and the
last field specified with the same control level indicator is placed in the low-order
position of the split control field.
Binary, float, integer, character varying, graphic varying, UCS-2 and unsigned
fields cannot be used as control fields.
Positions 65-66 (Matching Fields)

Entry Explanation
Blank This field is not a match field.
M1-M9 This field is a match field.
This entry is used to match the records of one file with those of another or to
sequence check match fields within one file. Match fields can be specified only for
fields in primary and secondary files.
Binary, float, integer, character varying, graphic varying, UCS-2, and unsigned
fields cannot be used as match fields.
Match fields within a record are designated by an M1 through M9 code entered in

positions 65 and 66 of the appropriate field description specification line. A
maximum of nine match fields can be specified.
The match field codes M1 through M9 can be assigned in any sequence. For
example, M3 can be defined on the line before M1, or M1 need not be defined at
all.
When more than one match field code is used for a record, all fields can be
considered as one large field. M1 or the lowest code used is the rightmost or
low-order position of the field. M9 or the highest code used is the leftmost or
high-order position of the field.
The ALTSEQ (alternate collating sequence) and FTRANS (file translation) keywords
on the control specification can be used to alter the collating sequence for match
fields.
If match fields are specified for only a single sequential file (input, update, or
combined), match fields within the file are sequence checked. The MR indicator is
not set on and cannot be used in the program. An out-of-sequence record causes
the RPG IV exception/error handling routine to be given control.
In addition to sequence checking, match fields are used to match records from the
primary file with those from secondary files.
Positions 67-68 (Field Record Relation)

Entry Explanation
Blank The field is common to all record types.
01-99 General indicators.
L1-L9 Control level indicators.

MR Matching record indicator.
U1-U8 External indicators.
H1-H9 Halt indicators.
Field record relation indicators are used to associate fields within a particular
record type when that record type is one of several in an OR relationship. This
entry reduces the number of lines that must be written.
The field described on a line is extracted from the record by the RPG IV program
only when the indicator coded in positions 67 and 68 is on or when positions 67
and 68 are blank. When positions 67 and 68 are blank, the field is common to all
record types defined by the OR relationship.
Field record relation indicators can be used with control level fields (positions 63
and 64) and matching fields (positions 65 and 66).
Positions 69-74 (Field Indicators)

Entry Explanation
Blank No indicator specified
01-99 General indicators
H1-H9 Halt indicator
U1-U8 External indicators
Entries in positions 69 through 74 test the status of a field or of an array element

as it is read into the program. Field indicators are specified on the same line as the
field to be tested. Depending on the status of the field (plus, minus, zero, or
blank), the appropriate indicator is set on and can be used to condition later
specifications. The same indicator can be specified in two positions, but it should
not be used for all three positions. Field indicators cannot be used with arrays that
are not indexed or look-ahead fields.
Positions 69 and 70 (plus) and positions 71 and 72 (minus) are valid for numeric
fields only. Positions 73 and 74 can be used to test a numeric field for zeros or a
character, graphic, or UCS-2 field for blanks.
The field indicators are set on if the field or array element meets the condition
specified when the record is read. Each field indicator is related to only one record
type; therefore, the indicators are not reset (on or off) until the related record is
read again or until the indicator is defined in some other specification.
Externally Described Files

An I must appear in position 6 to identify this line as an input specifications
statement.


When the description of an externally described file is retrieved by the compiler,
the record definitions are also retrieved. To refer to the record definitions, specify
the record format name in the input, calculation, and output specifications of the
program. Input specifications for an externally described file are required if:
v Record identifying indicators are to be specified.
v A field within a record is to be renamed for the program.
v Control level or matching field indicators are to be used.
v Field indicators are to be used.
The field description specifications must immediately follow the record

identification specification for an externally described file.
A record line for an externally described file defines the beginning of the override
specifications for the record. All specifications following the record line are part of
the record override until another record format name or file name is found in
positions 7 through 16 of the input specifications. All record lines that pertain to an
externally described file must appear together; they cannot be mixed with entries
for other files.
Positions 7-16 (Record Name)

Enter one of the following:
v The external name of the record format. (The file name cannot be used for an
externally described file.)
v The RPG IV name specified by the RENAME keyword on the file description
specifications if the external record format was renamed. A record format name
can appear only once in positions 7 through 16 of the input specifications for a
program.

Positions 17 through 20 must be blank.
Positions 21-22 (Record Identifying Indicator)

The specification of record identifying indicators in these positions is optional but,
if present, follows the rules as described under “Program Described Files” on
page 322 earlier in this chapter, except for look-ahead specifications, which are not
allowed for an externally described file.

Positions 23-80 must be blank.

The field description specifications for an externally described file can be used to
rename a field within a record for a program or to specify control level, field
indicator, and match field functions. The field definitions (attributes) are retrieved
| from the externally described file and cannot be changed by the program. If the
| attributes of a field are not valid to an RPG IV program the field cannot be used.
Diagnostic checking is done on fields contained in an external record format in the
same way as for source statements.

Normally, externally described input fields are only read during input operations if
the field is actually used elsewhere in the program. If DEBUG or DEBUG(*YES) is
specified, all externally described input fields will be read even if they are not used
in the program.

Positions 21-30 (External Field Name)

If a field within a record in an externally described file is to be renamed, enter the
external name of the field in these positions. A field may have to be renamed
because the name is the same as a field name specified in the program and two
different names are required.


The field name entry is made only when it is required for the RPG IV function
(such as control levels) added to the external description. The field name entry
contains one of the following:
v The name of the field as defined in the external record description (if 10
characters or less).
v The name specified to be used in the program that replaced the external name
specified in positions 21 through 30.
The field name must follow the rules for using symbolic names.
Indicators are not allowed to be null-capable.

This entry indicates whether the field is to be used as a control field in the
program.
Entry Explanation
Blank This field is not a control field.
L1-L9 This field is a control field.
Null-capable and UCS-2 fields cannot be used as control fields.
Note: For externally described files, split control fields are combined in the order
in which the fields are specified on the data description specifications (DDS),
not in the order in which the fields are specified on the input specifications.
Positions 65-66 (Matching Fields)

This entry indicates whether the field is to be used as a match field.
Entry Explanation
Blank This field is not a match field.
M1-M9
This field is a match field.

Null-capable and UCS-2 fields cannot be used as matching fields.
See “Positions 65-66 (Matching Fields)” on page 331 for more information on match
fields.

Positions 67 and 68 must be blank.
Positions 69-74 (Field Indicators)

Entry Explanation
Blank No indicator specified
H1-H9 Halt indicators
Field indicators are allowed for null-capable fields only if the

ALWNULL(*USRCTL) keyword is specified on a control specification or as a
command parameter.
If a field is a null-capable field and the value is null, the indicator is set off.
See “Positions 69-74 (Field Indicators)” on page 332 for more information.



Chapter 17. Calculation Specifications
Calculation specifications indicate the operations done on the data in a program.
Calculation specifications within the main source section must be grouped in the
following order:
v Detail calculations
v Total calculations
v Subroutines
Calculation specifications for subprocedures include two groups:

v Body of the subprocedure
v Subroutines
Calculations within the groups must be specified in the order in which they are to
be done.
Note: If the keyword NOMAIN is specified on the control specification, then only
declarative calculation specifications are allowed in the main source section.
You can specify calculation specifications in three different formats:

v “Traditional Syntax”
v “Extended Factor 2 Syntax” on page 343
v “Free-Form Syntax” on page 345.
See Chapter 23, “Operation Codes” on page 523 for details on how the calculation
specification entries must be specified for individual operation codes.
The calculation specification can also be used to enter SQL statements into an ILE
RPG program. See WebSphere Development Studio: ILE RPG Programmer’s Guide and
the iSeries Information Center database and file systems category for more
information.
Traditional Syntax
The general layout for the calculation specification is as follows:
v The calculation specification type (C) is entered in position 6
position 80. These positions are divided into three parts that specify the
following:
– When calculations are done:
The control level indicator and the conditioning indicators specified in
positions 7 through 11 determine when and under what conditions the
calculations are to be done.
– What kind of calculations are done:
The entries specified in positions 12 through 70 (12 through 80 for operations
that use extended factor 2, see “Extended Factor 2 Syntax” on page 343 and
Chapter 21, “Expressions” on page 419) specify the kind of calculations done,

Calculation Specification - Traditional Syntax
the data (such as fields or files) upon which the operation is done, and the
field that contains the results of the calculation.
– What tests are done on the results of the operation:
Indicators specified in positions 71 through 76 are used to test the results of
the calculations and can condition subsequent calculations or output
operations. The resulting indicator positions have various uses, depending on
the operation code. For the uses of these positions, see the individual
operation codes in Chapter 23, “Operation Codes” on page 523.
100
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8 ...+... 9 ...+... 10
CL0N01Factor1+++++++Opcode(E)+Factor2+++++++Result++++++++Len++D+HiLoEq....Comments++++++++++++
CL0N01Factor1+++++++Opcode(E)+Extended-factor2+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++Comments++++++++++++
Figure 131. Calculation Specification Layout
Calculation Specification Extended Factor-2 Continuation Line

The Extended Factor-2 field can be continued on subsequent lines as follows:
v position 6 of the continuation line must contain a C
v positions 7 to 35 of the continuation line must be blank
v the specification continues on or past position 36
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8 ...+... 9 ...+... 10
C.............................Extended-factor2-continuation++++++++++++++++Comments++++++++++++
Figure 132. Calculation Specification Extended Factor-2 Continuation Line

A C must appear in position 6 to identify this line as a calculation specification
statement.

Entry Explanation
Blank The calculation operation is done at detail calculation time for each
program cycle if the indicators in positions 9 through 11 allow it;
or the calculation is part of a subroutine. Blank is also used for
declarative operation codes.
L0 The calculation operation is done at total calculation time for each
program cycle.
L1-L9 The calculation operation is done at total calculation time when the
control level indicator is on. The indicator is set on either through
a level break or as the result of an input or calculation operation.
LR The calculation operation is done after the last record has been
processed or after the LR indicator has been set on.
SR The calculation operation is part of an RPG IV subroutine. A blank
entry is also valid for calculations that are part of a subroutine.
AN, OR Indicators on more than one line condition the calculation.

Control Level Indicators
The L0 entry is used in positions 7 and 8 to indicate that the calculation is always
done during total calculation time.
If indicators L1 through L9 are specified in positions 7 and 8, the calculation is

processed at total calculation time only when the specified indicator is on.
Remember that, if L1 through L9 are set on by a control break, all lower level
indicators are also set on. If positions 7 and 8 are blank, the calculation is done at
detail time calculation, is a statement within a subroutine, is a declarative
statement, or is a continuation line.
The following operations can be specified within total calculations with positions 7
and 8 blank: PLIST, PARM, KLIST, KFLD, TAG, DEFINE, and ELSE. (Conditioning
indicators in positions 9 through 11 are not allowed with these operations.) In
addition, all the preceding operations except TAG and ELSE can be specified
anywhere within the calculations, even between an ENDSR operation of one
subroutine and the BEGSR operation of the next subroutine or after the ENDSR
operation for the last subroutine.
Note: Control indicators cannot be specified in subprocedures.
Last Record Indicator

The LR Indicator, if specified in positions 7 and 8, causes the calculation to be done
during the last total calculation time. Note that the LR indicator cannot be
specified in subprocedures.
If there is a primary file but no secondary files in the program, the LR indicator is
set on after the last input record has been read, the calculations specified for the
record have been done, and the detail output for the last record read has been
completed.
If there is more than one input file (primary and secondary), the programmer
determines which files are to be checked for end-of-file by entering an E in
position 19 of the file description specifications. LR is set on when all files with an
end-of-file specification have been completely read, when detail output for the last
record in these files has been completed, and after all matching secondary records
have been processed.
When the LR indicator is set on after the last input record has been read, all
control indicators L1 through L9 defined to the program are also set on.
Subroutine Identifier
An SR entry in positions 7 and 8 may optionally be used for operations within
subroutines as a documentation aid. Subroutine lines must appear after the total
calculation specifications. The operation codes BEGSR and ENDSR serve as
delimiters for a subroutine.
AND/OR Lines Identifier

Positions 7 and 8 can contain AN or OR to define additional indicators (positions 9
through 11) for a calculation.
The entry in positions 7 and 8 of the line immediately preceding an AND/OR line
or a group of AND/OR lines determines when the calculation is to be processed.
The entry in positions 7 and 8 on the first line of a group applies to all AND/OR
lines in the group. A control level indicator (L1 through L9, L0, or LR) is entered
for total calculations, an SR or blanks for subroutines, and a blank for detail
calculations.
Chapter 17. Calculation Specifications 339

Positions 9-11 (Indicators)
Entry Explanation
Blank The operation is processed on every record
01-99 General indicators.
KA-KN, KP-KY
Function key indicators.
LR Last record indicator.
U1-U8 External indicators.
OA-OG, OV Overflow indicator.
Positions 10 and 11 contain an indicator that is tested to determine if a particular

calculation is to be processed. A blank in position 9 designates that the indicator
must be on for a calculation to be done. An N in positions 9 designates that the
associated indicator must be off for a calculation to be done.
Positions 12-25 (Factor 1)

Factor 1 names a field or gives actual data (literals) on which an operation is done,
or contains a RPG IV special word (for example, *LOCK) which provides extra
information on how an operation is to be done. The entry must begin in position
12. The entries that are valid for factor 1 depend on the operation code specified in
positions 26 through 35. For the specific entries for factor 1 for a particular
operation code, see Chapter 23, “Operation Codes” on page 523. With some
operation codes, two operands may be specified separated by a colon.
Positions 26-35 (Operation and Extender)

Positions 26 through 35 specify the kind of operation to be done using factor 1,
factor 2, and the result field entries. The operation code must begin in position 26.
For further information on the operation codes, see Chapter 20, “Operations” on
page 369 and Chapter 23, “Operation Codes” on page 523. For further information
on the operation code extenders, see “Operation Extender”.
Operation Extender
Entry Explanation
Blank No operation extension supplied
A Used on the DUMP operation to indicate that the operation is always
performed regardless of the DEBUG option set on the H specification.
H Half adjust (round) result of numeric operation
N Record is read but not locked
Set pointer to *NULL after successful DEALLOC
P Pad the result field with blanks
D Pass operational descriptors on bound call

Date field
T Time field
Z Timestamp field
M Default precision rules
R ″Result Decimal Position″ precision rules
E Error handling
The operation extenders provide additional attributes to the operations that they
accompany. Operation extenders are specified in positions 26-35 of calculation
specifications. They must begin to the right of the operation code and be contained
within parentheses; blanks can be used for readability. For example, the following
are all valid entries: MULT(H), MULT (H), MULT ( H ).
More than one operation extender can be specified. For example, the CALLP
operation can specify both error handling and the default precision rules with
CALLP(EM).
An H indicates whether the contents of the result field are to be half adjusted
(rounded). Resulting indicators are set according to the value of the result field
after half-adjusting has been done.
An N in a READ, READE, READP, READPE, or CHAIN operation on an update

disk file indicates that a record is to be read, but not locked. If no value is
specified, the default action of locking occurs.
An N in a DEALLOC operation indicates that the result field pointer is to be set to

*NULL after a successful deallocation.
A P indicates that, the result field is padded after executing the instruction if the
result field is longer than the result of the operation.
A D when specified on the CALLB operation code indicates that operational

descriptors are included.
The D, T, and Z extenders can be used with the TEST operation code to indicate a
date, time, or timestamp field.
M and R are specified for the precision of single free-form expressions. For more
information, see “Precision Rules for Numeric Operations” on page 428.
An M indicates that the default precision rules are used.
An R indicates that the precision of a decimal intermediate will be computed such

that the number of decimal places will never be reduced smaller than the number
of decimal positions of the result of the assignment.
An E indicates that operation-related errors will be checked with built-in function

%ERROR.

Factor 2 names a field, record format or file, or gives actual data on which an
operation is to be done, or contains a special word (for example, *ALL) which
gives extra information about the operation to be done. The entry must begin in

position 36. The entries that are valid for factor 2 depend on the operation code
specified in positions 26 through 35. With some operation codes, two operands
may be specified separated by a colon. For the specific entries for factor 2 for a
particular operation code, see Chapter 23, “Operation Codes” on page 523.
Positions 50-63 (Result Field)

The result field names the field or record format that contains the result of the
calculation operation specified in positions 26 through 35. The field specified must
be modifiable. For example, it cannot be a lookahead field or a user date field.
With some operation codes, two operands may be specified separated by a colon.
See Chapter 23, “Operation Codes” on page 523 for the result field rules for
individual operation codes.
Positions 64-68 (Field Length)

| Entry Explanation
| 1-31 Numeric field length.
| 1-65535 Character field length.
| Blank The result field is defined elsewhere or a field cannot be defined
| using this operation code
Positions 64 through 68 specify the length of the result field. This entry is optional,
but can be used to define a numeric or character field not defined elsewhere in the
program. These definitions of the field entries are allowed if the result field
contains a field name. Other data types must be defined on the definition
specification or on the calculation specification using the *LIKE DEFINE operation.
The entry specifies the number of positions to be reserved for the result field. The
entry must be right-adjusted. The unpacked length (number of digits) must be
specified for numeric fields.
If the result field is defined elsewhere in the program, no entry is required for the
length. However, if the length is specified, and if the result field is defined
elsewhere, the length must be the same as the previously defined length.

Entry Explanation
Blank The result field is character data, has been defined elsewhere in the
program, or no field name has been specified.
| 0-31 Number of decimal positions in a numeric result field.
Positions 69-70 indicate the number of positions to the right of the decimal in a
numeric result field. If the numeric result field contains no decimal positions, enter
a '0' (zero). This position must be blank if the result field is character data or if no
field length is specified. The number of decimal positions specified cannot exceed
the length of the field.
Positions 71-76 (Resulting Indicators)

These positions can be used, for example, to test the value of a result field after the
completion of an operation, or to indicate conditions like end-of-file, error, or
record-not-found. For some operations, you can control the way the operation is
performed by specifying different combinations of the three resulting indicators

(for example, LOOKUP). The resulting indicator positions have different uses,
depending on the operation code specified. See the individual operation codes in
Chapter 23, “Operation Codes” on page 523 for a description of the associated
resulting indicators. For arithmetic operations, the result field is tested only after
the field is truncated and half-adjustment is done (if specified). The setting of
indicators depends on the results of the tests specified.
Entry Explanation
Blank No resulting indicator specified
KA-KN, KP-KY
Function key indicators
H1-H9 Halt indicators
L1-L9 Control level indicators
LR Last record indicator
OA-OG, OV Overflow indicators
Resulting indicators cannot be used when the result field uses a non-indexed array.
If the same indicator is used as a resulting indicator on more than one calculation
specification, the most recent specification processed determines the status of that
indicator.
Remember the following points when specifying resulting indicators:

v When the calculation operation is done, the specified resulting indicators are set
off, and, if a condition specified by a resulting indicator is satisfied, that
indicator is set on.
v When a control level indicator (L1 through L9) is set on, the lower level
indicators are not set on.
v When a halt indicator (H1 through H9) is set on, the program ends abnormally
at the next *GETIN point in the cycle, or when a RETURN operation is
processed, unless the halt indicator is set off before the indicator is tested.
Extended Factor 2 Syntax

Certain operation codes allow an expression to be used in the extended factor 2
field.

See “Positions 7-8 (Control Level)” on page 338.
Positions 9-11 (Indicators)

See “Positions 9-11 (Indicators)” on page 340.

Factor 1 must be blank.

Calculation Specification - Extended Factor 2
Positions 26-35 (Operation and Extender)
Positions 26 through 35 specify the kind of operation to be done using the
expression in the extended factor 2 field. The operation code must begin in
position 26. For further information on the operation codes, see Chapter 20,
“Operations” on page 369 and Chapter 23, “Operation Codes” on page 523. For
further information on the operation code extenders, see “Operation Extender”.
The program processes the operations in the order specified on the calculation
specifications form.
Operation Extender
Entry Explanation
Blank No operation extension supplied.
H Half adjust (round) result of numeric operation
M Default precision rules
R ″Result Decimal Position″ precision rules
E Error handling
Half adjust may be specified, using the H extender, on arithmetic EVAL and
RETURN operations.
The type of precision may be specified, using the M or R extender, on CALLP,

DOU, DOW, EVAL, IF, RETURN, and WHEN operations.
Error handling may be specified, using the ’E’ extender, on CALLP operations.
Positions 36-80 (Extended Factor 2)

A free form syntax is used in this field. It consists of combinations of operands and
operators, and may optionally span multiple lines. If specified across multiple
lines, the continuation lines must be blank in positions 7-35.
The operations that take an extended factor 2 are:

v “CALLP (Call a Prototyped Procedure or Program)” on page 539
v “DOU (Do Until)” on page 574
v “DOW (Do While)” on page 577
v “EVAL (Evaluate expression)” on page 590
v “EVALR (Evaluate expression, right adjust)” on page 592
v “FOR (For)” on page 601
v “IF (If)” on page 607
v “ON-ERROR (On Error)” on page 667
v “RETURN (Return to Caller)” on page 702
v “WHEN (When True Then Select)” on page 746
See the specific operation codes for more information. See “Continuation Rules” on
page 233 for more information on coding continuation lines.

Calculation Specification - Free-Form Syntax
Free-Form Syntax
To begin a free-form calculation group, specify /FREE in positions 7 to 11 and leave
positions 12 to 80 blank. The free-form calculation block ends when you specify
/END-FREE.
In a free-form statement, the operation code does not need to begin in any specific
position within columns 8–80. Any extenders must appear immediately after the
operation code on the same line, within parentheses. There must be no embedded
blanks between the operation code and extenders. Following the operation code
and extenders, you specify the Factor 1, Factor 2, and the Result Field operands
separated by blanks. If any of these are not required by the operation, you may
leave them out. You can freely use blanks and continuation lines in the remainder
of the statement. Each statement must end with a semicolon. The remainder of the
record after the semicolon must be blank or contain an end-of-line comment.
For the EVAL or CALLP operation code, you can omit the operation code. For
example, the following two statements are equivalent:
eval pos = %scan (’,’: name);
pos = %scan (’,’: name);
For each record within a free-form calculation block, positions 6 and 7 must be
blank.
You can specify compiler directives within a free-format calculation block, with the
following restrictions:
v The compiler directive must be the first item on the line. Code the directive
starting anywhere from column 7 onward. It cannot continue to the next line.
v Compiler directives are not allowed within a statement. The directive must
appear on a new line after one statement ends and before the next statement
begins.
v Any statements that are included by a /COPY or /INCLUDE directive are
considered fixed syntax calculations. Any free-form statements in a /COPY
member must be delimited by the /FREE and /END-FREE directives.
Free-form operands can be longer than 14 characters. The following are not
supported:
v Continuation of numeric literals
v Defining field names
v Resulting indicators. (In most cases where you need to use operation codes with
resulting indicators, you can use an equivalent built-in function instead.)
To indicate the start of total calculations, end the free-form group and code a
fixed-form calculation specification with a control level specified in positions 7-8.
The total calculations may be specified using free-form calculation syntax. Since the
free-form calculation specification does not include a control-level entry,
calculations to be performed on specific level breaks should be conditioned using
the statement ″IF *INLx;″.

Calculation Specification - Free-Form Syntax
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
/free
read file; // Get next record

dow not %eof(file); // Keep looping while we have
// a record
if %error;
dsply ’The read failed’;
leave;
else;
chain(n) name database data;
time = hours * num_employees
+ overtime_saved;
pos = %scan (’,’: name);
name = %xlate(upper:lower:name);
exsr handle_record;
read file;
endif;
enddo;
begsr handle_record;
eval(h) time = time + total_hours_array (empno);
temp_hours = total_hours - excess_hours;
record_transaction();
endsr;
/end-free
Figure 133. Example of Free-Form Calculation Specification
You can combine free-form and traditional calculation specifications in the same
program, as shown below:
C testb OPEN_ALL flags 10

/free
if *in10;
openAllFiles();
endif;
/end-free
Figure 134. Example that Combines Traditional and Free-Form Calculation Specifications
Positions 8-80 (Free-form Operations)

Enter an operation that is supported in free-form syntax. Code an operation code
(EVAL and CALLP are optional) followed by the operands or expressions. The
operation may optionally span multiple lines. No new continuation characters are
required; each statement ends with a semicolon (;). However, existing continuation
rules still apply.
See Table 31 on page 369 for a list of the operation codes that can use free-form
syntax. For operations that cannot use free-form syntax, check the detailed
description in Chapter 23, “Operation Codes” on page 523 to see if there is a
suggested replacement. See “Continuation Rules” on page 233 for more information
on coding continuation lines.

Chapter 18. Output Specifications
Output specifications describe the record and the format of fields in a
program-described output file and when the record is to be written. Output
specifications are optional for an externally described file. If NOMAIN is coded on
a control specification, only exception output can be done.
Output specifications can be divided into two categories: record identification and
control (positions 7 through 51), and field description and control (positions 21
through 80). Detailed information for each category of output specifications is
given in:
v Entries for program-described files
v Entries for externally described files
Output Specification Statement

The general layout for the Output specification is as follows:
v the output specification type (O) is entered in position 6
80
100
Program Described
For program described files, entries on the output specifications can be divided
into two categories:
v Record identification and control (positions 7 through 51)
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8 ...+... 9 ...+... 10
OFilename++DF..N01N02N03Excnam++++B++A++Sb+Sa+.............................Comment+++++++++++++
OFilename++DAddN01N02N03Excnam++++.........................................Comment+++++++++++++
O.........And..N01N02N03Excnam++++.........................................Comment+++++++++++++
Figure 135. Program Described Record Layout
v Field description and control (positions 21 through 80). Each field is described
on a separate line, below its corresponding record identification entry.
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8 ...+... 9 ...+... 10
O..............N01N02N03Field+++++++++YB.End++PConstant/editword/DTformat++Comment+++++++++++++
O..............................................Constant/editword-ContinutioComment+++++++++++++
Figure 136. Program Described Field Layout
Externally Described
For externally described files, entries on output specifications are divided into the
v Record identification and control (positions 7 through 39)

Output Specification Statement
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8 ...+... 9 ...+... 10
ORcdname+++D...N01N02N03Excnam++++.........................................Comment+++++++++++++
ORcdname+++DAddN01N02N03Excnam++++.........................................Comment+++++++++++++
O.........And..N01N02N03Excnam++++.........................................Comment+++++++++++++
Figure 137. Externally Described Record Layout
v Field description and control (positions 21 through 43, and 45).
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8 ...+... 9 ...+... 10
O..............N01N02N03Field+++++++++.B...................................Comment+++++++++++++
Figure 138. Externally Described Field Layout
Program Described Files

An O must appear in position 6 to identify this line as an output specifications
statement.
Record Identification and Control Entries

Entries in positions 7 through 51 identify the output records that make up the files,
provide the correct spacing on printed reports, and determine under what
conditions the records are to be written.

Entry Explanation
A valid file name
Same file name that appears on the file description specifications
for the output file.
Specify the file name on the first line that defines an output record for the file. The
file name specified must be the same file name assigned to the output, update, or
combined file on the file description specifications. If records from files are
interspersed on the output specifications, the file name must be specified each time
the file changes.
For files specified as output, update, combined or input with ADD, at least one
output specification is required unless an explicit file operation code with a data
structure name specified in the result field is used in the calculations. For example,
a WRITE operation does not require output specifications.
Positions 16-18 ( Logical Relationship)

Entry Explanation
AND or OR AND/OR indicates a relationship between lines of output
indicators. AND/OR lines are valid for output records, but not for
fields.
Positions 16 through 18 specify AND/OR lines for output operations. To specify

this relationship, enter AND/OR in positions 16 through 18 on each additional line
following the line containing the file name. At least one indicator must be specified

on each AND line. For an AND relationship and fetch overflow position 18 must
be specified on the first line only (file name line). A fetch overflow entry is
required on OR lines for record types requiring the fetch overflow routine.
Positions 7 through 15 must be blank when AND/OR is specified.
An unlimited number of AND/OR lines can be specified on the output

specifications.
Position 17 (Type)
Entry Explanation
H or D Detail records usually contain data that comes directly from the
input record or that is the result of calculations processed at detail
time. Heading records usually contain constant identifying
information such as titles, column headings, page number, and
date. No distinction is made between heading and detail records.
The H/D specifications are available to help the programmer
document the program.
T Total records usually contain data that is the end result of specific
calculations on several detail records.
E Exception records are written during calculation time. Exception
records can be specified only when the operation code EXCEPT is
used. See “EXCEPT (Calculation Time Output)” on page 593 for
further information on the EXCEPT operation code.
Position 17 indicates the type of record to be written. Position 17 must have an

entry for every output record. Heading (H) and detail (D) lines are both processed
as detail records. No special sequence is required for coding the output records;
however, lines are handled at separate times within the program cycle based on
their record type. See Figure 5 on page 22 and Figure 6 on page 23 for more
information on when in the cycle output is performed.
Note: If NOMAIN is coded on a control specification, only exception output can

be done.
Positions 18-20 (Record Addition/Deletion)

Entry Explanation
ADD Add a record to the file or subfile.
DEL Delete the last record read from the file. The deleted record cannot be
retrieved; the record is deleted from the system.
An entry of ADD is valid for input, output, or update files. DEL is valid for update
DISK files only. When ADD is specified, there must be an A in position 20 of the
corresponding file-description specification.
If positions 18-20 are blank, then for an output file, the record will be added; for an
update file, the record is updated.
The Record-Addition/Deletion entry must appear on the same line that contains
the record type (H, D, T, E) specification (position 17). If an AND/OR line is used
following an ADD or DEL entry, this entry applies to the AND/OR line also.
Chapter 18. Output Specifications 349

Position 18 (Fetch Overflow/Release)
Entry Explanation
Blank Must be blank for all files except printer files (PRINTER specified in
positions 36 through 42 of the file description specifications). If position 18
is blank for printer files, overflow is not fetched.
F Fetch overflow.
R Release a device (workstation) after output.
Fetch Overflow
An F in position 18 specifies fetch overflow for the printer file defined on this line.
This file must be a printer file that has overflow lines. Fetch overflow is processed
only when an overflow occurs and when all conditions specified by the indicators
in positions 21 through 29 are satisfied. An overflow indicator cannot be specified
on the same line as fetch overflow.
If an overflow indicator has not been specified with the OFLIND keyword on the
file description specifications for a printer file, the compiler assigns one to the file.
An overflow line is generated by the compiler for the file, except when no other
output records exist for the file or when the printer uses externally described data.
This compiler-generated overflow can be fetched.
Overflow lines can be written during detail, total, or exception output time. When
the fetch overflow is specified, only overflow output associated with the file
containing the processed fetch is output. The fetch overflow entry (F) is required
on each OR line for record types that require the overflow routine. The fetch
overflow routine does not automatically advance forms. For detailed information
on the overflow routine see “Overflow Routine” on page 29 and Figure 7 on
page 29
The form length and overflow line can be specified using the FORMLEN and
OFLIND keywords on the file description specifications, in the printer device file,
or through an OS/400 override command.
Release
After an output operation is complete, the device used in the operation is released
if you have specified an R in position 18 of the corresponding output
specifications. See the “REL (Release)” on page 694 operation for further
information on releasing devices.
Positions 21-29 (Output Conditioning Indicators)

Entry Explanation
Blank The line or field is output every time the record (heading, detail,
total, or exception) is checked for output.
01-99 A general indicator that is used as a resulting indicator, field
indicator, or record identifying indicator.
KA-KN, KP-KY
Function key indicators.

U1-U8 External indicator set before running the program or set as a result
of a calculation operation.
OA-OG, OV Overflow indicator previously assigned to this file.
LR Last record indicator.
1P First-page indicator. Valid only on heading or detail lines.
Conditioning indicators are not required on output lines. If conditioning indicators

are not specified, the line is output every time that record is checked for output.
Up to three indicators can be entered on one specification line to control when a
record or a particular field within a record is written. The indicators that condition
the output are coded in positions 22 and 23, 25 and 26, and 28 and 29. When an N
is entered in positions 21, 24, or 27, the indicator in the associated position must be
off for the line or field to be written. Otherwise, the indicator must be on for the
line or field to be written. See “PAGE, PAGE1-PAGE7” on page 354 for information
on how output indicators affect the PAGE fields.
If more than one indicator is specified on one line, all indicators are considered to
be in an AND relationship.
If the output record must be conditioned by more than three indicators in an AND
relationship, enter the letters AND in positions 16 through 18 of the following line
and specify the additional indicators in positions 21 through 29 on that line.
For an AND relationship, fetch overflow (position 18) can only be specified on the
first line. Positions 40 through 51 (spacing and skipping) must be blank for all
AND lines.
An overflow indicator must be defined on the file description specifications with

the OFLIND keyword before it can be used as a conditioning indicator. If a line is
to be conditioned as an overflow line, the overflow indicator must appear on the
main specification line or on the OR line. If an overflow indicator is used on an
AND line, the line is not treated as an overflow line, but the overflow indicator is
checked before the line is written. In this case, the overflow indicator is treated like
any other output indicator.
If the output record is to be written when any one of two or more sets of
conditions exist (an OR relationship), enter the letters OR in positions 16-18 of the
following specification line, and specify the additional OR indicators on that line.
When an OR line is specified for a printer file, the skip and space entries (positions
40 through 51) can all be blank, in which case the space and skip entries of the
preceding line are used. If they differ from the preceding line, enter space and skip
entries on the OR line. If fetch overflow (position 18) is used, it must be specified
on each OR line.
Positions 30-39 (EXCEPT Name)

When the record type is an exception record (indicated by an E in position 17), a
name can be placed in these positions of the record line. The EXCEPT operation
can specify the name assigned to a group of the records to be output. This name is
called an EXCEPT name. An EXCEPT name must follow the rules for using

symbolic names. A group of any number of output records can use the same
EXCEPT name, and the records do not have to be consecutive records.
When the EXCEPT operation is specified without an EXCEPT name, only those
exception records without an EXCEPT name are checked and written if the
conditioning indicators are satisfied.
When the EXCEPT operation specifies an EXCEPT name, only the exception
records with that name are checked and written if the conditioning indicators are
satisfied.
The EXCEPT name is specified on the main record line and applies to all AND/OR
lines.
If an exception record with an EXCEPT name is conditioned by an overflow

indicator, the record is written only during the overflow portion of the RPG IV
cycle or during fetch overflow. The record is not written at the time the EXCEPT
operation is processed.
An EXCEPT operation with no fields can be used to release a record lock in a file.
The UNLOCK operation can also be used for this purpose. In Figure 139, the
record lock in file RCDA is released by the EXCEPT operation. For more
information, see ILE Application Development Example, SC41-5602-00.
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...
C*
C KEY CHAIN RCDA
C EXCEPT RELEASE
ORcdname+++D...N01N02N03Excnam++++.......................................
O
O*
ORCDA E RELEASE
O* (no fields)
Figure 139. Record Lock in File Released by EXCEPT Operation
Positions 40-51 (Space and Skip)

Use positions 40 through 51 to specify line spacing and skipping for a printer file.
Spacing refers to advancing one line at a time, and skipping refers to jumping from
one print line to another.
If spacing and skipping are specified for the same line, the spacing and skipping
operations are processed in the following sequence:
v Skip before
v Space before
v Print a line
v Skip after
v Space after.
If the PRTCTL (printer control option) keyword is not specified on the file
description specifications, an entry must be made in one of the following positions
when the device is PRINTER: 40-42 (space before), 43-45 (space after), 46-48 (skip
before), or 49-51 (skip after). If a space/skip entry is left blank, the particular
function with the blank entry (such as space before or space after) does not occur.

If entries are made in positions 40-42 (space before) or in positions 46-51 (skip
before and skip after) and no entry is made in positions 43 - 45 (space after), no
space occurs after printing. When PRTCTL is specified, it is used only on records
with blanks specified in positions 40 through 51.
If a skip before or a skip after a line on a new page is specified, but the printer is
on that line, the skip does not occur.
Positions 40-42 (Space Before)

Entry Explanation
0 or Blank No spacing
1-255 Spacing values
Positions 43-45 (Space After)

Entry Explanation
0 or Blank No spacing
1-255 Spacing values
Positions 46-48 (Skip Before)

Entry Explanation
Blank No skipping occurs.
1-255 Skipping values
Positions 49-51 (Skip After)

Entry Explanation
1-255 Skipping values
Field Description and Control Entries

These entries determine under what conditions and in what format fields of a
record are to be written.
Each field is described on a separate line. Field description and control information
for a field begins on the line following the record identification line.
Positions 21-29 (Output Indicators)

Indicators specified on the field description lines determine whether a field is to be
included in the output record, except for PAGE reserved fields. See “PAGE,
PAGE1-PAGE7” on page 354 for information on how output indicators affect the
PAGE fields. The same types of indicators can be used to control fields as are used
to control records, see “Positions 21-29 (Output Conditioning Indicators)” on
page 350. Indicators used to condition field descriptions lines cannot be specified in
an AND/OR relationship. Conditioning indicators cannot be specified on format
name specifications (see “Positions 53-80 (Constant, Edit Word, Data Attributes,
Format Name)” on page 358) for program described WORKSTN files.

In positions 30 through 43, use one of the following entries to specify each field
that is to be written out:
v A field name
v Blanks if a constant is specified in positions 53 through 80
v A table name, array name, or array element
v A named constant
v The RPG IV reserved words PAGE, PAGE1 through PAGE7, *PLACE, UDATE,
*DATE, UDAY, *DAY, UMONTH, *MONTH, UYEAR, *YEAR, *IN, *INxx, or
*IN(xx)
v A data structure name or data structure subfield name.
Note: A pointer field is not a valid output field—that is, pointer fields cannot be
written.
Field Names, Blanks, Tables and Arrays

The field names used must be defined in the program. Do not enter a field name if
a constant or edit word is used in positions 53-80. If a field name is entered in
positions 30 through 43, positions 7 through 20 must be blank.
Fields can be specified in any order because the sequence in which they appear on
the output records is determined by the entry in positions 47 through 51. If fields
overlap, the last field specified is the only field completely written.
When a non-indexed array name is specified, the entire array is written. An array
name with a constant index or variable index causes one element to be written.
When a table name is specified, the element last found in a “LOOKUP (Look Up a
Table or Array Element)” on page 620 operation is written. The first element of a
table is written if no successful LOOKUP operation was done.
The conditions for a record and the field it contains must be satisfied before the
field is written out.
PAGE, PAGE1-PAGE7
To use automatic page numbering, code PAGE in positions 30 through 43 as the
name of the output field. Indicators specified in positions 21 through 29 condition
the resetting of the PAGE field, not whether it prints. The PAGE field is always
incremented by 1 and printed. If the conditioning indicators are met, it is reset to
zero before being incremented by 1 and printed. If page numbers are needed for
several output files (or for different numbering within one file), the entries PAGE1
through PAGE7 can be used. The PAGE fields are automatically zero-suppressed
by the Z edit code.
For more information on the PAGE reserved words, see “RPG IV Words with
Special Functions/Reserved Words” on page 5.
*PLACE
*PLACE is an RPG IV reserved word that is used to repeat data in an output
record. Fields or constants that have been specified on previous specification lines
can be repeated in the output record without having the field and end positions
named on a new specification line. When *PLACE is coded in positions 30 through
43, all data between the first position and the highest end position previously
specified for a field in that output record is repeated until the end position
specified in the output record on the *PLACE specification line is reached. The end
position specified on the *PLACE specification line must be at least twice the

highest end position of the group of fields to be duplicated. *PLACE can be used
with any type of output. Blank after (position 45), editing (positions 44, 53 through
80), data format (position 52), and relative end positions cannot be used with
*PLACE.
User Date Reserved Words

The user date reserved words (UDATE, *DATE, UDAY, *DAY, UMONTH,
*MONTH, UYEAR, *YEAR) allow the programmer to supply a date for the
program at run time. For more information on the user date reserved words, see
“Rules for User Date” on page 7.
*IN, *INxx, *IN(xx)

The reserved words *IN, *INxx and *IN(xx) allow the programmer to refer to and
manipulate RPG IV indicators as data.
Position 44 (Edit Codes)

Entry Explanation
Blank No edit code is used.
1-9, A-D, J-Q, X, Y, Z
Numeric fields are zero-suppressed and punctuated according to a
predefined pattern without the use of edit words.
Position 44 is used to specify edit codes that suppress leading zeros in a numeric
field or to punctuate a numeric field without using an edit word. Allowable entries
are 1 through 9, A through D, J through Q, X, Y, Z, and blank.
Note: The entry must be blank if you are writing a float output field.
For more information on edit codes see Chapter 11, “Editing Numeric Fields” on
page 213.
Edit codes 5 through 9 are user-defined edit codes and are defined externally by an
OS/400 function. The edit code is determined at compilation time. Subsequent
changes to a user-defined edit code will not affect the editing by the RPG IV
compiler unless the program is recompiled.
Position 45 (Blank After)

Entry Explanation
Blank The field is not reset.
B The field specified in positions 30 through 43 is reset to blank, zero, or the
default date/time/timestamp value after the output operation is complete.
Position 45 is used to reset a numeric field to zeros or a character, graphic, or

UCS-2 field to blanks. Date, time, and timestamp fields are reset to their default
values.
If the field is conditioned by indicators in positions 21 through 29, the blank after
is also conditioned. This position must be blank for look-ahead, user date reserved
words, *PLACE, named constants, and literals.
Resetting fields to zeros may be useful in total output when totals are accumulated
and written for each control group in a program. After the total is accumulated

and written for one control group, the total field can be reset to zeros before
accumulation begins on the total for the next control group.
If blank after (position 45) is specified for a field to be written more than once, the
B should be entered on the last line specifying output for that field, or else the
field named will be printed as the blank-after value for all lines after the one doing
the blank after.
Positions 47-51 (End Position)

Entry Explanation
1-n End position
K1-K10 Length of format name for WORKSTN file.
Positions 47 through 51 define the end position of a field or constant on the output
record, or define the length of the data description specifications record format
name for a program described WORKSTN file.
The K identifies the entry as a length rather than an end position, and the number
following the K indicates the length of the record format name. For example, if the
format name is CUSPMT, the entry in positions 50 and 51 is K6. Leading zeros are
permitted following the K, and the entry must be right-adjusted.
Valid entries for end positions are blanks, +nnnn, −nnnn, and nnnnn. All entries in
these positions must end in position 51. Enter the position of the rightmost
character of the field or constant. The end position must not exceed the record
length for the file.
If an entire array is to be written, enter the end position of the last element in the
array in positions 47 through 51. If the array is to be edited, be careful when
specifying the end position to allow enough positions to write all edited elements.
Each element is edited according to the edit code or edit word.
The +nnnn or −nnnn entry specifies the placement of the field or constant relative
to the end position of the previous field. The number (nnnn) must be
right-adjusted, but leading zeros are not required. Enter the sign anywhere to the
left of the number within the entry field. To calculate the end position, use these
formulas:
EP = PEP +nnnn + FL
EP = PEP −nnnn + FL
EP is the calculated end position. PEP is the previous end position. For the first
field specification in the record, PEP is equal to zero. FL is the length of the field
after editing, or the length of the constant specified in this specification. The use of
+nnnn is equivalent to placing nnnn positions between the fields. A -nnnn causes
an overlap of the fields by nnnn positions. For example, if the previous end
position (PEP) is 6, the number of positions to be placed between the fields (nnnn)
is 5, and the field length (FL) is 10, the end position (EP) equals 21.
When *PLACE is used, an actual end position must be specified; it cannot be blank
or a displacement.
An entry of blank is treated as an entry of +0000. No positions separate the fields.

Position 52 (Data Format)
Entry Explanation
Blank
v For numeric fields the data is to be written in zoned decimal format.
v For float numeric fields, the data is to be written in the external display
representation.
v For graphic fields, the data is to be written with SO/SI brackets.
v For UCS-2 fields, the data is to be written in UCS-2 format.
v For date, time, and timestamp fields the data is to be written without
format conversion performed.
v For character fields, the data is to be written as it is stored.
A The character field is to be written in either fixed- or variable-length
format depending on the absense or presence of the *VAR data attribute.
C The UCS-2 field is to be written in either fixed- or variable-length format
depending on the absense or presence of the *VAR data attribute.
G The graphic field (without SO/SI brackets) will be written in either fixed-
or variable-length format depending on the absense or presence of the
*VAR data attribute.
B The numeric field is to be written in binary format.
F The numeric field is to be written in float format.
I The numeric field is to be written out in integer format.
L The numeric field is to be written with a preceding (left) plus or minus
sign, in zoned-decimal format.
N The character field is to be written in indicator format.
P The numeric field is to be written in packed-decimal format.
R The numeric field is to be written with a following (right) plus or minus
sign, in zoned-decimal format.
S The numeric field is to be written out in zoned-decimal format.
U The numeric field is to be written out in unsigned integer format.
D Date field— the date field will be converted to the format specified in
positions 53-80 or to the default file date format.
T Time field— the time field will be converted to the format specified in
positions 53-80 or to the default file time format.
Z Valid for Timestamp fields only.
This position must be blank if editing is specified.
The entry in position 52 specifies the external format of the data in the records in
the file. This entry has no effect on the format used for internal processing of the
output field in the program.
For numeric fields, the number of bytes required in the output record depends on
this format. For example, a numeric field with 5 digits requires:
v 5 bytes when written in zoned format
v 3 bytes when written in packed format

v 6 bytes when written in either L or R format
v 4 bytes when written in binary format
v 2 bytes when written in either I or U format. This may cause an error at run
time if the value is larger than the maximum value for a 2-byte integer or
unsigned field. For the case of 5-digit fields, binary format may be better.
Float numeric fields written out with blank Data Format entry occupy either 14
or 23 positions (for 4-byte and 8-byte float fields respectively) in the output
record.
A ’G’ or blank must be specified for a graphic field in a program-described file. If

’G’ is specified, then, the data will be output without SO/SI. If this column is
blank for program-described output, then SO/SI brackets will be placed around
the field in the output record by the compiler if the field is of type graphic. You
must ensure that there is sufficient room in the output record for both the data and
the SO/SI characters.
Positions 53-80 (Constant, Edit Word, Data Attributes, Format

Name)
Positions 53 through 80 are used to specify a constant, an edit word, a data
attribute, or a format name for a program described file.
Constants
Constants consist of character data (literals) that does not change from one
processing of the program to the next. A constant is the actual data used in the
output record rather than a name representing the location of the data.
A constant can be placed in positions 53 through 80. The constant must begin in
position 54 (apostrophe in position 53), and it must end with an apostrophe even if
it contains only numeric characters. Any apostrophe used within the constant must
be entered twice; however, only one apostrophe appears when the constant is
written out. The field name (positions 30 through 43) must be blank. Constants can
be continued (see “Continuation Rules” on page 233 for continuation rules). Instead
of entering a constant, you can use a named constant.
Graphic and UCS-2 literals or named constants are not allowed as edit words, but
may be specified as constants.
Edit Words
An edit word specifies the punctuation of numeric fields, including the printing of
dollar signs, commas, periods, and sign status. See “Parts of an Edit Word” on
page 220 for details.
Edit words must be character literals or named constants. Graphic, UCS-2, or

hexadecimal literals and named constants are not allowed.
Data Attributes
Data attributes specify the external format for a date, time, or variable-length
character, graphic, or UCS-2 field.
For date and time data, if no date or time format is specified, then the
format/separator specified for the file (with either DATFMT or TIMFMT or both)
is used. If there is no external date or time format specified for the file, then an
error message is issued. See Table 13 on page 194 and Table 16 on page 196 for
valid date and time formats.

For character, graphic, and UCS-2 data, the *VAR data attribute is used to specify
variable-length output fields. If this entry is blank for character, graphic, and
UCS-2 data, then the external format is fixed length. For more information on
variable-length fields, see “Variable-Length Character, Graphic and UCS-2 Formats”
on page 173.
Note: The number of bytes occupied in the output record depends on the format
specified. For example, a date written in *MDY format requires 8 bytes, but
a date written in *ISO format requires 10 bytes.
For more information on external formats, see “Internal and External Formats” on
page 167.
Record Format Name

The name of the data description specifications record format that is used by a
program described WORKSTN file must be specified in positions 53 through 62.
One format name is required for each output record for the WORKSTN file;
specifying more than one format name per record is not allowed. Conditioning
indicators cannot be specified on format name specifications for program described
WORKSTN files. The format name must be enclosed in apostrophes. You must also
enter Kn in positions 47 through 51, where n is the length of the format name. For
example, if the format name is ‘CUSPMT’, enter K6 in positions 50 and 51. A
named constant can also be used.
Externally Described Files

An O must appear in position 6 to identify this line as an output specifications
statement.

Output specifications for an externally described file are optional. Entries in
positions 7 through 39 of the record identification line identify the record format
and determine under what conditions the records are to be written.
Positions 7-16 (Record Name)

Entry Explanation
A valid record format name
A record format name must be specified for an externally described
file.
Positions 16-18 ( Logical Relationship)

Entry Explanation
AND or OR AND/OR indicates a relationship between lines of output
indicators. AND/OR lines are valid for output records, but not for
fields.
See “Positions 16-18 ( Logical Relationship)” on page 348 for more information.

Position 17 (Type)
Entry Explanation
H or D Detail records
T Total records
E Exception records.
Position 17 indicates the type of record to be written. See “Position 17 (Type)” on

page 349 for more information.
Position 18 (Release)
Entry Explanation
R Release a device after output.
See “Release” on page 350 for more information.
Positions 18-20 (Record Addition)

Entry Explanation
ADD Add a record to a file.
DEL Delete an existing record from the file.
For more information on record addition, see “Positions 18-20 (Record

Addition/Deletion)” on page 349.

Output indicators for externally described files are specified in the same way as
those for program described files. The overflow indicators OA-OG, OV are not
valid for externally described files. For more information on output indicators, see
“Positions 21-29 (Output Conditioning Indicators)” on page 350.
Positions 30-39 (EXCEPT Name)

An EXCEPT name can be specified in these positions for an exception record line.
See “Positions 30-39 (EXCEPT Name)” on page 351 for more information.

For externally described files, the only valid field descriptions are output indicators
(positions 21 through 29), field name (positions 30 through 43), and blank after
(position 45).

Indicators specified on the field description lines determine whether a field is to be
included in the output record. The same types of indicators can be used to control
fields as are used to control records. See “Positions 21-29 (Output Conditioning
Indicators)” on page 350 for more information.

Entry Explanation

Valid field name
A field name specified for an externally described file must be
present in the external description unless the external name was
renamed for the program.
*ALL Specifies the inclusion of all the fields in the record.
For externally described files, only the fields specified are placed in the output
record. *ALL can be specified to include all the fields in the record. If *ALL is
specified, no other field description lines can be specified for that record. In
particular, you cannot specify a B (blank after) in position 45.
For an update record, only those fields specified in the output field specifications
and meeting the conditions specified by the output indicators are placed in the
output record to be rewritten. The values that were read are used to rewrite all
other fields.
For the creation of a new record (ADD specified in positions 18-20), the fields
specified are placed in the output record. Those fields not specified or not meeting
the conditions specified by the output indicators are written as zeros or blanks,
depending on the data format specified in the external description.
Position 45 (Blank After)

Entry Explanation
Blank The field is not reset.
B The field specified in positions 30 through 43 is reset to blank, zero, or the
default date/time/timestamp value after the output operation is complete.
Position 45 is used to reset a numeric field to zeros or a character, graphic, or

UCS-2 field to blanks. Date, time, and timestamp fields are reset to their default
values.
If the field is conditioned by indicators in positions 21 through 29, the blank after
is also conditioned. This position must be blank for look-ahead, user date reserved
words, *PLACE, named constants, and literals.
Resetting fields to zeros may be useful in total output when totals are accumulated
and written for each control group in a program. After the total is accumulated
and written for one control group, the total field can be reset to zeros before
accumulation begins on the total for the next control group.
If blank after (position 45) is specified for a field to be written more than once, the
B should be entered on the last line specifying output for that field, or else the
field named will be printed as the blank-after value for all lines after the one doing
the blank after.


Chapter 19. Procedure Specifications
Procedure specifications are used to define prototyped procedures that are
specified after the main source section, otherwise known as subprocedures.
The prototype for the subprocedure must be defined in the main source section of
the module containing the subprocedure definition. A subprocedure includes the
following:
1. A Begin-Procedure specification (B in position 24 of a procedure specification)
2. A Procedure-Interface definition, which specifies the return value and
parameters, if any. The procedure-interface definition is optional if the
subprocedure does not return a value and does not have any parameters that
are passed to it. The procedure interface must match the corresponding
prototype.
3. Other definition specifications of variables, constants and prototypes needed by
the subprocedure. These definitions are local definitions.
4. Any calculation specifications needed to perform the task of the procedure. Any
subroutines included within the subprocedure are local. They cannot be used
outside of the subprocedure. If the subprocedure returns a value, then a
RETURN operation must be coded within the subprocedure. You should ensure
that a RETURN operation is performed before reaching the end of the
procedure.
5. An End-Procedure specification (E in position 24 of a procedure specification)
Except for a procedure-interface definition, which may be placed anywhere within

the definition specifications, a subprocedure must be coded in the order shown
above.
For an example of a subprocedure, see “Subprocedure Definition” on page 94.
Procedure Specification Statement

The general layout for the procedure specification is as follows:
v The procedure specification type (P) is entered in position 6
position 80
– The fixed-format entries extend from positions 7 to 24
– The keyword entries extend from positions 44 to 80
100
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8 ...+... 9 ...+... 10
PName+++++++++++..B...................Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++Comments++++++++++++
Figure 140. Procedure Specification Layout
Procedure Specification Keyword Continuation Line


v Position 6 of the continuation line must contain a P
v Positions 7 to 43 of the continuation line must be blank
v The specification continues on or past position 44
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8 ...+... 9 ...+... 10
P.....................................Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++Comments++++++++++++
Figure 141. Procedure Specification Keyword Continuation Line Layout
Procedure Specification Continued Name Line

A name that is up to 15 characters long can be specified in the Name entry of the
procedure specification without requiring continuation. Any name (even one with
15 characters or fewer) can be continued on multiple lines by coding an ellipsis (...)
at the end of the partial name. A name definition consists of the following parts:
having an ellipsis as the last non-blank character in the entry. The name must
begin within positions 7 to 21 and may end anywhere up to position 77 (with
an ellipsis ending in position 80). There cannot be blanks between the start of
the name and the ellipsis character. If any of these conditions is not true, the
line is parsed as a main procedure-name line.
2. One main procedure-name line, containing a name, begin/end procedure, and
keywords. If a continued name line is coded, the Name entry of the main
procedure-name line may be left blank.
*.. 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+... 7 ...+... 8 ...+... 9 ...+... 10
PContinuedName+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++Comments++++++++++++
Figure 142. Procedure Specification Continued Name Line Layout

Enter a P in this position for a procedure specification.
Positions 7-21 (Name)

Entry Explanation
Name The name of the subprocedure to be defined.
Use positions 7-21 to specify the name of the subprocedure being defined. If the
name is longer than 15 characters, a name is specified in positions 7 - 80 of the
continued name lines. The normal rules for RPG IV symbolic names apply;
reserved words cannot be used (see “Symbolic Names” on page 3). The name can
begin in any position in the space provided.
The name specified must be the same as the name of the prototype describing the
procedure. If position 24 contains an E, then the name is optional.
Position 24 (Begin/End Procedure)

Entry Explanation
B The specification marks the beginning of the subprocedure being defined.

E The specification marks the end of the subprocedure being defined.
A subprocedure coding consists minimally of a beginning procedure specification

and an ending procedure specification. Any parameters and return value, as well
as other definitions and calculations for the subprocedure are specified between the
procedure specifications.

Positions 44 to 80 are provided for procedure specification keywords. Only a
Begin-Procedure specification (B in position 24) can have a keyword entry.
Procedure-Specification Keywords
EXPORT
The specification of the EXPORT keyword allows the procedure to be called by
another module in the program. The name in positions 7-21 is exported in
uppercase form.
Note: Procedure names are not imported using the IMPORT keyword. They are
imported implicitly by any module in the program that makes a bound call
to the procedure or that uses the procedure name to initialize a procedure
pointer.
If the EXPORT keyword is not specified, the procedure can only be called from
within the module.
Chapter 19. Procedure Specifications 365

Procedure-Specification Keywords

Part 4. Operations, Expressions, and Functions
This section describes the various ways in which you can manipulate data or
devices. The major topics include:
v Operations that you can perform, using operation codes or built-in functions
v Expressions and the rules governing them
v Built-in functions
v Operation codes.

Chapter 20. Operations
The RPG IV programming language allows you to do many different types of
operations on your data. To perform an operation, you use either an operation
code or a built-in function.
This chapter summarizes the operation codes and built-in functions that are
available. It also organizes the operation codes and built-in functions into
categories.
For detailed information about a specific operation code or built-in function, see
Chapter 23, “Operation Codes” on page 523 or Chapter 22, “Built-in Functions” on
page 435.
Operation Codes
The following table shows the free-form syntax for each operation code.
v Extenders
(A) Always perform a dump, even if DEBUG(*NO) is specified
(D) Pass operational descriptors on bound call
(D) Date field
(E) Error handling
(H) Half adjust (round the numeric result)
(M) Default precision rules
(N) Do not lock record
(N) Set pointer to *NULL after successful DEALLOC
| (N) Do not force data to non-volatile storage
(P) Pad the result with blanks or zeros
(R) ″Result Decimal Position″ precision rules
(T) Time field
(Z) Timestamp field
Table 31. Operation Codes in Free-Form Syntax
Code Free-Form Syntax
ACQ ACQ{(E)} device-name workstn-file
BEGSR BEGSR subroutine-name
CALLP {CALLP{(EMR)}} name( {parm1{:parm2...}} )
| CHAIN CHAIN{(ENHMR)} search-arg {data-structure}
CLEAR CLEAR {*NOKEY} {*ALL} name
CLOSE CLOSE{(E)} file-name
COMMIT COMMIT{(E)} {boundary}
DEALLOC DEALLOC{(EN)} pointer-name
| DELETE DELETE{(EHMR)} {search-arg}
DOU DOU{(MR)} indicator-expression
DOW DOW{(MR)} indicator-expression
DSPLY DSPLY{(E)} {message {output-queue {response}}}
DUMP DUMP{(A)} {identifier}

Table 31. Operation Codes in Free-Form Syntax (continued)
ELSE ELSE
ELSEIF ELSEIF{(MR)} indicator-expression
ENDDO ENDDO
ENDFOR ENDFOR
ENDIF ENDIF
ENDMON ENDMON
ENDSL ENDSL
ENDSR ENDSR {return-point}
EVAL {EVAL{(HMR)}} result = expression
EVALR EVALR{(MR)} result = expression
EXCEPT EXCEPT {except-name}
EXFMT EXFMT{(E)} format-name
EXSR EXSR subroutine-name
| FEOD FEOD{(EN)} file-name
FOR FOR{(MR)} index {= start} {BY increment} {TO|DOWNTO limit}
FORCE FORCE file-name
IF IF{(MR)} indicator-expression
IN IN{(E)} {*LOCK} data-area-name
ITER ITER
LEAVE LEAVE
LEAVESR LEAVESR
MONITOR MONITOR
NEXT NEXT{(E)} program-device file-name
ON-ERROR ON-ERROR {exception-id1 {:exception-id2...}}
OPEN OPEN{(E)} file-name
OTHER OTHER
OUT OUT{(E)} {*LOCK} data-area-name
POST POST{(E)} {program-device} file-name
READ READ{(EN)} name {data-structure}
READC READC{(E)} record-name
| READE READE{(ENHMR)} search-arg|*KEY {data-structure}
READP READP{(EN)} name {data-structure}
| READPE READPE{(ENHMR)} search-arg|*KEY {data-structure}
REL REL{(E)} program-device file-name
RESET RESET{(E)} {*NOKEY} {*ALL} name
RETURN RETURN{(HMR)} expression
ROLBK ROLBK{(E)}
SELECT SELECT
| SETGT SETGT{(EHMR)} search-arg
| SETLL SETLL{(EHMR)} search-arg

Table 31. Operation Codes in Free-Form Syntax (continued)
SORTA SORTA array-name
TEST TEST{(EDTZ)} {dtz-format} field-name
UNLOCK UNLOCK{(E)} name
| UPDATE UPDATE{(E)} name {data-structure|%FIELDS(name{:name...})}
WHEN WHEN{(MR)} indicator-expression
WRITE WRITE{(E)} name {data-structure}
The next table is a summary of the specifications for each operation code in
traditional syntax.
v An empty column indicates that the field must be blank.
v All underlined fields are required.
v An underscored space denotes that there is no resulting indicator in that
position.
v Symbols
+ Plus
− Minus
v Extenders
(A) Always perform a dump, even if DEBUG(*NO) is specified
(D) Pass operational descriptors on bound call
(D) Date field
(E) Error handling
(H) Half adjust (round the numeric result)
(M) Default precision rules
(N) Do not lock record
(N) Set pointer to *NULL after successful DEALLOC
(P) Pad the result with blanks or zeros
(R) ″Result Decimal Position″ precision rules
(T) Time field
(Z) Timestamp field
v Resulting indicator symbols
BL Blank(s)
BN Blank(s) then numeric
BOF Beginning of the file
EOF End of the file
EQ Equal
ER Error
FD Found
HI Greater than
IN Indicator
LO Less than
LR Last record
NR No record was found
NU Numeric
OF Off
ON On
Z Zero
ZB Zero or Blank
Chapter 20. Operations 371

Table 32. Operation Codes in Traditional Syntax
Codes Factor 1 Factor 2 Result Field 71-72 73-74 75-76
8
ACQ (E ) device-name workstn-file ER
ADD (H) Addend Addend Sum + − Z
ADDDUR (E) Date/Time Duration:Duration Code Date/Time ER
ALLOC (E) Length Pointer ER
ANDxx Comparand Comparand
BEGSR subroutine-name
BITOFF Bit numbers Character field
BITON Bit numbers Character field
CABxx Comparand Comparand Label HI LO EQ
CALL (E) Program name Plist name ER LR
CALLB (D E) Procedure name or Plist name ER LR
Procedure pointer
CALLP (E M/R) name{ (parm1 {:parm2...}) }
CASxx Comparand Comparand Subroutine HI LO EQ
name
CAT (P) Source string 1 Source string 2:number of Target string
blanks
CHAIN (E N) search-arg name (file or record data-structure NR2 ER
format)
CHECK (E) Comparator String Base String:start Left-most ER FD2
Position(s)
CHECKR (E) Comparator String Base String:start Right-most ER FD2
Position(s)
CLEAR *NOKEY *ALL name (variable
or record
format)
CLOSE (E) file-name or *ALL ER
COMMIT (E) boundary ER
1
COMP Comparand Comparand HI LO EQ
DEALLOC (E/N) pointer-name ER
DEFINE *LIKE Referenced field Defined field
DEFINE *DTAARA External data area Internal field
DELETE (E) search-arg name (file or record NR2 ER
format)
DIV (H) Dividend Divisor Quotient + − Z
DO Starting value Limit value Index value
DOU (M/R) indicator-expression
DOUxx Comparand Comparand
DOW (M/R) indicator-expression
DOWxx Comparand Comparand
4
DSPLY (E) message output-queue response ER

Table 32. Operation Codes in Traditional Syntax (continued)
DUMP (A) identifier
ELSE
ELSEIF (M/R) indicator-expression
END Increment value
ENDCS
ENDDO Increment value
ENDFOR
ENDIF
ENDMON
ENDSL
ENDSR label return-point
EVAL (H M/R) Result = Expression
EVALR (M/R) Result = Expression
EXCEPT except-name
EXFMT (E) Record format-name ER
EXSR subroutine-name
EXTRCT (E) Date/Time:Duration Code Target Field ER
| FEOD (EN) file-name ER
FOR Index-name = start-value BY increment TO|DOWNTO limit
FORCE file-name
GOTO Label
IF (M/R) indicator-expression
IFxx Comparand Comparand
IN (E) *LOCK data-area-name ER
ITER
KFLD Key field
KLIST KLIST name
LEAVE
LEAVESR
LOOKUP1 (array) Search argument Array name HI LO EQ7
LOOKUP1 (table) Search argument Table name Table name HI LO EQ7
MHHZO Source field Target field
MHLZO Source field Target field
MLHZO Source field Target field
MLLZO Source field Target field
MONITOR
MOVE (P) Data Attributes Source field Target field + − ZB
MOVEA (P) Source Target + − ZB
MOVEL (P) Data Attributes Source field Target field + − ZB

MULT (H) Multiplicand Multiplier Product + − Z
MVR Remainder + − Z
NEXT (E) program-device file-name ER
OCCUR (E) Occurrence value Data structure Occurrence ER
value
ON-ERROR Status codes
OPEN (E) file-name ER
ORxx Comparand Comparand
OTHER
OUT (E) *LOCK data-area-name ER
PARM Target field Source field Parameter
PLIST PLIST name
3
POST (E) program-device file-name INFDS name ER
READ (E N) name (file or record data- ER EOF6
format) structure5
READC (E) record-name ER EOF6
READE (E N) search-arg name (file or record data- ER EOF6
format) structure5
READP (E N) name (file or record data- ER BOF6
format) structure5
READPE (E N) search-arg name (file or record data- ER BOF6
format) structure5
REALLOC (E) Length Pointer ER
REL (E) program-device file-name ER
RESET (E) *NOKEY *ALL name (variable ER
or record
format)
RETURN (H M/R) Expression
ROLBK (E) ER
SCAN (E) Comparator Base string:start Left-most ER FD2
string:length position(s)
SELECT
SETGT (E) search-arg name (file or record NR2 ER
format)
SETLL (E) search-arg name (file or record NR2 ER EQ7
format)
SETOFF1 OF OF OF
1
SETON ON ON ON
SHTDN ON
SORTA array-name
SQRT (H) Value Root
SUB (H) Minuend Subtrahend Difference + − Z

SUBDUR (E) Date/Time/ Date/Time/Timestamp Duration: ER
(duration) Timestamp Duration Code
SUBDUR (E) (new Date/Time/ Duration:Duration Code Date/Time/ ER
date) Timestamp Timestamp
SUBST (E P) Length to extract Base string:start Target string ER
TAG Label
9
TEST (E) Date/Time or ER
Timestamp
Field
TEST (D E)9 Date Format Character or ER
Numeric field
TEST (E T)9 Time Format Character or ER
Numeric field
TEST (E Z)9 Timestamp Format Character or ER
Numeric field
TESTB1 Bit numbers Character field OF ON EQ
1
TESTN Character field NU BN BL
1
TESTZ Character field AI JR XX
TIME Target field
UNLOCK (E) name (file or data area) ER
UPDATE (E) name (file or record data- ER
format) structure5
WHEN (M/R) indicator-expression
WHENxx Comparand Comparand
WRITE (E) name (file or record data- ER EOF6
format) structure5
XFOOT (H) Array name Sum + − Z
XLATE (E P) From:To String:start Target String ER
Z-ADD (H) Addend Sum + − Z
Z-SUB (H) Subtrahend Difference + − Z
Notes:
1. At least one resulting indicator is required.
2. The %FOUND built-in function can be used as an alternative to specifying an NR or FD resulting indicator.
3. You must specify factor 2 or the result field. You may specify both.
4. You must specify factor 1 or the result field. You may specify both.
5. A data structure is allowed in the result field only when factor 2 contains a program-described file name.
6. The %EOF built-in function can be used as an alternative to specifying an EOF or BOF resulting indicator.
7. The %EQUAL built-in function can be used to test the SETLL and LOOKUP operations.
8. For all operation codes with extender ’E’, either the extender ’E’ or an ER error indicator can be specified, but
not both.
9. You must specify the extender ’E’ or an error indicator for the TEST operation.

Built-in Functions
Built-in functions are similar to operation codes in that they perform operations on
data you specify. Built-in functions can be used in expressions. Additionally,
constant-valued built-in functions can be used in named constants. These named
constants can be used in any specification.
All built-in functions have the percent symbol (%) as their first character. The
syntax of built-in functions is:
function-name{(argument{:argument...})}
Arguments for the function may be variables, constants, expressions, a prototyped

procedure, or other built-in functions. An expression argument can include a
built-in function. The following example illustrates this.
C*L0N01Factor1+++++++Opcode(E)+Extended-factor2++++++++++++++++++++++++++
*
* This example shows a complex expression with multiple
* nested built-in functions.
*
* %TRIM takes as its argument a string. In this example, the
* argument is the concatenation of string A and the string
* returned by the %SUBST built-in function. %SUBST will return
* a substring of string B starting at position 11 and continuing
* for the length returned by %SIZE minus 20. %SIZE will return
* the length of string B.
*
* If A is the string ’ Toronto,’ and B is the string
* ’ Ontario, Canada ’ then the argument for %TRIM will
* be ’ Toronto, Canada ’ and RES will have the value
* ’Toronto, Canada’.
*
C EVAL RES = %TRIM(A + %SUBST(B:11:%SIZE(B) - 20))
Figure 143. Built-in Function Arguments Example
See the individual built-in function descriptions for details on what arguments are
allowed.
Unlike operation codes, built-in functions return a value rather than placing a
value in a result field. The following example illustrates this difference.

C*L0N01Factor1+++++++Opcode(E)+Factor2+++++++Result++++++++Len++D+HiLoEq....
*
* In the following example, CITY contains the string
* ’Toronto, Ontario’. The SCAN operation is used to locate the
* separating blank, position 9 in this illustration. SUBST
* places the string ’Ontario’ in field TCNTRE.
*
* Next, TCNTRE is compared to the literal ’Ontario’ and
* 1 is added to CITYCNT.
*
C ’ ’ SCAN CITY C
C ADD 1 C
C SUBST CITY:C TCNTRE
C ’Ontario’ IFEQ TCNTRE
C ADD 1 CITYCNT
C ENDIF
*
* In this example, CITY contains the same value, but the
* variable TCNTRE is not necessary since the %SUBST built-in
* function returns the appropriate value. In addition, the
* intermediary step of adding 1 to C is simplified since
* %SUBST accepts expressions as arguments.
*
C IF %SUBST(CITY:C+1) = ’Ontario’
C EVAL CITYCNT = CITYCNT+1
C ENDIF
Figure 144. Built-in Function Example
Note that the arguments used in this example (the variable CITY and the
expression C+1) are analogous to the factor values for the SUBST operation. The
return value of the function itself is analogous to the result. In general, the
arguments of the built-in function are similar to the factor 1 and factor 2 fields of
an operation code.
Another useful feature of built-in functions is that they can simplify maintenance
of your code when used on the definition specification. The following example
demonstrates this feature.
DName+++++++++++ETDsFrom+++To/L+++IDc.Keywords++++++++++++++++++++++++++
*
* In this example, CUSTNAME is a field in the
* externally described data structure CUSTOMER.
* If the length of CUSTNAME is changed, the attributes of
* both TEMPNAME and NAMEARRAY would be changed merely by
* recompiling. The use of the %SIZE built-in function means
* no changes to your code would be necessary.
*
D CUSTOMER E DS
D DS
D TEMPNAME LIKE(CUSTNAME)
D NAMEARRAY 1 OVERLAY(TEMPNAME)
D DIM(%SIZE(TEMPNAME))
Figure 145. Simplified Maintenance with Built-in Functions
Built-in functions can be used in expressions on the extended factor 2 calculation

specification and with keywords on the definition specification. When used with
definition specification keywords, the value of the built-in function must be known
at compile time and the argument cannot be an expression.

The following table lists the built-in functions, their arguments, and the value they
return.
Table 33. Built-In Functions
Name Arguments Value Returned
%ABS numeric expression absolute value of expression
%ADDR variable name address of variable
%ALLOC number of bytes to allocate pointer to allocated storage
| %BITAND character, numeric bit wise ANDing of the bits of all the arguments
| %BITNOT character, numeric bit-wise reverse of the bits of the argument
| %BITOR character, numeric bit-wise ORing of the bits of all the arguments
| %BITXOR character, numeric bit-wise exclusive ORing of the bits of the two
| arguments
%CHAR graphic, UCS-2, numeric, date, time, value in character format
or timestamp expression {: date, time,
or timestamp format}
%CHECK comparator string:string to be first position of a character that is not in the comparator
checked{:start position} string, or zero if not found
%CHECKR comparator string:string to be last position of a character that is not in the comparator
checked{:start position} string, or zero if not found
%DATE {value {: date format}} the date that corresponds to the specified value, or the
current system date if none is specified
%DAYS number of days number of days as a duration
| %DEC numeric expression {:digits:decpos} value in packed numeric format
| character expression: digits:decpos
| %DECH numeric or character expression: half-adjusted value in packed numeric format
| digits:decpos
%DECPOS numeric expression number of decimal digits
%DIFF date or time expression: date or time difference between the two dates, times, or timestamps
expression: unit in the specified unit
%DIV dividend: divisor the quotient from the division of the two arguments
%EDITC non-float numeric expression:edit string representing edited value
code {:*CURSYM | *ASTFILL |
currency symbol}
%EDITFLT numeric expression character external display representation of float
%EDITW non-float numeric expression:edit string representing edited value
word
%ELEM array, table, or multiple occurrence number of elements or occurrences
data structure name
| %EOF {file name} ’1’ if the most recent cycle input, read operation, or
write to a subfile (for a particular file, if specified)
ended in an end-of-file or beginning-of-file condition;
| and, when a file is specified, if a more recent OPEN,
| CHAIN, SETGT or SETLL to the file was not successful
’0’ otherwise
%EQUAL {file name} ’1’ if the most recent SETLL (for a particular file, if
specified) or LOOKUP operation found an exact match
’0’ otherwise

Table 33. Built-In Functions (continued)
%ERROR ’1’ if the most recent operation code with extender ’E’
specified resulted in an error
’0’ otherwise
| %FIELDS list of fields to be updated not applicable
| %FLOAT numeric or character expression value in float format
%FOUND {file name} ’1’ if the most recent relevant operation (for a particular
file, if specified) found a record (CHAIN, DELETE,
SETGT, SETLL), an element (LOOKUP), or a match
(CHECK, CHECKR, SCAN)
’0’ otherwise
%GRAPH character, graphic, or UCS-2 value in graphic format
expression
%HOURS number of hours number of hours as a duration
| %INT numeric or character expression value in integer format
| %INTH numeric or character expression half-adjusted value in integer format
| %KDS data structure containing keys not applicable
| {: number of keys}
%LEN any expression length in digits or characters
%LOOKUPxx argument: array{:start index {:number array index of the matching element
of elements}}
%MINUTES number of minutes number of minutes as a duration
%MONTHS number of months number of months as a duration
%MSECONDS number of microseconds number of microseconds as a duration
%NULLIND null-capable field name value in indicator format representing the null indicator
setting for the null-capable field
%OCCUR multiple-occurrence data structure current occurrence of the multiple-occurrence data
name structure
%OPEN file name ’1’ if the specified file is open
’0’ if the specified file is closed
%PADDR procedure or prototype name address of procedure or prototype
%PARMS none number of parameters passed to procedure
%REALLOC pointer: numeric expression pointer to allocated storage
%REM dividend: divisor the remainder from the division of the two arguments
%REPLACE replacement string: source string string produced by inserting replacement string into
{:start position {:source length to source string, starting at start position and replacing the
replace}} specified number of characters
%SCAN search argument:string to be first position of search argument in string or zero if not
searched{:start position} found
%SECONDS number of seconds number of seconds as a duration
%SHTDN ’1’ if the system operator has requested shutdown
’0’ otherwise
%SIZE variable, array, or literal {:* ALL} size of variable or literal
%SQRT numeric value square root of the numeric value

Table 33. Built-In Functions (continued)
%STATUS {file name} 0 if no program or file error occurred since the most
recent operation code with extender ’E’ specified
most recent value set for any program or file status, if
an error occurred
if a file is specified, the value returned is the most
recent status for that file
%STR pointer{:maximum length} characters addressed by pointer argument up to but not
including the first x’00’
%SUBDT date or time expression: unit an unsigned numeric value that contains the specified
portion of the date or time value
%SUBST string:start{:length} substring
%THIS the class instance for the native method
%TIME {value {: time format}} the time that corresponds to the specified value, or the
current system time if none is specified
%TIMESTAMP {(value {: timestamp format})} the timestamp that corresponds to the specified value, or
the current system timestamp if none is specified
%TLOOKUPxx argument: search table {: alternate ’*ON’ if there is a match
table}
’*OFF’ otherwise
%TRIM string string with left and right blanks trimmed
%TRIML string string with left blanks trimmed
%TRIMR string string with right blanks trimmed
%UCS2 character, graphic, or UCS-2 value in UCS-2 format
expression
| %UNS numeric or character expression value in unsigned format
| %UNSH numeric or character expression half-adjusted value in unsigned format
%XFOOT array expression sum of the elements
%XLATE from-characters: to-characters: string the string with from-characters replaced by to-characters
{: start position}
%YEARS number of years number of years as a duration
Arithmetic Operations
The arithmetic operations are shown in the following table.
Table 34. Arithmetic Operations
Operation Traditional Syntax Free-Form Syntax
Absolute Value “%ABS (Absolute Value of Expression)” on page 435
Add “ADD (Add)” on page 525 + operator
Divide “DIV (Divide)” on page 571 / operator or “%DIV (Return Integer Portion
of Quotient)” on page 456
Division Remainder “MVR (Move Remainder)” on page 661 “%REM (Return Integer Remainder)” on
page 492
Multiply “MULT (Multiply)” on page 660 * operator
Square Root “SQRT (Square Root)” on page 724 “%SQRT (Square Root of Expression)” on
page 500

Table 34. Arithmetic Operations (continued)
Subtract “SUB (Subtract)” on page 725 - operator
Zero and Add “Z-ADD (Zero and Add)” on page 755 (not allowed)
Zero and Subtract “Z-SUB (Zero and Subtract)” on page 756 (not allowed)
For examples of arithmetic operations, see Figure 146 on page 383.
Remember the following when specifying arithmetic operations:

v Arithmetic operations can be done only on numerics (including numeric
subfields, numeric arrays, numeric array elements, numeric table elements,
numeric named constants, numeric figurative constants, and numeric literals).
v In general, arithmetic operations are performed using the packed-decimal
format. This means that the fields are first converted to packed-decimal format
prior to performing the arithmetic operation, and then converted back to their
specified format (if necessary) prior to placing the result in the result field.
However, note the following exceptions:
– If all operands are unsigned, the operation will use unsigned arithmetic.
– If all are integer, or integer and unsigned, then the operation will use integer
arithmetic.
– If any operands are float, then the remaining operands are converted to float.
However, the DIV operation uses either the packed-decimal or float format for
its operations. For more information on integer and unsigned arithmetic, see
“Integer and Unsigned Arithmetic” on page 382.
v Decimal alignment is done for all arithmetic operations. Even though truncation
can occur, the position of the decimal point in the result field is not affected.
v The result of an arithmetic operation replaces the data that was in the result
field.
v An arithmetic operation does not change factor 1 and factor 2 unless they are
the same as the result field.
v If you use conditioning indicators with DIV and MVR, it is your responsibility
to ensure that the DIV operation occurs immediately before the MVR operation.
If conditioning indicators on DIV cause the MVR operation to be executed when
the immediately preceding DIV was not executed, then undesirable results may
occur.
v For information on using arrays with arithmetic operations, see “Specifying an
Array in Calculations” on page 160.
Ensuring Accuracy
| v The length of any field specified in an arithmetic operation cannot exceed 31
| digits. If the result exceeds 31 digits, digits are dropped from either or both
| ends, depending on the location of the decimal point.
v The TRUNCNBR option (as a command parameter or as a keyword on a control
specification) determines whether truncation on the left occurs with numeric
overflow or a runtime error is generated. Note that TRUNCNBR does not apply
to calculations performed within expressions. If any overflow occurs within
expressions calculations, a run-time message is issued. In addition, TRUNCNBR
does not apply to arithmetic operations performed in integer or unsigned
format.

v Half-adjusting is done by adding 5 (-5 if the field is negative) one position to the
right of the last specified decimal position in the result field. The half adjust
entry is allowed only with arithmetic operations, but not with an MVR operation
or with a DIV operation followed by the MVR operation. Half adjust only affects
the result if the number of decimal positions in the calculated result is greater
than the number of decimal positions in the result field. Half adjusting occurs
after the operation but before the result is placed in the result field. Resulting
indicators are set according to the value of the result field after half-adjusting
has been done. Half adjust is not allowed if the result field is float.
Performance Considerations
The fastest performance time for arithmetic operations occurs when all operands
are in integer or unsigned format. The next fastest performance time occurs when
all operands are in packed format, since this eliminates conversions to a common
format.
Integer and Unsigned Arithmetic

For all arithmetic operations (not including those in expressions) if factor 1, factor
2, and the result field are defined with unsigned format, then the operation is
performed using unsigned format. Similarly, if factor 1, factor 2, and the result
field are defined as either integer or unsigned format, then the operation is
performed using integer format. If any field does not have either integer or
unsigned format, then the operation is performed using the default format,
packed-decimal.
The following points apply to integer and unsigned arithmetic operations only:
v All integer and unsigned operations are performed in 8-byte form.
v Integer and unsigned values may be used together in one operation. However, if
either factor 1, factor 2, or the result field is signed, then all unsigned values are
converted to integer. If necessary, unsigned 2-byte values are converted to 4-byte
integer values to lessen the chance of numeric overflow.
v If a literal has 10 digits or less with zero decimal positions, and falls within the
range allowed for integer and unsigned fields, then it is loaded in integer or
unsigned format, depending on whether it is a negative or positive value
respectively.
Note: Integer or unsigned arithmetic may give better performance. However, the
chances of numeric overflow may be greater when using either type of
arithmetic.

Arithmetic Operations Examples
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
C*
C* In the following example, the initial field values are:
C*
D A s 3p 0 inz(1)
D B s 3p 1 inz(10.0)
D C s 2p 0 inz(32)
D D s 2p 0 inz(-10)
D E s 3p 0 inz(6)
D F s 3p 0 inz(10)
D G s 3p 2 inz(2.77)
D H s 3p 0 inz(70)
D J s 3p 1 inz(0.6)
D K s 2p 0 inz(25)
D L s 2p 1 dim(3)
D V s 5p 2
D W s 5p 1
D X s 8p 4
D Y s 6p 2
D Z s 5p 3
/FREE
L(1) = 1.0;
L(2) = 1.7;
L(3) = -1.1;
A = A + 1; // A = 002
V = B + C; // V = 042.00
V = B + D; // V = -010.00
V = C; // V = 032.00
E = E - 1; // E = 005
W = C - B; // W = 0022.0
W = C - D; // W = 0052.0
W = - C; // W = -0032.0
F = F * E; // F = 060
X = B * G; // X = 0027.7000
X = B * D; // X = -0200.0000
H = H / B; // H = 007
Y = C / J; // Y = 0053.33
eval(r) Z = %sqrt(K); // Z = 05.000
Z = %xfoot(L); // Z = 01.600
dump(a);
*inlr = *on;
/END-FREE
Figure 146. Summary of Arithmetic Operations
Array Operations
The array operations are shown in the following table.
Table 35. Array Operations
Look Up Elements “LOOKUP (Look Up a Table or Array “%LOOKUPxx (Look Up an Array Element)”
Element)” on page 620 on page 479 or “%TLOOKUPxx (Look Up a
Table Element)” on page 513
Number of Elements “%ELEM (Get Number of Elements)” on page 462
Move an Array “MOVEA (Move Array)” on page 643 (not allowed)

Array Operations
Table 35. Array Operations (continued)
Sort an Array “SORTA (Sort an Array)” on page 722
Sum the Elements of “XFOOT (Summing the Elements of an “%XFOOT (Sum Array Expression
an Array Array)” on page 752 Elements)” on page 519
While many operations work with arrays, these operations perform specific array
functions. See each operation for an explanation of its function.
Bit Operations
The bit operations are:
| v “%BITAND (Bitwise AND Operation)” on page 439
| v “%BITNOT (Invert Bits)” on page 440
| v “%BITOR (Bitwise OR Operation)” on page 441
| v “%BITXOR (Bitwise Exclusive-OR Operation)” on page 442
v “BITOFF (Set Bits Off)” on page 531
v “BITON (Set Bits On)” on page 533
v “TESTB (Test Bit)” on page 735.
| Table 36. Bit Operations
| Operation Traditional Syntax Free-Form Syntax
| Set bits on BITON %BITOR
| Set bits off BITOFF %BITAND with %BITNOT
| Test bits TESTB %BITAND (see example of
| Figure 167 on page 443)
|
The BITOFF and BITON operations allow you to turn off and on specific bits in a
field specified in the result field. The result field must be a one-position character
field.
The TESTB operation compares the bits identified in factor 2 with the
corresponding bits in the field named as the result field.
The bits in a byte are numbered from left to right. The left most bit is bit number
0. In these operations, factor 2 specifies the bit pattern (bit numbers) and the result
field specifies a one-byte character field on which the operation is performed. To
specify the bit numbers in factor 2, a 1-byte hexadecimal literal or a 1-byte
character field is allowed. The bit numbers are indicated by the bits that are turned
on in the literal or the field. Alternatively, a character literal which contains the bit
numbers can also be specified in factor 2.
| With the BITAND operation the result bit is ON when all of the corresponding bits
| in the arguments are ON, and OFF otherwise.
| With the BITNOT operation the result bit is ON when the corresponding bit in the
| argument is OFF, and OFF otherwise.
| With the BITOR operation the result bit is ON when any of the corresponding bits
| in the arguments are ON, and OFF otherwise.

Bit Operations
| With the BITXOR operation the result bit is ON when just one of the
| corresponding bits in the arguments are ON, and OFF otherwise.
Branching Operations
The branching operations are shown in the following table.
Table 37. Branching Operations
Compare and Branch “CABxx (Compare and Branch)” on page 535 (not allowed)
Go To “GOTO (Go To)” on page 605 (not allowed)
Iterate “ITER (Iterate)” on page 612
Leave “LEAVE (Leave a Do/For Group)” on page 617
Tag “TAG (Tag)” on page 732 (not allowed)
The GOTO operation (when used with a TAG operation) allows branching. When a
GOTO operation occurs, the program branches to the specified label. The label can
be specified before or after the GOTO operation. The label is specified by the TAG
or ENDSR operation.
The TAG operation names the label that identifies the destination of a GOTO or
CABxx operation.
The ITER operation transfers control from within a DO-group to the ENDDO
statement of the DO-group.
The LEAVE operation is similar to the ITER operation; however, LEAVE transfers
control to the statement following the ENDDO operation.
See each operation for an explanation of its function.
Call Operations
The call operations are shown in the following table.
Table 38. Call Operations
Call Program or v “CALL (Call a Program)” on page 537 “CALLP (Call a Prototyped Procedure or
Procedure v “CALLB (Call a Bound Procedure)” on Program)” on page 539
page 538
v “CALLP (Call a Prototyped Procedure or
Program)” on page 539
Identify Parameters v “PARM (Identify Parameters)” on page 673 PI or PR definition specification
v “PLIST (Identify a Parameter List)” on
page 676
Number of Parameters “%PARMS (Return Number of Parameters)” on page 489
Return “RETURN (Return to Caller)” on page 702
CALLP is one type of prototyped call. The second type is a call from within an
expression. A prototyped call is a call for which there is a prototype defined for
the call interface.

Call Operations
Call operations allow an RPG IV procedure to transfer control to other programs or
procedures. However, prototyped calls differ from the CALL and CALLB
operations in that they allow free-form syntax.
The RETURN operation transfers control back to the calling program or procedure
and returns a value, if any. The PLIST and PARM operations can be used with the
CALL and CALLB operations to indicate which parameters should be passed on
the call. With a prototyped call, you pass the parameters on the call.
The recommended way to call a program or procedure (written in any language) is

to code a prototyped call.
Prototyped Calls
With a prototyped call, you can call (with the same syntax):
v Programs that are on the system at run time
v Exported procedures in other modules or service programs that are bound in the
same program or service program
v Subprocedures in the same module
A prototype must be included in the definition specifications of the program or

procedure making the call. It is used by the compiler to call the program or
procedure correctly, and to ensure that the caller passes the correct parameters.
When a program or procedure is prototyped, you do not need to know the names
of the data items used in the program or procedure; only the number and type of
parameters.
Prototypes improve the communication between programs or procedures. Some

advantages of using prototyped calls are:
v The syntax is simplified because no PARM or PLIST operations are required.
v For some parameters, you can pass literals and expressions.
v When calling procedures, you do not have to remember whether operational
descriptors are required.
v The compiler helps you pass enough parameters, of the the correct type, format
and length, by giving an error at compile time if the call is not correct.
v The compiler helps you pass parameters with the correct format and length for
some types of parameters, by doing a conversion at run time.
Figure 147 on page 387 shows an example using the prototype ProcName, passing
three parameters. The prototype ProcName could refer to either a program or a
procedure. It is not important to know this when making the call; this is only
important when defining the prototype.

Call Operations
/FREE
// The following calls ProcName with the 3
// parameters CharField, 7, and Field2:
ProcName (CharField: 7: Field2);
// If you need to specify operation extenders, you must also

// specify the CALLP operation code:
CALLP(e) ProcName (CharField: 7: Field2);
/END-FREE
Figure 147. Sample of CALLP operation
When calling a procedure in an expression, you should use the procedure name in
a manner consistent with the data type of the specified return value. For example,
if a procedure is defined to return a numeric, then the call to the procedure within
an expression must be where a numeric would be expected.
For more information on calling programs and procedures, and passing

parameters, see the appropriate chapter in the WebSphere Development Studio: ILE
RPG Programmer’s Guide. For more information on defining prototypes and
parameters, see “Prototypes and Parameters” on page 144.
Operational Descriptors
Sometimes it is necessary to pass a parameter to a procedure even though the data
type is not precisely known to the called procedure, (for example, different types
of strings). In these instances you can use operational descriptors to provide
descriptive information to the called procedure regarding the form of the
parameter. The additional information allows the procedure to properly interpret
the string. You should only use operational descriptors when they are expected by
the called procedure.
You can request operational descriptors for both prototyped and non-prototyped
parameters. For prototyped calls, you specify the keyword OPDESC on the
prototype definition. For non-prototyped parameters, you specify (D) as the
operation code extender of the CALLB operation. In either case, operational
descriptors are then built by the calling procedure and passed as hidden
parameters to the called procedure.
Parsing Program Names on a Call

Program names are specified in factor 2 of a CALL operation or as the parameter
of the EXTPGM keyword on a prototype. If you specify the library name, it must
be immediately followed by a slash and then the program name (for example,
'LIB/PROG'.). If a library is not specified, the library list is used to find the
program. *CURLIB is not supported.
Note the following rules:

v The total length of a literal, including the slash, cannot exceed 12 characters.
v The total length of the non-blank data in a field or named constant, including
the slash, cannot exceed 21 characters.
v If either the program or the library name exceeds 10 characters, it is truncated to
10 characters.
The program name is used exactly as specified in the literal, field, named constant,
or array element to determine the program to be called. Specifically:
v Any leading or trailing blanks are ignored.

Call Operations
v If the first character in the entry is a slash, the library list is used to find the
program.
v If the last character in the entry is a slash, a compile-time message will be
issued.
v Lowercase characters are not shifted to uppercase.
v A name enclosed in quotation marks, for example, '“ABC”', always includes the
quotation marks as part of the name of the program to be called.)
Program references are grouped to avoid the overhead of resolving to the target
program. All references to a specific program using a named constant or literal are
grouped so that the program is resolved to only once, and all subsequent
references to that program (by way of named constant or literal only) do not cause
a resolve to recur.
The program references are grouped if both the program and the library name are
identical. All program references by variable name are grouped by the variable
name. When a program reference is made with a variable, its current value is
compared to the value used on the previous program reference operation that used
that variable. If the value did not change, no resolve is done. If it did change, a
resolve is done to the new program specified. Note that this rule applies only to
references using a variable name. References using a named constant or literal are
never re-resolved, and they do not affect whether or not a program reference by
variable is re-resolved. Figure 148 on page 389 illustrates the grouping of program
references.

Call Operations
Program CALL Example
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
D Pgm_Ex_A C ’LIB1/PGM1’
D Pgm_Ex_B C ’PGM1’
D PGM_Ex_C C ’LIB/PGM2’
*
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
C CALL Pgm_Ex_A
*
* The following two calls will be grouped together because both
* have the same program name (PGM1) and the same library name
* (none). Note that these will not be grouped with the call using
* Pgm_Ex_A above because Pgm_Ex_A has a different library
* name specified (LIB1).
*
C CALL ’PGM1’
C CALL Pgm_Ex_B
*
* The following two program references will be grouped together
* because both have the same program name (PGM2) and the same
* library name (LIB).
*
C CALL ’LIB/PGM2’
C CALL Pgm_Ex_C
*
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
* The first call in the program using CALLV below will result in
* a resolve being done for the variable CALLV to the program PGM1.
* This is independent of any calls by a literal or named constant
* to PGM1 that may have already been done in the program. The
* second call using CALLV will not result in a resolve to PGM1
* because the value of CALLV has not changed.
*
C MOVE ’PGM1’ CALLV 21
C CALL CALLV
C CALL CALLV
Figure 148. Example of Grouping of Program References
Parsing System Built-In Names

When the literal or named constant specified on a bound call starts with ″CEE″ or
an underscore (’_’), the compiler will treat this as a system built-in. (A bound call
results with either CALLB or with a prototyped call where EXTPGM is not specfied
on the prototype).
If it is not actually a system built-in, then a warning will appear in the listing; you
can ignore this warning.
For more information on APIs, see the iSeries Information Center programming
category. To avoid confusion with system provided APIs, you should not name
your procedures starting with ″CEE″.
Value of *ROUTINE
When a call fails, the contents of the *ROUTINE subfield of the program status
data structure (PSDS) is updated with the following:

Call Operations
v On an external call, the name of the called program (that is, for CALL or CALLP
to a program).
v On a bound static call, the name of the called procedure.
v On a bound procedure pointer call, *N.
Note that since the size of this subfield is only 8 bytes long, the name may be
truncated.
Compare Operations
The compare operations are shown in the following table.
Table 39. Compare Operations
And “ANDxx (And)” on page 529 AND operator
Compare “COMP (Compare)” on page 563 =, <, >, <=, >=, or <> operator
Compare and Branch “CABxx (Compare and Branch)” on page 535 (not allowed)
Conditional “CASxx (Conditionally Invoke Subroutine)” “IF (If)” on page 607 and “EXSR (Invoke
Subroutine on page 543 Subroutine)” on page 597
Do Until “DOU (Do Until)” on page 574 or “DOUxx “DOU (Do Until)” on page 574
(Do Until)” on page 575
Do While “DOW (Do While)” on page 577 or “DOWxx “DOW (Do While)” on page 577
(Do While)” on page 578
If “IF (If)” on page 607 or “IFxx (If)” on “IF (If)” on page 607
page 608
Or “ORxx (Or)” on page 670 OR operator
When “WHEN (When True Then Select)” on “WHEN (When True Then Select)” on
page 746 or “WHENxx (When True Then page 746
Select)” on page 747
In the ANDxx, CABxx, CASxx, DOUxx, DOWxx, IFxx, ORxx, and WHENxx
operations, xx can be:
xx Meaning
GT Factor 1 is greater than factor 2.
LT Factor 1 is less than factor 2.
EQ Factor 1 is equal to factor 2.
NE Factor 1 is not equal to factor 2.
GE Factor 1 is greater than or equal to factor 2.
LE Factor 1 is less than or equal to factor 2.
Blanks
Unconditional processing (CASxx or CABxx).
The compare operations test fields for the conditions specified in the operations.
These operations do not change the values of the fields. For COMP, CABXX, and
CASXX, the resulting indicators assigned in postions 71 and 76 are set according to
the results of the operation. All data types may be compared to fields of the same
data type.

Compare Operations
Remember the following when using the compare operations:
v If numeric fields are compared, fields of unequal length are aligned at the
implied decimal point. The fields are filled with zeros to the left and/or right of
the decimal point making the field lengths and number of decimal positions
equal for comparison.
v All numeric comparisons are algebraic. A plus (+) value is always greater than a
minus (-) value.
v Blanks within zoned numeric fields are assumed to be zeros, if the
FIXNBR(*ZONED) control specification keyword or command parameter is used
in the compilation of the program.
v If character, graphic, or UCS-2 fields are compared, fields of unequal length are
aligned to their leftmost character. The shorter field is filled with blanks to equal
the length of the longer field so that the field lengths are equal for comparison.
v Date fields are converted to a common format when being compared.
v Time fields are converted to a common format when being compared.
v An array name cannot be specified in a compare operation, but an array element
may be specified.
v The ANDxx and ORxx operations can be used following DOUxx, DOWxx, IFxx,
and WHENxx.
v When comparing a character, graphic, or UCS-2 literal with zero length to a field
(fixed or varying) containing blanks, the fields will compare equal. If you want
to test that a value is of length 0, use the %LEN built-in function. See Figure 49
on page 125 for examples.
Attention!
Note the following points, especially if you want to avoid unpredictable
results.
v All graphic and UCS-2 comparisons are done using the hexadecimal
representation of the data. The alternate sequence is not used.
v If an alternate collating sequence (using the “ALTSEQ{(*NONE | *SRC |
*EXT)}” on page 241 keyword on the Control specification) has been
specified for the comparison of character fields, the comparands are
converted to the alternate sequence and then compared. If *HIVAL or
*LOVAL is used in the comparison, the alternate collating sequence may
alter the value before the compare operation. Note that if either comparand
is defined with the ALTSEQ(*NONE) keyword on the definition
specification, the alternate collating sequence is not used.
v When comparing a basing pointer to *NULL (or to a basing pointer with
value *NULL), the only comparisons that produce predictable results are
for equality and inequality.
v Comparing pointers for less-than or greater-than produces predictable
results only when the pointers point to addresses in contiguous storage.
For example, all pointers are set to addresses in one *USRSPC, or all
pointers are set to the addresses of array elements in one array.
v When procedure pointer fields are compared for anything except equality
or inequality, the results will be unpredictable.
v Because of the way float values are stored, they should not be compared
for equality or inequality. Instead, the absolute value of the difference
between the two values should be compared with a very small value.

Conversion Operations
Conversion Operations
The following built-in functions perform conversion operations:
v “%CHAR (Convert to Character Data)” on page 444
v “%DEC (Convert to Packed Decimal Format)” on page 452
v “%DECH (Convert to Packed Decimal Format with Half Adjust)” on page 452
v “%FLOAT (Convert to Floating Format)” on page 469
v “%GRAPH (Convert to Graphic Value)” on page 472
v “%INT (Convert to Integer Format)” on page 474
v “%INTH (Convert to Integer Format with Half Adjust)” on page 474
v “%UCS2 (Convert to UCS-2 Value)” on page 517
v “%EDITC (Edit Value Using an Editcode)” on page 457
v “%EDITFLT (Convert to Float External Representation)” on page 460
v “%EDITW (Edit Value Using an Editword)” on page 461
v “%UNS (Convert to Unsigned Format)” on page 518
v “%UNSH (Convert to Unsigned Format with Half Adjust)” on page 518
These built-in functions are available in both the traditional syntax and free-form
syntax.
The traditional MOVE and MOVEL operation codes perform conversions when
factor 2 and the result field have different types. See:
v “MOVEL (Move Left)” on page 650
Data-Area Operations
The data-area operations are:
v “IN (Retrieve a Data Area)” on page 610
v “OUT (Write a Data Area)” on page 672
v “UNLOCK (Unlock a Data Area or Release a Record)” on page 742.
These operations are available in both the traditional syntax and free-form syntax.
The IN and OUT operations allow you to retrieve and write one or all data areas
in a program, depending on the factor 2 entry.
The IN and OUT operations also allow you to control the locking or unlocking of a
data area. When a data area is locked, it can be read but not updated by other
programs or procedures.
The following lock states are used:

v For an IN operation with *LOCK specified, an exclusive allow read lock state is
placed on the data area.
v For an OUT operation with *LOCK the data area remains locked after the write
operation
v For an OUT operation with blank the data area is unlocked after it is updated
v UNLOCK is used to unlock data areas and release record locks, the data areas
and/or records are not updated.

Data-Area Operations
During the actual transfer of data into or out of a data area, there is a
system-internal lock on the data area. If several users are contending for the same
data area, a user may get an error message indicating that the data area is not
available.
Remember the following when using the IN, OUT, and UNLOCK operations:
v A data-area operation cannot be done on a data area that is not defined to the
operating system.
v Before the IN, OUT, and UNLOCK operations can be done on a data area, you
must specify the DTAARA keyword on the definition specification for the data
area, or specify the data area in the result field of an *DTAARA DEFINE
statement. (For further information on the DEFINE statement, see “DEFINE
(Field Definition)” on page 566.)
v A locked data area cannot be updated or locked by another RPG program;
however, the data area can be retrieved by an IN operation with factor 1 blank.
v A data-area name cannot be the name of a multiple-occurrence data structure, an
input record field, an array, an array element, or a table.
v A data area cannot be the subfield of a multiple occurrence data structure, a
data-area data structure, a program-status data structure, a file-information data
structure (INFDS), or a data structure that appears on an *DTAARA DEFINE
statement.
| v If the name of the data area is determined at runtime, due to the
| DTAARA(*VAR) keyword being used, the variable containing the name must be
| set before an IN operation. If a data area is locked because of a prior *LOCK IN
| operation, any other operations (IN, OUT, UNLOCK) for the data area will use
| the previously locked data area, and the variable containing the name will not
| be consulted.
A data structure defined with a U in position 23 of the definition specifications

indicates that the data structure is a data area. You may specify the DTAARA
keyword for a data area data structure, if specified you can use the IN, OUT and
UNLOCK operation codes to specify further operations for the data area. The data
area is automatically read and locked at program initialization time, and the
contents of the data structure are written to the data area when the program ends
with LR on.
To define the local data area (*LDA) you can do one of the following:
v Specify the DTAARA(*LDA) keyword on the definition specification for the data
area.
v Specify UDS on the definition specification for the data area and leave the name
blank.
v Specify *LDA in factor 2 of a *DTAARA DEFINE statement.
To define the *PDA you may specify the DTAARA(*PDA) keyword on the
definition specification for the data area, or specify *PDA in factor 2 of a
*DTAARA DEFINE statement.
Date Operations
The date operations are shown in the following table.

Date Operations
Table 40. Date Operations
Add Duration “ADDDUR (Add Duration)” on page 526 + operator
Extract “EXTRCT (Extract Date/Time/Timestamp)” “%SUBDT (Extract a Portion of a Date, Time,
on page 598 or Timestamp)” on page 507
Subtract Duration “SUBDUR (Subtract Duration)” on page 726 - operator or “%DIFF (Difference Between
Two Date, Time, or Timestamp Values)” on
page 455
Test “TEST (Test Date/Time/Timestamp)” on page 733
Number of Years “%YEARS (Number of Years)” on page 521
Number of Months “%MONTHS (Number of Months)” on page 482
Number of Days “%DAYS (Number of Days)” on page 451
Number of Hours “%HOURS (Number of Hours)” on page 473
Number of Minutes “%MINUTES (Number of Minutes)” on page 481
Number of Seconds “%SECONDS (Number of Seconds)” on page 496
Number of “%MSECONDS (Number of Microseconds)” on page 483
Microseconds
Date operations allow you to work with dates, times, and timestamp fields and
character or numeric fields that represent dates, times, and timestamps. You can:
v Add or subtract a duration in years, months, days, hours, minutes, seconds, or
microseconds
v Determine the duration between two dates, times, or timestamps
v Extract a portion of a date, time, or timestamp (for example, the day)
v Test that a value is valid as a date, time, or timestamp.
To add or subtract a duration, you can use the + or - operator in free-form syntax
or the ADDDUR or SUBDUR operation code in traditional syntax. The following
table shows the built-in functions that you use in free-form syntax and the
duration codes that you use in traditional syntax.
Table 41. Built-In Functions and Duration Codes
Unit Built-In Function Duration Code
Year %YEARS *YEARS or *Y
Month %MONTHS *MONTHS or *M
Day %DAYS *DAYS or *D
Hour %HOURS *HOURS or *H
Minute %MINUTES *MINUTES or *MN
Second %SECONDS *SECONDS or *S
Microsecond %MSECONDS *MSECONDS or *MS
For example, you can add 23 days to an existing date in either of the following
ways:
C ADDDUR 23:*D DUEDATE
/FREE
newdate = duedate + %DAYS(23)
/END-FREE

Date Operations
To calculate the duration between two dates, times, or timestamps, you can use the
%DIFF built-in function in free-form syntax or the SUBDUR operation code in
traditional syntax. In either case, you must specify one of the duration codes
shown in Table 41 on page 394.
The duration is given in complete units, with any remainder discarded. A duration
of 59 minutes, expressed in hours, is 0. A duration of 61 minutes, expressed in
hours, is 1.
The following table shows additional examples, using the SUBDUR operation code.
The %DIFF built-in function would give the same results.
Table 42. Resulting Durations Using SUBDUR
Duration
Unit Factor 1 Factor 2 Result
Months 1999-03-28 1999-02-28 1 month
1999-03-14 1998-03-15 11 months
1999-03-15 1998-03-15 12 months
Years 1999-03-14 1998-03-15 0 years
1999-03-15 1998-03-15 1 year
1999-03-14-12.34.45.123456 1998-03-14-12.34.45.123457 0 years
Hours 1990-03-14-23.00.00.000000 1990-03-14-22.00.00.000001 0 hours
Unexpected Results
A month can contain 28, 29, 30, or 31 days. A year can contain 365 or 366 days.
Because of this inconsistency, the following operations can give unexpected results:
v Adding or subtracting a number of months (or calculating a duration in months)
with a date that is on the 29th, 30th, or 31st of a month
v Adding or subtracting a number of years (or calculating a duration in years)
with a February 29 date.
The following rules are used:

v When months or years are added or subtracted, the day portion remains
unchanged if possible. For example, 2000-03-15 + %MONTHS(1) is 2000-04-15.
v If the addition or subtraction would produce a nonexistent date (for example,
April 31), the last day of the month is used instead.
v Any month or year operation that changes the day portion is not reversible. For
example, 2000-03-31 + %MONTHS(1) is 2000-04-30 changes the day from 31 to
30. You cannot get back the original 2000-03-31 by subtracting one month.
The operation 2000-03-31 + %MONTHS(1) - %MONTHS(1) becomes 2000-03-30.
v The duration between two dates is one month if the later date minus one month
gives the first date. For example, the duration in months (rounded down)
between 2000-03-31 and 2000-04-30 is 0 because 2000-04-30 - %MONTHS(1) is
2000-03-30 (not 2000-03-31).
Declarative Operations
The declarative operations are shown in the following table.

Declarative Operations
Table 43. Declarative Operations
Define Field “DEFINE (Field Definition)” on page 566 LIKE or DTAARA keyword on definition
specification
Define Key v “KFLD (Define Parts of a Key)” on (not allowed)
page 614
v “KLIST (Define a Composite Key)” on
page 615
Identify Parameters v “PARM (Identify Parameters)” on page 673 PR definition specification
v “PLIST (Identify a Parameter List)” on
page 676
Tag “TAG (Tag)” on page 732 (not allowed)
The declarative operations do not cause an action to occur (except PARM with
optional factor 1 or 2); they can be specified anywhere within calculations. They
are used to declare the properties of fields or to mark parts of a program. The
control level entry (positions 7 and 8) can be blank or can contain an entry to
group the statements within the appropriate section of the program.
The DEFINE operation either defines a field based on the attributes (length and
decimal positions) of another field or defines a field as a data area.
The KLIST and KFLD operations are used to indicate the name by which a
composite key field may be referred and the fields that compose the composite key.
A composite key is a key that contains a list of key fields. It is built from left to
right, with the first KFLD specified being the leftmost (high-order) field of the
composite key.
The PLIST and PARM operations are used with the CALL and CALLB operations
to allow a called program or procedure access to parameters from a calling
program or procedure.
The TAG operation names the destination of a branching operation such as GOTO
or CABxx.
Error-Handling Operations
The exception-handling operation codes are:
v “MONITOR (Begin a Monitor Group)” on page 627
v “ON-ERROR (On Error)” on page 667
v ENDMON, as described in “ENDyy (End a Structured Group)” on page 587
These operation codes are available in both the traditional syntax and free-form
syntax.
MONITOR, ON-ERROR and ENDMON are used to code a monitor group. The
monitor group consists of a monitor block, followed by one or more on-error
blocks, followed by ENDMON.
The monitor block contains the code that you think might generate an error. The
on-error blocks contain the code to handle errors that occur in the monitor block.

Error-Handling Operations
A monitor block consists of a MONITOR operation followed by the operations that
will be monitored. An on-error block consists of an ON-ERROR operation, with a
list of status codes, followed by the operations that will be performed if an error in
the monitor block generates any of the listed status codes.
When an error occurs in the monitor block and the operation has an (E) extender
or an error indicator, the error will be handled by the (E) extender or the error
indicator. If no indicator or extender can handle the error, control passes to the
on-error block containing the status code for the error. When the on-error block is
finished, control passes to the ENDMON. If there is no on-error block to handle
the error, control passes to the next level of exception handling (the *PSSR or
INFSR subroutines, or the default error handler).
/free
MONITOR; _
OPEN FILE; |
DOW getNextRecord (); |
X = X + 1; +-- This is the monitor block
nameList(X) = name; |
ENDDO; |
CLOSE FILE; _|
ON-ERROR 1216; _
DSPMSG |
(’Error opening file FILE’ |
: %status); +-- First on-error block
RETURN; _|
ON-ERROR 121; _
DSPMSG |
(’Array NAME is too small’ +-- Second on-error block
: %status); |
RETURN; _|
ON-ERROR *ALL; _
DSPMSG |
(’Unexpected error’ +-- Final catch-all on-error block
: %status); |
RETURN; _|
ENDMON; --- End of MONITOR group
/end-free
Figure 149. Example of MONITOR and ON-ERROR blocks
File Operations
The file operation codes are:
v “ACQ (Acquire)” on page 524
v “CHAIN (Random Retrieval from a File)” on page 548
v “CLOSE (Close Files)” on page 561
v “COMMIT (Commit)” on page 562
v “DELETE (Delete Record)” on page 570
v “EXCEPT (Calculation Time Output)” on page 593
v “EXFMT (Write/Then Read Format)” on page 595
v “FEOD (Force End of Data)” on page 600
v “FORCE (Force a Certain File to Be Read Next Cycle)” on page 604
v “NEXT (Next)” on page 662
v “OPEN (Open File for Processing)” on page 668
v “POST (Post)” on page 678

File Operations
v “READ (Read a Record)” on page 680
v “READC (Read Next Changed Record)” on page 683
v “READE (Read Equal Key)” on page 685
v “READP (Read Prior Record)” on page 688
v “READPE (Read Prior Equal)” on page 690
v “REL (Release)” on page 694
v “ROLBK (Roll Back)” on page 705
v “SETGT (Set Greater Than)” on page 711
v “SETLL (Set Lower Limit)” on page 715
v “UNLOCK (Unlock a Data Area or Release a Record)” on page 742
v “UPDATE (Modify Existing Record)” on page 744
v “WRITE (Create New Records)” on page 750.
The file built-in functions are:

v “%EOF (Return End or Beginning of File Condition)” on page 463
v “%EQUAL (Return Exact Match Condition)” on page 465
v “%FOUND (Return Found Condition)” on page 470
v “%OPEN (Return File Open Condition)” on page 486
v “%STATUS (Return File or Program Status)” on page 501
Most file operations can be used with both program described and externally
described files (F or E respectively in position 22 of the file description
specifications).
When an externally described file is used with certain file operations, a record
format name, rather than a file name, can be specified in factor 2. Thus, the
processing operation code retrieves and/or positions the file at a record format of
the specified type according to the rules of the calculation operation code used.
When the OVRDBF (override with data base file) command is used with the MBR
(*ALL) parameter specified, the SETLL, SETGT and CHAIN operations only
process the current open file member. For more information, refer to the see the
iSeries Information Center database and file systems category.
The WRITE and UPDATE operations that specify a program described file name in
factor 2 must have a data structure name specified in the result field. The CHAIN,
READ, READE, READP, and READPE operations that specify a program described
file name in factor 2 may have a data structure name specified in the result field.
With the CHAIN, READ, READE, READP, and READPE operations, data is
transferred directly between the file and the data structure, without processing the
input specifications for the file. Thus, no record identifying or field indicators are
set on as a result of an input operation to a data structure. If all input and output
operations to the file have a data structure specified in the result field, input and
output specifications are not required.
If an input operation (CHAIN, EXFMT, READ, READC, READE, READP,

READPE) does not retrieve a record because no record was found, because an
error occurred in the operation, or because the last record was already retrieved
(end of file), then no data is extracted and all fields in the program remain
unchanged.

File Operations
If you specify N as the operation extender of a CHAIN, READ, READE, READP,
or READPE operation for an update disk file, a record is read without locking. If
no operation extender is specified, the record is locked if the file is an update disk
file.
Exception/errors that occur during file operations can be handled by the

programmer (by coding an error indicator or specifying a file-error subroutine), or
by the RPG IV error handler.
Note: Input and output operations in subprocedures involving input and output
specifications always use the global name, even if there is a local variable of
the same name. For example, if the field name TOTALS is defined in the
main source section, as well as in a subprocedure, any input or output
operation in the subprocedure will use the field as defined in the main
source section.
See “Database Null Value Support” on page 206 for information on handling files
with null-capable fields.
| Keys for File Operations

| With the file operations CHAIN, DELETE, READE, READPE, SETGT and
| SETLL,the search argument, search-arg, must be the key or relative record number
| used to identify the record. For free-form calculations, a search argument may be:
| 1. A single field name
| 2. A klist name
| 3. A list of values, such as ″(a:b:c+2)″. Each part of the composite key may be any
| expression. Data types must match the corresponding key field, but lengths and
| data format do not have to match.
| 4. %KDS(ds{:num})
| A composite key is formed from the subfields of the specified data structure in
| turn. Data types must match with the corresponding key field, but lengths and
| data format do not have to match. Rules for moving data from expression
| values to the key build area are the same as for operations code EVAL in that
| shorter search arguments are padded on the right with blanks and longer
| search arguments are truncated for type character. If num is specified, that is
| the number of subfields to use in the composite key.
| For non-free-form calculations, only field names and klist names are allowed as
| search argument.
| Operation extenders H, M, and R are allowed for CHAIN, DELETE, READE,

| READPE, SETGT, and SETLL when a list of search arguments or %KDS is
| specified. These extenders apply to the moving of the individual search argument
| to the search argument build area.
Indicator-Setting Operations
The indicator setting operation codes are:
v “SETOFF (Set Indicator Off)” on page 719
v “SETON (Set Indicator On)” on page 720
These operation codes are available only in the traditional syntax. In free-form
syntax, you can set the value of *INxx to *ON or *OFF using the EVAL operation.

Indicator-Setting Operations
The following indicator-setting built-in function is available in both the traditional
syntax and free-form syntax:
v “%NULLIND (Query or Set Null Indicator)” on page 484
The SETON and SETOFF operations set (on or off) indicators specified in positions
71 through 76. At least one resulting indicator must be specified in these positions.
Remember the following when setting indicators:
v The 1P, MR, KA through KN, and KP through KY indicators cannot be set on by
the SETON operation.
v The 1P and MR indicators cannot be set off by the SETOFF operation.
v Setting L1 through L9 on or off with a SETON or SETOFF operation does not set
any lower control level indicators.
Information Operations
The information operations are shown in the following table.
Table 44. Information Operations
Dump “DUMP (Program Dump)” on page 583
Get Shutdown Status “SHTDN (Shut Down)” on page 721 “%SHTDN (Shut Down)” on page 497
Get Time and Date “TIME (Retrieve Time and Date)” on v “%DATE (Convert to Date)” on page 450
page 740 v “%TIME (Convert to Time)” on page 511
v “%TIMESTAMP (Convert to Timestamp)”
on page 512
The DUMP operation provides a dump of all indicators, fields, data structures,
arrays, and tables used in a program.
The SHTDN operation allows the program to determine whether the system
operator has requested shutdown. If so, the resulting indicator that must be
specified in positions 71 and 72 is set on.
The TIME operation allows the program to access the system time of day and
system date at any time during program running.
Initialization Operations
The initialization operations provide run-time clearing and resetting of all elements
in a structure (record format, data structure, array, or table) or a variable (field,
subfield, or indicator).
The initialization operations are:

v “CLEAR (Clear)” on page 557
v “RESET (Reset)” on page 695.
The CLEAR operation sets all elements in a structure or variable to their default
value depending on the field type (numeric, character, graphic, UCS-2, indicator,
pointer, or date/time/timestamp).

Initialization Operations
The RESET operation sets all elements in a structure or variable to their initial
values (the values they had at the end of the initialization step in the program
cycle).
The RESET operation is used with data structure initialization and the initialization
subroutine (*INZSR). You can use both data structure initialization and the *INZSR
to set the initial value of a variable. The initial value will be used to set the
variable if it appears in the result field of a RESET operation.
When these operation codes are applied to record formats, only fields which are
output are affected (if factor 2 is blank) or all fields (if factor 2 is *ALL). The factor
1 entry of *NOKEY prevents key fields from being cleared or reset.
*ALL may be specified in factor 2 if the result field contains a table name, or
multiple occurrence data structure or record format. If *ALL is specified all
elements or occurrences will be cleared or reset. See “CLEAR (Clear)” on page 557
and “RESET (Reset)” on page 695 for more detail.
For more information see Chapter 10, “Data Types and Data Formats” on page 167.
Memory Management Operations

The memory management operations are shown in the following table.
Table 45. Memory Management Operations
Allocate Storage “ALLOC (Allocate Storage)” on page 528 “%ALLOC (Allocate Storage)” on page 438
Free Storage “DEALLOC (Free Storage)” on page 564
Reallocate Storage “REALLOC (Reallocate Storage with New “%REALLOC (Reallocate Storage)” on
Length)” on page 693 page 491
Get the Address of a “%ADDR (Get Address of Variable)” on page 436
Variable
Get the Address of a “%PADDR (Get Procedure Address)” on page 487
Procedure
The ALLOC operation allocates heap storage and sets the result-field pointer to
point to the storage. The storage is uninitialized.
The REALLOC operation changes the length of the heap storage pointed to by the
result-field pointer. New storage is allocated and initialized to the value of the old
storage. The data is truncated if the new size is smaller than the old size. If the
new size is greater than the old size, the storage following the copied data is
uninitialized. The old storage is released. The result-field pointer is set to point to
the new storage.
The DEALLOC operation releases the heap storage that the result-field pointer is
set to. If operational extender (N) is specified, the pointer is set to *NULL after a
successful deallocation.
Storage is implicitly freed when the activation group ends. Setting LR on will not
free any heap storage allocated by the module, but any pointers to heap storage
will be lost.

Memory Management Operations
Misuse of heap storage can cause problems. The following example illustrates a
scenario to avoid:
D Fld1 S 25A BASED(Ptr1)

D Fld2 S 5A BASED(Ptr2)
D Ptr1 S *
D Ptr2 S *
....
C ALLOC 25 Ptr1
C DEALLOC Ptr1
* After this point, Fld1 should not be accessed since the
* basing pointer Ptr1 no longer points to allocated storage.
C CALL ’SOMEPGM’
* During the previous call to ’SOMEPGM’, several storage allocations

* may have been done. In any case, it is extremely dangerous to
* make the following assignment, since 25 bytes of storage will
* be filled with ’a’. It is impossible to know what that storage
* is currently being used for.
C EVAL Fld1 = *ALL’a’
Following are more problematic situations:

v A similar error can be made if a pointer is copied before being reallocated or
deallocated. Great care must be taken when copying pointers to allocated
storage, to ensure that they are not used after the storage is deallocated or
reallocated.
v If a pointer to heap storage is copied, the copy can be used to deallocate or
reallocate the storage. In this case, the original pointer should not be used until
it is set to a new value.
v If a pointer to heap storage is passed as a parameter, the callee could deallocate
or reallocate the storage. After the call returns, attempts to access the storage
through pointer could cause problems.
v If a pointer to heap storage is set in the *INZSR, a later RESET of the pointer
could cause the pointer to get set to storage that is no longer allocated.
v Another type of problem can be caused if a pointer to heap storage is lost (by
being cleared, or set to a new pointer by an ALLOC operation, for example).
Once the pointer is lost, the storage it pointed to cannot be freed. This storage is
unavailable to be allocated since the system does not know that the storage is no
longer addressable. The storage will not be freed until the activation group ends.
Message Operation
The message operation
v “DSPLY (Display Function)” on page 580
allows interactive communication between the program and the operator or

between the program and the display workstation that requested the program.
This operation is available in both the traditional syntax and free-form syntax.
Move Operations
The move operations are shown in the following table.

Move Operations
Table 46. Move Operations
Move “MOVE (Move)” on page 629 “EVALR (Evaluate expression, right adjust)”
| on page 592 or conversion built-in functions
Move an Array “MOVEA (Move Array)” on page 643 (not allowed)
Move Left “MOVEL (Move Left)” on page 650 “EVAL (Evaluate expression)” on page 590 or
| conversionbuilt-in functions
Move operations transfer all or part of factor 2 to the result field. Factor 2 remains
unchanged.
The source and target of the move operation can be of the same or different types,
but some restrictions apply:
v For pointer moves, source and target must be the same type, either both basing
pointers or both procedure pointers.
v When using MOVEA, both the source and target must be of the same type.
v MOVEA is not allowed for Date, Time or Timestamp fields.
v MOVE and MOVEL are not allowed for float fields or literals.
Resulting indicators can be specified only for character, graphic, UCS-2, and
numeric result fields. For the MOVE and MOVEL operations, resulting indicators
are not allowed if the result field is an unindexed array. For MOVEA, resulting
indicators are not allowed if the result field is an array, regardless of whether or
not it is indexed.
The P operation extender can only be specified if the result field is character,
graphic, UCS-2, or numeric.
Moving Character, Graphic, UCS-2, and Numeric Data

When a character field is moved into a numeric result field, the digit portion of
each character is converted to its corresponding numeric character and then moved
to the result field. Blanks are transferred as zeros. For the MOVE operation, the
zone portion of the rightmost character is converted to its corresponding sign and
moved to the rightmost position of the numeric result field. It becomes the sign of
the field. (See Figure 297 on page 641 for an example.) For the MOVEL operation,
the zone portion of the rightmost character of factor 2 is converted and used as the
sign of the result field (unless factor 2 is shorter than the result field) whether or
not the rightmost character is included in the move operation. (See Figure 299 on
page 653 for an example.)
If move operations are specified between numeric fields, the decimal positions
specified for the factor 2 field are ignored. For example, if 1.00 is moved into a
three-position numeric field with one decimal position, the result is 10.0.
Factor 2 may contain the figurative constants *ZEROS for moves to character or
numeric fields. To achieve the same function for graphic fields, the user should
code *ALLG’oXXi’ (where ’XX’ represents graphic zeros).
When moving data from a character source to graphic fields, if the source is a
character literal, named constant, or *ALL, the compiler will check to make sure it
is entirely enclosed by one pair of shift-out shift-in characters (SO/SI). The
compiler also checks that the character source is of even length and at least 4 bytes

Move Operations
(SO/SI plus one graphic character). When moving from a hexadecimal literal or
*ALLX to graphic field, the first byte and last byte of the hexadecimal literal or the
pattern within *ALLX must not be 0E (shift out) and 0F (shift in). But the
hexadecimal literal (or pattern) should still represent an even number of bytes.
When a character field is involved in a move from/to a graphic field, the compiler
will check that the character field is of even length and at least 4 bytes long. At
runtime, the compiler checks the content of the character field to make sure it is
entirely enclosed by only one pair of SO/SI.
When moving from a graphic field to a character field, if the length of the
character field is greater than the length of the graphic field (in bytes) plus 2 bytes,
the SO/SI are added immediately before and after the graphic data. This may
cause unbalanced SO/SI in the character field due to residual data in the character
field, which will not be diagnosed by the compiler.
When move operations are used to move data from character fields to graphic
fields, shift-out and shift-in characters are removed. When moving data from
graphic fields to character fields, shift-out and shift-in characters are inserted in the
target field.
When move operations are used to convert data from character to UCS-2 or from
UCS-2 to character, the number of characters moved is variable since the character
data may or may not contain shift characters and graphic characters. For example,
five UCS-2 characters can convert to:
v Five single-byte characters
v Five double-byte characters
v A combination of single-byte and double-byte characters with shift characters
separating the modes
If the resulting data is too long to fit the result field, the data will be truncated. If
the result is single-byte character, it is the responsibility of the user to ensure that
the result contains complete characters, and contains matched SO/SI pairs.
If you specify operation extender P for a move operation, the result field is padded
from the right for MOVEL and MOVEA and from the left for MOVE. The pad
characters are blank for character, double-byte blanks for graphic, UCS-2 blanks for
UCS-2, 0 for numeric, and '0' for indicator. The padding takes place after the
operation. If you use MOVE or MOVEL to move a field to an array, each element
of the array will be padded. If you use these operations to move an array to an
array and the result contains more elements than the factor 2 array, the same
padding takes place but the extra elements are not affected. A MOVEA operation
with an array name in the result field will pad the last element affected by the
operation plus all subsequent elements.
When resulting indicators are specified for move operations, the result field
determines which indicator is set on. If the result field is a character, graphic, or
UCS-2 field, only the resulting indicator in positions 75 and 76 can be specified.
This indicator is set on if the result field is all blanks. When the result field is
numeric, all three resulting indicator positions may be used. These indicators are
set on as follows:
High (71-72) Set on if the result field is greater than 0.
Low (73-74) Set on if the result field is less than 0.
Equal (75-76) Set on if the result field is equal to 0.

Move Operations
Moving Date-Time Data
The MOVE and MOVEL operation codes can be used to move Date, Time and
Timestamp data type fields.
The following combinations are allowed for the MOVE and MOVEL operation
codes:
v Date to Date
v Time to Time
v Timestamp to Timestamp
v Date to Timestamp
v Time to Timestamp (sets micro-seconds to 000000)
v Timestamp to Date
v Timestamp to Time
v Date to Character or Numeric
v Time to Character or Numeric
v Timestamp to Character or Numeric
v Character or Numeric to Date
v Character or Numeric to Time
v Character or Numeric to Timestamp
Factor 1 must be blank if both the source and the target of the move are Date,
Time or Timestamp fields. If factor 1 is blank, the format of the Date, Time, or
Timestamp field is used.
Otherwise, factor 1 contains the date or time format compatible with the character
or numeric field that is the source or target of the operation. Any valid format may
be specified. See “Date Data Type” on page 193, “Time Data Type” on page 196,
and “Timestamp Data Type” on page 197.
Keep in mind the following when specifying factor 1:

v Time format *USA is not allowed for movement between Time and numeric
fields.
v The formats *LONGJUL, *CYMD, *CMDY, and *CDMY, and a special value
*JOBRUN are allowed in factor 1. (For more information, see Table 15 on
page 195.)
v A zero (0) specified at the end of a format (for example *MDY0) indicates that
the character field does not contain separators.
v A 2-digit year format (*MDY, *DMY, *YMD, *JUL and *JOBRUN) can only
represent dates in the range 1940 through 2039. A 3-digit year format (*CYMD,
*CMDY, *CDMY) can only represent dates in the range 1900 through 2899. An
error will be issued if conversion to a 2- or 3-digit year format is requested for
dates outside these ranges.
v When MOVE and MOVEL are used to move character or numeric values to or
from a timestamp, the character or numeric value is assumed to contain a
timestamp.
Factor 2 is required and must be a character, numeric, Date, Time, or Timestamp

value. It contains the field, array, array element, table name, literal, or named
constant to be converted.
The following rules apply to factor 2:

Move Operations
v Separator characters must be valid for the specified format.
v If factor 2 is not a valid representation of a date or time or its format does not
match the format specified in factor 1, an error is generated.
v If factor 2 contains UDATE or *DATE, factor 1 is optional and corresponds to the
header specifications DATEDIT keyword.
v If factor 2 contains UDATE and factor 1 entry is coded, it must be a date format
with a 2-digit year. If factor 2 contains *DATE and factor 1 is coded, it must be a
date format with a 4-digit year.
The result field must be a Date, Time, Timestamp, numeric, or character variable. It
can be a field, array, array element, or table name. The date or time is placed in the
result field according to its defined format or the format code specified in factor 1.
If the result field is numeric, separator characters will be removed, prior to the
operation. The length used is the length after removing the separator characters.
When moving from a Date to a Timestamp field, the time and microsecond portion
of the timestamp are unaffected, however the entire timestamp is checked and an
error will be generated if it is not valid.
When moving from a Time to a Timestamp field, the microseconds part of the
timestamp is set to 000000. The date portion remains unaffected, but the entire
timestamp will be checked and an error will be generated when it is not valid.
If character or numeric data is longer than required, only the leftmost data
(rightmost for the MOVE operation) is used. Keep in mind that factor 1 determines
the length of data to be moved. For example, if the format of factor 1 is *MDY for
a MOVE operation from a numeric date, only the rightmost 6 digits of factor 2
would be used.
Examples of Converting a Character Field to a Date Field

Figure 150 on page 407 shows some examples of how to define and move 2- and
4-digit year dates between date fields, or between character and date fields.

Move Operations
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
* Define two 8-byte character fields.
D CHR_8a s 8a inz(’95/05/21’)
D CHR_8b s 8a inz(’abcdefgh’)
*
* Define two 8-byte date fields. To get a 2-digit year instead of
* the default 4-digit year (for *ISO format), they are defined
* with a 2-digit year date format, *YMD. For D_8a, a separator (.)
* is also specified. Note that the format of the date literal
* specified with the INZ keyword must be the same as the format
* specified on the * control specification. In this case, none
* is specified, so it is the default, *ISO.
*
D D_8a s d datfmt(*ymd.)
D D_8b s d inz(d’1995-07-31’) datfmt(*ymd)
*
* Define a 10-byte date field. By default, it has *ISO format.
D D_10 s d inz(d’1994-06-10’)
*
* D_10 now has the value 1995-05-21
*
* Move the 8-character field to a 10-character date field D_10.
* It will contain the date that CHR_8a was initialized to, but
* with a 4-digit year and the format of D_10, namely,
* 1995-05-21 (*ISO format).
*
* Note that a format must be specified with built-in function
* %DATE to indicate the format of the character field.
*
/FREE
D_10 = %DATE (CHR_8a: *YMD);
//
// Move the 10-character date to an 8-character field CHR_8b.
// It will contain the date that was just moved to D_10, but with
// a 2-digit year and the default separator indicated by the *YMD
// format.
//
CHR_8b = %CHAR (D_10: *YMD);
//
// Move the 10-character date to an 8-character date D_8a.
// It will contain the date that * was just moved to D_10, but
// with a 2-digit year and a . separator since D_8a was defined
// with the (*YMD.) format.
//
D_8a = D_10;
//
// Move the 8-character date to a 10-character date D_10
// It will contain the date that * D_8b was initialized to,
// but with a 4-digit year, 1995-07-31.
//
D_10 = D_8b;
//
// After the last move, the fields will contain
// CHR_8b: 95/05/21
// D_8a: 95.05.21
// D_10: 1995-07-31
//
*INLR = *ON;
/END-FREE
Figure 150. Moving character and date data

Move Operations
The following example shows how to convert from a character field in the form
CYYMMDD to a date field in *ISO format. This is particularly useful when using
command parameters of type *DATE.
CMD PROMPT(’Use DATE parameter’)

PARM KWD(DATE) TYPE(*DATE)
Figure 151. Source for a command using a date parameter.
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
* Prototype and procedure interface for this program
D FIG210 PR EXTPGM(’FIG210’)
D DateParm 7A
D FIG210 PI
D DateParm 7A
* Declare a date type with date format *ISO.

D ISO_DATE S D DATFMT(*ISO)
* The format of the DateParm parameter is CYYMMDD, so code

* *CYMD0 as the 2nd parameter of built-in function %DATE.
/FREE
ISO_DATE = %DATE (DateParm: *CYMD0);
/END-FREE
Figure 152. Part of RPG IV command processing program for this command.
Move Zone Operations

The move zone operations are:
v “MHHZO (Move High to High Zone)” on page 623
v “MHLZO (Move High to Low Zone)” on page 624
v “MLHZO (Move Low to High Zone)” on page 625
v “MLLZO (Move Low to Low Zone)” on page 626.
These operations are available only in the traditional syntax.
The move zone operations move only the zone portion of a character.
Whenever the word high is used in a move zone operation, the field involved must
be a character field; whenever low is used, the field involved can be either a
character or a numeric field. Float numeric fields are not allowed in the Move
Zone operations.
Characters J through R have D zones and can be used to obtain a negative value:
(J = hexadecimal D1, ..., R = hexadecimal D9).
Note: While you may see this usage in old programs, your code will be clearer if
you use hexadecimal literals for this purpose. Use X’F0’ to obtain a positive
zone and X’D0’ to obtain a negative zone.
Note: The character (-) is represented by a hexadecimal 60, and cannot be used to
obtain a negative result, since it has a zone of 6, and a negative result
requires a zone of ″D″.

Result Operations
Character Factor Character Factor

Two Two
MLHZO
MHHZO MLLZO MLLZO
MHLZO MHLZO
Result Result
Character Field Numeric Field
Numeric Factor Numeric Factor

Two Two
MLHZO
MLLZO MLLZO
Result Result
Character Field Numeric Field
Figure 153. Function of MOVE Zone Operations
Result Operations
The following built-in functions work with the result of the previous operation:
v “%EQUAL (Return Exact Match Condition)” on page 465
v “%FOUND (Return Found Condition)” on page 470
v “%ERROR (Return Error Condition)” on page 467
v “%STATUS (Return File or Program Status)” on page 501
syntax.
Size Operations
The following built-in functions return information about the size of a varible,
field, constant, array, table, or data structure:
v “%DECPOS (Get Number of Decimal Positions)” on page 454
v “%LEN (Get or Set Length)” on page 476
v “%SIZE (Get Size in Bytes)” on page 498
syntax.
String Operations
The string operations are shown in the following table.

String Operations
Table 47. String Operations
Concatenate “CAT (Concatenate Two Strings)” on + operator
page 545
Check “CHECK (Check Characters)” on page 551 “%CHECK (Check Characters)” on page 446
Check Reverse “CHECKR (Check Reverse)” on page 554 “%CHECKR (Check Reverse)” on page 448
Create “%STR (Get or Store Null-Terminated String)” on page 504
Replace “%REPLACE (Replace Character String)” on page 493
Scan “SCAN (Scan String)” on page 706 “%SCAN (Scan for Characters)” on page 495
Substring “SUBST (Substring)” on page 729 “%SUBST (Get Substring)” on page 508
Translate “XLATE (Translate)” on page 753 “%XLATE (Translate)” on page 520
Trim Blanks “%TRIM (Trim Blanks at Edges)” on page 514, “%TRIML (Trim Leading Blanks)” on
page 515, or “%TRIMR (Trim Trailing Blanks)” on page 516
The string operations include concatenation, scanning, substringing, translation,

and verification. String operations can only be used on character, graphic, or UCS-2
fields.
The CAT operation concatenates two strings to form one.
The CHECK and CHECKR operations verify that each character in factor 2 is
among the valid characters in factor 1. CHECK verifies from left to right and
CHECKR from right to left.
The SCAN operation scans the base string in factor 2 for occurrences of another
string specified in factor 1.
The SUBST operation extracts a specified string from a base string in factor 2. The
extracted string is placed in the result field.
The XLATE operation translates characters in factor 2 according to the from and to
strings in factor 1.
Note: Figurative constants cannot be used in the factor 1, factor 2, or result fields.
No overlapping in a data structure is allowed for factor 1 and the result
field, or factor 2 and the result field.
In the string operations, factor 1 and factor 2 may have two parts. If both parts are
specified, they must be separated by a colon. This option applies to all but the
CAT, CHECK, CHECKR, and SUBST operations (where it applies only to factor 2).
If you specify P as the operation extender for the CAT, SUBST, or XLATE
operations, the result field is padded from the right with blanks after the
operation.
See each operation for a more detailed explanation.
When using string operations on graphic fields, all data in factor 1, factor 2, and
the result field must be graphic. When numeric values are specified for length,
start position, and number of blanks for graphic characters, the values represent
double byte characters.

String Operations
When using string operations on UCS-2 fields, all data in factor 1, factor 2, and the
result field must be UCS-2. When numeric values are specified for length, start
position, and number of blanks for UCS-2 characters, the values represent double
byte characters.
When using string operations on the graphic part of mixed-mode character data,
the start position, length and number of blanks represent single byte characters.
Preserving data integrity is the user’s responsibility.
Structured Programming Operations

The structured programming operations are shown in the following table.
Table 48. Structured Programming Operations
And “ANDxx (And)” on page 529 AND operator
Do “DO (Do)” on page 572 “FOR (For)” on page 601
Do Until “DOU (Do Until)” on page 574 or “DOUxx “DOU (Do Until)” on page 574
(Do Until)” on page 575
Do While “DOW (Do While)” on page 577 or “DOWxx “DOW (Do While)” on page 577
(Do While)” on page 578
Else “ELSE (Else)” on page 585
Else If “ELSEIF (Else If)” on page 586
End “ENDyy (End a Structured Group)” on page 587
For “FOR (For)” on page 601
If “IF (If)” on page 607 or “IFxx (If)” on “IF (If)” on page 607
page 608
Iterate “ITER (Iterate)” on page 612
Leave “LEAVE (Leave a Do/For Group)” on page 617
Or “ORxx (Or)” on page 670 OR operator
Otherwise “OTHER (Otherwise Select)” on page 671
Select “SELECT (Begin a Select Group)” on page 709
When “WHEN (When True Then Select)” on “WHEN (When True Then Select)” on
page 746 or “WHENxx (When True Then page 746
Select)” on page 747
The DO operation allows the processing of a group of calculations zero or more

times starting with the value in factor 1, incrementing each time by a value on the
associated ENDDO operation until the limit specified in factor 2 is reached.
The DOU and DOUxx (Do Until) operations allow the processing of a group of
calculations one or more times. The end of a Do-Until operation is indicated by an
ENDDO operation.
The DOW and DOWxx (Do While) operations allow the processing of a group of
calculations zero or more times. The end of a Do-While operation is indicated by
an ENDDO operation.
The FOR operation allows the repetitive processing of a group of calculations. A

starting value is assigned to the index name. Increment and limit values can be

specified, as well. Starting, increment, and limit values can be free-form
expressions. An ENDFOR operation indicates the end of the FOR group.
The LEAVE operation interrupts control flow prematurely and transfers control to
the statement following the ENDDO or ENDFOR operation of an iterative
structured group. The ITER operation causes the next loop iteration to occur
immediately.
The IF and IFxx operations allow the processing of a group of calculations if a

specified condition is satisfied. The ELSE operation allows you to specify a group
of calculations to be processed if the condition is not satisfied. The ELSEIF
operation is a combination of an ELSE operation and an IF operation. The end of
an IF or IFxx group is indicated by ENDIF.
The SELECT, WHEN, WHENxx, and OTHER group of operations are used to
conditionally process one of several alternative sequences of operations. The
beginning of the select group is indicated by the SELECT operation. The WHEN
and WHENxx operations are used to choose the operation sequence to process.
The OTHER operation is used to indicate an operation sequence that is processed
when none of the WHENxx conditions are fulfilled. The end of the select group is
indicated by the ENDSL operation.
The ANDxx and ORxx operations are used with the DOUxx, DOWxx, WHENxx,
and IFxx operations to specify a more complex condition. The ANDxx operation
has higher precedence than the ORxx operation. Note, however, that the IF, DOU,
DOW, and WHEN operations allow a more straightforward coding of complex
expressions than their xx counterparts.
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...
*
* In the following example, indicator 25 will be set on only if the
* first two conditions are true or the third condition is true.
*
* As an expression, this would be written:
* EVAL *IN25 = ((FIELDA > FIELDB) AND (FIELDA >= FIELDC)) OR (FIELDA < FIELDD)
*
*
C FIELDA IFGT FIELDB
C FIELDA ANDGE FIELDC
C FIELDA ORLT FIELDD
C SETON 25
C ELSE
C SETOFF 25
C ENDIF
Figure 154. Example of AND/OR Precedence
A DO, DOUxx, DOWxx, FOR, IFxx, MONITOR, or SELECT operation (with or

without ANDxx or ORxx operations), and an ENDyy operation, delimit a
structured group. The ENDDO operation ends each DO, DOUxx, and DOWxx
group or causes the structured group to be reprocessed until the specified ending
conditions are met. The ENDFOR operation ends each FOR group. The SELECT
must end with an ENDSL. An IFxx operation and an IFxx operation with an ELSE
operation must end with an ENDIF operation.

The rules for making the comparison on the ANDxx, DOUxx, DOWxx, IFxx, ORxx
and WHENxx operation codes are the same as those given under “Compare
Operations” on page 390.
In the ANDxx, DOUxx, DOWxx, IFxx, ORxx, and WHENxx operations, xx can be:
xx Meaning
GT Factor 1 is greater than factor 2.
LT Factor 1 is less than factor 2.
EQ Factor 1 is equal to factor 2.
NE Factor 1 is not equal to factor 2.
GE Factor 1 is greater than or equal to factor 2.
LE Factor 1 is less than or equal to factor 2.
In the ENDyy operation, yy can be:

yy Meaning
CS End for CASxx operation.
DO End for DO, DOUxx, and DOWxx operation.
FOR End for FOR operation.
IF End for IFxx operation.
SL End for SELECT operation.
Blanks
End for any structured operation.
Note: The yy in the ENDyy operation is optional.
If a structured group, in this case a do group, contains another complete structured

group, together they form a nested structured group. Structured groups can be
nested to a maximum depth of 100 levels. The following is an example of nested
structured groups, three levels deep:
DO
DO
ENDDO
IFxx
SELECT
WHENxx
ENDSL
ELSE
ENDIF
ENDDO
Figure 155. Nested Structured Groups
Remember the following when specifying structured groups:

v Each nested structured group must be completely contained within the outer
level structured group.
v Each structured group must contain one of a DO, DOUxx, DOWxx, FOR, IFxx,
or SELECT operation and its associated ENDyy operation.
v A structured group can be contained in detail, total, or subroutine calculations,
but it cannot be split among them.

v Branching into a structured group from outside the structured group may cause
undesirable results.
Subroutine Operations
The subroutine operations are:
v “BEGSR (Beginning of Subroutine)” on page 530
v “ENDSR (End of Subroutine)” on page 589
v “EXSR (Invoke Subroutine)” on page 597
v “LEAVESR (Leave a Subroutine)” on page 619
v “CASxx (Conditionally Invoke Subroutine)” on page 543 (traditional syntax only)
All of these operations except CASxx are available in both the traditional syntax
and free-form syntax.
A subroutine is a group of calculation specifications in a program that can be

processed several times in that program. Subroutine specifications must follow all
other calculation operations that can be processed for a procedure; however, the
PLIST, PARM, KLIST, KFLD, and DEFINE operations may be specified between an
ENDSR operation (the end of one subroutine) and a BEGSR operation (the
beginning of another subroutine) or after all subroutines. A subroutine can be
called using an EXSR or CASxx operation anywhere in the calculation
specifications. Subroutine lines can be identified by SR in positions 7 and 8. The
only valid entries in positions 7 and 8 of a subroutine line are SR, AN, OR, or
blanks.
Coding Subroutines
An RPG IV subroutine can be processed from any point in the calculation
operations. All RPG IV operations can be processed within a subroutine, and these
operations can be conditioned by any valid indicators in positions 9 through 11. SR
or blanks can appear in positions 7 and 8. Control level indicators (L1 through L9)
cannot be used in these positions. However, AND/OR lines within the subroutine
can be indicated in positions 7 and 8.
Fields used in a subroutine can be defined either in the subroutine or in the rest of
the procedure. In either instance, the fields can be used by both the body of the
procedure and the subroutine.
A subroutine cannot contain another subroutine. One subroutine can call another
subroutine; that is, a subroutine can contain an EXSR or CASxx. However, an EXSR
or CASxx specification within a subroutine cannot directly call itself. Indirect calls
to itself through another subroutine should not be performed, because
unpredictable results will occur. Use the GOTO and TAG operation codes if you
want to branch to another point within the same subroutine.
Subroutines do not have to be specified in the order they are used. Each
subroutine must have a unique symbolic name and must contain a BEGSR and an
ENDSR statement.
The use of the GOTO (branching) operation is allowed within a subroutine. GOTO
can specify the label on the ENDSR operation associated with that subroutine; it
cannot specify the name of a BEGSR operation. A GOTO cannot be issued to a
TAG or ENDSR within a subroutine unless the GOTO is in the same subroutine as
the TAG or ENDSR. You can use the LEAVESR operation to exit a subroutine from

any point within the subroutine. Control passes to the ENDSR operation for the
subroutine. Use LEAVESR only from within a subroutine.
A GOTO within a subroutine in the main procedure can be issued to a TAG within
the same subroutine, detail calculations or total calculations. A GOTO within a
subroutine in a subprocedure can be issued to a TAG within the same subroutine,
or within the body of the subprocedure.

Subroutine Coding Examples
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
* For a subroutine, positions 7 and 8 can be blank or contain SR.
*
C :
C :
C EXSR SUBRTB
C :
C :
C :
CL2 EXSR SUBRTA
C :
C :
C :
C SUBRTA BEGSR
C :
C :
C :
*
* One subroutine can call another subroutine.
*
C EXSR SUBRTC
C :
C :
C :
C ENDSR
C SUBRTB BEGSR
C :
C :
C :
*
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
* GOTO and TAG operations can be used within a subroutine.
*
C START TAG
C :
C :
C :
C 23 GOTO END
C :
C :
C :
C 24 GOTO START
C END ENDSR
C SUBRTC BEGSR
C :
C :
C :
C ENDSR
*
Figure 156. Examples of Coding Subroutines

Test Operations
Test Operations
The test operations are:
v “TESTB (Test Bit)” on page 735
v “TESTN (Test Numeric)” on page 737
v “TESTZ (Test Zone)” on page 739.
TEST is available in both the traditional syntax and free-form syntax. The other
| operations are available only in the traditional syntax. See Figure 167 on page 443
| for an example of how %BITAND can be used to duplicate the function of TESTB.
The TESTx operations allow you to test fields specified in the result field. TEST
tests for valid date, time, or timestamp data. TESTB tests the bit pattern of a result
field. TESTN tests if the character field specified in the result field contain all
numbers, or numbers with leading blanks, or all blanks. TESTZ tests the zone
portion of the leftmost character of a character field specified in the result field.
The result of these operations is indicated by the resulting indicators.

Test Operations

Chapter 21. Expressions
Expressions are a way to express program logic using free-form syntax. They can
be used to write program statements in a more readable or concise manner than
fixed-form statements.
An expression is simply a group of operands and operations. For example, the

following are valid expressions:
A+B*21
STRINGA + STRINGB
D = %ELEM(ARRAYNAME)
*IN01 OR (BALANCE > LIMIT)
SUM + TOTAL(ARRAY:%ELEM(ARRAY))
’The tax rate is ’ + %editc(tax : ’A’) + ’%.’
Expressions may be coded in the following statements:

v “CALLP (Call a Prototyped Procedure or Program)” on page 539
v “DOU (Do Until)” on page 574
v “DOW (Do While)” on page 577
v “EVAL (Evaluate expression)” on page 590
v “EVALR (Evaluate expression, right adjust)” on page 592
v “FOR (For)” on page 601
v “IF (If)” on page 607
v “RETURN (Return to Caller)” on page 702
v “WHEN (When True Then Select)” on page 746
Figure 157 on page 420 shows several examples of how expressions can be used:

General Expression Rules
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
* The operations within the DOU group will iterate until the
* logical expression is true. That is, either COUNTER is less
* than MAXITEMS or indicator 03 is on.
/FREE
dou counter < MAXITEMS or *in03;
enddo;
// The operations controlled by the IF operation will occur if

// DUEDATE (a date variable) is an earlier date than
// December 31, 1994.
if DueDate < D’12-31-94’;
endif;
// In this numeric expression, COUNTER is assigned the value

// of COUNTER plus 1.
Counter = Counter + 1;
// This numeric expression uses a built-in function to assign the numb

// of elements in the array ARRAY to the variable ARRAYSIZE.
ArraySize = %elem (Array);
// This expression calculates interest and performs half adjusting on

// the result which is placed in the variable INTEREST.
eval(h) Interest = Balance * Rate;
// This character expression builds a sentence from a name and a

// number using concatentation. You can use built-in function
// %CHAR, %EDITC, %EDITW or %EDITFLT to convert the numeric value
// to character data.
// This statement produces ’Id number for John Smith is 231 364’
String = ’Id number for ’
+ %trimr (First) + ’ ’ + %trimr (Last)
+ ’ is ’ + %editw (IdNum: ’ & ’);
// This expression adds a duration of 10 days to a date.

DueDate = OriginalDate + %days(10);
// This expression determines the difference in seconds between

// two time values.
Seconds = %diff (CompleteTime: t’09:00:00’: *seconds);
// This expression combines a date value and a time value into a

// timestamp value.
TimeStamp = TransactionDate + TransactionTime;
/END-FREE
Figure 157. Expression Examples

The following are general rules that apply to all expressions:
1. Expressions are coded in the Extended-Factor 2 entry on the Calculation
Specification or after the operation code on a free-form calculation.
2. An expression can be continued on more than one specification. On a
continuation specification, the only entries allowed are C in column 6 and the
Extended-Factor 2 entry.
No special continuation character is needed unless the expression is split within
a literal or a name.
3. Blanks (like parentheses) are required only to resolve ambiguity. However, they
may be used to enhance readability.

Note that RPG will read as many characters as possible when parsing each
token of an expression. For example,
v X**DAY is X raised to the power of DAY
v X* *DAY is X multiplied by *DAY
4. The TRUNCNBR option (as a command parameter or as a keyword on a
control specification) does not apply to calculations done within expressions.
When overflow occurs during an expression operation, an exception is always
issued.
Expression Operands
An operand can be any field name, named constant, literal, or prototyped
procedure returning a value. In addition, the result of any operation can also be
used as an operand to another operation. For example, in the expression A+B*21,
the result of B*21 is an operand to the addition operation.
Expression Operators
There are several types of operations:
Unary Operations
Unary operations are coded by specifying the operation followed by one
operand. The unary operations are:
+ The unary plus operation maintains the value of the numeric
operand.
- The unary minus operation negates the value of the numeric
operand. For example, if NUMBER has the value 123.4, the value
of -NUMBER is -123.4.
NOT The logical negation operation returns ’1’ if the value of the
indicator operand is ’0’ and ’0’ if the indicator operand is ’1’. Note
that the result of any comparison operation or operation AND or
OR is a value of type indicator.
Binary Operations
Binary operations are coded by specifying the operation between the two
operands. The binary operations are:
+ The meaning of this operation depends on the types of the
operands. It can be used for:
1. Adding two numeric values
2. Adding a duration to a date, time, or timestamp.
3. Concatenating two character, two graphic, or two UCS-2 values
4. Adding a numeric offset to a basing pointer
- The meaning of this operation depends on the types of the
operands. It can be used for:
1. Subtracting two numeric values
2. Subtracting a duration from a date, time, or timestamp.
3. Subtracting a numeric offset from a basing pointer
4. Subtracting two pointers
* The multiplication operation is used to multiply two numeric
values.
/ The division operation is used to divide two numeric values.
Chapter 21. Expressions 421

Expression Operators
** The exponentiation operation is used to raise a number to the
power of another. For example, the value of 2**3 is 8.
= The equality operation returns ’1’ if the two operands are equal,
and ’0’ if not.
<> The inequality operation returns ’0’ if the two operands are equal,
and ’1’ if not.
> The greater than operation returns ’1’ if the first operand is greater
than the second.
>= The greater than or equal operation returns ’1’ if the first operand
is greater or equal to the second.
< The less than operation returns ’1’ if the first operand is less than
the second.
<= The less than or equal operation returns ’1’ if the first operand is
less or equal to the second.
AND The logical and operation returns returns ’1’ if both operands have
the value of indicator ’1’.
OR The logical or operation returns returns ’1’ if either operand has
the value of indicator ’1’.
Built-In Functions
Built-in functions are discussed in “Built-in Functions” on page 376.
User-Defined Functions
Any prototyped procedure that returns a value can be used within an
expression. The call to the procedure can be placed anywhere that a value
of the same type as the return value of the procedure would be used. For
example, assume that procedure MYFUNC returns a character value. The
following shows three calls to MYFUNC:
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
/FREE
if MyFunc (string1) = %trim (MyFund (string2));
%subst(X(3))= MyFunc(’abc’);
endif;
/END-FREE
Figure 158. Using a Prototyped Procedure in an Expression
For more information on user-defined functions see Chapter 6, “Procedures and

subprocedures” on page 93.
Operation Precedence
The precedence of operations determines the order in which operations are
performed within expressions. High precedence operations are performed before
lower precedence operations.
Since parentheses have the highest precedence, operations within parentheses are
always performed first.
Operations of the same precedence (for example A+B+C) are evaluated in left to
right order, except for **, which is evaluated from right to left.

Operation Precedence
(Note that although an expression is evaluated from left to right, this does not
mean that the operands are also evaluated from left to right. See “Order of
Evaluation” on page 433 for additional considerations.)
The following list indicates the precedence of operations from highest to lowest:
1. ()
2. Built-in functions, user-defined functions
3. unary +, unary -, NOT
4. **
5. *, /
6. binary +, binary -
7. =, <>, >, >=, <, <=
8. AND
9. OR
Figure 159 shows how precedence works.
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
* The following two operations produce different results although
* the order of operands and operators is the same. Assume that
* PRICE = 100, DISCOUNT = 10, and TAXRATE = 0.15.
* The first EVAL would result in a TAX of 98.5.
* Since multiplication has a higher precedence than subtraction,
* DISCOUNT * TAXRATE is the first operation performed. The result
* of that operation (1.5) is then subtracted from PRICE.
/FREE
TAX = PRICE - DISCOUNT * TAXRATE;
// The second EVAL would result in a TAX of 13.50.

// Since parentheses have the highest precedence the operation
// within parenthesis is performed first and the result of that
// operation (90) is then multiplied by TAXRATE.
TAX = (PRICE - DISCOUNT) * TAXRATE;

/END-FREE
Figure 159. Precedence Example
Data Types
All data types are allowed within expressions. However, specific operations only
support certain data types as operands. For example, the * operation only allows
numeric values as operands. Note that the relational and logical operations return
a value of type indicator, which is a special type of character data. As a result, any
relational or logical result can be used as an operand to any operation that expects
character operands.
Data Types Supported by Expression Operands

Table 49 on page 424 describes the type of operand allowed for each unary
operator and the type of the result. Table 50 on page 424 describes the type of
operands allowed for each binary operator and the type of the result. Table 51 on
page 424 describes the type of operands allowed for each built-in function and the
type of the result. Prototyped procedures support whatever data types are defined
in the prototype definition.

Data Types
Table 49. Types Supported for Unary Operations
Operation Operand Type Result Type
- (negation) Numeric Numeric
+ Numeric Numeric
NOT Indicator Indicator
Table 50. Operands Supported for Binary Operations

Operator Operand 1 Type Operand 2 Type Result Type
+ (addition) Numeric Numeric Numeric
+ (addition) Date Duration Date
+ (addition) Time Duration Time
+ (addition) Timestamp Duration Timestamp
- (subtraction) Numeric Numeric Numeric
- (subtraction) Date Duration Date
- (subtraction) Time Duration Time
- (subtraction) Timestamp Duration Timestamp
* (multiplication) Numeric Numeric Numeric
/ (division) Numeric Numeric Numeric
** (exponentiation) Numeric Numeric Numeric
+ (concatenation) Character Character Character
+ (concatenation) Graphic Graphic Graphic
+ (concatenation) UCS-2 UCS-2 UCS-2
+ (add offset to pointer) Basing Pointer Numeric Basing Pointer
- (subtract pointers) Basing Pointer Basing Pointer Numeric
- (subtract offset from Basing Pointer Numeric Basing Pointer
pointer)
Note: For the following operations the operands may be of any type, but the two operands must be of the same
type.
= (equal to) Any Any Indicator
>= (greater than or equal Any Any Indicator
to)
> (greater than) Any Any Indicator
<= (less than or equal to) Any Any Indicator
< (less than) Any Any Indicator
<> (not equal to) Any Any Indicator
AND (logical and) Indicator Indicator Indicator
OR (logical or) Indicator Indicator Indicator
Table 51. Types Supported for Built-in Functions

Operation Operands Result Type
%ABS Numeric Numeric
%ALLOC Numeric Pointer
| %BITAND Character:character{:character...} Character

Data Types
Table 51. Types Supported for Built-in Functions (continued)
| %BITAND Numeric:numeric{:numeric...} Numeric
| %BITNOT Character Character
| %BITNOT Numeric Numeric
| %BITOR Character:character{:character...} Character
| %BITOR Numeric:numeric{:numeric...} Numeric
| %BITXOR Character:character Character
| %BITXOR Numeric:numeric Numeric
%CHAR Graphic, Numeric, UCS-2, Date, Time or Timestamp {: Character
Format of Date, Time, or Timestamp}
%CHECK Character, Graphic, or UCS-2 {: Numeric} Numeric
%CHECKR Character, Graphic, or UCS-2 {: Numeric} Numeric
%DATE {Character, Numeric, or Timestamp {: Date Format}} Date
%DAYS Numeric Numeric (duration)
| %DEC Character : Numeric constant : Numeric constant Numeric (packed)
%DEC Numeric {: Numeric constant : Numeric constant} Numeric (packed)
| %DECH Character : Numeric constant : Numeric constant Numeric (packed)
%DECH Numeric : Numeric constant : Numeric constant Numeric (packed)
%DECPOS Numeric Numeric (unsigned)
%DIFF Date, Time, or Timestamp : Date, Time, or Timestamp : Numeric (duration) (compatible
Unit with both)
%DIV Numeric : Numeric Numeric
%EDITC Non-float Numeric : Character Constant of Length 1 Character (fixed length)
{:*CURSYM | *ASTFILL | character currency symbol}
%EDITFLT Numeric Character (fixed length)
%EDITW Non-float Numeric : Character Constant Character (fixed length)
%EOF {File name} Indicator
%EQUAL {File name} Indicator
%ERROR Indicator
| %FLOAT Character Numeric (float)
%FLOAT Numeric Numeric (float)
%FOUND {File name} Indicator
%GRAPH Character, Graphic, or UCS-2 {: ccsid} Graphic
%HOURS Numeric Numeric (duration)
| %INT Character Numeric (integer)
%INT Numeric Numeric (integer)
| %INTH Character Numeric (integer)
%INTH Numeric Numeric (integer)
%LEN Any Numeric (unsigned)
%LOOKUPxx Any : Any array {: Numeric {: Numeric}} Numeric
%MINUTES Numeric Numeric (duration)
%MONTHS Numeric Numeric (duration)

Data Types
%MSECONDS Numeric Numeric (duration)
%OCCUR Multiple Occurrence Data Structure Multiple Occurrence Data
Structure
%OPEN File name Indicator
%PARMS Numeric (integer)
%REALLOC Pointer : Numeric Pointer
%REM Numeric : Numeric Numeric
%REPLACE Character : Character {: Numeric {: Numeric}} Character
%REPLACE Graphic : Graphic {: Numeric {: Numeric}} Graphic
%REPLACE UCS-2 : UCS-2 {: Numeric {: Numeric}} UCS-2
%SCAN Character : Character {: Numeric} Numeric (unsigned)
%SCAN Graphic : Graphic {: Numeric} Numeric (unsigned)
%SCAN UCS-2 : UCS-2 {: Numeric} Numeric (unsigned)
%SECONDS Numeric Numeric (duration)
%SHUTDOWN Indicator
%SQRT Numeric Numeric
%STATUS {File name} Numeric (zoned decimal)
%STR Basing Pointer {: Numeric} Character
Note: When %STR appears on the left-hand side of an expression, the second operand is required.
%SUBDT Date, Time, or Timestamp : Unit Numeric
%SUBST Character : Numeric {: Numeric} Character
%SUBST Graphic : Numeric {: Numeric} Graphic
%SUBST UCS-2 : Numeric {: Numeric} UCS-2
%THIS Object
%TIME {Character, Numeric, or Timestamp {: Time Format}} Time
%TIMESTAMP {Character, Numeric, or Date {: Timestamp Format}} Timestamp
%TLOOKUPxx Any table: Any table {: Any} Indicator
%TRIM Character Character
%TRIM Graphic Graphic
%TRIM UCS-2 UCS-2
%TRIML Character Character
%TRIML Graphic Graphic
%TRIML UCS-2 UCS-2
%TRIMR Character Character
%TRIMR Graphic Graphic
%TRIMR UCS-2 UCS-2
%UCS2 Character, Graphic, or UCS-2 {: ccsid} Varying length UCS-2 value
| %UNS Character Numeric (unsigned)
%UNS Numeric Numeric (unsigned)
| %UNSH Character Numeric (unsigned)

Data Types
%UNSH Numeric Numeric (unsigned)
%XFOOT Numeric Numeric
%XLATE Character, Graphic, or UCS-2 : Character, Graphic, or Character, Graphic, or UCS-2
UCS-2 : Character, Graphic, or UCS-2 {: Numeric}
%YEARS Numeric Numeric (duration)
Note: For the following built-in functions, arguments must be literals, named constants or variables.
%PADDR Character Procedure or prototype pointer
%SIZE Any {: *ALL} Numeric (unsigned)
Note: For the following built-in functions, arguments must be variables. However, if an array index is specified, it
may be any valid numeric expression.
%ADDR Any Basing pointer
%ELEM Any Numeric (unsigned)
%NULLIND Any Indicator
| Note: The following built-in functions are not true built-in functions in that they do not return a value. They are
| used in some free-form file operations.
| %FIELDS Any{: Any {: Any ...} Not Applicable
| %KDS Data structure {: numeric } Not Applicable
Format of Numeric Intermediate Results

For binary operations involving numeric fields, the format of the intermediate
result depends on the format of the operands.
For the operators +, -, and *:

v If at least one operand has a float format, the result is float format.
v Otherwise, if at least one operand has packed-decimal, zoned-decimal, or binary
format, the result has packed-decimal format.
v Otherwise, if at least one operand has integer format, the result has integer
format.
v Otherwise, the result has unsigned format.
v For numeric literals that are not in float format:
– If the literal is within the range of an unsigned integer, the literal is assumed
to be an unsigned integer.
– Otherwise, if the literal is within the range of an integer, the literal is assumed
to be an integer.
– Otherwise, the literal is assumed to be packed decimal.
For the / operator:

If one operand is float or the FLTDIV keyword is specified on the control
specification, then the result of the / operator is float. Otherwise the result is
packed-decimal.
For the ** operator:

The result is represented in float format.

Precision Rules for Numeric Operations

Unlike the fixed-form operation codes where you must always specify the result of
each individual operation, RPG must determine the format and precision of the
result of each operation within an expression.
If an operation has a result of format float, integer, or unsigned the precision is the
maximum size for that format. Integer and unsigned operations produce 4-byte
values and float operations produce 8-byte values.
However, if the operation has a packed-decimal, zoned decimal, or binary format,

the precision of the result depends on the precisions of the operands.
It is important to be aware of the precision rules for decimal operations since even
a relatively simple expression may have a result that may not be what you expect.
For example, if the two operands of a multiplication are large enough, the result of
the multiplication will have zero decimal places. If you are multiplying two 20
digit numbers, ideally you would need a 40 digit result to hold all possible results
| of the multiplication. However, since RPG supports numeric values only up to 31
| digits, the result is adjusted to 31 digits. In this case, as many as 10 decimal digits
are dropped from the result.
There are two sets of precision rules that you can use to control the sizes of
intermediate values:
1. The default rules give you intermediate results that are as large as possible in
order to minimize the possibility of numeric overflow. Unfortunately, in certain
cases, this may yield results with zero decimal places if the result is very large.
2. The ″Result Decimal Positions″ precision rule works the same as the default
rule except that if the statement involves an assignment to a numeric variable
or a conversion to a specific decimal precision, the number of decimal positions
of any intermediate result is never reduced below the desired result decimal
places.
In practice, you don’t have to worry about the exact precisions if you examine
the compile listing when coding numeric expressions. A diagnostic message
indicates that decimal positions are being dropped in an intermediate result. If
there is an assignment involved in the expression, you can ensure that the
decimal positions are kept by using the ″Result Decimal Positions″ precision
rule for the statement by coding operation code extender (R).
If the ″Result Decimal Position″ precision rule cannot be used (say, in a
relational expression), built-in function %DEC can be used to convert the result
of a sub-expression to a smaller precision which may prevent the decimal
positions from being lost.
Using the Default Precision Rules

Using the default precision rule, the precision of a decimal intermediate in an
expression is computed to minimize the possibility of numeric overflow. However,
if the expression involves several operations on large decimal numbers, the
intermediates may end up with zero decimal positions. (Especially, if the
expression has two or more nested divisions.) This may not be what the
programmer expects, especially in an assignment.
When determining the precision of a decimal intermediate, two steps occur:

1. The desired or ″natural″ precision of the result is computed.

| 2. If the natural precision is greater than 31 digits, the precision is adjusted to fit
| in 31 digits. This normally involves first reducing the number of decimal
| positions, and then if necessary, reducing the total number of digits of the
| intermediate.
This behaviour is the default and can be specified for an entire module (using
control specification keyword EXPROPTS(*MAXDIGITS) or for single free-form
expressions (using operation code extender M).
Precision of Intermediate Results

Table 52 describes the default precision rules in more detail.
| Table 52. Precision of Intermediate Results
| Operation Result Precision
| Note: The following operations produce a numeric result. L1 and L2 are the number of
| digits of the two operands. Lr is the number of digits of the result. D1 and D2 are the
| number of decimal places of the two operands. Dr is the number of decimal places of the
| result. T is a temporary value.
| N1+N2 T=min (max (L1-D1, L2-D2)+1, 31)
| Dr=min (max (D1,D2), 31-t)
| Lr=t+Dr
| N1-N2 T=min (max (L1-D1, L2-D2)+1, 31)
| Dr=min (max (D1,D2), 31-t)
| Lr=t+Dr
| N1*N2 Lr=min (L1+L2, 31)
| Dr=min (D1+D2, 31-min ((L1-D1)+(L2-D2), 31))

| N1/N2 Lr=31
| Dr=max (31-((L1-D1)+D2), 0)
| N1**N2 Double float
| Note: The following operations produce a character result. Ln represents the length of the
| operand in number of characters.
| C1+C2 Lr=min(L1+L2,65535)
| Note: The following operations produce a DBCS result. Ln represents the length of the
| operand in number of DBCS characters.
| D1+D2 Lr=min(L1+L2,16383)
| Note: The following operations produce a result of type character with subtype indicator.
| The result is always an indicator value (1 character).
| V1=V2 1 (indicator)
| V1>=V2 1 (indicator)
| V1>V2 1 (indicator)
| V1<=V2 1 (indicator)
| V1<V2 1 (indicator)
| V1<>V2 1 (indicator)
| V1 AND V2 1 (indicator)
| V1 OR V2 1 (indicator)
|

Example of Default Precision Rules
This example shows how the default precision rules work.
D FLD1 S 15P 4
D FLD2 S 15P 2
D FLD3 S 5P 2
D FLD4 S 9P 4
D FLD5 S 9P 4
C EVAL FLD1 = FLD2/(((FLD3/100)*FLD4)+FLD5)
( 1 )
( 2 )
( 3 )
( 4 )
Figure 160. Precision of Intermediate Results
When the above Calculation specification is processed, the resulting value assigned
| to FLD1 will have a precision of zero decimals, not the three decimals expected.
The reason is that when it gets to the last evaluation (4 in the above example),
the number to which the factor is scaled is negative. To see why, look at how the
expression is evaluated.
| 1 Evaluate FLD3/100
| Rules:
| Lr = 31
| Dr = max(31-((L1-D1)+D2),0)
| = max(31-((5-2)+0),0)
| = max(31-3,0)
| = 28
| 2 Evaluate (Result of 1 * FLD4)
| Rules:
| Lr = min(L1+L2,31)
| = min(31+9,31)
| = 31
| Dr = min(D1+D2,31-min((L1-D1)+(L2-D2),31))
| = min(28+4,31-min((30-28)+(9-4),31))
| = min(32,31-min(4+5,31)
| = min(32,22)
| = 22
| 3 Evaluate (Result of 2 + FLD5)
| Rules:
| T = min(max(L1-D1,L2-D2)+1,31)
| = min(max(31-22,9-4)+1,31)
| = min(max(9,5)+1,31)
| = min(10,30)
| = 10
| Dr = min(max(D1,D2),31-T)
| = min(max(22,4),31-10)
| = min(22,21)
| = 21
| Lr = T + Dr
| = 10 + 21 = 31
| 4 Evaluate FLD2/Result of 3
| Rules:

| Lr = 31
| Dr = max(31-((L1-D1)+D2),0)
| = max(31-((15-2)+ 21),0)
| = max(31-(13+21),0)
| = max(-3,0) **** NEGATIVE NUMBER TO WHICH FACTOR IS SCALED ****
| = 0
To avoid this problem, you can change the above expression so that the first
evaluation is a multiplication rather than a division, that is, FLD3 * 0.01 or use the
%DEC built-in function to set the sub-expression FLD3/100: %DEC(FLD3/100 : 15 :
4) or use operation extender (R) to ensure that the number of decimal positions
never falls below 4.
Using the ″Result Decimal Position″ Precision Rules

The ″Result Decimal Position″ precision rule means that the precision of a decimal
intermediate will be computed such that the number of decimal places will never
be reduced smaller than the number of decimal positions of the result of the
assignment. This is specified by:
1. EXPROPTS(*RESDECPOS) on the Control Specification. Use this to specify
this behaviour for an entire module.
2. Operation code extender R specified for a free-form operation.
Result Decimal Position rules apply in the following circumstances:

1. Result Decimal Position precision rules apply only to packed decimal
intermediate results. This behaviour does not apply to the intermediate results
of operations that have integer, unsigned, or float results.
2. Result Decimal Position precision rules apply only where there is an
assignment (either explicit or implicit) to a decimal target (packed, zoned, or
binary). This can occur in the following situations:
a. For an EVAL statement, the minimum decimal places is given by the
decimal positions of the target of the assignment and applies to the
expression on the right-hand side of the assignment. If half-adjust also
applies to the statement, one extra digit is added to the minimum decimal
| positions (provided that the minimum is less than 31).
b. For a RETURN statement, the minimum decimal places is given by the
decimal positions of the return value defined on the PI specification for the
procedure. If half-adjust also applies to the statement, one extra digit is
added to the minimum decimal positions (provided that the minimum is
| less than 31).
c. For a VALUE or CONST parameter, the minimum decimal positions is
given by the decimal positions of the formal parameter (specified on the
procedure prototype) and applies to the expression specified as the passed
parameter.
d. For built-in function %DEC and %DECH with explicit length and decimal
positions specified, the minimum decimal positions is given by the third
parameter of the built-in function and applies to the expression specified as
the first parameter.
The minimum number of decimal positions applies to the entire sub-expression

unless overridden by another of the above operations. If half-adjust is specified
(either as the H operation code extender, or by built-in function %DECH), the
number of decimal positions of the intermediate result is never reduced below
N+1, where N is the number of decimal positions of the result.

3. The Result Decimal Position rules do not normally apply to conditional
expressions since there is no corresponding result. (If the comparisons must be
performed to a particular precision, then %DEC or %DECH must be used on
the two arguments.)
On the other hand, if the conditional expression is embedded within an
expression for which the minimum decimal positions are given (using one of
the above techniques), then the Result Decimal Positions rules do apply.
Example of ″Result Decimal Position″ Precision Rules

The following examples illustrate the ″Result Decimal Position″ precision rules:
| *..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
| * This example shows the precision of the intermediate values
| * using the two precision rules.
|
| D p1 s 13p 2
| D p2 s 13p 2
| D p3 s 13p 2
| D p4 s 15p 9
| D s1 s 13s 2
| D s2 s 13s 2
| D i1 s 10i 0
| D f1 s 8f
| D proc pr 8p 3
| D parm1 20p 5 value
|
| * In the following examples, for each sub-expression,
| * two precisions are shown. First, the natural precision,
| * and then the adjusted precision.
|
| * Example 1:
|
| /FREE
| eval p1 = p1 * p2 * p3;
| // p1*p2 -> P(26,4); P(26,4)
| // p1*p2*p3 -> P(39,6); P(31,0) (decimal positions are truncated)
| eval(r) p1 = p1 * p2 * p3;
| // p1*p2 -> P(26,4); P(26,4)
| // p1*p2*p3 -> P(39,6); P(31,2) (decimal positions do not drop
| // below target decimal positions)
| eval(rh)p1 = p1 * p2 * p3;
| // p1*p2 -> P(26,4); P(26,5)
| // p1*p2*p3 -> P(39,6); P(31,3) (decimal positions do not drop
| // below target decimals + 1)
| // Example 2:
| eval p4 = p1 * p2 * proc (s1*s2*p4);
| // p1*p2 -> P(26,4); P(26,4)
| // s1*s2 -> P(26,4); P(26,4)
| // s1*s2*p4 -> P(41,13); P(31,3) (decimal positions are truncated)
| // p1*p2*proc() -> P(34,7); P(31,4) (decimal positions are truncated)
| eval(r) p4 = p1 * p2 * proc (s1*s2*p4);
| // p1*p2 -> P(26,4); P(26,4)
| // s1*s2 -> P(26,4); P(26,4)
| // s1*s2*p4 -> P(41,13); P(31,5)
| // p1*p2*proc() -> P(34,7); P(31,7) (we keep all decimals since we are
| // already below target decimals)
| /END-FREE
||
| Figure 161. Examples of Precision Rules

Short Circuit Evaluation
Short Circuit Evaluation

Relational operations AND and OR are evaluated from left to right. However, as
soon as the value is known, evaluation of the expression stops and the value is
returned. As a result, not all operands of the expression need to be evaluated.
For operation AND, if the first operand is false, then the second operand is not
evaluated. Likewise, for operation OR, if the first operand is true, the second
operand is not evaluated.
There are two implications of this behaviour. First, an array index can be both
tested and used within the same expression. The expression
I<=%ELEM(ARRAY) AND I>0 AND ARRAY(I)>10
will never result in an array indexing exception.
The second implication is that if the second operand is a call to a user-defined

function, the function will not be called. This is important if the function changes
the value of a parameter or a global variable.
Order of Evaluation
The order of evaluation of operands within an expression is not guaranteed.
Therefore, if a variable is used twice anywhere within an expression, and there is
the possibility of side effects, then the results may not be the expected ones.
For example, consider the source shown in Figure 162, where A is a variable, and
FN is a procedure that modifies A. There are two occurrences of A in the
expression portion of the second EVAL operation. If the left-hand side (operand 1)
of the addition operation is evaluated first, X is assigned the value 17, (5 + FN(5)
= 5 + 12 = 17). If the right-hand side (operand 2) of the addition operation is
evaluated first, X is assigned the value 18, (6 + FN(5) = 6 + 12 = 18).
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
* A is a variable. FN is procedure that modifies A.
/free
a = 5;
x = a + fn(a);
/end-free
P fn B
D fn PI 5P 0
D parm 5P 0
/free
parm = parm + 1;
return 2 * parm;
/end-free
P fn E
Figure 162. Sample coding of a call with side effects

Order of Evaluation

Chapter 22. Built-in Functions
This chapter describes, in alphabetical order, each built-in function.
%ABS (Absolute Value of Expression)

%ABS(numeric expression)
%ABS returns the absolute value of the numeric expression specified as the
parameter. If the value of the numeric expression is non-negative, the value is
returned unchanged. If the value is negative, the value returned is the value of the
expression but with the negative sign removed.
%ABS may be used either in expressions or as parameters to keywords. When

used with keywords, the operand must be a numeric literal, a constant name
representing a numeric value, or a built-in function with a numeric value known at
compile-time.
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
D*Name +++++++++ETDsFrom+++To/L+++IDc.Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++
D f8 s 8f inz (-1)
D i10 s 10i 0 inz (-123)
D p7 s 7p 3 inz (-1234.567)
/FREE
f8 = %abs (f8); // "f8" is now 1.
i10 = %abs (i10 - 321); // "i10" is now 444.
p7 = %abs (p7); // "p7" is now 1234.567.
/END-FREE
Figure 163. %ABS Example

%ADDR (Get Address of Variable)

%ADDR(variable)
%ADDR(variable(index))
%ADDR(variable(expression))
%ADDR returns a value of type basing pointer. The value is the address of the
specified variable. It may only be compared with and assigned to items of type
basing pointer.
If %ADDR with an array index parameter is specified as parameter for definition

specification keywords INZ or CONST, the array index must be known at
compile-time. The index must be either a numeric literal or a numeric constant.
In an EVAL operation where the result of the assignment is an array with no

index, %ADDR on the right hand side of the assignment operator has a different
meaning depending on the argument for the %ADDR. If the argument for %ADDR
is an array name without an index and the result is an array name, each element of
the result array will contain the address of the beginning of the argument array. If
the argument for %ADDR is an array name with an index of (*), then each element
of the result array will contain the address of the corresponding element in the
argument array. This is illustrated in Figure 164 on page 437.
If the variable specified as parameter is a table, multiple occurrence data structure,

or subfield of a multiple occurrence data structure, the address will be the address
of the current table index or occurrence number.
If the variable is based, %ADDR returns the value of the basing pointer for the
variable. If the variable is a subfield of a based data structure, the value of
%ADDR is the value of the basing pointer plus the offset of the subfield.
If the variable is specified as a PARM of the *ENTRY PLIST, %ADDR returns the
address passed to the program by the caller.

*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
D*Name++++++++++ETDsFrom+++To/L+++IDc.Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++
*
* The following set of definitions is valid since the array
* index has a compile-time value
*
D ARRAY S 20A DIM (100)
* Set the pointer to the address of the seventh element of the array.
D PTR S * INZ (%ADDR(ARRAY(SEVEN)))
D SEVEN C CONST (7)
*
D DS1 DS OCCURS (100)
D 20A
D SUBF 10A
D 30A
D CHAR10 S 10A BASED (P)
D PARRAY S * DIM(100)
/FREE
%OCCUR(DS1) = 23;
SUBF = *ALL’abcd’;
P = %ADDR (SUBF);
IF CHAR10 = SUBF;
// This condition is true.
ENDIF;
IF %ADDR (CHAR10) = %ADDR (SUBF);
// This condition is also true.
ENDIF;
// The following statement also changes the value of SUBF.
CHAR10 = *ALL’efgh’;
IF CHAR10 = SUBF;
// This condition is still true.
ENDIF;
//--------------------------------------------------------------
%OCCUR(DS1) = 24;
IF CHAR10 = SUBF;
// This condition is no longer true.
ENDIF;
//--------------------------------------------------------------
// The address of an array element is taken using an expression
// as the array index.
P = %ADDR (ARRAY (X + 10));
//--------------------------------------------------------------
// Each element of the array PARRAY contains the address of the
// first element of the array ARRAY.
PARRAY = %ADDR(ARRAY);
// Each element of the array PARRAY contains the address of the
// corresponding element of the array ARRAY.
PARRAY = %ADDR(ARRAY(*));
/END-FREE
Figure 164. %ADDR Example
Chapter 22. Built-in Functions 437

%ALLOC (Allocate Storage)
%ALLOC (Allocate Storage)

%ALLOC(num)
%ALLOC returns a pointer to newly allocated heap storage of the length specified.
The newly allocated storage is uninitialized.
The parameter must be a non-float numeric value with zero decimal places. The
length specified must be between 1 and 16776704.
For more information, see “Memory Management Operations” on page 401.
If the operation cannot complete successfully, exception 00425 or 00426 is issued.
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
/FREE
// Allocate an area of 200 bytes
pointer = %ALLOC(200);
/END-FREE
Figure 165. %ALLOC Example

%BITAND (Bitwise AND Operation)
| %BITAND (Bitwise AND Operation)

| %BITAND(expr:expr{:expr...})
| %BITAND returns the bit-wise ANDing of the bits of all the arguments. That is,
| the result bit is ON when all of the corresponding bits in the arguments are ON,
| and OFF otherwise.
| The arguments to this built-in function can be either character or numeric. For
| numeric arguments, if they are not integer or unsigned, they are first converted to
| integer. If the value does not fit in an 8-byte integer, a numeric overflow exception
| is issued.
| %BITAND can have two or more arguments. All arguments must be the same
| type, either character or numeric. The result type is the same as the types of the
| arguments. For numeric arguments, the result is unsigned if all arguments are
| unsigned, and integer otherwise.
| The length is the length of the largest operand. If the arguments have different
| lengths, they are padded on the left with bit zeros for numeric arguments. Shorter
| character arguments are padded on the right with bit ones.
| %BITAND can be coded in any expression. It can also be coded as the argument to
| a File or Definition Specification keyword if all arguments are known at
| compile-time. If all arguments of this built-in function are hex literals, the compiler
| produces a constant-folded result that is a hex literal.
| Please see Figure 166 on page 442, Figure 167 on page 443, and Figure 168 on
| page 443 for examples demonstrating the use of %BITAND.

%BITNOT (Invert Bits)
| %BITNOT (Invert Bits)

| %BITNOT(expr)
| %BITNOT returns the bit-wise inverse of the bits of the argument. That is, the
| result bit is ON when the corresponding bit in the argument is OFF, and OFF
| otherwise.
| The argument to this built-in function can be either character or numeric. For
| is issued.
| %BITNOT takes just one argument. The result type is the same as the types of the
| arguments. For numeric arguments, the result is unsigned if all arguments are
| lengths, they are padded on the left with bit zeros for numeric arguments.
| %BITNOT can be coded in any expression. It can also be coded as the argument to
| Please see Figure 166 on page 442 for an example demonstrating the use of
| %BITNOT.

%BITOR (Bitwise OR Operation)
| %BITOR (Bitwise OR Operation)

| %BITOR(expr:expr{:expr...})
| %BITOR returns the bit-wise ORing of the bits of all the arguments. That is, the
| result bit is ON when any of the corresponding bits in the arguments are ON, and
| OFF otherwise.
| The arguments to this built-in function can be either character or numeric. For
| is issued.
| %BITOR can have two or more arguments. All arguments must be the same type,
| either character or numeric. However, when coded as keyword parameters, these
| two BIFs can have only two arguments. The result type is the same as the types of
| the arguments. For numeric arguments, the result is unsigned if all arguments are
| character arguments are padded on the right with bit zeros.
| %BITOR can be coded in any expression. It can also be coded as the argument to a
| File or Definition Specification keyword if all arguments are known at
| Please see Figure 166 on page 442 for an example demonstrating the use of
| %BITOR.

%BITXOR (Bitwise Exclusive-OR Operation)
| %BITXOR (Bitwise Exclusive-OR Operation)

| %BITXOR(expr:expr)
| %BITXOR returns the bit-wise exclusive ORing of the bits of the two arguments.
| That is, the result bit is ON when just one of the corresponding bits in the
| arguments are ON, and OFF otherwise.
| The argument to this built-in function can be either character or numeric. For
| is issued.
| %BITXOR takes exactly two arguments. The result type is the same as the types of
| the arguments. For numeric arguments, the result is unsigned if all arguments are
| character arguments are padded on the right with bit zeros .
| %BITXOR can be coded in any expression. It can also be coded as the argument to
| Examples of Bit Operations

|
| D const c x’0007’
|
| D ch1 s 4a inz(%BITNOT(const))
| * ch1 is initialized to x’FFF84040’
| D num1 s 5i 0 inz(%BITXOR(const:x’000F’))
| * num is initialized to x’0008’, or 8
|
| D char2a s 2a
| D char2b s 2a
| D uA s 5u 0
| D uB s 3u 0
| D uC s 5u 0
| D uD s 5u 0
|
| C eval char2a = x’FE51’
| C eval char2b = %BITAND(char10a : x’0F0F’)
| * operand1 = b’1111 1110 0101 0001’
| * operand2 = b’0000 1111 0000 1111’
| * bitwise AND: 0000 1110 0000 0001
| * char2b = x’0E01’
| C eval uA = x’0123’
| C eval uB = x’AB’
| C eval uc = x’8816’
| C eval uD = %BITOR(uA : uB : uC)
| * operand1 = b’0000 0001 0010 0011’
| * operand2 = b’0000 0000 1010 1011’ (fill with x’00’)
| * operand3 = b’1000 1000 0001 0110’
| * bitwise OR: 1000 1001 1011 1111
| * uD = x’89BF’
||
| Figure 166. Using Bit Operations

%BITXOR (Bitwise Exclusive-OR Operation)
|
| * This example shows how to duplicate the function of TESTB using %BITAND
| DName+++++++++++ETDsFrom+++To/L+++IDc.Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++
| D fld1 s 1a
| CL0N01Factor1+++++++Opcode(E)+Factor2+++++++Result++++++++Len++D+HiLoEq
| C testb x’F1’ fld1 010203
| * Testing bits 1111 0001
| * If FLD1 = x’00’ (0000 0000), the indicators have the values ’1’ ’0’ ’0’
| * (all tested bits are off)
| * If FLD1 = x’15’ (0001 0101), the indicators have the values ’0’ ’1’ ’0’
| * (some tested bits are off and some are on)
| * If FLD1 = x’F1’ (1111 0001), the indicators have the values ’0’ ’0’ ’1’
| * (all tested bits are on)
| /free
| // this code performs the equivalent of the TESTB operation above
|
| // test if all the "1" bits in x’F1’ are off in FLD1
| *in01 = %bitand(fld1 : x’F1’) = x’00’;
|
| // test if some of the "1" bits in x’F1’ are on
| // and some are off in FLD1
| *in02 = %bitand(fld1 : x’F1’) <> x’00’
| and %bitand(fld1 : x’F1’) <> x’F1’;
|
| // test if all the "1" bits in x’F1’ are on in FLD1
| *in03 = %bitand(fld1 : x’F1’) = x’F1’;
| /end-free
|
||
| Figure 167. Deriving TESTB Functionality from %BITAND
| * This example shows how to duplicate the function of

| * BITON and BITOFF using %BITAND, %BITNOT, and %BITOR
| D fld1 s 1a inz(x’01’)
| D fld2 s 1a inz(x’FF’)
| CL0N01Factor1+++++++Opcode(E)+Factor2+++++++Result++++++++Len++D+HiLoEq
| C biton x’F4’ fld1
| * fld1 has an initial value of x’01’ (0000 0001)
| * The 1 bits in x’F4’ (1111 0100) are set on
| * fld1 has a final value of x’F5’ (1111 0101)
| C bitoff x’F1’ fld2
| * fld2 has an initial value of x’FF’ (1111 1111)
| * The 1 bits in x’F1’ (1111 0001) are set off
| * fld2 has a final value of x’0E’ (0000 1110)
| /free
| // this code performs the equivalent of the
| // BITON and BITOFF operations above
| // Set on the "1" bits of x’F4’ in FLD1
| fld1 = %bitor(fld1 : x’F4’);
| // Set off the "1" bits of x’F1’ in FLD2
| fld2 = %bitand(fld2 : %bitnot(x’F1’));
|
| /end-free
||
| Figure 168. BITON/BITOFF Functionality Using Built In Functions

%CHAR (Convert to Character Data)

%CHAR(expression{:format})
%CHAR converts the value of the expression from graphic, UCS-2, numeric, date,
time or timestamp data to type character. The converted value remains unchanged,
but is returned in a format that is compatible with character data.
If the parameter is a constant, the conversion will be done at compile time.
If a UCS-2 conversion results in substitution characters, a warning message will be

given in the compiler listing if the parameter is a constant. Otherwise, status 00050
will be set at run time but no error message will be given.
For graphic data, the value returned includes the shift-in and shift-out characters.
For example, if a 5 character graphic field is converted, the returned value is 12
characters (10 bytes of graphic data plus the two shift characters). If the value of
the expression has a variable length, the value returned is in varying format.
For date, time, or timestamp data, the second parameter contains the date, time, or
timestamp format to which the returned character data is converted. The value
returned will include separator characters unless the format specified is followed
by a zero.
For numeric data, if the value of the expression is float, the result will be in float
format (for example ’+1.125000000000000E+020’). Otherwise, the result will be in
decimal format with a leading negative sign if the value is negative, and without
leading zeros. The character used for any decimal point will be the character
indicated by the control specification DECEDIT keyword (default is ’.’). For
example, %CHAR of a packed(7,3) expression might return the value ’-1.234’.

*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
D Name S 20G VARYING INZ(G’oXXYYZZi’)
D date S D INZ(D’1997/02/03’)
D time S T INZ(T’12:23:34’)
D result S 100A VARYING
D points S 10i 0 INZ(234)
*-----------------------------------------------------------------
* To format the time and date with the default formats, use this:
*-----------------------------------------------------------------
/FREE
result = ’It is ’ + %CHAR(time) + ’ on ’ + %CHAR(date);
// If the default formats are both *USA,
// result = ’It is 12:23 PM on 02/03/1997’
//-------------------------------------------------------------
// To format the time and date with the job formats, use this:
//-------------------------------------------------------------
result = ’It is ’ + %CHAR(time : *jobrun)
+ ’ on ’ + %CHAR(date : *jobrun);
// If the job date format is *MDY- and the time separator is ’.’,
// then the result = ’It is 12.23.34 on 97-02-03’
//--------------------------------------------------------------
// To format the time and date with specific formats, use this:
//--------------------------------------------------------------
result = ’It is ’ + %CHAR(time : *hms:)
+ ’ on ’ + %CHAR(date : *iso);
// result = ’It is 12:23:34 on 1997-02-03’
//
//-------------------------------------------------------------
// You can use %subst with the %char result if you only want
// part of the result
//-------------------------------------------------------------
result = ’The time is now ’ + %SUBST (%CHAR(time):1:5) + ’.’;
// result = ’The time is now 12:23.’
//-------------------------------------------------------------
// Use %CHAR to convert a graphic value to character so it
// can be concatenated with a character value.
//-------------------------------------------------------------
result = ’The customer’’s name is ’ + %CHAR(Name) + ’.’;
// result = ’The customer’s name is oXXYYZZi.’
//----------------------------------------------------
// Use %CHAR to convert a number to character format:
//----------------------------------------------------
result = ’You have ’ + %char(points) + ’ points.’;
// result = ’You have 234 points.’
//
/END-FREE
Figure 169. %CHAR Examples

%CHECK (Check Characters)

%CHECK(comparator : base {: start})
%CHECK returns the first position of the string base that contains a character that
does not appear in string comparator. If all of the characters in base also appear in
comparator, the function returns 0.
The check begins at the starting position and continues to the right until a
character that is not contained in the comparator string is found. The starting
position defaults to 1.
The first parameter must be of type character, graphic, or UCS-2, fixed or varying
length. The second parameter must be the same type as the first parameter. The
third parameter, if specified, must be a non-float numeric with zero decimal
positions.

*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*--------------------------------------------------
* A string contains a series of numbers separated
* by blanks and/or commas.
* Use %CHECK to extract the numbers
*--------------------------------------------------
D string s 50a varying
D inz(’12, 233 17, 1, 234’)
D delimiters C ’ ,’
D digits C ’0123456789’
D num S 50a varying
D pos S 10i 0
D len S 10i 0
D token s 50a varying
/free
// make sure the string ends with a delimiter

string = string + delimiters;
dou string = ’’;
// Find the beginning of the group of digits

pos = %check (delimiters : string);
if (pos = 0);
leave;
endif;
// skip past the delimiters

string = %subst(string : pos);
// Find the length of the group of digits

len = %check (digits : string) - 1;
// Extract the group of digits

token = %subst(string : 1 : len);
dsply ’ ’ ’ ’ token;
// Skip past the digits

if (len < %len(string));
string = %subst (string : len + 1);
endif;
enddo;
/end-free
Figure 170. %CHECK Example
See also Figure 172 on page 449.

%CHECKR (Check Reverse)

%CHECKR(comparator : base {: start})
%CHECKR returns the last position of the string base that contains a character that
does not appear in string comparator. If all of the characters in base also appear in
comparator, the function returns 0.
The check begins at the starting position and continues to the left until a character
that is not contained in the comparator string is found. The starting position
defaults to the end of the string.
The first parameter must be of type character, graphic, or UCS-2, fixed or varying
length. The second parameter must be the same type as the first parameter. The
third parameter, if specified, must be a non-float numeric with zero decimal
positions.
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*---------------------------------------------
* If a string is padded at the end with some
* character other than blanks, the characters
* cannot be removed using %TRIM.
* %CHECKR can be used for this by searching
* for the last character in the string that
* is not in the list of "pad characters".
*---------------------------------------------
D string1 s 50a varying
D inz(’My *dog* Spot.* @ * @ *’)
D string2 s 50a varying
D inz(’[email protected]’)
D padChars C ’ *@’
/free
%len(string1) = %checkr(padChars:string1);
// %len(string1) is set to 14 (the position of the last character
// that is not in "padChars").
// string1 = ’My *dog* Spot.’
%len(string2) = %checkr(padChars:string2);
// %len(string2) is set to 21 (the position of the last character
// that is not in "padChars").
// string2 = ’[email protected]’ (the string is not changed)
/end-free
Figure 171. %CHECKR Example

*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*------------------------------------------------------
* A string contains a numeric value, but it might
* be surrounded by blanks and asterisks and might be
* preceded by a currency symbol.
*------------------------------------------------------
D string s 50a varying inz(’$****12.345*** ’)
/free
// Find the position of the first character that is not one of ’ $*’
numStart = %CHECK (’ $*’ : string);
// = 6
// Find the position of the last character that is not one of ’ *’

numEnd = %CHECKR (’ *’ : string);
// = 11
// Extract the numeric string

string = %SUBST(string : numStart : numEnd - numStart + 1);
// = ’12.345’
/end-free
Figure 172. %CHECK and %CHECKR Example

%DATE (Convert to Date)
%DATE (Convert to Date)

%DATE{(expression{:date-format})}
%DATE converts the value of the expression from character, numeric, or timestamp
data to type date. The converted value remains unchanged, but is returned as a
date.
The first parameter is the value to be converted. If you do not specify a value,
%DATE returns the current system date.
The second parameter is the date format for character or numeric input. Regardless
of the input format, the output is returned in *ISO format.
For information on the input formats that can be used, see “Date Data Type” on
page 193. If the date format is not specified for character or numeric input, the
default value is either the format specified on the DATFMT control-specification
keyword or *ISO. For more information, see “DATFMT(fmt{separator})” on
page 246.
If the first parameter is a timestamp, *DATE, or UDATE, do not specify the second
parameter. The system knows the format of the input in these cases.
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
/FREE
string = ’040596’;
date = %date(string:*MDY0);
// date now contains d’1996-04-05’
/END-FREE
Figure 173. %DATE Example

%DAYS (Number of Days)
%DAYS (Number of Days)

%DAYS(number)
%DAYS converts a number into a duration that can be added to a date or

timestamp value.
%DAYS can only be the right-hand value in an addition or subtraction operation.

The left-hand value must be a date or timestamp. The result is a date or timestamp
value with the appropriate number of days added or subtracted. For a date, the
resulting value is in *ISO format.
For an example of date and time arithmetic operations, see Figure 198 on page 482.

%DEC (Convert to Packed Decimal Format)
%DEC (Convert to Packed Decimal Format)

| %DEC(numeric or character expression{:precision:decimal places})
| %DEC converts the value of the numeric or character expression to decimal

(packed) format with precision digits and decimal places decimal positions. The
precision and decimal places must be numeric literals, named constants that
represent numeric literals, or built-in functions with a numeric value known at
compile-time.
Parameters precision and decimal places may be omitted if the type of expression
| is neither float nor character. If these parameters are omitted, the precision and
decimal places are taken from the attributes of numeric expression.
| If the parameter is a character expression, the following rules apply:

| v The sign is optional. It can be ’+’ or ’-’. It can precede or follow the numeric
| data.
| v The decimal point is optional. It can be either a period or a comma.
| v Blanks are allowed anywhere in the data. For example, ’ + 3 ’ is a valid
| parameter.
| v The second and third parameters are required.
| v Floating point data, for eample ’1.2E6’, is not allowed.
| v If invalid numeric data is found, an exception occurs with status code 105.
Figure 174 on page 453 shows an example of the %DEC built-in function.
%DECH (Convert to Packed Decimal Format with Half Adjust)

| %DECH(numeric or character expression :precision:decimal places )
| %DECH is the same as %DEC except that if the expression is a decimal or float
| value, half adjust is applied to the value of the expression when converting to the
| desired precision. No message is issued if half adjust cannot be performed..
Unlike, %DEC, all three parameters are required.

%DECH (Convert to Packed Decimal Format with Half Adjust)
%DECH Examples
| *..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
| D*Name++++++++++ETDsFrom+++To/L+++IDc.Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++
| D p7 s 7p 3 inz (1234.567)
| D s9 s 9s 5 inz (73.73442)
| D f8 s 8f inz (123.456789)
| D c15a s 15a inz (’ 123.456789 -’)
| D c15b s 15a inz (’ + 9 , 8 7 6 ’)
| D result1 s 15p 5
| D result2 s 15p 5
| D result3 s 15p 5
|
| /FREE
|
| // using numeric parameters
| result1 = %dec (p7) + 0.011; // "result1" is now 1234.57800
| result2 = %dec (s9 : 5: 0); // "result2" is now 73.00000
| result3 = %dech (f8: 5: 2); // "result3" is now 123.46000
| // using character parameters
| result1 = %dec (c15a: 5: 2); // "result1" is now -123.45
| result2 = %dech(c15b: 5: 2); // "result2" is now 9.88000
| /END-FREE
||
| Figure 174. Using Numeric and Character Parameters
| *-----------------------------------------------------------------
| * If the character data is known to contain non-numeric characters
| * such as thousands separators (like 1,234,567) or leading
| * asterisks and currency symbols (like $***1,234,567.89), some
| * preprocessing is necessary to remove these characters from the
| * data.
| *-----------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
| D data s 20a inz(’$1,234,567.89’)
| D num s 21p 9
| /free
| // Use the %XLATE builtin function to replace any currency
| // symbol, asterisks or thousands separators with blanks
| num = %dech(%xlate(’$*,’ : ’ ’ : data)
| : 21 : 9);
| // If the currency symbol or thousands separator might
| // vary at runtime, use variables to hold these values.
| num = %dech(%xlate(cursym + ’*’ + thousandsSep : ’ ’ : data)
| : 21 : 9);
||
| Figure 175. Handling Currency Symbols and Thousands Separators

%DECPOS (Get Number of Decimal Positions)
%DECPOS (Get Number of Decimal Positions)

%DECPOS(numeric expression)
%DECPOS returns the number of decimal positions of the numeric variable or

expression. The value returned is a constant, and so may participate in constant
folding.
The numeric expression must not be a float variable or expression.
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
D p7 s 7p 3 inz (8236.567)
D s9 s 9s 5 inz (23.73442)
D result1 s 5i 0
D result2 s 5i 0
D result3 s 5i 0
/FREE
result1 = %decpos (p7); // "result1" is now 3.
result2 = %decpos (s9); // "result2" is now 5.
result3 = %decpos (p7 * s9);// "result3" is now 8.
/END-FREE
Figure 176. %DECPOS Example
See Figure 196 on page 478 for an example of %DECPOS with %LEN.

%DIFF (Difference Between Two Date, Time, or Timestamp Values)
%DIFF (Difference Between Two Date, Time, or Timestamp Values)

%DIFF(op1:op2:*MSECONDS|*SECONDS|*MINUTES|*HOURS|*DAYS|*MONTHS|*YEARS)
%DIFF(op1:op2:*MS|*S|*MN|*H|*D|*M|*Y)
%DIFF produces the difference (duration) between two date or time values. The
first and second parameters must have the same, or compatible types. The
following combinations are possible:
v Date and date
v Time and time
v Timestamp and timestamp
v Date and timestamp (only the date portion of the timestamp is considered)
v Time and timestamp (only the time portion of the timestamp is considered).
The third parameter specifies the unit. The following units are valid:
v For two dates or a date and a timestamp: *DAYS, *MONTHS, and *YEARS
v For two times or a time and a timestamp: *SECONDS, *MINUTES, and *HOURS
v For two timestamps: *MSECONDS, *SECONDS, *MINUTES, *HOURS, *DAYS,
*MONTHS, and *YEARS
The result is rounded down, with any remainder discarded. For example, 61
minutes is equal to 1 hour, and 59 minutes is equal to 0 hours.
The value returned by the function is compatible with both type numeric and type
duration. You can add the result to a number (type numeric) or a date, time, or
timestamp (type duration).
If you ask for the difference in microseconds between two timestamps that are
more than 32 years 9 months apart, you will exceed the 15-digit limit for duration
values. This will result in an error or truncation.
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
/FREE
// Determine the number of days between the 2 dates

num_days = %DIFF (loandate: duedate: *DAYS);
// Add number of minutes between the start and end

time = time + %DIFF (start: end: *minutes);
/END-FREE
Figure 177. %DIFF Example

%DIV (Return Integer Portion of Quotient)
%DIV (Return Integer Portion of Quotient)

%DIV(n:m)
%DIV returns the integer portion of the quotient that results from dividing
operands n by m. The two operands must be numeric values with zero decimal
positions. If either operand is a packed, zoned, or binary numeric value, the result
is packed numeric. If either operand is an integer numeric value, the result is
integer. Otherwise, the result is unsigned numeric. Float numeric operands are not
allowed. (See also “%REM (Return Integer Remainder)” on page 492.)
If the operands are constants that can fit in 8-byte integer or unsigned fields,
constant folding is applied to the built-in function. In this case, the %DIV built-in
function can be coded in the definition specifications.
This function is illustrated in Figure 206 on page 492.

%EDITC (Edit Value Using an Editcode)

%EDITC(numeric : editcode {: *ASTFILL | *CURSYM | currency-symbol})
This function returns a character result representing the numeric value edited
according to the edit code. In general, the rules for the numeric value and edit
code are identical to those for editing numeric values in output specifications. The
third parameter is optional, and if specified, must be one of:
*ASTFILL
Indicates that asterisk protection is to be used. This means that leading
zeros are replaced with asterisks in the returned value. For example,
%EDITC(-0012.5 : ’K’ : *ASTFILL) returns ’***12.5-’.
*CURSYM
Indicates that a floating currency symbol is to be used. The actual symbol
will be the one specified on the control specification in the CURSYM
keyword, or the default, ’$’. When *CURSYM is specified, the currency
symbol is placed in the the result just before the first significant digit. For
example, %EDITC(0012.5 : ’K’ : *CURSYM) returns ’ $12.5 ’.
currency-symbol
Indicates that floating currency is to be used with the provided currency
symbol. It must be a 1-byte character constant (literal, named constant or
expression that can be evaluated at compile time). For example,
%EDITC(0012.5 : ’K’ : ’X’) returns ’ X12.5 ’.
The result of %EDITC is always the same length, and may contain leading and
trailing blanks. For example, %EDITC(NUM : ’A’ : ’$’) might return ’$1,234.56CR’
for one value of NUM and ’ $4.56 ’ for another value.
Float expressions are not allowed in the first parameter (you can use %DEC to
convert a float to an editable format). In the second parameter, the edit code is
specified as a character constant; supported edit codes are: ’A’ - ’D’, ’J’ - ’Q’, ’X’ -
’Z’, ’1’ - ’9’. The constant can be a literal, named constant or an expression whose
value can be determined at compile time.

D msg S 100A
D salary S 9P 2 INZ(1000)
* If the value of salary is 1000, then the value of salary * 12
* is 12000.00. The edited version of salary * 12 using the A edit
* code with floating currency is ’ $12,000.00 ’.
* The value of msg is ’The annual salary is $12,000.00’
CL0N01Factor1+++++++Opcode&ExtExtended-factor2+++++++++++++++++++++++++++
C EVAL msg = ’The annual salary is ’
C + %trim(%editc(salary * 12
C :’A’: *CURSYM))
* In the next example, the value of msg is ’The annual salary is &12,000.00’
C EVAL msg = ’The annual salary is ’
C :’A’: ’&’))
* In the next example, the value of msg is ’Salary is $*****12,000.00’

* Note that the ’$’ comes from the text, not from the edit code.
C EVAL msg = ’Salary is $’
C :’B’: *ASTFILL))
* In the next example, the value of msg is ’The date is 1/14/1999’

C EVAL msg = ’The date is ’
C + %trim(%editc(*date : ’Y’))
Figure 178. %EDITC Example 1
A common requirement is to edit a field as follows:

v Leading zeros are suppressed
v Parentheses are placed around the value if it is negative
The following accomplishes this using an %EDITC in a subprocedure:

D neg S 5P 2 inz(-12.3)
D pos S 5P 2 inz(54.32)
D editparens PR 50A
D val 30P 2 value
D editedVal S 10A
CL0N01Factor1+++++++Opcode&ExtExtended-factor2+++++++++++++++++++++++++++
C EVAL editedVal = editparens(neg)
* Now editedVal has the value ’(12.30) ’
C EVAL editedVal = editparens(pos)
* Now editedVal has the value ’ 54.32 ’
*---------------------------------------------------------------
* Subprocedure EDITPARENS
*---------------------------------------------------------------
P editparens B
D editparens PI 50A
D val 30P 2 value
D lparen S 1A inz(’ ’)
D rparen S 1A inz(’ ’)
D res S 50A
* Use parentheses if the value is negative
C IF val < 0
C EVAL lparen = ’(’
C EVAL rparen = ’)’
C ENDIF
* Return the edited value
* Note that the ’1’ edit code does not include a sign so we
* don’t have to calculate the absolute value.
C RETURN lparen +
C %editc(val : ’1’) +
C rparen
P editparens E
Figure 179. %EDITC Example 2

%EDITFLT (Convert to Float External Representation)
%EDITFLT (Convert to Float External Representation)

%EDITFLT(numeric expression)
%EDITFLT converts the value of the numeric expression to the character external
display representation of float. The result is either 14 or 23 characters. If the
argument is a 4-byte float field, the result is 14 characters. Otherwise, it is 23
characters.
If specified as a parameter to a definition specification keyword, the parameter

must be a numeric literal, float literal, or numeric valued constant name or built-in
function. When specified in an expression, constant folding is applied if the
numeric expression has a constant value.
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
D f8 s 8f inz (50000)
D string s 40a varying
/FREE
string = ’Float value is ’ + %editflt (f8 - 4E4) + ’.’;
// Value of "string" is ’Float value is +1.000000000000000E+004. ’
/END-FREE
Figure 180. %EDITFLT Example

%EDITW (Edit Value Using an Editword)
%EDITW (Edit Value Using an Editword)

%EDITW(numeric : editword)
This function returns a character result representing the numeric value edited
according to the edit word. The rules for the numeric value and edit word are
identical to those for editing numeric values in output specifications.
Float expressions are not allowed in the first parameter. Use %DEC to convert a
float to an editable format.
The edit word must be a character constant.
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
D amount S 30A
D salary S 9P 2
D editwd C ’$ , , **Dollars& &Cents’
* If the value of salary is 2451.53, then the edited version of

* (salary * 12) is ’$***29,418*Dollars 36 Cents’. The value of
* amount is ’The annual salary is $***29,418*Dollars 36 Cents’.
/FREE
amount = ’The annual salary is ’
+ %editw(salary * 12 : editwd);
/END-FREE
Figure 181. %EDITW Example

%ELEM (Get Number of Elements)
%ELEM (Get Number of Elements)

%ELEM(table_name)
%ELEM(array_name)
%ELEM(multiple_occurrence_data_structure_name)
%ELEM returns the number of elements in the specified array, table, or

multiple-occurrence data structure. The value returned is in unsigned integer
format (type U). It may be specified anywhere a numeric constant is allowed in the
definition specification or in an expression in the extended factor 2 field.
The parameter must be the name of an array, table, or multiple occurrence data
structure.
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
D arr1d S 20 DIM(10)
D table S 10 DIM(20) ctdata
D mds DS 20 occurs(30)
D num S 5p 0
* like_array will be defined with a dimension of 10.

* array_dims will be defined with a value of 10.
D like_array S like(arr1d) dim(%elem(arr1d))
D array_dims C const (%elem (arr1d))
/FREE
num = %elem (arr1d); // num is now 10
num = %elem (table); // num is now 20
num = %elem (mds); // num is now 30
/END-FREE
Figure 182. %ELEM Example

%EOF (Return End or Beginning of File Condition)

%EOF{(file_name)}
%EOF returns ’1’ if the most recent read operation or write to a subfile ended in an
end of file or beginning of file condition; otherwise, it returns ’0’.
The operations that set %EOF are:

v “READ (Read a Record)” on page 680
v “READC (Read Next Changed Record)” on page 683
v “READE (Read Equal Key)” on page 685
v “READP (Read Prior Record)” on page 688
v “READPE (Read Prior Equal)” on page 690
v “WRITE (Create New Records)” on page 750 (subfile only).
The following operations, if successful, set %EOF(filename) off. If the operation is

not successful, %EOF(filename) is not changed. %EOF with no parameter is not
changed by these operations.
v “CHAIN (Random Retrieval from a File)” on page 548
v “OPEN (Open File for Processing)” on page 668
v “SETGT (Set Greater Than)” on page 711
When a full-procedural file is specified, this function returns ’1’ if the previous
operation in the list above, for the specified file, resulted in an end of file or
beginning of file condition. For primary and secondary files, %EOF is available
only if the file name is specified. It is set to ’1’ if the most recent input operation
during *GETIN processing resulted in an end of file or beginning of file condition.
Otherwise, it returns ’0’.
This function is allowed for input, update, and record-address files; and for display
files allowing WRITE to subfile records.
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
F*Filename+IPEASFRlen+LKlen+AIDevice+.Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++
* File INFILE has record format INREC
FINFILE IF E DISK
/FREE
READ INREC; // read a record
IF %EOF;
// handle end of file
ENDIF;
/END-FREE
Figure 183. %EOF without a Filename Parameter

*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
* This program is comparing two files
FFILE1 IF E DISK
FFILE2 IF E DISK
* Loop until either FILE1 or FILE2 has reached end-of-file

/FREE
DOU %EOF(FILE1) OR %EOF(FILE2);
// Read a record from each file and compare the records
READ REC1;
READ REC2;
IF %EOF(FILE1) AND %EOF(FILE2);
// Both files have reached end-of-file
EXSR EndCompare;
ELSEIF %EOF(FILE1);
// FILE1 is shorter than FILE2
EXSR F1Short;
ELSEIF %EOF(FILE2);
// FILE2 is shorter than FILE1
EXSR F2Short;
ELSE;
// Both files still have records to be compared
EXSR CompareRecs;
ENDIF;
ENDDO;
// ...
/END-FREE
Figure 184. %EOF with a Filename Parameter

%EQUAL (Return Exact Match Condition)

%EQUAL{(file_name)}
%EQUAL returns ’1’ if the most recent relevant operation found an exact match;
otherwise, it returns ’0’.
The operations that set %EQUAL are:

If %EQUAL is used without the optional file_name parameter, then it returns the
value set for the most recent relevant operation.
For the SETLL operation, this function returns ’1’ if a record is present whose key
or relative record number is equal to the search argument.
For the LOOKUP operation with the EQ indicator specified, this function returns
’1’ if an element is found that exactly matches the search argument.
If a file name is specified, this function applies to the most recent SETLL operation
for the specified file. This function is allowed only for files that allow the SETLL
operation code.
For more examples, see Figure 284 on page 622 and Figure 330 on page 718.
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
* File CUSTS has record format CUSTREC
FCUSTSIF E K DISK
/FREE
// Check if the file contains a record with a key matching Cust
setll Cust CustRec;
if %equal;
// an exact match was found in the file
endif;
/END-FREE
Figure 185. %EQUAL with SETLL Example

D TabNames S 10A DIM(5) CTDATA ASCEND
D SearchName S 10A
* Position the table at or near SearchName
* Here are the results of this program for different values
* of SearchName:
* SearchName | DSPLY
* -------------+-------------------------------
* ’Catherine ’ | ’Next greater Martha’
* ’Andrea ’ | ’Exact Andrea’
* ’Thomas ’ | ’Not found Thomas’
C SearchName LOOKUP TabNames 10 10
C SELECT
C WHEN %EQUAL
* An exact match was found
C ’Exact ’DSPLY TabNames
C WHEN %FOUND
* A name was found greater than SearchName
C ’Next greater’DSPLY TabNames
C OTHER
* Not found. SearchName is greater than all the names in the table
C ’Not found ’DSPLY SearchName
C ENDSL
C RETURN
**CTDATA TabNames
Alexander
Andrea
Bohdan
Martha
Samuel
Figure 186. %EQUAL and %FOUND with LOOKUP Example

%ERROR (Return Error Condition)
%ERROR (Return Error Condition)

%ERROR returns ’1’ if the most recent operation with extender ’E’ specified
resulted in an error condition. This is the same as the error indicator being set on
for the operation. Before an operation with extender ’E’ specified begins, %ERROR
is set to return ’0’ and remains unchanged following the operation if no error
occurs. All operations that allow an error indicator can also set the %ERROR
built-in function. The CALLP operation can also set %ERROR.
For examples of the %ERROR built-in function, see Figure 212 on page 502 and
Figure 213 on page 503.

%Fields (Fields to update)
| %FIELDS (Fields to update)

| %FIELDS(name{:name...})
| A list of fields can be specified as the final argument to Input/Output operation

| UPDATE coded in a free-form group. Only the fields specified are updated into the
| Input/Output buffer.
| Notes:
| 1. Each name must be the name of a field in the input buffer for the record. If the
| field is renamed, the internal name is used.
| %FIELDS specifies a list of fields to update. For example:

|
Figure 187. Updating Fields
| /free
| chain empno record;
| salary = salary + 2000;
| status = STATEXEMPT;
| update record %fields(salary:status);
| /end-free

%FLOAT (Convert to Floating Format)
%FLOAT (Convert to Floating Format)

| %FLOAT(numeric or character expression)
| %FLOAT converts the value of the expression to float format. This built-in function
| may only be used in expressions.
| Ifthe parameter is a character expression, the following rules apply:

| v The sign is optional. It can be ’+’ or ’-’. It must precede the numeric data.
| v The exponent is optional. It can be either ’E’ or ’e’. The sign for the exponent is
| optional. It must precede the numeric part of the exponent.
| v Blanks are allowed anywhere in the data. For example, ’ + 3 , 5 E 9’ is a valid
| parameter.
| v If invalid numeric data is found, an exception occurs with status code 105.
| *..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
| D p1 s 15p 0 inz (1)
| D p2 s 25p13 inz (3)
| D c15a s 15a inz(’-5.2e-1’)
| D c15b s 15a inz(’ + 5 . 2 ’)
| D result1 s 15p 5
| D result2 s 15p 5
| D result3 s 15p 5
| D result4 s 8f
| /FREE
| result1 = p1 / p2; // "result1" is now 0.33000.
| result2 = %float (p1) / p2; // "result2" is now 0.33333.
| result3 = %float (p1 / p2); // "result3" is now 0.33333.
| result4 = %float (12345); // "result4" is now 1.2345E4
| result1 = %float (c15a); // "result1" is now -0.52000.
| result2 = %float (c15b); // "result2" is now 5.20000.
| result4 = %float (c15b); // "result4" is now 5.2E0
| /END-FREE
||
| Figure 188. %FLOAT Example

%FOUND (Return Found Condition)

%FOUND{(file_name)}
%FOUND returns ’1’ if the most recent relevant file operation found a record, a
string operation found a match, or a search operation found an element.
Otherwise, this function returns ’0’.
The operations that set %FOUND are:

v File operations:
– “CHAIN (Random Retrieval from a File)” on page 548
– “DELETE (Delete Record)” on page 570
– “SETGT (Set Greater Than)” on page 711
– “SETLL (Set Lower Limit)” on page 715
v String operations:
– “CHECK (Check Characters)” on page 551
– “CHECKR (Check Reverse)” on page 554
– “SCAN (Scan String)” on page 706
Note: Built-in function %SCAN does not change the value of %FOUND.
v Search operations:
– “LOOKUP (Look Up a Table or Array Element)” on page 620
If %FOUND is used without the optional file_name parameter, then it returns the
value set for the most recent relevant operation. When a file_name is specified,
then it applies to the most recent relevant operation on that file.
For file operations, %FOUND is opposite in function to the ″no record found NR″
indicator.
For string operations, %FOUND is the same in function as the ″found FD″
indicator.
For the LOOKUP operation, %FOUND returns ’1’ if the operation found an
element satisfying the search conditions. For an example of %FOUND with
LOOKUP, see Figure 186.
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
* File CUSTS has record format CUSTREC
FCUSTS IF E K DISK
/FREE
// Check if the customer is in the file
chain Cust CustRec;
if %found;
exsr HandleCustomer;
endif;
/END-FREE
Figure 189. %FOUND used to Test a File Operation without a Parameter

*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
* File MASTER has all the customers
* File GOLD has only the "privileged" customers
FMASTER IF E K DISK
FGOLD IF E K DISK
/FREE
// Check if the customer exists, but is not a privileged customer
chain Cust MastRec;
chain Cust GoldRec;
// Note that the file name is used for %FOUND, not the record name
if %found (Master) and not %found (Gold);
//
endif;
/END-FREE
Figure 190. %FOUND used to Test a File Operation with a Parameter
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
D Numbers C ’0123456789’
D Position S 5I 0
* If the actual position of the name is not required, just use
* %FOUND to test the results of the SCAN operation.
* If Name has the value ’Barbara’ and Line has the value
* ’in the city of Toronto. ’, then %FOUND will return ’0’.
* If Line has the value ’the city of Toronto where Barbara lives, ’
* then %FOUND will return ’1’.
C Name SCAN Line
C IF %FOUND
C EXSR PutLine
C ENDIF
* If Value contains the value ’12345.67’, Position would be set
* to 6 and %FOUND would return the value ’1’.
* If Value contains the value ’10203040’, Position would be set
* to 0 and %FOUND would return the value ’0’.
C Numbers CHECK Value Position
C IF %FOUND
C EXSR HandleNonNum
C ENDIF
Figure 191. %FOUND used to Test a String Operation

%GRAPH (Convert to Graphic Value)
%GRAPH (Convert to Graphic Value)

%GRAPH(char-expr | graph-expr | UCS-2-expr { : ccsid })
%GRAPH converts the value of the expression from character, graphic, or UCS-2
and returns a graphic value. The result is varying length if the parameter is
varying length.
The second parameter, ccsid, is optional and indicates the CCSID of the resulting
expression. The CCSID defaults to the graphic CCSID related to the CCSID of the
job. If CCSID(*GRAPH : *IGNORE) is specified on the control specification or
assumed for the module, the %GRAPH built-in is not allowed.
If the parameter is a constant, the conversion will be done at compile time. In this
case, the CCSID is the graphic CCSID related to the CCSID of the source file.
If the conversion results in substitution characters, a warning message is issued at

compile time. At run time, status 00050 is set and no error message is issued.
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
H*Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
H ccsid (*graph: 300)
D*Name++++++++++ETDsFrom+++To/L+++IDc.Keywords++++++++++++++++++++++++
D char S 5A inz(’abcde’)
* The %GRAPH built-in function is used to initialize a graphic field
D graph S 10G inz (%graph (’oAABBCCDDEEi’))
D ufield S 2C inz (%ucs2 (’oFFGGi’))
D graph2 S 2G ccsid (4396) inz (*hival)
D isEqual S 1N
D proc PR
D gparm 2G ccsid (4396) value
/FREE
graph = %graph (char) + %graph (ufield);
// graph now has 7 graphic characters AABBCCDDEEFFGG.
isEqual = graph = %graph (graph2 : 300);

// The result of the %GRAPH built-in function is the value of
// graph2, converted from CCSID 4396 to CCSID 300.
graph2 = graph;
// The value of graph is converted from CCSID 300 to CCSID 4396
// and stored in graph2.
// This conversion is performed implicitly by the compiler.
proc (graph);
// The value of graph is converted from CCSID 300 to CCSID 4396
// implicitly, as part of passing the parameter by value.
/END-FREE
Figure 192. %GRAPH Examples

%HOURS (Number of Hours)
%HOURS (Number of Hours)

%HOURS(number)
%HOURS converts a number into a duration that can be added to a time or

timestamp value.
%HOURS can only be the right-hand value in an addition or subtraction operation.

The left-hand value must be a time or timestamp. The result is a time or
timestamp value with the appropriate number of hours added or subtracted. For a
time, the resulting value is in *ISO format.

%INT (Convert to Integer Format)
%INT (Convert to Integer Format)

| %INT(numeric or character expression)
| %INT converts the value of the expression to integer. Any decimal digits are
| truncated. This built-in function may only be used in expressions. %INT can be
| used to truncate the decimal positions from a float or decimal value allowing it to
| be used as an array index.

| v The sign is optional. It can be ’+’ or ’-’. It can precede or follow the numeric
| data.
| parameter.
| v Floating point data is not allowed. That is, where the numeric value is followed
| by E and an exponent, for example ’1.2E6’.
| v If invalid numeric data is found, an exception occurs with status code 105
Figure 193 shows an example of the %INT built-in function.
%INTH (Convert to Integer Format with Half Adjust)

| %INTH(numeric or character expression)
| %INTH is the same as %INT except that if the expression is a decimal, float or
| character value, half adjust is applied to the value of the expression when
| converting to integer type. No message is issued if half adjust cannot be
performed.
| *..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
| D p7 s 7p 3 inz (1234.567)
| D s9 s 9s 5 inz (73.73442)
| D f8 s 8f inz (123.789)
| D c15a s 15a inz (’ 12345.6789 -’)
| D c15b s 15a inz (’ + 9 8 7 . 6 5 4 ’)
| D result1 s 15p 5
| D result2 s 15p 5
| D result3 s 15p 5
| D array s 1a dim (200)
| D a s 1a
|
| /FREE
| result1 = %int (p7) + 0.011; // "result1" is now 1234.01100.
| result2 = %int (s9); // "result2" is now 73.00000
| result3 = %inth (f8); // "result3" is now 124.00000.
| result1 = %int (c15a); // "result1" is now -12345.00000
| result2 = %inth (c15b); // "result2" is now 988.00000
|
| // %INT and %INTH can be used as array indexes
| a = array (%inth (f8));
| /END-FREE
||
| Figure 193. %INT and %INTH Example

%KDS (Search Arguments in Data Structure)
| %KDS (Search Arguments in Data Structure)

| %KDS(data-structure-name{:num-keys})
| %KDS is allowed as the search argument for any keyed Input/Output operation
| (CHAIN, DELETE, READE, READPE, SETGT, SETLL) coded in a free-form group.
| The search argument is specified by the subfields of the data structure name coded
| as the first argument of the built-in function. The key data structure may be (but is
| not limited to), an externally described data structure with keyword
| EXTNAME(...:*KEY) or LIKEREC(...:*KEY)..
| Notes:
| 1. The first argument must be the name of a data structure. This includes any
| subfield defined with keyword LIKEDS or LIKEREC.
| 2. The second argument specifies how many of the subfields to use as the search
| argument.
| 3. The individual key values in the compound key are taken from the top level
| subfields of the data structure. Subfields defined with LIKEDS are considered
| character data.
| 4. Subfields used to form the compound key must not be arrays.
| 5. The types of all subfields (up to the number specified by ″num-keys″) must
| match the types of the actual keys. Where lengths and formats differ, the value
| is converted to the proper length and format.
| 6. If the data structure is defined as an array data structure (using keyword DIM),
| an index must be supplied for the data structure.
| 7. Opcode extenders H, M, or R specified on the keyed Input/Output operations
| code affect the moving of the search argument to the corresponding position in
| the key build area.
| Example:
|
A..........T.Name++++++RLen++TDpB......Functions++++++++++++++++++
A R CUSTR
A NAME 100A
A ZIP 10A
A ADDR 100A
A K NAME
A K ZIP
FFilename++IPEASF.....L.....A.Device+.Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++
Fcustfile if e k disk rename(CUSTR:custRec)
DName+++++++++++ETDsFrom+++To/L+++IDc.Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++
D custRecKeys ds likerec(custRec : *key)
...
/free
// custRecKeys is a qualified data structure
custRecKeys.name = customer;
custRecKeys.zip = zipcode;
// the *KEY data structure is used as the search argument for CHAIN
chain %kds(custRecKeys) custRec;
/end-free
Figure 194. Example of Search on Keyed Input/Output Operations

%LEN (Get or Set Length)
%LEN (Get or Set Length)

%LEN(expression)
%LEN can be used to get the length of a variable expression or to set the current
length of a variable-length field.
The parameter must not be a figurative constant.
%LEN Used for its Value

When used on the right-hand side of an expression, this function returns the
number of digits or characters of the variable expression.
For numeric expressions, the value returned represents the precision of the
expression and not necessarily the actual number of significant digits. For a float
variable or expression, the value returned is either 4 or 8. When the parameter is a
numeric literal, the length returned is the number of digits of the literal.
For character, graphic, or UCS-2 expressions the value returned is the number of
characters in the value of the expression. For variable-length values, such as the
value returned from a built-in function or a variable-length field, the value
returned by %LEN is the current length of the character, graphic, or UCS-2 value.
Note that if the parameter is a built-in function or expression that has a value
computable at compile-time, the length returned is the actual number of digits of
the constant value rather than the maximum possible value that could be returned
by the expression.
For all other data types, the value returned is the number of bytes of the value.

%LEN Used to Set the Length of Variable-Length Fields
| *..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
| D num1 S 7P 2
| D NUM1_LEN C %len(num1)
| D NUM1_DECPOS C %decpos(num1)
| D num2 S 5S 1
| D num3 S 5I 0 inz(2)
| D chr1 S 10A inz(’Toronto ’)
| D chr2 S 10A inz(’Munich ’)
| D ptr S *
|
| * Numeric expressions:
| /FREE
| num1 = %len(num1); // 7
| num1 = %decpos(num2); // 1
| num1 = %len(num1*num2); // 12
| num1 = %decpos(num1*num2); // 3
| // Character expressions:
| num1 = %len(chr1); // 10
| num1 = %len(chr1+chr2); // 20
| num1 = %len(%trim(chr1)); // 7
| num1 = %len(%subst(chr1:1:num3) + ’ ’ + %trim(chr2));// 9
| // %len and %decpos can be useful with other built-in functions:
| // Although this division is performed in float, the result is
| // converted to the same precision as the result of the eval:
| // Note: %LEN and %DECPOS cannot be used directly with %DEC
| // and %DECH, but they can be used as named constants
| num1 = 27 + %dec (%float(num1)/num3 : NUM1_LEN : NUM1_DECPOS);
| // Allocate sufficient space to hold the result of the catenation
| // (plus an extra byte for a trailing null character):
| num3 = %len (chr1 + chr2) + 1;
| ptr = %alloc (num3);
| %str (ptr: num3) = chr1 + chr2;
| /END-FREE
||
| Figure 195. %DECPOS and %LEN Example

When used on the left-hand side of an expression, this function sets the current
length of a variable-length field. If the set length is greater than the current length,
the characters in the field between the old length and the new length are set to
blanks.
Note: %LEN can only be used on the left-hand-side of an expression when the
parameter is variable length.

*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
D city S 40A varying inz(’North York’)
D n1 S 5i 0
* %LEN used to get the current length of a variable-length field:

/FREE
n1 = %len(city);
// Current length, n1 = 10
// %LEN used to set the current length of a variable-length field:

%len (city) = 5;
// city = ’North’ (length is 5)
%len (city) = 15;

// city = ’North ’ (length is 15)
/END-FREE
Figure 196. %LEN with Variable-Length Field Example

%LOOKUPxx (Look Up an Array Element)

%LOOKUP(arg : array {: startindex {: numelems}})
%LOOKUPLT(arg : array {: startindex {: numelems}})
%LOOKUPGE(arg : array {: startindex {: numelems}})
%LOOKUPGT(arg : array {: startindex {: numelems}})
%LOOKUPLE(arg : array {: startindex {: numelems}})
The following functions return the array index of the item in array that matches arg
as follows:
%LOOKUP An exact match.
%LOOKUPLT The value that is closest to arg but less than arg.
%LOOKUPLE An exact match, or the value that is closest to arg but less than arg.
%LOOKUPGT
The value that is closest to arg but greater than arg.
%LOOKUPGE
An exact match, or the value that is closest to arg but greater than
arg.
If no value matches the specified condition, zero is returned.
The search starts at index startindex and continues for numelems elements. By
default, the entire array is searched.
The first two parameters can have any type but must have the same type. They do
not need to have the same length or number of decimal positions. The third and
fourth parameters must be non-float numeric values with zero decimal positions.
For %LOOKUPLT, %LOOKUPLE, %LOOKUPGT, and %LOOKUPGE, the array

must be defined with keyword ASCEND or DESCEND. The ALTSEQ table is used,
unless arg or array is defined with ALTSEQ(*NONE).
Built-in functions %FOUND and %EQUAL are not set following a %LOOKUP
operation.
Note: Unlike the LOOKUP operation code, %LOOKUP applies only to arrays. To
look up a value in a table, use the %TLOOKUP built-in function.

*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
/FREE
arr(1) = ’Cornwall’;
arr(2) = ’Kingston’;
arr(3) = ’London’;
arr(4) = ’Paris’;
arr(5) = ’Scarborough’;
arr(6) = ’York’;
n = %LOOKUP(’Paris’:arr);
// n = 4
n = %LOOKUP(’Thunder Bay’:arr);
// n = 0 (not found)
n = %LOOKUP(’Kingston’:arr:3);
// n = 0 (not found after start index)
n = %LOOKUPLE(’Paris’:arr);
// n = 4
n = %LOOKUPLE(’Milton’:arr);
// n = 3
n = %LOOKGT(’Sudbury’:arr);
// n = 6
n = %LOOKGT(’Yorks’:arr:2:4);
// n = 0 (not found between elements 2 and 5)
/END-FREE
Figure 197. %LOOKUPxx Example

%MINUTES (Number of Minutes)
%MINUTES (Number of Minutes)

%MINUTES(number)
%MINUTES converts a number into a duration that can be added to a time or

timestamp value.
%MINUTES can only be the right-hand value in an addition or subtraction

operation. The left-hand value must be a time or timestamp. The result is a time or
timestamp value with the appropriate number of minutes added or subtracted. For
a time, the resulting value is in *ISO format.

%MONTHS (Number of Months)
%MONTHS (Number of Months)

%MONTHS(number)
%MONTHS converts a number into a duration that can be added to a date or

timestamp value.
%MONTHS can only be the right-hand value in an addition or subtraction

operation. The left-hand value must be a date or timestamp. The result is a date or
timestamp value with the appropriate number of months added or subtracted. For
a date, the resulting value is in *ISO format.
In most cases, the result of adding or subtracting a given number of months is

obvious. For example, 2000-03-15 + %MONTHS(1) is 2000-04-15. If the addition or
subtraction would produce a nonexistent date (for example, February 30), the last
day of the month is used instead.
Adding or subtracting a number of months to the 29th, 30th, or 31st day of a

month may not be reversible. For example, 2000-03-31 + %MONTHS(1) -
%MONTHS(1) is 2000-03-30.
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
/FREE
// Determine the date in 3 years

newdate = date + %YEARS(3);
// Determine the date in 6 months prior

loandate = duedate - %MONTHS(6);
// Construct a timestamp from a date and time

duestamp = duedate + t’12.00.00’;
/END-FREE
Figure 198. %MONTHS and %YEARS Example

%MSECONDS (Number of Microseconds)
%MSECONDS (Number of Microseconds)

%MSECONDS(number)
%MSECONDS converts a number into a duration that can be added to a time or

timestamp value.
%MSECONDS can only be the right-hand value in an addition or subtraction

timestamp value with the appropriate number of microseconds added or
subtracted. For a time, the resulting value is in *ISO format.

%NULLIND (Query or Set Null Indicator)
%NULLIND (Query or Set Null Indicator)

%NULLIND(fieldname)
The %NULLIND built-in function can be used to query or set the null indicator for
null-capable fields. This built-in function can only be used if the
ALWNULL(*USRCTL) keyword is specified on a control specification or as a
command parameter. The fieldname can be a null-capable array element, data
structure, stand-alone field, subfield, or multiple occurrence data structure.
%NULLIND can only be used in expressions in extended factor 2.
When used on the right-hand side of an expression, this function returns the
setting of the null indicator for the null-capable field. The setting can be *ON or
*OFF.
When used on the left-hand side of an expression, this function can be used to set
the null indicator for null-capable fields to *ON or *OFF. The content of a
null-capable field remains unchanged.
See “Database Null Value Support” on page 206 for more information on handling
records with null-capable fields and keys.
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
* Test the null indicator for a null-capable field.
/FREE
if %nullind (fieldname1);
// field is null
endif;
// Set the null indicator for a null-capable field.

%nullind(fieldname1) = *ON;
%nullind (fieldname2) = *OFF;
/END-FREE
Figure 199. %NULLIND Example

%OCCUR (Set/Get Occurrence of a Data Structure)
%OCCUR (Set/Get Occurrence of a Data Structure)

%OCCUR(dsn-name)
%OCCUR gets or sets the current position of a multiple-occurrence data structure.
When this function is evaluated for its value, it returns the current occurrence
number of the specified data structure. This is an unsigned numeric value.
When this function is specified on the left-hand side of an EVAL statement, the
specified number becomes the current occurrence number. This must be a non-float
numeric value with zero decimal places. Exception 00122 is issued if the value is
less than 1 or greater than the total number of occurrences.
For more information about multiple-occurrence data structures and the OCCUR
operation code, see “OCCUR (Set/Get Occurrence of a Data Structure)” on
page 663.
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
D mds DS OCCURS(10)
/FREE
n = %OCCUR(mds);
// n = 1
%OCCUR(mds) = 7;
n = %OCCUR(mds);
// n = 7
/END-FREE
Figure 200. %OCCUR Example

%OPEN (Return File Open Condition)
%OPEN (Return File Open Condition)

%OPEN(file_name)
%OPEN returns ’1’ if the specified file is open. A file is considered ″open″ if it has
been opened by the RPG program during initialization or by an OPEN operation,
and has not subsequently been closed. If the file is conditioned by an external
indicator and the external indicator was off at program initialization, the file is
considered closed, and %OPEN returns ’0’.
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
* The printer file is opened in the calculation specifications
FQSYSPRT O F 132 PRINTER USROPN
/FREE
// Open the file if it is not already open
if not %open (QSYSPRT);
open QSYSPRT;
endif;
/END-FREE
Figure 201. %OPEN Example

%PADDR (Get Procedure Address)
%PADDR (Get Procedure Address)

%PADDR(string|prototype)
%PADDR returns a value of type procedure pointer. The value is the address of the
entry point identified by the argument.
%PADDR may be compared with and assigned to only items of type procedure
pointer.
The parameter to %PADDR must be a character constant or a prototype name.
The character constant can be a character or hexadecimal literal or constant name

that represents a character or hexadecimal literal. When a character constant is
used, this identifies the entry point by name.
The prototype must a prototype for a bound call. The EXTPGM keyword cannot be
used. The entry point identified by the prototype is the procedure identified in the
EXTPROC keyword for the prototype. If the EXTPROC keyword is not specified,
the entry point is the the same as the prototype name (in upper case).
D
D PROC S * PROCPTR
D INZ (%PADDR (’FIRSTPROG’))
D PROC1 S * PROCPTR
*
* The following statement calls procedure ’FIRSTPROG’.
*
C CALLB PROC
*-----------------------------------------------------------------
* The following statements call procedure ’NextProg’.
* This a C procedure and is in mixed case. Note that
* the procedure name is case sensitive.
*
C EVAL PROC1 = %PADDR (’NextProg’)
C CALLB PROC1
Figure 202. %PADDR Example with an Entry Point
%PADDR Used with a Prototype

The argument of %PADDR can be a prototype name, with the following
restrictions:
v It must not be a prototype for a Java method.
v It must not have the EXTPGM keyword.
v If its EXTPROC keyword has a procedure pointer for an argument, %PADDR
cannot be used in definition specifications.

%PADDR Used with a Prototype
*----------------------------------------------------------------
* Several prototypes
*----------------------------------------------------------------
D proc1 PR
D proto2 PR EXTPROC(’proc2’)
D proc3 PR EXTPROC(procptr3)
D pgm1 PR EXTPGM(’PGM3’)
D meth PR EXTPROC(*JAVA : ’myClass’
D : ’meth1’)
D procptr3 S *
*----------------------------------------------------------------
* Valid examples of %PADDR with prototype names as the argument
*----------------------------------------------------------------
* constant1 is the same as %PADDR(’PROC1’) since ’PROC1’ is the

* procedure called by the prototype proc1
D constant1 C %PADDR(proc1)
* constant2 is the same as %PADDR(’proc2’) since ’proc2’ is the

* procedure called by the prototype proto2
D constant2 C %PADDR(proto2)
* %paddr(proc3) is the same as procedure pointer procptr3 since

* procptr3 points to the procedure called by prototype proc3
C eval procptr = %paddr(proc3)
*----------------------------------------------------------------
* Examples of %PADDR with prototype names as the argument
* that are not valid
*----------------------------------------------------------------
* %PADDR(pgm1) is not valid because it is a prototype for a program
* %PADDR(meth) is not valid because it is a prototype for a Java method
Figure 203. %PADDR Example with a Prototype

%PARMS (Return Number of Parameters)

%PARMS returns the number of parameters that were passed to the procedure in
which %PARMS is used. For the main procedure, %PARMS is the same as
*PARMS.
The value returned by %PARMS is not available if the program or procedure that
calls %PARMS does not pass a minimal operational descriptor. The ILE RPG
compiler always passes one, but other languages do not. So if the caller is written
in another ILE language, it will need to pass an operational descriptor on the call.
If the operational descriptor is not passed, the value returned by %PARMS cannot
be trusted.
* Prototype for procedure MaxInt which calculates the maximum
* value of its parameters (at least 2 parameters must be passed)
D MaxInt PR 10I 0
D p1 10I 0 VALUE
D p2 10I 0 VALUE
D p3 10I 0 VALUE OPTIONS(*NOPASS)
D Fld1 S 10A DIM(40)
D Fld2 S 20A
D Fld3 S 100A
C *ENTRY PLIST
C PARM MaxSize 10 0
* Make sure the main procedure was passed a parameter
C IF %PARMS < 1
C ’No parms’ DSPLY
C RETURN
C ENDIF
* Determine the maximum size of Fld1, Fld2 and Fld3
C EVAL MaxSize = MaxInt(%size(Fld1:*ALL) :
C %size(Fld2) :
C %size(Fld3))
C ’MaxSize is’ DSPLY MaxSize
C RETURN
Figure 204. %PARMS Example (Part 1 of 2)

*----------------------------------------------------------------
* MaxInt - return the maximum value of the passed parameters
*----------------------------------------------------------------
P MaxInt B
D MaxInt PI 10I 0
D p1 10I 0 VALUE
D p2 10I 0 VALUE
D Max S 10I 0 INZ(*LOVAL)
* Branch to the point in the calculations where we will never
* access unpassed parameters.
C SELECT
C WHEN %PARMS = 2
C GOTO PARMS2
C WHEN %PARMS = 3
C GOTO PARMS3
C WHEN %PARMS = 4
C GOTO PARMS4
C WHEN %PARMS = 5
C GOTO PARMS5
C ENDSL
* Determine the maximum value. Max was initialized to *LOVAL.
C PARMS5 TAG
C IF p5 > Max
C EVAL Max = p5
C ENDIF
*
C PARMS4 TAG
C IF p4 > Max
C EVAL Max = p4
C ENDIF
*
C PARMS3 TAG
C IF p3 > Max
C EVAL Max = p3
C ENDIF
*
C PARMS2 TAG
C IF p2 > Max
C EVAL Max = p2
C ENDIF
C IF p1 > Max
C EVAL Max = p1
C ENDIF
C RETURN Max
P MaxInt E
Figure 204. %PARMS Example (Part 2 of 2)

%REALLOC (Reallocate Storage)
%REALLOC (Reallocate Storage)

%REALLOC(ptr:num)
%REALLOC changes the heap storage pointed to by the first parameter to be the
length specified in the second parameter. The newly allocated storage is
uninitialized.
The first parameter must be a basing pointer value. The second parameter must be
a non-float numeric value with zero decimal places. The length specified must be
between 1 and 16776704.
The function returns a pointer to the allocated storage. This may be the same as ptr
or different.
If the operation cannot complete successfully, exception 00425 or 00426 is issued.
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
/FREE
// Allocate an area of 200 bytes
pointer = %ALLOC(200);
// Change the size of the area to 500 bytes
pointer = %REALLOC(pointer:500);
/END-FREE
Figure 205. %REALLOC Example

%REM (Return Integer Remainder)
%REM (Return Integer Remainder)

%REM(n:m)
%REM returns the remainder that results from dividing operands n by m. The two
operands must be numeric values with zero decimal positions. If either operand is
a packed, zoned, or binary numeric value, the result is packed numeric. If either
operand is an integer numeric value, the result is integer. Otherwise, the result is
unsigned numeric. Float numeric operands are not allowed. The result has the
same sign as the dividend. (See also “%DIV (Return Integer Portion of Quotient)”
on page 456.)
%REM and %DIV have the following relationship:

%REM(A:B) = A - (%DIV(A:B) * B)
If the operands are constants that can fit in 8-byte integer or unsigned fields,
constant folding is applied to the built-in function. In this case, the %REM built-in
function can be coded in the definition specifications.
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
D A S 10I 0 INZ(123)
D B S 10I 0 INZ(27)
D DIV S 10I 0
D REM S 10I 0
D E S 10I 0
/FREE
DIV = %DIV(A:B); // DIV is now 4
REM = %REM(A:B); // REM is now 15
E = DIV*B + REM; // E is now 123
/END-FREE
Figure 206. %DIV and %REM Example

%REPLACE (Replace Character String)

%REPLACE(replacement string: source string{:start position {:source
length to replace}})
%REPLACE returns the character string produced by inserting a replacement string

into the source string, starting at the start position and replacing the specified
number of characters.
The first and second parameter must be of type character, graphic, or UCS-2 and
can be in either fixed- or variable-length format. The second parameter must be the
same type as the first.
The third parameter represents the starting position, measured in characters, for
the replacement string. If it is not specified, the starting position is at the beginning
of the source string. The value may range from one to the current length of the
source string plus one.
The fourth parameter represents the number of characters in the source string to be
replaced. If zero is specified, then the replacement string is inserted before the
specified starting position. If the parameter is not specified, the number of
characters replaced is the same as the length of the replacement string. The value
must be greater than or equal to zero, and less than or equal to the current length
of the source string.
The starting position and length may be any numeric value or numeric expression
with no decimal positions.
The returned value is varying length if the source string or replacement string are
varying length, or if the start position or source length to replace are variables.
Otherwise, the result is fixed length.

*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
D var1 S 30A INZ(’Windsor’) VARYING
D var2 S 30A INZ(’Ontario’) VARYING
D var3 S 30A INZ(’Canada’) VARYING
D fixed1 S 15A INZ(’California’)
D date S D INZ(D’1997-02-03’)
D result S 100A VARYING
/FREE
result = var1 + ’, ’ + ’ON’;
// result = ’Windsor, ON’
// %REPLACE with 2 parameters to replace text at begining of string:

result = %replace (’Toronto’: result);
// result = ’Toronto, ON’
// %REPLACE with 3 parameters to replace text at specified position:

result = %replace (var3: result: %scan(’,’: result) + 2);
// result = ’Toronto, Canada’
// %REPLACE with 4 parameters to insert text:

result = %replace (’, ’ + var2: result: %scan (’,’: result): 0);
// result = ’Toronto, Ontario, Canada’
// %REPLACE with 4 parameters to replace strings with different length

result = %replace (’Scarborough’: result:
1: %scan (’,’: result) - 1);
// result = ’Scarborough, Ontario, Canada’
// %REPLACE with 4 parameters to delete text:

result = %replace (’’: result: 1: %scan (’,’: result) + 1);
// result = ’Ontario, Canada’
// %REPLACE with 4 parameters to add text to the end of the string:

result = %replace (’, ’ + %char(date): result:
%len (result) + 1: 0);
// result = ’Ontario, Canada, 1997-02-03’
// %REPLACE with 3 parameters to replace fixed-length text at

// specified position: (fixed1 has fixed-length of 15 chars)
result = %replace (fixed1: result: %scan (’,’: result) + 2);
// result = ’Ontario, California -03’
// %REPLACE with 4 parameters to prefix text at beginning:

result = %replace (’Somewhere else: ’: result: 1: 0);
// result = ’Somewhere else: Ontario, California -03’
/END-FREE
Figure 207. %REPLACE Example

%SCAN (Scan for Characters)
%SCAN (Scan for Characters)

%SCAN(search argument : source string {: start})
%SCAN returns the first position of the search argument in the source string, or 0
if it was not found. If the start position is specified, the search begins at the
starting position. The result is always the position in the source string even if the
starting position is specified. The starting position defaults to 1.
The first parameter must be of type character, graphic, or UCS-2. The second
parameter must be the same type as the first parameter. The third parameter, if
specified, must be numeric with zero decimal positions.
When any parameter is variable in length, the values of the other parameters are
checked against the current length, not the maximum length.
The type of the return value is unsigned integer. This built-in function can be used
anywhere that an unsigned integer expression is valid.
Note: Unlike the SCAN operation code, %SCAN cannot return an array containing
all occurrences of the search string and its results cannot be tested using the
%FOUND built-in function.
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
D source S 15A inz (’Dr. Doolittle’)
D pos S 5U 0
/FREE
pos = %scan (’oo’ : source);
// After the EVAL, pos = 6 because ’oo’ begins at position 6 in
// ’Dr. Doolittle’.
pos = %scan (’D’ : source : 2);

// After the EVAL, pos = 5 because the first ’D’ found starting from
// position 2 is in position 5.
pos = %scan (’abc’ : source);

// After the EVAL, pos = 0 because ’abc’ is not found in
// ’Dr. Doolittle’.
pos = %scan (’Dr.’ : source : 2);

// After the EVAL, pos = 0 because ’Dr.’ is not found in
// ’Dr. Doolittle’, if the search starts at position 2.
/END-FREE
Figure 208. %SCAN Example

%SECONDS (Number of Seconds)
%SECONDS (Number of Seconds)

%SECONDS(number)
%SECONDS converts a number into a duration that can be added to a time or

timestamp value.
%SECONDS can only be the right-hand value in an addition or subtraction

timestamp value with the appropriate number of seconds added or subtracted. For
a time, the resulting value is in *ISO format.

%SHTDN (Shut Down)
%SHTDN (Shut Down)

%SHTDN
%SHTDN returns ’1’ if the system operator has requested shutdown; otherwise, it
returns ’0’. See “SHTDN (Shut Down)” on page 721 for more information.
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
/FREE
// If the operator has requested shutdown, quit the
// program.
IF %SHTDN;
QuitProgram();
ENDIF;
/END-FREE
Figure 209. %SHTDN Example

%SIZE (Get Size in Bytes)

%SIZE(variable)
%SIZE(literal)
%SIZE(array{:*ALL})
%SIZE(table{:*ALL})
%SIZE(multiple occurrence data structure{:*ALL})
%SIZE returns the number of bytes occupied by the constant or field. The
argument may be a literal, a named constant, a data structure, a data structure
subfield, a field, an array or a table name. It cannot contain an expression, but
some constant-valued built-in functions and constant expressions may be accepted.
The value returned is in unsigned integer format (type U).
For a graphic literal, the size is the number of bytes occupied by the graphic
characters, not including leading and trailing shift characters. For a hexadecimal or
UCS-2 literal, the size returned is half the number of hexadecimal digits in the
literal.
For variable-length fields, %SIZE returns the total number of bytes occupied by the
field (two bytes longer than the declared maximum length).
The length returned for a null-capable field (%SIZE) is always its full length,
regardless of the setting of its null indicator.
If the argument is an array name, table name, or multiple occurrence data structure
name, the value returned is the size of one element or occurrence. If *ALL is
specified as the second parameter for %SIZE, the value returned is the storage
taken up by all elements or occurrences. For a multiple-occurrence data structure
containing pointer subfields, the size may be greater than the size of one
occurrence times the number of occurrences. The system requires that pointers be
placed in storage at addresses evenly divisible by 16. As a result, the length of each
occurrence may have to be increased enough to make the length an exact multiple
of 16 so that the pointer subfields will be positioned correctly in storage for every
occurrence.
%SIZE may be specified anywhere that a numeric constant is allowed on the

definition specification and in an expression in the extended factor 2 field of the
calculation specification.

*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
D arr1 S 10 DIM(4)
D table1 S 5 DIM(20)
D field1 S 10
D field2 S 9B 0
D field3 S 5P 2
D num S 5P 0
D mds DS 20 occurs(10)
D mds_size C const (%size (mds: *all))
D mds_ptr DS 20 OCCURS(10)
D pointer *
D vCity S 40A VARYING INZ(’North York’)
D fCity S 40A INZ(’North York’)
/FREE
num = %SIZE(field1); // 10
num = %SIZE(’HH’); // 2
num = %SIZE(123.4); // 4
num = %SIZE(-03.00); // 4
num = %SIZE(arr1); // 10
num = %SIZE(arr1:*ALL); // 40
num = %SIZE(table1); // 5
num = %SIZE(table1:*ALL); // 100
num = %SIZE(mds); // 20
num = %SIZE(mds:*ALL); // 200
num = %SIZE(mds_ptr); // 20
num = %SIZE(mds_ptr:*ALL); // 320
n1 = %SIZE(vCity); // 42
n2 = %SIZE(fCity); // 40
/END-FREE
Figure 210. %SIZE Example

%SQRT (Square Root of Expression)
%SQRT (Square Root of Expression)

%SQRT(numeric expression)
%SQRT returns the square root of the specified numeric expression. If the operand
is of type float, the result is of type float; otherwise, the result is packed decimal
numeric. If the parameter has a value less than zero, exception 00101 is issued.
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
D n S 10I 0
D p S 9P 2
D f S 4F
/FREE
n = %SQRT(239874);
// n = 489
p = %SQRT(239874);
// p = 489.76
f = %SQRT(239874);
// f = 489.7693
/END-FREE
Figure 211. %SQRT Example

%STATUS (Return File or Program Status)

%STATUS{(file_name)}
%STATUS returns the most recent value set for the program or file status.
%STATUS is set whenever the program status or any file status changes, usually
when an error occurs.
If %STATUS is used without the optional file_name parameter, then it returns the
program or file status most recently changed. If a file is specified, the value
contained in the INFDS *STATUS field for the specified file is returned. The INFDS
does not have to be specified for the file.
%STATUS starts with a return value of 00000 and is reset to 00000 before any
operation with an ’E’ extender specified begins.
%STATUS is best checked immediately after an operation with the ’E’ extender or
an error indicator specified, or at the beginning of an INFSR or the *PSSR
subroutine.

*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
* The ’E’ extender indicates that if an error occurs, the error
* is to be handled as though an error indicator were coded.
* The success of the operation can then be checked using the
* %ERROR built-in function. The status associated with the error
* can be checked using the %STATUS built-in function.
/FREE
exfmt(e) InFile;
if %error;
exsr CheckError;
endif;
//-------------------------------------------------------------------
// CheckError: Subroutine to process a file I/O error
//-------------------------------------------------------------------
begsr CheckError;
select;
when %status < 01000;
// No error occurred
when %status = 01211;
// Attempted to read a file that was not open
exsr InternalError;

// The wait time was exceeded for a READ operation
exsr TimeOut;

// Operation to unacquired device
exsr DeviceError;

// Permanent I/O error
exsr PermError;
other;
// Some other error occurred
exsr FileError;
endsl;
endsr;
/END-FREE
Figure 212. %STATUS and %ERROR with ’E’ Extender

D Zero S 5P 0 INZ(0)
* %STATUS starts with a value of 0
*
* The following SCAN operation will cause a branch to the *PSSR
* because the start position has a value of 0.
C ’A’ SCAN ’ABC’:Zero Pos
C BAD_SCAN TAG
* The following EXFMT operation has an ’E’ extender, so %STATUS will
* be set to 0 before the operation begins. Therefore, it is
* valid to check %STATUS after the operation.
* Since the ’E’ extender was coded, %ERROR can also be used to
* check if an error occurred.
C EXFMT(E) REC1
C IF %ERROR
C SELECT
C WHEN %STATUS = 01255
C ...
C WHEN %STATUS = 01299
C ...
* The following scan operation has an error indicator. %STATUS will
* not be set to 0 before the operation begins, but %STATUS can be
* reasonably checked if the error indicator is on.
C ’A’ SCAN ’ABC’:Zero Pos 10
C IF *IN10 AND %STATUS = 00100
C ...
* The following scan operation does not produce an error.

* Since there is no ’E’ extender %STATUS will not be set to 0,
* so it would return a value of 00100 from the previous error.
* Therefore, it is unwise to use %STATUS after an operation that
* does not have an error indicator or the ’E’ extender coded since
* you cannot be sure that the value pertains to the previous
* operation.
C ’A’ SCAN ’ABC’ Pos
C ...
C *PSSR BEGSR
* %STATUS can be used in the *PSSR since an error must have occurred.
C IF %STATUS = 00100
C GOTO BAD_SCAN
C ...
Figure 213. %STATUS and %ERROR with ’E’ Extender, Error Indicator and *PSSR

%STR (Get or Store Null-Terminated String)
%STR (Get or Store Null-Terminated String)

%STR(basing pointer{: max-length})(right-hand-side)
%STR(basing pointer : max-length)(left-hand-side)
%STR is used to create or use null-terminated character strings, which are very
commonly used in C and C++ applications.
The first parameter must be a basing-pointer variable. The second parameter, if

specified, must be a numeric value with zero decimal positions. If not specified, it
defaults to 65535.
The first parameter must point to storage that is at least as long as the length given
by the second parameter.
Error conditions:
1. If the length parameter is not between 1 and 65535, an error will occur.
2. If the pointer is not set, an error will occur.
3. If the storage addressed by the pointer is shorter than indicated by the length
parameter, either
a. An error will occur
b. Data corruption will occur.
%STR Used to Get Null-Terminated String

When used on the right-hand side of an expression, this function returns the data
pointed to by the first parameter up to but not including the first null character
(x’00’) found within the length specified. This built-in function can be used
anywhere that a character expression is valid. No error will be given at run time if
the null terminator is not found within the length specified. In this case, the length
of the resulting value is the same as the length specified.
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
D String1 S *
D Fld1 S 10A
/FREE
Fld1 = ’<’ + %str(String1) + ’>’;
// Assuming that String1 points to ’123¬’ where ’¬’ represents the
// null character, after the EVAL, Fld1 = ’<123> ’.
/END-FREE
Figure 214. %STR (right-hand-side) Example 1
The following is an example of %STR with the second parameter specified.

%STR Used to Get Null-Terminated String
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
D String1 S *
D Fld1 S 10A
/FREE
Fld1 = ’<’ + %str(String1 : 2) + ’>’;
// Since the maximum length read by the operation was 2, the ’3’ and
// the ’¬’ were not considered.
/END-FREE
In this example, the null-terminator is found within the specified maximum length.
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
D String1 S *
D Fld1 S 10A
/FREE
Fld1 = ’<’ + %str(String1 : 5) + ’>’;
// Since the maximum length read by the operation was 5, the
// null-terminator in position 4 was found so all the data up to
// the null-terminator was used.
/END-FREE
%STR Used to Store Null-Terminated String

When used on the left-hand side of an expression, %STR(ptr:length) assigns the
value of the right-hand side of the expression to the storage pointed at by the
pointer, adding a null-terminating byte at the end. The maximum length that can
be specified is 65535. This means that at most 65534 bytes of the right-hand side
can be used, since 1 byte must be reserved for the null-terminator at the end.
The length indicates the amount of storage that the pointer points to. This length
should be greater than the maximum length the right-hand side will have. The
pointer must be set to point to storage at least as long as the length parameter. If
the length of the right-hand side of the expression is longer than the specified
length, the right-hand side value is truncated.
Note: Data corruption will occur if both of the following are true:
1. The length parameter is greater than the actual length of data addressed
by the pointer.
2. The length of the right-hand side is greater than or equal to the actual
length of data addressed by the pointer.
If you are dynamically allocating storage for use by %STR, you must keep
track of the length that you have allocated.

%STR Used to Store Null-Terminated String
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
D String1 S *
D Fld1 S 10A
/FREE
%str(String1(25))= ’abcdef’;
// The storage pointed at by String1 now contains ’abcdef¬’
// Bytes 8-25 following the null-terminator are unchanged.
%str (String1: 4) = ’abcdef’;

// The storage pointed at by String1 now contains ’abc¬’
/END-FREE
Figure 217. %STR (left-hand-side) Examples

%SUBDT (Extract a Portion of a Date, Time, or Timestamp)
%SUBDT (Extract a Portion of a Date, Time, or Timestamp)

%SUBDT(value:*MSECONDS|*SECONDS|*MINUTES|*HOURS|*DAYS|*MONTHS|*YEARS)
%SUBDT(value:*MS|*S|*MN|*H|*D|*M|*Y)
%SUBDT extracts a portion of the information in a date, time, or timestamp value.

It returns an unsigned numeric value.
The first parameter is the date, time, or timestamp value.
The second parameter is the portion that you want to extract. The following values
are valid:
v For a date: *DAYS, *MONTHS, and *YEARS
v For a time: *SECONDS, *MINUTES, and *HOURS
v For a timestamp: *MSECONDS, *SECONDS, *MINUTES, *HOURS, *DAYS,
*MONTHS, and *YEARS
For this function, *DAYS always refers to the day of the month not the day of the
year (even if you are using a Julian date format). For example, the day portion of
February 10 is 10 not 41.
This function always returns a 4-digit year, even if the date format has a 2-digit
year.
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
/FREE
date = d’1999-02-17’;
time = t’01.23.45’;
num = %subdt(date:*YEARS);
// num = 1999
num = %subdt(time:*MN);
// num = 23
/END-FREE
Figure 218. %SUBDT Example

%SUBST (Get Substring)
%SUBST (Get Substring)

%SUBST(string:start{:length})
%SUBST returns a portion of argument string. It may also be used as the result of
an assignment with the EVAL operation code.
The start parameter represents the starting position of the substring.
The length parameter represents the length of the substring. If it is not specified,
the length is the length of the string parameter less the start value plus one.
The string must be character, graphic, or UCS-2data. Starting position and length
may be any numeric value or numeric expression with zero decimal positions. The
starting position must be greater than zero. The length may be greater than or
equal to zero.
When the string parameter is varying length, the values of the other parameters
are checked against the current length, not the maximum length.
When specified as a parameter for a definition specification keyword, the

parameters must be literals or named constants representing literals. When
specified on a free-form calculation specification, the parameters may be any
expression.
%SUBST Used for its Value

%SUBST returns a substring from the contents of the specified string. The string
may be any character, graphic, or UCS-2 field or expression. Unindexed arrays are
allowed for string, start, and length. The substring begins at the specified starting
position in the string and continues for the length specified. If length is not
specified then the substring continues to the end of the string. For example:
The value of %subst(’Hello World’: 5+2) is ’World’

The value of %subst(’Hello World’:5+2:10-7) is ’Wor’
The value of %subst(’abcd’ + ’efgh’:4:3) is ’def’
For graphic or UCS-2 characters the start position and length is consistent with the
2-byte character length (position 3 is the third 2-byte character and length 3
represents 3 2-byte characters to be operated on).
Figure 219 on page 509 shows an example of the %SUBST built-in function used for
its value.
%SUBST Used as the Result of an Assignment

When used as the result of an assignment this built-in function refers to certain
positions of the argument string. Unindexed arrays are not allowed for start and
length.
The result begins at the specified starting position in the variable and continues for
the length specified. If the length is not specified then the string is referenced to its
end. If the length refers to characters beyond the end of the string, then a run-time
error is issued.

%SUBST Used as the Result of an Assignment
When %SUBST is used as the result of an assignment, the first parameter must
refer to a storage location. That is, the first parameter of the %SUBST operation
must be one of the following.
v Field
v Data Structure
v Data Structure Subfield
v Array Name
v Array Element
v Table Element
Any valid expressions are permitted for the second and third parameters of
%SUBST when it appears as the result of an assignment with an EVAL operation.
*
* In this example, CITY contains ’Toronto, Ontario’
* %SUBST returns the value ’Ontario’.
*
C IF %SUBST(CITY:C+1) = ’Ontario’
C EVAL CITYCNT = CITYCNT+1
C ENDIF
*
* Before the EVAL, A has the value ’abcdefghijklmno’.
* After the EVAL A has the value ’ab****ghijklmno’
*
C EVAL %SUBST(A:3:4) = ’****’
Figure 219. %SUBST Example

%THIS (Return Class Instance for Native Method )
%THIS (Return Class Instance for Native Method)

%THIS
%THIS returns an Object value that contains a reference to the class instance on
whose behalf the native method is being called. %THIS is valid only in non-static
native methods. This built-in gives non-static native methods access to the class
instance.
A non-static native method works on a specific instance of its class. This object is
actually passed as a parameter to the native method by Java, but it does not
appear in the prototype or procedure interface for the native method. In a Java
method, the object instance is referred to by the Java reserved word this. In an
RPG native method, the object instance is referred to by the %THIS builtin
function.
* Method "vacationDays" is a method in the class ’Employee’

D vacationDays PR 10I 0 EXTPROC(*JAVA
D : ’Employee’
D : ’vacationDays’)
* Method "getId" is another method in the class ’Employee’

D getId PR 10I 0 EXTPROC(*JAVA
D : ’Employee’
D : ’getId’)
...
* "vacationDays" is an RPG native method. Since the STATIC keyword
* is not used, it is an instance method.
P vacationDays B EXPORT
D vacationDays PI 10I 0
D id_num S 10I 0
* Another Employee method must be called to get the Employee’s

* id-number. This method requires an Object of class Employee.
* We use %THIS as the Object parameter, to get the id-number for
* the object that our native method "vacationDays" is working on.
C eval id_num = getId(%THIS)
C id_num chain EMPFILE
C if %found
C return VACDAYS
C else
C return -1
C endif
P vacationDays E
Figure 220. %THIS Example

%TIME (Convert to Time)
%TIME (Convert to Time)

%TIME{(expression{:time-format})}
%TIME converts the value of the expression from character, numeric, or timestamp
data to type time. The converted value remains unchanged, but is returned as a
time.
%TIME returns the current system time.
The second parameter is the time format for numeric or character input. Regardless
of the input format, the output is returned in *ISO format.
For information on the input formats that can be used, see “Time Data Type” on
page 196. If the time format is not specified for numeric or character input, the
default value is either the format specified on the TIMFMT control-specification
keyword or *ISO. For more information, see “TIMFMT(fmt{separator})” on
page 255.
If the first parameter is a timestamp, do not specify the second parameter. The
system knows the format of the input in this case.
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
/FREE
string = ’12:34 PM’;

time = %time(string:*USA);
// time = t’12.34.00’
/END-FREE
Figure 221. %TIME Example

%TIMESTAMP (Convert to Timestamp)
%TIMESTAMP (Convert to Timestamp)

%TIMESTAMP{(expression{:*ISO|*ISO0})}
%TIMESTAMP converts the value of the expression from character, numeric, or

date data to type timestamp. The converted value is returned as a timestamp.
%TIMESTAMP returns the current system timestamp.
The second parameter is the timestamp format for character input. Regardless of
the input format, the output is returned in *ISO format. You can specify either *ISO
(the default) or *ISO0. For more information, see “Timestamp Data Type” on
page 197.
If the first parameter is numeric, you do not need to specify the second parameter.
The only allowed value is *ISO (the default).
If the first parameter is a date, do not specify the second parameter. The system
converts the date from its current format to *ISO format and adds 00.00.00.0000.
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
/FREE
string = ’1960-09-29-12.34.56.000000’;
timest = %timestamp(string);
// timest now contains t’1960-09-29-12.34.56.000000’
/END-FREE
Figure 222. %TIMESTAMP Example

%TLOOKUPxx (Look Up a Table Element)
%TLOOKUPxx (Look Up a Table Element)

%TLOOKUP(arg : search-table {: alt-table})
%TLOOKUPLT(arg : search-table {: alt-table})
%TLOOKUPGE(arg : search-table {: alt-table})
%TLOOKUPGT(arg : search-table {: alt-table})
%TLOOKUPLE(arg : search-table {: alt-table})
The following functions search search-table for a value that matches arg as follows:
%TLOOKUP An exact match.
%TLOOKUPLT
The value that is closest to arg but less than arg.
%TLOOKUPLE
An exact match, or the value that is closest to arg but less than arg.
%TLOOKUPGT
The value that is closest to arg but greater than arg.
%TLOOKUPGE
An exact match, or the value that is closest to arg but greater than
arg.
If a value meets the specified condition, the current table element for the search
table is set to the element that satisfies the condition, the current table element for
the alternate table is set to the same element, and the function returns the value
*ON.
If no value matches the specified condition, *OFF is returned.
The first two parameters can have any type but must have the same type. They do
not need to have the same length or number of decimal positions.
The ALTSEQ table is used, unless arg or search-table is defined with

ALTSEQ(*NONE).
Built-in functions %FOUND and %EQUAL are not set following a %LOOKUP
operation.
Note: Unlike the LOOKUP operation code, %TLOOKUP applies only to tables. To
look up a value in an array, use the %LOOKUP built-in function.
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
/FREE
*IN01 = %TLOOKUP(’Paris’:tab1);
IF %TLOOKUP(’Thunder Bay’:tab1:tab2);
// code to handle Thunder Bay
ENDIF;
/END-FREE
Figure 223. %TLOOKUPxx Example

%TRIM (Trim Blanks at Edges)
%TRIM (Trim Blanks at Edges)

%TRIM(string)
%TRIM returns the given string less any leading and trailing blanks.
The string can be character, graphic, or UCS-2 data.
When specified as a parameter for a definition specification keyword, the string

parameter must be a constant.
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
D Location S 16A
D FirstName S 10A inz (’ Chris’)
D LastName S 10A inz (’ Smith’)
D Name S 20A
* LOCATION will have the value ’Toronto, Ontario’.

/FREE
Location = %trim (’ Toronto, Ontario ’);
// Name will have the value ’Chris Smith’.

Name = %trim (FirstName) + ’ ’ + %trim (LastName);
/END-FREE
Figure 224. %TRIM Example

%TRIML (Trim Leading Blanks)
%TRIML (Trim Leading Blanks)

%TRIML(string)
%TRIML returns the given string less any leading blanks.

*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
* LOCATION will have the value ’Toronto, Ontario ’.
/FREE
Location = %triml(’ Toronto, Ontario ’);
/END-FREE
Figure 225. %TRIML Example

%TRIMR (Trim Trailing Blanks)
%TRIMR (Trim Trailing Blanks)

%TRIMR(string)
%TRIMR returns the given string less any trailing blanks.

*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
D Location S 16A varying
D FirstName S 10A inz (’Chris’)
D LastName S 10A inz (’Smith’)
D Name S 20A varying
* LOCATION will have the value ’ Toronto, Ontario’.

/FREE
Location = %trim (’ Toronto, Ontario ’);
// Name will have the value ’Chris Smith:’.

Name = %trimr (FirstName) + ’ ’ + %trimr (LastName) + ’:’;
/END-FREE
Figure 226. %TRIMR Example

%UCS2 (Convert to UCS-2 Value)
%UCS2 (Convert to UCS-2 Value)

%UCS2 converts the value of the expression from character, graphic, or UCS-2 and
returns a UCS-2 value. The result is varying length if the parameter is varying
length, or if the parameter is single-byte character.
The second parameter, ccsid, is optional and indicates the CCSID of the resulting
expression. The CCSID defaults to 13488.
If the parameter is a constant, the conversion will be done at compile time.
If the conversion results in substitution characters, a warning message is issued at

compile time. At run time, status 00050 is set and no error message is issued.
HKeywords++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
H CCSID(*UCS2 : 13488)
DName+++++++++++ETDsFrom+++To/L+++IDc.Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++
D char S 5A INZ(’abcde’)
D graph S 2G INZ(G’oAABBi’)
* The %UCS2 built-in function is used to initialize a UCS-2 field.
D ufield S 10C INZ(%UCS2(’abcdefghij’))
D ufield2 S 1C CCSID(61952) INZ(*LOVAL)
D isLess 1N
D proc PR
D uparm 2G CCSID(13488) CONST
CL0N01Factor1+++++++Opcode&ExtExtended-factor2+++++++++++++++++++++++++
C EVAL ufield = %UCS2(char) + %UCS2(graph)
* ufield now has 7 UCS-2 characters representing
* ’a.b.c.d.e.AABB’ where ’x.’ represents the UCS-2 form of ’x’
C EVAL isLess = ufield < %UCS2(ufield2:13488)
* The result of the %UCS2 built-in function is the value of
* ufield2, converted from CCSID 61952 to CCSID 13488
* for the comparison.
C EVAL ufield = ufield2

* The value of ufield2 is converted from CCSID 61952 to
* CCSID 13488 and stored in ufield.
* This conversion is handled implicitly by the compiler.
C CALLP proc(ufield2)
* The value of ufield2 is converted to CCSID 13488
* implicitly, as part of passing the parameter by constant reference.
Figure 227. %UCS2 Examples

%UNS (Convert to Unsigned Format)
%UNS (Convert to Unsigned Format)

| %UNS(numeric or character expression)
| %UNS converts the value of the expression to unsigned format. Any decimal digits
are truncated. %UNS can be used to truncate the decimal positions from a float or
decimal value allowing it to be used as an array index.

| v The sign is optional. It can only be ’+’ . It can precede or follow the numeric
| data.
| parameter.
| v Floating point data is not allowed. That is, where the numeric value is followed
| by E and an exponent, for example ’1.2E6’.
| v If invalid numeric data is found, an exception occurs with status code 105
Figure 228 shows an example of the %UNS built-in function.
%UNSH (Convert to Unsigned Format with Half Adjust)

| %UNSH(numeric or character expression)
| %UNSH is the same as %UNS except that if the expression is a decimal, float or
| character value, half adjust is applied to the value of the expression when
| converting to integer type. No message is issued if half adjust cannot be
performed.
| *..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
| D p7 s 7p 3 inz (8236.567)
| D s9 s 9s 5 inz (23.73442)
| D f8 s 8f inz (173.789)
| D c15a s 15a inz (’ 12345.6789 +’)
| D c15b s 15a inz (’ + 5 , 6 7 ’)
| D result1 s 15p 5
| D result2 s 15p 5
| D result3 s 15p 5
| D array s 1a dim (200)
| D a s 1a
|
| /FREE
| result1 = %uns (p7) + 0.1234; // "result1" is now 8236.12340
| result2 = %uns (s9); // "result2" is now 23.00000
| result3 = %unsh (f8); // "result3" is now 174.00000
| result1 = %uns (c15a); // "result1" is now 12345.0000
| result2 = %unsh (c15b); // "result2" is now 6.00000
| // %UNS and %UNSH can be used as array indexes
| a = array (%unsh (f8));
| /END-FREE
||
| Figure 228. %UNS and %UNSH Example

%XFOOT (Sum Array Expression Elements)
%XFOOT (Sum Array Expression Elements)

%XFOOT(array-expression)
%XFOOT results in the sum of all elements of the specified numeric array
expression.
The precision of the result is the minimum that can hold the result of adding
| together all array elements, up to a maximum of 31 digits. The number of decimal
places in the result is always the same as the decimal places of the array
expression.
For example, if ARR is an array of 500 elements of precision (17,4), the result of
%XFOOT(ARR) is (20,4).
For %XFOOT(X) where X has precision (m,n), the following table shows the
precision of the result based on the number of elements of X:
Elements of X Precision of %XFOOT(X)
1 (m,n)
2-10 (m+1,n)
11-100 (m+2,n)
101-1000 (m+3,n)
1001-10000 (m+4,n)
10001-32767 (m+5,n)
Normal rules for array expressions apply. For example, if ARR1 has 10 elements
and ARR2 has 20 elements, %XFOOT(ARR1+ARR2) results in the sum of the first
10 elements of ARR1+ARR2.
This built-in function is similar to the XFOOT operation, except that float arrays
are summed like all other types, beginning from index 1 on up.

%XLATE (Translate)
%XLATE (Translate)
%XLATE(from:to:string{:startpos})
%XLATE translates string according to the values of from, to, and startpos.
The first parameter contains a list of characters that should be replaced, and the
second parameter contains their replacements. For example, if the string contains
the third character in from, every occurrence of that character is replaced with the
third character in to.
The third parameter is the string to be translated. The fourth parameter is the
starting position for translation. By default, translation starts at position 1.
The first three parameters can be of type character, graphic, or UCS-2. All three
must have the same type. The value returned has the same type and length as
string.
The fourth parameter is a non-float numeric with zero decimal positions.
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
D up C ’ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ’
D lo C ’abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz’
D string S 10A inz(’rpg dept’)
/FREE
string = %XLATE(lo:up:’rpg dept’);

// string now contains ’RPG DEPT’
string = %XLATE(up:lo:’rpg dept’:6);

// string now contains ’RPG Dept’
/END-FREE
Figure 229. %XLATE Example

%YEARS (Number of Years)

%YEARS(number)
%YEARS converts a number into a duration that can be added to a date or

timestamp value.
%YEARS can only be the right-hand value in an addition or subtraction operation.

The left-hand value must be a date or timestamp. The result is a date or timestamp
value with the appropriate number of years added or subtracted. For a date, the
resulting value is in *ISO format.
If the left-hand value is February 29 and the resulting year is not a leap year,
February 28 is used instead. Adding or subtracting a number of years to a
February 29 date may not be reversible. For example, 2000-02-29 + %YEARS(1) -
%YEARS(1) is 2000-02-28.
For an example of the %YEARS built-in function, see Figure 198 on page 482.


Chapter 23. Operation Codes
This chapter describes, in alphabetical order, each operation code.

ACQ (Acquire)
ACQ (Acquire)
Free-Form Syntax ACQ{(E)} device-name workstn-file
Code Factor 1 Factor 2 Result Field Indicators

ACQ (E) device- name workstn-file _ ER _
The ACQ operation acquires the program device specified by device-name for the
WORKSTN file specified by workstn-file. If the device is available, ACQ attaches it
to the file. If it is not available or is already attached to the file, an error occurs.
To handle ACQ exceptions (file status codes greater than 1000), either the operation
code extender ’E’ or an error indicator ER can be specified, but not both. If no
error indicator or ’E’ extender is specified, but the INFSR subroutine is specified,
the INFSR receives control when an error/exception occurs. If no indicator, ’E’
extender, or INFSR subroutine is specified, the default error/exception handler
receives control when an error/exception occurs. For more information on error
handling, see “File Exception/Errors” on page 65.
No input or output operation occurs when the ACQ operation is processed. ACQ
may be used with a multiple device file or, for error recovery purposes, with a
single device file. One program may acquire and have the device available to any
called program which shares the file and allow the called program to release the
device. See the section on "Multiple-Device Files" in the chapter about using
WORKSTN files in the WebSphere Development Studio: ILE RPG Programmer’s Guide.

ADD (Add)
ADD (Add)
|| Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the + or += operators)
|

ADD (H) Addend Addend Sum + − Z
If factor 1 is specified, the ADD operation adds it to factor 2 and places the sum in
the result field. If factor 1 is not specified, the contents of factor 2 are added to the
result field and the sum is placed in the result field. Factor 1 and factor 2 must be
numeric and can contain one of: an array, array element, constant, field name,
literal, subfield, or table name. For the rules for specifying an ADD operation, see
“Arithmetic Operations” on page 380.
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
* The value 1 is added to RECNO.
C ADD 1 RECNO
* The contents of EHWRK are added to CURHRS.
C ADD EHWRK CURHRS
* The contents of OVRTM and REGHRS are added together and
* placed in TOTPAY.
C OVRTM ADD REGHRS TOTPAY
Figure 230. ADD Operations
Chapter 23. Operation Codes 525

ADDDUR (Add Duration)

|| Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the + or += operators with duration functions such as %YEARS
| and %MONTHS)
|

ADDDUR (E) Date/Time Duration:Duration Code Date/Time _ ER _
The ADDDUR operation adds the duration specified in factor 2 to a date or time
and places the resulting Date, Time or Timestamp in the result field.
Factor 1 is optional and may contain a Date, Time or Timestamp field, subfield,
array, array element, literal or constant. If factor 1 contains a field name, array or
array element then its data type must be the same data type as the field specified
in the result field. If factor 1 is not specified the duration is added to the field
specified in the result field.
Factor 2 is required and contains two subfactors. The first is a duration and may
be a numeric field, array element or constant with zero decimal positions. If the
duration is negative then it is subtracted from the date. The second subfactor must
be a valid duration code indicating the type of duration. The duration code must
be consistent with the result field data type. You can add a year, month or day
duration but not a minute duration to a date field. For list of duration codes and
their short forms see “Date Operations” on page 393.
The result field must be a date, time or timestamp data type field, array or array
element. If factor 1 is blank, the duration is added to the value in the result field. If
the result field is an array, the value in factor 2 is added to each element of the
array. If the result field is a time field, the result will always be a valid Time. For
example adding 59 minutes to 23:59:59 would give 24:58:59. Since this time is not
valid, the compiler adjusts it to 00:58:59.
When adding a duration in months to a date, the general rule is that the month
portion is increased by the number of months in the duration, and the day portion
is unchanged. The exception to this is when the resulting day portion would
exceed the actual number of days in the resulting month. In this case, the resulting
day portion is adjusted to the actual month end date. The following examples
(which assume a *YMD format) illustrate this point.
v ’98/05/30’ ADDDUR 1:*MONTH results in ’98/06/30’
The resulting month portion has been increased by 1; the day portion is
unchanged.
v ’98/05/31’ ADDDUR 1:*MONTH results in ’98/06/30’
The resulting month portion has been increased by 1; the resulting day portion
has been adjusted because June has only 30 days.
Similar results occur when adding a year duration. For example, adding one year
to ’92/02/29’ results in ’93/02/28’, an adjusted value since the resulting year is not
a leap year.
For more information on working with date-time fields, see “Date Operations” on
page 393.
An error situation arises when one of the following occurs:

v The value of the Date, Time or Timestamp field in factor 1 is invalid
v Factor 1 is blank and the value of the result field before the operation is invalid
v Overflow or underflow occurred (that is, the resulting value is greater than
*HIVAL or less than *LOVAL).
In an error situation,
v An error (status code 112 or 113) is signalled.
v The error indicator (columns 73-74) — if specified — is set on, or the %ERROR
built-in function — if the ’E’ extender is specified — is set to return ’1’.
v The value of the result field remains unchanged.
To handle exceptions with program status codes 112 or 113, either the operation
code extender ’E’ or an error indicator ER can be specified, but not both. For more
information on error handling, see “Program Exception/Errors” on page 82.
Note: The system places a 15-digit limit on durations. Adding a Duration with
more than 15 significant digits will cause errors or truncation. These
problems can be avoided by limiting the first subfactor in Factor 2 to 15
digits.
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
HKeywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
H TIMFMT(*USA) DATFMT(*MDY&)
*
DDateconst C CONST(D’12 31 92’)
*
* Define a Date field and initialize
*
DLoandate S D DATFMT(*EUR) INZ(D’12 31 92’)
DDuedate S D DATFMT(*ISO)
Dtimestamp S Z
Danswer S T
* Determine a DUEDATE which is xx years, yy months, zz days later
* than LOANDATE.
C LOANDATE ADDDUR XX:*YEARS DUEDATE
C ADDDUR YY:*MONTHS DUEDATE
C ADDDUR ZZ:*DAYS DUEDATE
* Determine the date 23 days later
*
C ADDDUR 23:*D DUEDATE
* Add a 1234 microseconds to a timestamp
*
C ADDDUR 1234:*MS timestamp
* Add 12 HRS and 16 minutes to midnight
*
C T’00:00 am’ ADDDUR 12:*Hours answer
C ADDDUR 16:*Minutes answer
* Subtract 30 days from a loan due date
*
C ADDDUR -30:*D LOANDUE
Figure 231. ADDDUR Operations

ALLOC (Allocate Storage)
ALLOC (Allocate Storage)

Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the %ALLOC built-in function)

ALLOC (E) Length Pointer _ ER _
The ALLOC operation allocates storage in the default heap of the length specified
in factor 2. The result field pointer is set to point to the new heap storage. The
storage is uninitialized.
Factor 2 must be a numeric with zero decimal positions. It can be a literal,

constant, standalone field, subfield, table name or array element. The value must
be between 1 and 16776704. If the value is out of range at runtime, an error will
occur with status 425. If the storage could not be allocated, an error will occur with
status 426. If these errors occur, the result field pointer remains unchanged.
The result field must be a basing pointer scalar variable (a standalone field, data
structure subfield, table name, or array element).
D Ptr1 S *
D Ptr2 S *
C ALLOC 7 Ptr1
* Now Ptr1 points to 7 bytes of storage
*
C ALLOC (E) 12345678 Ptr2
* This is a large amount of storage, and sometimes it may
* be unavailable. If the storage could not be allocated,
* %ERROR will return ’1’, the status is set to 00426, and
* %STATUS will return 00426.
Figure 232. ALLOC Operation

ANDxx (And)
ANDxx (And)
Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the AND operator)

ANDxx Comparand Comparand
This operation must immediately follow a ANDxx, DOUxx, DOWxx, IFxx, ORxx,
or WHENxx operation. With ANDxx, you can specify a complex condition for the
DOUxx, DOWxx, IFxx, and WHENxx operations. The ANDxx operation has higher
precedence than the ORxx operation.
The control level entry (positions 7 and 8) can be blank or can contain an L1
through L9 indicator, an LR indicator, or an L0 entry to group the statement within
the appropriate section of the program. The control level entry must be the same
as the control level entry for the associated DOUxx, DOWxx, IFxx, or WHENxx
operation. Conditioning indicator entries (positions 9 through 11) are not
permitted.
Factor 1 and factor 2 must contain a literal, a named constant, a figurative

constant, a table name, an array element, a data structure name, or a field name.
Factor 1 and factor 2 must be of the same type. For example, a character field
cannot be compared with a numeric. The comparison of factor 1 and factor 2
follows the same rules as those given for the compare operations. See “Compare
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
* If ACODE is equal to A and indicator 50 is on, the MOVE
* and WRITE operations are processed.
C ACODE IFEQ ’A’
C *IN50 ANDEQ *ON
C MOVE ’A’ ACREC
C WRITE RCRSN
* If the previous conditions were not met but ACODE is equal
* to A, indicator 50 is off, and ACREC is equal to D, the
* following MOVE operation is processed.
C ELSE
C ACODE IFEQ ’A’
C *IN50 ANDEQ *OFF
C ACREC ANDEQ ’D’
C MOVE ’A’ ACREC
C ENDIF
C ENDIF
Figure 233. ANDxx Operations

BEGSR (Beginning of Subroutine)
BEGSR (Beginning of Subroutine)

Free-Form Syntax BEGSR subroutine-name

BEGSR subroutine-name
The BEGSR operation identifies the beginning of an RPG IV subroutine.

subroutine-name is the subroutine name. You may specify the same name as the
subroutine-name on the EXSR operation referring to the subroutine, in the result
field of the CASxx operation referring to the subroutine, or in the entry of an
INFSR file specification keyword of the subroutine is a file-error subroutine. The
control level entry (positions 7 and 8) can be SR or blank. Conditioning indicator
entries are not permitted.
Every subroutine must have a unique symbolic name. The keyword *PSSR used in
factor 1 specifies that this is a program exception/error subroutine to handle
program-detected exception/errors. Only one subroutine can be defined by this
keyword. *INZSR in factor 1 specifies a subroutine to be run during the
initialization step. Only one subroutine can be defined *INZSR.
See Figure 156 on page 416 for an example of coding subroutines; see “Subroutine
Operations” on page 414 for general information on subroutine operations.

BITOFF (Set Bits Off)

|| Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the %BITAND and %BITNOT built-in functions)
|

BITOFF Bit numbers Character field
The BITOFF operation causes bits identified in factor 2 to be set off (set to 0) in the
result field. Bits not identified in factor 2 remain unchanged. Therefore, when
using BITOFF to format a character, you should use both BITON and BITOFF:
BITON to specify the bits to be set on (=1), and BITOFF to specify the bits to be set
off (=0). Unless you explicitly set on or off all the bits in the character, you might
not get the character you want.
If you want to assign a particular bit pattern to a character field, use the “MOVE
(Move)” on page 629 operation with a hexadecimal literal in factor 2.
Factor 2 can contain:

v Bit numbers 0-7: From 1 to 8 bits can be set off per operation. They are identified
by the numbers 0 through 7. (0 is the leftmost bit.) Enclose the bit numbers in
apostrophes. For example, to set off bits 0, 2, and 5, enter ‘025’ in factor 2.
v Field name: You can specify the name of a one-position character field, table
element, or array element in factor 2. The bits that are on in the field, table
element, or array element are set off in the result field; bits that are off do not
affect the result.
v Hexadecimal literal or named constant: You can specify a 1-byte hexadecimal literal
or hexadecimal named constant. Bits that are on in factor 2 are set off in the
result field; bits that are off are not affected.
v Named constant: A character named constant up to eight positions long
containing the bit numbers to be set off.
In the result field, specify a one-position character field. It can be an array element
if each element in the array is a one-position character field.

* Set off bits 0,4,6 in FieldG. Leave bits 1,2,3,5,7 unchanged.

* Setting off bit 0, which is already off, results in bit 0 remaining off.
* Factor 2 = 10001010
* FieldG = 01001111 (before)
* FieldG = 01000101 (after)
C BITOFF ’046’ FieldG
* Set off bits 0,2,4,6 in FieldI. Leave bits 1,3,5,7 unchanged.
* Setting off bit 2, which is already off, results in bit 2 remaining off.
* Factor 2 = 10101010
* FieldI = 11001110 (before)
* FieldI = 01000100 (after)
C BITOFF BITNC FieldI
* HEXNC is equivalent to literal ’4567’, bit pattern 00001111.
* Set off bits 4,5,6,7 in FieldK. Leave bits 0,1,2,3 unchanged.
* Factor 2 = 11110000
* FieldK = 10000000 (before)
* FieldK = 00000000 (after)
C BITOFF HEXNC2 FieldK
C RETURN
Figure 234. BITOFF Example

BITON (Set Bits On)
BITON (Set Bits On)

|| Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the %BITOR built-in function)
|

BITON Bit numbers Character field
The BITON operation causes bits identified in factor 2 to be set on (set to 1) in the
result field. Bits not identified in factor 2 remain unchanged. Therefore, when
using BITON to format a character, you should use both BITON and BITOFF:
BITON to specify the bits to be set on (=1), and BITOFF to specify the bits to be set
off (=0). Unless you explicitly set on or off all the bits in the character, you might
not get the character you want.
If you want to assign a particular bit pattern to a character field, use the “MOVE
(Move)” on page 629 operation with a hexadecimal literal in factor 2.

v Bit numbers 0-7: From 1 to 8 bits can be set on per operation. They are identified
by the numbers 0 through 7. (0 is the leftmost bit.) Enclose the bit numbers in
apostrophes. For example, to set bits 0, 2, and 5 on, enter ‘025’ in factor 2.
element, or array element in factor 2. The bits that are on in the field, table
element, or array element are set on in the result field; bits that are off are not
affected.
v Hexadecimal literal or named constant: You can specify a 1-byte hexadecimal literal.
Bits that are on in factor 2 are set on in the result field; bits that are off do not
affect the result.
v Named constant: A character named constant up to eight positions long
containing the bit numbers to be set on.
In the result field, specify a one-position character field. It can be an array element
if each element in the array is a one-position character field.

BITON (Set Bits On)
D FieldA S 1A INZ(X’00’)
D FieldB S 1A INZ(X’00’)
D FieldC S 1A INZ(X’FF’)
D FieldD S 1A INZ(X’C0’)
D FieldE S 1A INZ(X’C0’)
D FieldF S 1A INZ(X’81’)
D FieldG S 1A INZ(X’4F’)
D FieldH S 1A INZ(X’08’)
D FieldI S 1A INZ(X’CE’)
D FieldJ S 1A INZ(X’80’)
D FieldK S 1A INZ(X’80’)
D BITNC C CONST(’0246’)
D HEXNC C CONST(X’0F’)
D HEXNC2 C CONST(X’F0’)
C*0N01Factor1+++++++Opcode(E)+Factor2+++++++Result++++++++Len++D+HiLoEq....
*
* Set on bits 0,4,5,6,7 in FieldA. Leave bits 1,2,3 unchanged.
* Factor 2 = 10001111
* FieldA = 00000000 (before)
* FieldA = 10001111 (after)
C BITON ’04567’ FieldA
* Set on bit 3 in FieldB. Leave bits 0,1,2,4,5,6,7 unchanged.
* Factor 2 = 00010000
* FieldB = 00000000 (before)
* FieldB = 00010000 (after)
C BITON ’3’ FieldB
* Set on bit 3 in FieldC. Leave bits 0,1,2,4,5,6,7 unchanged.
* Setting on bit 3, which is already on, results in bit 3 remaining on.
* Factor 2 = 00010000
* FieldC = 11111111 (before)
* FieldC = 11111111 (after)
C BITON ’3’ FieldC
* Set on bit 3 in FieldD. Leave bits 0,1,2,4,5,6,7 unchanged.
* Factor 2 = 00010000
* FieldD = 11000000 (before)
* FieldD = 11010000 (after)
C BITON ’3’ FieldD
* Set on bits 0 and 1 in FieldF. Leave bits 2,3,4,5,6,7 unchanged.
* (Setting on bit 0, which is already on, results in bit 0 remaining on.)
* Factor 2 = 11000000
* FieldF = 10000001 (before)
* FieldF = 11000001 (after)
C BITON FieldE FieldF
* X’C1’ is equivalent to literal ’017’, bit pattern 11000001.
* Set on bits 0,1,7 in FieldH. Leave bits 2,3,4,5,6 unchanged.
* Factor 2 = 11000001
* FieldH = 00001000 (before)
* FieldH = 11001001 (after)
C BITON X’C1’ FieldH
* HEXNC is equivalent to literal ’4567’, bit pattern 00001111.
* Set on bits 4,5,6,7 in FieldJ. Leave bits 0,1,2,3 unchanged.
* Factor 2 = 00001111
* FieldJ = 10000000 (before)
* FieldJ = 10001111 (after)
C BITON HEXNC FieldJ
C RETURN
Figure 235. BITON Example

CABxx (Compare and Branch)

Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use other operation codes, such as LEAVE, ITER, and RETURN)

CABxx Comparand Comparand Label HI LO EQ
The CABxx operation compares factor 1 with factor 2. If the condition specified by
xx is true, the program branches to the TAG or ENDSR operation associated with
the label specified in the result field. Otherwise, the program continues with the
next operation in the sequence. If the result field is not specified, the resulting
indicators (positions 71-76) are set accordingly, and the program continues with the
next operation in the sequence.
You can specify conditioning indicators. Factor 1 and factor 2 must contain a
literal, a named constant, a figurative constant, a table name, an array element, a
data structure name, or a field name. Factor 1 and factor 2 must be of the same
type. The label specified in the result field must be associated with a unique TAG
operation and must be a unique symbolic name.
A CABxx operation in the main procedure can specify a branch:

v To a previous or a succeeding specification line
v From a detail calculation line to another detail calculation line
v From a total calculation line to another total calculation line
v From a detail calculation line to a total calculation line
v From a subroutine to a detail calculation line or a total calculation line.
A CABxx operation in a subprocedure can specify a branch:

v From a line in the body of the subprocedure to another line in the body of the
subprocedure
v From a line in a subroutine to another line in the same subroutine
v From a line in a subroutine to a line in the body of the subprocedure
The CABxx operation cannot specify a branch from outside a subroutine to a TAG
or ENDSR operation within that subroutine.
Attention!
Branching from one point in the logic to another may result in an endless
loop. You must ensure that the logic of your program or procedure does not
produce undesirable results.
Resulting indicators are optional. When specified, they are set to reflect the results
of the compare operation. For example, the HI indicator is set when F1>F2, LO is
set when F1<F2, and EQ is set when F1=F2.
See “Compare Operations” on page 390 for the rules for comparing factor 1 with
factor 2.

*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
* The field values are:
* FieldA = 100.00
* FieldB = 105.00
* FieldC = ABC
* FieldD = ABCDE
*
* Branch to TAGX.
C FieldA CABLT FieldB TAGX
*
* Branch to TAGX.
C FieldA CABLE FieldB TAGX
*
* Branch to TAGX; indicator 16 is off.
C FieldA CABLE FieldB TAGX 16
*
* Branch to TAGX; indicator 17 is off, indicator 18 is on.
C FieldA CAB FieldB TAGX 1718
*
* Branch to TAGX; indicator 19 is on.
C FieldA CAB FieldA TAGX 19
*
* No branch occurs.
C FieldA CABEQ FieldB TAGX
*
* No branch occurs; indicator 20 is on.
C FieldA CABEQ FieldB TAGX 20
*
* No branch occurs; indicator 21 is off.
C FieldC CABEQ FieldD TAGX 21
C :
C TAGX TAG
Figure 236. CABxx Operations

CALL (Call a Program)
CALL (Call a Program)

Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the CALLP operation code)

CALL (E) Program name Plist name _ ER LR
The CALL operation passes control to the program specified in factor 2.
Factor 2 must contain a character entry specifying the name of the program to be
called.
In the result field, specify parameters in one of the following ways:

v Enter the name of a PLIST
v Leave the result field blank. This is valid if the called program does not access
parameters or if the PARM statements directly follow the CALL operation.
To handle CALL exceptions (program status codes 202, 211, or 231), either the
operation code extender ’E’ or an error indicator ER can be specified, but not both.
For more information on error handling, see “Program Exception/Errors” on
page 82.
Any valid resulting indicator can be specified in positions 75 and 76 to be set on if

the called program is an RPG program or main procedure that returns with the LR
indicator on.
Note: The LR indicator is not allowed in a thread-safe environment.
For more information on call operations, see “Call Operations” on page 385.
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
* The CALL operation calls PROGA and allows PROGA to access
* FieldA and FieldB, defined elsewhere. PROGA is run using the content
* of FieldA and FieldB. When PROGA has completed, control
* returns to the statement following the last PARM statement.
*
*
C CALL ’PROGA’
C PARM FieldA
C PARM FieldB
Figure 237. CALL Operation

CALLB (Call a Bound Procedure)
CALLB (Call a Bound Procedure)

Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the CALLP operation code)

CALLB (D E) Procedure name or Plist name _ ER LR
procedure pointer
The CALLB operation is used to call bound procedures written in any of the ILE
languages.
The operation extender D may be used to include operational descriptors. This is

similar to calling a prototyped procedure with CALLP when its parameters have
been defined with keyword OPDESC. (Operational descriptors provide the
programmer with run-time resolution of the exact attributes of character or graphic
strings passed (that is, length and type of string). For more information, see
chapter on calling programs and procedures in the WebSphere Development Studio:
ILE RPG Programmer’s Guide.
Factor 2 is required and must be a literal or constant containing the name of the
procedure to be called, or a procedure pointer containing the address of the
procedure to be called. All references must be able to be resolved at bind time. The
procedure name provided is case sensitive and may contain more than 10
characters, but no more than 255. If the name is longer than 255, it will be
truncated to 255. The result field is optional and may contain a PLIST name.
To handle CALLB exceptions (program status codes 202, 211, or 231), either the
page 82.
An indicator specified in positions 75-76 will be set on when the call ends with LR
set on.
Note: The LR indicator is not allowed in a thread-safe environment.
For more information on call operations, see “Call Operations” on page 385.
* Define a procedure pointer
D
D ProcPtr S * PROCPTR INZ(%PADDR(’Create_Space’))
D Extern S 10
D
* The following call linkage would be STATIC
C CALLB ’BOUNDPROC’
* The following call linkage would be DYNAMIC
C CALL Extern
* The following call linkage would be STATIC, using a procedure pointer
C CALLB ProcPtr
Figure 238. CALLB Operation

CALLP (Call a Prototyped Procedure or Program)

Free-Form Syntax {CALLP{(EMR)}} name( {parm1{:parm2...}} )
Code Factor 1 Extended Factor 2

CALLP (E M/R) name{ (parm1 {:parm2...}) }
The CALLP operation is used to call prototyped procedures or programs.
Unlike the other call operations, CALLP uses a free-form syntax. You use the name
operand to specify the name of the prototype of the called program or procedure,
as well as any parameters to be passed. (This is similar to calling a built-in
function.) A maximum of 255 parameters are allowed for a program call, and a
maximum of 399 for a procedure call.
On a free-form calculation specification, the operation code name may be omitted

if no extenders are needed.
The compiler then uses the prototype name to obtain an external name, if required,
for the call. If the keyword EXTPGM is specified on the prototype, the call will be
a dynamic external call; otherwise it will be a bound procedure call.
A prototype for the program or procedure being called must be included in the
definition specifications preceding the CALLP.
Note that if CALLP is used to call a procedure which returns a value, that value
will not be available to the caller. If the value is required, call the prototyped
procedure from within an expression.
To handle CALLP exceptions (program status codes 202, 211, or 231), the operation
code extender ’E’ can be specified. For more information on error handling, see
“Program Exception/Errors” on page 82.
Note: The E extender is only active during the final call for CALLP. If an error
occurs on a call that is done as part of the parameter processing, control will
not pass to the next operation. For example, if FileRecs is a procedure
returning a numeric value, and an error occurs when FileRecs is called in
the following statement, the E extender would have no effect.
CALLP (E) PROGNAME(FileRecs(Fld) + 1)
For more information on call operations, see “Call Operations” on page 385. For
information on how operation extenders M and R are used, see “Precision Rules
for Numeric Operations” on page 428.

*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*-------------------------------------------------------------
* This prototype for QCMDEXC defines two parameters:
* 1- a character field that may be shorter in length
* than expected
* 2- any numeric field
*-------------------------------------------------------------
D qcmdexc PR extpgm(’QCMDEXC’)
D cmd 200A options(*varsize) const
D cmdlen 15P 5 const
/FREE
qcmdexc (’WRKSPLF’ : %size (’WRKSPLF’));
/END-FREE
Figure 239. Calling a Prototyped Program Using CALLP
The following example of CALLP is from the service program example in

WebSphere Development Studio: ILE RPG Programmer’s Guide. CvtToHex is a
procedure in a service program created to hold conversion routines. CvtToHex
converts an input string to its hexadecimal form. The prototyped calls are to the
ILE CEE API, CEEDOD (Retrieve Operational Descriptor). It is used to determine
the length of the input string.
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*=================================================================*
* CvtToHex - convert input string to hex output string *
*=================================================================*
D/COPY MYLIB/QRPGLESRC,CVTHEXPR
*-----------------------------------------------------------------*
* Main entry parameters *
* 1. Input: string character(n) *
* 2. Output: hex string character(2 * n) *
*-----------------------------------------------------------------*
D CvtToHex PI OPDESC
D InString 16383 CONST OPTIONS(*VARSIZE)
D HexString 32766 OPTIONS(*VARSIZE)
*-----------------------------------------------------------------*
* Prototype for CEEDOD (Retrieve operational descriptor) *
*-----------------------------------------------------------------*
D CEEDOD PR
D 10I 0 CONST
D 10I 0
D 10I 0
D 10I 0
D 10I 0
D 10I 0
D 12A OPTIONS(*OMIT)
* Parameters passed to CEEDOD

D ParmNum S 10I 0
D DescType S 10I 0
D DataType S 10I 0
D DescInfo1 S 10I 0
D DescInfo2 S 10I 0
D InLen S 10I 0
D HexLen S 10I 0
Figure 240. Calling a Prototyped Procedure Using CALLP (Part 1 of 3)

*-----------------------------------------------------------------*
* Other fields used by the program *
*-----------------------------------------------------------------*
D HexDigits C CONST(’0123456789ABCDEF’)
D IntDs DS
D IntNum 5I 0 INZ(0)
D IntChar 1 OVERLAY(IntNum:2)
D HexDs DS
D HexC1 1
D HexC2 1
D InChar S 1
D Pos S 5P 0
D HexPos S 5P 0
/FREE
//-------------------------------------------------------------//
// Use the operational descriptors to determine the lengths of //
// the parameters that were passed. //
//-------------------------------------------------------------//
CEEDOD (1 : DescType : DataType :
DescInfo1 : DescInfo2 : Inlen : *OMIT);
CEEDOD (2 : DescType : DataType :
DescInfo1 : DescInfo2 : HexLen : *OMIT);
//-------------------------------------------------------------//
// Determine the length to handle (minimum of the input length //
// and half of the hex length) //
//-------------------------------------------------------------//
if InLen > HexLen / 2;
InLen = HexLen / 2;
endif;
//-------------------------------------------------------------//
// For each character in the input string, convert to a 2-byte //
// hexadecimal representation (for example, ’5’ --> ’F5’) //
//-------------------------------------------------------------//
HexPos = 1;
for Pos = 1 to InLen;
InChar = %SUBST(InString : Pos :1);
exsr GetHex;
%subst (HexString: HexPos: 2) = HexDs;
HexPos = HexPos + 2;
endfor;
//------------------------------//
// Done; return to caller. //
//------------------------------//
return;
//================================================================//
// GetHex - subroutine to convert ’InChar’ to ’HexDs’ //
// //
// Use division by 16 to separate the two hexadecimal digits. //
// The quotient is the first digit, the remainder is the second. //
//================================================================//
begsr GetHex;
IntChar = InChar;
//-----------------------------------------------------//
// Use the hexadecimal digit (plus 1) to substring the //
// list of hexadecimal characters ’012...CDEF’. //
//-----------------------------------------------------//
HexC1 = %subst (HexDigits: %div(IntNum:16) + 1: 1);
HexC2 = %subst (HexDigits: %rem(IntNum:16) + 1: 1);

endsr; // GetHex
/END-FREE

CASxx (Conditionally Invoke Subroutine)

Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the IF and EXSR operation codes)

CASxx Comparand Comparand Subroutine HI LO EQ
name
The CASxx operation allows you to conditionally select a subroutine for

processing. The selection is based on the relationship between factor 1 and factor 2,
as specified by xx. If the relationship denoted by xx exists between factor 1 and
factor 2, the subroutine specified in the result field is processed.
You can specify conditioning indicators. Factor 1 and factor 2 can contain a literal,
a named constant, a figurative constant, a field name, a table name, an array
element, a data structure name, or blanks (blanks are valid only if xx is blank and
no resulting indicators are specified in positions 71 through 76). If factor 1 and
factor 2 are not blanks, both must be of the same data type. In a CAS operation,
factor 1 and factor 2 are required only if resulting indicators are specified in
positions 71 through 76.
The result field must contain the name of a valid RPG IV subroutine, including
*PSSR, the program exception/error subroutine, and *INZSR, the program
initialization subroutine. If the relationship denoted by xx exists between factor 1
and factor 2, the subroutine specified in the result field is processed. If the
relationship denoted by xx does not exist, the program continues with the next
CASxx operation in the CAS group. A CAS group can contain only CASxx
operations. An ENDCS operation must follow the last CASxx operation to denote
the end of the CAS group. After the subroutine is processed, the program
continues with the next operation to be processed following the ENDCS operation,
unless the subroutine passes control to a different operation.
The CAS operation with no resulting indicators specified in positions 71 through

76 is functionally identical to an EXSR operation, because it causes the
unconditional running of the subroutine named in the result field of the CAS
operation. Any CASxx operations that follow an unconditional CAS operation in
the same CAS group are never tested. Therefore, the normal placement of the
unconditional CAS operation is after all other CASxx operations in the CAS
group.
You cannot use conditioning indicators on the ENDCS operation for a CAS group.
See “Compare Operations” on page 390 for further rules for the CASxx operation.

*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
* The CASGE operation compares FieldA with FieldB. If FieldA is
* greater than or equal to FieldB, Subr01 is processed and the
* program continues with the operation after the ENDCS operation.
*
C FieldA CASGE FieldB Subr01
*
* If FieldA is not greater than or equal to FieldB, the program
* next compares FieldA with FieldC. If FieldA is equal to FieldC,
* SUBR02 is processed and the program continues with the operation
* after the ENDCS operation.
*
C FieldA CASEQ FieldC Subr02
*
* If FieldA is not equal to FieldC, the CAS operation causes Subr03
* to be processed before the program continues with the operation
* after the ENDCS operation.
* The CAS statement is used to provide a subroutine if none of
* the previous CASxx operations have been met.
*
C CAS Subr03
*
* The ENDCS operation denotes the end of the CAS group.
*
C ENDCS
Figure 241. CASxx Operation

CAT (Concatenate Two Strings)

Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the + operator)

CAT (P) Source string 1 Source string 2: number of Target string
blanks
The CAT operation concatenates the string specified in factor 2 to the end of the
string specified in factor 1 and places it in the result field. The source and target
strings must all be of the same type, either all character, all graphic, or all UCS-2. If
no factor 1 is specified, factor 2 is concatenated to the end of the result field string.
Factor 1 can contain a string, which can be one of: a field name, array element,
named constant, data structure name, table name, or literal. If factor 1 is not
specified, the result field is used. In the following discussion, references to factor 1
apply to the result field if factor 1 is not specified.
Factor 2 must contain a string, and may contain the number of blanks to be
inserted between the concatenated strings. Its format is the string, followed by a
colon, followed by the number of blanks. The blanks are in the format of the data.
For example, for character data a blank is x’40’, while for UCS-2 data a blank is
x’0020’. The string portion can contain one of: a field name, array element, named
constant, data structure name, table name, literal, or data structure subfield name.
The number of blanks portion must be numeric with zero decimal positions, and
can contain one of: a named constant, array element, literal, table name, or field
name.
If a colon is specified, the number of blanks must be specified. If no colon is

specified, concatenation occurs with the trailing blanks, if any, in factor 1, or the
result field if factor 1 is not specified.
If the number of blanks, N, is specified, factor 1 is copied to the result field

left-justified. If factor 1 is not specified the result field string is used. Then N
blanks are added following the last non-blank character. Then factor 2 is appended
to this result. Leading blanks in factor 2 are not counted when N blanks are added
to the result; they are just considered to be part of factor 2. If the number of blanks
is not specified, the trailing and leading blanks of factor 1 and factor 2 are
included in the result.
The result field must be a string and can contain one of: a field name, array
element, data structure name, or table name. Its length should be the length of
factor 1 and factor 2 combined plus any intervening blanks; if it is not, truncation
occurs from the right. If the result field is variable-length, its length does not
change.
A P operation extender indicates that the result field should be padded on the
right with blanks after the concatenation occurs if the result field is longer than the
result of the operation. If padding is not specified, only the leftmost part of the
field is affected.
At run time, if the number of blanks is fewer than zero, the compiler defaults the
number of blanks to zero.

No overlapping is allowed in a data structure for factor 1 and the result
field, or for factor 2 and the result field.
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
* The following example shows leading blanks in factor 2. After
* the CAT, the RESULT contains ’MR.SMITH’.
*
C MOVE ’MR.’ NAME 3
C MOVE ’ SMITH’ FIRST 6
C NAME CAT FIRST RESULT 9
*
* The following example shows the use of CAT without factor 1.
* FLD2 is a 9 character string. Prior to the concatenation, it
* contains ’ABC’; FLD1 contains ’XYZ
* After the concatenation, FLD2 contains ’ABCXYZ’.
*
C MOVEL(P) ’ABC’ FLD2 9
C MOVE ’XYZ’ FLD1 3
C CAT FLD1:2 FLD2
Figure 242. CAT Operation
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
* CAT concatenates LAST to NAME and inserts one blank as specified
* in factor 2. TEMP contains ’Mr.Smith’.
C MOVE ’Mr. ’ NAME 6
C MOVE ’Smith ’ LAST 6
C NAME CAT LAST:1 TEMP 9
*
* CAT concatenates ’RPG’ to STRING and places ’RPG/400’ in TEMP.
C MOVE ’/400’ STRING 4
C ’RPG’ CAT STRING TEMP 7
*
* The following example is the same as the previous example except
* that TEMP is defined as a 10 byte field. P operation extender
* specifies that blanks will be used in the rightmost positions
* of the result field that the concatenation result, ’RPG/400’,
* does not fill. As a result, TEMP contains ’RPG/400’
* after concatenation.
C MOVE *ALL’*’ TEMP 10
C ’RPG’ CAT(P) STRING TEMP
*
* After this CAT operation, the field TEMP contains ’RPG/4’.
* Because the field TEMP was not large enough, truncation occurred.
C ’RPG’ CAT STRING TEMP 5
*
* Note that the trailing blanks of NAME are not included because
* NUM=0. The field TEMP contains ’RPGIV’.
C MOVE ’RPG ’ NAME 5
C MOVE ’IV ’ LAST 5
C Z-ADD 0 NUM 1 0
C NAME CAT(P) LAST:NUM TEMP 10
Figure 243. CAT Operation with leading blanks

*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
* The following example shows the use of graphic strings
*
DName+++++++++++ETDsFrom+++To/L+++IDc.Functions+++++++++++++++++++++++++
* Value of Graffld is ’AACCBBGG’.
* Value of Graffld2 after CAT ’aa AACCBBGG ’
* Value of Graffld3 after CAT ’AABBCCDDEEFFGGHHAACC’
*
D Graffld 4G INZ(G’oAACCBBGGi’)
D Graffld2 10G INZ
D Graffld3 10G INZ(G’oAABBCCDDEEFFGGHHi’)
* The value 2 represents 2 graphic blanks as separators
C G’oaai’ cat Graffld:2 Graffld2
C cat Graffld Graffld3
Figure 244. CAT Operation with Graphic data

CHAIN (Random Retrieval from a File)

| Free-Form Syntax CHAIN{(ENHMR)} search-arg name {data-structure}

CHAIN (E N) search-arg name (file or record format) data-structure NR ER _
The CHAIN operation retrieves a record from a full procedural file (F in position
18 of the file description specifications), sets a record identifying indicator on (if
specified on the input specifications), and places the data from the record into the
input fields.
| The search argument, search-arg, must be the key or relative record number used to
| retrieve the record. If access is by key, search-arg can be a a single key in the form
| of a field name, a named constant, a figurative constant, or a literal.
If the file is an externally-described file, search-arg can also be a composite key in

the form of a KLIST name, a list of values, or %KDS. Graphic and UCS-2 key fields
must have the same CCSID as the key in the file. For an example of %KDS, see the
example at the end of “%KDS (Search Arguments in Data Structure)” on page 475.
If access is by relative record number, search-arg must be an integer literal or a
numeric field with zero decimal positions.
The name operand specifies the file or record format name that is to be read. A
record format name is valid with an externally described file. If a file name is
specified in name and access is by key, the CHAIN operation retrieves the first
record that matches the search argument.
If name is a record format name and access is by key, the CHAIN operation
retrieves the first record of the specified record type whose key matches the search
argument. If no record is found of the specified record type that matches the
search argument, a no-record-found condition exists.
| If the data-structure operand is specified, the record is read directly into the data
| structure. If name refers to a program-described file (identified by an F in position
| 22 of the file description specification), the data structure can be any data structure
| of the same length as the file’s declared record length. If name refers to an
| externally-described file or a record format from an externally described file, the
| data structure must be a data structure defined with EXTNAME(...:*INPUT) or
| LIKEREC(...:*INPUT). See “File Operations” on page 397 for information on how
| data is transferred between the file and the data structure.
For a WORKSTN file, the CHAIN operation retrieves a subfile record.
For a multiple device file, you must specify a record format in the name operand.
Data is read from the program device identified by the field name specified in the
“DEVID(fieldname)” on page 270 keyword in the file specifications for the device
file. If the keyword is not specified, data is read from the device for the last
successful input operation to the file.
If the file is specified as an input DISK file, all records are read without locks and
so no operation extender can be specified. If the file is specified as update, all
records are locked if the N operation extender is not specified.

If you are reading from an update disk file, you can specify an N operation
extender to indicate that no lock should be placed on the record when it is read
(e.g. CHAIN (N)). See the WebSphere Development Studio: ILE RPG Programmer’s
Guide for more information.
You can specify an indicator in positions 71-72 that is set on if no record in the file
matches the search argument. This information can also be obtained from the
%FOUND built-in function, which returns ’0’ if no record is found, and ’1’ if a
record is found.
To handle CHAIN exceptions (file status codes greater than 1000), either the
For more information on error handling, see “File Exception/Errors” on page 65.
When the CHAIN operation is successful, the file specified in name is positioned
such that a subsequent read operation retrieves the record logically following or
preceding the retrieved record. When the CHAIN operation is not completed
successfully (for example, an error occurs or no record is found), the file specified
in name must be repositioned (for example, by a CHAIN or SETLL operation)
before a subsequent read operation can be done on that file.
If an update (on the calculation or output specifications) is done on the file

specified in name immediately after a successful CHAIN operation to that file, the
last record retrieved is updated.
See “Database Null Value Support” on page 206 for information on handling
| Note: Operation code extenders H, M, and R are allowed only when the search
| argument is a list or is %KDS().
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
* The CHAIN operation retrieves the first record from the file,
* FILEX, that has a key field with the same value as the search
* argument KEY (factor 1).
/FREE
CHAIN KEY FILEX;
// If a record with a key value equal to the search argument is

// not found, %FOUND returns ’0’ and the EXSR operation is
// processed. If a record is found with a key value equal
// to the search argument, the program continues with
// the calculations after the EXSR operation.
IFNOT %FOUND;
EXSR Not_Found;
ENDIF;
/END-FREE
Figure 245. CHAIN Operation with a File Name

| FFilename++IPEASF.....L.....A.Device+.Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++
| FCUSTFILE IF E K DISK
| /free
| // Specify the search keys directly in a list
| chain (’abc’ : ’AB’) custrec;
| // Expressions can be used in the list of keys
| chain (%xlate(custname : LO : UP) : companyCode + partCode)
| custrec;
| return;
||
| Figure 246. CHAIN Operation Using a List of Key Fields
| FFilename++IPEASF.....L.....A.Device+.Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++
| FCUSTFILE IF E K DISK
| D custRecDs ds likerec(custRec)
|
| /free
| // Read the record directly into the data structure
| chain (’abc’ : ’AB’) custRec custRecDs;
| // Use the data structure fields
| if (custRecDs.code = *BLANKS);
| custRecDs.code = getCompanyCode (custRecDs);
| update custRec custRecDs;
| endif;
||
| Figure 247. CHAIN Operation Using a Data Structure with an Externally-Described File

CHECK (Check Characters)

Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the %CHECK built-in function)

CHECK (E) Comparator string Base string:start Left- _ ER FD
position
The CHECK operation verifies that each character in the base string (factor 2) is
among the characters indicated in the comparator string (factor 1). The base string
and comparator string must be of the same type, either both character, both
graphic, or both UCS-2. (Graphic and UCS-2 types must have the same CCSID
value.) Verifying begins at the leftmost character of factor 2 and continues
character by character, from left to right. Each character of the base string is
compared with the characters of factor 1. If a match for a character in factor 2
exists in factor 1, the next base string character is verified. If a match is not found,
an integer value is placed in the result field to indicate the position of the incorrect
character.
You can specify a start position in factor 2, separating it from the base string by a
colon. The start position is optional and defaults to 1. If the start position is greater
than 1, the value in the result field is relative to the leftmost position in the base
string, regardless of the start position.
The operation stops checking when it finds the first incorrect character or when the
end of the base string is encountered. If no incorrect characters are found, the
result field is set to zero.
If the result field is an array, the operation continues checking after the first
incorrect character is found for as many occurrences as there are elements in the
array. If there are more array elements than incorrect characters, all of the
remaining elements are set to zeros.
Factor 1 must be a string, and can contain one of: a field name, array element,
named constant, data structure name, data structure subfield, literal, or table name.
Factor 2 must contain either the base string or the base string, followed by a colon,
followed by the start location. The base string portion of factor 2 can contain: a
field name, array element, named constant, data-structure name, literal, or table
name. The start location portion of factor 2 must be numeric with no decimal
positions, and can be a named constant, array element, field name, literal, or table
name. If no start location is specified, a value of 1 is used.
The result field can be a numeric variable, numeric array element, numeric table
name, or numeric array. Define the field or array specified with no decimal
positions. If graphic or UCS-2 data is used, the result field will contain double-byte
character positions (that is, position 3, the 3rd double-byte character, will be
character position 5).
field or for factor 2 and the result field.
Any valid indicator can be specified in positions 7 to 11.

To handle CHECK exceptions (program status code 100), either the operation code
extender ’E’ or an error indicator ER can be specified, but not both. For more
You can specify an indicator in positions 75-76 that is set on if any incorrect
characters are found. This information can also be obtained from the %FOUND
built-in function, which returns ’1’ if any incorrect characters are found.
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
* In this example, the result will be N=6, because the start
* position is 2 and the first nonnumeric character found is the ’.’.
* The %FOUND built-in function is set to return ’1’, because some
* nonnumeric characters were found.
*
D
D Digits C ’0123456789’
*
C
C MOVE ’$2000.’ Salary
C Digits CHECK Salary:2 N
C IF %FOUND
C EXSR NonNumeric
C ENDIF
*
* Because factor 1 is a blank, CHECK indicates the position
* of the first nonblank character. If STRING contains ’th
* NUM will contain the value 4.
*
C
C ’ ’ CHECK String Num 2 0
Figure 248. CHECK Operation
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
* The following example checks that FIELD contains only the letters
* A to J. As a result, ARRAY=(136000) after the CHECK operation.
* Indicator 90 turns on.
*
D
D Letter C ’ABCDEFGHIJ’
D
*
C
C MOVE ’1A=BC*’ Field 6
C Letter CHECK Field Array 90
C
*
* In the following example, because FIELD contains only the
* letters A to J, ARRAY=(000000). Indicator 90 turns off.
*
C
C MOVE ’FGFGFG’ Field 6
C Letter CHECK Field Array 90
C
C
Figure 249. CHECK Operation

*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
D
* The following example checks a DBCS field for valid graphic
* characters starting at graphic position 2 in the field.
D
* Value of Graffld is ’DDBBCCDD’.
* The value of num after the CHECK is 4, since this is the
* first character ’DD’ which is not contained in the string.
D
D Graffld 4G INZ(G’oDDBBCCDDi’)
D Num 5 0
D
C
C
C G’oAABBCCi’ check Graffld:2 Num
Figure 250. CHECK Operation with graphic data

CHECKR (Check Reverse)

Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the %CHECKR built-in function)

CHECKR (E) Comparator string Base string:start Right- _ ER FD
position
The CHECKR operation verifies that each character in the base string (factor 2) is
among the characters indicated in the comparator string (factor 1). The base string
and comparator string must be of the same type, either both character, both
graphic, or both UCS-2. (Graphic and UCS-2 types must have the same CCSID
value.) Verifying begins at the rightmost character of factor 2 and continues
character by character, from right to left. Each character of the base string is
compared with the characters of factor 1. If a match for a character in factor 2
exists in factor 1, the next source character is verified. If a match is not found, an
integer value is placed in the result field to indicate the position of the incorrect
character. Although checking is done from the right, the position placed in the
result field will be relative to the left.
You can specify a start position in factor 2, separating it from the base string by a
colon. The start position is optional and defaults to the length of the string. The
value in the result field is relative to the leftmost position in the source string,
regardless of the start position.
If the result field is not an array, the operation stops checking when it finds the
first incorrect character or when the end of the base string is encountered. If no
incorrect characters are found, the result field is set to zero.
If the result field is an array, the operation continues checking after the first
incorrect character is found for as many occurrences as there are elements in the
array. If there are more array elements than incorrect characters, all of the
remaining elements are set to zeros.
Factor 1 must be a string and can contain one of: a field name, array element,
named constant, data structure name, data structure subfield, literal, or table name.
followed by the start location. The base string portion of factor 2 can contain: a
field name, array element, named constant, data structure name, data structure
subfield name, literal, or table name. The start location portion of factor 2 must be
numeric with no decimal positions, and can be a named constant, array element,
field name, literal, or table name. If no start location is specified, the length of the
string is used.
The result field can be a numeric variable, numeric array element, numeric table
name, or numeric array. Define the field or array specified with no decimal
positions. If graphic or UCS-2 data is used, the result field will contain double-byte
character positions (that is, position 3, the 3rd double-byte character, will be
character position 5).
field, or for factor 2 and the result field.

Any valid indicator can be specified in positions 7 to 11.
To handle CHECKR exceptions (program status code 100), either the operation
You can specify an indicator in positions 75-76 that is set on if any incorrect
characters are found. This information can also be obtained from the %FOUND
built-in function, which returns ’1’ if any incorrect characters are found.
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
* Because factor 1 is a blank character, CHECKR indicates the
* position of the first nonblank character. This use of CHECKR
* allows you to determine the length of a string. If STRING
* contains ’ABCDEF ’, NUM will contain the value 6.
* If an error occurs, %ERROR is set to return ’1’ and
* %STATUS is set to return status code 00100.
*
C
C ’ ’ CHECKR(E) String Num
C
C SELECT
C WHEN %ERROR
C ... an error occurred
C WHEN %FOUND
C ... NUM is less than the full length of the string
C ENDIF
Figure 251. CHECKR Operation
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
* After the following example, N=1 and the found indicator 90
* is on. Because the start position is 5, the operation begins
* with the rightmost 0 and the first nonnumeric found is the ’$’.
*
D Digits C ’0123456789’
D
C
C MOVE ’$2000.’ Salary 6
C Digits CHECKR Salary:5 N 90
C

*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
* The following example checks that FIELD contains only the letters
* A to J. As a result, ARRAY=(876310) after the CHECKR operation.
* Indicator 90 turns on. %FOUND would return ’1’.
D
D Array S 1 DIM(6)
D Letter C ’ABCDEFGHIJ’
D
C
C MOVE ’1A=BC***’ Field 8
C Letter CHECKR Field Array 90
C

CLEAR (Clear)
CLEAR (Clear)
Free-Form Syntax CLEAR {*NOKEY} {*ALL} name

CLEAR *NOKEY *ALL name (variable
or record
format)
The CLEAR operation sets elements in a structure (record format, data structure,
array, or table) or a variable (field, subfield, array element or indicator), to their
default initialization value depending on field type (numeric, character, graphic,
UCS-2, indicator, pointer, or date/time/timestamp). For the default initialization
value for a data type, see Chapter 10, “Data Types and Data Formats” on page 167.
| Fully qualified names may be specified as the Result-Field operand for CLEAR
| when coded in free-form calculation specifications. If the structure or variable
being cleared is variable-length, its length changes to 0. The CLEAR operation
allows you to clear structures on a global basis, as well as element by element,
during run time.
Clearing Variables
You cannot specify *NOKEY.
*ALL is optional. If *ALL is specified and the name operand is a multiple

occurrence data structure or a table name, all occurrences or table elements are
cleared and the occurrence level or table index is set to 1.
The name operand specifies the variable to be cleared. The particular entry in the
name operand determines the clear action as follows:
Single occurrence data structure
All fields are cleared in the order in which they are declared within the
structure.
Multiple-occurrence data structure
If *ALL is not specified, all fields in the current occurrence are cleared. If
*ALL is specified, all fields in all occurrences are cleared.
Table name
If *ALL is not specified, the current table element is cleared. If *ALL is
specified, all table elements are cleared.
Array name
Entire array is cleared
Array element (including indicators)
Only the element specified is cleared.
Clearing Record Formats

*NOKEY is optional. If *NOKEY is specified, then key fields are not cleared to their
initial values.

CLEAR (Clear)
*ALL is optional. If *ALL is specified and *NOKEY is not, all fields in the record
format are cleared. If *ALL is not specified, only those fields that are output in that
record format are affected. If *NOKEY is specified, then key fields are not cleared,
even if *ALL is specified.
The name operand is the record format to be cleared. For WORKSTN file record
formats (positions 36-42 on a file-description specification), if *ALL is not specified,
only those fields with a usage of output or both are affected. All field-conditioning
indicators of the record format are affected by the operation. When the RESET
operation is applied to a record format name, and INDARA has been specified in
the DDS, the indicators in the record format are not cleared.
Fields in DISK, SEQ, or PRINTER file record formats are affected only if the record
format is output in the program. Input-only fields are not affected by the RESET
operation, except when *ALL is specified.
A RESET operation of a record format with *ALL specified is not valid when:
v A field is defined externally as input-only, and the record was not used for
input.
v A field is defined externally as output-only, and the record was not used for
output.
v A field is defined externally as both input and output capable, and the record
was not used for either input or output.
Note: Input-only fields in logical files will appear in the output specifications,
although they are not actually written to the file. When a CLEAR or RESET
without *NOKEY being specified is done to a record containing these fields,
then these fields will be cleared or reset because they appear in the output
specifications.
CLEAR Examples
v Figure 254 on page 559 shows an example of the CLEAR operation.
v Figure 255 on page 560 shows an example of the field initialization for the
CLEAR record format.
v The examples in “RESET Examples” on page 697 also apply to CLEAR, except
for the actual operation performed on the fields.

CLEAR (Clear)
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
D DS1 DS
D Num 2 5 0
D Char 20 30A
D
D MODS DS OCCURS(2)
D Fld1 1 5
D Fld2 6 10 0
* In the following example, CLEAR sets all subfields in the data

* structure DS1 to their defaults, CHAR to blank, NUM to zero.
/FREE
CLEAR DS1;
// In the following example, CLEAR sets all occurrences for the

// multiple occurrence data structure MODS to their default values
// Fld1 to blank, Fld2 to zero.
CLEAR *ALL MODS;
/END-FREE
Figure 254. CLEAR Operation

CLEAR (Clear)
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
A* Field2 and Field3 are defined as output capable fields and can be
A* affected by the CLEAR operation. Indicator 10 can also be
A* changed by the CLEAR operation even though it conditions an
A* input only field because field indicators are all treated
A* as output fields. The reason for this is that *ALL was not specifie
A* on the CLEAR operation
A*
A*N01N02N03T.Name++++++RLen++TDpBLinPosFunctions++++++++++++++++++++*
A R FMT01
A 10 Field1 10A I 2 30
A Field2 10A O 3 30
A Field3 10A B 4 30
A*
A* End of DDS source
A*
F*Flename++IPEASFRlen+LKlen+AIDevice+.Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++
FWORKSTN CF E WORKSTN INCLUDE(FMT01)
F
D*Name++++++++++ETDsFrom+++To/L+++IDc.Keywords++++++++++++++++++++++++
D IN C ’INPUT DATA’
/FREE
CLEAR FMT01;
WRITE FMT01;
// Loop until PF03 is pressed

DOW NOT *IN03;
READ FMT01;
*INLR = %EOF;
// PF04 will transfer input fields to output fields.

IF *IN04;
Field2 = Field3;
Field3 = Field1;
CLEAR *IN04;
ENDIF;
Field1 = IN;
// When PF11 is pressed, all the fields in the record format

// defined as output or both will be reset to the values they
// held after the initialization step.
IF *IN11;
RESET FMT01;
CLEAR *IN11;
ENDIF;
// When PF12 is pressed, all the fields in the record

// format defined as output or both will be cleared.
IF *IN12;
CLEAR FMT01;
CLEAR *IN12;
ENDIF;
IF NOT *IN03;
WRITE FMT01;
ENDIF;
ENDDO;
*INLR = *ON;
/END-FREE
Figure 255. Field Initialization for the CLEAR Record Format

CLOSE (Close Files)
CLOSE (Close Files)

Free-Form Syntax CLOSE{(E)} file-name|*ALL

CLOSE (E) file-name or *ALL _ ER _
The explicit CLOSE operation closes one or more files or devices and disconnects
| them from the module. The file cannot be used again in the module unless you
specify an explicit OPEN for that file. A CLOSE operation to an already closed file
does not produce an error.
file-name names the file to be closed. You can specify the keyword *ALL to close all
the files at once. You cannot specify an array or table file (identified by a T in
position 18 of the file description specifications).
To handle CLOSE exceptions (file status codes greater than 1000), either the
Positions 71, 72, 75, and 76 must be blank.
If an array or table is to be written to an output file (specified using the TOFILE

keyword) the array or table dump does not occur at LR time if the file is closed by
a CLOSE operation). If the file is closed, it must be reopened for the dump to
occur.
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
* The explicit CLOSE operation closes FILEB.
/FREE
CLOSE FILEB;
// The CLOSE *ALL operation closes all files in the

| // module. You must specify an explicit OPEN for any file that
// you wish to use again. If the CLOSE operation is not
// completed successfully, %ERROR returns ’1’.
CLOSE(E) *ALL;
/END-FREE
Figure 256. CLOSE Operation

COMMIT (Commit)
COMMIT (Commit)
Free-Form Syntax COMMIT{(E)} {boundary}

COMMIT (E) boundary _ ER _
The COMMIT operation:

v Makes all the changes to your files, opened for commitment control, that have
been specified in output operations since the previous commit or rollback
“ROLBK (Roll Back)” on page 705 operation (or since the beginning of
operations under commitment control if there has been no previous commit or
rollback operation). You specify a file to be opened for commit by specifying the
COMMIT keyword on the file specification.
v Releases all the record locks for files you have under commitment control.
The file changes and the record-lock releases apply to all the files you have under
commitment control, whether the changes have been requested by the program
issuing the COMMIT operation, or by another program in the same activation
group or job, dependent on the commit scope specified on the STRCMTCTL
command. The program issuing the COMMIT operation does not need to have any
files under commitment control. The COMMIT operation does not change the file
position.
Commitment control starts when the CL command STRCMTCTL is executed. See

the section on “Commitment Control” in the WebSphere Development Studio: ILE
RPG Programmer’s Guide for more information.
For the boundary operand, , you can specify a constant or variable (of any type
except pointer) to identify the boundary between the changes made by this
COMMIT operation and subsequent changes. If boundary is not specified, the
identifier is null.
To handle COMMIT exceptions (program status codes 802 to 805), either the
For example, an error occurs if commitment control is not active. For more

COMP (Compare)
COMP (Compare)
Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the =, <, >, <=, >=, or <> operator)

COMP Comparand Comparand HI LO EQ
The COMP operation compares factor 1 with factor 2. Factor 1 and factor 2 can
contain a literal, a named constant, a field name, a table name, an array element, a
data structure, or a figurative constant. Factor 1 and factor 2 must have the same
data type. As a result of the comparison, indicators are set on as follows:
v High: (71-72) Factor 1 is greater than factor 2.
v Low: (73-74) Factor 1 is less than factor 2.
v Equal: (75-76) Factor 1 equals factor 2.
You must specify at least one resulting indicator in positions 71 through 76. Do not
specify the same indicator for all three conditions. When specified, the resulting
indicators are set on or off (for each cycle) to reflect the results of the compare.
For further rules for the COMP operation, see “Compare Operations” on page 390.
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
* Initial field values are:
* FLDA = 100.00
* FLDB = 105.00
* FLDC = 100.00
* FLDD = ABC
* FLDE = ABCDE
*
* Indicator 12 is set on; indicators 11 and 13 are set off.
C FLDA COMP FLDB 111213
*
* Indicator 15 is set on; indicator 14 is set off.
C FLDA COMP FLDB 141515
*
* Indicator 18 is set on; indicator 17 is set off.
C FLDA COMP FLDC 171718
*
* Indicator 21 is set on; indicators 20 and 22 are set off
C FLDD COMP FLDE 202122
Figure 257. COMP Operation

DEALLOC (Free Storage)

Free-Form Syntax DEALLOC{(EN)} pointer-name

DEALLOC pointer-name _ ER _
(E/N)
The DEALLOC operation frees one previous allocation of heap storage.

pointer-name is a pointer that must be the value previously set by a heap-storage
allocation operation (either an ALLOC operation in RPG, or some other
heap-storage allocation mechanism). It is not sufficient to simply point to heap
storage; the pointer must be set to the beginning of an allocation.
The storage pointed to by the pointer is freed for subsequent allocation by this
program or any other in the activation group.
If operation code extender N is specified, the pointer is set to *NULL after a

successful deallocation.
To handle DEALLOC exceptions (program status code 426), either the operation
code extender ’E’ or an error indicator ER can be specified, but not both. The result
field pointer will not be changed if an error occurs, even if ’N’ is specified. For
more information on error handling, see “Program Exception/Errors” on page 82.
pointer-name must be a basing pointer scalar variable (a standalone field, data

structure subfield, table name or array element).
No error is given at runtime if the pointer is already *NULL.

*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
D Ptr1 S *
D Fld1 S 1A
D BasedFld S 7A BASED(Ptr1)
/FREE
// 7 bytes of storage are allocated from the heap and
// Ptr1 is set to point to it
Ptr1 = %alloc (7);
// The DEALLOC frees the storage. This storage is now available

// for allocation by this program or any other program in the
// activation group. (Note that the next allocation may or
// may not get the same storage back).
dealloc Ptr1;
// Ptr1 still points at the deallocated storage, but this pointer

// should not be used with its current value. Any attempt to
// access BasedFld which is based on Ptr1 is invalid.
Ptr1 = %addr (Fld1);
// The DEALLOC is not valid because the pointer is set to the

// address of program storage. %ERROR is set to return ’1’,
// the program status is set to 00426 (%STATUS returns 00426),
// and the pointer is not changed.
dealloc(e) Ptr1;
// Allocate and deallocate storage again. Since operational

// extender N is specified, Ptr1 has the value *NULL after the
// DEALLOC.
Ptr1 = %alloc (7);
dealloc(n) Ptr1;
/END-FREE
Figure 258. DEALLOC operation

DEFINE (Field Definition)

Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the LIKE or DTAARA keyword on the definition specification)

DEFINE *LIKE Referenced field Defined field
DEFINE *DTAARA External data area Internal field
Depending on the factor 1 entry, the declarative DEFINE operation can do either of
the following:
v Define a field based on the attributes (length and decimal positions) of another
field .
v Define a field as a data area .
You can specify the DEFINE operation anywhere within calculations, although you
cannot specify a *DTAARA DEFINE in a subprocedure or use it with a UCS-2
result field. The control level entry (positions 7 and 8) can be blank or can contain
an L1 through L9 indicator, the LR indicator, or an L0 entry to group the statement
within the appropriate section of the program. The control level entry is used for
documentation only. Conditioning indicator entries (positions 9 through 11) are not
permitted.
*LIKE DEFINE
The “DEFINE (Field Definition)” operation with *LIKE in factor 1 defines a field
based upon the attributes (length and decimal positions) of another field.
Factor 2 must contain the name of the field being referenced, and the result field
must contain the name of the field being defined. The field specified in factor 2,
which can be defined in the program or externally, provides the attributes for the
field being defined. Factor 2 cannot be a literal, a named constant, a float numeric
field, or an object. If factor 2 is an array, an array element, or a table name, the
attributes of an element of the array or table are used to define the field. The result
field cannot be an array, an array element, a data structure, or a table name.
Attributes such as ALTSEQ(*NO), NOOPT, ASCEND, CONST or null capability are
not inherited from factor 2 by the result field. Only the data type, length, and
decimal positions are inherited.
You can use positions 64 through 68 (field length) to make the result field entry
longer or shorter than the factor 2 entry. A plus sign (+) preceding the number
indicates a length increase; a minus sign (-) indicates a length decrease. Positions
65-68 can contain the increase or decrease in length (right-adjusted) or can be
blank. If positions 64 through 68 are blank, the result field entry is defined with
the same length as the factor 2 entry. You cannot change the number of decimal
positions for the field being defined. The field length entry is allowed only for
graphic, UCS-2, numeric, and character fields.
For graphic or UCS-2 fields the field length difference is calculated in double-byte
characters.
If factor 2 is a graphic or UCS-2 field, the result field will be defined as the same
type, that is, as graphic or UCS-2. The new field will have the default graphic or
UCS-2 CCSID of the module. If you want the new field to have the same CCSID as

the field in factor 2, use the LIKE keyword on a definition specification. The length
adjustment is expressed in double bytes.
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
* FLDA is a 7-position character field.
* FLDB is a 5-digit field with 2 decimal positions.
*
*
* FLDP is a 7-position character field.
C *LIKE DEFINE FLDA FLDP
*
* FLDQ is a 9-position character field.
C *LIKE DEFINE FLDA FLDQ +2
*
* FLDR is a 6-position character field.
C *LIKE DEFINE FLDA FLDR - 1
*
* FLDS is a 5-position numeric field with 2 decimal positions.
C *LIKE DEFINE FLDB FLDS
*
* FLDT is a 6-position numeric field with 2 decimal positions.
C *LIKE DEFINE FLDB FLDT + 1
*
* FLDU is a 3-position numeric field with 2 decimal positions.
C *LIKE DEFINE FLDB FLDU - 2
*
* FLDX is a 3-position numeric field with 2 decimal positions.
C *LIKE DEFINE FLDU FLDX
Figure 259. DEFINE Operation with *LIKE
Note the following for *LIKE DEFINE of numeric fields:

v If the field is fully defined on Definition Specifications, the format is not
changed by the *LIKE DEFINE.
v Otherwise, if the field is a subfield of a data structure, it is defined in zoned
format.
v Otherwise, the field is defined in packed format.
D DS
D Fld1
D Fld2 S 7P 2
*
* Fld1 will be defined as zoned because it is a subfield of a
* data structure and numeric subfields default to zoned format.
*
C *LIKE DEFINE Fld2 Fld1
*
* Fld3 will be defined as packed because it is a standalone field
* and all numeric items except subfields default to packed format.
C *LIKE DEFINE Fld1 Fld3
Figure 260. Using *LIKE DEFINE

*DTAARA DEFINE
The “DEFINE (Field Definition)” on page 566 operation with *DTAARA in factor 1
associates a field, a data structure, a data-structure subfield, or a data-area data
structure (within your ILE RPG program) with an AS/400 data area (outside your
ILE RPG program).
Note: You cannot use *DTAARA DEFINE within a subprocedure or with a UCS-2
result field.
In factor 2, specify the external name of a data area. Use *LDA for the name of the
local data area or use *PDA for the Program Initialization Parameters (PIP) data
area. If you leave factor 2 blank, the result field entry is both the RPG IV name and
the external name of the data area.
In the result field, specify the name of one of the following that you have defined
in your program: a field, a data structure, a data structure subfield, or a data-area
data structure. You use this name with the IN and OUT operations to retrieve data
from and write data to the data area specified in factor 2. When you specify a
data-area data structure in the result field, the ILE RPG program implicitly
retrieves data from the data area at program start and writes data to the data area
when the program ends.
The result field entry must not be the name of a program-status data structure, a
file-information data structure (INFDS), a multiple-occurrence data structure, an
input record field, an array, an array element, or a table. It cannot be the name of a
subfield of a multiple-occurrence data structure, of a data area data structure, of a
program-status data structure, of a file-information data structure (INFDS), or of a
data structure that already appears on a *DTAARA DEFINE statement, or has
already been defined as a data area using the DTAARA keyword on a definition
specification.
You can create three kinds of data areas:

v *CHAR Character
v *DEC Numeric
v *LGL Logical
You can also create a DDM data area (type *DDM) that points to a data area on a
remote system of one of the three types above.
Only character and numeric types (excluding float numeric) are allowed to be
associated with data areas. The actual data area on the system must be of the same
type as the field in the program, with the same length and decimal positions.
Indicator fields can be associated with either a logical or character data area.
For numeric data areas, the maximum length is 24 digits with 9 decimal places.
Note that there is a maximum of 15 digits to the left of the decimal place, even if
the number of decimals is less than 9.
In positions 64 through 70, you can define the length and number of decimal
positions for the entry in the result field. These specifications must match those for
the external description of the data area specified in factor 2. The local data area is
character data of length 1024, but within your program you can access the local
data area as if it has a length of 1024 or less.

*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
* The attributes (length and decimal positions) of
* the data area (TOTGRS) must be the same as those for the
* external data area.
C
C *DTAARA DEFINE TOTGRS 10 2
C
*
* The result field entry (TOTNET) is the name of the data area to
* be used within the ILE RPG program. The factor 2 entry (TOTAL)
* is the name of the data area as defined to the system.
C
C *DTAARA DEFINE TOTAL TOTNET
C
*
* The result field entry (SAVTOT) is the name of the data area to
* be used within the ILE RPG program. The factor 2 entry (*LDA)
* indicates the use of the local data area.
C
C *DTAARA DEFINE *LDA SAVTOT
Figure 261. DEFINE Operation with *DTAARA

DELETE (Delete Record)
DELETE (Delete Record)

| Free-Form Syntax DELETE{(EHMR)} {search-arg} name

DELETE (E) search-arg name (file or record format) NR ER _
The DELETE operation deletes a record from a database file. The file must be an
update file (identified by a U in position 17 of the file description specifications)
The deleted record can never be retrieved.
If a search argument (search-arg) is specified, the DELETE operation deletes the

current record (the last record retrieved). The record must have been locked by a
previous input operation (for example, CHAIN or READ).
| retrieve the record to be deleted. If access is by key, search-arg can be a single key
| in the form of a field name, a named constant, a figurative constant, or a literal.
If the file is an externally-described file, search-arg can also be a composite key in

the form of a KLIST name, a list of values, or %KDS. Graphic and UCS-2 key fields
must have the same CCSID as the key in the file. For an example of %KDS, see the
example at the end of “%KDS (Search Arguments in Data Structure)” on page 475.
If access is by relative record number, search-arg must be an integer literal or a
numeric field with zero decimal positions. For an example of using a list of values
to search for the record to be deleted, see Figure 246 on page 550.
The name operand must be the name of the update file or a record format in the
file from which a record is to be deleted. A record format name is valid only with
an externally described file. If search-arg is not specified, the record format name
must be the name of the last record read from the file; otherwise, an error occurs.
If search-arg is specified, positions 71 and 72 can contain an indicator that is set on

if the record to be deleted is not found in the file. If search-arg is not specified,
leave these positions blank. This information can also be obtained from the
%FOUND built-in function, which returns ’0’ if no record is found, and ’1’ if a
record is found.
To handle DELETE exceptions (file status codes greater than 1000), either the
Under the OS/400 operating system, if a read operation is done on the file
specified in file-name after a successful DELETE operation to that file, the next
record after the deleted record is obtained.
| records with null-capable fields and keys.
| Notes:
| 1. Operation code extenders H, M, and R are allowed only when the search
| 2. Leave positions 75 and 76 blank.

DIV (Divide)
DIV (Divide)
|| Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the / or /= operators, or the %DIV built-in function)
|

DIV (H) Dividend Divisor Quotient + − Z
If factor 1 is specified, the DIV operation divides factor 1 by factor 2; otherwise, it

divides the result field by factor 2. The quotient (result) is placed in the result field.
If factor 1 is 0, the result of the divide operation is 0. Factor 2 cannot be 0. If it is,
an error occurs and the RPG IVexception/error handling routine receives control.
When factor 1 is not specified, the result field (dividend) is divided by factor 2
(divisor), and the result (quotient) is placed in the result field. Factor 1 and factor 2
must be numeric; each can contain one of: an array, array element, field, figurative
constant, literal, named constant, subfield, or table name.
Any remainder resulting from the divide operation is lost unless the move
remainder (MVR) operation is specified as the next operation. If you use
conditioning indicators, you must ensure that the DIV operation is processed
immediately before the MVR operation. If the MVR operation is processed before
the DIV operation, undesirable results occur. If move remainder is the next
operation, the result of the divide operation cannot be half-adjusted (rounded).
For further rules for the DIV operation, see “Arithmetic Operations” on page 380.
Figure 146 on page 383 shows examples of the DIV operation.
Note: The MVR operation cannot follow a DIV operation if any operand of the
DIV operation is of float format. A float variable can, however, be specified
as the result of operation code MVR.

DO (Do)
DO (Do)
Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the FOR operation code)

DO Starting value Limit value Index value
The DO operation begins a group of operations and indicates the number of times
the group will be processed. To indicate the number of times the group of
operations is to be processed, specify an index field, a starting value, and a limit
value. An associated ENDDO statement marks the end of the group. For further
information on DO groups, see “Structured Programming Operations” on page 411.
In factor 1, specify a starting value with zero decimal positions, using a numeric
literal, named constant, or field name. If you do not specify factor 1, the starting
value is 1.
In factor 2, specify the limit value with zero decimal positions, using a numeric
field name, literal, or named constant. If you do not specify factor 2, the limit
value is 1.
In the result field, specify a numeric field name that will contain the current index
value. The result field must be large enough to contain the limit value plus the
increment. If you do not specify an index field, one is generated for internal use.
Any value in the index field is replaced by factor 1 when the DO operation begins.
Factor 2 of the associated ENDDO operation specifies the value to be added to the
index field. It can be a numeric literal or a numeric field with no decimal positions.
If it is blank, the value to be added to the index field is 1.
In addition to the DO operation itself, the conditioning indicators on the DO and

ENDDO statements control the DO group. The conditioning indicators on the DO
statement control whether or not the DO operation begins. These indicators are
checked only once, at the beginning of the DO loop. The conditioning indicators on
the associated ENDDO statement control whether or not the DO group is repeated
another time. These indicators are checked at the end of each loop.
The DO operation follows these 7 steps:

1. If the conditioning indicators on the DO statement line are satisfied, the DO
operation is processed (step 2). If the indicators are not satisfied, control passes
to the next operation to be processed following the associated ENDDO
statement (step 7).
2. The starting value (factor 1) is moved to the index field (result field) when the
DO operation begins.
3. If the index value is greater than the limit value, control passes to the
calculation operation following the associated ENDDO statement (step 7).
Otherwise, control passes to the first operation after the DO statement (step 4).
4. Each of the operations in the DO group is processed.
5. If the conditioning indicators on the ENDDO statement are not satisfied,
control passes to the calculation operation following the associated ENDDO
statement (step 7). Otherwise, the ENDDO operation is processed (step 6).

DO (Do)
6. The ENDDO operation is processed by adding the increment to the index field.
Control passes to step 3. (Note that the conditioning indicators on the DO
statement are not tested again (step 1) when control passes to step 3.)
7. The statement after the ENDDO statement is processed when the conditioning
indicators on the DO or ENDDO statements are not satisfied (step 1 or 5), or
when the index value is greater than the limit value (step 3).
Remember the following when specifying the DO operation:

v The index, increment, limit value, and indicators can be modified within the
loop to affect the ending of the DO group.
v A DO group cannot span both detail and total calculations.
See “LEAVE (Leave a Do/For Group)” on page 617 and “ITER (Iterate)” on
page 612 for information on how those operations affect a DO operation.
See “FOR (For)” on page 601 for information on performing iterative loops with
free-form expressions for the initial, increment, and limit values.
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
* The DO group is processed 10 times when indicator 17 is on;
* it stops running when the index value in field X, the result
* field, is greater than the limit value (10) in factor 2. When
* the DO group stops running, control passes to the operation
* immediately following the ENDDO operation. Because factor 1
* in the DO operation is not specified, the starting value is 1.
* Because factor 2 of the ENDDO operation is not specified, the
* incrementing value is 1.
C
C 17 DO 10 X 3 0
C :
C ENDDO
*
* The DO group can be processed 10 times. The DO group stops
* running when the index value in field X is greater than
* the limit value (20) in factor 2, or if indicator 50 is not on
* when the ENDDO operation is encountered. When indicator 50
* is not on, the ENDDO operation is not processed; therefore,
* control passes to the operation following the ENDDO operation.
* The starting value of 2 is specified in factor 1 of the DO
* operation, and the incrementing value of 2 is specified in
* factor 2 of the ENDDO operation.
*
C 2 DO 20 X 3 0
C :
C :
C :
C 50 ENDDO 2
Figure 262. DO Operation

DOU (Do Until)
DOU (Do Until)

Free-Form Syntax DOU{(MR)} indicator-expression

DOU (M/R) indicator-expression
The DOU operation code precedes a group of operations which you want to
execute at least once and possibly more than once. Its function is similar to that of
the DOUxx operation code. An associated ENDDO statement marks the end of the
group. It differs in that the logical condition is expressed by an indicator valued
expression (indicator-expression). The operations controlled by the DOU operation
are performed until the expression in indicator-expression is true. For information on
how operation extenders M and R are used, see “Precision Rules for Numeric
For fixed-format syntax, level and conditioning indicators are valid. Factor 1 must
be blank. Extended factor 2 contains the expression to be evaluated.
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
/FREE
// In this example, the do loop will be repeated until the F3
// is pressed.
dou *inkc;
do_something();
enddo;
// The following do loop will be repeated until *In01 is on

// or until FIELD2 is greater than FIELD3
dou *in01 or (Field2 > Field3);
do_something_else ();
enddo;
// The following loop will be repeated until X is greater than

// the number of elements in Array
dou X > %elem (Array);
Total = Total + Array(x);
X = X + 1;
enddo;
/END-FREE
Figure 263. DOU Operation

DOUxx (Do Until)
DOUxx (Do Until)

Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the DOU operation code)

DOUxx Comparand Comparand
The DOUxx operation code precedes a group of operations which you want to
execute at least once and possibly more than once. An associated ENDDO
statement marks the end of the group. For further information on DO groups and
the meaning of xx, see “Structured Programming Operations” on page 411.
Factor 1 and factor 2 must contain a literal, a named constant, a field name, a table
name, an array element, a figurative constant, or a data structure name. Factor 1
and factor 2 must be the same data type.
On the DOUxx statement, you indicate a relationship xx. To specify a more

complex condition, immediately follow the DOUxx statement with ANDxx or
ORxx statements. The operations in the DOUxx group are processed once, and
then the group is repeated until either:
v the relationship exists between factor 1 and factor 2
v the condition specified by a combined DOUxx, ANDxx, or ORxx operation exists
The group is always processed at least once even if the condition is true at the
start of the group.
In addition to the DOUxx operation itself, the conditioning indicators on the

DOUxx and ENDDO statements control the DOUxx group. The conditioning
indicators on the DOUxx statement control whether or not the DOUxx operation
begins. The conditioning indicators on the associated ENDDO statement can cause
a DO loop to end prematurely.
The DOUxx operation follows these steps:

1. If the conditioning indicators on the DOUxx statement line are satisfied, the
DOUxx operation is processed (step 2). If the indicators are not satisfied,
control passes to the next operation that can be processed following the
associated ENDDO statement (step 6).
2. The DOUxx operation is processed by passing control to the next operation that
can be processed (step 3). The DOUxx operation does not compare factor 1 and
factor 2 or test the specified condition at this point.
control passes to the next calculation operation following the associated
ENDDO statement (step 6). Otherwise, the ENDDO operation is processed (step
5).
5. The ENDDO operation is processed by comparing factor 1 and factor 2 of the
DOUxx operation or testing the condition specified by a combined operation. If
the relationship xx exists between factor 1 and factor 2 or the specified
condition exists, the DO group is finished and control passes to the next
calculation operation after the ENDDO statement (step 6). If the relationship xx
does not exist between factor 1 and factor 2 or the specified condition does not
exist, the operations in the DO group are repeated (step 3).

DOUxx (Do Until)
indicators on the DOUxx or ENDDO statements are not satisfied (steps 1 or 4),
or when the relationship xx between factor 1 and factor 2 or the specified
condition exists at step 5.
page 612 for information on how those operations affect a DOUxx operation.
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
* The DOUEQ operation runs the operation within the DO group at
* least once.
C
C FLDA DOUEQ FLDB
C
*
* At the ENDDO operation, a test is processed to determine whether
* FLDA is equal to FLDB. If FLDA does not equal FLDB, the
* preceding operations are processed again. This loop continues
* processing until FLDA is equal to FLDB. When FLDA is equal to
* FLDB, the program branches to the operation immediately
* following the ENDDO operation.
C
C SUB 1 FLDA
C ENDDO
C
*
* The combined DOUEQ ANDEQ OREQ operation processes the operation
* within the DO group at least once.
C
C FLDA DOUEQ FLDB
C FLDC ANDEQ FLDD
C FLDE OREQ 100
C
*
* At the ENDDO operation, a test is processed to determine whether
* the specified condition, FLDA equal to FLDB and FLDC equal to
* FLDD, exists. If the condition exists, the program branches to
* the operation immediately following the ENDDO operation. There
* is no need to test the OREQ condition, FLDE equal to 100, if the
* DOUEQ and ANDEQ conditions are met. If the specified condition
* does not exist, the OREQ condition is tested. If the OREQ
* condition is met, the program branches to the operation
* immediately following the ENDDO. Otherwise, the operations
* following the OREQ operation are processed and then the program
* processes the conditional tests starting at the second DOUEQ
* operation. If neither the DOUEQ and ANDEQ condition nor the
* OREQ condition is met, the operations following the OREQ
* operation are processed again.
C
C SUB 1 FLDA
C ADD 1 FLDC
C ADD 5 FLDE
C ENDDO
Figure 264. DOUxx Operations

DOW (Do While)
DOW (Do While)

Free-Form Syntax DOW{(MR)} indicator-expression

DOW (M/R) indicator-expression
The DOW operation code precedes a group of operations which you want to
process when a given condition exists. Its function is similar to that of the DOWxx
operation code. An associated ENDDO statement marks the end of the group. It
differs in that the logical condition is expressed by an indicator valued expression
(indicator-expression). The operations controlled by the DOW operation are
performed while the expression in indicator-expression is true. See Chapter 21,
“Expressions” on page 419 for details on expressions. For information on how
operation extenders M and R are used, see “Precision Rules for Numeric
For fixed-format syntax, level and conditioning indicators are valid. Factor 1 must
be blank. Factor 2 contains the expression to be evaluated.
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
* In this example, the do loop will be repeated until the condition
* is false. That is when A > 5 or B+C are not equal to zero.
/FREE
dow (a <= 5) and (b + c = 0);
do_something (a:b:c);
enddo;
/END-FREE
Figure 265. DOW Operation

DOWxx (Do While)
DOWxx (Do While)

Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the DOW operation code)

DOWxx Comparand Comparand
The DOWxx operation code precedes a group of operations which you want to
process when a given condition exists. To specify a more complex condition,
immediately follow the DOWxx statement with ANDxx or ORxx statements. An
associated ENDDO statement marks the end of the group. For further information
on DO groups and the meaning of xx, see “Structured Programming Operations”
on page 411.

constant, a field name, a table name, an array element, or a data structure name.
Factor 1 and factor 2 must be of the same data type. The comparison of factor 1
and factor 2 follows the same rules as those given for the compare operations. See
“Compare Operations” on page 390.
In addition to the DOWxx operation itself, the conditioning indicators on the

DOWxx and ENDDO statements control the DO group. The conditioning
indicators on the DOWxx statement control whether or not the DOWxx operation
is begun. The conditioning indicators on the associated ENDDO statement control
whether the DOW group is repeated another time.
The DOWxx operation follows these steps:

1. If the conditioning indicators on the DOWxx statement line are satisfied, the
DOWxx operation is processed (step 2). If the indicators are not satisfied,
control passes to the next operation to be processed following the associated
ENDDO statement (step 6).
2. The DOWxx operation is processed by comparing factor 1 and factor 2 or
testing the condition specified by a combined DOWxx, ANDxx, or ORxx
operation. If the relationship xx between factor 1 and factor 2 or the condition
specified by a combined operation does not exist, the DO group is finished and
control passes to the next calculation operation after the ENDDO statement
(step 6). If the relationship xx between factor 1 and factor 2 or the condition
specified by a combined operation exists, the operations in the DO group are
repeated (step 3).
control passes to the next operation to run following the associated ENDDO
statement (step 6). Otherwise, the ENDDO operation is processed (step 5).
5. The ENDDO operation is processed by passing control to the DOWxx operation
(step 2). (Note that the conditioning indicators on the DOWxx statement are not
tested again at step 1.)
indicators on the DOWxx or ENDDO statements are not satisfied (steps 1 or 4),
or when the relationship xx between factor 1 and factor 2 of the specified
condition does not exist at step 2.

DOWxx (Do While)
page 612 for information on how those operations affect a DOWxx operation.
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
* The DOWLT operation allows the operation within the DO group
* to be processed only if FLDA is less than FLDB. If FLDA is
* not less than FLDB, the program branches to the operation
* immediately following the ENDDO operation. If FLDA is less
* than FLDB, the operation within the DO group is processed.
C
C FLDA DOWLT FLDB
C
*
* The ENDDO operation causes the program to branch to the first
* DOWLT operation where a test is made to determine whether FLDA
* is less than FLDB. This loop continues processing until FLDA
* is equal to or greater than FLDB; then the program branches
* to the operation immediately following the ENDDO operation.
C
C MULT 2.08 FLDA
C ENDDO
C
* In this example, multiple conditions are tested. The combined
* DOWLT ORLT operation allows the operation within the DO group
* to be processed only while FLDA is less than FLDB or FLDC. If
* neither specified condition exists, the program branches to
* the operation immediately following the ENDDO operation. If
* either of the specified conditions exists, the operation after
* the ORLT operation is processed.
C
C FLDA DOWLT FLDB
C FLDA ORLT FLDC
C
* The ENDDO operation causes the program to branch to the second
* DOWLT operation where a test determines whether specified
* conditions exist. This loop continues until FLDA is equal to
* or greater than FLDB and FLDC; then the program branches to the
* operation immediately following the ENDDO operation.
C
C MULT 2.08 FLDA
C ENDDO
Figure 266. DOWxx Operations

DSPLY (Display Function)

Free-Form Syntax DSPLY{(E)} {message {output-queue {response}}}

DSPLY (E) message output-queue response _ ER _
The DSPLY operation allows the program to communicate with the display work
station that requested the program. Either message, response, or both operands must
be specified. The operation can display a message and accept a response.
The value in the message operand and possibly the response operand are used to
create the message to be displayed. message can be a field name, a literal, a named
constant, a table name, or an array element whose value is used to create the
| message to be displayed. Within free-form calculations, the message operand can
| be an expression, provided the expression is enclosed by parentheses. The message
operand can also be *M, followed by a message identifier that identifies the
message to be retrieved from the message file, QUSERMSG. Use the OVRMSGF CL
command to use a different message file. QUSERMSG must be in a library in the
library list of the job receiving the message.
The message identifier must be 7 characters in length consisting 3 alphabetic

characters and four numeric characters (for example, *MUSR0001, this means
message USR0001 is used).
If specified, the output-queue operand can be a character field, a literal, a named

constant, a table name, or an array element whose value is the symbolic name of
the object meant to receive the message and from which the optional response can
be sent. Any queue name, except a program message queue name, can be the value
contained in the output-queue operand. The queue must be declared to the OS/400
system before it can be used during program execution. (For information on how
to create a queue, see the CL Programming. There are two predefined queues:
Queue Value
QSYSOPR The message is sent to the system operator. Note that the
QSYSOPR message queue severity level must be zero (00) to enable
the DSPLY operation to immediately display a message to the
system operator.
*EXT The message is sent to the external message queue.
Note: For a batch job, if no output-queue value is specified, the default is

QSYSOPR. For an interactive job, the default value is *EXT.
The response operand is optional. If it is specified, the response is placed in it.

response can be a field name, a table name, or an array element in which the
response is placed. If no data is entered, response is unchanged. To specify a
response but no output queue in a free-form specification, specify ’ ’ for
output-queue.
| Fully qualified names may be specified as the Result-Field operand, and

| expressions are allowed as Factor 1 and Factor 2 operands, when coded in
| free-form calculation specifications. However, if the operand is more complex than
| a fully qualified name, the expression must be enclosed in parentheses.

To handle DSPLY exceptions (program status code 333), either the operation code
extender ’E’ or an error indicator ER can be specified, but not both. The exception
is handled by the specified method if an error occurs on the operation. For more
When you specify the DSPLY operation with no message identifier in the message
operand, the operation functions as follows:
v If the message operand is specified but the response operand is not, the contents
of the message operand are displayed. The program does not wait for a response
unless a display file with the parameter RSTDSP (*NO) specified was used to
display a format at the workstation. Then the program waits for the user to
press Enter.
v If the message operand is not specified but the response operand is, the contents
of the response operand are displayed and the program waits for the user to
enter data for the response. The reply is placed in the response operand.
v When both message and response operands are specified,, their contents are
combined and displayed. The program waits for the user to enter data for the
response. The response is placed in the result field.
v If you request help on the message, you can find the type and attributes of the
data that is expected and the number of unsuccessful attempts that have been
made.
The maximum length of information that can be displayed is 52 bytes.
The format of the record written by the DSPLY operation with no message
identifier specified by the message operand follows:
Variable Length 1 Variable Length 1
DSPLY
blank Contents of blank Contents of the

factor 1 if it result field if both
is specified factor 1 and the
or result field are
contents of specified.
the result field
if factor 1 is
not specified.
Figure 267. DSPLY Operation Record Format. 1The maximum length of information that can
be displayed is 52 bytes.
When you specify the DSPLY operation with a message identifier in the message
operand, the operation functions as follows: the message identified in the message
operand is retrieved from QUSERMSG, the message is displayed, and the program
waits for the user to respond by entering data if the response operand is specified.
The response is placed in the result field.
When replying to a message, remember the following:

v Non-float numeric fields sent to the display are right-adjusted and
zero-suppressed.

v If a non-float numeric field is entered with a length greater than the number of
digits in the result field and the rightmost character is not a minus sign (-), an
error is detected and a second wait occurs. The user must key in the field again.
v A float value is entered in the external display representation. It can be no
longer than 14 characters for 4-byte float fields, and no longer than 23 characters
for 8-byte float fields.
v If graphic, UCS-2, or character data is entered, the length must be equal or less
than the receiving field length.
v If the result field is variable-length, its length will be set to the length of the
value that you enter.
v If a date, time, or timestamp field is entered, the format and separator must
match the format and separator of the result field. If the format or separator do
not match, or the value is not valid (for example a date of 1999/99/99), an error
is detected and a second wait occurs. The user must key in the field again.
v The DSPLY operation allows the workstation user up to 5 attempts to respond to
the message. After the fifth unsuccessful attemp, the DSPLY operation fails. If
the DSPLY operation does not have a message identifier specified in the message
operand, the user can request help on the message to find the type and
attributes of the expected response.
v To enter a null response to the system operator queue (QSYSOPR), the user must
enter the characters *N and then press Enter.
v Graphic, UCS-2, or character fields are padded on the right with blanks after all
characters are entered.
v UCS-2 fields are displayed and entered as single-byte characters.
v Numeric fields are right-adjusted and padded on the left with zeros after all
characters are entered.
v Lowercase characters are not converted to uppercase.
v If factor 1 or the result field is of graphic data type, they will be bracketed by
SO/SI when displayed. The SO/SI will be stripped from the value to be
assigned to the graphic result field on input.
v Float fields are displayed in the external display representation. Float values can
be entered as numeric literals or float literals. When entering a response, the
float value does not have to be normalized.
| /free
| // Display prompt and wait for response:
| dsply prompt ’’ result;
| // Display string constructed in an expression:
| dsply (’Length of name is ’ + %char(%len(str)) + ’ bytes.’);
| /end-free
||
| Figure 268. DSPLY Operation Code Examples

DUMP (Program Dump)
DUMP (Program Dump)

Free-Form Syntax DUMP{(A)} {identifier}

DUMP (A) identifier
The DUMP operation provides a dump (all fields, all files, indicators, data
structures, arrays, and tables defined) of the program. It can be used
independently or in combination with the OS/400 testing and debugging
functions. When the OPTIMIZE(*FULL) compiler option is selected on either the
CRTBNDRPG or CRTRPGMOD command or as a keyword on a control
specification, the field values shown in the dump may not reflect the actual content
due to the effects of optimization.
If the DBGVIEW(*NONE) compiler option is specified, the dump will only show
the program status data structure, the file information data structures, and the *IN
indicators. Other variables will not have their contents shown because the object
does not contain the necessary observability information.
If the DEBUG(*NO) control-specification keyword is specified, no dump is

performed. You can override this keyword by specifying operation extender A.
This operation extender means that a dump is always performed, regardless of the
value of the DEBUG keyword.
The contents of the optional identifier operand identify the DUMP operation. It will
replace the default heading on the dump listing if specified. It must contain a
character or graphic entry that can be one of: a field name, literal, named constant,
table name, or array element whose contents identify the dump. If the identifier
operand is a graphic entry, it is limited to 64 double byte characters. identifier
cannot be a figurative constant.
The program continues processing the next calculation statement following the
DUMP operation.
The DUMP operation is performed if the DEBUG keyword is specified on the

control specification, or the A operation extender is coded for the DUMP operation.
Otherwise, the DUMP operation is checked for errors and the statement is printed
on the listing, but the DUMP operation is not processed.
When dumping files, the DUMP will dump the File Feedback Information section
of the INFDS, but not the Open Feedback Information or the Input/Output
Feedback Information sections of the INFDS. DUMP will instead dump the actual
Open Feedback, and Device Feedback Information for the file.
Note that if the INFDS you have declared is not large enough to contain the Open
Feedback, or Input/Output Feedback Information, then you do not have to worry
about doing a POST before DUMP since the File Feedback Information in the
INFDS is always up to date.
The values of variables in subprocedures may not be valid if the subprocedure is

not active. If a subprocedure has been called recursively, the values from the most
recent invocation are shown.

DUMP (Program Dump)
Java object variables may not show the expected value. The RPG module may
retain the reference to an object after the object no longer exists; it is possible for
an object reference to be reused, and refer to a different object that is unrelated to
the RPG module being dumped. That different object is the one that will appear in
the formatted dump.
For an sample dump listing, see the chapter on obtaining dumps in the WebSphere

ELSE (Else)
ELSE (Else)
Free-Form Syntax ELSE

ELSE
The ELSE operation is an optional part of the IFxx and IF operations. If the IFxx
comparison is met, the calculations before ELSE are processed; otherwise, the
calculations after ELSE are processed.
Within total calculations, the control level entry (positions 7 and 8) can be blank or
can contain an L1 through L9 indicator, an LR indicator, or an L0 entry to group
the statement within the appropriate section of the program. The control level
entry is for documentation purposes only. Conditioning indicator entries (positions
9 through 11) are not permitted. To close the IFxx/ELSE group use an ENDIF
operation.
Figure 278 on page 609 shows an example of an ELSE operation with an IFxx
operation.

ELSEIF (Else If)
ELSEIF (Else If)

Free-Form Syntax ELSEIF{(MR)} indicator-expression

ELSEIF (M/R) Blank indicator-expression
The ELSE operation is the combination of an ELSE operation and an IF operation.

It avoids the need for an additional level of nesting.
The IF operation code allows a series of operation codes to be processed if a

condition is met. Its function is similar to that of the IFxx operation code. It differs
in that the logical condition is expressed by an indicator valued expression
(indicator-expression). The operations controlled by the ELSEIF operation are
performed when the expression in the indicator-expression operand is true (and the
expression for the previous IF or ELSEIF statement was false).
For information on how operation extenders M and R are used, see “Precision
Rules for Numeric Operations” on page 428.
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
/free
IF keyPressed = HELPKEY;
displayHelp();
ELSEIF keyPressed = EXITKEY;
return;
ELSEIF keyPressed = ROLLUP OR keyPressed = ROLLDOWN;
scroll (keyPressed);
ELSE;
signalError (’Key not defined’);
ENDIF;
/end-free
Figure 269. ELSEIF Operation

ENDyy (End a Structured Group)

Free-Form Syntax ENDDO
ENDFOR
ENDIF
ENDMON
ENDSL
(END and ENDCS not allowed)

END increment-value
ENDCS
ENDDO increment- value
ENDFOR
ENDIF
ENDMON
ENDSL
The ENDyy operation ends a CASxx, DO, DOU, DOW, DOUxx, DOWxx, FOR, IF,
IFxx, MONITOR, or SELECT group of operations.
The ENDyy operations are listed below:

END End a CASxx, DO, DOU, DOUxx, DOW, DOWxx, FOR, IF, IFxx, or
SELECT group
ENDCS End a CASxx group
ENDDO End a DO, DOU, DOUxx, DOW, or DOWxx group
ENDFOR End a FOR group
ENDIF End an IF or IFxx group
ENDMON End a MONITOR group
ENDSL End a SELECT group
The increment- value operand is allowed only on an ENDyy operation that delimits
a DO group. It contains the incrementing value of the DO group. It can be positive
or negative, must have zero decimal positions, and can be one of: an array
element, table name, data structure, field, named constant, or numeric literal. If
increment- value is not specified on the ENDDO, the increment defaults to 1. If
increment- value is negative, the DO group will never end.
Conditioning indicators are optional for ENDDO or ENDFOR and not allowed for
ENDCS, ENDIF, ENDMON, and ENDSL.
Resulting indicators are not allowed. No operands are allowed for ENDCS, ENDIF,
ENDMON, and ENDSL.
If one ENDyy form is used with a different operation group (for example, ENDIF
with a structured group), an error results at compilation time.

See the CASxx, DO, DOUxx, DOWxx, FOR, IFxx, and DOU, DOW, IF, MONITOR,
and SELECT operations for examples that use the ENDyy operation.

ENDSR (End of Subroutine)
ENDSR (End of Subroutine)

Free-Form Syntax ENDSR {return-point}

ENDSR label return-point
The ENDSR operation defines the end of an RPG IV subroutine and the return
point (return-point) to the main program. ENDSR must be the last statement in the
subroutine. In traditional syntax, the label operand can be specified as a point to
which a GOTO operation within the subroutine can branch. (You cannot specify a
label in free-form syntax.) The control level entry (positions 7 and 8) can be SR or
blank. Conditioning indicator entries are not allowed.
The ENDSR operation ends a subroutine and causes a branch back to the
statement immediately following the EXSR or CASxx operation unless the
subroutine is a program exception/error subroutine (*PSSR) or a file
exception/error subroutine (INFSR). For these subroutines, the return-point operand
of the ENDSR operation can contain an entry that specifies where control is to be
returned following processing of the subroutine. This entry can be a field name
that contains a reserved keyword or a literal or named constant that is a reserved
keyword. If a return point that is not valid is specified, the RPG IV error handler
receives control.
Note: The return-point operand cannot be specified for an ENDSR operation that
occurs within a subprocedure.
See “File Exception/Error Subroutine (INFSR)” on page 79 for more detail on

return points.
See Figure 156 on page 416 for an example of coding an RPG IV subroutine.

EVAL (Evaluate expression)

|| Free-Form Syntax {EVAL{(HMR)}} result = expression
| {EVAL{(HMR)}} result += expression
| {EVAL{(HMR)}} result -= expression
| {EVAL{(HMR)}} result *= expression
| {EVAL{(HMR)}} result /= expression
| {EVAL{(HMR)}} result **= expression
|

EVAL (H M/R) Assignment Statement
| The EVAL operation code evaluates an assignment statement of the form "result =
| expression" or "result op = expression". The expression is evaluated and the
result placed in result. Therefore, result cannot be a literal or constant but must be
a field name, array name, array element, data structure, data structure subfield, or
a string using the %SUBST built-in function.
The expression may yield any of the RPG data types. The type of the expression
must be the same as the type of the result. A character, graphic, or UCS-2 result
will be left justified and padded with blanks on the right or truncated as required.
If result is a variable-length field, its length will be set to the length of the result of
the expression.
If the result represents an unindexed array or an array specified as array(*), the

value of the expression is assigned to each element of the result, according to the
rules described in “Specifying an Array in Calculations” on page 160. Otherwise,
the expression is evaluated once and the value is placed into each element of the
array or sub-array. For numeric expressions, the half-adjust operation code
extender is allowed. The rules for half adjusting are equivalent to those for the
arithmetic operations.
On a free-form calculation specification, the operation code name may be omitted

if no extenders are needed.
| For the assignment operators +=, -=, *=, /=, and **=, the appropriate operation is
| applied to the result and the expression, and the result is assigned to the result.
| For example, statement X+=Y is roughly equivalent to X=X+Y. The difference
| between the two statements is that for these assignment operators, the result
| operand is evaluated only once. This difference is significant when the evaluation
| of the result operation involves a call to a subprocedure which has side-effects, for
| example:
| warnings(getNextCustId(OVERDRAWN)) += 1;
See Chapter 21, “Expressions” on page 419 for general information on expressions.
See “Precision Rules for Numeric Operations” on page 428 for information on
precision rules for numeric expressions. This is especially important if the
expression contains any divide operations, or if the EVAL uses any of the operation
extenders.

*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
* Assume FIELD1 = 10
* FIELD2 = 9
* FIELD3 = 8
* FIELD4 = 7
* ARR is defined with DIM(10)
* *IN01 = *ON
* A = ’abcdefghijklmno’ (define as 15 long)
* CHARFIELD1 = ’There’ (define as 5 long)
/FREE
// The content of RESULT after the operation is 20
eval RESULT=FIELD1 + FIELD2+(FIELD3-FIELD4);
// The indicator *IN03 will be set to *ON
*IN03 = *IN01 OR (FIELD2 > FIELD3);
// Each element of array ARR will be assigned the value 72
ARR(*) = FIELD2 * FIELD3;
// After the operation, the content of A = ’Hello There ’
A = ’Hello ’ + CHARFIELD1;
// After the operation the content of A = ’HelloThere ’
A = %TRIMR(’Hello ’) + %TRIML(CHARFIELD1);
// Date in assignment
ISODATE = DMYDATE;
// Relational expression
// After the operation the value of *IN03 = *ON
*IN03 = FIELD3 < FIELD2;
// Date in Relational expression
// After the operation, *IN05 will be set to *ON if Date1 represents
// a date that is later that the date in Date2
*IN05 = Date1 > Date2;
// After the EVAL the original value of A contains ’ab****ghijklmno’
%SUBST(A(3:4))= ’****’;
// After the EVAL PTR has the address of variable CHARFIELD1
PTR = %ADDR(CHARFIELD1);
// An example to show that the result of a logical expression is
// compatible with the character data type.
// The following EVAL statement consisting of 3 logical expressions
// whose results are concatenated using the ’+’ operator
// The resulting value of the character field RES is ’010’
RES = (FIELD1<10) + *in01 + (field2 >= 17);
// An example of calling a user-defined function using EVAL.
// The procedure FormatDate converts a date field into a character
// string, and returns that string. In this EVAL statement, the
// field DateStrng1 is assigned the output of formatdate.
DateStrng1 = FormatDate(Date1);
| // Subtract value in complex data structure.
| cust(custno).account(accnum).balance -= purchase_amount;
| // Add days and months to a date
| DATE += %DAYS(12) + %MONTHS(3);
| // Append characters to varying length character variable
| line += ’<br />’;
| /END-FREE
Figure 270. EVAL Operations

EVALR (Evaluate expression, right adjust)
EVALR (Evaluate expression, right adjust)

Free-Form Syntax EVALR{(MR)} result = expression

EVALR (M/R) Assignment Statement
The EVALR operation code evaluates an assignment statement of the form

result=expression. The expression is evaluated and the result is placed
right-adjusted in the result. Therefore, the result cannot be a literal or constant, but
must be a fixed-length character, graphic, or UCS-2 field name, array name, array
element, data structure, data structure subfield, or a string using the %SUBST
built-in function. The type of the expression must be the same as the type of the
result. The result will be right justified and padded with blanks on the left, or
truncated on the left as required.
Note: Unlike the EVAL operation, the result of EVALR can only be of type
character, graphic, or UCS-2. In addition, only fixed length result fields are
allowed, although %SUBST can contain a variable length field if this built-in
function forms the lefthand part of the expression.
If the result represents an unindexed array or an array specified as array(*), the

value of the expression is assigned to each element of the result, according to the
rules described in “Specifying an Array in Calculations” on page 160. Otherwise,
the expression is evaluated once and the value is placed into each element of the
array or sub-array.
See Chapter 21, “Expressions” on page 419 for general information on expressions.
See “Precision Rules for Numeric Operations” on page 428 for information on
precision rules for numeric expressions. This is especially important if the
expression contains any divide operations, or if the EVALR uses any of the
operation extenders.
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
D Name S 20A
/FREE
eval Name = ’Kurt Weill’;
// Name is now ’Kurt Weill ’
evalr Name = ’Johann Strauss’;
// Name is now ’ Johann Strauss’
evalr %SUBST(Name:1:12) = ’Richard’;
// Name is now ’ Richard Strauss’
eval Name = ’Wolfgang Amadeus Mozart’;
// Name is now ’Wolfgang Amadeus Moz’
evalr Name = ’Wolfgang Amadeus Mozart’;
// Name is now ’fgang Amadeus Mozart’
/END-FREE
Figure 271. EVALR Operations

EXCEPT (Calculation Time Output)

Free-Form Syntax EXCEPT {except-name}

EXCEPT except-name
The EXCEPT operation allows one or more records to be written during either
detail calculations or total calculations. See Figure 272 on page 594 for examples of
the EXCEPT operation.
When specifying the EXCEPT operation remember:

v The exception records that are to be written during calculation time are
indicated by an E in position 17 of the output specifications. An EXCEPT name,
which is the same name as specified by the except-name operand of an EXCEPT
operation, can be specified in positions 30 through 39 of the output
specifications of the exception records.
v Only exception records, not heading, detail, or total records, can contain an
EXCEPT name.
v When the EXCEPT operation with a name specified in the except-name operand
is processed, only those exception records with the same EXCEPT name are
checked and written if the conditioning indicators are satisfied.
v When no except-name is specified, only those exception records with no name in
positions 30 through 39 of the output specifications are checked and written if
the conditioning indicators are satisfied.
v If an exception record is conditioned by an overflow indicator on the output
specification, the record is written only during the overflow portion of the RPG
IV cycle or during fetch overflow. The record is not written at the time the
EXCEPT operation is processed.
v If an exception output is specified to a format that contains no fields, the
following occurs:
– If an output file is specified, a record is written with default values.
– If a record is locked, the system treats the operation as a request to unlock the
record. This is the alternative form of requesting an unlock. The preferred
method is with the UNLOCK operation.

*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
* When the EXCEPT operation with HDG specified in factor 2 is
* processed, all exception records with the EXCEPT name HDG are
* written. In this example, UDATE and PAGE would be printed
* and then the printer would space 2 lines.
* The second HDG record would print a line of dots and then the
* printer would space 3 lines.
*
C EXCEPT HDG
*
* When the EXCEPT operation with no entry in factor 2 is
* processed, all exception records that do not have an EXCEPT
* name specified in positions 30 through 39 are written if the
* conditioning indicators are satisfied. Any exception records
* without conditioning indicators and without an EXCEPT name
* are always written by an EXCEPT operation with no entry in
* factor 2. In this example, if indicator 10 is on, TITLE and
* AUTH would be printed and then the printer would space 1 line.
*
C EXCEPT
O*
OFilename++DF..N01N02N03Excnam++++B++A++Sb+Sa+.............................
O..............N01N02N03Field+++++++++YB.End++PConstant/editword/DTformat++
O
O E 10 1
O TITLE
O AUTH
O E HDG 2
O UDATE
O PAGE
O E HDG 3
O ’...............’
O ’...............’
O E DETAIL 1
O AUTH
O VERSNO
Figure 272. EXCEPT Operation with/without Factor 2 Specified

EXFMT (Write/Then Read Format)

Free-Form Syntax EXFMT{(E)} format-name

EXFMT (E) format-name _ ER _
The EXFMT operation is a combination of a WRITE followed by a READ to the

same record format. EXFMT is valid only for a WORKSTN file defined as a full
procedural (F in position 18 of the file description specifications) combined file (C
in position 17 of the file description specifications) that is externally described (E in
position 22 of the file description specifications)
The format-name operand must be the name of the record format to be written and
then read.
To handle EXFMT exceptions (file status codes greater than 1000), either the
When an error occurs, the read portion of the operation is not processed
(record-identifying indicators and fields are not modified). For more information
on error handling, see “File Exception/Errors” on page 65.
Positions 71, 72, 75, and 76 must be blank.
For the use of EXFMT with multiple device files, see the descriptions of the READ
(by format name) and WRITE operations.

*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
F*Flename++IPEASFRLen+LKlen+AIDevice+.Keywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++
*
* PROMTD is a WORKSTN file which prompts the user for an option.
* Based on what user enters, this program executes different
* subroutines to add, delete, or change a record.
*
FPROMTD CF E WORKSTN
/free
// If user enters F3 function key, indicator *IN03 is set
// on and the do while loop is exited.
dow not *in03;
// EXFMT writes out the prompt to the screen and expects user to
// enter an option. SCR1 is a record format name defined in the
// WORKSTN file and OPT is a field defined in the record.
exfmt SCR1;
select;
when opt = ’A’;
exsr AddRec;
when opt = ’D’;
exsr DelRec;
when opt = ’C’;
exsr ChgRec;
endsl;
enddo;
do_something ();
do_more_stuff ();
/end-free
Figure 273. EXFMT Operation

EXSR (Invoke Subroutine)
EXSR (Invoke Subroutine)

Free-Form Syntax EXSR subroutine-name

EXSR subroutine-name
The EXSR operation causes the RPG IV subroutine named in the subroutine-name
operand to be processed. The subroutine name must be a unique symbolic name
and must appear as the subroutine-name operand of a BEGSR operation. The EXSR
operation can appear anywhere in the calculation specifications. Whenever it
appears, the subroutine that is named is processed. After operations in the
subroutine are processed, the statement following the EXSR operation is processed,
except when a GOTO within the subroutine is given to a label outside the
subroutine or when the subroutine is an exception/error subroutine specified by
the return-point operand of the ENDSR operation.
*PSSR used in the subroutine-name operand specifies that the program

exception/error subroutine is to be processed. *INZSR used in the subroutine-name
operand specifies that the program initialization subroutine is to be processed.
See “Coding Subroutines” on page 414 for more information.

EXTRCT (Extract Date/Time/Timestamp)

Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the %SUBDT built-in function)

EXTRCT (E) Date/Time: Duration Code Target _ ER _
The EXTRCT operation code will return one of:

v The year, month or day part of a date or timestamp field
v The hours, minutes or seconds part of a time or timestamp field
v The microseconds part of the timestamp field
to the field specified in the result field.
The Date, Time or Timestamp from which the information is required, is specified
in factor 2, followed by the duration code. The entry specified in factor 2 can be a
field, subfield, table element, or array element. The duration code must be
consistent with the Data type of factor 2. See “Date Operations” on page 393 for
valid duration codes.
Factor 1 must be blank.
The result field can be any numeric or character field, subfield, array/table
element. The result field is cleared before the extracted data is assigned. For a
character result field, the data is put left adjusted into the result field.
Note: When using the EXTRCT operation with a Julian Date (format *JUL),
specifying a duration code of *D will return the day of the month,
specifying *M will return the month of the year. If you require the day and
month to be in the 3-digit format, you can use a basing pointer to obtain it.
See Figure 94 on page 202 for an example of obtaining the Julian format.
To handle EXTRCT exceptions (program status code 112), either the operation code

D LOGONDATE S D
D DATE_STR S 15
D MONTHS S 8 DIM(12) CTDATA
C*0N01Factor1+++++++Opcode(E)+Factor2+++++++Result++++++++Len++D+HiLoEq....
* Move the job date to LOGONDATE. By default, LOGONDATE has an *ISO
* date format, which contains a 4-digit year. *DATE also contains a
* 4-digit year, but in a different format, *USA.
C *USA MOVE *DATE LOGONDATE
*
* Extract the month from a date field to a 2-digit field
* that is used as an index into a character array containing
* the names of the months. Then extract the day from the
* timestamp to a 2-byte character field which can be used in
* an EVAL concatenation expression to form a string.
* For example, if LOGONDATE is March 17, 1996, LOGMONTH will
* contain 03, LOGDAY will contain 17, and DATE_STR will contain
* ’March 17’.
C EXTRCT LOGONDATE:*M LOGMONTH 2 0
C EXTRCT LOGONDATE:*D LOGDAY 2
C EVAL DATE_STR = %TRIMR(MONTHS(LOGMONTH))
C + ’ ’ + LOGDAY
C SETON LR
** CTDATA MONTHS
January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
Figure 274. EXTRCT Operation

FEOD (Force End of Data)
FEOD (Force End of Data)

|| Free-Form Syntax FEOD{(EN)} file-name
|
|| Code Factor 1 Factor 2 Result Field Indicators
| FEOD (EN) file-name _ ER _
|
The FEOD operation signals the logical end of data for a primary, secondary, or
full procedural file. The FEOD function differs, depending on the file type and
device. (For an explanation of how FEOD differs per file type and device, see the
iSeries Information Center database and file systems category).
FEOD differs from the CLOSE operation: the program is not disconnected from the
device or file; the file can be used again for subsequent file operations without an
explicit OPEN operation being specified to the file.
You can specify conditioning indicators. The file-name operand names the file to
which FEOD is specified.
| Operation extender N may be specified for an FEOD to an output-capable DISK or

| SEQ file that uses blocking (see “Blocking Considerations” on page 76). If operation
| extender N is specified, any unwritten records in the block will be written out to
| the database, but they will not necessarily be written to non-volatile storage. Using
| the N extender can improve performance.
To handle FEOD exceptions (file status codes greater than 1000), either the
To process any further sequential operations to the file after the FEOD operation
(for example, READ or READP), you must reposition the file.

FOR (For)
FOR (For)
Free-Form Syntax FOR{(MR)} index-name {= start-value} {BY increment} {TO|DOWNTO limit}

FOR index-name = start-value BY increment TO | DOWNTO limit
The FOR operation begins a group of operations and controls the number of times
the group will be processed. To indicate the number of times the group of
operations is to be processed, specify an index name, a starting value, an increment
value, and a limit value. The optional starting, increment, and limit values can be a
free-form expressions. An associated END or ENDFOR statement marks the end of
the group. For further information on FOR groups, see “Structured Programming
The syntax of the FOR operation is as follows:

FOR index-name { = starting-value }
{ BY increment-value }
{ TO | DOWNTO limit-value }
{ loop body }
ENDFOR | END
The starting-value, increment-value, and limit-value can be numeric values or

expressions with zero decimal positions. The increment value, if specified, cannot
be zero.
The BY and TO (or DOWNTO) clauses can be specified in either order. Both ″BY 2
TO 10″ and ″TO 10 BY 2″ are allowed.
In addition to the FOR operation itself, the conditioning indicators on the FOR and
ENDFOR (or END) statements control the FOR group. The conditioning indicators
on the FOR statement control whether or not the FOR operation begins. These
indicators are checked only once, at the beginning of the for loop. The conditioning
indicators on the associated END or ENDFOR statement control whether or not the
FOR group is repeated another time. These indicators are checked at the end of
each loop.
The FOR operation is performed as follows:

1. If the conditioning indicators on the FOR statement line are satisfied, the FOR
operation is processed (step 2). If the indicators are not satisfied, control passes
to the next operation to be processed following the associated END or
ENDFOR statement (step 8).
2. If specified, the initial value is assigned to the index name. Otherwise, the
index name retains the same value it had before the start of the loop.
3. If specified, the limit value is evaluated and compared to the index name. If no
limit value is specified, the loop repeats indefinitely until it encounters a
statement that exits the loop (such as a LEAVE or GOTO) or that ends the
program or procedure (such as a RETURN).
If the TO clause is specified and the index name value is greater than the limit
value, control passes to the first statement following the ENDFOR statement. If
DOWNTO is specified and the index name is less than the limit value, control
passes to the first statement after the ENDFOR.
4. The operations in the FOR group are processed.

FOR (For)
5. If the conditioning indicators on the END or ENDFOR statement are not
satisfied, control passes to the statement after the associated END or ENDFOR
and the loop ends.
6. If the increment value is specified, it is evaluated. Otherwise, it defaults to 1.
7. The increment value is either added to (for TO) or subtracted from (for
DOWNTO) the index name. Control passes to step 3. (Note that the
conditioning indicators on the FOR statement are not tested again (step 1)
when control passes to step 3.)
8. The statement after the END or ENDFOR statement is processed when the
conditioning indicators on the FOR, END, or ENDFOR statements are not
satisfied (step 1 or 5), or when the index value is greater than (for TO) or less
than (for DOWNTO) the limit value (step 3), or when the index value
overflows.
Note: If the FOR loop is performed n times, the limit value is evaluated n+1 times
and the increment value is evaluated n times. This can be important if the
limit value or increment value is complex and time-consuming to evaluate,
or if the limit value or increment value contains calls to subprocedures with
side-effects. If multiple evaluation of the limit or increment is not desired,
calculate the values in temporaries before the FOR loop and use the
temporaries in the FOR loop.
Remember the following when specifying the FOR operation:

v The index name cannot be declared on the FOR operation. Variables should be
| declared in the Definition specifications.
| v The index-name can be any fully-qualified name, including an indexed array
| element.
page 612 for information on how those operations affect a FOR operation.

FOR (For)
*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
/free
// Example 1
// Compute n!
factorial = 1;
for i = 1 to n;
factorial = factorial * i;
endfor;
// Example 2
// Search for the last nonblank character in a field.
// If the field is all blanks, "i" will be zero.
// Otherwise, "i" will be the position of nonblank.
for i = %len (field) downto 1;

if %subst(field: i: 1) <> ’ ’;
leave;
endif;
endfor;
// Example 3
// Extract all blank-delimited words from a sentence.
WordCnt = 0;
for i = 1 by WordIncr to %len (Sentence);
// Is there a blank?
if %subst(Sentence: i: 1) = ’ ’;
WordIncr = 1;
iter;
endif;
// We’ve found a word - determine its length:

for j = i+1 to %len(Sentence);
if %subst (Sentence: j: 1) = ’ ’;
leave;
endif;
endfor;
// Store the word:

WordIncr = j - i;
WordCnt = WordCnt + 1;
Word (WordCnt) = %subst (Sentence: i: WordIncr);
endfor;
/end-free
Figure 275. Examples of the FOR Operation

FORCE (Force a Certain File to Be Read Next Cycle)
FORCE (Force a Certain File to Be Read Next Cycle)

Free-Form Syntax FORCE file-name

FORCE file-name
The FORCE operation allows selection of the file from which the next record is to
be read. It can be used only for primary or secondary files.
The file-name operand must be the name of a file from which the next record is to
be selected.
If the FORCE operation is processed, the record is read at the start of the next
program cycle. If more than one FORCE operation is processed during the same
program cycle, all but the last is ignored. FORCE must be issued at detail time, not
total time.
FORCE operations override the multi-file processing method by which the

program normally selects records. However, the first record to be processed is
always selected by the normal method. The remaining records can be selected by
FORCE operations. For information on how the FORCE operation affects
match-field processing, see Figure 6 on page 23.
If FORCE is specified for a file that is at end of file, no record is retrieved from the
file. The program cycle determines the next record to be read.

GOTO (Go To)
GOTO (Go To)


GOTO Label
The GOTO operation allows calculation operations to be skipped by instructing the

program to go to (or branch to) another calculation operation in the program. A
“TAG (Tag)” on page 732 operation names the destination of a GOTO operation.
The TAG can either precede or follow the GOTO. Use a GOTO operation to specify
a branch:
v From a detail calculation line to another detail calculation line
v From a total calculation line to another total calculation line
v From a detail calculation line to a total calculation line
v From a subroutine to a TAG or ENDSR within the same subroutine
v From a subroutine to a detail calculation line or to a total calculation line.
Branching from one part of the RPG IV logic cycle to another may result in an
endless loop. You are responsible for ensuring that the logic of your program does
not produce undesirable results.
Factor 2 must contain the label to which the program is to branch. This label is
entered in factor 1 of a TAG or ENDSR operation. The label must be a unique
symbolic name.

GOTO (Go To)
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
* If indicator 10, 15, or 20 is on, the program branches to
* the TAG label specified in the GOTO operations.
* A branch within detail calculations.
C 10 GOTO RTN1
*
* A branch from detail to total calculations.
C 15 GOTO RTN2
*
C RTN1 TAG
*
C :
C :
C:
C 20 GOTO END
*
C :
C :
C :
C END TAG
* A branch within total calculations.
CL1 GOTO RTN2
CL1 :
CL1 RTN2 TAG
Figure 276. GOTO and TAG Operations

IF (If)
IF (If)
Free-Form Syntax IF{(MR)} indicator-expression

IF (M/R) Blank indicator-expression
The IF operation code allows a series of operation codes to be processed if a

condition is met. Its function is similar to that of the IFxx operation code. It differs
in that the logical condition is expressed by an indicator valued expression
(indicator-expression). The operations controlled by the IF operation are performed
when the expression in the indicator-expression operand is true. For information on
how operation extenders M and R are used, see “Precision Rules for Numeric
CL0N01Factor1+++++++Opcode(E)+Extended-factor2+++++++++++++++++++++++++++..
C Extended-factor2-continuation+++++++++++++++
* The operations controlled by the IF operation are performed
* when the expression is true. That is A is greater than 10 and
* indicator 20 is on.
C
C IF A>10 AND *IN(20)
C :
C ENDIF
*
* The operations controlled by the IF operation are performed
* when Date1 represents a later date then Date2
C
C IF Date1 > Date2
C :
C ENDIF
*
Figure 277. IF Operation

IFxx (If)
IFxx (If)
Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the IF operation code)

IFxx Comparand Comparand
The IFxx operation allows a group of calculations to be processed if a certain

relationship, specified by xx, exists between factor 1 and factor 2. When “ANDxx
(And)” on page 529 and “ORxx (Or)” on page 670 operations are used with IFxx,
the group of calculations is performed if the condition specified by the combined
operations exists. (For the meaning of xx, see “Structured Programming
Operations” on page 411.)
You can use conditioning indicators. Factor 1 and factor 2 must contain a literal, a
named constant, a figurative constant, a table name, an array element, a data
structure name, or a field name. Both the factor 1 and factor 2 entries must be of
the same data type.
If the relationship specified by the IFxx and any associated ANDxx or ORxx
operations does not exist, control passes to the calculation operation immediately
following the associated ENDIF operation. If an “ELSE (Else)” on page 585
operation is specified as well, control passes to the first calculation operation that
can be processed following the ELSE operation.
Conditioning indicator entries on the ENDIF operation associated with IFxx must
be blank.
An ENDIF statement must be used to close an IFxx group. If an IFxx statement is

followed by an ELSE statement, an ENDIF statement is required after the ELSE
statement but not after the IFxx statement.
You have the option of indenting DO statements, IF-ELSE clauses, and

SELECT-WHENxx-OTHER clauses in the compiler listing for readability. See the
section on compiler listings in the WebSphere Development Studio: ILE RPG
Programmer’s Guide for an explanation of how to indent statements in the source
listing.

IFxx (If)
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
*
* If FLDA equals FLDB, the calculation after the IFEQ operation
* is processed. If FLDA does not equal FLDB, the program
* branches to the operation immediately following the ENDIF.
C
C FLDA IFEQ FLDB
C :
C :
C :
C ENDIF
C
* If FLDA equals FLDB, the calculation after the IFEQ operation
* is processed and control passes to the operation immediately
* following the ENDIF statement. If FLDA does not equal FLDB,
* control passes to the ELSE statement and the calculation
* immediately following is processed.
C
C FLDA IFEQ FLDB
C :
C :
C :
C ELSE
C :
C :
C :
C ENDIF
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
*
* If FLDA is equal to FLDB and greater than FLDC, or if FLDD
* is equal to FLDE and greater than FLDF, the calculation
* after the ANDGT operation is processed. If neither of the
* specified conditions exists, the program branches to the
* operation immediately following the ENDIF statement.
C
C FLDA IFEQ FLDB
C FLDA ANDGT FLDC
C FLDD OREQ FLDE
C FLDD ANDGT FLDF
C :
C :
C :
C ENDIF
Figure 278. IFxx/ENDIF and IFxx/ELSE/ENDIF Operations

IN (Retrieve a Data Area)

Free-Form Syntax IN{(E)} {*LOCK} data-area-name

IN (E) *LOCK data-area-name _ ER _
The IN operation retrieves a data area and optionally allows you to specify
whether the data area is to be locked from update by another program. For a data
area to be retrieved by the IN operation, it must be specified in the result field of
an *DTAARA DEFINE statement or using the DTAARA keyword on the Definition
specification. (See “DEFINE (Field Definition)” on page 566 for information on
*DTAARA DEFINE operation and the Definition Specification for information on
the DTAARA keyword).
| If name of the data area is determined at runtime because DTAARA(*VAR) was

| specified on the definition of the field, then the variable containing the name of the
| data area must be set before the IN operation. However, if the data area is already
| locked due to a prior *LOCK IN operation, the variable containing the name will
| not be consulted; instead, the previously locked data area will be used.
The data-area-name operand can contain the reserved word *LOCK or can be blank.
*LOCK indicates that the data area cannot be updated or locked by another
program until (1) an “UNLOCK (Unlock a Data Area or Release a Record)” on
page 742 operation is processed, (2) an “OUT (Write a Data Area)” on page 672
operation with no data-area-name operand specified, or (3) the RPG IV program
implicitly unlocks the data area when the program ends.
*LOCK cannot be specified when the data-area-name operand is the name of the
local data area or the Program Initialization Parameters (PIP) data area.
You can specify a *LOCK IN statement for a data area that the program has
locked. When data-area-name is not specified, the lock status is the same as it was
before the data area was retrieved: If it was locked, it remains locked; if unlocked,
it remains unlocked.
| data-area-name must be the name of a definition defined with the DTAARA

| keyword, the result field of a *DTAARA DEFINE operation, or the reserved word
| *DTAARA.. When *DTAARA is specified, all data areas defined in the program are
retrieved. If an error occurs on the retrieval of a data area (for example, a data area
can be retrieved but cannot be locked), an error occurs on the IN operation and the
RPG IV exception/error handling routine receives control. If a message is issued to
the requester, the message identifies the data area in error.
To handle IN exceptions (program status codes 401-421, 431, or 432), either the
page 82.
On a fixed-form calculation, positions 71-72 and 75-76 must be blank.
For further rules for the IN operation, see “Data-Area Operations” on page 392.

*..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
* Define Data areas
D TotAmt s 8p 2 dtaara
D TotGrs s 10p 2 dtaara
D TotNet s 10p 2 dtaara
* TOTAMT, TOTGRS, and TOTNET are defined as data areas. The IN

* operation retrieves all the data areas defined in the program
* and locks them. The program processes calculations, and at
* LR time it writes and unlocks all the data areas.
* The data areas can then be used by other programs.
/free
in *lock *dtaara;
TotAmt = TotAmt + Amount;
TotGrs = TotGrs + Gross;
TotNet = TotNet + Net;
/end-free
* To start total calcs, code a fixed format calc statement with a
* level entry specified.
CL0 total_calcs tag
/free
if *inlr
out *dtaara
endif
/end-free
Figure 279. IN and OUT Operations

ITER (Iterate)
ITER (Iterate)
Free-Form Syntax ITER

ITER
The ITER operation transfers control from within a DO or FOR group to the
ENDDO or ENDFOR statement of the group. It can be used in DO, DOU, DOUxx,
DOW, DOWxx, and FOR loops to transfer control immediately to a loop’s ENDDO
or ENDFOR statement. It causes the next iteration of the loop to be executed
immediately. ITER affects the innermost loop.
If conditioning indicators are present on the ENDDO or ENDFOR statement to

which control is passed, and the condition is not satisfied, processing continues
with the statement following the ENDDO or ENDFOR operation.
The “LEAVE (Leave a Do/For Group)” on page 617 operation is similar to the
ITER operation; however, LEAVE transfers control to the statement following the
ENDDO or ENDFOR operation.

ITER (Iterate)
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
*
* The following example uses a DOU loop containing a DOW loop.
* The IF statement checks indicator 01. If indicator 01 is ON,
* the LEAVE operation is executed, transferring control out of
* the innermost DOW loop to the Z-ADD instruction. If indicator
* 01 is not ON, subroutine PROC1 is processed. Then indicator
* 12 is checked. If it is OFF, ITER transfers control to the
* innermost ENDDO and the condition on the DOW is evaluated
* again. If indicator 12 is ON, subroutine PROC2 is processed.
C
C DOU FLDA = FLDB
C :
C NUM DOWLT 10
C IF *IN01
C LEAVE
C ENDIF
C EXSR PROC1
C *IN12 IFEQ *OFF
C ITER
C ENDIF
C EXSR PROC2
C ENDDO
C Z-ADD 20 RSLT 2 0
C :
C ENDDO
C :
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
*
* The following example uses a DOU loop containing a DOW loop.
* The IF statement checks indicator 1. If indicator 1 is ON, the
* MOVE operation is executed, followed by the LEAVE operation,
* transferring control from the innermost DOW loop to the Z-ADD
* instruction. If indicator 1 is not ON, ITER transfers control
* to the innermost ENDDO and the condition on the DOW is
* evaluated again.
C :
C FLDA DOUEQ FLDB
C :
C NUM DOWLT 10
C *IN01 IFEQ *ON
C MOVE ’UPDATE’ FIELD 20
C LEAVE
C ELSE
C ITER
C ENDIF
C ENDDO
C Z-ADD 20 RSLT 2 0
C :
C ENDDO
C :
Figure 280. ITER Operation

KFLD (Define Parts of a Key)
KFLD (Define Parts of a Key)

|| Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use“%KDS (Search Arguments in Data Structure)” on page 475)
|

KFLD Indicator Key field
The KFLD operation is a declarative operation that indicates that a field is part of a
search argument identified by a KLIST name.
The KFLD operation can be specified anywhere within calculations, including total
calculations. The control level entry (positions 7 and 8) can be blank or can contain
an L1 through L9 indicator, an LR indicator, or an L0 entry to group the statement
within the appropriate section of the program. Conditioning indicator entries
(positions 9 through 11) are not permitted.
KFLDs can be global or local. A KLIST in a main procedure can have only global
KFLDs associated with it. A KLIST in a subprocedure can have local and global
KFLDs. For more information, see “Scope of Definitions” on page 96.
Factor 2 can contain an indicator for a null-capable key field if

ALWNULL(*USRCTL) is specified as a keyword on a control specification or as a
command parameter.
If the indicator is on, the key fields with null values are selected. If the indicator is
off or not specified, the key fields with null values are not selected. See “Keyed
Operations” on page 209 for information on how to access null-capable keys.
The result field must contain the name of a field that is to be part of the search
argument. The result field cannot contain an array name. Each KFLD field must
agree in length, data type, and decimal position with the corresponding field in the
composite key of the record or file. However, if the record has a variable-length
KFLD field, the corresponding field in the composite key must be varying but does
not need to be the same length. Each KFLD field need not have the same name as
the corresponding field in the composite key. The order the KFLD fields are
specified in the KLIST determines which KFLD is associated with a particular field
in the composite key. For example, the first KFLD field following a KLIST
operation is associated with the leftmost (high-order) field of the composite key.
Graphic and UCS-2 key fields must have the same CCSID as the key in the file.
Figure 281 on page 616 shows an example of the KLIST operation with KFLD
operations.
Figure 99 on page 210 illustrates how keyed operations are used to position and
retrieve records with null keys.

KLIST (Define a Composite Key)

|| Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use %KDS)
|

KLIST KLIST name
The KLIST operation is a declarative operation that gives a name to a list of

KFLDs. This list can be used as a search argument to retrieve records from files
that have a composite key.
You can specify a KLIST anywhere within calculations. The control level entry
(positions 7 and 8) can be blank or can contain an L1 through L9 indicator, an LR
indicator, or an L0 entry to group the statement within the appropriate section of
the program. Conditioning indicator entries (positions 9 through 11) are not
permitted. Factor 1 must contain a unique name.
Remember the following when specifying a KLIST operation:

v If a search argument is composed of more than one field (a composite key), you
must specify a KLIST with multiple KFLDs.
v A KLIST name can be specified as a search argument only for externally
described files.
v A KLIST and its associated KFLD fields can appear anywhere in calculations.
v A KLIST must be followed immediately by at least one KFLD.
v A KLIST is ended when a non-KFLD operation is encountered.
v A KLIST name can appear in factor 1 of a CHAIN, DELETE, READE, READPE,
SETGT, or SETLL operation.
v The same KLIST name can be used as the search argument for multiple files, or
it can be used multiple times as the search argument for the same file.
v A KLIST in a main procedure can have only global KFLDs associated with it. A
KLIST in a subprocedure can have local and global KFLDs. For more
information, see “Scope of Definitions” on page 96.

*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
A* DDS source
A R RECORD
A FLDA 4
A SHIFT 1 0
A FLDB 10
A CLOCK# 5 0
A FLDC 10
A DEPT 4
A FLDD 8
A K DEPT
A K SHIFT
A K CLOCK#
A*
A* End of DDS source
A*
A***********************************************************************
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
*
* The KLIST operation indicates the name, FILEKY, by which the
* search argument can be specified.
*
C FILEKY KLIST
C KFLD DEPT
C KFLD SHIFT
C KFLD CLOCK#
The following diagram shows what the search argument looks like. The fields DEPT, SHIFT, and CLOCK# are key
fields in this record.
Data Base
Management
Record Shift Clock# Dept
Search
Dept Shift Clock#
Argument
Figure 281. KLIST and KFLD Operations

LEAVE (Leave a Do/For Group)

Free-Form Syntax LEAVE

LEAVE
The LEAVE operation transfers control from within a DO or FOR group to the
statement following the ENDDO or ENDFOR operation.
You can use LEAVE within a DO, DOU, DOUxx, DOW, DOWxx, or FOR loop to
transfer control immediately from the innermost loop to the statement following
the innermost loop’s ENDDO or ENDFOR operation. Using LEAVE to leave a DO
or FOR group does not increment the index.
In nested loops, LEAVE causes control to transfer “outwards” by one level only.
LEAVE is not allowed outside a DO or FOR group.
The “ITER (Iterate)” on page 612 operation is similar to the LEAVE operation;
however, ITER transfers control to the ENDDO or ENDFOR statement.

*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
*
* The following example uses an infinite loop. When the user
* types ’q’, control transfers to the LEAVE operation, which in
* turn transfers control out of the loop to the Z-ADD operation.
*
C 2 DOWNE 1
C :
C IF ANSWER = ’q’
C LEAVE
C ENDIF
C :
C ENDDO
C Z-ADD A B
*
* The following example uses a DOUxx loop containing a DOWxx.
* The IF statement checks indicator 1. If it is ON, indicator
* 99 is turned ON, control passes to the LEAVE operation and
* out of the inner DOWxx loop.
*
* A second LEAVE instruction is then executed because indicator 99
* is ON, which in turn transfers control out of the DOUxx loop.
*
C :
C FLDA DOUEQ FLDB
C NUM DOWLT 10
C *IN01 IFEQ *ON
C SETON 99
C LEAVE
C :
C ENDIF
C ENDDO
C 99 LEAVE
C :
C ENDDO
C :
Figure 282. LEAVE Operation

LEAVESR (Leave a Subroutine)
LEAVESR (Leave a Subroutine)

Free-Form Syntax LEAVESR

LEAVESR
The LEAVESR operation exits a subroutine from any point within the subroutine.
Control passes to the ENDSR operation for the subroutine. LEAVESR is allowed
only from within a subroutine.
The control level entry (positions 7 and 8) can be SR or blank. Conditioning

indicator entries (positions 9 to 11) can be specified.
*
C CheckCustName BEGSR
C Name CHAIN CustFile
*
* Check if the name identifies a valid customer
*
C IF not %found(CustFile)
C EVAL Result = CustNotFound
C LEAVESR
C ENDIF
*
* Check if the customer qualifies for discount program
C IF Qualified = *OFF
C EVAL Result = CustNotQualified
C LEAVESR
C ENDIF
*
* If we get here, customer can use the discount program
C EVAL Result = CustOK
C ENDSR
Figure 283. LEAVESR Operations

LOOKUP (Look Up a Table or Array Element)

Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the %LOOKUPxx or %TLOOKUPxx built-in function)

LOOKUP
(array) Search argument Array name HI LO EQ
(table) Search argument Table name Table name HI LO EQ
The LOOKUP operation causes a search to be made for a particular element in an

array or table. Factor 1 is the search argument (data for which you want to find a
match in the array or table named). It can be: a literal, a field name, an array
element, a table name, a named constant, or a figurative constant. The nature of
the comparison depends on the data type:
Character data
If ALTSEQ(*EXT) is specified on the control specification, the alternate
collating sequence is used for character LOOKUP, unless either factor 1 or
factor 2 was defined with ALTSEQ(*NONE) on the definition specification.
If ALTSEQ(*SRC) or no alternate sequence is specified, character LOOKUP
does not use the alternate sequence.
Graphic and UCS-2 data
The comparison is hexadecimal; the alternate collating sequence is not used
in any circumstance.
Numeric data
The decimal point is ignored in numeric data, except when the array or
table in Factor 2 is of type float.
Other data types
The considerations for comparison described in “Compare Operations” on
page 390 apply to other types.
If a table is named in factor 1, the search argument used is the element of the table
last selected in a LOOKUP operation, or it is the first element of the table if a
previous LOOKUP has not been processed. The array or table to be searched is
specified in factor 2.
For a table LOOKUP, the result field can contain the name of a second table from
which an element (corresponding positionally with that of the first table) can be
retrieved. The name of the second table can be used to reference the element
retrieved. The result field must be blank if factor 2 contains an array name.
Resulting indicators specify the search condition for LOOKUP. One must be
specified in positions 71 through 76 first to determine the search to be done and
then to reflect the result of the search. Any specified indicator is set on only if the
search is successful. No more than two indicators can be used. Resulting indicators
can be assigned to equal and high or to equal and low. The program searches for
an entry that satisfies either condition with equal given precedence; that is, if no
equal entry is found, the nearest lower or nearest higher entry is selected.
If an indicator is specified in positions 75-76, the %EQUAL built-in function returns

’1’ if an element is found that exactly matches the search argument. The %FOUND
built-in function returns ’1’ if any specified search is successful.

Resulting indicators can be assigned to equal and low, or equal and high. High
and low cannot be specified on the same LOOKUP operation. The compiler
assumes a sorted, sequenced array or table when a high or low indicator is
specified for the LOOKUP operation. The LOOKUP operation searches for an entry
that satisfies the low/equal or high/equal condition with equal given priority.
v High (71-72): Instructs the program to find the entry that is nearest to, yet higher
in sequence than, the search argument. If such a higher entry is found, the high
indicator is set on. For example, if an ascending array contains the values A B C
C C D E, and the search argument is B, then the first C will satisfy the search. If
a descending array contains E D C C C B A, and the search argument is B, then
the last C will satisfy the search. If an entry higher than the search argument is
not found in the array or table, then the search is unsuccessful.
v Low (73-74): Instructs the program to find the entry that is nearest to, yet lower
in sequence than, the search argument. If such a lower entry is found, the low
indicator is set on. For example, if an ascending array contains the values A B C
C C D E, and the search argument is D, then the last C will satisfy the search. If
a descending array contains E D C C C B A, and the search argument is D, then
the first C will satisfy the search. If an entry lower than the search argument is
not found in the array or table, then the search is unsuccessful.
v Equal (75-76): Instructs the program to find the entry equal to the search
argument. The first equal entry found sets the equal indicator on. If an entry
equal to the search argument is not found, then the search is unsuccessful.
When you use the LOOKUP operation, remember:

v The search argument and array or table must have the same type and length
(except Time and Date fields which can have a different length). If the array or
table is fixed-length character, graphic, or UCS-2, the search argument must also
be fixed-length. For variable length, the length of the search argument can have
a different length from the array or table.
v When LOOKUP is processed on an array and an index is used, the LOOKUP
begins with the element specified by the index. The index value is set to the
position number of the element located. An error occurs if the index is equal to
zero or is higher than the number of elements in the array when the search
begins. The index is set equal to one if the search is unsuccessful. If the index is
a named constant, the index value will not change.
v A search can be made for high, low, high and equal, or low and equal only if a
sequence is specified for the array or table on the definition specifications with
the ASCEND or DESCEND keywords.
v No resulting indicator is set on if the search is not successful.
v If only an equal indicator (positions 75-76) is used, the LOOKUP operation will
search the entire array or table. If your array or table is in ascending sequence
and you want only an equal comparison, you can avoid searching the entire
array or table by specifying a high indicator.
v The LOOKUP operation can produce unexpected results when the array is not in
ascending or descending sequence.
v A LOOKUP operation to a dynamically allocated array without all defined
elements allocated may cause errors to occur.

*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
*
* In this example, the programmer wants to know which element in
* ARY the LOOKUP operation locates. The Z-ADD operation sets the
* field X to 1. The LOOKUP starts at the element ARY that is
* indicated by field X and continues running until it finds the
* first element equal to SRCHWD. The index value, X, is set to
* the position number of the element located.
C
C Z-ADD 1 X 3 0
C SRCHWD LOOKUP ARY(X) 26
C
* In this example, the programmer wants to know if an element
* is found that is equal to SRCHWD. LOOKUP searches ARY until it
* finds the first element equal to SRCHWD. When this occurs,
* indicator 26 is set on and %EQUAL is set to return ’1’.
C
C SRCHWD LOOKUP ARY 26
C
* The LOOKUP starts at a variable index number specified by
* field X. Field X does not have to be set to 1 before the
* LOOKUP operation. When LOOKUP locates the first element in
* ARY equal to SRCHWD, indicator 26 is set on and %EQUAL is set
* to return ’1’. The index value, X, is set to the position
* number of the element located.
*
C
C SRCHWD LOOKUP ARY(X) 26
Figure 284. LOOKUP Operation with Arrays
* In this example, an array of customer information actually consists

* of several subarrays. You can search either the main array or the
* subarrays overlaying the main array.
D custInfo DS
D cust DIM(100)
D name 30A OVERLAY(cust : *NEXT)
D id_number 10I 0 OVERLAY(cust : *NEXT)
D amount 15P 3 OVERLAY(cust : *NEXT)
* You can search for a particular set of customer information

* by doing a search on the "cust" array
C custData LOOKUP cust(i) 10
* You can search on a particular field of the customer information

* by doing a search on one of the overlay arrays
C custName LOOKUP name(i) 11
* After the search, the array index can be used with any of the
* overlaying arrays. If the search on name(i) is successful,
* the id_number and amount for that customer are available
* in id_number(i) and amount(i).
Figure 285. LOOKUP Operation with Subarrays

MHHZO (Move High to High Zone)
MHHZO (Move High to High Zone)

|| Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use %BITxxx built-in functions)
|

MHHZO Source field Target field
The MHHZO operation moves the zone portion of a character from the leftmost
zone in factor 2 to the leftmost zone in the result field. Factor 2 and the result field
must both be defined as character fields. For further information on the MHHZO
operation, see “Move Zone Operations” on page 408.
The function of the MHHZO operation is shown in Figure 153 on page 409.

MHLZO (Move High to Low Zone)
MHLZO (Move High to Low Zone)

|

MHLZO Source field Target field
The MHLZO operation moves the zone portion of a character from the leftmost
zone in factor 2 to the rightmost zone in the result field. Factor 2 must be defined
as a character field. The result field can be character or numeric data. For further
information on the MHLZO operation, see “Move Zone Operations” on page 408.
The function of the MHLZO operation is shown in Figure 153 on page 409.

MLHZO (Move Low to High Zone)
MLHZO (Move Low to High Zone)

|

MLHZO Source field Target field
The MLHZO operation moves the zone portion of a character from the rightmost
zone in factor 2 to the leftmost zone in the result field. Factor 2 can be defined as a
numeric field or as a character field, but the result field must be a character field.
For further information on the MLHZO operation, see “Move Zone Operations” on
page 408.
The function of the MLHZO operation is shown in Figure 153 on page 409.

MLLZO (Move Low to Low Zone)
MLLZO (Move Low to Low Zone)

|

MLLZO Source field Target field
The MLLZO operation moves the zone portion of a character from the rightmost
zone in factor 2 to the rightmost zone in the result field. Factor 2 and the result
field can be either character data or numeric data. For further information on the
MLLZO, see “Move Zone Operations” on page 408.
The function of the MLLZO operation is shown in Figure 153 on page 409.

MONITOR (Begin a Monitor Group)

Free-Form Syntax MONITOR

MONITOR
The monitor group performs conditional error handling based on the status code.
It consists of:
v A MONITOR statement
v One or more ON-ERROR groups
v An ENDMON statement.
After the MONITOR statement, control passes to the next statement. The monitor
block consists of all the statements from the MONITOR statement to the first
ON-ERROR statement. If an error occurs when the monitor block is processed,
control is passed to the appropriate ON-ERROR group.
If all the statements in the MONITOR block are processed without errors, control
passes to the statement following the ENDMON statement.
The monitor group can be specified anywhere in calculations. It can be nested

within IF, DO, SELECT, or other monitor groups. The IF, DO, and SELECT groups
can be nested within monitor groups.
If a monitor group is nested within another monitor group, the innermost group is
considered first when an error occurs. If that monitor group does not handle the
error condition, the next group is considered.
Level indicators can be used on the MONITOR operation, to indicate that the
MONITOR group is part of total calculations. For documentation purposes, you
can also specify a level indicator on an ON-ERROR or ENDMON operation but
this level indicator will be ignored.
Conditioning indicators can be used on the MONITOR statement. If they are not
satisfied, control passes immediately to the statement following the ENDMON
statement of the monitor group. Conditioning indicators cannot be used on
ON-ERROR operations individually.
If a monitor block contains a call to a subprocedure, and the subprocedure has an

error, the subprocedure’s error handling will take precedence. For example, if the
subprocedure has a *PSSR subroutine, it will get called. The MONITOR group
containing the call will only be considered if the subprocedure fails to handle the
error and the call fails with the error-in-call status of 00202.
The monitor group does handle errors that occur in a subroutine. If the subroutine
contains its own monitor groups, they are considered first.
Branching operations are not allowed within a monitor block, but are allowed
within an ON-ERROR block.
A LEAVE or ITER operation within a monitor block applies to any active DO

group that contains the monitor block. A LEAVESR or RETURN operation within a

monitor block applies to any subroutine, subprocedure, or procedure that contains
the monitor block.
* The MONITOR block consists of the READ statement and the IF

* group.
* - The first ON-ERROR block handles status 1211 which
* is issued for the READ operation if the file is not open.
* - The second ON-ERROR block handles all other file errors.
* - The third ON-ERROR block handles the string-operation status
* code 00100 and array index status code 00121.
* - The fourth ON-ERROR block (which could have had a factor 2
* of *ALL) handles errors not handled by the specific ON-ERROR
* operations.
*
* If no error occurs in the MONITOR block, control passes from the
* ENDIF to the ENDMON.
C MONITOR
C READ FILE1
C IF NOT %EOF
C EVAL Line = %SUBST(Line(i) :
C %SCAN(’***’: Line(i)) + 1)
C ENDIF
C ON-ERROR 1211
C ... handle file-not-open
C ON-ERROR *FILE
C ... handle other file errors
C ON-ERROR 00100 : 00121
C ... handle string error and array-index error
C ON-ERROR
C ... handle all other errors
C ENDMON
Figure 286. MONITOR Operation

MOVE (Move)
MOVE (Move)
|| Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the EVALR operation code, or built-in functions such as %CHAR,
| %DATE, %DEC, %DECH, %GRAPH, %INT, %INTH, TIME, %TIMESTAMP, %UCS2,
| %UNS or %UNSH)
|

MOVE (P) Data Attributes Source field Target field + − ZB
The MOVE operation transfers characters from factor 2 to the result field. Moving
starts with the rightmost character of factor 2.
When moving Date, Time or Timestamp data, factor 1 must be blank unless either
the source or the target is a character or numeric field.
Otherwise, factor 1 contains the date or time format compatible with the character
or numeric field that is the source or target of the operation. For information on
the formats that can be used see “Date Data Type” on page 193, “Time Data Type”
on page 196, and “Timestamp Data Type” on page 197.
If the source or target is a character field, you may optionally indicate the
separator following the format in factor 1. Only separators that are valid for that
format are allowed.
If factor 2 is *DATE or UDATE and the result is a Date field, factor 1 is not
required. If factor 1 contains a date format it must be compatible with the format
of *DATE or UDATE as specified by the DATEDIT keyword on the control
specification.
When moving character, graphic, UCS-2, or numeric data, if factor 2 is longer

than the result field, the excess leftmost characters or digits of factor 2 are not
moved. If the result field is longer than factor 2, the excess leftmost characters or
digits in the result field are unchanged, unless padding is specified.
You cannot specify resulting indicators if the result field is an array; you can
specify them if it is an array element, or a non-array field.
If factor 2 is shorter than the length of the result field, a P specified in the
operation extender position causes the result field to be padded on the left after
the move occurs.
Float numeric fields and literals are not allowed as Factor 2 or Result-Field entries.
If CCSID(*GRAPH : IGNORE) is specified or assumed for the module, MOVE

operations between UCS-2 and graphic data are not allowed.
When moving variable-length character, graphic, or UCS-2 data, the

variable-length field works in exactly the same way as a fixed-length field with the
same current length. A MOVE operation does not change the length of a
variable-length result field. For examples, see Figures 291 to 296.

MOVE (Move)
The tables which appear following the examples, show how data is moved from
factor 2 to the result field. For further information on the MOVE operation, see
“Move Operations” on page 402.

MOVE (Move)
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
* Control specification date format
H DATFMT(*ISO)
*
DName++++++++++ETDsFrom+++To/L+++IDc.Functions+++++++++++++++++++++++++++
D DATE_ISO S D
D DATE_YMD S D DATFMT(*YMD)
D INZ(D’1992-03-24’)
D DATE_EUR S D DATFMT(*EUR)
D INZ(D’2197-08-26’)
D DATE_JIS S D DATFMT(*JIS)
D NUM_DATE1 S 6P 0 INZ(210991)
D NUM_DATE2 S 7P 0
D CHAR_DATE S 8 INZ(’02/01/53’)
D CHAR_LONGJUL S 8A INZ(’2039/166’)
D DATE_USA S D DATFMT(*USA)
CL0N01Factor1+++++++Opcode(E)+Factor2+++++++Result++++++++Len++D+H1LoEq..
* Move between Date fields. DATE_EUR will contain 24.03.1992
*
C MOVE DATE_YMD DATE_EUR
*
* Convert numeric value in ddmmyy format into a *ISO Date.
* DATE_ISO will contain 1991-09-21 after each of the 2 moves.
C *DMY MOVE 210991 DATE_ISO
C *DMY MOVE NUM_DATE1 DATE_ISO
*
* Move a character value representing a *MDY date to a *JIS Date.
* DATE_JIS will contain 1953-02-01 after each of the 2 moves.
C *MDY/ MOVE ’02/01/53’ DATE_JIS
C *MDY/ MOVE CHAR_DATE DATE_JIS
*
* Move a date field to a character field, using the
* date format and separators based on the job attributes
C *JOBRUN MOVE (P) DATE_JIS CHAR_DATE
*
* Move a date field to a numeric field, using the
* date format based on the job attributes
*
* Note: If the job format happens to be *JUL, the date will
* be placed in the rightmost 5 digits of NUM_DATE1.
* The MOVEL operation might be a better choice.
*
C *JOBRUN MOVE (P) DATE_JIS NUM_DATE1
*
* DATE_USA will contain 12-31-9999
C MOVE *HIVAL DATE_USA
*
* Execution error, resulting in error code 114. Year is not in
* 1940-2039 date range. DATE_YMD will be unchanged.
C MOVE DATE_USA DATE_YMD
*
* Move a *EUR date field to a numeric field that will
* represent a *CMDY date. NUM_DATE2 will contain 2082697
* after the move.
C *CMDY MOVE DATE_EUR NUM_DATE2
*
* Move a character value representing a *LONGJUL date to
* a *YMD date. DATE_YMD will be 39/06/15 after the move.
C *LONGJUL MOVE CHAR_LONGJUL DATE_YMD
Figure 287. MOVE Operation with Date

MOVE (Move)
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
* Specify default format for date fields
H DATFMT(*ISO)
D date_USA S D DATFMT(*USA)
D datefld S D
D timefld S T INZ(T’14.23.10’)
D chr_dateA S 6 INZ(’041596’)
D chr_dateB S 7 INZ(’0610807’)
D chr_time S 6
* Move a character value representing a *MDY date to a D(Date) value.
* *MDY0 indicates that the character date in Factor 2 does not
* contain separators.
* datefld will contain 1996-04-15 after the move.
C *MDY0 MOVE chr_dateA datefld
* Move a field containing a T(Time) value to a character value in the
* *EUR format. *EUR0 indicates that the result field should not
* chr_time will contain ’142310’ after the move.
C *EUR0 MOVE timefld chr_time
* Move a character value representing a *CYMD date to a *USA
* Date. Date_USA will contain 08/07/1961 after the move.
* 0 in *CYMD indicates that the character value does not
C *CYMD0 MOVE chr_dateB date_USA
Figure 288. MOVE Operation with Date and Time without Separators

MOVE (Move)
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
* Control specification DATEDIT format
*
H DATEDIT(*MDY)
*
DName+++++++++++ETDsFrom+++To/L+++IDc.Functions+++++++++++++++++++++++
D Jobstart S Z
D Datestart S D
D Timestart S T
D Timebegin S T inz(T’05.02.23’)
D Datebegin S D inz(D’1991-09-24’)
D TmStamp S Z inz
*
* Set the timestamp Jobstart with the job start Date and Time
*
* Factor 1 of the MOVE *DATE (*USA = MMDDYYYY) is consistent
* with the value specified for the DATEDIT keyword on the
* control specification, since DATEDIT(*MDY) indicates that
* *DATE is formatted as MMDDYYYY.
*
* Note: It is not necessary to specify factor 1 with *DATE or
* UDATE.
*
C *USA MOVE *DATE Datestart
C TIME StrTime 6 0
C *HMS MOVE StrTime Timestart
C MOVE Datestart Jobstart
C MOVE Timestart Jobstart
*
* After the following C specifications are performed, the field
* stampchar will contain ’1991-10-24-05.17.23.000000’.
*
* First assign a timestamp the value of a given time+15 minutes and
* given date + 30 days. Move tmstamp to a character field.
* stampchar will contain ’1991-10-24-05.17.23.000000’.
*
C ADDDUR 15:*minutes Timebegin
C ADDDUR 30:*days Datebegin
C MOVE Timebegin TmStamp
C MOVE Datebegin TmStamp
C MOVE TmStamp stampchar 26
* Move the timestamp to a character field without separators. After
* the move, STAMPCHAR will contain ’ 19911024051723000000’.
C *ISO0 MOVE(P) TMSTAMP STAMPCHAR0
Figure 289. MOVE Operation with Timestamp

MOVE (Move)
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
DName++++++++++ETDsFrom+++To/L+++IDc.Functions+++++++++++++++++++
*
* Example of MOVE between graphic and character fields
*
D char_fld1 S 10A inz(’oK1K2K3 i’)
D dbcs_fld1 S 4G
D char_fld2 S 10A inz(*ALL’Z’)
D dbcs_fld2 S 3G inz(G’oK1K2K3i’)
*
*
CL0N01Factor1+++++++Opcode(E)+Factor2+++++++Result++++++++Len++D+HiL
*
* Value of dbcs_fld1 after MOVE operation is ’K1K2K3 ’
* Value of char_fld2 after MOVE oepration is ’ZZoK1K2K3i’
*
C MOVE char_fld1 dbcs_fld1
C MOVE dbcs_fld2 char_fld2
Figure 290. MOVE between character and graphic fields
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
*
* Example of MOVE from variable to variable length
* for character fields
*
D var5a S 5A INZ(’ABCDE’) VARYING
D var5b S 5A INZ(’ABCDE’) VARYING
D var5c S 5A INZ(’ABCDE’) VARYING
D var10a S 10A INZ(’0123456789’) VARYING
D var10b S 10A INZ(’ZXCVBNM’) VARYING
D var15a S 15A INZ(’FGH’) VARYING
D var15b S 15A INZ(’FGH’) VARYING
D var15c S 15A INZ(’QWERTYUIOPAS’) VARYING
*
*
*
C MOVE var15a var5a
* var5a = ’ABFGH’ (length=5)
C MOVE var10a var5b
* var5b = ’56789’ (length=5)
C MOVE var5c var15a
* var15a = ’CDE’ (length=3)
C MOVE var10b var15b
* var15b = ’BNM’ (length=3)
C MOVE var15c var10b
* var10b = ’YUIOPAS’ (length=7)
Figure 291. MOVE from a variable-length field to variable-length field

MOVE (Move)
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
*
* Example of MOVE from variable to fixed length
*
D var5 S 5A INZ(’ABCDE’) VARYING
D var10 S 10A INZ(’0123456789’) VARYING
D var15 S 15A INZ(’FGH’) VARYING
D fix5a S 5A INZ(’MNOPQ’)
D fix5b S 5A INZ(’MNOPQ’)
D fix5c S 5A INZ(’MNOPQ’)
*
*
*
C MOVE var5 fix5a
* fix5a = ’ABCDE’
C MOVE var10 fix5b
* fix5b = ’56789’
C MOVE var15 fix5c
* fix5c = ’MNFGH’
Figure 292. MOVE from a variable-length field to a fixed-length field
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
*
* Example of MOVE from fixed to variable length
*
D var15 S 15A INZ(’FGHIJKL’) VARYING
D fix5 S 5A INZ(’.....’)
D fix10 S 10A INZ(’PQRSTUVWXY’)
*
*
*
C MOVE fix10 var5
* var5 = ’UVWXY’ (length=5)
C MOVE fix5 var10
* var10 = ’01234.....’ (length=10)
C MOVE fix10 var15
* var15 = ’STUVWXY’ (length=7)
Figure 293. MOVE from a fixed-length field to a variable-length field

MOVE (Move)
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
*
* Example of MOVE(P) from variable to variable length
*
D var15c S 15A INZ(’FGH’) VARYING
*
*
*
C MOVE(P) var15a var5a
* var5a = ’ FGH’ (length=5)
C MOVE(P) var10 var5b
* var5b = ’56789’ (length=5)
C MOVE(P) var5c var15b
* var15b = ’CDE’ (length=3)
C MOVE(P) var10 var15c
* var15c = ’789’ (length=3)
Figure 294. MOVE(P) from a variable-length field to a variable-length field
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
*
* Example of MOVE(P) from variable to fixed length
*
*
*
*
C MOVE(P) var5 fix5a
C MOVE(P) var10 fix5b
* fix5b = ’56789’
C MOVE(P) var15 fix5c
* fix5c = ’ FGH’
Figure 295. MOVE(P) from a variable-length field to a fixed-length field

MOVE (Move)
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
*
* Example of MOVE(P) from fixed to variable length
*
D var15a S 15A INZ(’FGHIJKLMNOPQR’) VARYING
D var15b S 15A INZ(’FGHIJ’) VARYING
D fix5 S 5A INZ(’’)
*
*
*
C MOVE(P) fix10 var5
* var5 = ’UVWXY’ (length=5 before and after)
C MOVE(P) fix10 var10
* var10 = ’PQRSTUVWXY’ (length=10 before and after)
C MOVE(P) fix10 var15a
* var15a = ’ PQRSTUVWXY’ (length=13 before and after)
C MOVE(P) fix10 var15b
* var15b = ’UVWXY’ (length=5 before and after)
Figure 296. MOVE(P) from a fixed-length field to a variable-length field
Table 53. Moving a Character Field to a Date-Time Field. Factor 1 specifies the format of the Factor 2 entry
Result Field
Factor 1 Factor 2
Entry (Character) Value DTZ Type
*MDY- 11-19-75 75/323 D(*JUL)
*JUL 92/114 23/04/92 D(*DMY)
*YMD 14/01/28 01/28/2014 D(*USA)
*YMD0 140128 01/28/2014 D(*USA)
*USA 12/31/9999 31.12.9999 D(*EUR)
*ISO 2036-05-21 21/05/36 D(*DMY)
*JUL 45/333 11/29/1945 D(*USA)
*MDY/ 03/05/33 03.05.33 D(*MDY.)
*CYMD& 121 07 08 08.07.2021 D(*EUR)
*CYMD0 1210708 07,08,21 D(*MDY,)
*CMDY. 107.08.21 21-07-08 D(*YMD-)
*CDMY0 1080721 07/08/2021 D(*USA)
*LONGJUL- 2021-189 08/07/2021 D(*EUR)
*HMS& 23 12 56 23.12.56 T(*ISO)
*USA 1:00 PM 13.00.00 T(*EUR)
*EUR 11.10.07 11:10:07 T(*JIS)
*JIS 14:16:18 14.16.18 T(*HMS.)
*ISO 24.00.00 12:00 AM T(*USA)
Blank 1991-09-14-13.12.56.123456 1991-09-14-13.12.56.123456 Z(*ISO)
*ISO 1991-09-14-13.12.56.123456 1991-09-14-13.12.56.123456 Z(*ISO)

MOVE (Move)
Table 54. Moving a Numeric Field to a Date-Time Field. Factor 1 specifies the format of the Factor 2 entry
Result Field
Factor 1 Factor 2
Entry1 (Numeric) Value DTZ Type
*MDY 111975 75/323 D(*JUL)
*JUL 92114 23/04/92 D(*DMY)
*YMD 140128 01/28/2014 D(*USA)
2
*USA 12319999 31.12.9999 D(*EUR)
*ISO 20360521 21/05/36 D(*DMY)
*JUL 45333 11/29/1945 D(*USA)
*MDY 030533 03.05.33 D(*MDY.)
*CYMD 1210708 08.07.2021 D(*EUR)
*CMDY 1070821 21-07-08 D(*YMD-)
*CDMY 1080721 07/08/2021 D(*USA)
*LONGJUL 2021189 08/07/2021 D(*EUR)
3
*USA *DATE (092195) 1995-09-21 D(*JIS)
3
Blank *DATE (092195) 1995-09-21 D(*JIS)
3
*MDY UDATE (092195) 21.09.1995 D(*EUR)
*HMS 231256 23.12.56 T(*ISO)
*EUR 111007 11:10:07 T(*JIS)
*JIS 141618 14.16.18 T(*HMS.)
*ISO 240000 12:00 AM T(*USA)
4
Blank 19910914131256123456 1991-09-14-13.12.56.123456 Z(*ISO)
Notes:
1. A separator of zero (0) is not allowed in factor 1 for movement between date, time or timestamp fields and
numeric classes.
2. Time format *USA is not allowed for movement between time and numeric classes.
3. For *DATE and UDATE, assume that the job date in the job description is of *MDY format and contains 092195.
Factor 1 is optional and will default to the correct format. If factor 2 is *DATE, and factor 1 is coded, it must be
a 4-digit year date format. If factor 2 is UDATE, and factor 1 is coded, it must be a 2-digit year date format.
4. For moves of timestamp fields, factor 1 is optional. If it is coded it must be *ISO or *ISO0.
Table 55. Moving a Date-Time Field to a Character Field

Factor 2
Factor 1 Result Field
Entry Value DTZ Type (Character)
*JUL 11-19-75 D(*MDY-) 75/323
*DMY- 92/114 D(*JUL) 23-04-92
*USA 14/01/28 D(*YMD) 01/28/2014
*EUR 12/31/9999 D(*USA) 31.12.9999
*DMY, 2036-05-21 D(*ISO) 21,05,36
*USA 45/333 D(*JUL) 11/29/1945
*USA0 45/333 D(*JUL) 11291945
*MDY& 03/05/33 D(*MDY) 03 05 33
*CYMD, 03 07 08 D(*MDY&); 108,03,07

MOVE (Move)
Table 55. Moving a Date-Time Field to a Character Field (continued)
Factor 2
Entry Value DTZ Type (Character)
*CYMD0 21/07/08 D(*DMY) 1080721
*CMDY 21-07-08 D(*YMD-) 107/08/21
*CDMY- 07/08/2021 D(*USA) 108-07-21
*LONGJUL& 08/07/2021 D(*EUR) 2021 189
*ISO 23 12 56 T(*HMS&); 23.12.56
*EUR 11:00 AM T(*USA) 11.00.00
*JIS 11.10.07 T(*EUR) 11:10:07
*HMS, 14:16:18 T(*JIS) 14,16,18
*USA 24.00.00 T(*ISO) 12:00 AM
Blank 2045-10-27-23.34.59.123456 Z(*ISO) 2045-10-27-23.34.59.123456
Table 56. Moving a Date-Time Field to a Numeric Field

Factor 2
Entry Value DTZ Type (Numeric)
*JUL 11-19-75 D(*MDY-) 75323
*DMY- 92/114 D(*JUL) 230492
*USA 14/01/28 D(*YMD) 01282014
*EUR 12/31/9999 D(*USA) 31129999
*DMY, 2036-05-21 D(*ISO) 210536
*USA 45/333 D(*JUL) 11291945
*MDY& 03/05/33 D(*MDY) 030533
*CYMD, 03 07 08 D(*MDY&); 1080307
*CMDY 21-07-08 D(*YMD-) 1070821
*CDMY- 07/08/2021 D(*USA) 1080721
*LONGJUL& 08/07/2021 D(*EUR) 2021189
*ISO 23 12 56 T(*HMS&); 231256
*EUR 11:00 AM T(*USA) 110000
*JIS 11.10.07 T(*EUR) 111007
*HMS, 14:16:18 T(*JIS) 141618
*ISO 2045-10-27-23.34.59.123456 Z(*ISO) 20451027233459123456
Table 57. Moving Date-Time Fields to Date-Time Fields. Assume that the initial value of the timestamp is
1985-12-03-14.23.34.123456.
Factor 1 Factor 2 Result Field
Value DTZ Type Value DTZ Type
N/A 1986-06-24 D(*ISO) 86/06/24 D(*YMD)
N/A 23 07 12 D(*DMY&); 23.07.2012 D(*EUR)
N/A 11:53 PM T(USA) 23.53.00 T(*EUR)
N/A 19.59.59 T(*HMS.) 19:59:59 T(*JIS)

MOVE (Move)
Table 57. Moving Date-Time Fields to Date-Time Fields (continued). Assume that the initial value of the timestamp is
1985-12-03-14.23.34.123456.
Factor 1 Factor 2 Result Field
Value DTZ Type Value DTZ Type
N/A 1985-12-03-14.23.34.123456 Z(*ISO.) 1985-12-03-14.23.34.123456 Z(*ISO)
N/A 75.06.30 D(*YMD.) 1975-06-30-14.23.34.123456 Z(*ISO)
N/A 09/23/2234 D(*USA) 2234-09-23-14.23.34.123456 Z(*ISO)
N/A 18,45,59 T(*HMS,) 1985-12-03-18.45.59.000000 Z(*ISO)
N/A 2:00 PM T(*USA) 1985-12-03-14.00.00.000000 Z(*ISO)
N/A 1985-12-03-14.23.34.123456 Z(*ISO.) 12/03/85 D(*MDY)
N/A 1985-12-03-14.23.34.123456 Z(*ISO.) 12/03/1985 D(*USA)
N/A 1985-12-03-14.23.34.123456 Z(*ISO.) 14:23:34 T(*HMS)
N/A 1985-12-03-14.23.34.123456 Z(*ISO.) 02:23 PM T(*USA)
Table 58. Moving a Date field to a Character field. The result field is larger than factor 2. Assume that Factor 1
contains *ISO and that the result field is defined as
D Result_Fld 20A INZ(’ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghij’)
Operation Factor 2 Value of Result Field

Code after move operation
Value DTZ Type
MOVE 11 19 75 D(*MDY&); ’ABCDEFGHIJ1975-11-19’
MOVE(P) 11 19 75 D(*MDY&); ’ 1975-11-19’
MOVEL 11 19 75 D(*MDY&); ’1975-11-19abcdefghij’
MOVEL(P) 11 19 75 D(MDY&); ’1975-11-19 ’
Table 59. Moving a Time field to a Numeric field. The result field is larger than factor 2. Assume that Factor 1
contains *ISO and that the result field is defined as
D Result_Fld 20S INZ(11111111111111111111)
Operation Factor 2 Value of Result Field

Code after move operation
Value DTZ Type
MOVE 9:42 PM T(*USA) 11111111111111214200
MOVE(P) 9:42 PM T(*USA) 00000000000000214200
MOVEL 9:42 PM T(*USA) 21420011111111111111
MOVEL(P) 9:42 PM T(*USA) 21420000000000000000
Table 60. Moving a Numeric field to a Time field. Factor 2 is larger than the result field. The highlighted portion
shows the part of the factor 2 field that is moved.
Operation
Code DTZ Type Value
MOVE 11:12:13:14 T(*EUR) 12.13.14
MOVEL 11:12:13:14 T(*EUR) 11.12.13

MOVE (Move)
Table 61. Moving a Numeric field to a Timestamp field. Factor 2 is larger than the result field. The highlighted portion
shows the part of the factor 2 field that is moved.
Operation
Code DTZ Type Value
MOVE 12340618230323123420123456 Z(*ISO) 1823-03-23-12.34.20.123456
MOVEL 12340618230323123420123456 Z(*ISO) 1234-06-18-23.03.23.123420
Factor 2 Shorter Than Result Field

Result Field
Factor 2
+
a. Character P H4 S N Before MOVE 1 2 34 5 6 7 8 4
to
Character P H4 S N After MOVE 1 2 3 4 P H4 S N
+
b. Character P H4 S N Before MOVE 1 2 34 5 6 7 8 4
to
-
Numeric P H4 SN After MOVE 1 2 34 7 8 4 2 5
c. Numeric 12 7 8 4 2 5 Before MOVE 1 2 34 5 6 7 8 9

to
Numeric 12 7 8 4 2 5 After MOVE 1 2 12 7 8 4 2 5
d. Numeric 12 7 8 4 2 5 Before MOVE A C F GP H 4 S N

to
Character 12 7 8 4 2 5 After MOVE A C12 7 8 4 2 5
Factor 2 Longer Than Result Field
a. Character AC E G PH 4 S N Before MOVE 5 6 7 8 4

to
Character AC E G PH 4 S N After MOVE P H4 S N
+
b. Character AC E G PH 4 S N Before MOVE 5 6 7 8 4
to -
Numeric AC E G PH 4 S N After MOVE 7 8 4 2 5
c. Numeric 12 7 8 4 2 5 Before MOVE 5 6 7 8 4

to
Numeric 12 7 8 4 2 5 After MOVE 7 8 4 2 5
d. Numeric 12 7 8 4 2 5 Before MOVE P H4 S N

to
Character 12 7 8 4 2 5 After MOVE 7 8 4 2 5
Figure 297. MOVE Operation (Part 1 of 2)

MOVE (Move)

With P in Operation Extender Field

+
a. Character P H4 S N Before MOVE 1 2 34 5 6 7 8 4
to
Character P H4 SN After MOVE P H4 S N
+
b. Character P H4 SN Before MOVE 1 2 34 5 6 7 8 4
to -
Numeric P H4 SN After MOVE 0. 0. 0. 0. 7 8 4 2 5
c. Numeric 12 7 8 4 2 5 Before MOVE 1 2 34 5 6 7 8 9

to
Numeric 12 7 8 4 2 5 After MOVE 0. 0. 1 2 7 8 4 2 5
d. Numeric 12 7 8 4 2 5 Before MOVE AC FG P H 4 S N

to
Character 12 7 8 4 2 5 After MOVE 12 7 8 4 2 5
Factor 2 and Result Field Same Length
a. Character P H4 S N Before MOVE 5 6 7 8 4

to
Character P H4 S N After MOVE P H4 S N
b. Character P H4 S N Before MOVE 5 6 7 8 4

to
Numeric P H4 S N After MOVE
-
7 8 4 2 5
c. Numeric -
7 8 4 2 5 Before MOVE AL T 5 F
to
Numeric - -
7 8 4 2 5 After MOVE 7 8 4 2 5
d. Numeric -
7 8 4 2 5 Before MOVE AL T 5 F
to
Character - -
7 8 4 2 5 After MOVE 7 8 4 2 5
+
Note: 4 = letter D , and 5 = letter N.
Figure 297. MOVE Operation (Part 2 of 2)

MOVEA (Move Array)
MOVEA (Move Array)

Free-Form Syntax (not allowed)

MOVEA (P) Source Target + − ZB
The MOVEA operation transfers character, graphic, UCS-2, or numeric values from
factor 2 to the result field. (Certain restrictions apply when moving numeric
values.) Factor 2 or the result field must contain an array. Factor 2 and the result
field cannot specify the same array even if the array is indexed. You can:
v Move several contiguous array elements to a single field
v Move a single field to several contiguous array elements
v Move contiguous array elements to contiguous elements of another array.
Movement of data starts with the first element of an array if the array is not
indexed or with the element specified if the array is indexed. The movement of
data ends when the last array element is moved or filled. When the result field
contains the indicator array, all indicators affected by the MOVEA operation are
noted in the cross-reference listing.
The coding for and results of MOVEA operations are shown in Figure 298 on
page 644.
Character, graphic, and UCS-2 MOVEA Operations

Both factor 2 and the result field must be the same type - either character, graphic,
or UCS-2. Graphic or UCS-2 CCSIDs must be the same, unless one of the CCSIDs
is 65535, or in the case of graphic fields, CCSID(*GRAPH: *IGNORE) was specified
on the control specification.
On a character, graphic, or UCS-2 MOVEA operation, movement of data ends

when the number of characters moved equals the shorter length of the fields
specified by factor 2 and the result field; therefore, the MOVEA operation could
end in the middle of an array element. Variable-length arrays are not allowed.
Numeric MOVEA Operations

Moves are only valid between fields and array elements with the same numeric
length defined. Factor 2 and the result field entries can specify numeric fields,
numeric array elements, or numeric arrays; at least one must be an array or array
element. The numeric types can be binary, packed decimal, or zoned decimal but
need not be the same between factor 2 and the result field.
Factor 2 can contain a numeric literal if the result field entry specifies a numeric
array or numeric array-element:
v The numeric literal cannot contain a decimal point.
v The length of the numeric literal cannot be greater than the element length of
the array or array element specified in the result field.
Decimal positions are ignored during the move and need not correspond. Numeric
values are not converted to account for the differences in the defined number of
decimal places.

MOVEA (Move Array)
The figurative constants *BLANK, *ALL, *ON and *OFF are not valid in factor 2 of
a MOVEA operation on a numeric array.
General MOVEA Operations

If you need to use a MOVEA operation in your application, but restrictions on
numeric MOVEA operations prevent you, you might be able to use character
MOVEA operations. If the numeric array is in zoned decimal format:
v Define the numeric array as a subfield of a data structure
v Redefine the numeric array in the data structure as a character array.
If a figurative constant is specified with MOVEA, the length of the constant

generated is equal to the portion of the array specified. For figurative constants in
numeric arrays, the element boundaries are ignored except for the sign that is put
in each array element. Examples are:
v MOVEA *BLANK ARR(X)
Beginning with element X, the remainder of ARR will contain blanks.
v MOVEA *ALL‘XYZ’ ARR(X)
ARR has 4-byte character elements. Element boundaries are ignored, as is always
the case with character MOVEA. Beginning with element X, the remainder of the
array will contain ‘XYZXYZXYZXYZ. . .’.
For character, graphic, UCS-2, and numeric MOVEA operations, you can specify a
P operation extender to pad the result from the right.
For further information on the MOVEA operation, see “Move Operations” on

page 402.
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
C MOVEA ARRX ARRY
* Array-to-array move. No indexing; different length array,
* same element length.
ARRX ARRY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0. Before AA BBCCDD E E F F
MOVEA
One Element One Element
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0. After 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0. F F
MOVEA
Figure 298. MOVEA Operation (Part 1 of 10)

MOVEA (Move Array)
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
C MOVEA ARRX ARRY(3)
* Array-to-array move with index result field.
ARRX ARRY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0. Before AA BBCCDD E E
MOVEA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0. After AA BB12 34 5 6
MOVEA
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
C MOVEA ARRX ARRY
* Array-to-array move, no indexing and different length array
* elements.
ARRX ARRY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0. Before A A A B B B C C C DDD
MOVEA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0. After 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0. D D
MOVEA

MOVEA (Move Array)
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
C MOVEA ARRX(4) ARRY
* Array-to-array move, index factor 2 with different length array
* elements.
ARRX ARRY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0. Before AA A BBBCCC DDD
MOVEA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0. After 7 8 9 0. B B C C C D D D
MOVEA
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
C MOVEA FIELDA ARRY
* Field-to-array move, no indexing on array.
FIELDA ARRY
12 34 5 6 7 Before 9 8 6 5 4 3 2 1 0. A B C
MOVEA
One Element
12 34 5 6 7 After 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 0. A B C
MOVEA

MOVEA (Move Array)
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
*
* In the following example, N=3. Array-to-field move with variable
* indexing.
C MOVEA ARRX(N) FIELD
*
ARRY FIELD
0. 1 0. A 0. 2 0. B 0. 3 0. C Before 0. 1 0. A
MOVEA
One Element
0. 1 0. A 0. 2 0. B 0. 3 0. C After 0. 2 0. B
MOVEA
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
C MOVEA ARRB ARRZ
*
* An array-to-array move showing numeric elements.
1.0. 1.1 1.2 1.0. Before MOVEA 2.0. 3.0. 4.0. 5.0. 6.0.
1.0. 1.1 1.2 1.0. After MOVEA 1.0. 1.1 1.2 1.0. 6.0.

MOVEA (Move Array)
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
C MOVEA(P) ARRX ARRY
* Array-to-array move with padding. No indexing; different length
* array with same element length.
ARRX ARRY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0. Before AA BBCCDD E E F F
MOVEA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0. After 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0.
MOVEA
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
C MOVEA(P) ARRB ARRZ
*
* An array-to-array move showing numeric elements with padding.
1.0. 1.1 1.2 1.0. Before MOVEA 2.0. 3.0. 4.0. 5.0. 6.0.
1.0. 1.1 1.2 1.0. After MOVEA 1.0. 1.1 1.2 1.3 . .
0.0

MOVEA (Move Array)
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
C MOVEA(P) ARRX(3) ARRY
* Array-to-array move with padding. No indexing; different length
* array with different element length.
ARRX ARRY
P P P QQQR R R Before AA BBCCDD E E F F
MOVEA
P P P QQQR R R After RRR

MOVEA

MOVEL (Move Left)
MOVEL (Move Left)

|| Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the EVAL operation code, or built-in functions such as %CHAR,
| %DATE, %DEC, %DECH, %GRAPH, %INT, %INTH, TIME, %TIMESTAMP, %UCS2,
| %UNS or %UNSH)
|

MOVEL (P) Data Attributes Source field Target field + − ZB
The MOVEL operation transfers characters from factor 2 to the result field. Moving
begins with the leftmost character in factor 2. You cannot specify resulting
indicators if the result field is an array. You can specify them if the result field is
an array element, or a non-array field.
When data is moved to a numeric field, the sign (+ or -) of the result field is
retained except when factor 2 is as long as or longer than the result field. In this
case, the sign of factor 2 is used as the sign of the result field.
Factor 1 can contain a date or time format to specify the format of a character or
numeric field that is the source or target of the operation.For information on the
formats that can be used see “Date Data Type” on page 193, “Time Data Type” on
page 196, and “Timestamp Data Type” on page 197.
If the source or target is a character field, you may optionally indicate the
separator following the format in factor 1. Only separators that are valid for that
format are allowed.
If factor 2 is *DATE or UDATE and the result is a Date field, factor 1 is not
required. If factor 1 contains a date format it must be compatible with the format
of *DATE or UDATE in factor 2 as specified by the DATEDIT keyword on the
control specification.
If factor 2 is longer than the result field, the excess rightmost characters of factor 2
are not moved. If the result field is longer than factor 2, the excess rightmost
characters in the result field are unchanged, unless padding is specified.
Float numeric fields and literals are not allowed as Factor 2 or Result-Field entries.
If factor 2 is UCS-2 and the result field is character, or if factor 2 is character and
the result field is UCS-2, the number of characters moved is variable since the
character data may or may not contain shift characters and graphic characters. For
example, five UCS-2 characters can convert to:
v Five single-byte characters
v Five double-byte characters
v A combination of single-byte and double-byte characters with shift characters
separating the modes
If the resulting data is too long to fit the result field, the data will be truncated. If
the result is single-byte character, it is the responsibility of the user to ensure that
the result contains complete characters, and contains matched SO/SI pairs.
The MOVEL operation is summarized in Figure 299 on page 653.

MOVEL (Move Left)
A summary of the rules for MOVEL operation for four conditions based on field
lengths:
1. Factor 2 is the same length as the result field:
a. If factor 2 and the result field are numeric, the sign is moved into the
rightmost position.
b. If factor 2 is numeric and the result field is character, the sign is moved into
the rightmost position.
c. If factor 2 is character and the result field is numeric, a minus zone is
moved into the rightmost position of the result field if the zone from the
rightmost position of factor 2 is a hexadecimal D (minus zone). However, if
the zone from the rightmost position of factor 2 is not a hexadecimal D, a
positive zone is moved into the rightmost position of the result field. Digit
portions are converted to their corresponding numeric characters. If the
digit portions are not valid digits, a data exception error occurs.
d. If factor 2 and the result field are character, all characters are moved.
e. If factor 2 and the result field are both graphic or UCS-2, all graphic or
UCS-2 characters are moved.
f. If factor 2 is graphic and the result field is character, one graphic character
will be lost, because 2 positions (bytes) in the character result field will be
used to hold the SO/SI inserted by the compiler.
g. If factor 2 is character and the result field is graphic, the factor 2 character
data must be completely enclosed by one single pair of SO/SI. The SO/SI
will be removed by the compiler before moving the data to the graphic
result field.
2. Factor 2 is longer than the result field:
a. If factor 2 and the result field are numeric, the sign from the rightmost
position of factor 2 is moved into the rightmost position of the result field.
b. If factor 2 is numeric and the result field is character, the result field
contains only numeric characters.
c. If factor 2 is character and the result field is numeric, a minus zone is
moved into the rightmost position of the result field if the zone from the
rightmost position of factor 2 is a hexadecimal D (minus zone). However, if
the zone from the rightmost position of factor 2 is not a hexadecimal D, a
positive zone is moved into the rightmost position of the result field. Other
result field positions contain only numeric characters.
d. If factor 2 and the result field are character, only the number of characters
needed to fill the result field are moved.
e. If factor 2 and the result field are graphic or UCS-2, only the number of
graphic or UCS-2 characters needed to fill the result field are moved.
f. If factor 2 is graphic and the result field is character, the graphic data will be
truncated and SO/SI will be inserted by the compiler.
g. If factor 2 is character and the result is graphic, the character data will be
truncated. The character data must be completely enclosed by one single
pair of SO/SI.
3. Factor 2 is shorter than the result field:
a. If factor 2 is either numeric or character and the result field is numeric, the
digit portion of factor 2 replaces the contents of the leftmost positions of the
result field. The sign in the rightmost position of the result field is not
changed.

MOVEL (Move Left)
b. If factor 2 is either numeric or character and the result field is character
data, the characters in factor 2 replace the equivalent number of leftmost
positions in the result field. No change is made in the zone of the rightmost
position of the result field.
c. If factor 2 is graphic and the result field is character, the SO/SI are added
immediately before and after the graphic data. This may cause unbalanced
SO/SI in the character field due to residual data in the field, but this is
users’ responsibility.
d. Notice that when moving from a character to graphic field, the entire
character field should be enclosed in SO/SI. For example, if the character
field length is 8, the character data in the field should be ″oAABBi″ and
not ″oAABBi″.
4. Factor 2 is shorter than the result field and P is specified in the operation
extender field:
a. The move is performed as described above.
b. The result field is padded from the right. See “Move Operations” on
page 402 for more information on the rules for padding.
When moving variable-length character, graphic, or UCS-2 data, the

variable-length field works in exactly the same way as a fixed-length field with the
same current length. A MOVEL operation does not change the length of a
variable-length result field. For examples, see Figures 302 to 307.
For further information on the MOVEL operation, see “Move Operations” on

page 402.

MOVEL (Move Left)
Factor 2 and Result Field Same Length

- +
a. Numeric 7 8 4 2 5 Before MOVEL 5 6 7 8 4
to
- -
Numeric 7 8 4 2 5 After MOVEL 7 8 4 2 5
b. Numeric 7 8 4 2 5 Before MOVEL AKT 4 D

to
Character
-
7 8 4 2 5 After MOVEL 7 8 4 2 N
+
c. Character P H4 S N Before MOVEL 5 6 7 8 4
to
Numeric -
P H4 S N After MOVEL 7 8 4 2 5
d. Character P H4 S N Before MOVEL AKT 4 D

to
Character P H4 SN After MOVEL P H4 SN
Factor 2 Longer Than Result Field

- +
a. Numeric 0. 0. 0. 2 5 8 4 2 5 Before MOVEL 5 6 7 8 4
to -
Numeric 0. 0. 0. 2 5 8 4 2 5 After MOVEL 0. 0. 0. 2 5
-
b. Numeric 9 0. 3 1 7 8 4 2 5 Before MOVEL AKT 4 D
to -
Character 9 0. 3 1 7 8 4 2 5 After MOVEL 9 0. 3 1 7
+
c. Character B RWC X H 4 S N Before MOVEL 5 6 7 8 4
to
Numeric B RWC X H 4 S N -
After MOVEL 2 9 6 3 7
d. Character B RWC X H 4 S N Before MOVEL AKT 4 D

to
Character B RWC X H 4 S N After MOVEL B RWC X
Figure 299. MOVEL Operation (Part 1 of 2)

MOVEL (Move Left)

- +
7 8 4 2 5 Before MOVEL 1 3 0. 9 4 3 2 1 0.
Numeric
to - +
Numeric 7 8 4 2 5 After MOVEL 7 8 4 2 5 3 2 1 0.
a.
+
CP T 5N Before MOVEL 1 3 0. 9 4 3 2 1 0.
Character
to +
Numeric CP T 5N After MOVEL 3 7 3 5 5 3 2 1 0.
-
Numeric 7 8 4 2 5 Before MOVEL BRWC X H 4 S A
to -
Character 7 8 4 2 5 After MOVEL 7 8 4 2 NH 4 S A
b.
Character CP T 5N Before MOVEL BRWC X H 4 S A

to
Character CP T 5N After MOVEL CP T 5 N H4 S A
+
Note: 4 = letter D , and 5 = letter N; arrow is decimal point.

With P in Operation Extender Field
- +
7 8 4 2 5 Before MOVEL 1 3 0. 9 4 3 2 1 0.
Numeric
to - +
Numeric 7 8 4 2 5 After MOVEL 7 8 4 2 5 0. 0. 0. 0.
a.
+
CP T 5N Before MOVEL 1 3 0. 9 4 3 2 1 0.
Character
to +
Numeric CP T 5N After MOVEL 3 7 3 5 5 0. 0. 0. 0.
-
Numeric 7 8 4 2 5 Before MOVEL BRWC X H 4 S A
to -
Character 7 8 4 2 5 After MOVEL 7 8 4 2 NH 4 S A
b.
Character CP T 5N Before MOVEL BRWC X H 4 S A

to
Character CP T 5N After MOVEL CP T 5 N
+
Note: 4 = letter D , and 5 = letter N; arrow is decimal point.
Figure 299. MOVEL Operation (Part 2 of 2)

MOVEL (Move Left)
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
D
*
* Example of MOVEL between graphic and character fields
*
D char_fld1 S 8A inz(’ ’)
D dbcs_fld1 S 4G inz(’oAABBCCDDi’)
D char_fld2 S 4A inz(’ ’)
D dbcs_fld2 S 3G inz(G’oAABBCCi’)
D char_fld3 S 10A inz(*ALL’X’)
D dbcs_fld3 S 3G inz(G’oAABBCCi’)
D char_fld4 S 10A inz(’oAABBCC i’)
D dbcs_fld4 S 2G
*
*
*
* The result field length is equal to the factor 2 length in bytes.
* One DBCS character is lost due to insertion of SO/SI.
* Value of char_fld1 after MOVEL operation is ’oAABBCCi’
*
C MOVEL dbcs_fld1 char_fld1
*
* Result field length shorter than factor 2 length. Truncation occurs.
* Value of char_fld2 after MOVEL operation is ’oAAi’
*
*
* Result field length longer than factor 2 length. Example shows
* SO/SI are added immediately before and after graphic data.
* Before the MOVEL, Result Field contains ’XXXXXXXXXX’
* Value of char_fld3 after MOVEL operation is ’oAABBCCiXX’
*
*
* Character to Graphic MOVEL
* Result Field shorter than Factor 2. Truncation occurs.
* Value of dbcs_fld4 after MOVEL operation is ’AABB’
*
C MOVEL char_fld4 dbcs_fld4
Figure 300. MOVEL between character and graphic fields

MOVEL (Move Left)
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
HKeywords+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
*
* Example of MOVEL between character and date fields
*
* Control specification date format
H DATFMT(*MDY)
*
D datefld S D INZ(D’04/15/96’)
D char_fld1 S 8A
D char_fld2 S 10A INZ(’XXXXXXXXXX’)
D char_fld3 S 10A INZ(’04/15/96XX’)
D date_fld3 S D
D char_fld4 S 10A INZ(’XXXXXXXXXX’)
D char_fld5 S 9A INZ(’015/04/50’)
D date_fld2 S D INZ(D’11/16/10’)
*
*
* Date to Character MOVEL
* The result field length is equal to the factor 2 length. Value of
* char_fld1 after the MOVEL operation is ’04/15/96’.
C *MDY MOVEL datefld char_fld1
* Date to Character MOVEL
* The result field length is longer than the factor 2 length.
* Before MOVEL, result field contains ’XXXXXXXXXX’
* Value of char_fld2 after the MOVEL operation is ’04/15/96XX’.
C *MDY MOVEL datefld char_fld2
* Character to Date MOVEL
* The result field length is shorter than the factor 2 length.
* Value of date_fld3 after the MOVEL operation is ’04/15/96’.
C *MDY MOVEL char_fld3 date_fld3
* Date to Character MOVEL (no separators)
* Before MOVEL, result field contains ’XXXXXXXXXX’
* Value of char_fld4 after the MOVEL operation is ’041596XXXX’.
C *MDY0 MOVEL datefld char_fld4
* Character to date MOVEL
* The result field length is equal to the factor 2 length.
* The value of date_fld3 after the move is 04/15/50.
C *CDMY MOVEL char_fld5 date_fld3
* Date to character MOVEL (no separators)
* The value of char_fld4 after the move is ’2010320XXX’.
C *LONGJUL0 MOVEL date_fld2 char_fld4
Figure 301. MOVEL between character and date fields

MOVEL (Move Left)
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
*
* Example of MOVEL from variable to variable length
*
*
*
*
C MOVEL var15a var5a
* var5a = ’FGHDE’ (length=5)
C MOVEL var10 var5b
* var5b = ’01234’ (length=5)
C MOVEL var5c var15a
* var15a = ’ABC’ (length=3)
C MOVEL var10 var15b
* var15b = ’012’ (length=3)
Figure 302. MOVEL from a variable-length field to a variable-length field
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
*
* Example of MOVEL from variable to fixed length
*
D fix10 S 10A INZ(’’)
*
*
*
C MOVEL var5 fix5a
C MOVEL var10 fix5b
* fix5b = ’01234’
C MOVEL var15 fix5c
* fix5c = ’FGHPQ’
Figure 303. MOVEL from a variable-length field to fixed-length field

MOVEL (Move Left)
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
*
* Example of MOVEL from fixed to variable length
*
D var15b S 15A INZ(’WXYZ’) VARYING
*
*
*
C MOVEL fix10 var5
* var5 = ’PQRST’ (length=5)
C MOVEL fix10 var10
* var10 = ’PQRSTUVWXY’ (length=10)
C MOVEL fix10 var15a
* var15a = ’PQRSTUVWXYPQR’ (length=13)
C MOVEL fix10 var15b
* var15b = ’PQRS’ (length=4)
Figure 304. MOVEL from a fixed-length field to variable-length field
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
*
* Example of MOVEL(P) from variable to variable length
*
D var15c S 15A INZ(’FGHIJKLMN’) VARYING
*
*
*
C MOVEL(P) var15a var5a
* var5a = ’FGH ’ (length=5)
C MOVEL(P) var10 var5b
* var5b = ’01234’ (length=5)
C MOVEL(P) var5c var15b
* var15b = ’ABC’ (length=3)
C MOVEL(P) var15a var15c
* var15c = ’FGH ’ (length=9)
Figure 305. MOVEL(P) from a variable-length field to a variable-length field

MOVEL (Move Left)
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
*
* Example of MOVEL(P) from variable to fixed length
*
*
*
*
C MOVEL(P) var5 fix5a
C MOVEL(P) var10 fix5b
* fix5b = ’01234’
C MOVEL(P) var15 fix5c
* fix5c = ’FGH ’
Figure 306. MOVEL(P) from a variable-length field to fixed-length field
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
*
* Example of MOVEL(P) from fixed to variable length
*
D fix5 S 10A INZ(’.....’)
*
*
*
C MOVEL(P) fix10 var5
* var5 = ’PQRST’ (length=5)
C MOVEL(P) fix5 var10
* var10 = ’..... ’ (length=10)
C MOVEL(P) fix10 var15a
* var15a = ’PQRSTUVWXY ’ (length=13)
C MOVEL(P) fix10 var15b
* var15b = ’PQR’ (length=3)
Figure 307. MOVEL(P) from a fixed-length field to variable-length field

MULT (Multiply)
MULT (Multiply)
|| Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the * or *= operators)
|

MULT (H) Multiplicand Multiplier Product + − Z
If factor 1 is specified, factor 1 is multiplied by factor 2 and the product is placed

in the result field. Be sure that the result field is large enough to hold it. Use the
following rule to determine the maximum result field length: result field length
equals the length of factor 1 plus the length of factor 2. If factor 1 is not specified,
factor 2 is multiplied by the result field and the product is placed in the result
field. Factor 1 and factor 2 must be numeric, and each can contain one of: an array,
array element, field, figurative constant, literal, named constant, subfield, or table
name. The result field must be numeric, but cannot be a named constant or literal.
You can specify half adjust to have the result rounded.
For further information on the MULT operation, see “Arithmetic Operations” on

page 380.
See Figure 146 on page 383 for examples of the MULT operation.

MVR (Move Remainder)
MVR (Move Remainder)

Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the %REM built-in function)

MVR Remainder + − Z
The MVR operation moves the remainder from the previous DIV operation to a
separate field named in the result field. Factor 1 and factor 2 must be blank. The
MVR operation must immediately follow the DIV operation. If you use
conditioning indicators, ensure that the MVR operation is processed immediately
after the DIV operation. If the MVR operation is processed before the DIV
operation, undesirable results occur. The result field must be numeric and can
contain one of: an array, array element, subfield, or table name.
Leave sufficient room in the result field if the DIV operation uses factors with
decimal positions. The number of significant decimal positions is the greater of:
v The number of decimal positions in factor 1 of the previous divide operation
v The sum of the decimal positions in factor 2 and the result field of the previous
divide operation.
The sign (+ or -) of the remainder is the same as the dividend (factor 1).
You cannot specify half adjust on a DIV operation that is immediately followed by
an MVR operation.
The maximum number of whole number positions in the remainder is equal to the
whole number of positions in factor 2 of the previous divide operation.
The MVR operation cannot be used if the previous divide operation has an array
specified in the result field. Also, the MVR operation cannot be used if the
previous DIV operation has at least one float operand.
For further information on the MVR operation, see “Arithmetic Operations” on

page 380.
See Figure 146 on page 383 for an example of the MVR operation.

NEXT (Next)
NEXT (Next)
Free-Form Syntax NEXT{(E)} program-device file-name

NEXT (E) program-device file-name _ ER _
The NEXT operation code forces the next input for a multiple device file to come
from the program device specified by the program-device operand, providing the
input operation is a cycle read or a READ-by-file-name. Any read operation,
including CHAIN, EXFMT, READ, and READC, ends the effect of the previous
NEXT operation. If NEXT is specified more than once between input operations,
only the last operation is processed. The NEXT operation code can be used only
for a multiple device file.
For the program-device operand, enter the name of a 10-character field that contains
the program device name, a character literal, or named constant that is the
program device name. The file-name operand is the name of the multiple device
WORKSTN file for which the operation is requested.
To handle NEXT exceptions (file status codes greater than 1000), either the
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
C
* Assume devices Dev1 and Dev2 are connected to the WORKSTN file
* DEVICEFILE. The first READ reads data from DEV1, the second READ
* reads data from DEV2. The NEXT operation will direct the program
* to wait for data from the device specified in factor 1 (i.e. DEV1)
* for the third READ.
C
C READ (E) Devicefile
C :
C :
C ’DEV1’ NEXT
C :
Figure 308. NEXT Operations

OCCUR (Set/Get Occurrence of a Data Structure)

Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the %OCCUR built-in function)

OCCUR (E) Occurrence value Data structure Occurrence _ ER _
value
The OCCUR operation code specifies the occurrence of the data structure that is to
be used next within an RPG IV program.
The OCCUR operation establishes which occurrence of a multiple occurrence data

structure is used next in a program. Only one occurrence can be used at a time. If
a data structure with multiple occurrences or a subfield of that data structure is
specified in an operation, the first occurrence of the data structure is used until an
OCCUR operation is specified. After an OCCUR operation is specified, the
occurrence of the data structure that was established by the OCCUR operation is
used.
Factor 1 is optional; if specified, it can contain a numeric, zero decimal position

literal, field name, named constant, or a data structure name. Factor 1 is used
during the OCCUR operation to set the occurrence of the data structure specified
in factor 2. If factor 1 is blank, the value of the current occurrence of the data
structure in factor 2 is placed in the result field during the OCCUR operation.
If factor 1 is a data structure name, it must be a multiple occurrence data structure.

The current occurrence of the data structure in factor 1 is used to set the
occurrence of the data structure in factor 2.
Factor 2 is required and must be the name of a multiple occurrence data structure.
The result field is optional; if specified, it must be a numeric field name with no
decimal positions. During the OCCUR operation, the value of the current
occurrence of the data structure specified in factor 2, after being set by any value
or data structure that is optionally specified in factor 1, is placed in the result field.
At least one of factor 1 or the result field must be specified.
If the occurrence is outside the valid range set for the data structure, an error
occurs, and the occurrence of the data structure in factor 2 remains the same as
before the OCCUR operation was processed.
To handle OCCUR exceptions (program status code 122), either the operation code
When a multiple-occurrence data structure is imported or exported, the

information about the current occurrence is not imported or exported. See the
“EXPORT{(external_name)}” on page 294 and “IMPORT{(external_name)}” on
page 301 keywords for more information.

50th
FLDA FLDB Occurrence FLDC FLDD
49th
3rd
2nd
1st
DS1 DS2
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
*
* DS1 and DS2 are multiple occurrence data structures.
* Each data structure has 50 occurrences.
D DS1 DS OCCURS(50)
D FLDA 1 5
D FLDB 6 80
*
D DS2 DS OCCURS(50)
D FLDC 1 6
D FLDD 7 11
Figure 309. Uses of the OCCUR Operation (Part 1 of 2)

*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
* DS1 is set to the third occurrence. The subfields FLDA
* and FLDB of the third occurrence can now be used. The MOVE
* and Z-ADD operations change the contents of FLDA and FLDB,
* respectively, in the third occurrence of DS1.
C
C 3 OCCUR DS1
C MOVE ’ABCDE’ FLDA
C Z-ADD 22 FLDB
*
* DS1 is set to the fourth occurrence. Using the values in
* FLDA and FLDB of the fourth occurrence of DS1, the MOVE
* operation places the contents of FLDA in the result field,
* FLDX, and the Z-ADD operation places the contents of FLDB
* in the result field, FLDY.
C
C 4 OCCUR DS1
C MOVE FLDA FLDX
C Z-ADD FLDB FLDY
*
* DS1 is set to the occurrence specified in field X.
* For example, if X = 10, DS1 is set to the tenth occurrence.
C X OCCUR DS1
*
* DS1 is set to the current occurrence of DS2. For example, if
* the current occurrence of DS2 is the twelfth occurrence, DSI
* is set to the twelfth occurrence.
C DS2 OCCUR DS1
*
* The value of the current occurrence of DS1 is placed in the
* result field, Z. Field Z must be numeric with zero decimal
* positions. For example, if the current occurrence of DS1
* is 15, field Z contains the value 15.
C OCCUR DS1 Z
C
* DS1 is set to the current occurrence of DS2. The value of the
* current occurrence of DS1 is then moved to the result field,
* Z. For example, if the current occurrence of DS2 is the fifth
* occurrence, DS1 is set to the fifth occurrence. The result
* field, Z, contains the value 5.
C
C DS2 OCCUR DS1 Z
*
* DS1 is set to the current occurrence of X. For example, if
* X = 15, DS1 is set to the fifteenth occurrence.
* If X is less than 1 or is greater than 50,
* an error occurs and %ERROR is set to return ’1’.
* If %ERROR returns ’1’, the LR indicator is set on.
C
C X OCCUR (E) DS1
C IF %ERROR
C SETON LR
C ENDIF
Figure 309. Uses of the OCCUR Operation (Part 2 of 2)

*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
*
* Procedure P1 exports a multiple occurrence data structure.
* Since the information about the current occurrence is
* not exported, P1 can communicate this information to
* other procedures using parameters, but in this case it
* communicates this information by exporting the current
* occurrence.
*
D EXP_DS DS OCCURS(50) EXPORT
D FLDA 1 5
D NUM_OCCUR C %ELEM(EXP_DS)
D EXP_DS_CUR S 5P 0 EXPORT
*
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
*
* Loop through the occurrences. For each occurrence, call
* procedure P2 to process the occurrence. Since the occurrence
* number EXP_DS_CUR is exported, P2 will know which occurrence
* to process.
*
C DO NUM_OCCUR EXP_DS_CUR
C EXP_DS_CUR OCCUR EXP_DS
C :
C CALLB ’P2’
C ENDDO
C :
Figure 310. Exporting a Multiple Occurrence DS (Part 1 of 2)
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
*
* Procedure P2 imports the multiple occurrence data structure.
* The current occurrence is also imported.
*
D EXP_DS DS OCCURS(50) IMPORT
D FLDA 1 5
D EXP_DS_CUR S 5P 0 IMPORT
*
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
*
* Set the imported multiple-occurrence data structure using
* the imported current occurrence.
*
C EXP_DS_CUR OCCUR EXP_DS
*
* Process the current occurrence.
C :
Figure 310. Exporting a Multiple Occurrence DS (Part 2 of 2)

ON-ERROR (On Error)
ON-ERROR (On Error)

Free-Form Syntax ON-ERROR {exception-id1 {:exception-id2...}}

ON-ERROR List of exception IDs
You specify which error conditions the on-error block handles in the list of
exception IDs (exception-id1:exception-id2...). You can specify any combination of the
following, separated by colons:
nnnnn A status code
*PROGRAM Handles all program-error status codes, from 00100 to 00999
*FILE Handles all file-error status codes, from 01000 to 09999
*ALL Handles both program-error and file-error codes, from 00100 to
09999. This is the default.
Status codes outside the range of 00100 to 09999, for example codes from 0 to 99,
are not monitored for. You cannot specify these values for an on-error group. You
also cannot specify any status codes that are not valid for the particular version of
the compiler being used.
If the same status code is covered by more than one on-error group, only the first
one is used. For this reason, you should specify special values such as *ALL after
the specific status codes.
Any errors that occur within an on-error group are not handled by the monitor
group. To handle errors, you can specify a monitor group within an on-error
group.
When all the statements in an on-error block have been processed, control passes
to the statement following the ENDMON statement.
For an example of the ON-ERROR statement, see “MONITOR (Begin a Monitor

Group)” on page 627.

OPEN (Open File for Processing)

Free-Form Syntax OPEN{(E)} file-name

OPEN (E) file-name _ ER _
The explicit OPEN operation opens the file named in the file-name operand. The
file named cannot be designated as a primary, secondary, or table file.
To handle OPEN exceptions (file status codes greater than 1000), either the
To open the file specified in the file-name operand for the first time in a program
with an explicit OPEN operation, specify the USROPN keyword on the file
description specifications. (See Chapter 14, “File Description Specifications” on
page 257 for restrictions when using the USROPN keyword.)
If a file is opened and later closed by the CLOSE operation in the program, the
programmer can reopen the file with the OPEN operation and the USROPN
keyword on the file description specification is not required. When the USROPN
keyword is not specified on the file description specification, the file is opened at
program initialization. If an OPEN operation is specified for a file that is already
open, an error occurs.
Multiple OPEN operations in a program to the same file are valid as long as the
file is closed when the OPEN operation is issued to it.
When you open a file with the DEVID keyword specified (on the file description
specifications), the fieldname specified as a parameter on the DEVID keyword is
set to blanks. See the description of the DEVID keyword, in Chapter 14, “File
Description Specifications” on page 257.

*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
F
FEXCEPTN O E DISK USROPN
FFILEX F E DISK
F
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
*
* The explicit OPEN operation opens the EXCEPTN file for
* processing if indicator 97 is on and indicator 98 is off.
* Note that the EXCEPTN file on the file description
* specifications has the USROPN keyword specified.
* %ERROR is set to return ’1’ if the OPEN operation fails.
*
C IF *in97 and not *in98
C OPEN(E) EXCEPTN
C IF not %ERROR
C WRITE ERREC
C ENDIF
C ENDIF
*
* FILEX is opened at program initialization. The explicit
* CLOSE operation closes FILEX before control is passed to RTNX.
* RTNX or another program can open and use FILEX. Upon return,
* the OPEN operation reopens the file. Because the USROPN
* keyword is not specified for FILEX, the file is opened at
* program initialization
*
C CLOSE FILEX
C CALL ’RTNX’
C OPEN FILEX
Figure 311. OPEN Operation with CLOSE Operation

ORxx (Or)
ORxx (Or)
Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the OR operator)

ORxx Comparand Comparand
The ORxx operation is optional with the DOUxx, DOWxx, IFxx, WHENxx, and
ANDxx operations. ORxx is specified immediately following a DOUxx, DOWxx,
IFxx, WHENxx, ANDxx or ORxx statement. Use ORxx to specify a more complex
condition for the DOUxx, DOWxx, IFxx, and WHENxx operations.
through L9 indicator, an LR indicator, or an L0 entry to group the statement within
the appropriate section of the program. The control level entry must be the same
as the entry for the associated DOUxx, DOWxx, IFxx, or WHENxx operation.
Conditioning indicator entries (positions 9 through 11) are not allowed.

constant, a table name, an array element, a data structure name, or a field name.
Factor 1 and factor 2 must be of the same type. The comparison of factor 1 and
factor 2 follows the same rules as those given for the compare operations. See
“Compare Operations” on page 390.
Figure 264 on page 576 shows an example of ORxx and ANDxx operations with a
DOUxx operation.

OTHER (Otherwise Select)
OTHER (Otherwise Select)

Free-Form Syntax OTHER

OTHER
The OTHER operation begins the sequence of operations to be processed if no

WHENxx or “WHEN (When True Then Select)” on page 746 condition is satisfied
in a SELECT group. The sequence ends with the ENDSL or END operation.
Rules to remember when using the OTHER operation:

v The OTHER operation is optional in a SELECT group.
v Only one OTHER operation can be specified in a SELECT group.
v No WHENxx or WHEN operation can be specified after an OTHER operation in
the same SELECT group.
v The sequence of calculation operations in the OTHER group can be empty; the
effect is the same as not specifying an OTHER statement.
v Within total calculations, the control level entry (positions 7 and 8) can be blank
or can contain an L1 through L9 indicator, an LR indicator, or an L0 entry to
group the statement within the appropriate section of the program. The control
level entry is for documentation purposes only. Conditioning indicator entries
(positions 9 through 11) are not allowed.
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
*
* Example of a SELECT group with WHENxx and OTHER. If X equals 1,
* do the operations in sequence 1; if X does not equal 1 and Y
* equals 2, do the operations in sequence 2. If neither
* condition is true, do the operations in sequence 3.
*
C SELECT
C X WHENEQ 1
*
* Sequence 1
*
C :
C :
C Y WHENEQ 2
*
* Sequence 2
*
C :
C :
C OTHER
*
* Sequence 3
*
C :
C :
C ENDSL
Figure 312. OTHER Operation
For more details and examples, see the SELECT and WHENxx operations.

OUT (Write a Data Area)
OUT (Write a Data Area)

Free-Form Syntax OUT{(E)} {*LOCK} data-area-name

OUT (E) *LOCK data-area-name _ ER _
The OUT operation updates the data area specified in the data-area-name operand.
To specify a data area as the data-area-name operand of an OUT operation, you
must ensure two things:
v The data area must also be specified in the result field of a *DTAARA DEFINE
statement, or defined using the DTAARA keyword on the Definition
specification.
v The data area must have been locked previously by a *LOCK IN statement or it
must have been specified as a data area data structure by a U in position 23 of
the definition specifications. (The RPG IV language implicitly retrieves and locks
data area data structures at program initialization.)
You can specify the optional reserved word *LOCK. When *LOCK is specified, the
data area remains locked after it is updated. When *LOCK is not specified, the
data area is unlocked after it is updated.
*LOCK cannot be specified when the data-area-name operand is the name of the
local data area or the Program Initialization Parameters (PIP) data area.
The data-area-name operand must be either the name of the data area or the
reserved word *DTAARA. When *DTAARA is specified, all data areas defined in
the program are updated. If an error occurs when one or more data areas are
updated (for example, if you specify an OUT operation to a data area that has not
been locked by the program), an error occurs on the OUT operation and the RPG
IV exception/error handling routine receives control. If a message is issued to the
requester, the message identifies the data area in error.
To handle OUT exceptions (program status codes 401-421, 431, or 432), either the
page 82.
Positions 71-72 and 75-76 must be blank.
For further rules for the OUT operation, see “Data-Area Operations” on page 392.
See Figure 279 on page 611 for an example of the OUT operation.

PARM (Identify Parameters)

Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the PR definition specification)

PARM Target field Source field Parameter
The declarative PARM operation defines the parameters that compose a parameter
list (PLIST). PARM operations can appear anywhere in calculations as long as they
immediately follow the PLIST, CALL, or CALLB operation they refer to. PARM
statements must be in the order expected by the called program or procedure. One
PARM statement, or as many as 255 for a CALL or 399 for a CALLB or PLIST are
allowed.
The PARM operation can be specified anywhere within calculations, including total
calculations. The control level entry (positions 7 and 8) can be blank or can contain
an L1 through L9 indicator, an LR indicator, or an L0 entry to group the statement
in the appropriate section of the program. Conditioning indicator entries (positions
9 through 11) are not allowed.
Factor 1 and factor 2 entries are optional. If specified, the entries must be the same
type as specified in the result field. If the target field is variable-length, its length
will be set to the length of the value of the source field. A literal or named constant
cannot be specified in factor 1. Factor 1 and factor 2 must be blank if the result
field contains the name of a multiple-occurrence data structure or *OMIT.
TIP
If parameter type-checking is important for the application, you should define
a prototype and procedure interface definition for the call interface, rather
than use the PLIST and PARM operations.
The result field must contain the name of a:

v For all PARM statements:
– Field
– Data structure
– Array
v For non-*ENTRY PLIST PARM statements it can also contain:
– Array element
– *OMIT (CALLB only)
The Result-Field entry of a PARM operation cannot contain:

v *IN, *INxx, *IN(xx)
v A literal
v A named constant
v A table name
In addition, the following are not allowed in the Result-Field entry of a PARM
operation in the *ENTRY PLIST:
v *OMIT

v A globally initialized data structure
v A data structure with initialized subfields
v A data structure with a compile time array as a subfield
v Fields or data structures defined with the keywords BASED, IMPORT, or
EXPORT
v An array element
v A data-area name
v A data-area data structure name
v A data-structure subfield
v A compile-time array
v A program status (PSDS) or file information data structure (INFDS)
A field name can be specified only once in an *ENTRY PLIST.
If an array is specified in the result field, the area defined for the array is passed to
the called program or procedure. When a data structure with multiple occurrences
is passed to the called program or procedure, all occurrences of the data structure
are passed as a single field. However, if a subfield of a multiple occurrence data
structure is specified in the result field, only the current occurrence of the subfield
is passed to the called program or procedure.
Each parameter field has only one storage location; it is in the calling program or
procedure. The address of the storage location of the result field is passed to the
called program or procedure on a PARM operation. If the called program or
procedure changes the value of a parameter, it changes the data at that storage
location. When control returns to the calling program or procedure, the parameter
in the calling program or procedure (that is, the result field) has changed. Even if
the called program or procedure ends in error after it changes the value of a
parameter, the changed value exists in the calling program or procedure. To
preserve the information passed to the called program or procedure for later use,
specify in factor 2 the name of the field that contains the information you want to
pass to the called program or procedure. Factor 2 is copied into the result field,
and the storage address of the result field is passed to the called program or
procedure.
Because the parameter fields are accessed by address, not field name, the calling
and called parameters do not have to use the same field names for fields that are
passed. The attributes of the corresponding parameter fields in the calling and
called programs or procedures should be the same. If they are not, undesirable
results may occur.
When a CALL or CALLB operation runs, the following occurs:

1. In the calling procedure, the contents of the factor 2 field of a PARM operation
are copied into the result field (receiver field) of the same PARM operation.
2. In the case of a CALLB when the result field is *OMIT, a null address will be
passed to the called procedure.
3. In the called procedure, after it receives control and after any normal program
initialization, the contents of the result field of a PARM operation are copied
into the factor 1 field (receiver field) of the same PARM operation.
4. In the called procedure, when control is returned to the calling procedure, the
contents of the factor 2 field of a PARM operation are copied into the result

field (receiver field) of the same PARM operation. This move does not occur if
the called procedure ends abnormally. The result of the move is unpredictable
if an error occurs on the move.
5. Upon return to the calling procedure, the contents of the result field of a PARM
operation in the calling procedure are copied into the factor 1 field (receiver
field) of the same PARM operation. This move does not occur if the called
procedure ends abnormally or if an error occurs on the call operation.
Note: The data is moved in the same way as data is moved using the EVAL
operation code. Strict type compatibility is enforced. For a discussion of how
to call and pass parameters to a program through CL, see the CL
Programming manual.
Figure 313 on page 677 illustrates the PARM operation.

PLIST (Identify a Parameter List)

Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the PR definition specification)

PLIST PLIST name
The declarative PLIST operation defines a unique symbolic name for a parameter
list to be specified in a CALL or CALLB operation.
You can specify a PLIST operation anywhere within calculations, including within
total calculations and between subroutines. The control level entry (positions 7 and
8) can be blank or can contain an L1 through L9 indicator, an LR indicator, or an
L0 entry to group the statement in the appropriate section of the program. The
PLIST operation must be immediately followed by at least one PARM operation.
Conditioning indicator entries (positions 9 through 11) are not allowed.
Factor 1 must contain the name of the parameter list. If the parameter list is the
entry parameter list, factor 1 must contain *ENTRY. Only one *ENTRY parameter
list can be specified in a program or procedure. A parameter list is ended when an
operation other than PARM is encountered.
TIP
If parameter type-checking is important for the application, you should define
a prototype and procedure interface definition for the call interface, rather
than use the PLIST and PARM operations.

*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
*
* In the calling program, the CALL operation calls PROG1 and
* allows PROG1 to access the data in the parameter list fields.
C CALL ’PROG1’ PLIST1
*
* In the second PARM statement, when CALL is processed, the
* contents of factor 2, *IN27, are placed in the result field,
* BYTE. When PROG1 returns control, the contents of the result
* field, BYTE, are placed in the factor 1 field, *IN30. Note
* that factor 1 and factor 2 entries on a PARM are optional.
*
C PLIST1 PLIST
C PARM Amount 5 2
C *IN30 PARM *IN27 Byte 1
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
C CALLB ’PROG2’
* In this example, the PARM operations immediately follow a
* CALLB operation instead of a PLIST operation.
C PARM Amount 5 2
C *IN30 PARM *IN27 Byte 1
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
* In the called procedure, PROG2, *ENTRY in factor 1 of the
* PLIST statement identifies it as the entry parameter list.
* When control transfers to PROG2, the contents of the result
* fields (FieldC and FieldG) of the parameter list are placed in
* the factor 1 fields (FieldA and FieldD). When the called procedure
* returns, the contents of the factor 2 fields of the parameter
* list (FieldB and FieldE) are placed in the result fields (FieldC
* and FieldG). All of the fields are defined elsewhere in the
* procedure.
C *ENTRY PLIST
C FieldA PARM FieldB FieldC
C FieldD PARM FieldE FieldG
Figure 313. PLIST/PARM Operations

POST (Post)
POST (Post)
Free-Form Syntax POST{(E)} {program-device} file-name

POST (E) program-device file-name INFDS name _ ER _
The POST operation puts information in an INFDS (file information data

structure). This information contains the following:
v File Feedback Information specific to RPG I/O for the file
v Open Feedback Information for the file
v Input/Output Feedback Information and Device Dependent Feedback
Information for the file OR Get Attribute Information
The program-device operand specifies a program device name to get information

about that specific program device. If you specify a program device, the file must
be defined as a WORKSTN file. If program-device is specified, then the INFDS will
contain Get Attribute Information following the Open Feedback Information. Use
either a character field of length 10 or less, a character literal, or a character named
constant. If program-device is not specified, then the INFDS will contain
Input/Output Feedback Information and Device Dependent Feedback Information
following the Open Feedback Information.
Specify the name of a file in the file-name operand. Information for this file is
posted in the INFDS associated with this file.
In free-form syntax, you must specify a file-name and cannot specify an INFDS
name. In traditional syntax, you can specify a file-name, an INFDS name, or both.
v If you do not specify an INFDS name, the INFDS associated with this file using
the INFDS keyword in the file specification will be used.
v If you do not specify an INFDS name in traditional syntax, you must specify the
data structure name that has been used in the INFDS keyword for the file
specification in the result field; information from the associated file in the file
specification will be posted.
To handle POST exceptions (file status codes greater than 1000), either the
Even when a POST operation code is not processed, its existence in your program
can affect the way the RPG IV language operates. Usually, the INFDS is updated at
each input and output operation or block of operations. However, if anywhere in
your program, you have specified a POST operation with no program-device
specified, then RPG IV updates the I/O Feedback Information area and the Device
Dependent Feedback Information area in the INFDS of any file only when you
process a POST operation for that file. The File Dependent Information in the
INFDS is updated on all Input/Output operations. If you have opened a file for
multiple-member processing, the Open Feedback Information in the INFDS will be
updated when an input operation (READ, READP, READE READPE) causes a new
member to be opened.

POST (Post)
Note that DUMP retrieves its information directly from the Open Data Path and
not from the INFDS, so the file information sections of the DUMP do not depend
on POST.
If a program has no POST operation code, or if it has only POST operation codes
with program-device specified, the Input/Output Feedback and Device Dependent
Feedback section is updated with each input/output operation or block of
operations. If RPG is blocking records, most of the information in the INFDS will
be valid only for the last complete block of records processed. When doing blocked
input, from a data base file, RPG will update the relative record number and key
information in the INFDS for each read, not just the last block of records
processed. If you require more accurate information, do not use record blocking.
See “File Information Data Structure” on page 65 for more information on record
blocking. If you do not require feedback information after every input/output
operation, you may be able to improve performance by using the POST operation
only when you require the feedback information.
When a POST operation is processed, the associated file must be open. If you
specify a program device on the POST operation, it does not have to be acquired
by the file.

READ (Read a Record)

Free-Form Syntax READ{(EN)} name {data-structure}

READ (E N) name (file or record format) data-structure _ ER EOF
The READ operation reads the record, currently pointed to, from a full procedural
file (identified by an F in position 18 of the file description specifications).
The name operand is required and must be the name of a file or record format. A
record format name is allowed only with an externally described file (E in position
22 of the file description specifications). It may be the case that a
READ-by-format-name operation will receive a different format from the one you
specified in the name operand. If so, your READ operation ends in error.
If a READ operation is successful, the file is positioned at the next record that
satisfies the read. If there is an error or an end of file condition, you must
reposition the file (using a CHAIN, SETLL, or SETGT operation).
If the file from which you are reading is an update disk file, you can specify an N
operation extender to indicate that no lock should be placed on the record when it
is read. See the WebSphere Development Studio: ILE RPG Programmer’s Guide for more
information.
To handle READ exceptions (file status codes greater than 1000), either the
You can specify an indicator in positions 75-76 to signal whether an end of file
occurred on the READ operation. The indicator is either set on (an EOF condition)
or off every time the READ operation is performed. This information can also be
obtained from the %EOF built-in function, which returns ’1’ if an EOF condition
occurs and ’0’ otherwise. The file must be repositioned after an EOF condition, in
order to process any further successful sequential operations (for example, READ
or READP) to the file.
Figure 314 on page 682 illustrates the READ operation.
When name specifies a multiple device file, the READ operation does one of the
following:
v Reads data from the device specified in the most recent NEXT operation (if such
a NEXT operation has been processed).

v Accepts the first response from any device that has been acquired for the file,
and that was specified for “invite status” with the DDS keyword INVITE. If
there are no invited devices, the operation receives an end of file. The input is
processed according to the corresponding format. If the device is a workstation,
the last format written to it is used. If the device is a communications device,
you can select the format.
Refer to ICF Programming, SC41-5442-00 for more information on format selection
processing for an ICF file.
The READ operation will stop waiting after a period of time in which no input
is provided, or when one of the following CL commands has been entered with
the controlled option specified:
– ENDJOB (End Job)
– ENDSBS (End Subsystem)
– PWRDWNSYS (Power Down System)
– ENDSYS (End System).
This results in a file exception/error that is handled by the method specified in

your program (see “File Exception/Errors” on page 65). See ICF Programming,
SC41-5442-00 for a discussion of the WAITRCD parameter on the commands to
create or modify a file. This parameter controls the length of time the READ
operation waits for input.
When name specifies a format name and the format name is associated with a
multiple device file, data is read from the device identified by the field specified in
the DEVID keyword in file specifications. If there is no such entry, data is read
from the device used in the last successful input operation.
See “Database Null Value Support” on page 206 for information on reading records

*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
* READ retrieves the next record from the file FILEA, which must
* be a full procedural file.
* %EOF is set to return ’1’ if an end of file occurs on READ,
* or if an end of file has occurred previously and the file
* has not been repositioned. When %EOF returns ’1’,
* the program will leave the loop.
*
C DOW ’1’
C READ FILEA
C IF %EOF
C LEAVE
C ENDIF
*
* READ retrieves the next record of the type REC1 (factor 2)
* from an externally described file. (REC1 is a record format
* name.) Indicator 64 is set on if an end of file occurs on READ,
* or if it has occurred previously and the file has not been
* repositioned. When indicator 64 is set on, the program
* will leave the loop. The N operation code extender
* indicates that the record is not locked.
*
C READ(N) REC1 64
C 64 LEAVE
C ENDDO
Figure 314. READ Operation

READC (Read Next Changed Record)

Free-Form Syntax READC{(E)} record-name

READC (E) record-name _ ER EOF
The READC operation can be used only with an externally described WORKSTN
file to obtain the next changed record in a subfile. The record-name operand is
required and must be the name of a record format defined as a subfile by the
SFILE keyword on the file description specifications. (See
“SFILE(recformat:rrnfield)” on page 278 for information on the SFILE keyword.)
For a multiple device file, data is read from the subfile record associated with a
program device; the program device is identified by the field specified in the
DEVID keyword on the file specifications. If there is no such entry, data is read
from the program device used for the last successful input operation.
To handle READC exceptions (file status codes greater than 1000), either the
You can specify an indicator in positions 75-76 that will be set on when there are
no more changed records in the subfile. This information can also be obtained from
the %EOF built-in function, which returns ’1’ if there are no more changed records
in the subfile and ’0’ otherwise.
| structure. The data structure must be a data structure defined with
| EXTNAME(...:*INPUT) or LIKEREC(...:*INPUT). See “File Operations” on page 397
| for information on how data is transferred between the file and the data structure.

*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
* CUSSCR is a WORKSTN file which displays a list of records from
* the CUSINFO file. SFCUSR is the subfile name.
*
FCUSINFO UF E DISK
FCUSSCR CF E WORKSTN SFILE(SFCUSR:RRN)
F
* After the subfile has been loaded with the records from the
* CUSINFO file. It is written out to the screen using EXFMT with
* the subfile control record, CTLCUS. If there are any changes in
* any one of the records listed on the screen, the READC operation
* will read the changed records one by one in the do while loop.
* The corresponding record in the CUSINFO file will be located
* with the CHAIN operation and will be updated with the changed
* field.
C :
C EXFMT CTLCUS
C :
* SCUSNO, SCUSNAM, SCUSADR, and SCUSTEL are fields defined in the
* subfile. CUSNAM, CUSADR, and CUSTEL are fields defined in a
* record, CUSREC which is defined in the file CUSINFO.
*
C READC SFCUSR
C DOW %EOF = *OFF
C SCUSNO CHAIN (E) CUSINFO
* Update the record only if the record is found in the file.
C :
C IF NOT %ERROR
C EVAL CUSNAM = SCUSNAM
C EVAL CUSADR = SCUSADR
C EVAL CUSTEL = SCUSTEL
C UPDATE CUSREC
C ENDIF
C READC (E) SFCUSR
C ENDDO
Figure 315. READC example

READE (Read Equal Key)

|| Free-Form Syntax READE{(ENHMR)} search-arg|*KEY name {data-structure}
|

READE (E N) search-arg name (file or record format) data-structure _ ER EOF
The READE operation retrieves the next sequential record from a full procedural
file (identified by an F in position 18 of the file description specifications) if the key
of the record matches the search argument. If the key of the record does not match
the search argument, an EOF condition occurs, and the record is not returned to
the program. An EOF condition also applies when end of file occurs.
The search argument, search-arg, identifies the record to be retrieved. The search-arg
operand is optional in traditional syntax but is required in free-form syntax.
search-arg can be:
v A field name, a literal, a named constant, or a figurative constant.
v A KLIST name for an externally described file.
| v A list of key values enclosed in parentheses. See Figure 246 on page 550 for an
| example of searching using a list of key values.
| v %KDS to indicate that the search arguments are the subfields of a data structure.
| See the example at the end of “%KDS (Search Arguments in Data Structure)” on
| page 475 for an illustration of search arguments in a data structure.
v *KEY or (in traditional syntax only) no value. If the full key of the next record is
equal to that of the current record, the next record in the file is retrieved. The
full key is defined by the record format or file specified in name.
Note: If the file being read is defined as update, a temporary lock on the next
record is requested and the search argument is compared to the key of that
record. If the record is already locked, the program must wait until the
record is available before obtaining the temporary lock and making the
comparison. If the comparison is unequal, an EOF condition occurs, and the
temporary record lock is removed. If no lock (’N’ operation extender) is
specified, a temporary lock is not requested.
Graphic and UCS-2 keys must have the same CCSID.
The name operand must be the name of the file or record format to be retrieved. A
record format name is allowed only with an externally described file (identified by
an E in position 22 of the file description specifications).

If the file you are reading is an update disk file, you can specify an N operation
extender to indicate that no lock should be placed on the record when it is read.
See the WebSphere Development Studio: ILE RPG Programmer’s Guide for more
information.
To handle READE exceptions (file status codes greater than 1000), either the
You can specify an indicator in positions 75-76 that will be set on if an EOF
condition occurs: that is, if a record is not found with a key equal to the search
argument or if an end of file is encountered. This information can also be obtained
from the %EOF built-in function, which returns ’1’ if an EOF condition occurs and
’0’ otherwise.
If a READE operation is not successful, you must reposition the file: for example,
using a CHAIN, SETGT, or SETLL operation. See “CHAIN (Random Retrieval from
a File)” on page 548, “SETGT (Set Greater Than)” on page 711, or “SETLL (Set
Lower Limit)” on page 715.
If you specify the search-arg operand and are processing a distributed data
management (DDM) file that was created before Version 3 Release 1 Modification
0, a key comparison cannot be done at the data management level. READE will do
a key comparison using a hexadecimal collating sequence. This may give different
results than expected when DDS features are used that cause more than one search
argument to match a given key in the file. For example, if ABSVAL is used on a
numeric key, both -1 and 1 would succeed as search arguments for a key in the file
with a value of 1. Using the hexadecimal collating sequence, a search argument of
-1 will not succeed for an actual key of 1. The followng DDS features will cause
the key comparison to differ:
v ALTSEQ was specified for the file
v ABSVAL, ZONE, UNSIGNED or DIGIT keywords on key fields
v Variable length, Date, Time or Timestamp key fields
v ALWNULL(*USRCTL) is specified as a keyword on a control specification or as
a command parameter and a key in the record or search argument has a null
value. The key in the file or search argument has null values. This applies only
to externally described files.
v SRTSEQ for the file is not hexadecimal
v A numeric sign is different from the system-preferred sign
A READE with the search-arg operand specified that immediately follows an OPEN
operation or an EOF condition retrieves the first record in the file if the key of the
record matches the search argument. A READE with no search-arg specified that
immediately follows an OPEN operation or an EOF condition results in an error
condition. The error indicator in positions 73 and 74, if specified, is set on or the
’E’ extender, checked with %ERROR, if specified, is set on. No further I/O
operations can be issued against the file until it is successfully closed and
reopened.

*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
* With Factor 1 Specified...
*
* The READE operation retrieves the next record from the file
* FILEA and compares its key to the search argument, KEYFLD.
*
* The %EOF built-in function is set to return ’1’ if KEYFLD is
* not equal to the key of the record read or if end of file
* is encountered.
*
C KEYFLD READE FILEA
*
* The READE operation retrieves the next record of the type REC1
* from an externally described file and compares the key of the
* record read to the search argument, KEYFLD. (REC1 is a record
* format name.) Indicator 56 is set on if KEYFLD is not equal to
* the key of the record read or if end of file is encountered.
C KEYFLD READE REC1 56
*
* With No Factor 1 Specified...
*
* The READE operation retrieves the next record in the access
* path from the file FILEA if the key value is equal to
* the key value of the record at the current cursor position.
*
* If the key values are not equal, %EOF is set to return ’1’.
C READE FILEA
*
* The READE operation retrieves the next record in the access
* path from the file FILEA if the key value equals the key value
* of the record at the current position. REC1 is a record format
* name. Indicator 56 is set on if the key values are unequal.
* N indicates that the record is not locked.
C READE(N) REC1 56
Figure 316. READE Operation

READP (Read Prior Record)

Free-Form Syntax READP{(EN)} name {data-structure}

READP (E N) name (file or record format) data-structure _ ER BOF
The READP operation reads the prior record from a full procedural file (identified
by an F in position 18 of the file description specifications).
The name operand must be the name of a file or record format to be read. A record
format name is allowed only with an externally described file. If a record format
name is specified in name, the record retrieved is the first prior record of the
specified type. Intervening records are bypassed.
If a READP operation is successful, the file is positioned at the previous record

that satisfies the read.
information.
To handle READP exceptions (file status codes greater than 1000), either the
You can specify an indicator in positions 75-76 that will be set on when no prior
records exist in the file (beginning of file condition). This information can also be
obtained from the %EOF built-in function, which returns ’1’ if a BOF condition
occurs and ’0’ otherwise.
You must reposition the file (for example, using a CHAIN, SETLL or SETGT
operation) after an error or BOF condition to process any further successful
sequential operations (for example, READ or READP).
See “Database Null Value Support” on page 206 for information on reading records
Figure 317 on page 689 shows READP operations with a file name and record
format name specified in factor 2.

*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
* The READP operation reads the prior record from FILEA.
*
* The %EOF built-in function is set to return ’1’ if beginning
* of file is encountered. When %EOF returns ’1’, the program
* branches to the label BOF specified in the GOTO operation.
C READP FILEA
C IF %EOF
C GOTO BOF
C ENDIF
*
* The READP operation reads the next prior record of the type
* REC1 from an externally described file. (REC1 is a record
* format name.) Indicator 72 is set on if beginning of file is
* encountered during processing of the READP operation. When
* indicator 72 is set on, the program branches to the label BOF
* specified in the GOTO operation.
C READP PREC1 72
C 72 GOTO BOF
*
C BOF TAG
Figure 317. READP Operation

READPE (Read Prior Equal)

|| Free-Form Syntax READPE{(ENHMR)} search-arg|*KEY name {data-structure}
|

READPE (E N) search-arg name (file or record format) data-structure _ ER BOF
The READPE operation retrieves the next prior sequential record from a full
procedural file if the key of the record matches the search argument. If the key of
the record does not match the search argument, a BOF condition occurs, and the
record is not returned to the program. A BOF condition also applies when
beginning of file occurs.
The search argument, search-arg, identifies the record to be retrieved. The search-arg
operand is optional in traditional syntax but required in free-form syntax. search-arg
can be:
v A field name, a literal, a named constant, or a figurative constant.
v A KLIST name for an externally described file.
| v A list of key values enclosed in parentheses. See Figure 246 on page 550 for an
| example of searching using a list of key values.
| v %KDS to indicate that the search arguments are the subfields of a data structure.
| See the example at the end of “%KDS (Search Arguments in Data Structure)” on
| page 475 for an illustration of search arguments in a data structure.
v *KEY or (in traditional syntax only) no value. If the full key of the next prior
record is equal to that of the current record, the next prior record in the file is
retrieved. The full key is defined by the record format or file used in factor 2.
Graphic and UCS-2 keys must have the same CCSID.
The name operand must be the name of the file or record format to be retrieved. A
record format name is allowed only with an externally described file (identified by
an E in position 22 of the file description specifications).
information.
To handle READPE exceptions (file status codes greater than 1000), either the

You can specify an indicator in positions 75-76 that will be set on if a BOF
condition occurs: that is, if a record is not found with a key equal to the search
argument or if a beginning of file is encountered. This information can also be
obtained from the %EOF built-in function, which returns ’1’ if a BOF condition
occurs and ’0’ otherwise.
If a READPE operation is not successful, you must reposition the file: for example,
using a CHAIN, SETGT, or SETLL operation. See “CHAIN (Random Retrieval from
a File)” on page 548, “SETGT (Set Greater Than)” on page 711, or “SETLL (Set
Lower Limit)” on page 715.
Note: If the file being read is defined as update, a temporary lock on the prior
record is requested and the search argument is compared to the key of that
record. If the record is already locked, the program must wait until the
record is available before obtaining the temporary lock and making the
comparison. If the comparison is unequal, a BOF condition occurs, and the
temporary record lock is removed. If no lock (’N’ operation extender) is
specified, a temporary lock is not requested.
If you specify the search-arg operand and are processing a distributed data
management (DDM) file that was created before Version 3 Release 1 Modification
0, a key comparison cannot be done at the data management level. READPE will
do a key comparison using a hexadecimal collating sequence. This may give
different results than expected when DDS features are used that cause more than
one search argument to match a given key in the file. For example, if ABSVAL is
used on a numeric key, both -1 and 1 would succeed as search arguments for a key
in the file with a value of 1. Using the hexadecimal collating sequence, a search
argument of -1 will not succeed for an actual key of 1. The following DDS features
will cause the key comparison to differ:
A READPE with the search-arg operand specified that immediately follows an

OPEN operation or a BOF condition returns BOF. A READPE with no search-arg
specified that immediately follows an OPEN operation or a BOF condition results
in an error condition. The error indicator in positions 73 and 74, if specified, is set
on or the ’E’ extender, checked with %ERROR, if specified, is set on. The file must
be repositioned using a CHAIN, SETLL, READ, READE or READP with search-arg
specified, prior to issuing a READPE operation with factor 1 blank. A SETGT
operation code should not be used to position the file prior to issuing a READPE
(with no search-arg specified) as this results in a record-not-found condition
(because the record previous to the current record never has the same key as the
current record after a SETGT is issued). If search-arg is specified with the same key
for both operation codes, then this error condition will not occur.

*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
* With Factor 1 Specified...
*
* The previous record is read and the key compared to FieldA.
* Indicator 99 is set on if the record’s key does not match
* FieldA.
C FieldA READPE FileA 99
*
* The previous record is read from FileB and the key compared
* to FieldB. The record is placed in data structure Ds1. If
* the record key does not match FieldB, indicator 99 is set on.
C FieldB READPE FileB Ds1 99
*
* The previous record from record format RecA is read, and
* the key compared to FieldC. Indicator 88 is set on if the
* operation is not completed successfully, and 99 is set on if
* the record key does not match FieldC.
C FieldC READPE RecA 8899
*
* With No Factor 1 Specified...
*
* The previous record in the access path is retrieved if its
* key value equals the key value of the current record.
* Indicator 99 is set on if the key values are not equal.
C READPE FileA 99
*
* The previous record is retrieved from FileB if its key value
* matches the key value of the record at the current position
* in the file. The record is placed in data structure Ds1.
* Indicator 99 is set on if the key values are not equal.
C READPE FileB Ds1 99
*
* The previous record from record format RecA is retrieved if
* its key value matches the key value of the current record in
* the access path. Indicator 88 is set on if the operation is
* not successful; 99 is set on if the key values are unequal.
C READPE RecA 8899
Figure 318. READPE Operation

REALLOC (Reallocate Storage with New Length)
REALLOC (Reallocate Storage with New Length)

Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the %REALLOC built-in function)

REALLOC (E) Length Pointer _ ER _
The REALLOC operation changes the length of the heap storage pointed to by the
result-field pointer to the length specified in factor 2. The result field of REALLOC
contains a basing pointer variable. The result field pointer must contain the value
previously set by a heap-storage allocation operation (either an ALLOC or
REALLOC operation in RPG or some other heap-storage function such as
CEEGTST). It is not sufficient to simply point to heap storage; the pointer must be
set to the beginning of an allocation.
New storage is allocated of the specified size and the value of the old storage is
copied to the new storage. Then the old storage is deallocated. If the new length is
shorter, the value is truncated on the right. If the new length is longer, the new
storage to the right of the copied data is uninitialized.
The result field pointer is set to point to the new storage.
If the operation does not succeed, an error condition occurs, but the result field
pointer will not be changed. If the original pointer was valid and the operation
failed because there was insufficient new storage available (status 425), the original
storage is not deallocated, so the result field pointer is still valid with its original
value.
If the pointer is valid but it does not point to storage that can be deallocated, then
status 426 (error in storage management operation) will be set.
Factor 2 contains a numeric variable or constant that indicates the new size of the
storage (in bytes) to be allocated. Factor 2 must be numeric with zero decimal
positions. The value must be between 1 and 16776704.
D Ptr1 S *
D Fld S 32767A BASED(Ptr1)
* The ALLOC operation allocates 7 bytes to the pointer Ptr1.
* After the ALLOC operation, only the first 7 bytes of variable
* Fld can be used.
C ALLOC 7 Ptr1
C EVAL %SUBST(Fld : 1 : 7) = ’1234567’
C REALLOC 10 Ptr1
* Now 10 bytes of Fld can be used.
C EVAL %SUBST(Fld : 1 : 10) = ’123456789A’
Figure 319. REALLOC Operation

REL (Release)
REL (Release)
Free-Form Syntax REL{(E)} program-device file-name

REL (E) program-device file-name _ ER _
The REL operation releases the program device specified in program-device from the
WORKSTN file specified in file-name.
Specify the program device name in the program-device operand. Use either a
character field of length 10 or less, a character literal, or a named constant. Specify
the file name in file-name operand.
To handle REL exceptions (file status codes greater than 1000), either the operation
information on error handling, see “File Exception/Errors” on page 65.
When there are no program devices acquired to a WORKSTN file, the next
READ-by-file-name or cycle-read gets an end-of-file condition. You must decide
what the program does next. The REL operation may be used with a multiple
device file or, for error recovery purpose, with a single device file.
Note: To release a record lock, use the UNLOCK operation. See the UNLOCK
operation for more information about releasing record locks for update disk
files.

RESET (Reset)
RESET (Reset)
Free-Form Syntax RESET{(E)} {*NOKEY} {*ALL} name

RESET (E) *NOKEY *ALL name (variable _ ER _
or record
format)
The RESET operation is used to restore a variable to the value held at the end of
the *INIT phase. This value is called the reset value. If there is no *INZSR
subroutine, the reset value is the same as the initial value (either the value
specified by the “INZ{(initial value)}” on page 301, or the default value). If there is
a *INZSR subroutine, the reset value is the value the variable holds when the
*INZSR subroutine has completed.
The RESET operation can also be used to restore all the fields in a record format to
their reset values.
See Figure 6 on page 23 for more information on the *INIT phase.
Note: For local variables in subprocedures, the reset value is the value of the
variable when the subprocedure is first called, but before the calculations
begin.
To handle RESET exceptions (program status code 123), either the operation code
Resetting Variables
*ALL is optional. If *ALL is specified and the name operand is a multiple
occurrence data structure or a table name, all occurrences or table elements are
reset and the occurrence level or table index is set to 1.
The name operand specifies the variable to be reset. The particular value for this
operand determines the reset action as follows:
Single occurrence data structure
All fields are reset in the order in which they are declared within the
structure.
Multiple-occurrence data structure
If *ALL is not specified, then all fields in the current occurrence are reset. If
*ALL is specified, then all fields in all occurrences are reset.
Table name
If *ALL is not specified, then the current table element is reset. If *ALL is
specified, then all table elements are reset.
Array name
Entire array is reset
Array element (including indicators)
Only the element specified is reset.

RESET (Reset)
Resetting Record Formats
*NOKEY is optional. If *NOKEY is specified, then key fields are not reset to their
reset values.
*ALL is optional. If *ALL is specified and *NOKEY is not, all fields in the record
format are reset. If *ALL is not specified, only those fields that are output in that
record format are affected. If *NOKEY is specified, then key fields are not reset,
even if *ALL is specified.
The result field contains the record format to be reset. For WORKSTN file record
formats (positions 36-42 on a file-description specification), if *ALL is not specified,
only those fields with a usage of output or both are affected. All field-conditioning
indicators of the record format are affected by the operation. When the RESET
operation is applied to a record format name, and INDARA has been specified in
the DDS, the indicators in the record format are not reset.
Fields in DISK, SEQ, or PRINTER file record formats are affected only if the record
format is output in the program. Input-only fields are not affected by the RESET
operation, except when *ALL is specified.
A RESET operation of a record format with *ALL specified is not valid when:
v A field is defined externally as input-only, and the record was not used for
input.
v A field is defined externally as output-only, and the record was not used for
output.
v A field is defined externally as both input and output capable, and the record
was not used for either input or output.
Note: Input-only fields in logical files will appear in the output specifications,
although they are not actually written to the file. When a CLEAR or RESET
without *ALL specified is done to a record containing these fields, then
these fields will be cleared or reset because they appear in the output
specifications.
Additional Considerations
Keep in mind the following when coding a RESET operation:
v RESET is not allowed for based variables and IMPORTed variables, or for
parameters in a subprocedure.
v The RESET operation results in an increase in the amount of storage required by
the program. For any variable that is reset, the storage requirement is doubled.
Note that for multiple occurrence data structures, tables and arrays, the reset
value of every occurrence or element is saved.
v If a RESET occurs during the initialization routine of the program, an error
message will be issued at run time. If a GOTO or CABxx is used to leave
subroutine calculations during processing of the *INZSR, or if control passes to
another part of the cycle as the result of error processing, the part of the
initialization step which initializes the save areas will never be reached. In this
case, an error message will be issued for all RESET operations in the program at
run time.
v A RESET operation within a subprocedure to a global variable or structure is
valid in the following circumstances:
– If there is no *INZSR, it is always valid

RESET (Reset)
– If there is a *INZSR, it is not valid until the *INZSR has completed at least
once. After that, it is always valid, even if the main procedure is not active.
Attention!
When the RESET values are saved, a pointer-not-set error will occur if the
following are all true:
v There is no *INZSR
v An entry parameter to the main procedure is RESET anywhere in the
module
v A subprocedure is called before the main procedure has ever been called
For more information, see “CLEAR (Clear)” on page 557.
RESET Examples
Except for the actual operation performed on the fields, the considerations shown
in the following examples also apply to the CLEAR operation. Figure 320 on
page 698 shows an example of the RESET operation with *NOKEY.

RESET (Reset)
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
FEXTFILE O E DISK
DName+++++++++++ETDsFrom+++To/L+++IDc.Functions+++++++++++++++++++++++++++
* The file EXTFILE contains one record format RECFMT containing
* the character fields CHAR1 and CHAR2 and the numeric fields
* NUM1 and NUM2. It has keyfields CHAR2 and NUM1.
D
D DS1 DS
D DAY1 1 8 INZ(’MONDAY’)
D DAY2 9 16 INZ(’THURSDAY’)
D JDATE 17 22
D
*
* The following operation sets DAY1, DAY2, and JDATE to blanks.
C
C CLEAR DS1
C
* The following operation will set DAY1, DAY2, and JDATE to their
* reset values of ’MONDAY’, ’THURSDAY’, and UDATE respectively.
* The reset value of UDATE for JDATE is set in the *INZSR.
C
C RESET DS1
C
* The following operation will set CHAR1 and CHAR2 to blanks and
* NUM1 and NUM2 to zero.
C CLEAR RECFMT
* The following operation will set CHAR1, CHAR2, NUM1, and
* NUM2 to their reset values of ’NAME’, ’ADDRESS’, 1, and 2
* respectively. These reset values are set in the *INZSR.
*
C RESET RECFMT
* The following operation sets all fields in the record format
* to blanks, except the key fields CHAR2 and NUM1.
*
C *NOKEY RESET *ALL RECFMT
C RETURN
C
C *INZSR BEGSR
C MOVEL UDATE JDATE
C MOVEL ’NAME ’ CHAR1
C MOVEL ’ADDRESS ’ CHAR2
C Z-ADD 1 NUM1
C Z-ADD 2 NUM2
C ENDSR
ORCDNAME+++D...N01N02N03EXCNAM++++........................................
O..............N01N02N03FIELD+++++++++.B..................................
ORECFMT T
O CHAR1
O CHAR2
O NUM1
O NUM2
Figure 320. RESET Operation with *NOKEY

RESET (Reset)
A R RECFMT
A CHAR1 10A
A CHAR2 10A
A NUM1 5P 0
A NUM2 7S 2
Figure 321. DDS for EXTFILE
Figure 322 on page 700 shows an excerpt of a source listing for a program that uses
two externally described files, RESETIB and RESETON. Each has two record
formats, and each record format contains an input field FLDIN, an output field
FLDOUT, and a field FLDBOTH, that is input-output capable. The DDS are shown
in Figure 323 on page 701 and Figure 324 on page 701.
Because RESETIB is defined as a combined file, the fields for RECBOTH, which are
defined as input-output capable, are available on both input and output
specifications. On the other hand, the fields for RECIN are on input specifications
only.

RESET (Reset)
1 * The file RESETIB contains 2 record formats RECIN and RECBOTH.

2 FRESETIB CF E WORKSTN
3 * The file RESETON contains 2 record formats RECOUT and RECNONE.
4 FRESETON O E WORKSTN
5
6=IRECIN
7=I A 1 1 *IN02
8=I A 2 11 FLDIN
9=I A 12 21 FLDBOTH
10=IRECBOTH
11=I A 1 1 *IN04
12=I A 2 11 FLDIN
13=I A 12 21 FLDBOTH
14 C WRITE RECOUT
15 C WRITE RECBOTH
16 C READ RECIN ----99
17 C READ RECBOTH ----99
18
19 * RESET without factor 2 means to reset only those fields which
20 * appear on the output specifications for the record format.
21 * Since only RECOUT and RECBOTH have write operations, the
22 * RESET operations for RECNONE and RECIN will have no effect.
23 * The RESET operations for RECOUT and RECBOTH will reset fields
24 * FLDOUT and FLDBOTH. FLDIN will not be affected.
25 C RESET RECNONE
26 C RESET RECIN
27 C RESET RECOUT
28 C RESET RECBOTH
29
30 * RESET with *ALL in factor 2 means to reset all fields. Note
31 * that this can only be done when all fields are used in at least
32 * one of the ways they are defined (for example, an output-capable
33 * field must be used for output by the record format)
34 * Since RECNONE does not have either input or output operations,
35 * the RESET *ALL for RECNONE will fail at compile time.
36 * Since RECIN does not have any output operations, RESET *ALL RECIN
37 * will fail because FLDOUT is not output.
38 * Since RECOUT does not have any input operations, and is not defined
39 * as input capable on the file specification, RESET *ALL RECOUT
40 * will fail because FLDIN is not input.
41 * The RESET *ALL for RECBOTH will reset all fields: FLDIN, FLDOUT
42 * and FLDBOTH.
43 C RESET *ALL RECNONE
44 C RESET *ALL RECIN
45 C RESET *ALL RECOUT
46 C RESET *ALL RECBOTH
47
48 C SETON LR----
49=ORECBOTH
50=O *IN14 1A CHAR 1
51=O FLDOUT 11A CHAR 10
52=O FLDBOTH 21A CHAR 10
53=ORECOUT
54=O *IN13 1A CHAR 1
55=O FLDOUT 11A CHAR 10
56=O FLDBOTH 21A CHAR 10
Figure 322. RESET with *ALL – Source Listing Excerpt. The input and output specifications
with ’=’ after the listing line number are generated by the compiler.
When the source is compiled, several errors are identified. Both RECNONE and
RECIN are identified as having no output fields. The RESET *ALL is disallowed
for all but the RECBOTH record, since it is the only record format for which all
fields appear on either input or output specifications.

RESET (Reset)
A R RECIN CF02(02)
A FLDIN 10A I 2 2
A FLDOUT 10A O 3 2
A 12 FLDBOTH 10A B 4 2
A R RECBOTH CF04(04)
A FLDIN 10A I 2 2
A FLDOUT 10A O 3 2
Figure 323. DDS for RESETIB
A R RECNONE CF01(01)
A FLDIN 10A I 2 2
A FLDOUT 10A O 3 2
A R RECOUT CF03(03)
A FLDIN 10A I 2 2
A FLDOUT 10A O 3 2
Figure 324. DDS for RESETON

RETURN (Return to Caller)

Free-Form Syntax RETURN{(HMR)} expression

RETURN (H expression
M/R)
The RETURN operation causes a return to the caller. If a value is returned to the
caller, the return value is specified in the expression operand.
The actions which occur as a result of the RETURN operation differ depending on
whether the operation is in a subprocedure. When a program or main procedure
returns, the following occurs:
1. The halt indicators are checked. If a halt indicator is on, the procedure ends
abnormally. (All open files are closed, an error return code is set to indicate to
the calling routine that the procedure has ended abnormally, and control
returns to the calling routine.)
2. If no halt indicators are on, the LR indicator is checked. If LR is on, the
program ends normally. (Locked data area structures, arrays, and tables are
written, and external indicators are reset.)
3. If no halt indicator is on and LR is not on, the procedure returns to the calling
routine. Data is preserved for the next time the procedure is run. Files and data
areas are not written out. See the chapter on calling programs and procedures
in the WebSphere Development Studio: ILE RPG Programmer’s Guide for
information on how running in a *NEW activation group affects the operation
of RETURN.
When a subprocedure returns, the return value, if specified on the prototype of the
called program or procedure, is passed to the caller. Nothing else occurs
automatically. All files and data areas must be closed manually. You can set on
indicators such as LR, but this will not cause program termination to occur. For
information on how operation extenders H, M, and R are used, see “Precision
Rules for Numeric Operations” on page 428.
In a subprocedure that returns a value, a RETURN operation must be coded within

the subprocedure. The actual returned value has the same role as the left-hand side
of the EVAL expression, while the extended factor 2 of the RETURN operation has
the same role as the right-hand side. An array may be returned only if the
prototype has defined the return value as an array.
Attention!
If the subprocedure returns a value, you should ensure that a RETURN
operation is performed before reaching the end of the procedure. If the
subprocedure ends without encountering a RETURN operation, an exception
is signalled to the caller.

* This is the prototype for subprocedure RETNONE. Since the

* prototype specification does not have a data type, this
* subprocedure does not return a value.
D RetNone PR
* This is the prototype for subprocedure RETFLD. Since the
* prototype specification has the type 5P 2, this subprocedure
* returns a packed value with 5 digits and 2 decimals.
* The subprocedure has a 5-digit integer parameter, PARM,
* passed by reference.
D RetFld PR 5P 2
D Parm 5I 0
* This is the prototype for subprocedure RETARR. The data
* type entries for the prototype specification show that
* this subprocedure returns a date array with 3 elements.
* The dates are in *YMD/ format.
D RetArr PR D DIM(3) DATFMT(*YMD/)
* This procedure (P) specification indicates the beginning of
* subprocedure RETNONE. The data specification (D) specification
* immediately following is the procedure-interface
* specification for this subprocedure. Note that the
* procedure interface is the same as the prototype except for
* the definition type (PI vs PR).
P RetNone B
D RetNone PI
* RetNone does not return a value, so the RETURN
* operation does not have factor 2 specified.
C RETURN
P RetNone E
* The following 3 specifications contain the beginning of
* the subprocedure RETFLD as well as its procedure interface.
P RetFld B
D RetFld PI 5P 2
D Parm 5I 0
D Fld S 12S 1 INZ(13.8)
* RetFld returns a numeric value. The following RETURN
* operations show returning a literal, an expression and a
* variable. Note that the variable is not exactly the same
* format or length as the actual return value.
C RETURN 7
C RETURN Parm * 15
C RETURN Fld
P RetFld E
Figure 325. Examples of the RETURN Operation (Part 1 of 2)

* The following 3 specifications contain the beginning of the

* subprocedure RETARR as well as its procedure interface.
P RetArr B
D RetArr PI D DIM(3)
D SmallArr S D DIM(2) DATFMT(*ISO)
D BigArr S D DIM(4) DATFMT(*USA)
* RetArr returns a date array. Note that the date
* format of the value specified on the RETURN operation
* does not have to be the same as the defined return
* value.
* The following RETURN operation specifies a literal.
* The caller receives an array with the value of the
* literal in every element of the array.
C RETURN D’1995-06-27’
* The following return operation returns an array
* with a smaller dimension than the actual return value.
* In this case, the third element would be set to the
* default value for the array.
C RETURN SmallArr
* The following return operation returns an array
* with a larger dimension than the actual return
* value. In this case, the fourth element of BigArr
* would be ignored.
C RETURN BigArr
P RetArr E
Figure 325. Examples of the RETURN Operation (Part 2 of 2)

ROLBK (Roll Back)
ROLBK (Roll Back)

Free-Form Syntax ROLBK{(E)}

ROLBK (E) _ ER _
The ROLBK operation:

v Eliminates all the changes to your files that have been specified in output
operations since the previous COMMIT or ROLBK operation (or since the
beginning of operations under commitment control if there has been no previous
COMMIT or ROLBK operation).
v Releases all the record locks for the files you have under commitment control.
v Repositions the file to its position at the time of the previous COMMIT
operation (or at the time of the file OPEN, if there has been no previous
COMMIT operation.)
Commitment control starts when the CL command STRCMTCTL is executed. See

the chapter on “Commitment Control” in the WebSphere Development Studio: ILE
RPG Programmer’s Guide for more information.
The file changes and the record-lock releases apply to all the files under
commitment control in your activation group or job, whether the changes have
been requested by the program issuing the ROLBK operation or by another
program in the same activation group or job. The program issuing the ROLBK
operation does not need to have any files under commitment control. For example,
suppose program A calls program B and program C. Program B has files under
commitment control, and program C does not. A ROLBK operation in program C
still affects the files changed by program B.
To handle ROLBK exceptions (program status codes 802 to 805), either the
page 82.
For information on how the rollback function is performed by the system, refer to
Backup and Recovery, SC41-5304-06.

SCAN (Scan String)
SCAN (Scan String)

Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the %SCAN built-in function)

SCAN (E) Compare string:length Base string:start Left-most _ ER FD
position
The SCAN operation scans a string (base string) contained in factor 2 for a
substring (compare string) contained in factor 1. The scan begins at a specified
location contained in factor 2 and continues for the length of the compare string
which is specified in factor 1. The compare string and base string must both be of
the same type, either both character, both graphic, or both UCS-2.
Factor 1 must contain either the compare string or the compare string, followed by
a colon, followed by the length. The compare string portion of factor 1 can contain
one of: a field name, array element, named constant, data structure name, literal, or
table name. The length portion must be numeric with no decimal positions and can
contain one of: a named constant, array element, field name, literal, or table name.
If no length is specified, it is that of the compare string.
followed by the start location of the SCAN. The base string portion of factor 2 can
contain one of: a field name, array element, named constant, data structure name,
literal, or table name. The start location portion of factor 2 must be numeric with
no decimal positions and can be a named constant, array element, field name,
literal, or table name. If graphic or UCS-2 strings are used, the start position and
length are measured in double bytes. If no start location is specified, a value of 1 is
used.
The result field contains the numeric value of the leftmost position of the compare
string in the base string, if found. It must be numeric with no decimal positions
and can contain one of: a field name, array element, array name, or table name.
The result field is set to 0 if the string is not found. If the result field contains an
array, each occurrence of the compare string is placed in the array with the
leftmost occurrence in element 1. The array elements following the element
containing the rightmost occurrence are all zero. The result array should be as
large as the field length of the base string specified in factor 2.
Notes:
1. The strings are indexed from position 1.
2. If the start position is greater than 1, the result field contains the position of the
compare string relative to the beginning of the source string, not relative to the
start position.
3. Figurative constants cannot be used in the factor 1, factor 2, or result fields.
4. No overlapping within data structures is allowed for factor 1 and the result
field or factor 2 and the result field.
To handle SCAN exceptions (program status code 100), either the operation code
extender ’E’ or an error indicator ER can be specified, but not both. An error
occurs if the start position is greater than the length of factor 2 or if the value of
factor 1 is too large. For more information on error handling, see “Program
Exception/Errors” on page 82.

SCAN (Scan String)
You can specify an indicator in positions 75-76 that is set on if the string being
scanned for is found. This information can also be obtained from the %FOUND
built-in function, which returns ’1’ if a match is found.
The SCAN begins at the leftmost character of factor 2 (as specified by the start
location) and continues character by character, from left to right, comparing the
characters in factor 2 to those in factor 1. If the result field is not an array, the
SCAN operation will locate only the first occurrence of the compare string. To
continue scanning beyond the first occurrence, use the result field from the
previous SCAN operation to calculate the starting position of the next SCAN. If the
result field is a numeric array, as many occurrences as there are elements in the
array are noted. If no occurrences are found, the result field is set to zero; if the
result field is an array, all its elements are set to zero.
Leading, trailing, or embedded blanks specified in the compare string are included
in the SCAN operation.
The SCAN operation is case-sensitive. A compare string specified in lowercase will

not be found in a base string specified in uppercase.
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
* The SCAN operation finds the substring ’ABC’ starting in
* position 3 in factor 2; 3 is placed in the result field.
* Indicator 90 is set on because the string is found. Because
* no starting position is specified, the default of 1 is used.
C ’ABC’ SCAN ’XCABCD’ RESULT 90
*
* This SCAN operation scans the string in factor 2 for an
* occurrence of the string in factor 1 starting at position 3.
* The ’Y’ in position 1 of the base string is ignored because
* the scan operation starts from position 3.
* The operation places the values 5 and 6 in the first and
* second elements of the array. Indicator 90 is set on.
C
C MOVE ’YARRYY’ FIELD1 6
C MOVE ’Y’ FIELD2 1
C FIELD2 SCAN FIELD1:3 ARRAY 90
*
* This SCAN operation scans the string in factor 2, starting
* at position 2, for an occurrence of the string in factor 1
* for a length of 4. Because ’TOOL’ is not found in FIELD1,
* INT is set to zero and indicator 90 is set off.
C
C MOVE ’TESTING’ FIELD1 7
C Z-ADD 2 X 1 0
C MOVEL ’TOOL’ FIELD2 5
C FIELD2:4 SCAN FIELD1:X INT90 20
C
*
* The SCAN operation is searching for a name. When the name
* is found, %FOUND returns ’1’ so HandleLine is called.
C SrchName SCAN Line
C IF %FOUND
C EXSR HandleLine
C ENDIF
Figure 326. SCAN Operation

SCAN (Scan String)
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
DName+++++++++++ETDsFrom+++To/L+++IDc.Functions+++++++++++++++++++++++++
*
* A Graphic SCAN example
*
* Value of Graffld is graphic ’AACCBBGG’.
* Value of Number after the scan is 3 as the 3rd graphic
* character matches the value in factor 1
D Graffld S 4G inz(G’oAACCBBGGi’)
* The SCAN operation scans the graphic string in factor 2 for
* an occurrence of the graphic literal in factor 1. As this is a
* graphic operation, the SCAN will operate on 2 bytes at a time
C
C G’oBBi’ SCAN Graffld:2 Number 5 0 90
C
Figure 327. SCAN Operation using graphic

SELECT (Begin a Select Group)

Free-Form Syntax SELECT

SELECT
The select group conditionally processes one of several alternative sequences of

operations. It consists of:
v A SELECT statement
v Zero or more WHENxx or WHEN groups
v An optional OTHER group
v ENDSL or END statement.
After the SELECT operation, control passes to the statement following the first
WHENxx condition that is satisfied. All statements are then executed until the next
WHENxx operation. Control passes to the ENDSL statement (only one WHENxx is
executed). If no WHENxx condition is satisfied and an OTHER operation is
specified, control passes to the statement following the OTHER operation. If no
WHENxx condition is satisfied and no OTHER operation is specified, control
transfers to the statement following the ENDSL operation of the select group.
Conditioning indicators can be used on the SELECT operation. If they are not
satisfied, control passes immediately to the statement following the ENDSL
operation of the select group. Conditioning indicators cannot be used on WHENxx,
WHEN, OTHER and ENDSL operation individually.
The select group can be specified anywhere in calculations. It can be nested within
IF, DO, or other select groups. The IF and DO groups can be nested within select
groups.
If a SELECT operation is specified inside a select group, the WHENxx and OTHER
operations apply to the new select group until an ENDSL is specified.

*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
* In the following example, if X equals 1, do the operations in
* sequence 1 (note that no END operation is needed before the
* next WHENxx); if X does NOT equal 1, and if Y=2 and X<10, do the
* operations in sequence 2. If neither condition is true, do
* the operations in sequence 3.
*
C SELECT
C WHEN X = 1
C Z-ADD A B
C MOVE C D
* Sequence 1
C :
C WHEN ((Y = 2) AND (X < 10))
* Sequence 2
C :
C OTHER
* Sequence 3
C :
C ENDSL
*
* The following example shows a select group with conditioning
* indicators. After the CHAIN operation, if indicator 10 is on,
* then control passes to the ADD operation. If indicator 10 is
* off, then the select group is processed.
*
C KEY CHAIN FILE 10
C N10 SELECT
C WHEN X = 1
* Sequence 1
C :
C WHEN Y = 2
* Sequence 2
C :
C ENDSL
C ADD 1 N
Figure 328. SELECT Operation

SETGT (Set Greater Than)

|| Free-Form Syntax SETGT{(EHMR)} search-arg name
|

SETGT (E) search-arg name (file or record format) NR ER _
The SETGT operation positions a file at the next record with a key or relative
record number that is greater than the key or relative record number specified in
factor 1. The file must be a full procedural file (identified by an F in position 18 of
the file description specifications).
| of a field name, a named constant, a figurative constant, or a literal. See Figure 246
| on page 550 for an example of searching key fields.
| If the file is an externally-described file, search-arg can also be a composite key in

| the form of a KLIST name, a list of values, or %KDS. Graphic and UCS-2 key fields
| must have the same CCSID as the key in the file. See the example at the end of
| “%KDS (Search Arguments in Data Structure)” on page 475 for an illustration of
| search arguments in a data structure. If access is by relative record number,
| search-arg must be an integer literal or a numeric field with zero decimal positions.
The name operand is required and must be either a file name or a record format
name. A record format name is allowed only with an externally described file.
You can specify an indicator in positions 71-72 that is set on if no record is found
with a key or relative record number that is greater than the search argument
specified (search-arg). This information can also be obtained from the %FOUND
built-in function, which returns ’0’ if no record is found, and ’1’ if a record is
found..
To handle SETGT exceptions (file status codes greater than 1000), either the
If the SETGT operation is not successful (no-record-found condition), the file is

positioned to the end of the file.
Figurative constants can also be used to position the file.
Note: The discussion and examples of using figurative constants which follow,
assume that *LOVAL and *HIVAL are not used as actual keys in the file.
When used with a file with a composite key, figurative constants are treated as
though each field of the key contained the figurative constant value. In most cases,
*LOVAL positions the file so that the first read retrieves the record with the lowest
key. In most cases, *HIVAL positions the file so that a READ receives an end-of-file
indication; a subsequent READP retrieves the last record in the file. However, note
the following cases for using *LOVAL and *HIVAL:
v With an externally described file that has a key in descending order, *HIVAL
positions the file so that the first read operation retrieves the first record in the

file (the record with the highest key), and *LOVAL positions the file so that a
READP operation retrieves the last record in the file (the record with the lowest
key).
v If a record is added or a key field is altered after a SETGT operation with either
*LOVAL or *HIVAL, the file may no longer be positioned to the record with the
lowest or highest key. key value X‘99...9D’ and *HIVAL for numeric keys
represents a key value X‘99...9F’. If the keys are float numeric, *LOVAL and
*HIVAL are defined differently. See “Figurative Constants” on page 126. When a
program described file has a packed decimal key specified in the file
specifications but the actual file key field contains character data, records may
have keys that are less than *LOVAL or greater than *HIVAL. When a key field
contains unsigned binary data, *LOVAL may not be the lowest key.
When *LOVAL or *HIVAL are used with key fields with a Date or Time data type,
the values are dependent of the Date-Time format used. For details on these values
please see Chapter 10, “Data Types and Data Formats” on page 167.
Following the SETGT operation, a file is positioned so that it is immediately before

the first record whose key or relative record number is greater than the search
argument specified (search-arg). You retrieve this record by reading the file. Before
you read the file, however, records may be deleted from the file by another job or
through another file in your job. Thus, you may not get the record you expected.
For information on preventing unexpected modification of your files, see the
discussion of allocating objects in the iSeries Information Center Programming
topic at URL http://www.ibm.com/eserver/iseries/infocenter.

*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
* This example shows how to position the file so READ will read
* the next record. The search argument, KEY, specified for the
* SETGT operation has a value of 98; therefore, SETGT positions
* the file before the first record of file format FILEA that
* has a key field value greater than 98. The file is positioned
* before the first record with a key value of 100. The READ
* operation reads the record that has a value of 100 in its key
* field.
C
C KEY SETGT FILEA
C READ FILEA 64
*
* This example shows how to read the last record of a group of
* records with the same key value and format from a program
* described file. The search argument, KEY, specified for the
* SETGT operation positions the file before the first record of
* file FILEB that has a key field value greater than 70.
* The file is positioned before the first record with a key
* value of 80. The READP operation reads the last record that
* has a value of 70 in its key field.
C
C KEY SETGT FILEB
C READP FILEB 64
Figure 329. SETGT Operation (Part 1 of 4)
Key Field Key Field

Values Values
97 50
97 60
97 70
97 (READ) 70
FILEA (SETGT) FILEB
98 80
(SETGT)
(READ) 100 80
100 80
100 90
101 90
101 91

*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
* This example shows the use of *LOVAL. The SETLL operation
* positions the file before the first record of a file in
* ascending order. The READ operation reads the first record
* (key value 97).
C
C *LOVAL SETLL RECDA
C READ RECDA 64
C
* This example shows the use of *HIVAL. The SETGT operation
* positions the file after the last record of a file in ascending
* order. The READP operation reads the last record (key value 91).
C
C *HIVAL SETGT RECDB
C READP RECDB 64
Key Field Key Field

Values Values
(SETLL)
(READ) 97 50
97 60
97 70
97 70
RECDA RECDB
98 Record 80 Record
Format Format
100 80
100 80
100 90
101 90
101 (READP) 91
(SETGT)

SETLL (Set Lower Limit)

|| Free-Form Syntax SETLL{(EHMR)} search-arg name
|

SETLL (E) search-arg name (file or record format) NR ER EQ
The SETLL operation positions a file at the next record that has a key or relative
record number that is greater than or equal to the search argument (key or relative
record number) operand specified (search-arg). The file must be a full procedural
file (identified by an F in position 18 of the file description specifications).
| of a field name, a named constant, a figurative constant, or a literal. See Figure 246
| on page 550 for an example of searching key fields.
| If the file is an externally-described file, search-arg can also be a composite key in

| the form of a KLIST name, a list of values, or %KDS. Graphic and UCS-2 key fields
| must have the same CCSID as the key in the file. See the example at the end of
| “%KDS (Search Arguments in Data Structure)” on page 475 for an illustration of
| search arguments in a data structure. If access is by relative record number,
| search-arg must be an integer literal or a numeric field with zero decimal positions.
The name operand is required and can contain either a file name or a record format
name. A record format name is allowed only with an externally described file.
The resulting indicators reflect the status of the operation. You can specify an
indicator in positions 71-72 that is set on when the search argument is greater than
the highest key or relative record number in the file. This information can also be
obtained from the %FOUND built-in function, which returns ’0’ if no record is
found, and ’1’ if a record is found.
To handle SETLL exceptions (file status codes greater than 1000), either the
You can specify an indicator in positions 75-76 that is set on when a record is
present whose key or relative record number is equal to the search argument. This
information can also be obtained from the %EQUAL built-in function, which
returns ’1’ if an exact match is found.
When using SETLL with an indicator in positions 75 and 76 or with %EQUAL to

process a distributed data management (DDM) file, which was created before
Version 3 Release 1 Modification 0, a key comparison cannot be done at the data
management level. SETLL will do a key comparison using a hexadecimal collating
sequence. This may give different results than expected when DDS features are
used that cause more than one search argument to match a given key in the file.
For example, if ABSVAL is used on a numeric key, both -1 and 1 would succeed as
search arguments for a key in the file with a value of 1. Using the hexadecimal
collating sequence, a search argument of -1 will not succeed for an actual key of 1.
The following DDS features will cause the key comparison to differ:

If name is a file name for which the lower limit is to be set, the file is positioned at
the first record with a key or relative record number equal to or greater than the
search argument specified (search-arg).
If name is a record format name for which the lower limit is to be set, the file is
positioned at the first record of the specified type that has a key equal to or greater
than the search argument specified (search-arg).
Figurative constants can be used to position the file.
Note: The discussion and examples of using figurative constants which follow,
assume that *LOVAL and *HIVAL are not used as actual keys in the file.
When used with a file with a composite key, figurative constants are treated as
though each field of the key contained the figurative constant value. Using SETLL
with *LOVAL positions the file so that the first read retrieves the record with the
lowest key. In most cases (when duplicate keys are not allowed), *HIVAL positions
the file so that a READP retrieves the last record in the file, or a READ receives an
end-of-file indication. However, note the following cases for using *LOVAL and
*HIVAL:
v With an externally described file that has a key in descending order, *HIVAL
positions the file so that the first read operation retrieves the first record in the
file (the record with the highest key), and *LOVAL positions the file so that a
READP operation retrieves the last record in the file (the record with the lowest
key).
v If a record is added or a key field altered after a SETLL operation with either
*LOVAL or *HIVAL, the file may no longer be positioned to the record with the
lowest or highest key.
v *LOVAL for numeric keys represents a key value X‘99...9D’ and *HIVAL
represents a key value X‘99...9F’. If the keys are float numeric, *HIVAL and
*LOVAL are defined differently. See “Figurative Constants” on page 126. When a
program described file has a packed decimal key specified in the file
specifications but the actual file key field contains character data, records may
have keys that are less than *LOVAL or greater than *HIVAL. When a key field
contains unsigned binary data, *LOVAL may not be the lowest key.
When *LOVAL or *HIVAL are used with key fields with a Date or Time data type,
the values are dependent of the Date-Time format used. For details on these values
please see Chapter 10, “Data Types and Data Formats” on page 167.
You can use the special values *START and *END for search-arg. *START positions
to the beginning of the file and *END positions to the end of the file. Both
positionings are independent of the collating sequence used for keyed files. If you
specify either *START or *END for search-arg, note the following:
v The name operand must be specified.

v Either an error indicator (positions 73-74) or the ’E’ extender may be specified.
Figure 329 on page 713 (part 3 of 4)shows the use of figurative constants with the
SETGT operation. Figurative constants are used the same way with the SETLL
operation.
Remember the following when using the SETLL operation:

v If the SETLL operation is not successful (no records found condition), the file is
positioned to the end of the file.
v When end of file is reached on a file being processed by SETLL, another SETLL
can be issued to reposition the file.
v After a SETLL operation successfully positions the file at a record, you retrieve
this record by reading the file. Before you read the file, however, records may be
deleted from the file by another job or through another file in your job. Thus,
you may not get the record you expected. Even if the %EQUAL built-in function
is also set on or the resulting indicator in positions 75 and 76 is set on to
indicate you found a matching record, you may not get that record. For
information on preventing unexpected modification of your files, see the
discussion of allocating objects in the iSeries Information Center Programming
topic at URL http://www.ibm.com/eserver/iseries/infocenter..
v SETLL does not cause the system to access a data record. If you are only
interested in verifying that a key actually exists, SETLL with an equal indicator
(positions 75-76) or the %EQUAL built-in function is a better performing
solution than the CHAIN operation in most cases. Under special cases of a
multiple format logical file with sparse keys, CHAIN can be a faster solution
than SETLL.
In the following example, the file ORDFIL contains order records. The key field is
the order number (ORDER) field. There are multiple records for each order.
ORDFIL looks like this in the calculation specifications:

*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
* All the 101 records in ORDFIL are to be printed. The value 101
* has previously been placed in ORDER. The SETLL operation
* positions the file at the first record with the key value 101
* and %EQUAL will return ’1’.
C
C ORDER SETLL ORDFIL
C
* The following DO loop processes all the records that have the
* same key value.
C
C IF %EQUAL
C DOU %EOF
C ORDER READE ORDFIL
C IF NOT %EOF
C EXCEPT DETAIL
C ENDIF
C ENDDO
C ENDIF
C
* The READE operation reads the second, third, and fourth 101
* records in the same manner as the first 101 record was read.
* After the fourth 101 record is read, the READE operation is
* attempted. Because the 102 record is not of the same group,
* %EOF will return ’1’, the EXCEPT operation is bypassed, and
* the DOU loop ends.
ORDFIL
ORDER Other Fields

100 1st record of 100
100 2nd record of 100
100 3rd record of 100

(SETLL)
101 2nd record of 101
101 3rd record of 101
101 4th record of 101
Figure 330. SETLL Operation

SETOFF (Set Indicator Off)
SETOFF (Set Indicator Off)

Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use EVAL *INxx = *OFF)

SETOFF OF OF OF
The SETOFF operation sets off any indicators specified in positions 71 through 76.
You must specify at least one resulting indicator in positions 71 through 76. Entries
of 1P and MR are not valid. Setting off L1 through L9 indicators does not
automatically set off any lower control-level indicators.
Figure 331 on page 720 illustrates the SETOFF operation.

SETON (Set Indicator On)
SETON (Set Indicator On)

Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use EVAL *INxx = *ON)

SETON ON ON ON
The SETON operation sets on any indicators specified in positions 71 through 76.
You must specify at least one resulting indicator in positions 71 through 76. Entries
of 1P, MR, KA through KN, and KP through KY are not valid. Setting on L1
through L9 indicators does not automatically set on any lower control-level
indicators.
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
* The SETON and SETOFF operations set from one to three indicators
* specified in positions 71 through 76 on and off.
* The SETON operation sets indicator 17 on.
C
C SETON 17
C
* The SETON operation sets indicators 17 and 18 on.
C
C SETON 1718
C
* The SETOFF operation sets indicator 21 off.
C
C SETOFF 21
Figure 331. SETON and SETOFF Operations

SHTDN (Shut Down)
SHTDN (Shut Down)

Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the %SHTDN built-in function)

SHTDN ON _ _
The SHTDN operation allows the programmer to determine whether the system
operator has requested shutdown. If the system operator has requested shutdown,
the resulting indicator specified in positions 71 and 72 is set on. Positions 71 and
72 must contain one of the following indicators: 01 through 99, L1 through L9, U1
through U8, H1 through H9, LR, or RT.
The system operator can request shutdown by specifying the *CNTRLD option on
the following CL commands: ENDJOB (End Job), PWRDWNSYS (Power Down
System), ENDSYS (End System), and ENDSBS (End Subsystem). For information
on these commands, see the iSeries Information Center programming category.
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
* When the SHTDN operation is run, a test is made to determine
* whether the system operator has requested shutdown. If so,
* indicator 27 is set on.
C
C SHTDN 27
C 27 EXSR Term_appl
C :
C :
C Term_appl BEGSR
C CLOSE *ALL
C :
C ENDSR
Figure 332. SHTDN Operation

SORTA (Sort an Array)

Free-Form Syntax SORTA array-name

SORTA array-name
The array-name operand is the name of an array to be sorted. The array is sorted
into sequence (ascending or descending), depending on the sequence specified for
the array on the definition specification. If no sequence is specified, the array is
sorted into ascending sequence. The array *IN cannot be specified.. If the array is
defined as a compile-time or prerun-time array with data in alternating form, the
alternate array is not sorted. Only the array specified as array-name is sorted.
If the array is defined with the OVERLAY keyword, the base array will be sorted
in the sequence defined by the OVERLAY array.
Graphic arrays will be sorted by the hexadecimal values of the array elements,
disregarding the alternate collating sequence, in the order specified on the
definition specification.
Notes:
1. Sorting an array does not preserve any previous order. For example, if you sort
an array twice, using different overlay arrays, the final sequence will be that of
the last sort. Elements that are equal in the sort sequence but have different
hexadecimal values (for example, due to alternate collating sequence or the use
of an overlay array to determine sequence), may not be in the same order after
sorting as they were before.
2. When sorting arrays of basing pointers, you must ensure that all values in the
arrays are addresses within the same space. Otherwise, inconsistent results may
occur. See “Compare Operations” on page 390 for more information.
3. If a null-capable array is sorted, the sorting will not take the settings of the null
flags into consideration.
4. Sorting a dynamically allocated array without all defined elements allocated
may cause errors to occur.
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
DARRY S 1A DIM(8) ASCEND
D
*
* The SORTA operation sorts ARRY into ascending sequence because
* the ASCEND keyword is specified.
* If the unsorted ARRY contents were GT1BA2L0, the sorted ARRY
* contents would be ABGLT012.
C
C SORTA ARRY
Figure 333. SORTA Operation

*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
* In this example, the base array has the values aa44 bb33 cc22 dd11
* so the overlaid array ARRO has the values 44 33 22 11.
D DS
D ARR 4 DIM(4) ASCEND
D ARRO 2 OVERLAY(ARR:3)
D
C
* After the SORTA operation, the base array has the values
* dd11 cc22 bb33 aa44
C
C SORTA ARRO
Figure 334. SORTA Operation with OVERLAY

SQRT (Square Root)
SQRT (Square Root)

Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the %SQRT built-in function)

SQRT (H) Value Root
The SQRT operation derives the square root of the field named in factor 2. The
square root of factor 2 is placed in the result field.
Factor 2 must be numeric, and can contain one of: an array, array element, field,
figurative constant, literal, named constant, subfield, or table name.
The result field must be numeric, and can contain one of: an array, array element,
subfield, or table element.
An entire array can be used in a SQRT operation if factor 2 and the result field
contain array names.
The number of decimal positions in the result field can be either less than or
greater than the number of decimal positions in factor 2. However, the result field
should not have fewer than half the number of decimal positions in factor 2.
If the value of the factor 2 field is zero, the result field value is also zero. If the
value of the factor 2 field is negative, the RPG IV exception/error handling routine
receives control.
For further rules on the SQRT operation, see “Arithmetic Operations” on page 380.
See Figure 146 on page 383 for an example of the SQRT operation.

SUB (Subtract)
SUB (Subtract)
|| Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the - or -= operators)
|

SUB (H) Minuend Subtrahend Difference + − Z
If factor 1 is specified, factor 2 is subtracted from factor 1 and the difference is

placed in the result field. If factor 1 is not specified, the contents of factor 2 are
subtracted from the contents of the result field.
Factor 1 and factor 2 must be numeric, and each can contain one of: an array, array
element, field, figurative constant, literal, named constant, subfield, or table name.
subfield, or table name.
For rules for the SUB operation, see “Arithmetic Operations” on page 380.
See Figure 146 on page 383 for examples of the SUB operation.

SUBDUR (Subtract Duration)

|| Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the - or -= operators, or the %DIFF built-in function)
|

SUBDUR (E) Date/Time/ Timestamp Date/Time/ Timestamp Duration: _ ER _
(duration) Duration code
SUBDUR (E) Date/Time/ Timestamp Duration:Duration Code Date/Time/ _ ER _
(new date) Timestamp
The SUBDUR operation has been provided to:

v Subtract a duration to establish a new Date, Time or Timestamp
v Calculate a duration
Subtract a duration
The SUBDUR operation can be used to subtract a duration specified in factor 2
from a field or constant specified in factor 1 and place the resulting Date, Time or
Timestamp in the field specified in the result field.
Factor 1 is optional and may contain a Date, Time or Timestamp field, array, array
element, literal or constant. If factor 1 contains a field name, array or array element
then its data type must be the same type as the field specified in the result field. If
factor 1 is not specified then the duration is subtracted from the field specified in
the result field.
Factor 2 is required and contains two subfactors. The first is a numeric field, array
or constant with zero decimal positions. If the field is negative then the duration is
added to the field. The second subfactor must be a valid duration code indicating
the type of duration. The duration code must be consistent with the result field
data type. For example, you can subtract a year, month or day duration but not a
minute duration from a date field. For list of duration codes and their short forms
see “Date Operations” on page 393.
The result field must be a date, time or timestamp data type field, array or array
element. If factor 1 is blank, the duration is subtracted from the value in the result
field. If the result field is an array, the value in factor 2 is subtracted from each
element in the array. If the result field is a time field, the result will always be a
valid Time. For example, subtracting 59 minutes from 00:58:59 would give
-00:00:01. Since this time is not valid, the compiler adjusts it to 23:59:59.
When subtracting a duration in months from a date, the general rule is that the
month portion is decreased by the number of months in the duration, and the day
portion is unchanged. The exception to this is when the resulting day portion
would exceed the actual number of days in the resulting month. In this case, the
resulting day portion is adjusted to the actual month end date. The following
examples (which assume a *YMD format) illustrate this point.
v ’95/05/30’ SUBDUR 1:*MONTH results in ’95/04/30’
The resulting month portion has been decreased by 1; the day portion is
unchanged.
v ’95/05/31’ SUBDUR 1:*MONTH results in ’95/04/30’

The resulting month portion has been decreased by 1; the resulting day portion
has been adjusted because April has only 30 days.
Similar results occur when subtracting a year duration. For example, subtracting
one year from ’92/02/29’ results in ’91/02/28’, an adjusted value since the
resulting year is not a leap year.
Note: The system places a 15 digit limit on durations. Subtracting a Duration with
more than 15 significant digits will cause errors or truncation. These
problems can be avoided by limiting the first subfactor in Factor 2 to 15
digits.
Calculate a duration
The SUBDUR operation can also be used to calculate a duration between:
1. Two dates
2. A date and a timestamp
3. Two times
4. A time and a timestamp
5. Two timestamps
The data types in factor 1 and factor 2 must be compatible types as specified
above.
Factor 1 is required and must contain a Date, Time or Timestamp field, subfield,
array, array element, constant or literal.
Factor 2 is required and must also contain a Date, Time or Timestamp field, array,
array element, literal or constant.
The following duration codes are valid:

v For two dates or a date and a timestamp: *DAYS (*D), *MONTHS (*M), and
*YEARS (*Y)
v For two times or a time and a timestamp: *SECONDS (*S), *MINUTES (*MN),
and *HOURS (*H)
v For two timestamps: *MSECONDS (*MS), *SECONDS (*S), *MINUTES (*MN),
*HOURS (*H), *DAYS (*D), *MONTHS (*M), and *YEARS (*Y).
The result is a number of whole units, with any remainder discarded. For example,
61 minutes is equal to 1 hour and 59 minutes is equal to 0 hours.
The result field consists of two subfactors. The first is the name of a zero decimal
numeric field, array or array element in which the result of the operation will be
placed. The second subfactor contains a duration code denoting the type of
duration. The result field will be negative if the date in factor 1 is earlier than the
date in factor 2.
For more information on working with date-time fields see “Date Operations” on
page 393.
Note: Calculating a micro-second Duration (*mseconds) can exceed the 15 digit

system limit for Durations and cause errors or truncation. This situation will
occur when there is more than a 32 year and 9 month difference between
the factor 1 and factor 2 entries.

Possible error situations
1. For subtracting durations:
v If the value of the Date, Time or Timestamp field in factor 1 is invalid
v If factor 1 is blank and the value of the result field before the operation is
invalid
v or if the result of the operation is greater than *HIVAL or less than *LOVAL.
2. For calculating durations:
v If the value of the Date, Time or Timestamp field in factor 1 or factor 2 is
invalid
v or if the result field is not large enough to hold the resulting duration.
In each of these cases an error will be signalled.
If an error is detected, an error will be generated with one of the following

program status codes:
v 00103: Result field not large enough to hold result
v 00112: Date, Time or Timestamp value not valid
v 00113: A Date overflow or underflow occurred (that is, the resulting Date is
greater than *HIVAL or less than *LOVAL).
The value of the result field remains unchanged. To handle exceptions with
program status codes 103, 112 or 113, either the operation code extender ’E’ or an
error indicator ER can be specified, but not both. For more information on error
handling, see “Program Exception/Errors” on page 82.
SUBDUR Examples
* Determine a LOANDATE which is xx years, yy months, zz days prior to
* the DUEDATE.
C DUEDATE SUBDUR XX:*YEARS LOANDATE
C SUBDUR YY:*MONTHS LOANDATE
C SUBDUR ZZ:*DAYS LOANDATE
* Add 30 days to a loan due date
*
C SUBDUR -30:*D LOANDUE
* Calculate the number or days between a LOANDATE and a DUEDATE.
C LOANDATE SUBDUR DUEDATE NUM_DAYS:*D 5 0
* Determine the number of seconds between LOANDATE and DUEDATE.
C LOANDATE SUBDUR DUEDATE NUM_SECS:*S 5 0
Figure 335. SUBDUR Operations

SUBST (Substring)
SUBST (Substring)
Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the %SUBST built-in function)

SUBST (E P) Length to extract Base string:start Target string _ ER _
The SUBST operation returns a substring from factor 2, starting at the location
specified in factor 2 for the length specified in factor 1, and places this substring in
the result field. If factor 1 is not specified, the length of the string from the start
position is used. For graphic or UCS-2 strings, the start position is measured in
double bytes. The base and target strings must both be of the same type, either
both character, both graphic, or both UCS-2.
Factor 1 can contain the length value of the string to be extracted from the string
specified in factor 2. It must be numeric with no decimal positions and can contain
one of: a field name, array element, table name, literal, or named constant.
Factor 2 must contain either the base string, or the base string followed by ':',
followed by the start location. The base string portion can contain one of: a field
name, array element, named constant, data structure name, table name, or literal.
The start position must be numeric with zero decimal positions, and can contain
one of the following: a field name, array element, table name, literal or named
constant. If it is not specified, SUBST starts in position 1 of the base string. For
graphic or UCS-2 strings, the start position is measured in double bytes.
The start location and the length of the substring to be extracted must be positive
integers. The start location must not be greater than the length of the base string,
and the length must not be greater than the length of the base string from the start
location. If either or both of these conditions is not satisfied, the operation will not
be performed.
To handle SUBST exceptions (program status code 100), either the operation code
The result field must be character, graphic, or UCS-2 and can contain one of the
following: a field name, array element, data structure, or table name. The result is
left-justified. The result field’s length should be at least as large as the length
specified in factor 1. If the substring is longer than the field specified in the result
field, the substring will be truncated from the right. If the result field is
variable-length, its length does not change.
Note: You cannot use figurative constants in the factor 1, factor 2, or result fields.
Overlapping is allowed for factor 1 and the result field or factor 2 and the
result field. If factor 1 is shorter than the length of the result field, a P
specified in the operation extender position indicates that the result field
should be padded on the right with blanks after the substring occurs.

SUBST (Substring)
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
* The SUBST operation extracts the substring from factor 2 starting
* at position 3 for a length of 2. The value ’CD’ is placed in the
* result field TARGET. Indicator 90 is not set on because no error
* occurred.
C
C Z-ADD 3 T 2 0
C MOVEL ’ABCDEF’ String 10
C 2 SUBST String:T Target 90
*
* In this SUBST operation, the length is greater than the length
* of the string minus the start position plus 1. As a result,
* indicator 90 is set on and the result field is not changed.
C
C MOVE ’ABCDEF’ String 6
C Z-ADD 4 T 1 0
C 5 SUBST String:T Result 90
C
* In this SUBST operation, 3 characters are substringed starting
* at the fifth position of the base string. Because P is not
* specified, only the first 3 characters of TARGET are
* changed. TARGET contains ’123XXXXX’.
C
C Z-ADD 3 Length 2 0
C Z-ADD 5 T 2 0
C MOVE ’TEST123’ String 8
C MOVE *ALL’X’ Target
C Length SUBST String:T Target 8
Figure 336. SUBST Operation (Part 1 of 2)

SUBST (Substring)
*
* This example is the same as the previous one except P
* specified, and the result is padded with blanks.
* TARGET equals ’123’.
C
C Z-ADD 3 Length 2 0
C Z-ADD5 T 2 0
C MOVE ’TEST123’ String 8
C MOVE *ALL’X’ Target
C Length SUBST(P) String:T Target 8
C
C
*
* In the following example, CITY contains the string
* ’Toronto, Ontario’. The SCAN operation is used to locate the
* separating blank, position 9 in this illustration. SUBST
* without factor 1 places the string starting at position 10 and
* continuing for the length of the string in field TCNTRE.
* TCNTRE contains ’Ontario’.
C ’ ’ SCAN City C
C ADD 1 C
C SUBST City:C TCntre
*
* Before the operations STRING=’John&
* RESULT is a 10 character field which contains ’ABCDEFGHIJ’.
* The CHECK operation locates the first nonblank character
* and sets on indicator 10 if such a character exists. If *IN10
* is on, the SUBST operation substrings STRING starting from the
* first non-blank to the end of STRING. Padding is used to ensure
* that nothing is left from the previous contents of the result
* field. If STRING contains the value ’ HELLO ’ then RESULT
* will contain the value ’HELLO ’ after the SUBST(P) operation.
* After the operations RESULT=’John’.
C
C ’ ’ CHECK STRING ST 10
C 10 SUBST(P) STRING:ST RESULT
Figure 336. SUBST Operation (Part 2 of 2)

TAG (Tag)
TAG (Tag)

TAG Label
The declarative TAG operation names the label that identifies the destination of a
“GOTO (Go To)” on page 605 or “CABxx (Compare and Branch)” on page 535
operation. It can be specified anywhere within calculations, including within total
calculations.
through L9 indicator, the LR indicator, or the L0 entry to group the statement
within the appropriate section of the program. Conditioning indicator entries
Factor 1 must contain the name of the destination of a GOTO or CABxx operation.
This name must be a unique symbolic name, which is specified in factor 2 of a
GOTO operation or in the result field of a CABxx operation. The name can be used
as a common point for multiple GOTO or CABxx operations.
Branching to the TAG from a different part of the RPG IV logic cycle may result in
an endless loop. For example, if a detail calculation line specifies a GOTO
operation to a total calculation TAG operation, an endless loop may occur.
See Figure 276 on page 606 for examples of the TAG operation.

TEST (Test Date/Time/Timestamp)

Free-Form Syntax TEST{(EDTZ)} {dtz-format} field-name
Code (dtz-format) Factor 2 (field-name) Indicators

TEST (E) Date/Time or _ ER _
Timestamp
Field
TEST (D E) Date Format Character or _ ER _
Numeric field
TEST (E T) Time Format Character or _ ER _
Numeric field
TEST (E Z) Timestamp Format Character or _ ER _
Numeric field
The TEST operation code allows users to test the validity of date, time, or
timestamp fields prior to using them.
For information on the formats that can be used see “Date Data Type” on page 193,
“Time Data Type” on page 196, and “Timestamp Data Type” on page 197.
v If the field-name operand is a field declared as Date, Time, or Timestamp:
– The dtz-format operand cannot be specified
– Operation code extenders ’D’, ’T’, and ’Z’ are not allowed
v If the field-name operand is a field declared as character or numeric, then one of
the operation code extenders ’D’, ’T’, or ’Z’ must be specified.
Note: If the field-name operand is a character field with no separators, the

dtz-format operand must contain the date, time, or timestamp format
followed by a zero.
– If the operation code extender includes ’D’ (test Date),
- dtz-format is optional and may by any of the valid Date formats (See “Date
Data Type” on page 193).
- If dtz-format is not specified, the format specified on the control
specification with the DATFMT keyword is assumed. If this keyword is not
specified, *ISO is assumed.
– If the operation code extender includes ’T’ (test Time),
- dtz-format is optional and may be any of the valid Time formats (See “Time
Data Type” on page 196).
- If dtz-format is not specified, the format specified on the control
specification with the TIMFMT keyword is assumed. If this keyword is not
specified, *ISO is assumed.
Note: The *USA date format is not allowed with the operation code extender
(T). The *USA date format has an AM/PM restriction that cannot be
converted to numeric when a numeric result field is used.
– If the operation code extender includes ’Z’ (test Timestamp),
- dtz-format is optional and may be *ISO or *ISO0 (See “Timestamp Data
Type” on page 197).

Numeric fields and character fields without separators are tested for valid digit
portions of a Date, Time, or Timestamp value. Character fields are tested for both
valid digits and separators.
If the character or numeric field specified as the field-name operand is longer than
required by the format being tested, only the leftmost data is used. For example, if
the dtz-format operand is *MDY for a test of a numeric date, only the leftmost 6
digits of the field-name operand are examined.
For the test operation, either the operation code extender ’E’ or an error indicator
ER must be specified, but not both. If the content of the field-name operand is not
valid, program status code 112 is signaled. Then, the error indicator is set on or the
%ERROR built-in function is set to return ’1’ depending on the error handling
method specified. For more information on error handling, see “Program
Exception/Errors” on page 82.
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
D
D Datefield S D DATFMT(*JIS)
D Num_Date S 6P 0 INZ(910921)
D Char_Time S 8 INZ(’13:05 PM’)
D Char_Date S 6 INZ(’041596’)
D Char_Tstmp S 20 INZ(’19960723140856834000’)
D Char_Date2 S 9A INZ(’402/10/66’)
D Char_Date3 S 8A INZ(’2120/115’)
D
*
* Indicator 18 will not be set on, since the character field is a
* valid *ISO timestamp field, without separators.
C *ISO0 TEST (Z) Char_Tstmp 18
* Indicator 19 will not be set on, since the character field is a
* valid *MDY date, without separators.
C *MDY0 TEST (D) Char_Date 19
*
* %ERROR will return ’1’, since Num_Date is not *DMY.
*
C *DMY TEST (DE) Num_Date
*
* No Factor 1 since result is a D data type field
* %ERROR will return ’0’, since the field
* contains a valid date
C
C TEST (E) Datefield
C
* In the following test, %ERROR will return ’1’ since the
* Timefield does not contain a valid USA time.
C
C *USA TEST (ET) Char_Time
C
* In the following test, indicator 20 will be set on since the
* character field is a valid *CMDY, but there are separators.
C
C *CMDY0 TEST (D) char_date2 20
C
* In the following test, %ERROR will return ’0’ since
* the character field is a valid *LONGJUL date.
C
C *LONGJUL TEST (DE) char_date3
Figure 337. TEST (E D/T/Z) Example

TESTB (Test Bit)
TESTB (Test Bit)

|| Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the %BITAND built-in function)
|

TESTB Bit numbers Character field OF ON EQ
The TESTB operation compares the bits identified in factor 2 with the
corresponding bits in the field named as the result field. The result field must be a
one-position character field. Resulting indicators in positions 71 through 76 reflect
the status of the result field bits. Factor 2 is always a source of bits for the result
field.

v Bit numbers 0-7: From 1 to 8 bits can be tested per operation. The bits to be
tested are identified by the numbers 0 through 7. (0 is the leftmost bit.) The bit
numbers must be enclosed in apostrophes. For example, to test bits 0, 2, and 5,
enter ‘025’ in factor 2.
name, or array element in factor 2. The bits that are on in the field, table name,
or array element are compared with the corresponding bits in the result field;
bits that are off are not considered. The field specified in the result field can be
an array element if each element of the array is a one-position character field.
v Hexadecimal literal or named constant: You can specify a 1-byte hexadecimal literal
or hexadecimal named constant. Bits that are on in factor 2 are compared with
the corresponding bits in the result field; bits that are off are not considered.
Figure 338 on page 736 illustrates uses of the TESTB operation.
Indicators assigned in positions 71 through 76 reflect the status of the result field
bits. At least one indicator must be assigned, and as many as three can be assigned
for one operation. For TESTB operations, the resulting indicators are set on as
follows:
v Positions 71 and 72: An indicator in these positions is set on if the bit numbers
specified in factor 2 or each bit that is on in the factor 2 field is off in the result
field. That is, all of the specified bits are equal to off.
specified in factor 2 or the bits that are on in the factor 2 field are of mixed
status (some on, some off) in the result field. That is, at least one the specified
bits is on.
Note: If only one bit is to be tested, these positions must be blank. If a field
name is specified in factor 2 and it has only one bit on, an indicator in
positions 73 and 74 is not set on.
specified in the factor 2 or each bit that is on in factor 2 field is on in the result
field. That is, all of the specified bits are equal to on.
Note: If the field in factor 2 has no bits on, then no indicators are set on.

TESTB (Test Bit)
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
* The field bit settings are FieldF = 00000001, and FieldG = 11110001.
*
* Indicator 16 is set on because bit 3 is off (0) in FieldF.
* Indicator 17 is set off.
C TESTB ’3’ FieldF 16 17
*
* Indicator 16 is set on because both bits 3 and 6 are off (0) in
* FieldF. Indicators 17 and 18 are set off.
C TESTB ’36’ FieldF 161718
*
* Indicator 17 is set on because bit 3 is off (0) and bit 7 is on
* (1) in FLDF. Indicators 16 and 18 are set off.
C TESTB ’37’ FieldF 161718
*
* Indicator 17 is set on because bit 7 is on (1) in FLDF.
* Indicator 16 is set off.
C TESTB ’7’ FieldF 16 17
*
* Indicator 17 is set on because bits 0,1,2, and 3 are off (0) and
* bit 7 is on (1). Indicators 16 and 18 are set off.
C TESTB FieldG FieldF 161718
*
* The hexadecimal literal X’88’ (10001000) is used in factor 2.
* Indicator 17 is set on because at least one bit (bit 0) is on
* Indicators 16 and 18 are set off.
C TESTB X’88’ FieldG 161718
Figure 338. TESTB Operation

TESTN (Test Numeric)

Free-Form Syntax (not allowed)

TESTN Character field NU BN BL
The TESTN operation tests a character result field for the presence of zoned
decimal digits and blanks. The result field must be a character field. To be
considered numeric, each character in the field, except the low-order character,
must contain a hexadecimal F zone and a digit (0 through 9). The low-order
character is numeric if it contains a hexadecimal C, hexadecimal D, or hexadecimal
F zone, and a digit (0 through 9). Note that the alphabetic characters J through R,
should they appear in the low-order position of a field, are treated as negative
numbers by TESTN. As a result of the test, resulting indicators are set on as
follows:
v Positions 71 and 72: The result field contains numeric characters; the low-order
character may also be a letter from A to R, since these characters have a zone of
C, D, or F, and a digit of 0 to 9.
v Positions 73 and 74: The result field contains both numeric characters and at least
one leading blank. For example, the values 123 or 123 set this indicator on.
However, the value 123 is not a valid numeric field because of the embedded
blanks, so this value does not set this indicator on.
Note: An indicator cannot be specified in positions 73 and 74 when a field of

length one is tested because the character field must contain at least one
numeric character and one leading blank.
v Positions 75 and 76: The result field contains all blanks.
The same indicator can be used for more than one condition. If any of the
conditions exist, the indicator is set on.
The TESTN operation may be used to validate fields before they are used in
operations where their use may cause undesirable results or exceptions (e.g.
arithmetic operations).

*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
* The field values are FieldA = 123, FieldB = 1X4, FieldC = 004,
* FieldD = , FieldE = 13, and FieldF = 12.
*
* Indicator 21 is set on because FieldA contains all numeric
* characters.
C TESTN FieldA 21
* Indicator 22 is set on because FieldA contains all numeric
* characters. Indicators 23 and 24 remain off.
C TESTN FieldA 222324
* All indicators are off because FieldB does not contain valid
* numeric data.
C TESTN FieldB 252627
* Indicator 28 is set on because FieldC contains valid numeric data.
* Indicators 29 and 30 remain off.
C TESTN FieldC 282930
* Indicator 33 is set on because FieldD contains all blanks.
* Indicators 31 and 32 remain off.
C TESTN FieldD 313233
* Indicators 34, 35, and 36 remain off. Indicator 35 remains off
* off because FieldE contains a blank after a digit.
C TESTN FieldE 343536
* Indicator 38 is set on because FieldF contains leading blanks and
* valid numeric characters. Indicators 37 and 39 remain off.
C TESTN FieldF 373839
Figure 339. TESTN Operation

TESTZ (Test Zone)
TESTZ (Test Zone)

|| Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the %BITxxx built-in functions)
|

TESTZ Character field AI JR XX
The TESTZ operation tests the zone of the leftmost character in the result field. The
result field must be a character field. Resulting indicators are set on according to
the results of the test. You must specify at least one resulting indicator positions 71
through 76. The characters &, A through I, and any character with the same zone
as the character A set on the indicator in positions 71 and 72. The characters -
(minus), J through R, and any character with the same zone as the character J set
on the indicator in positions 73 and 74. Characters with any other zone set on the
indicator in positions 75 and 76.

TIME (Retrieve Time and Date)

Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the %DATE, %TIME, or %TIMESTAMP built-in function)

TIME Target field
The TIME operation accesses the system time of day and/or the system date at
any time during program processing. The system time is based on the 24-hour
clock.
The Result field can specify one of the following into which the time of day or the
time of day and the system date are written:
Result Field Value Returned Format

6-digit Numeric Time hhmmss
12-digit Numeric Time and Date hhmmssDDDDDD
14-digit Numeric Time and Date hhmmssDDDDDDDD
Time Time Format of Result
Date Date Format of Result
Timestamp Timestamp *ISO
If the Result field is a numeric field, to access the time of day only, specify the
result field as a 6-digit numeric field. To access both the time of day and the
system date, specify the result field as a 12- (2-digit year portion) or 14-digit
(4-digit year portion) numeric field. The time of day is always placed in the first
six positions of the result field in the following format:
v hhmmss (hh=hours, mm=minutes, and ss=seconds)
If the Result field is a numeric field, then if the system date is included, it is placed
in positions 7 through 12 or 7 through 14 of the result field. The date format
depends on the date format job attribute DATFMT and can be mmddyy, ddmmyy,
yymmdd, or Julian. The Julian format for 2-digit year portion contains the year in
positions 7 and 8, the day (1 through 366, right-adjusted, with zeros in the unused
high-order positions) in positions 9 through 11, and 0 in position 12. For 4-digit
year portion, it contains the year in positions 7 through 10, the day (1 through 366,
right-adjusted, with zeros in the unused high-order positions) in positions 11
through 13, and 0 in position 14.
If the Result field is a Timestamp field, the last 3 digits in the microseconds part is
always 000.
Note: The special fields UDATE and *DATE contain the job date. These values are
not updated when midnight is passed, or when the job date is changed
during the running of the program.

D Timeres S T TIMFMT(*EUR)
D Dateres S D DATFMT(*USA)
D Tstmpres S Z
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
* When the TIME operation is processed (with a 6-digit numeric
* field), the current time (in the form hhmmss) is placed in the
* result field CLOCK. The TIME operation is based on the 24-hour
* clock, for example, 132710. (In the 12-hour time system, 132710
* is 1:27:10 p.m.)
C TIME Clock 6 0
* When the TIME operation is processed (with a 12-digit numeric
* field), the current time and day is placed in the result field
* TIMSTP. The first 6 digits are the time, and the last 6 digits
* are the date; for example, 093315121579 is 9:33:15 a.m. on
* December 15, 1979.
C TIME TimStp 12 0
C MOVEL TimStp Time 6 0
C MOVE TimStp SysDat 6 0
* This example duplicates the 12-digit example above but uses a
* 14-digit field. The first 6 digits are the time, and the last
* 8 digits are the date; for example, 13120001101992
* is 1:12:00 p.m. on January 10, 1992.
C TIME TimStp 14 0
C MOVEL TimStp Time 6 0
C MOVE TimStp SysDat 8 0
* When the TIME operation is processed with a date field,
* the current date is placed in the result field DATERES.
* It will have the format of the date field. In this case
* it would be in *USA format ie: D’mm/dd/yyyy’.
C TIME Dateres
* When the TIME operation is processed with a time field,
* the current time is placed in the result field TIMERES.
* It will have the format of the time field. In this case
* it would be in *EUR format ie: T’hh.mm.ss’.
C TIME Timeres
* When the TIME operation is processed with a timestamp field,
* the current timestamp is placed in the result field TSTMPRES.
* It will be in *ISO format.
* ie: Z’yyyy-mm-dd-hh.mm.ss.mmmmmm’
C TIME Tstmpres
Figure 340. TIME Operation

UNLOCK (Unlock a Data Area or Release a Record)

Free-Form Syntax UNLOCK{(E)} name

UNLOCK (E) name (file or data area) _ ER _
The UNLOCK operation is used to unlock data areas and release record locks.
To handle UNLOCK exceptions (program status codes 401-421, 431, and 432),
either the operation code extender ’E’ or an error indicator ER can be specified, but
not both. For more information on error handling, see “Program Exception/Errors”
on page 82.
Positions 71,72,75 and 76 must be blank.
| For further rules for the UNLOCK operation, see “Data-Area Operations” on
| page 392.
Unlocking data areas

The name operand must be the name of the data area to be unlocked, or the
reserved word *DTAARA.
When *DTAARA is specified, all data areas in the program that are locked are
unlocked.
The data area must already be specified in the result field of a *DTAARA DEFINE
statement or with the DTAARA keyword on the definition specification. name must
not refer to the local data area or the Program Initialization Parameters (PIP) data
area. If the UNLOCK operation is specified to an already unlocked data area, an
error does not occur.
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
* TOTAMT, TOTGRS, and TOTNET are defined as data areas in the
* system. The IN operation retrieves all the data areas defined in
* the program. The program processes calculations, and
* then unlocks the data areas. The data areas can them be used
* by other programs.
*
C *LOCK IN *DTAARA
C :
C :
C UNLOCK *DTAARA
C *DTAARA DEFINE TOTAMT 8 2
C *DTAARA DEFINE TOTGRS 10 2
C *DTAARA DEFINE TOTNET 10 2
Figure 341. Data area unlock operation
Releasing record locks

The UNLOCK operation also allows the most recently locked record to be
unlocked for an update disk file.

name must be the name of the UPDATE disk file.
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
FUPDATA UF E DISK
*
*
* Assume that the file UPDATA contains record format vendor.
* A record is read from UPDATA. Since the file is an update
* file, the record is locked. *IN50 is set somewhere else in
* the program to control whether an UPDATE should take place.
* otherwise the record is unlocked using the UNLOCK operation.
* Note that factor 2 of the UNLOCK operation is the file name,
* UPDATA, not the record format, VENDOR
*
C READ VENDOR 12
C :
C *IN50 IFEQ *ON
C UPDATE VENDOR
C ELSE
C UNLOCK UPDATA 99
C ENDIF
Figure 342. Record unlock operation

UPDATE (Modify Existing Record)

|| Free-Form Syntax UPDATE{(E)} name {data-structure | %FIELDS(name{:name...})}
|

UPDATE (E) name (file or record format) data-structure _ ER _
The UPDATE operation modifies the last locked record retrieved for processing
from an update disk file or subfile. No other operation should be performed on the
file between the input operation that retrieved the record and the UPDATE
operation.
The name operand must be the name of a file or record format to be updated. A
record format name is required with an externally described file. The record format
name must be the name of the last record read from the file; otherwise, an error
occurs. A file name as the name operand is required with a program described file.
| If the data-structure operand is specified, the record is updated directly from the
| data structure. If name refers to a program described file (identified by an F in
| position 22 of the file description specification), the data structure can be any data
| structure of the same length as the file’s declared record length. If name refers to
| an externally-described file, the data structure must be a data structure defined
| with EXTNAME(...:*INPUT) or LIKEREC(...:*INPUT). The updated record is
| written directly from the data structure to the file.
| A list of the fields to update can be specified using %FIELDS. The parameter to
| %FIELDS is a list of the field names to update. See the example at the end of
| “%FIELDS (Fields to update)” on page 468 for an illustration of updating fields.
To handle UPDATE exceptions (file status codes greater than 1000), either the
Remember the following when using the UPDATE operation:

v When name is a record format name, the current values in the program for the
fields in the record definition are used to modify the record.
v If some but not all fields in a record are to be updated, use the output
specifications and not the UPDATE operation.
v Before UPDATE is issued to a file or record, a valid input operation with lock
(READ, READC, READE, READP, READPE, CHAIN, or primary/secondary file)
must be issued to the same file or record. If the read operation returns with an
error condition or if it was read without locking, the record is not locked and
UPDATE cannot be issued. The record must be read again with the default of a
blank operation extender to specify a lock request.
v Consecutive UPDATE operations to the same file or record are not valid.
Intervening successful read operations must be issued to position to and lock the
record to be updated.
v Beware of using the UPDATE operation on primary or secondary files during
total calculations. At this stage in the RPG IV cycle, the fields from the current
record (the record that is about to be processed) have not yet been moved to the
processing area. Therefore, the UPDATE operation updates the current record

with the fields from the preceding record. Also, when the fields from the current
record are moved to the processing area, they are the fields that were updated
from the preceding record.
v For multiple device files, specify a subfile record format as the name operand.
The operation is processed for the program device identified in the fieldname
specified using the DEVID keyword in the file specification. If the program
device is not specified, the device used in the last successful input operation is
used. This device must be the same one you specified for the input operation
that must precede the UPDATE operation. You must not process input or output
operations to other devices in between the input and UPDATE operations. If you
do, your UPDATE operation will fail.
v For a display file which has multiple subfile record formats, you must not
process read-for-update operations to one subfile record in between the input
and UPDATE operations to another subfile in the same display file. If you do,
the UPDATE operation will fail.
v An UPDATE operation is valid to a subfile record format as long as at least one
successful input operation (READ, READC, READE, READP, READPE, CHAIN,
or primary/secondary file) has occurred to that format name without an
intervening input operation to a different format name. The record updated will
be the record retrieved on the last successful input operation. This means that if
you read a record successfully, then read unsuccessfully to the same format, an
update will succeed, but will update the first record. This is different from the
behavior of DISK files.
To avoid updating the wrong record, check the resulting indicator or
record-identifying indicator to ensure that a successful input operation has
occurred before doing the update operation.
See “Database Null Value Support” on page 206 for information on updating
records with null-capable fields containing null values.

WHEN (When True Then Select)
WHEN (When True Then Select)

Free-Form Syntax WHEN{(MR)} indicator-expression

WHEN (M/R) indicator-expression
The WHEN operation code is similar to the WHENxx operation code in that it
controls the processing of lines in a SELECT operation. It differs in that the
condition is specified by a logical expression in the indicator-expression operand.
The operations controlled by the WHEN operation are performed when the
expression in the indicator-expression operand is true. See Chapter 21, “Expressions”
on page 419 for details on expressions. For information on how operation
extenders M and R are used, see “Precision Rules for Numeric Operations” on
page 428.
*
C SELECT
C WHEN *INKA
C :
C :
C :
C WHEN NOT(*IN01) AND (DAY = ’FRIDAY’)
C :
C :
C :
C WHEN %SUBST(A:(X+4):3) = ’ABC’
C :
C :
C :
C OTHER
C :
C :
C :
C ENDSL
Figure 343. WHEN Operation

WHENxx (When True Then Select)

Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the WHEN operation code)

WHENxx Comparand Comparand
The WHENxx operations of a select group determine where control passes after
the “SELECT (Begin a Select Group)” on page 709 operation is processed.
The WHENxx conditional operation is true if factor 1 and factor 2 have the
relationship specified by xx If the condition is true, the operations following the
WHENxx are processed until the next WHENxx, OTHER, ENDSL, or END
operation.
When performing the WHENxx operation remember:

v After the operation group is processed, control passes to the statement following
the ENDSL operation.
v You can code complex WHENxx conditions using ANDxx and ORxx.
Calculations are processed when the condition specified by the combined
WHENxx, ANDxx, and ORxx operations is true.
v The WHENxx group can be empty.
v Within total calculations, the control level entry (positions 7 and 8) can be blank
or can contain an L1 through L9 indicator, an LR indicator, or an L0 entry to
group the statement within the appropriate section of the program. The control
level entry is for documentation purposes only. Conditioning indicator entries
Refer to “Compare Operations” on page 390 for valid values for xx.

*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
* The following example shows nested SELECT groups. The employee
* type can be one of ’C’ for casual, ’T’ for retired, ’R’ for
* regular, and ’S’ for student. Depending on the employee type
* (EmpTyp), the number of days off per year (Days) will vary.
*
C SELECT
C EmpTyp WHENEQ ’C’
C EmpTyp OREQ ’T’
C Z-ADD 0 Days
C EmpTyp WHENEQ ’R’
*
* When the employee type is ’R’, the days off depend also on the
* number of years of employment. The base number of days is 14.
* For less than 2 years, no extra days are added. Between 2 and
* 5 years, 5 extra days are added. Between 6 and 10 years, 10
* extra days are added, and over 10 years, 20 extra days are added.
*
C Z-ADD 14 Days
* Nested select group.
C SELECT
C Years WHENLT 2
C Years WHENLE 5
C ADD 5 Days
C Years WHENLE 10
C ADD 10 Days
C OTHER
C ADD 20 Days
C ENDSL
* End of nested select group.
C EmpTyp WHENEQ ’S’
C Z-ADD 5 Days
C ENDSL
Figure 344. WHENxx Operation (Part 1 of 2)

*--------------------------------------------------------------------
* Example of a SELECT group with complex WHENxx expressions. Assume
* that a record and an action code have been entered by a user.
* Select one of the following:
* - When F3 has been pressed, do subroutine QUIT.
* - When action code(Acode) A (add) was entered and the record
* does not exist (*IN50=1), write the record.
* - When action code A is entered, the record exists, and the
* active record code for the record is D (deleted); update
* the record with active rec code=A. When action code D is
* entered, the record exists, and the action code in the
* record (AcRec) code is A; mark the record as deleted.
* - When action code is C (change), the record exists, and the
* action code in the record (AcRec) code is A; update the record.
* - Otherwise, do error processing.
*--------------------------------------------------------------------
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
C RSCDE CHAIN FILE 50
C SELECT
C *INKC WHENEQ *ON
C EXSR QUIT
C Acode WHENEQ ’A’
C *IN50 ANDEQ *ON
C WRITE REC
C Acode WHENEQ ’A’
C *IN50 ANDEQ *OFF
C AcRec ANDEQ ’D’
C Acode OREQ ’D’
C *IN50 ANDEQ *OFF
C AcRec ANDEQ ’A’
C MOVE Acode AcRec
C UPDATE REC
C Acode WHENEQ ’C’
C *IN50 ANDEQ *OFF
C AcRec ANDEQ ’A’
C UPDATE REC
C OTHER
C EXSR ERROR
C ENDSL
Figure 344. WHENxx Operation (Part 2 of 2)

WRITE (Create New Records)

Free-Form Syntax WRITE{(E)} name {data-structure}

WRITE (E) name (file or record format) data-structure _ ER EOF
The WRITE operation writes a new record to a file.
| The name operand must be the name of a file or record format. A record format
| name is allowed only with an externally described file. A file name is required
| with a program described file.
| If the data-structure operand is specified, the record is written directly from the
| data structure to the file. If name refers to a program described file (identified by
| an F in position 22 of the file description specification), the data structure is
| required and can be any data structure of the same length as the file’s declared
| record length. If name refers to an externally-described file or a record format from
| an externally described file, the data structure must be a data structure defined
| with EXTNAME(...:*OUTPUT) or LIKEREC(...:*OUTPUT).
To handle WRITE exceptions (file status codes greater than 1000), either the
An error occurs if overflow is reached to an externally described print file and no
overflow indicator has been specified on the File description specification. For
more information on error handling, see “File Exception/Errors” on page 65.
You can specify an indicator in positions 75-76 to signal whether an end of file
occurred (subfile is filled) on the WRITE operation. The indicator is set on (an EOF
condition) or off every time the WRITE operation is performed. This information
can also be obtained from the %EOF built-in function, which returns ’1’ if an EOF
condition occurs and ’0’ otherwise.
When using the WRITE operation remember:

v When name is a record format name, the current values in the program for all
the fields in the record definition are used to construct the record.
v When records that use relative record numbers are written to a file, you must
update the field name specified on the RECNO File specification keyword
(relative record number), so it contains the relative record number of the record
to be written.
v When you use the WRITE operation to add records to a DISK file, you must
specify an A in position 20 of the file description specifications. (See “Position 20
(File Addition)” on page 261.)
v Device dependent functions are limited. For example, if a ″WRITE″ is issued to a
″PRINTER″ device, the space after will be set to 1 if the keyword PRTCTL is not
specified on the file specification (normally spacing or skipping information are
specified in columns 41 through 51 of the output specifications). If the file is
externally described, these functions are part of the external description.
v For a multiple device file, data is written to the program device named in the
field name specified with the DEVID keyword on the file description

specifications. (See “DEVID(fieldname)” on page 270.) If the DEVID keyword is
not specified, data is written to the program device for which the last successful
input operation was processed.
See “Database Null Value Support” on page 206 for information on adding records
with null-capable fields containing null values.
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
* The WRITE operation writes the fields in the data structure
* DS1 to the file, FILE1.
*
C WRITE FILE1 DS1
Figure 345. WRITE Operation

XFOOT (Summing the Elements of an Array)
XFOOT (Summing the Elements of an Array)

Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the %XFOOT built-in function)

XFOOT (H) Array name Sum + − Z
XFOOT adds the elements of an array together and places the sum into the field
specified as the result field. Factor 2 contains the name of the array.
If half-adjust is specified, the rounding occurs after all elements are summed and
before the results are moved into the result field. If the result field is an element of
the array specified in factor 2, the value of the element before the XFOOT
operation is used to calculate the total of the array.
If the array is float, XFOOT will be performed as follows: When the array is in
descending sequence, the elements will be added together in reverse order.
Otherwise, the elements will be added together starting with the first elements of
the array.
For further rules for the XFOOT operation, see “Arithmetic Operations” on
page 380.
See Figure 146 on page 383 for an example of the XFOOT operation.

XLATE (Translate)
XLATE (Translate)
Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the %XLATE built-in function)

XLATE (E P) From:To Source-String:start Target String _ ER _
Characters in the source string (factor 2) are translated according to the From and
To strings (both in factor 1) and put into a receiver field (result field). Source
characters with a match in the From string are translated to corresponding
characters in the To string. The From, To, Source, and Target strings must be of the
same type, either all character, all graphic, or all UCS-2. As well, their CCSIDs
must be the same, unless one of the CCSIDs is 65535, or in the case of graphic
fields, CCSID(*GRAPH : *IGNORE) was specified on the Control Specification.
XLATE starts translating the source at the location specified in factor 2 and
continues character by character, from left to right. If a character of the source
string exists in the From string, the corresponding character in the To string is
placed in the result field. Any characters in the source field before the starting
position are placed unchanged in the result field.
Factor 1 must contain the From string, followed by a colon, followed by the To
string. The From and To strings can contain one of the following: a field name,
array element, named constant, data structure name, literal, or table name.
Factor 2 must contain either the source string or the source string followed by a
colon and the start location. The source string portion of factor 2 can contain one
of the following: a field name, array element, named constant, data structure name,
data structure subfield, literal, or table name. If the operation uses graphic or
UCS-2 data, the start position refers to double-byte characters. The start location
portion of factor 2 must be numeric with no decimal positions and can be a named
constant, array element, field name, literal, or table name. If no start location is
specified, a value of 1 is used.
The result field can be a field, array element, data structure, or table. The length of
the result field should be as large as the source string specified in factor 2. If the
result field is larger than the source string, the result will be left adjusted. If the
result field is shorter than the source string, the result field will contain the
leftmost part of the translated source. If the result field is variable-length, its length
does not change.
If a character in the From string is duplicated, the first occurrence (leftmost) is

used.
Note: Figurative constants cannot be used in factor 1, factor 2, or result fields. No

overlapping in a data structure is allowed for factor 1 and the result field, or
factor 2 and the result field.
Any valid indicator can be specified in columns 7 to 11.
If factor 2 is shorter than the result field, a P specified in the operation extender
position indicates that the result field should be padded on the right with blanks

XLATE (Translate)
after the translation. If the result field is graphic and P is specified, graphic blanks
will be used. If the result field is UCS-2 and P is specified, UCS-2 blanks will be
used.
To handle XLATE exceptions (program status code 100), either the operation code
Columns 75-76 must be blank.
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
*
* The following translates the blank in NUMBER to ’-’. The result
* in RESULT will be ’999-9999’.
*
C MOVE ’999 9999’ Number 8
C ’ ’:’-’ XLATE Number Result 8
Figure 346. XLATE Operation
*...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...+....
D Up C ’ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRS-
D ’TUVWXYZ’
D Lo C ’abcdefghijklmnopqrs-
’tuvwxyz’
*
* In the following example, all values in STRING are translated to
* uppercase. As a result, RESULT=’RPG DEPT’.
*
C MOVE ’rpg dept’ String 8
C Lo:Up XLATE String Result
*
* In the following example only part of the string is translated
* to lowercase. As a result, RESULT=’RPG Dept’.
*
C Up:Lo XLATE String:6 Result
Figure 347. XLATE Operation With Named Constants

Z-ADD (Zero and Add)
Z-ADD (Zero and Add)

|| Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the EVAL operation code)
|

Z-ADD (H) Addend Sum + − Z
Factor 2 is added to a field of zeros. The sum is placed in the result field. Factor 1
is not used. Factor 2 must be numeric and can contain one of: an array, array
element, field, figurative constant, literal, named constant, subfield, or table name.
field, subfield, or table name.
Half-adjust can be specified.
For the rules for the Z-ADD operation, see “Arithmetic Operations” on page 380.
See Figure 146 on page 383 for an example of the Z-ADD operation.

Z-SUB (Zero and Subtract)
Z-SUB (Zero and Subtract)

|| Free-Form Syntax (not allowed - use the EVAL operation code)
|

Z-SUB (H) Subtrahend Difference + − Z
Factor 2 is subtracted from a field of zeros. The difference, which is the negative of
factor 2, is placed in the result field. You can use the operation to change the sign
of a field. Factor 1 is not used. Factor 2 must be numeric and can contain one of
the following: an array, array element, field, figurative constant, literal, named
constant, subfield, or table name.
The result field must be numeric, and can contain one of the following: an array,
array element, field, subfield, or table name.
Half-adjust can be specified.
For the rules for the Z-SUB operation, see “Arithmetic Operations” on page 380.
See Figure 146 on page 383 for an example of the Z-SUB operation.

Part 5. Appendixes

Appendix A. RPG IV Restrictions
Function Restriction
Array/table input record length for compile Maximum length is 100
time
Character field length Maximum length is 65535 bytes
Graphic or UCS-2 field length Maximum length is 32766 bytes
Control fields (position 63 and 64 of input Maximum length is 256
specifications) length
Named data structure length Maximum of 65535
Unnamed data structure length Maximum of 9999999
Data structure occurrences (number of) Maximum of 32767 per data structure
Edit Word Maximum length of 115 for literals and 24
for named constants
Elements in an array/table (DIM keyword Maximum of 32767 per array/table
on the definition specifications)
Levels of nesting in structured groups Maximum of 100
Levels of nesting in expressions Maximum of 100
Look-ahead Can be specified only once for a file. Can be
specified only for primary and secondary
files.
| Named Constant or Literal Maximum length of 1024 bytes for a
| character, hexadecimal, graphic, or UCS-2
| literal and 31 digits with 31 decimal
| positions for a numeric literal.
Overflow indicator Only 1 unique overflow indicator can be
specified per printer file.
Parameters to programs Maximum of 255
Parameters to procedures Maximum of 399
Primary file (P in position 18 of file Maximum of 1 per program
description specifications)
Printer file (PRINTER in positions 36 Maximum of 8 per program.
through 42 of file description specifications)
Printing lines per page Minimum of 2; maximum of 255
Program status data structure Only 1 allowed per program.
Record address file (R in position 18 of file Only 1 allowed per program.
description specifications)
1
Record length for a file Maximum length is 99999
Structured groups (see levels of nesting)
2
Storage allocation Maximum length is 16776704
Symbolic names Maximum length is 4096
Notes:
1. Any device record size restraints override this value.
2. The practical maximum is normally much less.

Appendix B. EBCDIC Collating Sequence
Table 62. EBCDIC Collating Sequence
Decimal Hex
Ordinal Represen- Represen-
Number Symbol Meaning tation tation
65 Space 64 40
.
.
.
75 ¢ Cent sign 74 4A
76 . Period, decimal point 75 4B
77 < Less than sign 76 4C
78 ( Left parenthesis 77 4D
79 + Plus sign 78 4E
80 | Vertical bar, Logical OR 79 4F
81 & Ampersand 80 50
.
.
.
91 ! Exclamation point 90 5A
92 $ Dollar sign 91 5B
93 * Asterisk 92 5C
94 ) Right parenthesis 93 5D
95 ; Semicolon 94 5E
96 ¬ Logical NOT 95 5F
97 - Minus, hyphen 96 60
98 / Slash 97 61
.
.
.
107 ¦ Split vertical bar 106 6A
108 , Comma 107 6B
109 % Percent sign 108 6C
110 _ Underscore 109 6D
111 > Greater than sign 110 6E
112 ? Question mark 111 6F
.
.
.
122 ` Accent grave 121 79
123 : Colon 122 7A
124 # Number sign, pound sign 123 7B
125 @ At sign 124 7C

Table 62. EBCDIC Collating Sequence (continued)
Decimal Hex
126 ’ Apostrophe, prime sign 125 7D
127 = Equal sign 126 7E
128 " Quotation marks 127 7F
.
.
.
130 a 129 81
131 b 130 82
132 c 131 83
133 d 132 84
134 e 133 85
135 f 134 86
136 g 135 87
137 h 136 88
138 i 137 89
.
.
.
146 j 145 91
147 k 146 92
148 l 147 93
149 m 148 94
150 n 149 95
151 o 150 96
152 p 151 97
153 q 152 98
154 r 153 99
.
.
.
162 ~ Tilde 161 A1
163 s 162 A2
164 t 163 A3
165 u 164 A4
166 v 165 A5
167 w 166 A6
168 x 167 A7
169 y 168 A8
170 z 169 A9

Decimal Hex
.
.
.
193 { Left brace 192 C0
194 A 193 C1
195 B 194 C2
196 C 195 C3
197 D 196 C4
198 E 197 C5
199 F 198 C6
200 G 199 C7
201 H 200 C8
202 I 201 C9
.
.
.
209 } Right brace 208 D0
210 J 209 D1
211 K 210 D2
212 L 211 D3
213 M 212 D4
214 N 213 D5
215 O 214 D6
216 P 215 D7
217 Q 216 D8
218 R 217 D9
.
.
.
225 \ Left slash 224 E0
.
.
.
227 S 226 E2
228 T 227 E3
229 U 228 E4
230 V 229 E5
231 W 230 E6
232 X 231 E7
233 Y 232 E8
234 Z 233 E9
Appendix B. EBCDIC Collating Sequence 763

Decimal Hex
.
.
.
241 0 240 F0
242 1 241 F1
243 2 242 F2
244 3 243 F3
245 4 244 F4
246 5 245 F5
247 6 246 F6
248 7 247 F7
249 8 248 F8
250 9 249 F9
Note: These symbols may not be the same for all codepages. Codepages may map
different hexadecimal values to different symbols for various languages. For more
information, see the iSeries Information Center globalization topic.

Bibliography
For additional information about topics related to binding, running programs, debugging
ILE RPG programming, refer to the following programs, and handling exceptions.
publications: v WebSphere Development Studio: ILE RPG
v CL Programming, SC41-5721-05, provides a Programmer’s Guide, SC09-2507-04, provides
wide-ranging discussion of programming topics information about the ILE RPG programming
including a general discussion on objects and language, which is an implementation of the
libraries, CL programming, controlling flow RPG IV language in the Integrated Language
and communicating between programs, Environment (ILE). It includes information on
working with objects in CL programs, and creating and running programs, with
creating CL programs. Other topics include considerations for procedure calls and
predefined and impromptu messages and interlanguage programming. The guide also
message handling, defining and creating covers debugging and exception handling and
user-defined commands and menus, application explains how to use files and devices in RPG
testing, including debug mode, breakpoints, programs. Appendixes include information on
traces, and display functions. migration to RPG IV and sample compiler
See the iSeries Information Center listings. It is intended for people with a basic
programming category (URL understanding of data processing concepts and
http://www.ibm.com/eserver/iseries/infocenter) of the RPG language.
for a description of the OS/400 control v WebSphere Development Studio: ILE RPG
language (CL) and its commands. Reference Summary, SX09-1315-03, provides
v Communications Management, SC41-5406-02, information about the RPG III and RPG IV
provides information about work management programming language. This manual contains
in a communications environment, tables and lists for all specifications and
communications status, tracing and diagnosing operations in both languages. A key is provided
communications problems, error handling and to map RPG III specifications and operations to
recovery, performance, and specific line speed RPG IV specifications and operations.
and subsystem storage information. v Who Knew You Could Do That with RPG IV? A
See the iSeries Information Center database and Sorcerer’s Guide to System Access and More,
file systems category for related database SG24-5402 provides hints and tips for system
programming topics such as, using files in programmers who want to take full advantage
application programs, database organization, of RPG IV and the Integrated Language
data description specifications (DDS) and DDS Environment (ILE).
keywords, distributed data management
(DDM), and application programming If you have internet access, you can obtain
interfaces. current iSeries and AS/400e information and
publications from the following Web site:
v Experience RPG IV Multimedia Tutorial,
http://www.ibm.com/eserver/iseries/infocenter
GK2T-9882-00 is an interactive self-study
program explaining the differences between
For the PDF version of iSeries publications, refer
RPG III and RPG IV and how to work within
to the CD ROM iSeries Information Center:
the new ILE environment. An accompanying
Supplemental Manuals, SK3T-4092-01.
workbook provides additional exercises and
doubles as a reference upon completion of the
tutorial. ILE RPG code examples are shipped
with the tutorial and run directly on the
operating system.
v ILE Concepts, SC41-5606-06, explains concepts
and terminology pertaining to the Integrated
Language Environment (ILE) architecture.
Topics covered include creating modules,

Notices
This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A.
IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in
other countries. Consult your local IBM representative for information on the
products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an IBM
product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM
product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product,
program, or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may
be used instead. However, it is the user’s responsibility to evaluate and verify the
operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service.
IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter
described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you
any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:
IBM Director of Licensing
IBM Corporation
North Castle Drive
Armonk, NY 10504-1785
U.S.A.
| For license inquiries regarding double-byte (DBCS) information, contact the IBM
| Intellectual Property Department in your country or send inquiries, in writing, to:
| IBM World Trade Asia Corporation
| Licensing
| 2-31 Roppongi 3-chome, Minato-ku
| Tokyo 106, Japan
| The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other
country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS
PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or
implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply
to you.
This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.

Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be
incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements
and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this
publication at any time without notice.
Any references in this information to non-IBM Web sites are provided for
convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web
sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this IBM
product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk.
IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it
believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.

Licensees of this program who wish to have information about it for the purpose
of enabling: (i) the exchange of information between independently created
programs and other programs (including this one) and (ii) the mutual use of the
information which has been exchanged, should contact:
| Markham, Ontario L6G 1C7
| Canada
Such information may be available, subject to appropriate terms and conditions,

including in some cases, payment of a fee.
The licensed program described in this information and all licensed material
available for it are provided by IBM under terms of the IBM Customer Agreement,
IBM International Program License Agreement, or any equivalent agreement
between us.
This information contains examples of data and reports used in daily business
operations. To illustrate them as completely as possible, the examples include the
names of individuals, companies, brands, and products. All of these names are
fictitious and any similarity to the names and addresses used by an actual business
enterprise is entirely coincidental.
COPYRIGHT LICENSE:
This information contains sample application programs in source language, which

illustrates programming techniques on various operating platforms. You may copy,
modify, and distribute these sample programs in any form without payment to
IBM, for the purposes of developing, using, marketing or distributing application
programs conforming to the application programming interface for the operating
platform for which the sample programs are written. These examples have not
been thoroughly tested under all conditions. IBM, therefore, cannot guarantee or
imply reliability, serviceability, or function of these programs. You may copy,
modify, and distribute these sample programs in any form without payment to
IBM for the purposes of developing, using, marketing, or distributing application
programs conforming to IBM’s application programming interfaces.
Programming Interface Information

This publication is intended to help you create programs using RPG IV source.
This publication documents General-Use Programming Interface and Associated
Guidance Information provided by the ILE RPG compiler.
General-Use programming interfaces allow the customer to write programs that

obtain the services of the ILE RPG compiler.

Trademarks and Service Marks
The following terms are trademarks of the International Business Machines
Corporation in the United States or other countries or both:
Application System/400 iSeries

AS/400 Operating System/400
AS/400e OS/400
DB2 PROFS
e (Stylized) RPG/400
IBM System/36
IBMLink WebSphere
Integrated Language Environment 400
Domino is a trademark of the Lotus Development Corporation in the United

States, or other countries, or both.
Java and all Java-based trademarks are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the
United States, other countries, or both.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other
countries.
Other company, product, and service names may be the trademarks or service
marks of others.
Notices 769
Index
Special Characters *EQUATE 113
*EXT 580
*TOTC
flowchart 24
/ (division) 424 *EXTDFT program exception/errors 80
/COPY statement initialization, externally described *TOTL
inserting records during data 301 file exception/error subroutine
ompilation 12 *FILE 112 (INFSR) 80
recognizing a compiler 13 *GETIN flowchart 24
/DEFINE 15 file exception/error subroutine program exception/errors 83
/EJECT 11 (INFSR) 80 *USER
/ELSE 18 flowchart 22 initialization, character fields 302
/ELSEIF condition-expression 18 program exception/errors 83 with USRPRF keyword 256
/END-FREE 11 *HIVAL 126 *VAR data attribute
/ENDIF 18 *IN 60 output specification 328, 358
/EOF 19 *IN(xx) 60 *YEAR 7
/FREE 11 *INIT 83 *ZERO/*ZEROS 126
/IF condition-expression 17 *INxx 60 − (unary operator) 423
/INCLUDE statement 12 *INZSR 28 %ABS (Absolute Value of
/SPACE 12 *JOB Expression) 435
/TITLE 11 initialization, date fields 302 %ADDR (Get Address of Variable)
/UNDEFINE 15 language identifier, LANGID 251 data types supported 424
$ (fixed or floating currency symbol) sort sequence, SRTSEQ 253 description 436
in body of edit word 222 *JOBRUN example 436
use in edit word 222 date format example 630 %ALLOC (Allocate Storage) 438
with combination edit codes 213 date format, DATFMT 194 %BITAND (Bitwise AND Operation) 439
* (asterisk) date separator, DATSEP 194 %BITNOT (Invert Bits) 440
in body of edit word 222 decimal format, DECFMT 246 %BITOR (Bitwise OR Operation) 441
with combination edit codes 213 language identifier, LANGID 183, %BITXOR (Bitwise Exclusive-OR
* (multiplication) 424 251 Operation) 442
* (pointer data type entry) 286 sort sequence, SRTSEQ 153, 253 %CHAR (Convert to Character
** (double asterisk) time separator, TIMSEP 197 Data) 444
alternate collating sequence table 183 *LDA 568 %CHECK (Check Characters) 446
arrays and tables 153 *LIKE DEFINE 566 %CHECKR (Check Reverse) 448
file translation table 111 *LONGJUL date format %DATE (Convert to Date) 450
for program described files 324 description 194 %DAYS (Number of Days) 451
lookahead fields 324 with MOVE operation 405, 629, 650 %DEC (Convert to Packed Decimal
*ALL 361 with MOVEL operation 405 Format) 452
*ALL’x..’ 126 with TEST operation 733 %DECH (Convert to Packed Decimal
*ALLG’oK1K2i’ 126 *LOVAL 126 Format with Half Adjust) 452
*ALLX’x1..’ 126 *M 580 %DECPOS (Get Number of Decimal
*BLANK/*BLANKS 126 *MONTH 7 Positions)
*CANCL 24, 80 *NOIND 274 description 454
*CYMD, *CMDY, and *CDMY date *NOKEY (with CLEAR operation) 557 example 454, 476
formats *NOKEY (with RESET operation) 696 %DIFF (Difference Between Two Date or
description 194 *NULL 126, 200 Time Values) 455
with MOVE operation 405, 629, 650 *OFL %DIV (Return Integer Portion of
with MOVEL operation 405 file exception/error subroutine Quotient) 456
with TEST operation 733 (INFSR) 80 %EDITC (Edit Value Using an
*DATE 7 flowchart 24 Editcode) 457
*DAY 7 program exception/errors 83 %EDITFLT (Convert to Float External
*DETC *ON/*OFF 126 Representation) 460
file exception/error subroutine *PDA 568 %EDITW (Edit Value Using an
(INFSR) 80 *PLACE 354 Editword) 461
flowchart 24 *PSSR 91 %ELEM (Get Number of Elements) 424,
program exception/errors 83 *ROUTINE 389 462
*DETL *START 716 %EOF (Return End or Beginning of File
file exception/error subroutine *SYS Condition) 463
(INFSR) 80 initialization 302 %EQUAL (Return Exact Match
flowchart 22 initialization, date field 195 Condition) 465
program exception/errors 83 initialization, time field 197 %ERROR (Return Error Condition) 467
*DTAARA DEFINE 568 initialization, timestamp field 198 %FIELDS (Fields to update) 468
*END 716 *TERM 83
*ENTRY PLIST 676

%FLOAT (Convert to Floating > (greater than) 424 alternate collating sequence
Format) 469 >= (greater than or equal) 424 changing collating sequence 183
%FOUND (Return Found < (less than) 424 coding form 182
Condition) 470 <> (not equal) 424 control specification entry 182
%GRAPH (Convert to Graphic <= (less than or equal) 424 control specification keyword
Value) 472 & (ampersand) ALTSEQ 288
%HOURS (Number of Hours) 473 in body of edit word 224 control-specification keyword
%INT (Convert to Integer Format) 474 in status of edit word 221 ALTSEQ 241
%INTH (Convert to Integer Format with use in edit word 221, 224 definition specification keyword
Half Adjust) 474 + (unary operator) 423 ALTSEQ 182
%KDS (Search Arguments in Data = (equal) 424 input record format 183
Structure) 475 operations affected 182
%LEN (Get Length) 476 alternating format (arrays and tables)
%LOOKUPxx (Look Up an Array
Element) 479
Numerics definition specification keyword
ALT 288
1P (first page) indicator
%MINUTES (Number of Minutes) 481 example 157
conditioning output 351, 354
%MONTHS (Number of Months) 482 ALTSEQ keyword
general description 48
%MSECONDS (Number of **ALTSEQ 152, 183
restrictions 48
Microseconds) 483 changing collating sequence 182
setting 63
%NULLIND (Query or Set Null control-specification description 241
with initialization subroutine
Indicator) 484 definition specification
(*INZSR) 28
%OCCUR (Set/Get Occurrence of a Data description 288
Structure) 485 specifying in source 183
%OPEN (Return File Open ALWNULL keyword 241
Condition) 486 A ALWNULL parameter
%PADDR (Get Procedure Address) 424, absolute notation 131, 285 specifying on control
487 absolute value 435 specifications 241
%PARMS (Return Number of ACQ (acquire) operation code 397, 524 ampersand (&)
Parameters) 489 ACTGRP keyword 241 in body of edit word 224
%REALLOC (Reallocate Storage) 491 ACTGRP parameter in status of edit word 221
%REM (Return Integer Remainder) 492 specifying on control use in edit word 221, 224
%REPLACE (Replace Character specifications 241 AND relationship
String) 493 ADD operation code 380, 525 calculation specifications 339
%SCAN (Scan for Characters) 495 add records input specifications 327
%SECONDS (Number of Seconds) 496 file description specifications entry output specifications 348, 359
%SHTDN (Shut Down) 497 (A) 261 conditioning indicators 351
%SIZE (Get Size in Bytes) 424, 498 output specification entry (ADD) 349 ANDxx operation code 390, 411, 529
%SQRT (Square Root of Expression) 500 ADDDUR (add duration) operation code apostrophe
%STATUS (Return File or Program adding dates 393, 526 use with edit word 225
Status) 501 general discussion 393 use with output constant 358
%STR (Get or Store Null-Terminated unexpected results 395 application programming interface (API)
String) 504 adding date-time durations 393, 526 parsing system built-in names 389
%SUBDT (Subset of Date or Time) 507 adding factors 525, 526 arithmetic built-in functions
%SUBST (Get Substring) address %ABS (Absolute Value of
data types supported 424 of based variable 436 Expression) 435
description 508 of procedure pointer 487 %DIV (Return Integer Portion of
example 509 ALIGN keyword Quotient) 456
use with EVAL 508 aligning subfields 131 %REM (Return Integer
%THIS (Return Class Instance for Native description 288 Remainder) 492
Method) 510 float fields 186 %SQRT (Square Root of
%TIME (Convert to Time) 511 integer fields 187 Expression) 500
%TIMESTAMP (Convert to unsigned fields 189 %XFOOT (Sum Array Expression
Timestamp) 512 alignment Elements) 519
%TLOOKUPxx (Look Up a Table of basing pointers 200 arithmetic operation codes
Element) 513 of integer fields 189 ADD 380, 525
%TRIM (Trim Blanks at Edges) 424, 514 alignment of forms 250 DIV (divide) 380, 571
%TRIML (Trim Leading Blanks) 424, 515 ALLOC (allocate storage) operation ensuring accuracy 381
%TRIMR (Trim Trailing Blanks) 424, 516 code 401, 528 general information 380
%UCS2 (Convert to UCS-2 Value) 517 allocate storage (ALLOC) operation integer arithmetic 382
%UNS (Convert to Unsigned code 528 MULT (multiply) 380, 660
Format) 518 allocating storage 438, 528 MVR (move remainder) 380, 661
%UNSH (Convert to Unsigned Format allocation built-in functions performance considerations 382
with Half Adjust) 518 %ALLOC (Allocate Storage) 438 SQRT (square root) 380, 724
%XFOOT (Sum Array Expression %REALLOC (Reallocate Storage) 491 SUB (subtract) 380, 725
Elements) 519 ALT keyword 288 XFOOT (summing the elements of an
%XLATE (Translate) 520 altering overflow logic 29 array) 380, 752
%YEARS (Number of Years) 521 Z-ADD (zero and add) 380, 755

arithmetic operation codes (continued) array operations (continued) blank after
Z-SUB (zero and subtract) 380, 756 MOVEA (move array) 383, 643 definition 355
array SORTA (sort an array) 383, 722 output specifications 355
%XFOOT built-in 519 XFOOT (summing the elements of an blanks, removing from a string 514
alternating array) 383, 752 BLOCK keyword 268
definition 157 ASCEND keyword 289 blocking/unblocking records 76
examples 157 ascending sequence BNDDIR keyword 243
binary format 184 definition specification keyword BNDDIR parameter on CRTBNDRPG
combined array file 152, 259 ASCEND 289 specifying on control
compile-time file description specifications specifications 243
arrangement in source entry 262 body (of an edit word) 221
program 155 assigning match field values branching operations 385
definition of 152 (M1-M9) 104 CABxx (compare and branch) 385,
creating input records 152 asterisk fill 535
definition 149 in body of edit word 215 ENDSR (end of subroutine) 589
differences from table 149 with combination edit codes 215 EXCEPT (calculation time
editing 162 AUT keyword 242 output) 593
elements 149 AUT parameter general description 385
end position 356 specifying on control GOTO (go to) 385, 605
even number of digits 315 specifications 242 ITER (iterate) 385, 612
file automatic storage 119 LEAVE (leave a structured
description of 260 group) 385, 617
file description specifications TAG (tag) 385, 732
entry 260
file name (when required on file
B branching within logic cycle 535
built-in functions
BASED keyword 289
description specifications) 258 %FIELDS (Fields to update) 468
based variable
float format 185 %KDS (Search Arguments in Data
address of 436
initialization of 156 Structure) 475
and basing pointers 199, 201
loading allocation
defining 289
compile-time 152 %ALLOC (Allocate Storage) 438
begin a select group (SELECT) operation
from more than one record 151 %REALLOC (Reallocate
code 709
from one record 151 Storage) 491
begin/end entry in procedure
LOOKUP operation code 620 arithmetic
specification 364
prerun-time 155 %ABS (Absolute Value of
BEGSR (beginning of subroutine)
run-time 150 Expression) 435
operation code 414, 530
lookup 479 %DIV (Return Integer Portion of
bibliography 765
moving (MOVEA operation Quotient) 456
binary field
code) 643 %REM (Return Integer
definition 184
name Remainder) 492
EXTBININT keyword 248
in compare operation codes 391 %SQRT (Square Root of
input specifications 184, 328
output specifications 354 Expression) 500
output specifications 185, 357
rules for 154 %XFOOT (Sum Array Expression
binary format
number of elements 292, 462 Elements) 519
definition 184
order in source program 155 bit manipulation
input field 329
output 162 %BITAND 439
input field specification 184
packed format 187 %BITNOT 440
output field 357
prerun-time arrays 152 %BITOR 441
output field specification 184
rules for loading 155 %BITXOR 442
binary operations
referring to in calculations 160 data conversion
data types supported 424
run-time %CHAR (Convert to Character
precedence of operators 421
definition of 150 Data) 444
binary operators 531, 533
rules for loading 150 %DATE (Convert to Date) 450
binary relative-record number 267
with consecutive elements 152 %DEC (Convert to Packed Decimal
bit operations
with scattered elements 151 Format) 452
%BITAND 439
searching with an index 159 %DECH (Convert to Packed
%BITNOT 440
searching without an index 158 Decimal Format with Half
%BITOR 441
size of 498 Adjust) 452
%BITXOR 442
square root (SQRT) operation %EDITC (Edit Value Using an
BITOFF (set bits off) 384, 531
code 724 Editcode) 457
BITON (set bits on) 533
summing elements of (XFOOT) %EDITFLT (Convert to Float
BITON operation code 384
operation code 752 External Representation) 460
general information 384
to file name 277 %EDITW (Edit Value Using an
TESTB (test bit) 384, 735
types 149 Editword) 461
bit testing (TESTB) 735
XFOOT operation code 752 %FLOAT (Convert to Floating
BITOFF (set bits off) operation code 531
array operations 383 Format) 469
BITOFF operation code 384
general information 383 %GRAPH (Convert to Graphic
BITON (set bits on) operation code 533
LOOKUP (look up) 383, 620 Value) 472
BITON operation code 384
Index 773
built-in functions (continued) built-in functions (continued) calculation (continued)
data conversion (continued) feedback (continued) subroutines (continued)
%INT (Convert to Integer %NULLIND (Query or Set Null EXSR (invoke subroutine)
Format) 474 Indicator) 484 operation code 597
%INTH (Convert to Integer Format %OPEN (Return File Open SR identifier 339
with Half Adjust) 474 Condition) 486 calculation specifications
%TIME (Convert to Time) 511 %PARMS (Return Number of control level 338
%TIMESTAMP (Convert to Parameters) 489 decimal positions 342
Timestamp) 512 %SHTDN (Shut Down) 497 extended factor 2 field
%UCS2 (Convert to UCS-2 %STATUS (Return File or Program continuation 236
Value) 517 Status) 501 factor 1 340
%UNS (Convert to Unsigned %TLOOKUPxx (Look Up a Table factor 2 341
Format) 518 Element) 513 field length 342
%UNSH (Convert to Unsigned list of 435 free-form 236, 345
Format with Half Adjust) 518 on definition specification 281 general description 337
%XLATE (Translate) 520 pointer indicators 340
data information %ADDR (Get Address of operation 340, 344
%DECPOS (Get Number of Variable) 436 operation extender 340, 344
Decimal Positions) 454 %PADDR (Get Procedure result field 342
%ELEM (Get Number of Address) 487 resulting indicators 342
Elements) 462 string summary of 337
%LEN (Get Length) 476 %CHECK (Check Characters) 446 calculation-time output (EXCEPT)
%OCCUR (Set/Get Occurrence of %CHECKR (Check Reverse) 448 operation code 593
a Data Structure) 485 %REPLACE (Replace Character CALL (call a program) operation code
%SIZE (Get Size in Bytes) 498 String) 493 call operations 385
data types supported 424 %SCAN (Scan for Characters) 495 description 537
date and time %STR (Get or Store call operations
%DAYS (Number of Days) 451 Null-Terminated String) 504 CALL (call a program) 385, 537
%DIFF (Difference Between Two %SUBST (Get Substring) 508 CALLB (call a bound
Date or Time Values) 455 %TRIM (Trim Blanks at procedure) 385, 538
%HOURS (Number of Edges) 514 CALLP (call a prototyped
Hours) 473 %TRIML (Trim Leading procedure) 385, 539
%MINUTES (Number of Blanks) 515 FREE (deactivate a program) 385
Minutes) 481 %TRIMR (Trim Trailing general description 385
%MONTHS (Number of Blanks) 516 PARM (identify parameters) 385, 673
Months) 482 syntax 435 parsing program names 387
%MSECONDS (Number of table of 377 parsing system built-in names 389
Microseconds) 483 PLIST (identify a parameter list) 385,
%SECONDS (Number of 676
Seconds) 496
%SUBDT (Subset of Date or
C RETURN (return to caller) 385, 702
CALLB (call a bound procedure)
CABxx (compare and branch) operation
Time) 507 operation code
code 385, 390, 535
%YEARS (Number of Years) 521 call operations 385
calculating 231
editing description 538
calculating date durations 393
%EDITC (Edit Value Using an calling programs/procedures
calculating date-time durations 727
Editcode) 457 operational descriptors 387
calculation
%EDITFLT (Convert to Float prototyped call 386
indicators
External Representation) 460 CALLP (call a prototyped program or
AND/OR relationship 55, 339
%EDITW (Edit Value Using an procedure) operation code
conditioning 55, 337
Editword) 461 call operations 385
control level 54, 339
example 376 description 539
resulting 46, 342
exception/error handling with expressions 419
operation codes 340, 344
%ERROR (Return Error CASxx (conditionally invoke subroutine)
summary of 369
Condition) 467 operation code 390, 414, 543
specifications
%STATUS (Return File or Program CAT (concatenate two character strings)
entries for factor 1 340
Status) 501 operation code 409, 545
entries for result field 342
feedback CCSID keyword, control
relationship between positions 7
%EOF (Return End or Beginning of specification 243
and 8 and 9-11 339
File Condition) 463 CCSID keyword, definition
summary of 337
%EQUAL (Return Exact Match specification 290
summary of operation codes 369
Condition) 465 CCSIDs
subroutines
%ERROR (Return Error on control specification 243
BEGSR (beginning of subroutine)
Condition) 467 on definition specification 290
operation code 530
%FOUND (Return Found century formats
coding of 414
Condition) 470 description 194
ENDSR (end of subroutine)
%LOOKUPxx (Look Up an Array with MOVE operation 405, 629, 650
operation code 589
Element) 479 with MOVEL operation 405

century formats (continued) compare and branch (CABxx) operation conditioning indicators (continued)
with TEST operation 733 code 535 calculation (continued)
CHAIN (random retrieval from a file compare operations specification of 340
based on record number or key value) ANDxx (and) 390, 529 file
ope 548 CABxx (compare and branch) 390, general description 50
CHAIN (random retrieval from a file 535 rules for 50
based on record number or key value) CABxx (Compare and Branch) 535 general description 49
operation code 397 CASxx (conditionally invoke conditioning output
changing between character fields and subroutine) 390, 543 explanation of 57
numeric fields 403 CASxx (Conditionally Invoke for fields of a record 353
character format Subroutine) 543 for records 350
allowed formats COMP (compare) 390, 563 CONST keyword
description 170 COMP (Compare) 563 description 290
fixed length 170 DOU (do until) 390, 574 constants 120
indicator 170 DOUxx (do until) 390, 575 constant/editword field
variable length 173 DOW (do while) 390, 577 continuation 237
collating sequence 183 DOWxx (do while) 390, 578 defining using CONST 290
converting to 444 EVAL (evaluate) 590 entries for factor 2 120
definition specification 286 EVALR (evaluate, right adjust) 592 figurative 126
in record identification code 327 general information 390 *ALL’x..’, *ALLX’x1..’,
indicator literals 121 IF (if/then) 390, 607 *BLANK/*BLANKS,
keys in record address type 265 IFxx (if/then) 390, 608 *HIVAL/*LOVAL,
literals 121 ORxx (or) 390, 670 *ZERO/*ZEROS,
replace or insert string 493 WHEN (when true then select) 390 *ON/*OFF 126
valid set 3 When (When) 746 named 125
CHECK (check) operation code 409, 551 whenxx (when true then select) 747 rules for use on output
CHECKR (check reverse) operation WHENxx (when true then select) 390 specification 358
code 409, 554 comparing bits 735 size of 498
CL commands comparing factors 535, 563 continuation rules for specifications 233
Change Job (CHGJOB) command 47 compile time array or table control break
Create Job Description (CRTJOBD) definition specification keyword general description 38
command 47 CTDATA 291 how to avoid unwanted 39
class instance, native method 510 general description 152 on first cycle 38
CLASS keyword, definition number of elements per record 315 unwanted 40
specification 290 rules for loading 152 control entries
CLEAR operation code 120, 400, 557 specifying external data type 295 in output specification 348
CLOSE (close files) operation code 397, compiler control field
561 directives 11 assigning on input specifications
closing a file 561 compiler directives externally described file 334
code part /COPY 12 program described file 330
in record identification code for /EJECT 11 general information 38
program described file 326 /FREE... /END-FREE 11 overlapping 40
coding subroutines 414 /INCLUDE 12 split 43
collating sequence /SPACE 12 control group
alternate 182 /TITLE 11 general information 37
EBCDIC 761 conditional compilation directives control level (L1-L9) indicators 339
normal 182 /DEFINE 15 as field record relation indicator 50,
combination edit codes (1-4, A-D, /ELSE 18 331
J-Q) 214 /ELSEIF condition-expression 18 as record identifying indicator 324,
combined file /ENDIF 18 333
description 259 /EOF 19 assigning to input fields 330, 334
command attention (CA) keys /IF condition-expression 17 conditioning calculations 337
corresponding indicators 53 /UNDEFINE 15 conditioning output 350, 351
command function (CF) keys predefined conditions 16 examples 40, 44
corresponding indicators 53 composite key operation codes general description 37
comments KLIST (define a composite key) 615 in calculation specification 338
* in common entries 232 concatenate two strings (CAT) operation rules for 38
on array input records 152 code 545 setting of 63
COMMIT (commit) operation code 397 condition expressions 17 control specification keywords
description 562 conditional file open 271, 279 ALTSEQ 241
COMMIT keyword conditionally invoke subroutine (CASxx) CCSID 243
description 269 operation code 543 compile-option keywords
commitment control conditioning indicators ACTGRP 241
conditional 269 calculation ALWNULL 241
common entries to all specifications 232 general description 54 AUT 242
COMP (compare) operation code 390, positions 7 and 8 54 BNDDIR 243
563 positions 9 through 11 54 CVTOPT 245
Index 775
control specification keywords (continued) cycle, program (continued) data format
compile-option keywords (continued) with initialization subroutine binary 184
DFTACTGRP 247 (*INZSR) 28 definition specification 286
ENBPFRCOL 248 with lookahead 30 external 295, 357
FIXNBR 249 with match fields 29 float 185
GENLVL 250 with RPG IV exception/error integer 187
INDENT 250 handling 30 internal 167
LANGID 251 packed-decimal 187
OPTIMIZE 252 specifying external character
OPTION 252
PRFDTA 253
D format 169
specifying external date or time
data area data structure
SRTSEQ 253 format 169
TEXT 254 specifying external numeric
statement
TRUNCNBR 255 format 168
externally described 128
USRPRF 256 unsigned 188
program described 128
COPYNEST 244 zoned-decimal 189
data areas
COPYRIGHT 244 data information built-in functions
defining 292, 566, 568
CURSYM 244 %DECPOS (Get Number of Decimal
DFTLEHSPEC data area 239
DATEDIT 245 Positions) 454
local data area (LDA) 568
DATFMT 246 %ELEM (Get Number of
PIP data area (PDA) 566
DEBUG 246 Elements) 462
restrictions 568
DECEDIT 246 %LEN (Get Length) 476
retrieval
DECPREC 247 %OCCUR (Set/Get Occurrence of a
explicit 610
DFTNAM 248 Data Structure) 485
implicit 22, 132
EXPROPTS 248 %SIZE (Get Size in Bytes) 498
RPGLEHSPEC data area 239
EXTBININT 248 data structures
unlocking
FLTDIV 249 alignment of 131
explicit 668
FORMSALIGN 250 array data structure 129
implicit 24, 132
FTRANS 250 data area 132
UNLOCK operation code 742
INTPREC 251 defining 130
writing
NOMAIN 251 definition keyword summary 319
explicit 672
THREAD 254 definition type entry 284
implicit 24, 132
TIMFMT 255 examples 133
data attributes
control specifications externally described 128
input specification 328
continuation line 235 file information 133
output specification 358
data area (DFTLEHSPEC) 239 file information data structure 65
data conversion built-in functions
data area (RPGLEHSPEC) 239 general information 128
%CHAR (Convert to Character
form type 240 indicator 133
Data) 444
general description 239 multiple-occurrence
%DATE (Convert to Date) 450
controlling input of program 31 number of occurrences 306, 462
%DEC (Convert to Packed Decimal
controlling spacing of compiler size of 498
Format) 452
listing 12 nested 132
%DECH (Convert to Packed Decimal
conversion operations overlaying storage 131
Format with Half Adjust) 452
general information 392 printer control 276
%EDITC (Edit Value Using an
converting a character to a date program described 128
Editcode) 457
field 406 program-status 133
%EDITFLT (Convert to Float External
COPYNEST keyword 244 qualified name 316
Representation) 460
COPYRIGHT keyword 244 qualifyied name 129
%EDITW (Edit Value Using an
CR (negative balance symbol) rules 132
Editword) 461
with combination edit code 214 rules for 4
%FLOAT (Convert to Floating
with edit words 224 saving for attached device 277
Format) 469
CTDATA keyword special 132
%GRAPH (Convert to Graphic
**CTDATA 152, 183 subfields
Value) 472
description 291 alignment of 131
%INT (Convert to Integer
currency symbol defining 130, 284
Format) 474
specifying 244 external definition 295
%INTH (Convert to Integer Format
CURSYM keyword 244 name prefixing 128, 275, 316
with Half Adjust) 474
CVTOPT keyword 245 overlaying storage 131, 313
%TIME (Convert to Time) 511
CVTOPT parameter renaming 128, 294
%TIMESTAMP (Convert to
specifying on control type of 283
Timestamp) 512
specifications 245 with OCCUR operation code 663
%UCS2 (Convert to UCS-2
cycle-free module 100 data type
Value) 517
cycle, program allowed for built-in functions 424
%UNS (Convert to Unsigned
detailed description 24 basing pointer 199
Format) 518
fetch overflow logic 29 character 170
%UNSH (Convert to Unsigned Format
general description 21 data mapping errors 212
with Half Adjust) 518
date 193, 246, 269, 279, 291
%XLATE (Translate) 520

data type (continued) date-time operations definition specification keywords
definition specification 286 ADDDUR (add duration) 526 ALIGN 288
graphic 171 EXTRCT (extract date/time) 598 ALT 288
numeric 184 general information 393 ALTSEQ 288
of return value 702 SUBDUR (subtract duration) 726 ASCEND 289
procedure pointer 205 TEST (test BASED 289
supported by binary operations 424 date/time/timestamp) 733 CCSID 290
supported by unary operations 423 TIME (retrieve time and date) CONST 290
supported in expressions 423 operation code 740 continuation line 236
time 196, 255, 317 unexpected results 395 CTDATA 291
timestamp 197 date, user 7 DATFMT 291
UCS-2 172 *DATE, *DAY, *MONTH, *YEAR 7 DESCEND 291
data-area operations UDATE, UDAY, UMONTH, DIM 292
DEFINE (field definition) 566 UYEAR 7 DTAARA 292
general information 392 DATEDIT keyword 245 EXPORT 294
IN (retrieve a data area) 392, 610 DATFMT keyword EXTFLD 294
OUT (write a data area) 392, 672 control specification 246 EXTFMT 295
UNLOCK (unlock a data area) 392, definition specification 291 EXTNAME 295
742 file description specification 269 EXTPGM 296
database data DEALLOC (free storage) operation EXTPROC 296
null values 206 code 401, 564 FROMFILE 300
variable-length fields 177 deallocate storage (DEALLOC) operation IMPORT 301
date data field code 564 INZ 301
DATFMT 269 DEBUG keyword 246 LIKE 303
DATFMT on control specification 246 DECEDIT keyword 246 LIKEDS 304
DATFMT on definition decimal point character 246 LIKEREC 305
specification 291 decimal positions NOOPT 306
effect of end position 216 calculation specifications 342 OCCURS 306
general discussion 193 get with %DECPOS 454 OPDESC 307
moving 405 input specifications OPTIONS 307
unexpected results 395 field description entry for program OVERLAY 313
zero suppression 214 described file 330 PACKEVEN 315
date data format with arithmetic operation codes 380 PERRCD 315
*JOBRUN date separator and declarative operations PREFIX 316
format 194 DEFINE (field definition) 395, 566 PROCPTR 316
*LONGJUL format 194 general information 395 QUALIFIED 129, 316
3-digit year century formats 194 KFLD (define parts of a key) 395, specifying 287
control specification 246 614 STATIC 317
converting to 450 KLIST (define a composite key) 395 TIMFMT 317
definition specification 291 PARM (identify parameters) 395, 673 TOFILE 317
description 193 PLIST (identify a parameter list) 395, VALUE 318
file description specification 269 676 VARYING 318
initialization 195 TAG (tag) 395, 732 definition specifications
input specification 328 DECPREC keyword 247 decimal positions 287
internal format on definition default data formats entry summary by type 318
specification 286 date 194, 246, 291 external description 283
output specification 357 time 196, 255, 317 form type 282
separators 195 timestamp 197 from position 284
table of external formats 195 DEFINE (field definition) operation general 281
table of RPG-defined formats 194 code 395, 566 internal format 286
date-time built-in functions define a composite key (KLIST) operation keyword summary by type 319
%DAYS (Number of Days) 451 code 615 keywords 287
%DIFF (Difference Between Two Date define parts of a key (KFLD) operation name 282
or Time Values) 455 code 614 to position / length 285
%HOURS (Number of Hours) 473 defining a field as a data area 566 type of data structure 283
%MINUTES (Number of defining a field based on attributes 566 type of definition 284
Minutes) 481 defining a file 230 DELETE (delete record) operation
%MONTHS (Number of defining a symbolic name for the code 397, 570
Months) 482 parameter list 676 delete a record
%MSECONDS (Number of defining an alternate collating DELETE (delete record) operation
Microseconds) 483 sequence 182 code 570
%SECONDS (Number of defining indicators 35 output specifications entry (DEL) 349
Seconds) 496 defining like DESCEND keyword 291
%SUBDT (Subset of Date or DEFINE operation 566 descending sequence
Time) 507 LIKE keyword 303 definition specification keyword
%YEARS (Number of Years) 521 subfields 130 ASCEND 291
defining parameters 673
Index 777
descending sequence (continued) double asterisk (**) (continued) else if (ELSEIF) operation code 586
file description specifications file translation table 111 ELSEIF (else if) operation code 411, 586
entry 262 for program described files 324 ENBPFRCOL keyword 248
describe data structures 321 lookahead fields 324 ENBPFRCOL parameter
describing arrays 230 DOUxx (do until) operation code 390, specifying on control
describing tables 230 411, 575 specifications 248
describing the format of fields 347 DOW (do while) operation code 390, end a group (ENDyy) operation
describing the record 347 411, 419, 577 code 587
describing when the record is DOWxx (do while) operation code 390, End Job (ENDJOB) 681
written 347 411, 578 end of file
descriptors, operational DSPLY (display function) operation built-in function 463
minimal 489 code 402, 580 file description specifications
OPDESC keyword 307 DTAARA keyword 292 entry 261
detail (D) output record 349 DUMP (program dump) operation with primary file 48
detailed program logic 24 code 400, 583 end position
DETC dynamic array effect of edit codes on 219
file exception/error subroutine definition of 150 in output record
(INFSR) 80 rules for loading 150 for RPG IV output
flowchart 24 with consecutive elements 152 specifications 356
program exception/errors 83 with scattered elements 151 End Subsystem (ENDSBS) 681
DETL dynamic calls End System (ENDSYS) 681
file exception/error subroutine using CALLP 539 ending a group of operations (CASxx,
(INFSR) 80 DO, DOUxx, DOWxx, IFxx,
flowchart 22 SELECT) 587
program exception/errors 83
device name
E ending a program, without a primary
file 30
EBCDIC
specifying 270 ending a subroutine 589
collating sequence 761
devices ENDMON (end a monitor group)
edit codes
maximum number of 273 operation code 396, 587
combination (1-4, A-D, J-Q) 214
on file description specification 267 ENDSR (end of subroutine) operation
description 214
saving data structure 277 code 414, 589
effect on end position 216
saving indicators 278 return points 80
simple (X, Y, Z) 214
DEVID keyword 270 ENDyy (end a group) operation
summary tables 214, 218
DFTACTGRP keyword 247 code 411, 587
unsigned integer field 216
DFTACTGRP parameter on CRTBNDRPG equal operator (=) 424
user-defined (5-9) 216
specifying on control error handling
using %EDITC 457
specifications 247 major/minor error return codes 79
zero suppression 214
DFTLEHSPEC data area 239 steps 33
edit word
DFTNAM keyword 248 error logic
constant/editword field
DIM keyword 129, 292 error handling routine 33
continuation 237
disconnecting a file from the EVAL (evaluate expression) operation
formatting 220, 224
program 561 code
on output specifications 358
DISK file description 590
parts of 220
processing methods 279 structured programming 411
body 220
program-described use with %SUBST 508
expansion 221
processing 279 with expressions 419
status 221
summary of processing methods 279 EVALR (evaluate expression, right adjust)
rules for 224
display function (DSPLY) operation operation code
using %EDITW 461
code 580 description 592
edit, date 214
Display Module (DSPMOD) command examples of program
editing
copyright information 244 exception/errors 82
built-in functions
Display Program (DSPPGM) command EXCEPT (calculation time output)
%EDITC (Edit Value Using an
copyright information 244 operation code 397, 593
Editcode) 457
Display Service Program (DSPSRVPGM) EXCEPT name
%EDITFLT (Convert to Float
command on output specifications 351
External Representation) 460
copyright information 244 rules for 4
%EDITW (Edit Value Using an
DIV (divide) operation code 380, 571 exception (E) output records 349
Editword) 461
dividing factors 571 exception-handling operations
date fields 214
division operator (/) 424 ENDMON (end a monitor group)
decimal point character 246
DO operation code 411, 572 operation code 396, 587
externally described files 225
DO-group MONITOR (begin a monitor
non-printer files 216
general description 411 group) 396, 627
elements
DOU (do until) operation code 390, 411, ON-ERROR (on-error) 396, 667
number of in array or table 292, 462
419, 574 exception/error codes
number per record 315
double asterisk (**) file status codes 77
size of field or constant 498
alternate collating sequence table 183 program status codes 87
ELSE (else do) operation code 411, 585
arrays and tables 153
else do (ELSE) operation code 585

exception/error handling
built-in functions
external data format
date 269
F
%ERROR (Return Error definition 168 factor 1
Condition) 467 in input specification 328 as search argument 620
%STATUS (Return File or Program specifying using EXTFMT 295 entries for, in calculation
Status) 501 specifying using TIMFMT 317 specification 340
data mapping errors 212 time 279 in arithmetic operation codes 380
file exception/error subroutine 79 external field name factor 2
file information data structure 65 renaming 334 entries for, in calculation
flowchart 33 external message queue (*EXT) 580 specification 341
INFSR 79 external procedure name 296 in arithmetic operation codes 380
program exception/error subroutine external program name 296 feedback built-in functions
(*PSSR) 91 externally described file %EOF (Return End or Beginning of
program status data structure 83 editing 225 File Condition) 463
status codes 77, 87 input specifications for 332 %EQUAL (Return Exact Match
file 77 output specifications for 359 Condition) 465
program 83, 87 record format %ERROR (Return Error
EXFMT (write/then read format) for a subfile 278 Condition) 467
operation code 397, 595 ignoring 272 %FOUND (Return Found
expansion (of an edit word) 221, 224 including 272 Condition) 470
exponent operator (**) 424 renaming 277 %LOOKUPxx (Look Up an Array
EXPORT keyword writing to a display 279 Element) 479
definition specification 294 renaming fields 275 %NULLIND (Query or Set Null
procedure specification 365 externally described files, field Indicator) 484
exported data, defining 294 description and control entries, output %OPEN (Return File Open
exporting a procedure 365 specifications Condition) 486
exporting a program 365 field name 360 %PARMS (Return Number of
expression-using operation codes output indicators 360 Parameters) 489
CALLP (call prototyped externally described files, field %SHTDN (Shut Down) 497
procedure) 419 description entries, input specifications %STATUS (Return File or Program
DOU (do until) 419 control level 334 Status) 501
DOW (do while) 419 external field name 334 %TLOOKUPxx (Look Up a Table
EVAL (evaluate) 419 field indicators 335 Element) 513
EVALR (evaluate, right adjust) 419 field name 334 FEOD (force end of data) operation
FOR (for) 419 general description 333 code 397, 600
general information 419 matching fields 334 fetch overflow
IF (if/then) 419 externally described files, record entry on output specifications 350
RETURN (return) 419 identification and control entries, general description 29, 350
WHEN (when true then select) 419 output specifications logic 29
expressions EXCEPT name 360 relationship with AND line 351
data type of operands 423 logical relationship 359 relationship with OR line 351
general rules 420 output indicators 360 field
intermediate results 427 record addition 360 binary 184
operators 421 record name 359 on output specifications 357
order of evaluation of operands 433 release 360 control 38
precedence rules 421 type 360 defining as data area 568
precision rules 428 externally described files, record defining like 303
EXPROPTS keyword 248 identification entries, input defining new 342
EXSR (invoke subroutine) operation specifications description entries in input
code 414, 597 form type 332 specification 327, 333
EXTBININT keyword general description 333 key 264
and binary fields 185 record identifying indicator 333 key, starting location of 273
description 248 record name 333 location and size in record 329
extended factor 2 field, continuation 236 EXTFILE keyword 270 location in input specification 329
external (U1-U8) indicators EXTFLD keyword 128, 294 lookahead
as field indicator 332, 335 EXTFMT keyword 295 with program described file 324
as field record relation indicator 50, EXTIND keyword 271 match 103
331 EXTMBR keyword 271 name in input specification 330
as record identifying indicator 324, EXTNAME keyword 295 null-capable 206
333 EXTPGM keyword 283, 296, 539 numeric
conditioning calculations 340 EXTPROC keyword 283, 296 on output specifications 353
conditioning output 350 EXTRCT (extract date/time) operation packed 187
general description 47 code 393, 598 record address 264
resetting 47, 332 renaming 275, 277
setting 63 result 342
external data area size of 498
defining 292, 566 standalone 119
zeroing 355, 361
Index 779
field definition (DEFINE) operation file (continued) file description specifications (continued)
code 566 format 262 file designation 259
field indicators (01-99, H1-H9, U1-U8, RT) full procedural 31, 260 file format 262
as halt indicators 45 indexed 267 file name 258
assigning on input specifications input 259 file organization 266
for externally described files 335 maximum number allowed 257 file type 259
for program described files 332 name form type 258
conditioning calculations 340 entry on file description general description 257
conditioning output 350 specifications 258 key field starting location 273
general description 45 entry on input specifications 322 length of key or record address 264
numeric 45 entry on output specifications 348 limits processing 263
rules for assigning 45 externally described 258 maximum number of files
setting of 63 program described 258 allowed 257
field length rules for 4 overflow indicator 274
absolute (positional) notation 131, nonkeyed program described 266 record address type 264
285 normal codes for file status 77 record length 263
arithmetic operation codes 380 number allowed on file description sequence 262
calculation operations 342 specifications 257 file exception/error subroutine (INFSR)
calculation specifications 342 output 259 description 79
compare operation codes 390 primary 259 INFSR keyword 273
input specifications 328 processing 31 return points 80
key 264 record address 260 specifications for 79
length notation 131, 285 rules for conditioning 50 file exception/errors
numeric or alphanumeric 329 secondary 260 file information data structure
record address 264 status codes 77 (INFDS) 65
field location entry (input specifications) table 260 general information 65
for program described file 329 types 259 how to handle subroutine
field name update 259 (INFSR) 79
as result field 342 file conditioning indicators 47 statement specifications 325
external 334 general description 50 file information data structure 65, 66
in an OR relationship 327 specifying with EXTIND 271 contents of file feedback
in input specification 334 file description specification keywords information 66
on output specifications 354 BLOCK 268 contents of file feedback information
rules for 4 COMMIT 269 after POST 68
special words as 354 continuation line 235 continuation line option 268
special words as field name 7 DATFMT 269 entry on file description
field record relation indicators (01-99, DEVID 270 specifications 268
H1-H9, L1-L9, U1-U8) EXTIND 271 general information 133
assigning on input specifications 331 FORMLEN 271 INFDS keyword 273
example 52 FORMOFL 272 predefined subfields 68
general description 50 IGNORE 272 status codes 77
rules for 51 INCLUDE 272 subfields
figurative constants INDDS 272 specifications 132
*ALL’x..’, *ALLX’x1..’, INFDS 273 file operations
*BLANK/*BLANKS, INFSR (file exception/error ACQ (acquire) operation code 397,
*HIVAL/*LOVAL, *ZERO/*ZEROS, subroutine) 273 524
*ON/*OFF 126 KEYLOC 273 CHAIN (random retrieval from a file
rules for 127 MAXDEV 273 based on record number) 397, 548
file OFLIND 274 CLOSE (close files) operation
adding records to 261, 349 PASS 274 code 397, 561
array 260 PGMNAME 274 COMMIT (commit) operation
combined 259 PLIST 275 code 397, 562
conditioning indicators 50 PREFIX 275 DELETE (delete record) operation
deleting existing records from 349 PRTCTL 276 code 397, 570
deleting records from RAFDATA 277 EXCEPT (calculation time output)
DEL 349 RECNO 277 operation code 397, 593
DELETE 570 RENAME 277 EXFMT (write/then read format)
description specifications 257 SAVEDS 277 operation code 397, 595
designation 259 SAVEIND 278 FEOD (force end of data) operation
end of 260 SFILE 278 code 397, 600
exception/error codes 77 SLN 279 FORCE (force a file to be read)
externally described, input TIMFMT 279 operation code 397, 604
specification for 332 USROPN 279 general description 397
feedback information in INFDS 66 file description specifications NEXT (next) operation code 397, 662
feedback information in INFDS after device 267 OPEN (open file for processing)
POST 68 end of file 260 operation code 397, 668
file organization 266 file addition 261 POST (post) operation code 397, 678

file operations (continued) form type (continued) graphic format (continued)
READ (read a record) operation in calculation specification 338 graphic CCSID (continued)
code 397, 680 on control specification 240 on definition specification 290
READC (read next modified record) on description specifications 257 moving 403, 629
operation code 397, 683 program described file 322 size of 498
READE (read equal key) operation format substrings 508
code 397, 685 of file 262 variable length 173
READP (read prior record) operation format, data verifying with CHECK 551, 553
code 397, 688 binary 184 greater than operator (>) 424
READPE (read prior equal) operation definition specification 286 greater than or equal operator (>=) 424
code 397, 690 external 295, 357
REL (release) operation code 397, 694 float 185
ROLBK (roll back) operation
code 397, 705
integer 187
internal 167
H
half adjust
SETGT (set greater than) operation packed-decimal 187
on calculation specifications 340, 344
code 397, 711 specifying external character
operations allowed with 340, 344
SETLL (set lower limits) operation format 169
halt (H1-H9) indicators
code 397, 715 specifying external date or time
as field indicators 332, 335
UNLOCK (unlock a data area) format 169
as field record relation indicator 332
operation code 397, 742 specifying external numeric
as record identifying indicator 324,
UPDATE (modify existing record) format 168
333
operation code 397 unsigned 188
as resulting indicator 343
WRITE (create new records) operation zoned-decimal 189
conditioning calculations 340
code 397, 750 formatting edit words 224
conditioning output 351, 353
file translation 111 FORMLEN keyword 271
FTRANS keyword 250 FORMOFL keyword 272
setting 63
table records 113 FORMSALIGN keyword 250
handling exceptions/errors
first page (1P) indicator free-form syntax 345
built-in functions
conditioning output 351, 354 freeing storage 564
%ERROR (Return Error
general description 48 FROMFILE keyword 300
Condition) 467
restrictions 48 FTRANS keyword 250
%STATUS (Return File or Program
setting 63 **FTRANS 152, 183
Status) 501
first program cycle 21 description 112
data mapping errors 212
FIXNBR keyword 249 full procedural file
file exception/error subroutine 79
FIXNBR parameter description of 260
file information data structure 65
specifying on control file description specifications
flowchart 33
specifications 249 entry 259
INFSR 79
float format file operation codes 397
program exception/error subroutine
alignment of fields 186 search argument keys 399
(*PSSR) 91
considerations for using 190 function key
program status data structure 83
converting to 469 corresponding indicators 52
status codes 77, 87
definition 185 function key indicators (KA-KN, KP-KY)
file 77
displaying as 460 corresponding function keys 53
program 83, 87
external display representation 186 general description 52
heading (H) output records 349
float keys 266 setting 63
heading information for compiler
FLTDIV keyword 249
listing 11
input field specification 185
output field specification 185
float literals 122
G
floating point representation 185, 428
general (01-99) indicators 35
general program logic 21
I
flowchart identifying a parameter list 676
generating a program 230
detailed program logic 24 IF (if/then) operation code 390, 411, 419,
GENLVL keyword 250
fetch-overflow logic 29 607
GENLVL parameter
general program logic 21 IFxx (if/then) operation code 390, 411,
specifying on control
lookahead logic 29 608
specifications 250
match fields logic 29 IGNORE keyword 272
get/set occurrence of data structure 663
RPG IV exception/error handling 33 ILE C
global variables 96, 118
FLTDIV keyword 249 specifying lowercase name 283
GOTO (go to) operation code 385, 605
FOR operation code 411, 601 ILE RPG restrictions, summary 759
graphic format
FORCE (force a file to be read) operation IMPORT keyword 301
as compile-time data 154, 162
code 397, 604 imported data, defining 301
concatenating graphic strings 547
force a certain file to be read on the next IN (retrieve a data area) operation
definition specification 286
cycle (FORCE) operation code 604 code 392, 610
description 171
force end of data (FEOD) operation INCLUDE keyword 272
displaying 582
code 600 INDDS keyword 272
fixed length 171
form type INDENT keyword 250
graphic CCSID
externally described files 332
on control specification 243
Index 781
INDENT parameter indicators (continued) indicators (continued)
specifying on control field record relation record identifying
specifications 250 assigning on input assigning on input
indentation bars in source listing 608 specifications 331 specifications 36
indexed file example 51 conditioning calculations 340
format of keys 267 general description 50 conditioning output 350, 353
key field 273 rules for 51 general description 36
processing 267 file conditioning 50 rules for 36
indicating calculations 337 first page (1P) setting on and off 63
indicating length of overflow line 230 conditioning output 350, 354 summary 62
indicator data structure general description 48 with file operations 36
general information 133 restrictions 48 return (RT) 49
INDDS keyword 272 setting 63 as field indicator 45
indicator-setting operations with initialization subroutine as record identifying
general information 399 (*INZSR) 28 indicator 333
SETOFF (set off) 399, 719 halt (H1-H9) as resulting indicator 46, 342
SETON (set on) 399, 720 as field indicator 45 conditioning calculations 340
indicators as field record relation conditioning output 57
calculation specifications 342 indicator 50, 332 rules for assigning 36
command key (KA-KN, KP-KY) as record identifying indicator 36 rules for assigning resulting
conditioning output 57 as resulting indicator 46, 342 indicators 45
general description 52 conditioning calculations 340 saving for attached device 278
setting 63 conditioning output 350, 353 setting of 63
conditioning calculations 54 general description 53 status
conditioning file open 271 setting 63 program exception/error 83
conditioning output 57 internal 46 summary chart 62
controlling a record 350 first page (1P) 48 used as data 60
controlling fields of a record 353 last record (LR) 48 using 49
general information 49 matching record (MR) 48 when set on and set off 63
specification of 350 return (RT) 49 INFDS keyword 273
control level 339 last record (LR) information operations
control level (L1-L9) as record identifying indicator 36, DUMP (program dump) 400, 583
as field record relation 324, 333 general information 400
indicator 50, 330 as resulting indicator 46, 343 SHTDN (shut down) 400, 721
as record identifying conditioning calculations 339, 340 TIME (retrieve time and date) 400,
indicator 324, 334 conditioning output 350, 353 740
assigning to input fields 330, 334 general description 48 INFSR keyword 273
conditioning calculations 340 setting 63 initialization
conditioning output 350, 353 level zero (L0) inside subprocedures 97
examples 40, 44 calculation specification 54, 338 of arrays 156
general description 37 matching record (MR) of fields with INZ keyword 301
rules for 38, 43 as field record relation overview 120
setting of 63 indicator 50, 332 subroutine (*INZSR) 28
description 35 assigning match fields 103 subroutine with RESET operation
external (U1-U8) conditioning calculations 340 code 695
as field indicator 45 conditioning output 350, 353 initialization operations
as field record relation general description 48 CLEAR (clear) 557
indicator 50, 331 setting 63 general information 400
as record identifying indicator 36 on RPG IV specifications 35 RESET (reset) operation 695
conditioning calculations 340 output initialization subroutine (*INZSR)
conditioning output 350 AND/OR lines 353 and subprocedures 97
general description 47 assigning 350 description 28
resetting 47, 332 examples 58, 59 with RESET operation code 695
rules for resetting 47, 50 general description 58 input
setting 63 restriction in use of negative file 259
field indicators 58, 351 input field
as halt indicators 45 overflow as lookahead field 325
assigning on input assigning on file description decimal positions 330
specifications 332, 335 specifications 274 external name 333
conditioning calculations 340 conditioning calculations 54, 340 format of 328
conditioning output 350 conditioning output 350, 353 location 329
general description 45 fetch overflow logic 29 name of 330
numeric 45 general description 35 RPG IV name of 334
rules for assigning 45 setting of 63 input specifications
setting of 63 with exception lines 351, 593 control level indicators 334
passing or not passing 274 external field name 334
field indicators 335

input specifications (continued) Java (continued) level zero (L0) indicator
location and size of field 329 Object data type 198 calculation specification 338
match fields 334 calculation specifications 54
record identifying indicator 333 LIKE keyword 130, 303
record name 333
RPG IV field name 334
K LIKEDS keyword 304
LIKEREC keyword 305
key field
input specifications for program limits processing, file description
alphanumeric 264
described file specifications 263
for externally described file 265
field line skipping 349
format of 265
decimal positions 330 line spacing 349
graphic 264
format 329 literals
length of 264
name 330 alphanumeric 120
packed 264
filename 322 character 121
starting location of 273
indicators date 122
key lists
control level 330 graphic 123
define composite keys 615
field 329 hexadecimal 121
define parts of a key 614
field record relation 332 indicator format 121
search argument keys 399
record identifying 324 numeric 121
search keys in data structures 475
lookahead field 324 time 122
keyed processing
number of records 323 timestamp 123
indexed file 267
option 324 UCS-2 123
sequential 279
record identification codes 325 local data area 568
specification of keys 265
sequence checking 323 local variable
KEYLOC keyword 273
inserting records during ompilation 12 scope 96, 118
keyword 317
integer arithmetic 382 static storage 317
keywords
integer format locking/unlocking a data area or
ALT 241
alignment of fields 131, 187, 288 record 742
for program status data structure 83
arithmetic operations 382 logic cycle, RPG
*ROUTINE 83
considerations for using 190 detail 24
*STATUS 83
converting to 474 general 21
syntax 232
definition 187 logical relationship
KFLD (define parts of a key) operation
definition specification 286 calculation specifications 339
code 97, 395, 614
editing an unsigned field 225 input specifications 327
KLIST (define a composite key) operation
editing unsigned field 216 output specifications 348, 359
code 97, 395, 615
integer arithmetic 382 long names
name, rules for 4
output specification 357 continuation rules 234, 237
integer portion, quotient 456 definition specifications 282
integer remainder 492 examples 234, 237
intermediate results in expressions 427 L limitations 3
internal data format label, rules for 4 procedure specifications 364
arithmetic operations 382 LANGID keyword 251 look-ahead function 30
default date 246 LANGID parameter lookahead field 324
default formats 168 specifying on control LOOKUP (look up) operation code 383
default time 255 specifications 251 arrays/tables 620
definition 167 last program cycle 21
definition specification 286 last record (LR) indicator
for external subfields 128
internal indicators 46
as record identifying indicator 324,
333
M
M1-M9 (match field values) 104
first page (1P) 48 as resulting indicator 46, 342
main procedure
last record (LR) 48 conditioning calculations
and procedure interface 147
matching record (MR) 48 positions 7 and 8 338, 339
mixing with subprocedures 100
return (RT) 49 positions 9-11 340
scope of parameters 118
INTPREC keyword 251 conditioning output 350, 353
specifications for 229
INVITE DDS keyword 681 general description 48
main source section
invoke subroutine (EXSR) operation in calculation specification 339
description 229
code 597 setting 63
specifications for 230
INZ keyword leading blanks, removing 514, 515
major/minor return codes 79
description 301 LEAVE (leave a structured group)
match fields
ITER (iterate) operation code 385, 411, operation code 385, 411, 617
alternate collating sequence 182
612 LEAVESR (leave subroutine) operation
assigning values (M1-M9) to 104
code 619
description 103
length notation 131, 285
dummy match field 105, 107
J length of form for PRINTER file 271
length, get using %LEN 476
example 105
Java in multi-file processing 103
less than operator (<) 424
%THIS 510 input specifications for 331, 334
less than or equal operator (<=) 424
CLASS keyword 290 logic 29
EXTPROC keyword 296 used for sequence checking 104
Index 783
match levels (M1-M9) 104 move zone operations (continued) NEXT (next) operation code 397, 662
matching record (MR) indicator MLHZO (move low to high NOMAIN keyword 251
as field record relation indicator 50, zone) 408, 625 NOMAIN module 100
332 MLLZO (move low to low zone) 408, main source section 229
assigning match fields 331, 334 626 nonkeyed processing 265
conditioning calculations MOVEA (move array) operation NOOPT keyword
positions 7 and 8 338 code 383, 402, 643 description 306
positions 9-11 340 MOVEL (move left) operation code 402, normal codes
conditioning output 350, 353 650 file status 77
general description 48 moving character, graphic, and numeric program status 87
setting 63 data 403 normal program cycle 21
MAXDEV keyword 273 moving date-time fields 405 NOT
maximum number of devices 273 moving the remainder 661 as a special word 6
maximum number of files allowed 257 moving zones 623 as operator in expressions 423
memory management operations MULT (multiply) operation code 380, not equal operator (<>) 424
ALLOC (allocate storage) operation 660 null value support
code 401, 528 multifile logic 29 ALWNULL(*NO) 212
DEALLOC (free storage) operation multifile processing description 206
code 401, 564 assigning match field values 104 input-only 211
general information 401 FORCE operation code 604 user controlled 207
REALLOC (reallocate storage with logic 29 input 208
new length) operation code 401, match fields 103 keyed operations 209
693 no match fields 103 output 208
message identification 580 normal selection, three files 107, 108 query or set null indicator 484
message operations multiplication operator (*) 424 null-terminated string
DSPLY (display function) 402, 580 multiply (MULT) operation code 660 get or store 504
general information 402 multiplying factors 660 passing 307
MHHZO (move high to high zone) multithread environment 254 number
operation code 408, 623 MVR (move remainder) operation of records for program described
MHLZO (move high to low zone) code 380, 661 files 323
operation code 408, 624 number of devices, maximum 273
mixing main procedures and number of elements
subprocedures 100
MLHZO (move low to high zone)
N defining using DIM 292
determining using %ELEM 462
name(s)
operation code 408, 625 per record 315
array 4
MLLZO (move low to low zone) numeric data type
conditional compile 4
operation code 408, 626 allowed formats 184
data structure 4
modifying an existing record 744 binary 184
EXCEPT 4, 351
module considerations for using 190
field 4
NOMAIN 100, 251 float 185
on input specifications 330, 334
MONITOR (begin a monitor group) integer 187
on output specifications 351
operation code 396, 627 packed-decimal 187
file 4
move array (MOVEA) operation representation 191
for *ROUTINE
code 643 unsigned 188
with program status data
move high to high zone (MHHZO) zoned-decimal 189
structure 83
operation code 623 numeric fields
KLIST 4
move high to low zone (MHLZO) format 167, 189
labels 4
operation code 624 moving 403
PLIST 5
move left (MOVEL) operation code 650 punctuation 213
prototype 5
move low to high zone (MLHZO) resetting to zeros 355
record 5
operation code 625 numeric literals
rules for 4
move low to low zone (MLLZO) considerations for use 121
subfield 4
operation code 626 length of 476
subroutine 5
MOVE operation code 402, 629
symbolic 3
move operations
table 5
MOVE 402, 629
named constant O
defining a value using CONST 290 object data type
MOVEA (move array) 402, 643
definition keyword summary 319 class 290
MOVEL (move left) 402, 650
specifying 125 description 198
move remainder (MVR) operation
named constants 125 internal format on definition
code 661
native method 510 specification 286
move zone operations
negative balance (CR) OCCUR (set/get occurrence of a data
with combination edit code 214 structure) operation code 663
MHHZO (move high to high
nested DO-group OCCURS keyword 306
zone) 408, 623
example 413 OFL
MHLZO (move high to low
nesting /COPY or /INCLUDE file exception/error subroutine
zone) 408, 624
directives 14 (INFSR) 80

OFL (continued)
flowchart 24
output (continued)
specifications (continued)
P
program exception/errors 83 ADD records for externally packed decimal format
OFLIND keyword 274 described files 360 array/table field 187
omitted parameters AND/OR lines for externally converting to 452
prototyped 307 described files 359 definition specification 286
ON-ERROR (on error) operation DEL (delete) records for externally description 187
code 396, 667 described files 360 input field 187
OPDESC keyword 307 detail record for program keys 265
OPEN (open file for processing) described file 349 output field 187
operation code 397, 668 EXCEPT name for externally specifying even number of digits 315
specifications for 668 described files 360 PACKEVEN keyword 188, 315
opening file for processing 668 externally described files 359 page numbering 8
conditional 271 field description control 347 PAGE, PAGE1-PAGE 7 354
OPEN operation code 668 field name 360 parameters
user-controlled 279 file name for program described prototyped parameters 145
OPENOPT keyword 252 file 348 PARM (identify parameters) operation
operation extender 340, 344 for fields of a record 354 code 395, 673
operational descriptors for records 348 calculation specifications 673
minimal 489 general description 347 call operations 385
OPDESC keyword 307 indicators for externally described PASS keyword 274
operations, in calculation files 359 passing parameters
specification 340, 344 record identification and by read-only reference 290
operator precedence rules 421 control 347 number of parameters 489
operators record name for externally with CONST keyword 290
binary 421 described files 359 performance considerations
unary 421 record type for externally arithmetic operations 382
optimization described files 360 PERRCD keyword 315
preventing 306 specification and entry 348 PGMNAME keyword 274
OPTIMIZE keyword 252 output specifications PIP (Program Initialization Parameters)
OPTIMIZE parameter constant/editword field 237 data area 568
specifying on control for program described file DEFINE (field definition) 566
specifications 252 *IN, *INxx, *IN(xx) 355 IN (retrieve a data area) 610
OPTION keyword 252 *PLACE 354 OUT (write a data area) 672
OPTION parameter ADD record 349 UNLOCK (unlock a data area or
specifying on control AND/OR lines for program record) 742
specifications 252 described file 348 UNLOCK (unlock a data area) 742
OPTIONS keyword blank after 355 PLIST (identify a parameter list)
*NOPASS 307 conditioning indicators 350 operation code 97, 395, 676
*OMIT 307 DEL (delete) record 349 *ENTRY PLIST 676
*RIGHTADJ 307 edit codes 355 calculation specifications 676
*STRING 307 end position of field 356 call operations 385
*VARSIZE 307 EXCEPT name 351 for SPECIAL file 275
OR lines exception record for program name, rules for 5
on calculations 340 described file 349 PLIST keyword 275
on input specifications 327 PAGE, PAGE1-PAGE7 354 pointers
on output specifications 348, 359 UDATE 354 basing pointer
order of evaluation UDAY 354 alignment 200
in expressions 433 UMONTH 354 alignment of subfields 131
ORxx operation code 390, 411, 670 UYEAR 354 as result of %ADDR 436
OTHER (otherwise select) operation overflow comparison to *NULL 391
code 411, 671 line, indicating length of 230 creating 289
otherwise select (OTHER) operation overflow indicators data type 199
code 671 assigning on file description example 201
OUT (write a data area) operation specifications 274 problems comparing
code 392, 672 conditioning calculations 54, 340 pointers 391, 722
output conditioning output 350 built-in functions
conditioning indicators 57, 351 fetch overflow logic 29 %ADDR (Get Address of
field general description 35 Variable) 436
format of 359 reset to *OFF 252 %PADDR (Get Procedure
name 354 setting of 63 Address) 487
file 259 with exception lines 351, 585, 586 data type 286
record overlapping control fields 40 pointer arithmetic 201
end position in 356 OVERLAY keyword 131, 313 procedure pointer
specifications overlaying storage in data address of procedure entry
*ALL 361 structures 131, 313 point 487
alignment of subfields 131
data type 205
Index 785
pointers (continued) procedure specification (continued) program described files, record
procedure pointer (continued) form type 364 identification entries, input
example 205 general 363 specifications (continued)
PROCPTR keyword 316 keywords 365 sequence 323
position of record identification name 364 summary tables 322
code 326 procedure specification keywords program device, specifying name 270
positional notation 131, 285 EXPORT 365 program dump (DUMP) operation
POST (post) operation code 397, 678 processing methods code 583
POST (Post) operation code for DISK file 279 program ending, without a primary
contents of file feedback information PROCPTR keyword 316 file 30
after use 68 program program exception/error subroutine
Power Down System status, codes 87 and subprocedures 97
(PWRDWNSYS) 681 status, exception/error codes 87 program exception/errors
power operator 424 program cycle general information
precedence rules of expression defined 21 indicators in positions 73 and
operators 421 detail 24 74 82
precision of expression results detailed description 24 indicators in positions 56 and 57 of
″Result Decimal Position″ fetch overflow logic 29 calculation specifications 65, 82
example 432 general 21 data structure 83
default example 430 general description 21 status information 82
intermediate results 429 programmer control 31 return point entries 80
precision rules 428 with initialization subroutine *CANCL 80, 83
using the ″Result Decimal Position″ (*INZSR) 28 *DETC 80, 83
rules 431 with lookahead 30 *DETL 80, 83
using the default rule 428 with match fields 29 *GETIN 80, 83
predefined conditions 16 with RPG IV exception/error *OFL 80, 83
PREFIX keyword handling 30 *TOTC 80, 83
definition specification 128, 316 program described files, field description *TOTL 80
file description specification 275 and control entries, output blanks 80, 83
prefixing a name to a subfield 128, 316 specifications subroutine 91
prerun-time array or table blank after 355 program generation 239
coding 154 constant or edit word 358 program name
example of 153 data format 357 default 248
input file name 300 edit codes 355 external prototyped name 296
number of elements per record 315 end position 356 for SPECIAL file 274
output file name 317 field name 354 program running 239
rules for loading 155 output indicators 353 program status data structure
specifying external data format 295 program described files, field description *ROUTINE 83
prevent printing over perforation 29 entries, input specifications *STATUS 83
PRFDTA keyword 253 data format 328 contents 83
PRFDTA parameter field location 329 defining 133
specifying on control general description 327 general information 83
specifications 253 program described files, record predefined subfield 83
primary file identification and control entries, status codes 87
ending a program without 30 output specifications subfields
file description specifications 259 EXCEPT name 351 predefined 83
general description 259 fetch overflow/release 350 with OCCUR operation code 663
printer control data structure 276 file name 348 program-described file
PRINTER file logical relationship 348 date-time data format 169
device name 267 output indicators 350 entries on
fetch overflow logic 29 record addition/deletion 349 file description specifications 257
length of form 271 skip after 353 input specifications 321, 322
procedure skip before 353 output specifications 347
address of procedure entry point 487 space after 353 in output specification 348
exported 13 space and skip 352 length of key field 264
external prototyped name 296 space before 353 length of logical record 263
procedure pointer call 298 type 349 numeric data format 168
procedure specification 363 program described files, record record identification entries 322
PROCPTR keyword 316 identification entries, input program/procedure call
procedure interface specifications operational descriptors 387
and main procedure 147 file name 322 prototyped call 386
defining 95, 147, 363 general description 322 programmer control of file
definition keyword summary 320 logical relationship 322 processing 31
definition type entry 284 number 323 programming tips 239, 676
procedure pointer calls 298 option 324 /EOF directive 19
procedure specification record identification codes 325 checking parameter interface 673
begin/end entry 364 record identifying indicator, or ** 324 displaying copyright information 244

programming tips (continued) READC (read next modified record) record identifying indicators (01-99,
exported procedures 13 operation code 397, 683 H1-H9, L1-L9, LR, U1-U8, RT)
improving call performance 83 READE (read equal key) operation assigning on input specifications
nested /COPY or /INCLUDE 14 code 397, 685 for externally described file 332
reducing size of module 100 reading a record 680 for program described file 322
using prototypes 148, 283, 306 specifications for 680 rules for 36
prototype reading next record conditioning calculations 338, 340
and main procedure 147 specifications for 683 conditioning output 350, 353
and subprocedures 93 reading prior record 685 for input specification 333
defining 144 READP (read prior record) operation for program described files 324
definition keyword summary 320 code 397, 688 general description 36
definition type entry 284 READPE (read prior equal) operation setting on and off 63
description 386 code 397, 690 summary 62
prototyped call REALLOC (reallocate storage with new with file operations 36
defining 144 length) operation code 401, 693 record line 348
using call operations 386 reallocate storage (REALLOC) operation record name
prototyped parameters code 693 for externally described input
defining 145 reallocating storage 491, 693 file 333
definition keyword summary 320 RECNO keyword 268, 277 for externally described output
omitting on call 307 record file 359
OPTIONS keyword 307 adding to a file 262, 349 rules for 5
passing *OMIT 307 deleting from a file 349, 570 records, alternate collating sequence
passing string shorter than defined detail (D) 349 table 183
length 307 exception (E) 349 records, file translation table 112
requesting operational with EXCEPT operation code 593 REL (release) operation code 397, 694
descriptors 307 externally described 359 Release (output specifications) 360
VALUE keyword 318 heading (H) 349 release (REL) 694
prototyped program or procedure input specifications release, output specifications 350
as built-in function 376 externally described file 333 remainder, integer 492
calling in an expression 387 program described file 322 removing blanks from a string 514
CALLP (call a prototyped length 263 RENAME keyword 277
procedure) 539 output specifications renaming fields 275
number of passed parameters 489 externally described 359 renaming subfields 128, 294
procedure specification 363 program described 348 requester
prototyped call 386 record line 348 accessing with ID 270
RETURN (return to caller) 702 renaming 277 reserved words
specifying external procedure total (T) 349 *ALL 361
name 296 record address field, length 264 *ALL’x..’ 126
specifying external program record address file *ALLG’oK1K2i’ 126
name 296 description 260 *ALLX’x1..’ 126
PRTCTL (printer control) file description specifications *BLANK/*BLANKS 126
specifying 276 entry 259 *CANCL 24, 80
with space/skip entries 352 format of keys 264 *DATE, *DAY, *MONTH, *YEAR 7
PRTCTL keyword 276 length of record address field 264 *DETC 83
PWRDWNSYS (Power Down RAFDATA keyword 277 *DETL 83
System) 681 RECNO keyword 277 *ENTRY PLIST 673
relative-record number 267 *GETIN 83
restrictions 260 *HIVAL/*LOVAL 126
Q S/36 SORT files 263
sequential-within-limits 263
*IN 60
*IN(xx) 60
QSYSOPR 580
record address type 264 *INIT 83
QUALIFIED keyword 129, 316
record blocking 268 *INxx 60
queues
record format *INZSR 25
*EXT (external message) 580
clearing 557 *LDA 568
QSYSOPR 580
for a subfile 278 *NOKEY 557, 696
quotient, integer portion 456
ignoring 272 *NULL 126
including 272 *OFL 83
renaming 277 *ON/*OFF 126
R resetting 696 *PDA 568
RAFDATA keyword 277 writing to a display 279 *PLACE 354
random retrieval from a file based on record identification codes 325 *ROUTINE 83
record number or key value (CHAIN) for input specification 333 *STATUS 83
operation code 548 record identification entries *TERM 83
RECNO keyword 277 in output specification 348 *TOTC 83
READ (read a record) operation input specifications 322, 333 *TOTL 83
code 397, 680 output specifications 348, 359 *ZERO/*ZEROS 126
INFDS 66
Index 787
reserved words (continued) run-time array (continued) SPECIAL file (continued)
PAGE 354 rules for loading 150 program device name 274
PAGE, PAGE1-PAGE7 8 with consecutive elements 152 special words 7
PAGE1-PAGE7 354 with scattered elements 151 specifications
UDATE, UDAY, UMONTH, common entries to all 232
UYEAR 7 continuation rules 233
RESET operation code 120, 400, 695
reset value 695
S order 229
types 229
S/36 SORT files 263
resetting variables 695 split control field 44
SAA data types
result decimal position 248 SQL statements 337
null value support 206
result field SQRT (square root) operation code 380,
variable-length fields 177
length of 342 724
SAVEDS keyword 277
number of decimal positions 342 SR (subroutine identifier) 339
SAVEIND keyword 278
possible entries, in calculation SRTSEQ keyword 253
SCAN (scan string) operation code 409,
specification 342 SRTSEQ parameter
706
result operations specifying on control
scope
general information 409 specifications 253
*PSSR subroutine 99
resulting indicators (01-99, H1-H9, standalone fields 119, 284
of definitions 96, 118
OA-OG, OV, L1-L9, LR, U1-U8, KA-KN, starting location of key field 273
search argument
KP-KY, RT) static calls
for record address type 265
calculation specifications 342 using CALLP 539
searching within a table 620
general description 46 STATIC keyword 119
searching within an array 620
rules for assigning 46 static storage 119, 317
secondary file
setting of 63 status (of an edit word) 224
file description specifications 260
retrieval of data area status codes
explicit 610 in file information data structure
SELECT (begin a select group) operation
implicit 22, 132 (INFDS) 77
code 411, 709
retrieval of record from full procedural in program status data structure 87
sequence
file 548 string
ascending 262
retrieve a data area (IN) operation checking 446
descending 262
code 610 indexing 706
sequence checking
retrieving randomly (from a file based on null-terminated 307, 504
alternate collating sequence 182
record number of key value) 548 removing blanks 514
on input specifications 322, 323
RETURN (return to caller) operation scanning 495, 706
with match fields 331
code 702 string built-in functions
sequential-within-limits processing
call operations 385 %CHECK (Check Characters) 446
file description specifications
returning a value 96 %CHECKR (Check Reverse) 448
entry 263
with expressions 419 %REPLACE (Replace Character
set bits off (BITOFF) operation code 531
return (RT) indicator String) 493
set bits on (BITON) operation code 533
as field indicator 332, 335 %SCAN (Scan for Characters) 495
set on and set off operation codes 399
as record identifying indicator 324, %STR (Get or Store Null-Terminated
set/get occurrence of data structure 663
333 String) 504
SETGT (set greater than) operation
as resulting indicator 46, 342, 343 %SUBST (Get Substring) 508
code 397, 711
conditioning calculations 340 %TRIM (Trim Blanks at Edges) 514
SETLL (set lower limits) operation
conditioning output 350 %TRIML (Trim Leading Blanks) 515
code 397, 715
general description 49 %TRIMR (Trim Trailing Blanks) 516
SETOFF (set off) operation code 399, 719
setting of 63 string operations
SETON (set on) operation code 399, 720
return point CAT (concatenate two character
SFILE keyword 278
for program exception/error strings) 409, 545
SHTDN (shut down) operation
subroutine 91 CHECK (check) 409, 551
code 400, 721
return value CHECKR (check reverse) 409, 554
shut down (SHTDN) operation code 721
data type 702 general information 409
simple edit codes (X, Y, Z) 214
defining 96 SCAN (scan string) 409, 706
size operations
RETURN (return to caller) 702 SUBST (substring) 409, 729
returning from a called procedure XLATE (translate) 409, 753
skipping
RETURN (return to caller) 702 structured programming operations
after 353
ROLBK (roll back) operation code 397, ANDxx (and) 411, 529
before 353
705 CASxx (conditionally invoke
for printer output 352
roll back (ROLBK) operation code 705 subroutine) 543
SLN keyword 279
RPG logic cycle DO (do) 411, 572
SORTA (sort an array) operation
detail 24 DOU (do until) 411, 574
code 383, 722
general 21 DOUxx (do until) 411, 575
source listing with indentation bars 608
RPGLEHSPEC data area 239 DOW (do while) 411, 577
spacing
rules DOWxx (do while) 411, 578
for printer output 352
for naming objects 3 ELSE (else do) 411, 585, 586
not with WRITE operation 750
run-time array ELSEIF (else if) 411, 586
SPECIAL file
definition of 150 ENDyy (end a group) 411, 587
parameter list 275

structured programming operations subroutines (continued) table (continued)
(continued) comparison with subprocedures 101 to file name 277
EVAL (evaluate) 411, 590 description 414 TAG operation code 385, 395, 732
EVALR (evaluate, right adjust) 592 example 414 TEST (test date/time/timestamp)
FOR (for) 411, 601 file exception/error (INFSR) 79 operation code 393, 417, 733
general information 411 maximum allowed per program 414 test operations
IF (if/then) 411, 607 operation codes 414 general information 417
IFxx (if/then) 411, 608 program exception/error (*PSSR) 91 TEST (test date/time/timestamp)
ITER (iterate) 411, 612 program initialization (*INZSR) 28 operation code 417, 733
LEAVE (leave a structured use within a subprocedure 94 TESTB (test bit) operation code 417,
group) 411, 617 SUBST (substring) operation code 409, 735
ORxx (or) 411, 670 729 TESTN (test numeric) operation
OTHER (otherwise select) 411, 671 substring of character or graphic literal code 417, 737
SELECT (begin a select group) 411, RPG built-in %SUBST 508 TESTZ (test zone) operation
709 SUBST operation 729 code 417, 739
WHEN (when true then select) 411 subtracting date-time durations 393, 726 TESTB (test bit) operation code 417, 735
When (When) 746 subtracting factors 725 TESTB operation code 384
whenxx (when true then select) 747 summary tables TESTN (test numeric) operation
WHxx (when true then select) 411 calculation specifications 337 code 417, 737
SUB (subtract) operation code 380, 725 edit codes 216 TESTZ (test zone) operation code 417,
SUBDUR (subtract duration) operation entry summary by type 318 739
code function key indicators and TEXT keyword 254
calculating durations 393 corresponding function keys 53 TEXT parameter
general discussion 393 ILE RPG built-in functions 377 specifying on control
possible error situations 728 ILE RPG restrictions 759 specifications 254
subtracting dates 393, 726, 727 indicators 62, 63 THREAD keyword 254
unexpected results 395 input specifications 322 TIME (retrieve time and date) operation
subfields keyword summary by definition code 400, 740
defining 284 type 319 time and date built-in functions
external definition 295 operation codes 369 %DAYS (Number of Days) 451
for program status data structure 83 program description record %DIFF (Difference Between Two Date
name prefixing 128, 275, 316 identification entries 322 or Time Values) 455
overlaying storage 313 summing array elements %HOURS (Number of Hours) 473
renaming 128, 294 using %XFOOT built-in 519 %MINUTES (Number of
subfiles using XFOOT operation code 752 Minutes) 481
record format 278 symbolic name %MONTHS (Number of
subprocedures array names 4 Months) 482
calculations coding 97 conditional compile names 4 %MSECONDS (Number of
comparison with subroutines 101 data structure names 4 Microseconds) 483
definition 94 EXCEPT names 4 %SECONDS (Number of
exception/error processing field names 4 Seconds) 496
sequence 98 file names 4 %SUBDT (Subset of Date or
mixing with main procedures 100 KLIST names 4 Time) 507
NOMAIN module 100 labels 4 %YEARS (Number of Years) 521
normal processing sequence 97 PLIST names 5 time data field
number of passed parameters 489 prototype names 5 general discussion 196
procedure interface 95, 147 record names 5 moving 405
procedure specification 363 subfield names 4 TIMFMT 255, 279, 317
RETURN (return to caller) 702 subroutine names 5 unexpected results 395
return values 96 table names 5 time data format
returning from 702 symbolic names 3 *JOBRUN time separator 197
scope of parameters 96, 118 control specification 255
specifications for 229, 231 converting to 511
subroutine identifier (SR) 339
subroutine names 5
T description 196
external format on definition
table
subroutine operations specification 317
defining 163
BEGSR (beginning of file description specification 279
definition 149
subroutine) 414, 530 initialization 197
differences from array 149
CASxx (conditionally invoke input specification 328
element, specifying 163
subroutine) 414, 543 internal format on definition
example of using 164
ENDSR (end of subroutine) 414, 589 specification 286
file 260
EXSR (invoke subroutine) 414, 597 output specification 357
loading 163
general information 414 separators 197
lookup 513
LEAVESR (leave subroutine) 619 table of 196
name, rules for 5
subroutines time out 681
number of elements 292, 462
calculation specifications entry in timestamp data field
size of 498
positions 7 and 8 339 general discussion 197
specifying a table element 163
Index 789
timestamp data field (continued) unsigned integer format (continued) WORKSTN file
unexpected results 395 unsigned arithmetic 382 device name 267
timestamp data format unwanted control breaks 39, 40 WRITE (create new records) operation
converting to 512 UPDATE (modify existing record) code 397, 750
description 197 operation code 397 write/then read format (EXFMT)
initialization 198 description 744 operation code 595
internal format on definition specify fields to update 468 writing a new record to a file 750
specification 286 update file 259 writing records during calculation
output specification 357 updating data area 672 time 593
separators 197 user date special words
TIMFMT keyword format 7
control specification 255
rules 7
user-controlled file open 271, 279
X
XFOOT (summing the elements of an
file description specification 279 user-defined edit codes (5-9) 216
array) operation code 380, 383, 752
TOFILE keyword 317 USROPN keyword 100, 279
XLATE (translate) operation code 409,
total (T) output records 349 USRPRF keyword 256
753
TOTC USRPRF parameter on CRTBNDRPG
flowchart 24 specifying on control
program exception/errors 80 specifications 256
TOTL UYEAR 7 Y
file exception/error subroutine Y edit code 245
(INFSR) 80
flowchart 24 V
program exception/errors 83
trailing blanks, removing 514, 516
valid character set 3 Z
VALUE keyword 318 Z-ADD (zero and add) operation
translate (XLATE) operation code 753
variable code 380, 755
translation table and alternate collating
based 289, 436 Z-SUB (zero and subtract) operation
sequence coding sheet 182
clearing 557 code 380, 756
TRUNCNBR keyword 255
resetting 695 zero (blanking) fields 355, 361
TRUNCNBR parameter
scope 96, 118 zero suppression 214
overflow in expressions 421
variable-length format in body of edit word 222
specifying on control
character with combination edit code 214
specifications 255
description 170, 173 zoned decimal format
type of record, output specification 349
example 174 definition specification 286
rules 174 description 189
database fields 177
U definition specification 286
UCS-2 format graphic
description 172 description 173
fixed length 172 example 175
internal format on definition rules 174
specification 286 input specification 328
UCS-2 CCSID output specification 358
on control specification 243 setting the length 176
on definition specification 290 tips 177
variable length 173 UCS-2
UDATE 7 description 173
UDAY 7 example 174
UDS data area 100 rules 174
UMONTH 7 using 176
unary operations VARYING keyword 318
− 423 VARYING keyword 318
+ 423
data types supported 423
NOT 423
precedence of operators 421
W
WAITRCD 681
UNLOCK (unlock a data area) operation
WHEN (when true then select) operation
code 392, 397, 742
code 390, 411, 419
unsigned arithmetic 382
When (When) operation code 746
unsigned integer format
whenxx (when true then select) operation
alignment 189
code 747
arithmetic operations 382
WHENxx (when true then select)
considerations for using 190
operation code 390
converting to 518
WHxx (when true then select) operation
definition 188
code 411
output specification 357

򔻐򗗠򙳰
Program Number: 5722-WDS
Printed in U.S.A.
SC09-2508-04

RPGLE

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

RPGLE

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

RPGLE

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

򔻐򗗠򙳰

Fifth Edition (August 2002)

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994, 2002 iii

iv ILE RPG Reference

viii ILE RPG Reference

x ILE RPG Reference

This reference covers:

Who Should Use This Reference

Before using this reference, you should

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994, 2002 xi

For a list of related publications, see the “Bibliography” on page 765.

How to Send Your Comments

| What's New This Release?

xii ILE RPG Reference

About This Reference xiii

xiv ILE RPG Reference

| Changes to this Reference Since V5R1

About This Reference xv

xvi ILE RPG Reference

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994, 2002 1

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994, 2002 3

Conditional Compile Names

Conditional compile names can be up to 50 characters long.

Data Structure Names

4 ILE RPG Reference

Note: See “RENAME(Ext_format:Int_format)” on page 277 for information on how

RPG IV Words with Special Functions/Reserved Words

Chapter 1. Symbolic Names and Reserved Words 5

6 ILE RPG Reference

User Date Special Words

(For a description of the job date, see theWork Management manual.)

Rules for User Date

DATEDIT UDATE format *DATE format

If this keyword is not specified, the default is *MDY.

Chapter 1. Symbolic Names and Reserved Words 7

PAGE fields can be specified in positions 30 through 43 of the output specifications

Rules for PAGE, PAGE1-PAGE7

8 ILE RPG Reference

Figure 1. Page Record Description

Figure 2. Resetting the PAGE Fields to Zero

Chapter 1. Symbolic Names and Reserved Words 9

10 ILE RPG Reference

/FREE... /END-FREE (Positions 7-11)

The /FREE compiler directive specifies the beginning of a free-form calculation

/TITLE (Positions 7-12)

/EJECT (Positions 7-12)

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1994, 2002 11

Enter /EJECT in positions 7 through 12 to indicate that subsequent specifications

/SPACE (Positions 7-12)

12 ILE RPG Reference

/COPY members are considered fixed-form by default, even if the /COPY

C/COPY MBR1 1

I/INCLUDE SRCFIL,MBR2 2

O/COPY SRCLIB/SRCFIL,MBR3 3

O/INCLUDE "SRCLIB!"/"SRC>3","MBR¬3" 4

| O/COPY /dir1/dir2/file.rpg 5

Figure 3. Examples of the /COPY and /INCLUDE Compiler Directive Statements

Chapter 2. Compiler Directives 13

Results of the /COPY or /INCLUDE during Compile

Nested /COPY or /INCLUDE